Introduction: Corporate Overview

The HiQnet® protocol is the means by which Harman Professional’s networked devices communicate, linking microphone to speaker. HiQnet systems are configured and controlled with a single software application –HiQnet Audio Architect™ for installed sound,HiQnet Performance Manager™ for performance audio and HiQnet Band Manager™ for portable PA systems. Each of these has been carefully designed to accommodate the specific requirements of each system. Software-controlled HiQnet audio networking solutions include AVB, Harman BLU link, Cirrus CobraNet® and Audinate Dante™, making audio networking as easy as A, B, C, D. What makes dbx the most well-respected dynamics processing company? Besides years AKG’s remarkable microphones and headphones are a synthesis of leading-edge industrial design, innovative electronics and world-class acoustics. AKG is also a technological powerhouse with over 1,500 international patent applications and the largest, best-equipped research and development facilities in the world. For over 60 years, AKG has used its considerable expertise and know-how to develop products that serve markets as diverse as music, recording and broadcast to permanent installation. For its many customers, “it all comes back to the sound” and as long as good sound and long, useful product life are important, they will keep coming back to AKG. Digital Paging, Voice Announcement, Background Music, and Audio Content over Ethernet, at your control, accessible anywhere, anytime, on your schedule. That’s the power of IDX 100. Leverage BSS Audio has amassed an international reputation for providing reliable equipment that addresses the real needs of musicians. BSS’s name can also be found in recording studios and in broadcast studio output. Their products, either live sound systems or fixed installations, are thoroughly researched and tested. The results are powerful, ergonomically packaged equipment. The complete reliability gained through the excellent design and quality assurance is why top performing artists and theatres throughout the world regularly choose BSS Audio systems. Playback the last 60 years of music and motion picture recording and one name stands alone: JBL. Before THX and Dolby, before stereo and even hi-fi, there was JBL. Today, JBL’s well-earned reputation has placed its speakers in all types of professional institutions, including legendary recording studios, famous concert venues and premier movie houses. Throughout those 60 years of technical breakthroughs, award winning existing Ethernet networks and integrate legacy audio systems with scalable hardware components. Add any General Purpose Input/Output device. More than future proof, IDX is the future of networked digital audio systems. of leadership and expertise in the processing field, we have combined our detection and summing methods, known as True RMS Level Detection and True RMS Power Summing, to be “true” to the sounds that are heard by the human ear. dbx has patented integrated circuit designs that can detect and then process natural sounds over a broad range of signals. Wouldn’t all musicians want their voices to be heard at their best? Intelligent Power. Unleased. For 60 years, Crown has designed and manufactured professional power amplifiers, microphones and computer-controlled audio components and software with pride and innovation. Crown products are developed for a wide range of uses, from mobile PA systems for musicians and DJs to large installations in stadiums and arenas. Incorporating the best of proven technologies and state-of-the-art advances, including the latest in integrated, network-controlled audio, Crown continues to be the intelligent choice for professional audio.

Page 2

Table of Contents:
designs and continuing innovations the facts still remain: JBL loudspeakers continue to be the one benchmark for quality, the singular reference for accuracy in the playback of recorded sounds; the leader, the innovator, the authority.
Section: Section:

00 Introduction

Table of Contents Contact Information

2-3 3 4

01 HiQnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Full Line Catalog

Lexicon measures its success by the simple fact that they are the world-wide choice in digital processing by engineers, producers and performers. Their uncompromised integrity has proven to be extremely successful over the years. History was made when our Reverb line was introduced at the 1978 AES Convention. It was considered the first commercially viable digital reverb system. Lexicon’s innovations haven’t stopped since. We continue to forge strategic partnerships that will ensure that our systems are always compatible with our customers’ needs.
Section: Section: Section: Section: Section:

02 AKG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Full Line Catalog

29

03 BSS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Full Line Catalog

04 Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Full Line Catalog

05 dbx 06 IDX

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 . . . . . . . .285

Full Line Catalog

Drawing from a heritage of 40 years in mixing console design and manufacture, Soundcraft has developed a unique insight into professional audio requirements. From live sound to recording and broadcast, Soundcraft mixing consoles are built to perform and are responsible for delivering thousands of events day after day all around the world. With professional features, intuitive operation and uncompromised sound quality, Soundcraft has built a global reputation for delivering optimum performance every time.
Section: Section: Section: Section:

Full Line Catalog

Section:

07 JBL Professional
Full Line Catalog

00

08 Lexicon

. . . . . . . . . . . . .383 . . . . . . . . . . .409

Full Line Catalog

09 Soundcraft

Full Line Catalog

10 Studer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Full Line Catalog

For 65 years, the Studer name has been synonymous in the world of professional audio with innovation, elegant design and unsurpassed excellence in engineering. Today, Studer is acknowledged as the leader is Digital Mixer Technology and offers the widest range of digital broadcast consoles and system components available from any manufacturer.

Section:

11

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Complete Product Listing HiQnet AKG BSS Crown dbx IDX JBL Lexicon Soundcraft Studer 456 456 456 456 457 457 457-458 458 458 458

Page 3

Introduction: Contact Information
HiQnet
8760 South Sandy Parkway, Sandy, Utah 84070, USA, Tel: (801) 566-8800, Fax: (801) 568-7662 For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: hiqnet.harmanpro.com

hiqnet.harmanpro.com

AKG Acoustics
AKG Acoustics, U.S. 8400 Balboa Boulevard. Northridge, CA 91329, U.S.A., Tel: (+1 818) 920-3212, e-mail: akgusa@harman.com For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: www.akg.com

www.akg.com

AKG Acoustics GmbH Lemböckgasse 21-25, A-1230 Vienna/AUSTRIA, Tel: (+43 1) 86 654-0,* www.akg.com, e-mail: sales@akg.com, Hotline: (+43 676) 83200 888, hotline@akg.com

BSS Audio
8760 South Sandy Parkway, Sandy, Utah 84070, USA, Tel: (801) 566-8800, Fax: (801) 568-7662 For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: www.bssaudio.com

www.bssaudio.com

Crown Audio, Inc.
1718 W. Mishawaka Road, Elkhart, IN 46517, USA, Tel: (574) 294-8000, www.crownaudio.com For other products and distributors worldwide, see our website: www.crownaudio.com

www.crownaudio.com

dbx Professional Products
8760 South Sandy Parkway, Sandy, Utah 84070, USA, Tel: (801) 566-8800, Fax: (801) 830-7662 International Fax: (801) 568-7583, web: www.dbxpro.com, www.driverack.com, email: customer@dbxpro.com For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: www.dbxpro.com

www.dbxpro.com

IDX
8760 South Sandy Parkway, Sandy, Utah 84070, USA, Tel: (801) 566-8800, Fax: (801) 568-7662 web: idx.harman.com

idx.harman.com

JBL Professional
8500 Balboa Blvd, Northridge, CA 91329, USA Tel: (818) 894-8850, Domestic Sales Fax: (818) 830-7801, International Sales Fax: (818) 830-7801, Customer Service Fax: (818) 830-7881, web: www.jblpro.com For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: www.jblpro.com

www.jblpro.com

Lexicon
8760 South Sandy Parkway, Sandy, UT 84070, USA, Tel: (801) 566-8800, Fax: (801) 568-7662, web: www.lexicon.com For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: www.lexiconpro.com

www.lexiconpro.com

Soundcraft
Cranborne House, Cranborne Road, Potters Bar, Herts EN6 3JN UK Tel: +44 (0) 1707 665000, Fax: +44 (0) 1707 660742, e-mail: info@soundcraft.com For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: www.soundcraft.com

www.soundcraft.com

Studer Professional Audio GmbH
Althardstrasse 30, CH-8105 Regensdorf-Zurich Switzerland, Tel: +41 44 870 75 11, Fax: +41 870 71 34, e-mail: info@studer.ch For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: www.studer.ch

www.studer.ch

Page 4

audioarchitect
HiQ net

Harman Pro Group | 2013

tm

Section:

01

audio networking as easy as

Page 5

audioarchitect
HiQ net

tm

The original HiQnet vision of 2005 was to create a common control platform for all devices from microphone to speaker. Seven years later, the tally of devices in the HiQnet family exceeds 150 – from wireless microphone hubs, mixing consoles and signal processors, to amplifiers and powered loudspeakers. Several HiQnet software applications exist to provide true system configuration and control, each with feature sets tailored for the specific system application or scenario.

The brand new HiQnet Audio ArchitectTM audio system design and configuration software application retains the revolutionary

Section:

01

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 6

system design philosophy centered on operational workflow first introduced in HiQnet System ArchitectTM, and the use of a diagrammatic representation of the installed or live sound venue. Devices understand both their physical and logical placement - in racks, arrays and rooms - and the software therefore becomes ‘educated’ about how they are to be used in the real-world. Audio Architect can then begin automating many of the laborious system design tasks for free. Control interfaces for control and monitoring of all manner of groups of devices are generated automatically, for example.

In creating Audio Architect, Harman has also incorporated the BSS Audio Soundweb London DSP system backbone within the core functionality of System Architect – combining the power of our proven open-architecture platform with AKG wireless microphones, dbx and Lexicon fixed-architecture processors, Crown amplifiers and JBL powered loudspeakers.

HiQnet Audio Architect now replaces HiQnet System Architect as Harman’s primary installed sound system configuration and control software application. Although modeled on System Architect operation, it is so much more than System Architect version 4, that it demanded a new identity all to itself. HiQnet Audio Architect thereby marks a major milestone in the lifecycle of our ongoing HiQnet software initiative.

It features the widest range of audio devices and audio network transports at your disposal in any single audio system design software interface available today. By bringing together the two worlds of HiQnet System Architect and Soundweb London to create HiQnet Audio Architect, we have created the next stage in the evolution of audio system design software.

Adding open-architecture DSP
One of the fundamental building blocks of the Audio Architect system is the power and flexibility of the distributed DSP network backbone of BSS Audio’s SoundwebTM London family. Launching a Soundweb London device from the main workspace transforms the entire interface into an open-architecture design world. The familiar processing objects can be added to individual devices, and the signal path created with virtual wires.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Considerable care has been taken in implementing Soundweb London configuration and control. The transition from HiQnet London ArchitectTM software has been made as simple as possible, while incorporating the new open-architecture paradigm into the Audio Architect workflow and system design.

Section:

01
Previous users of London Architect will see straight away that when a Soundweb London device is launched from the main Audio Architect workspace, the open-architecture design environment is almost identical. Dedicated workspace modes for configuration of audio processing, logic processing and control port configuration are all directly accessible from the pop-up Soundweb London Ribbon tab.

The BSS Audio Soundweb London family
IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal

Soundweb

TM

BLU-800
signal processor

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

A

B

C

D

Conductor Network link Data activity

LOCATE

BLU-800 : CobraNet-capable signal processor with BLU link
IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal

Soundweb

TM

BLU-320
signal processor

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

A

B

C

D

Conductor Network link Data activity

LOCATE

BLU-320 : CobraNet-capable I/O expander with BLU link
IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal

Soundweb

TM

BLU-160
signal processor

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

LOCATE

A

B

C

D

Data activity

BLU-160 : signal processor with BLU link

IN

OUT DIG

AEC Clip Signal

IN

OUT DIG

AEC Clip Signal

IN

OUT DIG

AEC Clip Signal

IN

OUT DIG

AEC Clip Signal

Soundweb

TM

BLU-120
signal processor

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

LOCATE

A

B

C

D

Data activity

BLU-120 : I/O expander with BLU link BLU-100 : 12x8 signal processor with BLU link

Page 7

Network simplicity
Audio Architect includes the capability to route a wide variety of digital audio network protocols from and to compatible devices system-wide over an Ethernet network with AVB, Cirrus Logic CobraNet® and Audinate DanteTM. Creating added audio routing flexibility within a HiQnet system design, Audio Architect can also be used to route audio amongst devices on a BLU link ring – Harman’s proprietary low-latency, high-channel capacity digital audio bus. This versatility makes audio routing within a HiQnet system as easy as A, B, C, D. It is now possible to move from one networked audio transport to another and stay on the same control platform without needing to learn multiple software applications.
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

AVB
AVB, or Audio / Video Bridging, is the name for a set of IEEE standards to ensure high quality audio and video streaming over Ethernet. What sets AVB apart from other Ethernet audio transports is that the network switches themselves ensure that audio data is given complete priority over any other data on the network. What this means in practice is that without any complex network management, audio is guaranteed to arrive at the destination device with no interruption even possible. Running over a Gigabit network, AVB naturally claims a very low latency and a high audio channel count. The BSS Audio / NETGEAR GS724T AVB-capable Ethernet switch can be loaded into and configured directly from Audio Architect, merging network configuration with audio system design.

01

Harman is a founder member of the AVnu Alliance - an organization dedicated to ensuring AVB compatibilty across the audio and video industries in the professional, consumer and automotive markets. The increasing number of its member manufacturers are working together to make AVB fulfill its promise of becoming a unifying audio and video transport. More information on the AVnu Alliance can be found at www.AVnu.org.

Harman BLU link
While Ethernet-based audio transports lend themselves well to site-wide audio networking, Harman BLU link provides an unprecedented level of audio routing flexibility to today’s system topologies. A complementary high-bandwidth low-latency digital audio bus, BLU link is capable of routing 256 channels of audio directly from device to device within a local rack, or even within an entire rack room. The fault-tolerant BLU link bus is currently compatible with the majority of Soundweb London devices and Crown CTs series amplifiers fitted with a PIP-BLU input module. BLU link offers a distance of 100m between devices over standard CAT5e cable, and the BSS Audio MC-1 fiber optic media converter can be used to increase the distance between devices to over 10km (6.2 miles) using single mode fiber.

Page 8

Cirrus Logic CobraNet®
CobraNet technology, from Cirrus Logic, has long been the pro audio industry’s adopted audio networking solution. Many HiQnet devices are CobraNet compatible and Audio Architect is capable of routing audio between them. CobraNet is based on 100Mb Ethernet, so channel counts are limited in comparison with AVB and Dante. Larger systems will often require managed switch configuration.

Local area Ethernet network

audio
Networked audio (AVB, CobraNet or Dante)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23T

control

HiQnet control
Ethernet AVB Switch
23F
SFP Link/ACT SFP Link/ACT

Networked audio (AVB, CobraNet or Dante)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23T

HiQnet control
Ethernet AVB Switch
23F
SFP Link/ACT SFP Link/ACT

Section:

01

Harman Pro Group | 2013

ProSafe 24 Port 10/100/1000 Mbps Smart Switch
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 Link/ACT

GS724T
24F

ProSafe 24 Port 10/100/1000 Mbps Smart Switch
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 Link/ACT

GS724T
24F

SPD FDX
2 Reset PWR 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22

Green(1000M) Yellow(100M)

SPD FDX
Auto Uplink

Green(1000M) Yellow(100M)

24 Link/ACT

2 Reset PWR

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24 Link/ACT

SPD FDX 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24T

Factory Defaults

SPD FDX 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24T

Factory Defaults

Auto Uplink

Networked audio
IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal

HiQnet control
4
48V

Networked audio
IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal IN OUT DIG AEC Clip Signal

HiQnet control
4
48V

Soundweb

TM

BLU-800
signal processor

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

1

2

3

4
48V

A

B

C

D

Conductor Network link Data activity

LOCATE

Soundweb

TM

BLU-800
signal processor

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

1

2

3

4
48V

A

B

C

D

Conductor Network link Data activity

LOCATE

BLU link digital audio bus

BLU link digital audio bus

IN

OUT DIG

AEC Clip Signal

IN

OUT DIG

AEC Clip Signal

IN

OUT DIG

AEC Clip Signal

IN

OUT DIG

AEC Clip Signal

IN

OUT DIG

AEC Clip Signal

IN

OUT DIG

AEC Clip Signal

IN

OUT DIG

AEC Clip Signal

IN

OUT DIG

AEC Clip Signal

Soundweb

TM

BLU-320
signal processor

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

A

B

C

D

Conductor Network link Data activity

LOCATE

Soundweb

TM

BLU-320
signal processor

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

1

2

3

4
48V

A

B

C

D

Conductor Network link Data activity

LOCATE

CTs 3000

CTs 3000

CTs 3000

CTs 3000

Completion of BLU link ring topology required only for bus redundancy

Audinate DanteTM
Dante is a proprietary audio networking technology from Audinate and employs standard Internet Protocols over 100Mb and / or Gigabit Ethernet. Channel counts can be high over Gigabit Ethernet, although switch management is required for most Dante systems. The Soundweb London BLU-806 and BLU-326 bring Dante capability to the Soundweb London family

Page 9

Flexible control
Kiosk Mode
Kiosk Mode makes HiQnet Audio Architect truly unique and especially valuable for efficient operation by automatically utilizing the exact same design environment, optimized for touch screen control and system monitoring operations. Kiosk Mode is installed as an option with the standard Audio Architect installer, runs from the startup directory as a separate control application, offers a pop-up, context sensitive alpha-numeric keypad and honors all Access Control configuration so multiple user logins are possible. Kiosk Mode simplifies operation and reduces repetitive tasks by reusing the very same venue workspace that was used for system configuration, saving design time and reducing design complexity.

Section:

01

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 10

Kiosk mode can also incorporate customized interfaces created with Audio Architect’s built-in Custom Panel designer.

Custom Panels
Although much of the system control interface creation is automated by Audio Architect, the application still includes a comprehensive Custom Panel design environment for the creation of application-specific control panels. The dedicated mode lays out just the tools you need for the purpose, optimizing the design process and automatically filttering out unnecessary information.

Controls include faders, rotaries, buttons, LEDs, meters, EQ and dynamics graphs, text input and display, images, customizable regions and simple drawing tools - each of which can be fully graphically and operationally customized.

Being launched alongside Audio Architect is HiQnet Motion Control™ – an Apple iOS app which enables customized control interfaces designed in Audio Architect to be exported to iPad, iPhone and iPod Touch devices for mobile system control. Dedicated design templates are available within Audio Architect for the configuration of customized interfaces, which can be used to control devices from BSS Audio, Crown, dbx and JBL.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Any number of control panels designed within the Audio Architect custom panel designer can be loaded onto an iOS device directly from the Audio Architect interface, without the need to connect to Apple iTunes. Navigation between the panels couldn’t be easier - either by the use of swiping gestures or from an automatically-generated bar at the bottom of the iOS display.

Section:

01

Motion Control is the perfect tool for system-specific, day-to-day control, as well as a tool for commissioning engineers to walk the venue with control literally at their fingertips.

HiQnet Motion Control is available from the Apple App Store and will also function with HiQnet System Architect prior to the availability of Audio Architect.

Page 11

HUB 4000 Q [DSR 700, SR 4500, SR 4000, SST 4 via HUB 4000 Q]

Soundweb London BLU-800 – signal processor with CobraNet and BLU link Soundweb London BLU-320 – I/O expander with CobraNet and BLU link Soundweb London BLU-160 – signal processor with BLU link Soundweb London BLU-120 – I/O expander with BLU link Soundweb London BLU-100 – 12x8 signal processor with BLU link

Section:

01

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 12

CDi Series CTs 600, CTs 1200, CTs 2000, CTs 3000 [with PIP-LITE, PIP-BLU, USP3, USP3/CN or USP4/CN installed] MA-2402, MA-5002 [with PIP LITE, USP3 or USP3/CN installed] - discontinued CTs 4200 USP/CN, CTs 8200 USP/CN DSi Series I-Tech Series - discontinued I-Tech HD Series Macro-Tech i Series VRACK 12000 VRACK 4x3500 XTi Series - discontinued XTi 2 Series

DriveRack® 4800 / 4820

VP Series [with DPAN, DPCN or DPDA installed] VerTec® DP Series [with DP-AN, DP-CN or DP-DA installed]

hiqnet.harmanpro.com

performance
HiQ net

manager

Harman Pro Group | 2013

tm

Section:

01

Introducing the next generation audio system configuration software designed to work the way you work

Page 13

HiQnet Performance Manager™
HiQnet Performance Manager is a highly-refined software interface facilitating the specific design requirements of touring and live performance venue sound reinforcement systems. Designed especially for touring and theatrical sound engineering, Performance Manager is an application-specific iteration of HiQnet System Architect™ - the connectivity and control software application for professional-grade audio system integration. Like System Architect, the Performance Manager story began with several common customer impetuses: • The control interface should be the same, regardless of the devices in which the processing is actually taking place. • System design time is increasing, adding additional costs to overall system design • Most system design is repetitive – the same control interfaces have to be customized for all systems • Predictive modeling should drive the system configuration and configure control interfaces automatically in the same software application. • Getting the best sound from your JBL and Crown system should be as simple as possible. In addressing the above, our goal was to conceptualize and implement a new system design software philosophy derived from the system designer’s workflow, which became Performance Manager The key to solving the above issues was to move away from the traditional software approach of filling a blank canvas in the software with the audio system components and considering the system design at a device level. We wanted to consider system design as just that, and configure and control it at the system level. To achieve that, the workflow paradigm of the Performance Manager interface guides you, the system designer, through the complete system design, configuration and control process. In many ways, the entire process feels and acts like a simple step-by-step wizard. The Performance Manager workflow starts with array templates. For each array in a template, the JBL Line Array Calculator II tool can be run, adding the passive or powered speaker models directly to the workspace. The correct quantity of amplifier racks are also added, based on a few configuration parameters. Amplifier channels are associated directly with the bandpass inputs overlaid on the array representations – all amplifier control can therefore be carried out from the arrays. Networking has been reduced to a simple drag and drop. All test, tuning and calibration control interfaces are embedded – no need to spend time designing control panels. Finally, the dedicated show mode provides all the monitoring and control you need to run the show.
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

01

Page 14

Step 1 – Starting from Templates
The workflow begins by loading templates of the speaker arrays used in the system. The templates provide starting points for venue-specific combinations of flown arrays, ground-stacked arrays and distributed fills. Adding a template to the venue workspace is as simple as drag-and-drop. Each template understands how it will be grouped for control later in the system lifecycle. For example, the Left / Center / Right template includes embedded grouping for Left and Right arrays, as well as a group for Left, Center and Right arrays.

Section:

01

Harman Pro Group | 2013

A Left and Right array template loaded into the main Performance Manager workspace

Adding speakers to each of the array template placeholders can be carried out manually, but the next workflow step is the process of adding loudspeakers automatically. This is where Performance Manager really begins to provide its value.

Page 15

Step 2 – Modeling with JBL Line Array Calculator II
JBL’s VerTec® Line Array Calculator II software offers a refined work tool that enables system designers and setup technicians to simulate mixed-model VerTec arrays. This includes the entire range of system options, from the fullsize VT4889 line array element and companion VT4880 arrayable subwoofer, through midsize and compact models, to JBL’s newest additions to the VerTec family, the VT4886 and VT4883 subcompact models. Enhanced acoustical modeling includes color SPL mapping, 0 dB Isobar, and SPL attenuation modes. Frequency response and SPL based on the tonal balance of JBL’s V4 DSP presets can be selected or, alternatively, maximum SPL for rated power at each frequency can be examined. Up to four frequencies can be simultaneously displayed, and up to six frequency response probes can be entered on up to four defined audience planes. Additionally, subwoofer modeling is included. User guidelines are in place for up to 24 enclosures per array.
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

01

The JBL Line Array Calculator tool launched from the array template to populate the array in the main Performance Manager workspace

Line Array Calculator II can be run for each array as part of the initial sound design task of determining how many and which type of loudspeakers are required to cover a given venue. For each array, Performance Manager automatically loads the passive VerTec or powered VerTec DrivePack® DP-DA line array configuration into the main application. The required loudspeaker configuration for arrays grouped within a template will be loaded into both left and right arrays, for example. Line Array Calculator II data is bi-directional so the configuration can be revisited and further edited at any time.

Page 16

Step 3 – Amplifying arrays automatically
Passive loudspeakers within each array can be operated in economy, nominal or high performance mode. All configurations are determined with a vast look-up table provided by the experts at JBL so that Economy Mode configures the array to be powered with the fewest number of amplifier channels, while High Performance Mode will use the greatest number of amplifier channels to give optimum performance.

Section:

01

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Crown VRacks loaded automatically into the main workspace, each amplifier channel associated with the appropriate loudspeaker bandpass input

Once the desired operating mode for passive loudspeakers within the arrays has been defined, Performance Manager automatically loads the correct quantity of Crown Audio VRack or other user-defined racks of I-Tech HD Series, MAi Series or legacy I-Tech Series amplifiers into the workspace. Each amplifier channel is associated with the appropriate bandpass input in the circuit which it is set to power. This link is overlaid over the array so that visual control of the amplifier / passive speaker combination can be driven from the array, linking the focus of control directly with the speaker component producing the audio. As a result, the interface provides a system of control based on the actual loudspeakers deployed in the venue, regardless of how they are powered. Amplifier racks can also be loaded into the workspace and associated with loudspeaker bandpass inputs manually.

Page 17

Step 4 – Configuring speaker tunings

A dedicated workflow mode enables the crossover configurations to be entered for each array. With the crossover point selected, and the information about how the amplifier channels have been associated with the individual bandpass inputs, Performance Manager has enough information to load the correct JBL-provided V4 or V5 loudspeaker preset data into each amplifier, as well as the gain shading and JBL Line Array Control Panel equalization parameters determined previously in Line Array Calculator II to optimize sound pressure level and frequency response over the defined audience geometry.
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

01

Speaker tuning configuration options overlaid over the array to configure the amplifier channels or powered loudspeakers with the correct DSP tuning preset data

Page 18

Step 5 - Going online
The Go Online mode is Performance Manager’s transition between offline configuration and online control. All previous workflow modes have been running Performance Manager offline, all subsequent workflow modes are online to the system.

Matching devices on the network with devices in the Performance Manager workspace with drag-and-drop to assign addressing and send the correct DSP tuning preset data

Section:

01
The Go Online mode dramatically simplifies system network configuration. JBL DrivePack DPDA arrays, Crown amplifier racks and individual devices discovered on the network are listed in a window on the left side of the screen. Selecting a DPDA array in the list will make the LEDs on the back of all the loudspeakers flash – simply drag it onto the array in the Performance Manager workspace, all devices will be synchronized and the array will move from the upper window to the lower window to indicate it’s been connected. The same is true for amplifier racks and individual devices – select it in the networked devices list and all device front panels will flash (or vice versa). Drag from the list onto a rack or a device in the workspace, and all devices will be synchronized and move from the upper window to the lower window to indicate they’ve been connected. The addresses of the devices on the network will update to match those in the workspace and all settings, including speaker preset data will be loaded appropriately, preparing the system immediately for control. This synchronization method significantly reduces networking complexity and simultaneously rethinks the process of manually selecting presets to build a system. Once the device on the network has been matched to the virtual device created by the designer in offline control, all settings are sent down to the amplifier or DrivePack loudspeaker device, leaving it instantly configured for control. When re-connecting to a matched network, the Auto-Match Devices button in the Ribbon will match all the discovered devices instantly.

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 19

Step 6 - Creating and editing array, circuit and bandpass input groups

The Performance Manager Array Templates contain a certain amount of grouping information automatically – left and right flown arrays are grouped within a Factory Group, as are the circuits and bandpass inputs within them, for example. The Edit Groups mode enables far more comprehensive grouping. Groups of any combination of array bandpass input can be created, edited, renamed, duplicated and deleted in a very stylus-friendly manner with a popup alphanumeric keypad to assist with naming. Although grouping is driven from the loudspeaker bandpass inputs, behind-the-scenes Performance Manager is grouping the amplifier channels associated with each passive loudspeaker bandpass input or the powered loudspeaker, keeping the configuration interface identical, regardless of loudspeaker / amplifier combination.
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

01

User-defined groups of amplifier channels or powered loudspeakers configured by selecting the appropriate array bandpass inputs and naming with a pop-up keypad

Page 20

Step 7 – Selecting input sources

Section:

01
The primary and backup input sources are set for amplifier channels or powered loudspeakers with the appropriate options overlaid over the arrays

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Just as speaker presets are configured with the amplifier or powered loudspeaker options overlaid over the arrays, amplifier and powered loudspeaker inputs are also directly selected from controls placed on top of the array representations. In the Select Input Sources mode, controls for the Primary input, Backup input 1 and Backup input 2 are selected for each array, setting the input priorities for powered loudspeakers or the amplifier channels connected to passive loudspeakers alike.

Page 21

Step 8 – Testing the system

The Test System mode provides a mute matrix for the entire system, the array bandpass input overlays being replaced with mute buttons. Bandpass inputs, whether of powered loudspeakers or passive loudspeakers powered by amplifiers, can be directly muted and unmuted from this single interface. Noise generator controls tied to all amplifiers or powered loudspeakers are located on the left-hand side of the screen, enabling control of noise type, level and on / off state. The mute controls within the mute matrix itself can be set to operate either with only a single bandpass
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

unmuted at any one time – a solo state – or with multiple bandpasses unmuted for checking phase relationships. Subwoofers may have their polarity inverted, and overlaid within each of the bandpass mute buttons is the measured impedance ensuring you have all the test functions and information directly available on a single screen.

01

The system is tested with a mute matrix overlaid over the array representations, controlling the connected amplifier channels or powered loudspeakers from the same interface

Page 22

Step 9 – Calibrating arrays
The Calibrate Arrays mode offers a Group Array Tapering sub-mode, providing a common interface to control input EQ processing for array size compensation, low frequency directivity tapering, atmospheric absorption compensation, high frequency throw distance compensation and two parametric EQ filters for custom use.

Section:

Arrays and circuits calibrated with predetermined filters, data derived from the original Line Array Calculator prediction

01

Harman Pro Group | 2013

The Calibrate Arrays mode also provides an Array Shading sub-mode which displays spinner controls for individual circuit bandpass gain directly on the array interface. The parameter values of both sub-modes tie back into any original array coverage prediction carried out with the JBL Line Array Calculator II in the Add Speakers mode.

Array shading configured with spinner controls overlaid over each circuit within the array, automatically set to control connected amplifier channels or powered loudspeakers

Page 23

Step 10 – Tuning the system
Once the arrays have been optimized for proper response in Calibrate Arrays mode, the Tune System mode offers three similar control interfaces for tuning the system in the environment it will be deployed in. A Group EQ submode presents the input EQ from amplifiers or powered loudspeakers for room tuning and system equalization.

Section:

01
EQ and bandpass gain / metering panel available for EQ groups and mapped automatically to the connected amplifier channels or powered loudspeakers

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Delay and Bandpass Gain sub-modes display spinner controls for array and subwoofer delay and bandpass gain, respectively, directly on the array interface.

Bandpass gain represented directly on the array in the main workspace

Page 24

Step 11 - Running the show
The final step in the workflow is the Run Show mode. Here, the bandpass input overlay blocks provide real-time system monitoring of peak, RMS or gain reduction output meters and peak or RMS input meters, plus load monitoring, amplifier thermal headroom and AC levels. The Delay and Group EQ control interfaces of the Tune System mode are accessible but with reduced control ballistics that are more suitable for use during the event itself. A limiter sub-mode is also available in which spinner controls are again displayed directly on the array interface. With access to all configuration mode controls removed in the Run Show mode, and having only the necessary show monitoring and control features present, Performance Manager is the only system configuration and control application
Harman Pro Group | 2013

you’ll need from start to finish.

Input,output or gain reduction metering for amplifier channels or powered loudspeakers overlaid over the arrays in the workspace

Section:

01

Health monitoring for the complete amplifier or powered loudspeaker system

Page 25

Additional features
dbx DriveRack
The dbx DriveRack 4800 and 4820 loudspeaker processor devices are also included within Performance Manager for functions such as a global front-of-house EQ or monitor processing, and can be included in the Venue workspace in the Add Processors workflow mode.

Custom Rack builder
A Rack Builder tool enables a mechanism for creating user-defined amplifier racks of up to eight I-Tech HD, MacroTech i Series, legacy I-Tech Series amplifiers. Bandpass inputs can be defined for each channel to accommodate custom amplifier rack wiring. With the understanding of the bandpass wiring configuration of a custom amplifier rack, Performance Manager is able to employ these custom amplifier racks within the system configuration workflow just as easily as it can the Crown VRack. Just as with VRacks, custom racks may be loaded into the venue and their outputs assigned to loudspeaker bandpass inputs automatically with the Amplify Selection tool, or may be loaded and outputs assigned manually for an extra level of control. Once created, custom racks can be exported as individual files and shared with other users on different Performance Manager configuration and control computers.
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

01

The rack builder tool enabling configuration of amplifier racks and custom wiring

Page 26

Custom Speaker Designer
In a similar way to the custom amplifier Rack Builder, a Speaker Designer tool is included as a mechanism for creating user-defined loudspeakers. A custom speaker can firstly be configured to be a 1-way, 2-way (bi-amped), 3-way (triamped) or 4-way (quad-amped) device, and for each band, an existing HiQnet Performance Manager or even parent application HiQnet System Architect amplifier preset file can be elected from which Performance Manager can derive the correct DSP settings for driving the speaker correctly. With this tool, monitor loudspeakers can be loaded into the venue workspace for example, amplified by the Crown VRack or even amplifier racks created with the custom Rack Builder tool, and have the correct DSP preset data loaded into the amplifier channel automatically.
Harman Pro Group | 2013

Once created, custom loudspeakers can also be exported as individual files and shared with other users on different Performance Manager configuration and control computers.

Section:

01

The speaker builder tool enabling customization of loudspeakers and configuration of appropriate preset data for each bandpass input

The abilities to design customizable amplifier racks and loudspeakers combine to make Performance Manager a far more versatile application than one which simply employs standard speaker and amplifier rack models.

Page 27

JBL VerTec® Series

the latest generation of high-powered, lightweight Differential Drive® transducers, coupled with JBL’s proven line array technologies is at the core of VerTec

JBL VerTec® DP - DA Series

powered line arrays with superb audio quality, robust Crown amplification and integral dbx digital signal processing with networked control, and AES digital audio

JBL VTX® Series
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

Next generation line array system solutions with Cardioid-Arrayable Subwoofers, revolutionary D2 dual diaphram, dual voice coil compression driver, patented RBI Radiation Boundary Integrator and laser accurate setup.

Crown I-Tech HD Series

Class I touring amplifier with networked audio and a new DSP engine co-developed with BSS Audio, including Linear Phase FIR filters and LevelMax™ limiters

01 02

Crown VRack

three Crown I-Tech 12000HD amplifiers in an easy-to-configure, plug-and-play amplifier rack solution, featuring a flexible input panel with AES, analog, and network inputs, worldwide power distribution system, and an output panel optimized for use with JBL VerTec loudspeaker systems

Crown Macro-Tech i Series

ruggedly-constructed Class I amplifiers built to withstand years of abuse on the road, while continuing the Macro-Tech legacy of unparalleled sonic accuracy and detail

Crown I-Tech Series (legacy)

amazing power and ease of use with onboard DSP designed for touring sound and installed sound applications

dbx DriveRack 4800 / 4820

system processors designed to produce the utmost in sonic fidelity and intuitive control for performance and fixed installation applications

harmanpro.com

Page 28

Professional audio Catalog

Full line /Spring 2013

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Page 29

Harman Pro Group | 2013

02

Section:

Page 30

AKG – sound As it should be
For more than 65 years AKG has built an unrivaled reputation for the quality of its sound equipment amongst the most critical audience of all – musicians, sound engineers and music aficionados. That commitment to quality can be seen in every product we produce. We are also constantly challenging our research and development teams to find new ways of improving our existing products as well as develop new and exciting products that meet and exceed our quality standards. The results can be seen in this catalogue with products like the PR4500 ENG System, the launch of the AKG D12VR - the latest version of the legendary D12 or the new “AKG by TIËSTO”-headphone series as well as new developments in the wireless category. As we expand our range we will attract new customers to the AKG community and when they have experienced the quality and performance of our products will stay with us for years to come. Our brand promise will always remain the same “the best sound quality and most reliable equipment, born out of our passion for music”.
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

02

Enjoy sound reproduction as it should be - AKG

Jürgen Bopst General Manager, AKG Acoustics GmbH

Page 31

AlphAbeticAl index
A A AB4000 ___________ 99 AB4000 AKG SYSTEM AKG SyStem ArARCHITECT PLUGIN ___ 100 chitect pluGin ASU4000 __________ 99 ASu4000 B B18 _______________ 173 B29 L _____________ 173 l B48 l _____________ 173 L BBB DFive ________ 63 Blue line C C C1000 S ___________ 55 c1000 ____________ 34 C12 VRS c12 vr C2000 ____________ 55 c2000 C214 ______________ 37 c214 C214 ______________ 39 c3000 C3000 ____________ 54 c391 B C391 B ____________ 45 c4000 C4000 ____________ 54 c411 C411 ______________ 69 c414 Xlii C414 XL II _________ 39 c414 XlS C414 XLII __________ 37 c417 C414 XLS _________ 36 c430 C414 XLS _________ 39 c4500 Bc C417 ______________ 151 c451 B C430______________ 69 c480 B comBo C4500 BC _________ 50 c480 B ulS C451 B ____________ 35 c5 Wl1 c5 C451 B ____________ 38 c516 ml C480 B COMBO ___ 41 c518 C480 B ULS _______ 40 c519 C5 ________________ 62 c520 C5 WL1 ___________ 82 c535 eB C516 ML __________ 71 c535 Wl1 C518 ______________ 71 c544 l C519 ______________ 70 c547 Bl C520 ______________ 64 c555 C535 EB __________ 60 c562 cm C535 WL1 _________ 82 c568 B C544 L ____________ 67 c747 v11 C544 L ____________ 149 cBl410 pcc C547 BL___________ 140 cBl99 C555 L ____________ 67 cc519 C562 CMStS cGn321 __________ 146 C568 B ____________ 49 cGn521 StS C747 V11 __________ 48 cGn99 c CBL410h cGn99 PCC ______ 144 CBL99 ____________ 145 chm99 CC519 ____________ 171 cK31 CGN321 STS ______ 138 cK32 CGN521 STS ______ 139 cK33 cK41 CGN99 C __________ 136 cK43 CGN99 H __________ 137 cK47 CHM99 ___________ 137 cK49 CK31 _____________ 131 cK61 _____________ 131 CK32 ulS cK62 _____________ 130 CK33 ulS CK41______________ 125 CK43 _____________ 125 CK47 _____________ 132 cK63 ulS CK49 _____________ 124 cK69 ulS CK61 ULS cK77 Wr _________ 41 CK62 cK80 ULS _________ 42 CK63 cK91 ULS _________ 42 CK69 cK92 ULS _________ 43 CK69 cK93 ULS _________ 49 CK77 cK94 WR _________ 150 CK80 cK97 _____________ 132 CK91 cK98 _____________ 45 CK92 cK99 l_____________ 46 CK93 cm311_____________ 46 compAct 99er CK94 _____________ 47 SerieS_____________ 150 CK97 cS3 Bu CK98 _____________ 47 cS3 cu CK98 _____________ 49 cS3 Du ____________ 151 CK99 L cS5 Bu ____________ 65 CM311 cS5 cu50 CS3_______________ 164 cS5 ACCESSORIES ___ 167 Du CS3 cS5 irr7___________ 165 CS3 BU cS5 irt ___________ 166 CS3 CU cS5 iu CS3 DU ___________ 166 cS5 vu CS5_______________ 156 cu4000 CS5 ACCESSORIES ___ 163 cu400 CS5 BU cu700 ___________ 158 CS5 CU50 _________ 161 CS5 DU ___________ 158 D CS5 D112 IRR7 _________ 160 CS5 IRT D12 vr ___________ 160 CS5 D230 IU ____________ 159 CS5 D40 SOFTWARE ______ 162 D44 S ___________ 159 CS5 VU D5 Wl1 ____________ 103 CU400 D5 CU4000 ___________ 102 D55 S ____________ 102 CU700 D58 e D7 Wl1 D D7 ______________ 69 D112 D770VR ____________ 68 D12 D88 S______________ 51 D230 DAm _______________ 68 D40 DAm+ D44 S _____________ 77 DGn99 D5 ________________ 62 Dht700 v2 D5 WL1 ___________ 83 Dht70 D55 S _____________ 77 Dmm12 D58 E Dmm6 _____________ 153 D7 ________________ 61 DmS70 SetS D7 WL1 ___________ 83 Dpt700 v2 D770 ______________ 63 Dpt70 D88 S _____________ 76 Drum Set BiG ii DGN99 ____________ 153 DSr70 QuAttro DHT70 v2 DSr700____________ 105 DHT700 DSt99 S v2 ________ 79 DMM12 ___________ 154 F DMM6 ____________ 155 FloorpAD DMS70 ____________ 104 AntennA DMS70 SETS ______ 106 DMS700 v2 ________ 78 DPT70 ____________ 105 DPT700 v2 ________ 79

GDRUM SET BIG II __ 72

DSR70 ____________ 104 Gn e DSR700 Gn e5 pinv2 ________ 78 DST99 Gn eSp S __________ 152

Section:

02

Gn m F Gn FLOORPAD Gn155 m ANTENNA _ 96 Gn155 Set G GnS36 GN________________ 134 Groove pAcK GN E ______________ 134 HGN E5 PIN _________ 135 h30 ESP ___________ 135 GN h40/1 _____________ 126 GN M h41 GN155 M __________ 127 h47 GN155 SET ________ 133 h500 GNS36 ____________ 171 h50 GROOVE PACK ____ 73 h600 _______________ 171 H30 h85 H40/1 _____________ 171 hc577 l H41 _______________ 171 helicAl H47 _______________ 171 AntennA H50 _______________ 171 hm1000 m H500______________ 171 hm1000 H600______________ 171 hSc171 H85 _______________ 171 hSc271 HC577 hSD171 L __________ 66 HC577 hSD271 L __________ 148 HELICAL ANTENNA ___ 97 ht40 mini HM1000 ht4500 ___________ 133 HM1000 M ________ 127 ht45 HSC171 ___________ 52 ht470 HSC271 Q huB4000 ___________ 52 HSD171 ___________ 53 I HSD271 ___________ 53 ip2 HT40 MINI _________ 113 HT45 ______________ 109 K HT4500 ___________ 81 K121 HT470 _____________ 89 K141 mKii HUB4000 Q _______ 100 K167 tiËSto K171 mKii I K20 IP2 mKii K240 _______________ 93 IVM4500 IEM K240 StuDio ______ 92 K267 tiËSto K K271 mKii K121 ______________ 122 K44 perception K141 MKII K67 tiËSto _________ 122 K167 K702 Tiesto________ 117 K171 MKII _________ 120 K77 perception K99 perception K20 _______________ 161 K240 MKII _________ 121 MK240 Studio _______ 121 mB3 Tiesto _______ 116 K267 mB4 MKII _________ 119 K271 mF m _______________ 123 K44 mF-DA k67 Tiesto _________ 117 mK pS K702 ______________ 118 mK150 m K77 _______________ 123 mK150 ml K99 _______________ 123

M mKA20 MB3 ______________ 143 mKA5 MB4 mKG l ______________ 144 MF M mpA v l _____________ 129 MF M mSh70 _____________ 172 MF-DA ____________ 171 P MK 150 M _________ 173 MK 150 p120 uSBML ________ 173 MK p120 PS ____________ 173 p170 Stereo Set MKA20____________ 173 p170 MKA5 _____________ 173 p2 MKG L ____________ 173 p220 V L ___________ 173 MPA p3 S MSH70 ____________ 171 p4 p420 P p5 P120 ______________ 59 p820 tuBe _________ 59 P120 USB pAe m ______________ 58 P170 pAe5 m P170 Stereo Set ___ 58 pAeSp m P2 ________________ 75 pcc130 P220 ______________ 57 pcc160 P3 S ______________ 75 pcc170 P4 ________________ 74 perception P420 ______________ 57 WireleSS SetS P5 pF80 ________________ 74 P820 enG ________ 56 pr4500TUBESet PAE M ht / pt ____________ 128 PAE5 enG pr4500 M ___________ 128 PAESP M__________ 128 pS3 F-locK PCC130 pS4000 W ___________ 142 PCC160 pSu4000 ___________ 140 pt40 mini ___________ 142 PCC170 pt4500 PERCEPTION WIRELESS pt45 ______________ 110 45 Set pt470 ______________ 169 PF80 pZm10 PR4500 ENG ______ 86 pZm11 ll ENG Sets _ 87 PR4500 Wr pZm11F-LOCK_______ 172 PS3 pZm185 W _________ 98 PS4000 pZm30 D __________ 103 PSU4000 pZm6 DMINI _________ 113 PT40 R PT45 ______________ 109 PT4500 ___________ 81 rA4000 B/W PT470 _____________ 89 rA4000 W PZM10 pAcK rhythm ____________ 146 PZM11 ____________ 147 S PZM11 LL WR _____ 147 PZM185 ___________ 143 SA44 SA47 PZM30 D __________ 141 SA60 D ___________ 141 PZM6 SA61 RA4000 B/W ______ 95 SA63 RA4000 W_________ 95 Se300 B RHYTHM PACK ____ 73 ShZ80 SounD S GrABBer ii SA44______________ 172 Spr4500 iem SA47 ______________ 172 Sr40 mini SA60______________ 172 SA61 ______________ 172 SA63______________ 172

SE300 B __________ 44 Sr4500 SHZ80 ____________ 172 Sr45 SOUND Sr470 GRABBER II ___ 145 SPR4500 SrA2 B/W IEM______ 93 SR40 SrA2 W MINI ________ 112 SR45 iem SSt4500 _____________ 108 SR4500 ___________ 80 St1 SR470 ____________ 88 St305 SRA2 B/W ________ 94 St45 SRA2 W ___________ 94 St46 SST4500 IEM ______ 92 St6 ST1 _______________ 172 U ST305_____________ 172 ulS ST45 ______________ 172 uWA9 m ST46 ______________ 172 ST6 _______________ 129 V STS DAM+ ________ 129 vm2

Harman Pro Group | 2013

WU

UWA9 W1000 M __________ 129 UWA9 M __________ 173 W23 W30 V W3001 VM2 W3004 ______________ 101 W40 m W W4000 W407 W1000 ____________ 170 W414 ______________ 169 W23 W44 W30 ______________ 169 W444 W3001 ____________ 170 W48 W3004 ____________ 170 W49 M ____________ 129 W40 W547 M ____________ 170 W40 W68 W4000 ____________ 170 W70 W407 _____________ 170 W77 m _____________ 170 W414 W77 mp W44 ______________ 169 W77 Set W444 _____________ 170 W77 W48 ______________ 169 W880 W49 ______________ 169 W90 W547 _____________ 170 W98 W68 ______________ 169 WireleSS W70 App iphone ______________ 169 W77 mini WmS40 ______________ 169 W77 SetS M ____________ 169 W77 P SetS WmS4500____________ 169 W77 SET __________ 169 WmS470 SetS W880 _____________ 170 Z W90 ______________ 170 ZApD 21 W98 ______________ 170
WIRELESS IPHONE APP_________ 101

WMS40 MINI _______ 112 WMS40 MINI SETS __ 114 WMS4500 _________ 80 WMS4500 Sets ____ 84 WMS470 __________ 88 WMS470 Sets _____ 90 Z ZAPD 21 __________ 98

Page 32

cAtAlog content

recording Microphones
REFERENCE RECORDING reFerence recorDinG MICROPHONES _________________34 microphoneS _________________ X MODULAR RECORDING moDulAr recorDinG MICROPHONES _________________40 microphoneS _________________ X HEADSETS & BROADCAST heADSetS & BroADcASt MICROPHONES _________________47 microphoneS _________________ X
project StuDio PROJECT STUDIO microphoneS _________________ X MICROPHONES _________________54 perception StuDio PERCEPTION STUDIO microphoneS _________________ X MICROPHONES _________________56

live Microphones
HANDHELD VOCAL hAnDhelD vocAl MICROPHONES _________________60 microphoneS _________________ X HEAD-WORN VOCAL heAD-Worn vocAl MICROPHONES _________________64 microphoneS _________________ X INSTRUMENT inStrument MICROPHONES _________________68 microphoneS _________________ X
micromicS ____________________ X MICROMICS ____________________70 microphone pAcKS ___________72 MICROPHONE PACKS____________ X perception live PERCEPTION LIVE microphoneS _________________ X MICROPHONES _________________74 ccS microphoneS ____________76 CCS MICROPHONES_____________ X

Wireless systeMs
MULTICHANNEL WIRELESS multichAnnel WireleSS SYSTEMS_______________________78 SyStemS_______________________ X ANTENNA SyStemS _____________ X AntennA SYSTEMS _____________94 NETWORK SyStemS ____________ X netWorK SYSTEMS ____________100 CHARGING unitS _______________ X chArGinG UNITS _______________102 PLUG‘N‘PLAY pluG‘n‘plAy WIRELESS SyStemS ____________ X WireleSS SYSTEMS ____________104

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

heAdphones
PROFESSIONAL HEADPHONES ___116 proFeSSionAl heADphoneS ___ X

instAlled sound
GOOSENECK GooSenecK MICROPHONES _________________126 microphoneS _________________ X BOUNDARY LAYER BounDAry lAyer MICROPHONES _________________140 microphoneS _________________ X HEAD-WORN AND lAvAlier heAD-Worn AnD LAVALIER microphoneS _________________ X MICROPHONES _________________148
pAGinG microphoneS _________ X PAGING MICROPHONES _________152 AutomAtic AUTOMATIC microphone miXer ____________ X MICROPHONE MIXER ____________154 conFerence CONFERENCE SyStemS_______________________ X SYSTEMS_______________________156

Accessories
WINDSCREENS _________________ X WinDScreenS _________________169 STANDS & SUPPORTS ___________ X StAnDS & SupportS ___________171 POWERING ADApterS poWerinG ADAPTERS & CABLES ______________________173 & cABleS ______________________ X

Symbols for Polar Patterns
Omnidirectional Hemispherical Cardioid Wide cardioid Supercardioid Hypercardioid Figure-eight

Page 33

C12 vr
RefeRence multipatteRn tube condenseR micRophone

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 34

the holy grail of microphones

Legendary tube sound for lead vocals, brass instruments and electric guitars the c12 vr is the reference multipattern tube studio condenser microphone with nine polar patterns selectable by a remote control. Among sound engineers, the AKG c12 is considered the holy grail of microphones. this legendary microphone, first built in the 1950s, is one of the most famous tube microphones in history, and its successor is today’s c12 vr. the c12 vr is an enhanced version of the original c12, from the capsule sound to the original 6072A vacuum tube carefully handcrafted in vienna, Austria.

The legendary AKG sound used on dozens of number-1-hits an enhanced version of the highly sought-after AKG c12 built 1953-1960 Edge-terminated CK12 capsule and original 6072A vacuum tube provide a sound that is simply beyond words Selected state-of-the-art components ensure low noise and reliable operation Nine remotely selectable polar patterns for maximum flexibility and ease of use Carefully handcrafted in Vienna, Austria meticulous attention to detail ensures highest quality

Included accessories: h15 t Shockmount, mK tube cable, n12 vr power supply, W42 Windscreen

Item Number: c12 vr    2221Z00040

C451 b
RefeRence small-diaphRagm condenseR micRophone
Harman Pro Group | 2013

one for the road

for drums, percussion, acoustic guitar and strings the c451 B is a small-diaphragm condenser microphone with the identical acoustical behavior of its predecessor, the legendary c451 eB + cK1 capsule, which was a bestseller right from the start in 1969. With its airy sound, high overload limit and improved engineering details, the c451 B continues the success story of this legend. the roadworthy design around the handcrafted capsule and the low-noise preamp electronics ensure impressive results even under very harsh conditions.

RefeRence RecoRding MicRophones

Section:

02

Sound of the legendary C451 EB + CK1 capsule from 1969 delivers stunning sound quality with maximum accuracy Established tour sound standard since the 1980s for excellent sound quality even under harsh on-stage conditions Impressive sound pressure level capability of 155dB SPL allows close-miking of high-energy sound sources without distortion Highly effective high-pass filter with 12dB/octave prevents low-end distortion caused by rumble or wind noise Transformerless preamp and surface mount technology provides extremely low distortion, highest reliability and less weight

Included accessories: W90 Windscreen, SA60 Stand adapter, microphone bag

Item Number: c451 B    2895Z00010

Page 35

C414 series
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

RefeRence condenseR micRophones

one legendary name two legendary sounds
from lead vocals to every instrument in studio and on stage, the most versatile microphone ever

C414 xls
RefeRence multipatteRn condenseR micRophone

the c414 family has been one of the world’s most widely used and respected studio and stage microphones. AKG continuously sets new benchmarks for features and technical specifications, responding to requests from ever-demanding recording studios, broadcast stations and audio engineers. everyone who is used to working with a c414 will find the acoustic advantages of an AKG large-diaphragm microphone very familiar. Since the mid-1980s, the c414 has been the reference microphone of the recording industry and a proven workhorse for the stage.

The most versatile microphone for vocals and instruments in studio and on stage the c414 XlS multipattern condenser microphone offers a choice of nine polar patterns for the perfect sonic capture for every application. A peak hold leD displays even the shortest overload peaks. For live-sound applications and permanent installations, all controls can easily be disabled for trouble-free use. the c414 XlS maintains the sonic character of the legendary c414 B-ulS, the most popular AKG c414 version since 1971. engineered for highest linearity and neutral sound, it has been the most versatile large-diaphragm microphone for decades.

a legend since 1971

02

All Products share these features:

One-inch edge-terminated capsule gold-sputtered diaphragms ensure maximum reliability on the road High sound pressure level capability up to 158dB Spl and an incredible dynamic range of 152dB High sensitivity and extremely low self-noise one of the quietest microphones in the world (6dBa-A only) Super-flexible settings and workflow Designed and engineered in Vienna, Austria

Engineered for highest linearity and neutral sound for beautifully detailed recording of vocals and any acoustic instrument Nine selectable polar patterns for the perfect setting for every application Three attenuation levels (-6/-12/-18dB) for close-up recording or high-output sources of up to 158dB Spl Three different switchable bass-cut filters to reduce wind noise, subsonic noise or proximity effect Overload warning with audio peak hold LED to detect shortest audio peaks

• •

Included accessories: h85 universal shock mount, pF80 pop filter, W414 Windscreen, metal carrying case

Item Number: c414 XlS    3059Z00050

12

Page 36

C414 xlii
RefeRence multipatteRn condenseR micRophone

C214
pRofessional laRge-diaphRagm condenseR micRophone
Harman Pro Group | 2013

the classic c12 sound

for recording of lead vocals and solo instruments in studio and on stage the c414 Xlii multi-pattern condenser microphone offers a choice of nine polar patterns for the perfect sonic capture for every application. A peak hold leD displays even the shortest overload peaks. For live-sound applications and permanent installations, all controls can easily be disabled for trouble-free use. the c414 Xlii version differs from the c414 XlS version in one major respect – the capsule. the c414 Xlii's slight presence boost and impressive spatial reproduction are both similar to the legendary AKG c12 microphone from 1953.

engineered excellence

for recording of lead vocals and solo instruments in studio and on stage the c214 large-diaphragm condenser microphone has been designed as a cost-effective alternative to the high-end c414 family. like the c414, the c214 offers a supreme one-inch capsule on an integrated suspension to reduce mechanical noise. A switchable 20dB attenuation pad allows recording of loud sources of up to 156dB Spl. A switchable bass-cut filter allows close-up recording with almost no proximity effect. the c214 captures sound by combining one capsule of the legendary c414 dual-capsule system and the patented AKG Back-plate technology, resulting in an outstanding performance close to the famous c414 Xlii.

RefeRence RecoRding MicRophones

Section:

02

Sonic character of the famous AKG C12 delivers astounding sound quality for lead vocals and solo instruments Nine selectable polar patterns for the perfect setting for every application Three attenuation levels (-6/-12/-18dB) for close-up recording or high-output sources of up to 158dB Spl Three switchable different bass-cut filters to reduce wind noise, stage vibration or proximity effect Overload warning with audio peak hold LED to detect shortest audio peaks

Sonic character of the C414 XLII for beautifully detailed recording of lead vocals and solo instruments Outstanding dynamic range and ultralow noise for close-up recording of high-output sources of up to 156dB Spl Switchable 20dB attenuator and bass-cut filter for close-up recording and reduction of proximity effect Integrated suspension to reduce mechanical noise and vibration from stage Roadworthy design all-metal die-cast body with shock- and scratch-resistant finish

Included accessories: h85 universal shock mount, pF80 pop filter, W414 Windscreen, metal carrying case

Included accessories: h85 universal shock mount, metal carrying case

Item Number: c414 Xlii    3059Z00060

Item Number: c214    3185Z00010

Page 37

MaTChed pair stereo sets
for stereo recording of any acoustic instruments in studio and on stage

perfect twins

All Products share these features:

the AKG reference matched pair stereo sets are created by a sophisticated computer aided matching method. Selected from thousands individual microphones, both microphones of one matched pair show a maximum variance of 1dB at the frequency response and have identical sensitivity. the matched pair stereo sets come in a top quality aluminum case including the individual measurement documents.

Computer aided matching method of both microphones for highest possible correlation of frequency responses by a maximum difference of 1dB Selected from thousand of individual microphones for identically sensitivity of both microphones Perfect suited for stereo recording techniques by two identically matched microphones

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

the matched pair is available for the c451 B, c414 XlS, c414 Xlii and the c214.

C451 b
matched paiR steReo set
the c451 B is a reference small-diaphragm condenser microphone. With its airy sound, high overload limit and improved engineering details, the c451 B continues the success story of its predecessor, the legendary c451 eB + cK1 capsule. the roadworthy design around the handcrafted capsule and the low-noise pre-amp electronics ensure impressive results even under very harsh conditions. Selected from thousands of individual microphones, both microphones of the matched pair show a maximum variance of 1 dB at the frequency response and have identical sensitivity.

C451 Matched Pair Stereo Set Package includes:
• • • •

2 x C451 2 x Stand adapter 2 x Windscreen 1 x Stereo mounting bar, Aluminum carrying case, Measurement documents

Item Number: c451 B matched pair    2895Z00210

Page 38

matched paiR steReo set
the c414 XlS reference multipattern condenser microphone offers a choice of nine polar patterns for the perfect sonic capture for every application. the c414 XlS maintains the sonic character of the legendary c414 B-ulS, the most popular AKG c414 version since 1971. engineered for highest linearity and neutral sound, it has been the most versatile large-diaphragm microphone for decades.

C414 XLS Matched Pair Stereo Set Package includes:
• • • •

2 x C414 XLS 2 x Elastic spider suspensions 2 x Windscreen 1 x Stereo mounting bar, Aluminum carrying case, Measurement documents

Item Number: c414 XlS matched pair    3059Z00230

RefeRence RecoRding MicRophones

C414 xls

Harman Pro Group | 2013

C414 xlii
matched paiR steReo set
the c414 Xlii reference multi-pattern condenser microphone offers a choice of nine polar patterns for the perfect sonic capture for every application. the c414 Xlii’s slight presence boost and impressive spatial reproduction are both similar to the legendary AKG c12 microphone from 1953.

Section:

C414 XLII Matched Pair Stereo Set Package includes:
• • • •

02

2 x C414 XLII 2 x Elastic spider suspensions 2 x Windscreen 1 x Stereo mounting bar, Aluminum carrying case, Measurement documents

Item Number: c414 Xlii matched pair    3059Z00240

C214
matched paiR steReo set
the c214 large-diaphragm condenser microphone has been designed as a cost-effective alternative to the high-end c414 family. the c214 captures sound by combining one capsule of the legendary c414 dual-capsule system and the patented AKG Back-plate technology, resulting in an outstanding performance close to the famous c414 Xlii.

C214 Matched Pair Stereo Set Package includes:
• • • •

2 x C214 2 x Elastic spider suspensions 2 x Windscreen 1 x Aluminum carrying case, Measurement documents

Item Number: c214 matched pair    3185Z00110

Page 39

uLs
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

pRofessional small-diaphRagm modulaR micRophone seRies

designed for the most demanding studio and broadcast applications

Just pure sound

the ulS, ultra linear Series, offers four reference class small condenser mics. the series is intended primarily for studio and broadcast applications in which state-of-the-art performance is mandated. With the available cardioid, hypercardioid, omnidirectional, and highly directional shotgun capsules, the ultra linear Series offer an incredible flexible solution for speach, vocal, instrumental and anbient recordings. thanks to the ultra linear preamp the capsules have a vastly improved noise floor, permitting self noise performance in the range of 9 to 11dB-A. maximum sound pressure levels in the range of 144dB can be attained with no greater than 0.5% distortion, giving the capsules a new level of overall performance. the ulS series microphones misses out on coloration, distortion and noise and offer just pure sound.

C480 b uls
pRofessional micRophone pRe-amplifieR

for ULS capsules CK61, CK62, CK63, CK69 ULS the c480 B is the pre-amp for the ultralinear series capsules, cK61, cK62, cK63, and cK69 ulS, and represents one of the quietest microphone amps ever built. the c480 B offers excellent audio quality and maximum flexibility. its electronic circuitry coupled with a transformerless output stage assures completely linear transfer characteristics across the entire frequency range, while achieving self-noise figures close to the theoretical minimum. A specially designed output stage drives difficult loads like excessively long cables without harming the signal quality. the c480 B offers a two-step high-pass filter and two gain stages of either -10dB or +6dB.

noise-free

02

All Products share these features:

Sophisticated microphone pre-amp design for ultralow noise performance Transformerless output provides extremely low distortion, highest reliability and less weight Switchable attenuation pad enables high Spl applications up to 144dB Switchable bass-cut filter eliminates rumble or footfall noise Specially designed output stage for difficult loads drives excessively long cables with no signal degradation

Ultra low noise for unbelievable equivalent noise levels of 9 to 11dB-A only Four different capsules available provides the right solution for every application 1/2-inch true condenser technology with ULS design offers ruler-flat frequency responses Transformer-less preamp provides extremely low distortion and highest reliability Self-cleaning contact with huge contact area ensures reliable operation and extremely long life

Item Number: c480 B ulS    2180Z00150

Page 40

C480 b coMbo
pRofessional modulaR condenseR micRophone

CK61 uls
pRofessional condenseR micRophone capsule
Harman Pro Group | 2013

hassle-free

for distant instrument recording, MS and XY stereo techniques the c480 B combo is a combination of c480 B pre-amp and the cK61 ulS capsule. it offers excellent audio quality and maximum flexibility. the electronic circuitry of the c480 B comes with a transformerless output stage and assures completely linear transfer characteristics across the entire frequency range, while achieving self-noise figures close to the theoretical minimum. the cK61 capsule is characterized by a ruler-flat frequency response and an unmatchable consistent cardioid polar pattern. it is the ideal choice for critical recording and live-sound applications where consistent suppression of off-axis sound is an important requirement. the cK61 ulS is widely used in broadcast and recording studios as well as on stages worldwide.

distortion-free

for distant instrument recording, MS and XY stereo techniques the cK61 ulS professional small condenser capsule is characterized by a ruler-flat frequency response and an unmatchable consistent cardioid polar pattern. it is the ideal choice for critical recording and live-sound applications where consistent suppression of off-axis sound is an important requirement. the cK61 ulS is widely used in broadcast and recording studios as well as on stages worldwide. the cK61 ulS works exclusively with the c480 B pre-amp. to ensure an extra-long life and a reliable connection, the capsule is equipped with large-area, self-cleaning, gold-plated contacts. careful attention to detail and highest manufacturing standards make the cK61 ultra linear Series capsule the choice of experienced technicians worldwide.

Modular recording Microphones

Section:

02

Sophisticated microphone pre-amp design for ultralow noise performance Transformerless output provides extremely low distortion, highest reliability and less weight Specially designed output stage for difficult loads drives excessively long cables with no signal degradation Cardioid polar pattern with excellent on-axis response for pure, pristine sound quality Self-cleaning contacts ensure reliable operation and long life

Cardioid polar pattern with excellent on-axis response for pure, pristine sound quality Self-cleaning contacts ensure reliable operation and long life Carefully handcrafted in Vienna, Austria meticulous attention to detail ensures highest quality

Included accessories: W32 Windscreen

Item Number: cK61 ulS    2231Z00210

Included accessories: SA60 Stand adapter, metal carrying case, W23 Windscreen

Item Number: c480 B combo    2200Z00330

Page 41

uls (continued)

CK62 uls
pRofessional condenseR micRophone capsule

CK63 uls
pRofessional condenseR micRophone capsule

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

for ambience recording and advanced stereo recording techniques the cK62 ulS professional small condenser capsule is characterized by a ruler-flat frequency response and an omnidirectional polar pattern. it is one of the most neutral small-diaphragm capsules ever, and a perfect choice for demanding applications such as classical-music recording. the cK62 ulS is widely used in recording studios, in opera houses and on theater stages around the world. the cK62 ulS works exclusively with the c480 B pre-amp. to ensure an extra-long life and a reliable connection, the capsule is equipped with large-area, self-cleaning and gold-plated contacts. careful attention to detail and the highest manufacturing standards make the ultra linear Series modular system the choice of experienced technicians worldwide.

coloration-free

high gain before feedback for noisy environments the cK63 ulS professional small condenser capsule is characterized by a ruler-flat frequency response. its consistent hypercardioid polar pattern provides unmatched channel separation, exceptional off-axis rejection and high gain before feedback. the cK63 ulS is widely used in broadcast and recording studios as well as on stages around the world. the cK63 ulS works exclusively with the c480 B pre-amp. to ensure an extra-long life and a reliable connection, the capsule is equipped with large-area, self-cleaning, gold-plated contacts. careful attention to detail and the highest manufacturing standards make the ultra linear Series modular system the choice of experienced technicians worldwide.

no proBlem

Omnidirectional polar pattern for pure, pristine sound quality Self-cleaning contacts ensure reliable operation and long life Carefully handcrafted in Vienna, Austria meticulous attention to detail ensures highest quality

Hypercardioid polar pattern with excellent on-axis response for pure, pristine sound quality at high gain before feedback Self-cleaning contacts ensure reliable operation and long life Carefully handcrafted in Vienna, Austria meticulous attention to detail ensures highest quality

Included accessories: W32 Windscreen

Included accessories: W32 Windscreen

Item Number: cK62 ulS    2231Z00220

Item Number: cK63 ulS    2231Z00250

Page 42

CK69 uls
pRofessional small condenseR micRophone shotgun capsule
Harman Pro Group | 2013

point. shoot. interview.

for TV interviews, film close-ups and ambience recording the cK69 ulS professional shotgun capsule delivers perfect results for film/ tv outdoor applications or indoor front-of-stage recording. it has a unique two-shotgun-capsules-in-one-microphone design, which enables quick and easy conversion from long- to short-distance applications. it is also a perfect microphone for interviews in noisy environments. the cK69 ulS works exclusively with the c480 B pre-amp. to ensure an extra-long life and a reliable connection, the capsule is equipped with large-area, self-cleaning, gold-plated contacts. An eye for detail paired with the highest manufacturing standards makes the ultra linear Series capsules the choice of knowledgeable technicians worldwide.

Modular recording Microphones

Section:

02

Sophisticated interference tube design provides maximum noise attenuation Two shotgun lengths in one microphone for a selectable operating distance Carefully handcrafted in Vienna, Austria meticulous attention to detail ensures highest quality

Included accessories: W48 Windscreen, W49 Windscreen

Item Number: cK69 ulS    2669Z00010

Page 43

bLue line
high-peRfoRmance small-diaphRagm condenseR micRophone seRies wherever speed, ruggedness and high sound quality are mandatory

do the twist

the Blue line Series is a family of pre-polarized condenser capsules, all compatible with a supreme pre-amp module. its robust modulock™ bayonet coupling allows quick and easy interchanging of the capsules modules. All modules feature accurate axial response, uniform pattern control and low self noise. With the available cardioid, hypercardioid, omnidirectional and highly directional shotgun capsules, the Blue line Series offers an incredible flexible solution for the most demanding speech, vocal, instrumental and ambient recordings. the Blue line Series is primarily designed for studio and broadcast applications. thanks to the roadworthy and light-weight design the microphones are also often found in heavy-duty use on stages worldwide.

se300 b
high-peRfoRmance micRophone pRe-amplifieR

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

for Blue Line Series capsules CK91, CK92, CK93, CK94 and CK98 the Se300 B is the pre-amp for the Blue line Series capsules cK91, cK92, cK93, cK94 and cK98. this system is designed for excellent audio quality and maximum flexibility. its robust modulock™ bayonet coupling allows quick and easy changing of the capsules. the state-of-the-art electronics design ensures high rF immunity in critical environments. the Se300 B provides a switchable bass roll-off/attenuator with three positions: flat, 75hz and 10db attenuation.

heavy-duty use without Ballast

All Products share these features:

Extremely compact, reliable circuitry ensures high rF immunity in critical environments Switchable attenuation pad for high Spl applications up to 144dB Switchable bass-cut filter eliminates rumble or footfall noise Universal phantom powering from 9V to 52V for operating with phantom power supply Robust Modulock™ bayonet design allows quick and easy changing of the capsules

Five different quick interchangeable capsules allow a wide range of studio and broadcast applications Half-inch back-plate condenser technology offers great sound performance and reliable quality Robust Modulock™ bayonet design allows quick and easy interchanging of the capsules Switchable bass-cut filter and attenuation pad enable high Spl applications and eliminate rumble or footfall noise Roadworthy but lightweight design for heavy-duty use in harsh environment without ballast

Included accessories: SA60 Stand adapter

Item Number: Se300 B    2439X00080

Page 44

C391 b
high-peRfoRmance condenseR micRophone

CK91
high-peRfoRmance condenseR micRophone capsule
Harman Pro Group | 2013

a compact solution

for vocal and instrument recording, MS and XY stereo techniques the c391 B high-performance small-diaphragm condenser microphone is a combination of the Blue line Series cK91 and the Se300 pre-amplifier. the microphone has a cardioid polar pattern, a low self-noise and very good transient response for a bright and brilliant sound. it also features the ability to quickly interchange its capsule with one of the other capsules of the Blue line Series, making it an excellent mic for demanding broadcast applications. the c391 B provides a switchable bass roll-off/attenuator with three positions: flat, 75hz and 10db attenuation.

a Quick fix

for live broadcasting and studio productions the cK91 high-performance small condenser capsule is characterized by a smooth and well-balanced frequency response and a consistent cardioid polar pattern. it is the ideal choice for critical live and studio broadcast applications where consistent suppression of off-axis sound is required. the cK91 is part of the Blue line Series and works exclusively with the Se300 B pre-amp module. its robust modulock™ bayonet coupling allows quick and easy changing of the capsules.

Modular recording Microphones

Section:

02

Precise cardioid polar pattern for uncolored sound quality and high gain before feedback Switchable attenuation pad enables high-Spl applications up to 144dB Switchable bass-cut filter eliminates rumble or footfall noise Universal phantom powering from 9 to 52V for operating with phantom power supply Carefully handcrafted in Vienna, Austria meticulous attention to detail ensures highest quality

Robust Modulock™ bayonet design allows quick and easy changing of the capsules Precise cardioid polar pattern for uncolored sound quality and high gain before feedback Self-cleaning contacts ensure reliable operation and long life

Included accessories: W90 Windscreen

Item Number: cK91    2439Z00010

Included accessories: SA60 Stand adapter, W90 Windscreen

Item Number: c391 B    2442Z00010

Page 45

blue line (continued)

CK92
high-peRfoRmance condenseR micRophone capsule

CK93
high-peRfoRmance condenseR micRophone capsule

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

for close instrument miking and ambience pickup the cK92 is a high-performance small condenser capsule with an omnidirectional polar pattern. it offers exceptionally neutral presentation of a source in its ambient sound field, providing consistent results regardless of the distance between microphone and source. Due to its nondirectional pickup, it is free of proximity effect and perfect for close-up miking of instruments, as well as for ambience recording. the cK92 is part of the Blue line Series and works exclusively with the Se300 B pre-amp module. its robust modulock™ bayonet coupling allows quick and easy changing of the capsules.

close-up

for vocals and instruments, wherever off-axis sound suppression is important

higher gain Before feedBack

the cK93 high-performance small condenser capsule is characterized by a smooth and well-balanced frequency response and a consistent hypercardioid polar pattern. it provides greater attenuation of off-axis sound and more direct sound. thus it is the ideal choice for critical live and studio broadcast applications where consistent suppression of off-axis sound is required. the cK93 is part of the Blue line Series and works exclusively with the Se300 B pre-amp module. its robust modulock™ bayonet coupling allows quick and easy changing of the capsules modules.

Robust Modulock™ bayonet design allows quick and easy changing of the capsules Omnidirectional polar pattern for pure, pristine sound quality Self-cleaning contacts ensure reliable operation and long life

Hyper-cardioid polar pattern with excellent on-axis response for best sound quality at highest gain before feedback Robust Modulock™ bayonet design allows quick and easy changing of the capsules Self-cleaning contacts ensure reliable operation and long life

Included accessories: W90 Windscreen

Included accessories: W90 Windscreen

Item Number: cK92    2439Z00020

Item Number: cK93    2439Z00030

Page 46

CK94
high-peRfoRmance condenseR micRophone capsule

CK98
high-peRfoRmance shoRt shotgun condenseR micRophone capsule
Harman Pro Group | 2013

advanced stereo miking

for interviews and M/S stereo technique applications the cK94 high-performance small condenser capsule is characterized by a smooth and well-balanced frequency response. its figure-eight polar pattern picks up sound arriving from opposite directions and efficiently suppresses off-axis sounds. thus it is the perfect tool for applications where sound sources face each other, as in broadcast-interview and roundtable situations. it is also perfect as a side microphone in m/S stereo technique. the cK94 is part of the Blue line Series and works exclusively with the Se300 B pre-amp module. its robust modulock™ bayonet coupling allows quick and easy changing of the capsules.

an easy catch

for broadcasting and theater productions the cK98 high-performance small condenser capsule combines high sensitivity and controlled directivity. it offers excellent reach thanks to a very tight polar pattern and exceptionally low self noise. Small size and low weight make the cK98 ideal for boom applications. the smooth, wide-band frequency response makes it a superb choice for edge-of-stage and ceiling placement in theaters. the cK98 is part of the Blue line Series and works exclusively with the Se300 B pre-amp module. its robust modulock™ bayonet coupling allows quick and easy changing of the capsules.

Modular recording Microphones

Section:

02

Figure-eight polar pattern with accurate axial response for advanced stereo miking techniques Robust Modulock™ bayonet design allows quick and easy changing of the capsules Carefully handcrafted in Vienna, Austria meticulous attention to detail ensures highest quality

Sophisticated interference tube design for noise attenuation in difficult environments Robust Modulock™ bayonet design allows quick and easy changing of the capsules Carefully handcrafted in Vienna, Austria meticulous attention to detail ensures highest quality

Included accessories: W90 Windscreen

Included accessories: W98 Windscreen

Item Number: cK94    2439Z00060

Item Number: cK98    2439Z00040

Page 47

C747 v11
pRofessional shotgun condenseR micRophone

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 48

a history of sound

for use in broadcast and recording studios, theaters and conferences the c747 v11 is a professional shotgun condenser capsule with a flat frequency response and a clean off-axis response. Due to its brilliant sound reproduction, it is perfect for guitar, piano, drum and overhead recordings. thanks to its inconspicuous appearance, it is also widely used as a speech and lectern microphone. the c747 v11 features an integrated rFi shield to block out unwanted interference from mobile phones, wireless microphones and other wireless devices. the c747 v11 ships with an extensive accessory set including a shock mount adapter, mini-gooseneck, stand adapter, mounting clamp, thread link and windscreen.

Enhanced, hypercardioid polar pattern eliminates noise from the sides RFi shielding technology prevents interference noise from mobile phones Withstands high sound pressure levels for close-up miking of loud sources Small and inconspicuous for mobile and installed solutions Extensive accessory set included for a wide range of mounting possibilities

Included accessories: h47 Shock mount, mSh70 Short gooseneck, SA47 Stand adapter, ShZ80 Screw link, W70 Windscreen

Item Number: c747 v11    2226Z00110

CK69 uls
pRofessional small condenseR micRophone shotgun capsule

CK98
high-peRfoRmance shoRt shotgun condenseR micRophone capsule

C568 b
pRofessional small condenseR shotgun micRophone
Harman Pro Group | 2013

point shoot interview. an easy catch . .
for TV interviews, film close-ups and ambience recording the cK69 ulS professional shotgun capsule delivers perfect results for film/tv outdoor applications or indoor front-of-stage recording. it has a unique two-shotgun-ca psules-in-one-microphone design, which enables quick and easy conversion from long- to short-distance applications. it is also a perfect microphone for interviews in noisy environments. the cK69 ulS works exclusively with the c480 B pre-amp. to ensure an extra-long life and a reliable connection, the capsule is equipped with large-area, self-cleaning, goldplated contacts. An eye for detail paired with the highest manufacturing standards makes the ultra linear Series capsules the choice of knowledgeable technicians worldwide.

for broadcasting and theater productions

zoom in

For theaters, houses of worship, film and TV productions the c568 B professional small condenser capsule combines high directivity and a wide frequency range. it is a perfect tool for theater, sound reinforcement and film/ tv applications. Due to its compact and lightweight design, the c568 B is ideal for camera-mount use. Below 500hz, it functions as a hypercardioid microphone; above 500hz, the acoustic interference tube introduces increasing directivity. A switchable 12dB/octave 120hz bass roll-off filter effectively suppresses impact and wind noise. the c568 B´s rugged, all-metal body contains the built-in pre-amp, which requires 9–52v phantom power. the package includes a special foam windscreen as well as a stand adapter.

the cK98 high-performance small condenser capsule combines high sensitivity and controlled directivity. it offers excellent reach thanks to a very tight polar pattern and exceptionally low self noise. Small size and low weight make the cK98 ideal for boom applications. the smooth, wide-band frequency response makes it a superb choice for edge-of-stage and ceiling placement in theaters. the cK98 is part of the Blue line Series and works exclusively with the Se300 B pre-amp module. its robust modulock™ bayonet coupling allows quick and easy changing of the capsules.

Broadcast MicropHones

Section:

02

Sophisticated interference tube design provides maximum noise attenuation Two shotgun lengths in one microphone for a selectable operating distance Carefully handcrafted in Vienna, Austria meticulous attention to detail ensures highest quality

Sophisticated interference tube design for noise attenuation in difficult environments Robust Modulock™ bayonet design allows quick and easy changing of the capsules Carefully handcrafted in Vienna, Austria meticulous attention to detail ensures highest quality

Sophisticated interference tube design provides maximum noise attenuation Integrated, switchable bass roll-off filter for minimized mechanical noise Compact and lightweight design ideal for camera-mount use

Included accessories: W68 Windscreen

Included accessories: W48 Windscreen, W49 Windscreen

Included accessories: W98 Windscreen

Item Number: c568 B    2168Z00040

Item Number: cK69 ulS    2669Z00010

Item Number: cK98    2439Z00040

Page 49

C4500 bc
pRofessional fRont-addRess condenseR micRophone

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 50

in the face

for live broadcast work and close miking of loud sound sources the c4500 Bc large-diaphragm condenser microphone in front-addressed format is specially designed for on-air broadcast work. it provides a cardioid pickup with voice-friendly tuning and a low proximity effect, as well as high rF/ emi insensitivity. the exceptional low self-noise (8dB-A) and its 165dB maximum Spl capability also make the c4500 Bc a great tool for close-miking of loud instruments like bass drums, brass instruments and guitar amps. the c4500 Bc comes complete with an h85 spider-type shock mount, W4000 windscreen and a metal carrying case.

Minimized proximity effect for unchanged sound at varying distances Withstands extreme sound pressure levels distortion-free operation for sources up to 165db Spl Ultralow 8dB-A self-noise for demanding studio and broadcast applications Multilayer pop-screen filter to minimize blowing noise Transformerless output circuit ensures zero susceptibility to rF and emi

Included accessories: W4000 Windscreen, h85 universal shock mount

Item Number: c4500 Bc    2820X00220

d230
high-peRfoRmance dynamic eng micRophone
Harman Pro Group | 2013

far-reaching
for ENG/EFP application the D230 is a rugged dynamic enG microphone that delivers exceptional sensitivity and clarity. For decades it has been a standard in the demanding news-gathering field. Because of its omnidirectional pickup, it is insensitive to varying speech distances. An integrated windscreen efficiently reduces wind noise and plosives. the D230 features an extended shaft for easy placement of station flags without typical handling problems. the body is made of extremely rugged die-cast metal with a nonreflective surface for low-profile on-camera operation.

Broadcast MicropHones

Section:

02

Omnidirectional polar pattern for unchanged sound at varying speech distances Rugged all-metal body for heavy-duty use and longest lifetime Extended microphone shaft for ease of handling Integrated windscreen minimizes wind noise and plosives

Included accessories: SA44 Stand adapter

Item Number: D230    2558X00020

Page 51

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

hsC271
pRofessional headsets with condenseR micRophone

hsC171
pRofessional headsets with condenseR micRophone

for intercom, ENG/EFP, recordings and video production the hSc271 professional over-ear, closed headset is a standard for intercom, enG/eFp work and video production. it is based on the successful K271 mKii Studio headphones combined with a high-performance condenser microphone. the flexible microphone arm mutes the microphone automatically as it is moved up. the microphone can be mounted to the left or right side, depending on personal preference and available space. the hSc271 features a switch in the headband that mutes the audio just as soon as the headphones are taken off. the high-quality six-pin mini Xlr connector allows quick replacement of the cable.

winning comBination

for recording, intercom, ENG/EFP and video production the hSc171 professional closed, on-ear studio headset provides extraordinary noise insulation, perfect for use in loud environments. the headset combines the K171 mKii studio headphones with a high-performance condenser microphone. the flexible microphone arm mutes the microphone automatically as it is moved up. the microphone can be mounted to the left or right side, depending on personal preference and available space. the hSc171 features a switch in the headband that mutes the audio just as soon as the headphones are taken off. the professional six-pin mini Xlr connector allows quick replacement of the cable.

listen in, speak out

Over-ear, closed design for high comfort and high noise attenuation Condenser microphone on flexible boom for best audio quality Auto-mute for headphone and microphone prevents feedback Switchable bass-cut filter minimizes rumble and wind noise Self-adjusting headband allows extended wear without discomfort

On-ear, closed design for highest possible noise attenuation Condenser microphone on flexible boom for best audio quality Switchable bass-cut filter minimizes rumble and wind noise

Included accessories: W444 Windscreen, velvet earpads

Item Number: hSc171    2955X00280

Included accessories: W444 Windscreen, velvet earpads

Item Number: hSc271    2955X00290

Page 52

Headsets

Harman Pro Group | 2013

hsd271
pRofessional headsets with dynamic micRophone

hsd171
pRofessional headsets with dynamic micRophone

dynamic dialogue

for intercom, ENG/EFP, recordings and video production the hSD271 professional over-ear, closed headset is a standard for intercom, enG/eFp work and video production. it is based on the successful K271 mKii Studio headphones combined with a rugged dynamic microphone. the flexible microphone arm mutes the microphone automatically as it is moved up. the microphone can be mounted to the left or right side, depending on personal preference and available space. the hSD271 features a switch in the headband that mutes the audio just as soon as the headphones are taken off. the plug-in cable with a six-pin mini Xlr connector allows quick replacement of the cable.

rugged and ready

for recording, intercom, ENG/EFP and video production the hSD171 professional closed, on-ear studio headset provides an extraordinary noise insulation, perfect for use in loud environments. the headset combines the K171 mKii studio headphones with a rugged dynamic microphone. the flexible microphone arm mutes the microphone automatically as it is moved up. the microphone can be mounted to the left or right side, depending on personal preference and available space. the hSD171 features a switch in the headband that mutes the audio just as soon as the headphones are taken off. the rugged six-pin mini Xlr connector allows quick replacement of the cable.

Section:

02

Over-ear, closed design for high comfort and high noise attenuation Sealed design for recordings without unwanted spill Dynamic microphone on flexible boom for maximum robustness Auto-mute for headphone and microphone prevents feedback and protects headphones when not in use Self-adjusting headband allows extended wear without discomfort

On-ear, closed design for highest possible noise attenuation Self-adjusting headband allows extended wear without discomfort Dynamic microphone for maximum robustness

Included accessories: W444 Windscreen, velvet earpads

Item Number: hSD171    2955X00260

Included accessories: W444 Windscreen, velvet earpads

Item Number: hSD271    2955X00270

Page 53

C4000
high-peRfoRmance multipatteRn condenseR micRophone

C3000
high-peRfoRmance laRge-diaphRagm condenseR micRophone

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

The best-kept secret for thin vocals and instruments the c4000 is a high-performance multipattern large-diaphragm microphone with exceptionally high headroom and extremely low self-noise. it is among the condenser microphones with the widest dynamic range available today, and it will give equally excellent results in the studio and on stage. Due to its warm and dark-sounding character, it is known in the pro-audio world as an insider’s tip for thin vocals, bright brass instruments and acoustic guitars. Beyond that, it is designed for miking a broad range of instruments from electric guitar to kick drum.

mellow fellow

A studio and on-stage standard for vocals, guitar, drums and brass instruments the c3000 high-performance, large-diaphragm condenser microphone has been a standard for live applications and studio recording for almost two decades. it is an excellent choice for vocals, electric and acoustic guitars, drum overhead and brass instrument miking. the switchable attenuation pad and low-cut filter enable high Spl up to 150dB and eliminate proximity effect. the redesigned c3000 presents itself as a cost-effective, rugged workhorse with a sleek and classy finish.

a sound investment for every studio

Genuine one-inch dual-diaphragm condenser transducer for a warm and dark-sounding character Selectable polar patterns (cardioid, hypercardioid and omni) for a wide range of applications due to dual-capsule design One of the quietest condenser microphones available today by the use of ultralow-noise electronic components Transformerless electronic design for high Spl capability and low distortion Switchable 10dB attenuation pad allows close-in miking at extremely high sound pressure levels

Proven performance for more than 15 years the standard for live applications and studio recording Ultralow-noise electronics and switchable attenuation pad enable high dynamic range and allow Spl up to 150dB Switchable low-cut filter eliminates proximity effect Classic sound made affordable gold-sputtered one-inch capsule tuned in the tradition of AKG´s sonic expertise Heavy-duty die-cast metal housing provides maximum protection on stage and in the studio

Included accessories: W4000 Windscreen, h85 universal shock mount, metal carrying case

Item Number: c4000    2820X00210

Included accessories: h85 universal shock mount, metal carrying case

Item Number: c3000    2785X00230

Page 54

C2000
high-peRfoRmance small-diaphRagm condenseR micRophone

C1000 s
high-peRfoRmance small-diaphRagm condenseR micRophone
Harman Pro Group | 2013

the first step into the studio world
for recording of vocals, brass and percussion the c2000 is a small-diaphragm condenser microphone for vocals, brass and percussion in the studio. Designed with AKG expertise and valuable customer input from all over the world, the c2000 contains the essence of six decades of microphone engineering. thanks to the patented capsule design, the c2000 impresses with a good transient response and a smooth low end. moreover, its low-noise electronics ensure low distortion and a high dynamic range. A must-have for every project studio.

the swiss army knife of microphones

for vocal and instrumental recording, on stage, in ENG/EFP and video production the updated version of the c1000 S multipurpose small-diaphragm condenser microphone is extremely popular for its versatility. it is suitable for recording and live-sound applications as well as for enG/ eFp and video productions. its gold sputtered capsule housing makes the microphone extremely rugged against humidity. if no phantom power is available, the c1000 S can be powered by two standard AA batteries for up to 120 hours. more versatile than ever before, the new c1000 S features a bass-cut switch and a switchable -10 dB pad. the polar pattern can quickly be switched from cardioid to hypercardioid. three different frequency settings are adding more clarity to speech and instrument sounds.

Project Studio MicroPhoneS

Section:

02

Patented capsule design for sound quality close to that of large-diaphragm microphones Cardioid polar pattern for a multiplicity of applications Low-noise electronics ensure low distortion and a high dynamic range Internal windscreen protects from wind and breath-generated pops Switchable attenuation pad and low-cut filter enable high Spl and eliminate proximity effect

Gold sputtered microphone capsule and XLR pins give high immunity against humidity Powered by internal AA batteries or by phantom power for use with any equipment and every application Bass cut and -10 dB switchable for amazing versatility in every situation Presence boost adapter provides three frequency settings for different sound sources Unique polar pattern converter allows the microphone to be switched from cardioid to hyper-cardioid

Included accessories: h85 universal shock mount, metal carrying case

Item Number: c2000    2786X00210

Included accessories: microphone bag, SA63 Stand adapter, W1001 Windscreen, pBA1000 presence boost adaptor, ppc1000 polar pattern converter

Item Number: c1000 S    3354X00010

Page 55

p820 tube
high-peRfoRmance multipatteRn tube condenseR micRophone

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 56

greater in spirit, larger than life
for highlighting lead vocals, brass instruments, electric guitars and drums the perception p820 tube high-performance multipattern tube microphone is an excellent tool for highlighting lead vocals, brass instruments, electric guitars and drums. With its dual one-inch diaphragm capsule and the advanced ecc83 dual-triode circuitry, the perception p820 tube delivers real tube sound and raises the bar in its class of affordable tube microphones. the remote control unit allows selection of nine different pickup patterns from omnidirectional to cardioid to figure-eight. it also offers controls for the switchable bass-cut filter and the attenuation pad. the perception p820 tube comes complete with a spider-type shock mount and a metal carrying case.

ECC83 dual-triode tube circuitry emphasizes even-order harmonics for rich, smooth and three-dimensional tube sound Remote control unit for the perfect choice of polar patterns, bass-cut filters and attenuation pad Dual one-inch diaphragm microphone with nine selectable polar patterns for the perfect setting Switchable bass-cut filter reduces unwanted rumble or footfall noise A 20dB attenuation pad for high-Spl applications up to 155dB

Included accessories: p820 Spider Suspension, metal carrying case, p820 cable 

Item Number: p820 tube    3101h00100

p420
high-peRfoRmance multipatteRn condenseR micRophone

p220
laRge-diaphRagm condenseR micRophone
Harman Pro Group | 2013

Beautiful soundscapes
ideal for advanced stereo miking techniques the perception p420 is a multipattern large-diaphragm true condenser microphone for demanding professional studio recording applications. offering high sensitivity and 155dB maximum Spl, the perception p420 delivers a warm, transparent sound quality perfectly suited for ensemble recording, grand piano, woodwind and brass instruments, as well as drums and percussion. With three selectable polar patterns – cardioid, omnidirectional or figure-eight – it is an ideal tool for stereo miking techniques and ambient recording. the perception p420 chassis is made of precision-tooled zinc/ aluminum alloy with a dent-resistant stainless steel grille. it comes complete with a spider-type shock mount in an aluminum carrying case.

sound of success

for lead vocals, acoustic guitar and brass instruments the perception p220 is a large-diaphragm true condenser microphone offering a warm and clear sound for lead vocals, acoustic guitar and brass instruments. A switchable bass-cut filter and attenuation pad make it perfectly suited for use on loud sound sources with sound pressure levels up to 155dB Spl. the rugged and roadworthy design also makes the perception p220 a perfect choice for on-stage applications. the perception p220 represents the most popular and successful microphone within the perception Series. it comes complete with a spider-type shock mount in an aluminum carrying case.

PercePtion Studio MicroPhoneS

Section:

02

One-inch dual-diaphragm microphone with three selectable polar patterns for the perfect setting Low-noise electronics and transformerless output for high dynamic range and high-Spl capability at low distortion Switchable bass-cut filter eliminates rumble or footfall noise Switchable attenuation pad for high-Spl applications up to 155dB Designed and engineered in Vienna, Austria for legendary, pristine AKG sound

One-inch large-diaphragm, true condenser transducer delivers a classic warm and clear sound Rugged all-metal body and robust design a reliable and roadworthy tool Switchable bass-cut filter eliminates rumble or footfall noise Switchable attenuation pad for high-Spl applications up to 155dB Designed and engineered in Vienna, Austria contains the essence of six decades of mic engineering

Included accessories: Sh300 Spider Suspension, metal carrying case

Included accessories: Sh300 Spider Suspension, metal carrying case

Item Number: p420

3101h00090

Item Number: p220 3101h00080

Page 57

p170
small-diaphRagm condenseR micRophone
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

p170 stereo set
small-diaphRagm condenseR micRophones

for recording of overheads, percussion, acoustic guitars and strings

at the point

for drums, acoustical instruments, A/B and X/Y stereo recordings the new perception p170 Stereo Set consists of two factory-matched small diaphragm condenser microphones with cardioid polar pattern. it extends our successful perception series and is designed for both professional studio and on stage applications. the microphone pairs are selected form a large quantity of individual microphones to create matched pairs enabling for stunning and convincing stereo recordings.

headfirst

02

the perception p170 is a small-diaphragm condenser microphone for recording of overheads, percussions, acoustic guitars and strings. its lightweight 1/2-inch true condenser transducer diaphragm delivers outstanding clarity and transient response. A switchable attenuation pad enables the perception 170 to be used close to sound sources delivering up to 155dB Spl. the perception p170 utilizes the experience of sound engineers from around the world and is considered an affordable alternative to the legendary AKG c451 B. incorporated in a heavy-duty all-metal chassis, it delivers the legendary AKG sound to project studios and to every stage.

Lightweight diaphragm delivers outstanding clarity and transient response Transformerless electronics for full dynamic range and lowest distortion Rugged all-metal body and robust design withstand tough day-to-day use Cardioid polar pattern for multiplicity of applications Switchable attenuation pad for high-Spl applications up to 155dB

Professional Stereo Set for studio and on stage applications Small diaphragm true condenser microphone with cardioid polar pattern. Switchable 20 dB preattenuation pad for high-Spl applications up to 155dB All-metal construction heavy-duty, roadworthy, Designed and engineered by AKG in Vienna, Austria

Included accessories: 2x Stand adapter perception

Included accessories: Stand adapter perception

Item Number: p170    3101h00070

Item Number: p170 Stereo Set    3101h00250

Page 58

p120
laRge-diaphRagm condenseR micRophone

p120 usb
usb-equipped condenseR micRophone
Harman Pro Group | 2013

clear. accurate. affordaBle.
for vocals, speech and instrument recording in project studios the perception p120 is a 2/3-inch diaphragm true condenser microphone that offers solidly built quality, outstanding performance and excellent value. the low-mass diaphragm delivers a clear sound with accurate sonic detail for vocals, speech and instrument recording in project studios. the perception p120 provides a switchable 20dB attenuation pad for high-Spl applications up to 150dB and a bass-cut filter to eliminate rumble noise. incorporated in a heavy-duty, all-metal chassis, it delivers the legendary AKG sound to project studios and to every stage.

Brings akg studio Quality to your desktop
creates professional recordings in your home the perception p120 uSB is a uSB-equipped condenser microphone for podcasts, voiceovers and studio-quality rehearsal recordings. it is a real plug-and-play device for quick and easy professional-quality recording without any installation or drivers. using uSB standard, it connects to any computer. in its class, the perception p120 uSB is the only uSB microphone with an integrated analog-to-digital converter with 24-bit and 128x oversampling. instead of the usual one-chip solutions, the high-quality analog-to-digital converter delivers a clear sound with accurate sonic detail and low noise.

PercePtion Studio MicroPhoneS

Section:

02

2/3-inch diaphragm true condenser capsule with integrated pop filter delivers a clear sound with accurate sonic detail Rugged all-metal body and robust design withstand tough day-to-day use Switchable bass-cut filter eliminates rumble or footfall noise Switchable attenuation pad for high Spl applications up to 150dB Spl Designed and engineered in Vienna, Austria contains the essence of six decades of mic engineering

High-quality analog-to-digital converter for convincing sound quality at low noise 2/3-inch diaphragm true condenser capsule delivers a clear sound with accurate sonic detail Plug and play for Windows 7/Vista/XP and OS X no installation, no drivers, no reboot required Designed and engineered in Vienna, Austria contains the essence of six decades of mic engineering Switchable attenuation pad and bass-cut filter withstands loud signals up to 150dB and rejects rumble noise

Included accessories: Stand adapter perception

Included accessories: uSB cable perception 120, Stand adapter perception, tripod

Item Number: p120 3101h00050

Item Number: p120 uSB    3101h00060

Page 59

C535 eb
RefeRence condenseR vocal micRophone

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 60

the voice of the voice

for demanding lead vocals and fine discrete recordings the c535 eB reference handheld condenser vocal microphone is a classic, legendary microphone that we make our way. it provides the ultimate combination of excellent, highly detailed audio and exceptional ruggedness. A bass cut/roll off filter and a switchable pre-attenuation pad let you match the frequency response and output level to the most diverse recording and onstage miking situations. the c535 eB´s perfect weight distribution ensures fatigue-free handling for demanding vocalists!

One of the most legendary vocal stage microphones valued by iconic artists for more than four decades Delicate gold-plated condenser capsule for detailed pickup of unique individual timbres Perfect weight distribution from wire mesh to body for comfortable handling over long performances Switchable pre-attenuation pad to adjust the output level Bass cut/roll off filter reduces unwanted rumble or footfall noise

Included accessories: microphone bag, SA61 Stand adapter

Item Number: c535 eB    2135Z00030

d7
RefeRence dynamic vocal micRophone
Harman Pro Group | 2013

powerful sound for professionals
for demanding lead vocals the D7 reference dynamic vocal microphone creates the subtle and open sound of a condenser capsule with the powerful resonance of a dynamic microphone. the patented dual-layer varimotion diaphragm can vibrate unhindered, which results in an extraordinarily crisp and clean sound. the unique laminated material damps high resonance peaks in the frequency response, which in combination with the tight, supercardioid polar pattern enables the D7´s outstanding high gain before feedback. its mechano-pneumatic capsule suspension and an integrated high-pass filter effectively eliminate handling noise. A precision metal dust filter provides a consistent protection for the diaphragm, ensuring an extra-long life.

HandHeld Vocal MicropHones

Section:

02

Dual-thickness Varimotion diaphragm provides a subtle and open sound in all frequency ranges Highest feedback suppression laminate diaphragm material damps critical resonance peaks Integrated hum compensation coil for the cleanest sound Precision metal dust filter protects the capsule from sound-changing pollution Mechano-pneumatic suspension effectively eliminates unwanted handling noises

Included accessories: microphone bag, SA61 Stand adapter, inner windscreen

Item Number: D7 3139X00010 D7 S 3139X00020

with switch

Page 61

C5
pRofessional condenseR vocal micRophone

d5
pRofessional dynamic vocal micRophone

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

for lead and backing vocals

gold-plated sound

for lead and backing vocals

cuts through the mix

With the c5 professional condenser vocal microphone, your voice will cut through the loudest mix – on any stage. its cardioid polar pattern ensures maximum gain before feedback and has been optimized for use with in-ear monitor systems. An attachable presence boost adapter offers the unique choice of two sound flavors for a superior audio performance. A gold-plated transducer case protects the capsule from corrosion and humidity. the solid die-cast housing and its extremely rugged grille construction make the c5 an easy to use, reliable companion for tough stage jobs.

the D5 professional dynamic vocal microphone for lead and backing vocals delivers a powerful sound even on the noisiest stage. its frequency-independent supercardioid polar pattern ensures maximum gain before feedback. the D5 stands for a crisp sound that cuts through every mix. the dual shock mount eliminates any kind of mechanical noise for trouble-free live use. the audience will hear the pristine sound of your voice!

Delicate cardioid condenser capsule for detailed pickup of unique individual acoustic color 24-carat gold-plated transducer case for maximum resistance to corrosion and humidity Unique presence boost adapter offers a choice of two different sound flavors Integrated shock absorber system effectively eliminates unwanted handling noises Robust zinc-alloy housing and spring steel grille provide extreme ruggedness for a long stage life

Patented laminated VarimotionTM diaphragm for crisp sound that cuts through every mix High feedback suppression with supercardiod polar pattern for trouble-free use with on stage monitoring Dual shock mount of microphone capsule eliminates any kind of handling noise Integrated pop filter for elimination of pops and wind noise Spring-steel wire-mesh grille and rugged die-cast housing withstand every live performance

Included accessories: microphone bag, SA61 Stand adapter, pBA1000

Included accessories: microphone bag, SA61 Stand adapter

Item Number: c5

3138X00100

Item Number: D5 3138X00070 D5 S 3138X00090 D5 3138X00320 Stagepack

with switch with 5 m/16 ft Xlr-cable, microphone stand (165cm, 4.4ft) with boom

Page 62

bbb dfive
pRofessional dynamic micRophone foR multivocal aRt

d770
high-peRfoRmance dynamic micRophone
Harman Pro Group | 2013

B ts k ts B ts k B
for beatboxing at its best the BBB DFive is a professional dynamic microphone for multivocal art like beatboxing, on stage and in the studio. its patented dual-layer varimotiontm diaphragm delivers an extraordinarily powerful sound. the unique laminated material damps high resonance peaks in the frequency response, which, in combination with the tight, supercardioid polar pattern, gives the BBB DFive an outstanding high gain before feedback. An optimized internal windscreen prevents wind noise even in lip-contact use without altering the accurate high-frequency response. handling noise is effectively eliminated by a dual shock mount. the BBB DFive has been appointed the official Beatbox Battle® championships microphone for the coming years.

rugged universalist

for miking backing vocals, instruments and amps the D770 is a high-performance dynamic microphone for miking instruments and backing vocals in tough night-after-night onstage use. the D770 features a cardioid polar pattern and uses the patented varimotion diaphragm technology. it offers an extended frequency response that slightly emphasizes the mid and treble ranges to ensure good intelligibility. the D770 is fitted with a shock-absorbing steel wire-mesh inner grille to protect the transducer from damage. the outer grille and a layer of special fabric beneath it form a very effective windscreen that will suppress pop and breath noise.

HandHeld Vocal MicropHones

Section:

02

Official Beatbox Battle® microphone the tool of world champions Dual-thickness VarimotionTM diapraghm provides crisp and powerful sound in all frequency ranges Highest feedback suppression laminate diaphragm material damps critical resonance peaks Dual shock mount of microphone capsule effectively eliminates handling noise Optimized internal windscreen prevents wind noise even in lip-contact use

Dual-thickness VarimotionTM diaphragm provides crisp and powerful sound in all frequency ranges Highest sound pressure levels up to 156dB for extreme situations without any distortion Cardioid polar pattern for trouble-free use in narrow-stage environments Optimized frequency response for vocal and instrument use Highly efficient internal windscreen prevents pop and wind noise

Included accessories: microphone bag

Included accessories: SA44 Stand adapter, microphone bag

Item Number: BBB DFive    3138X00330

Item Number: D770    2696X00010

Page 63

C520
pRofessional head-woRn condenseR micRophone

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 64

free your vocals

for hands-free lead and backing vocals the c520 professional head-worn condenser microphone with maximum dynamic range for perfect vocal sound. An ideal choice for frontmen, singing keyboardists, drummers, guitarists and dancing performers needing a hands-free microphone. the moisture shield prevents perspiration from penetrating into the transducer element, ensuring a high degree of humidity protection for the microphone. the c520 provides a transducer shock mount to reduce body noise to a minimum. its cardioid polar pattern effectively rejects unwanted ambient noise. the microphone arm mounts on either the left or the right side of the headband.

Lightweight and adjustable headband construction for maximum comfort and freedom of movement Left and right flexible boom mounting for precise positioning to the sound source Condenser capsule on flexible shock mount for efficient rejection of mechanical, ambient and body noise Moisture shield ensuring a dry microphone capsule Available with professional mini XLR connector C520 L for all AKG wireless body-pack transmitters or c520 with standard Xlr connector

Included accessories: W44 Windscreen

Item Number: c520 c520 l

3066X00010 3066X00020

for external phantom powering for use with B29 l, mpA v-l and all AKG body-pack transmitters

CM311
RefeRence head-woRn condenseR micRophone
Harman Pro Group | 2013

Be different

for touring and live-sound applications the cm311 reference head-worn condenser microphone is designed for touring and live-sound applications. it sounds like the best handheld microphones – full, clear and distortion-free, even with the loudest singers. Differoid stands for differential cardioid, which cancels ambient noise from floor monitors, crowds and other sources. controlled field tests show that the Differoid provides up to 12dB more gain before feedback than conventional cardioid microphones. many users of cm311 say that their house mix is better because the mic’s isolation is nearly complete. the cm311 is available in different versions, e.g. the cm311 l with a three-pin mini Xlr connecter, which fits all AKG wireless body-pack transmitters.

Head-worn Vocal MicropHones

Section:

02

Differoid noise-cancelling technology for highest ambient noise rejection Cardioid polar pattern for outstanding gain before feedback Condenser capsule with internal shock mount for efficient rejection of mechanical and body noise Robust headband construction for maximum comfort and freedom of movement Available with professional XLR/mini XLR and W/TA4F connector for all wireless pocket transmitters

Item Number: cm311 miniXlr cm311 W/tA4F cm311 Xlr

6000h50940 6000h50950 6000h50930

with 3-pin mini Xlr connector for use with B29 l, mpA v-l and all AKG body-pack transmitters with 4-pin mini-Xlr W/tA4F connector for various body-pack tranmitters with Xlr connector

Page 65

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 66

hC577 l
RefeRence head-woRn micRophone

no sweat

for theater and broadcast applications the hc577 l is an extremely small reference head-worn microphone, designed for on-stage use. the microphone uses a cK77 omnidirectional transducer that has been an industry standard for lavaliere capsules for years and ensures superior audio performance. A patented body design protects the microphone from moisture and perspiration. the capsule uses the signal of two vertical diaphragms mounted back to back, mixed out of phase to cancel out mechanical and cable noise. the hc577 l provides a professional three-pin mini Xlr connector that fits the body-pack transmitters of all AKG wireless microphone systems.

Adjustable headband and left/right selectable boom for maximum comfort and flexibility Dual-diaphragm transducer for suppression of cable noise Resistant to moisture, perspiration and salts withstands sudorific stage performances Interchangeable capsule module for quick and easy service Omnidirectional polar pattern for unchanging sound quality in all directions

Included accessories: W77 mp Windscreen, Dropring, pB77 Adaptor

Item Number: hc577 l    3141Z00010

Head-worn Vocal MicropHones

Harman Pro Group | 2013

C544 l
high-peRfoRmance spoRts head-woRn condenseR micRophone

C555 l
high-peRfoRmance head-woRn condenseR micRophone

1-2-3-4, run, turn hip and Jump
for aerobics and handsfree speech applications the c544 l high-performance head-worn miniature condenser microphone with an easily fitting headband is perfect for gymnastics instruction and other handsfree speech applications. A transducer shock mount reduces body noise to a minimum and the short microphone arm places the microphone in the right position to the mouth to minimize pop and breathing noise. A special moisture shield on the boom prevents the microphone from being clogged by sweat or makeup. the c544 l comes with a three-pin mini Xlr connecter which fits all AKG WmS Series body-pack transmitters. the package also includes a special windscreen.

flexiBle flyweight

for handsfree vocal and speech applications the c555 l high-performance head-worn condenser microphone is ideal for handsfree applications, including presentations or onstage performances. the c555 l rests securely and comfortably on the head, and can be attached to the left or right side of the behind-the-neck headband as desired. A transducer shock mount reduces handling noise to a minimum. the moisture shield ensures a high degree of humidity protection for the microphone. the c555 l provides a three-pin mini Xlr connector and can be used with all AKG WmS Series body-pack transmitters, B29 l battery power supply, or the mpA vl adapter for external phantom powering.

Section:

02

Fully rugged sports headband for secure fit in all situations and movements Cardioid polar pattern for problem-free use with high ambient noise rejection Flexible shock mount for efficient suppression of mechanical and body noise Moisture shield ensuring a dry microphone capsule Includes four drop rings for sweat and water protection

Lightweight and adjustable-headband construction for maximum comfort and freedom of movement Left and right flexible boom mounting for precise positioning to the sound source Cardioid polar pattern for problem-free use with high ambient noise rejection Flexible shock mount for efficient suppression of mechanical and body noise Moisture shield ensuring a dry microphone capsule

Included accessories: W444 Windscreen, Dropring

Included accessories: W444 Windscreen

Item Number: c544 l    2793Z00060

Item Number: c555 l

3066h00100

Page 67

d12 vr
RefeRence laRge-diaphRagm dynamic micRophone

d40
pRofessional dynamic instRument micRophone

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

for bass drum live and recording applications

kick the hammer

for drums, percussion, wind instruments and guitar amps on stage the D40 professional instrumental microphone with its solid all-metal body will stand up to the hardships of night-after-night onstage use “with a smile.” its patented varimotion diaphragm uses a unique laminated material to damp high resonance peaks, leading to a quantum leap in audio performance. the transducer is protected by a sturdy wire-mesh cap and can take extremely high sound pressure levels with ease. An integrated stand adapter in combination with the included h440 mounting bracket makes the D40 a highly versatile tool for use on drums, percussion, wind instruments and guitar amps.

sound in motion

the D12 vr is a reference large-diaphragm dynamic microphone with cardioid polar pattern. Designed specifically for kick-drum recording applications, the microphone has a thin diaphragm to enhance the low frequency performance. its warm sound is realized by the original c414 transformer, especially impressive at high signal levels. the D12 vr features three active filter presets to match its sound shape with the kick drum’s character. When activated, the output level is automatically reduced by 10 dB. the filter settings can be controlled using a switch on the microphone body. Without phantom power, the microphone operates in passive mode and delivers the instruments pure sound.

Ultra thin diaphragm for accurate reproduction of the instruments sound Optimized bass chamber for enhanced low frequency performance Patented switchable active-filter presets three sound shapes to match the drums character Original C414 transformers deliver a warm sound especially at high signal levels Cardioid polar pattern rejects overspill from nearby instruments

Dual-thickness Varimotion diapraghm provides crisp, powerful sound in all frequency ranges Highest sound pressure levels up to 156dB for extreme situations without any distortion Cardioid polar pattern for trouble-free use in narrow stage environments Rugged wire-mesh cap and sturdy die-cast metal body withstand tough day-by-day stage use Integrated stand adapter and external bracket for easy mounting on drums and mic stands

Included accessories: microphone bag

Included accessories: microphone bag, h440 Adapter plate

Item Number: D12 vr    3220Z00010

Item Number: D40    2815X00050

Page 68

d112
pRofessional dynamic bass micRophone

C430
high-peRfoRmance miniatuRe condenseR micRophone

C411
high-peRfoRmance miniatuRe condenseR vibRation pickup
Harman Pro Group | 2013

the faBulous egg

for bass drum and bass guitar on stage and in the studio the D112 has earned a well-deserved reputation worldwide as the best kick drum microphone ever made. heavy-footed drummers are thrilled with the D112´s ability to handle up to 160dB Spl without any distortion. the diaphragm has a very low resonance frequency to maintain a solid and powerful response below 100hz. A narrow band presence boost at 4khz punches through dense mixes with forceful impact – no additional eQ needed! the D112 is also an excellent choice for use with bass cabinets and trombones.

small and Bright

for cymbals and overhead recording on stage and in the studio the c430 high-performnce condenser microphone is specifically designed for cymbal and overhead miking. the frequency response of the c430 ensures a uniquely crisp sound which often reduces the need for external eQs. With its extremely compact external dimensions, the c430 microphone will keep a low profile in any application without compromising audio quality. With the included SA60 adapter, it mounts securely on all commercial microphone stands.

feel the viBe

for acoustic guitar and other string instruments on stage and in the studio

the c411 is a miniature vibration pickup for acoustic guitar, mandolin, violin and most other string instruments. its integrated condenser capsule will reproduce the sound of the instrument clearly and without coloration. the c411 ultralight pickup (18g/0.6oz) can be easily attached on or near the bridge with the included nonmarking, solvent-free adhesive pad without changing the balance of the instrument. the c411 is available in two versions. the c411 pp features a mpAv standard Xlr connector while the c411 l provides a professional three-pin mini Xlr connector that fits the body-pack transmitters of all AKG wireless microphone systems.

Instrumental mIcrophones

Section:

02

Large diaphragm dynamic microphone delivers accurate ultradeep frequencies Bass resonance volume chamber for unique, punchy sound Reference dynamic capsule withstands extremely high sound pressure levels up to 160dB Spl Integrated hum compensation coil for the cleanest sound Established as an industry-standard kick drum microphone on stages worldwide, day by day for over 30 years

Extremely compact dimensions low profile for critical, optically demanding situations Cardioid condenser capsule for detailed pickup of unique individual timbres Genuine AKG capsule for the legendary sound, made in vienna Phantom or battery powering options works with 9-52v phantom power SA60 standadapter included for secure mounting on standard mic stands

Condenser transducer in sealed enclosure for clear and uncolored sound Ultralight vibration pickup does not change the balance of the instrument

Included accessories: microphone bag, Adhesive compound

Item Number: c411 l 2571Z00030

Included accessories: SA60 Stand adapter

Included accessories: microphone bag, SA60 Stand adapter, W32 Windscreen

c411 pp

2571Z00040

Item Number: D112    2220X00010

Item Number: c430    2795X00010

for use with B29 l, mpA vl and all AKG body-pack transmitters with standard Xlr connector for phantom powering

Page 69

C519
pRofessional miniatuRe clip-on condenseR micRophone

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 70

horn section liBeration

for brass and woodwind instruments on stage and in studio the c519 professional miniature condenser microphone clips gently onto the bell of a trumpet, saxophone, trombone, tuba, didgeridoo or any other wind instrument. its tight cardioid polar pattern makes the c519 an ideal tool for use near monitor wedges, and its flat frequency response delivers a natural, powerful and clear sound. the mpAv from c519 m features an integrated, switchable bass cut for adjusting the microphone’s frequency response. the c519 ml package includes the unique A400 adapter plate for easy mounting onto wireless body-pack transmitters pt40/45/450/470.

Cardioid polar pattern allows operation close to stage monitors Integrated transducer shock mount for efficient rejection of mechanical noise Rubberized mounting clip for firm, gentle fit on a wide variety of instruments Rugged, highly stable gooseneck for precise placement of the microphone Detachable microphone cable easy to install and service

Included accessories: microphone bag, W44 Windscreen

Item Number: c519 m 3065X00010 c519 ml 3065X00020

for external phantom powering for use with B29 l, mpA v-l and all AKG body-pack transmitters

C518
pRofessional miniatuRe clamp-on condenseR micRophone

C516 Ml
pRofessional miniatuRe condenseR instRument micRophone
Harman Pro Group | 2013

slave to the rhythm

for drums and percussion on stage and in the studio the c518 professional miniature clamp-on microphone is the ultimate tool for recording of drums and percussion. its cardioid polar pattern rejects overspill from nearby instruments. A continuously adjustable vise-type clamp makes it easy to fix the microphone securely on the rim of drums or percussion instruments. A special snap-on stabilizer keeps the gooseneck in a defined position. the mpAv from c518 m features an integrated, switchable bass cut for adjusting the microphone’s frequency response. the c518 ml package includes the unique A400 adapter plate for easy mounting onto wireless body-pack transmitters pt40/45/450/470.

mighty micromic

for miking up accordions, guitars and pianos the c516 ml professional miniature instrumental microphone, part of the micromics family, is designed for use on accordions, pianos, guitar speakers and keyboard/organ cabinets. using two c516 mls (one on the bass and one on the treble side) and an optional B29 l battery power supply is the ideal way to mic up an accordion. the c516 ml comes with a wide variety of mounting materials, such as screws, adhesive pads and adapter plates, for easy installation on the instrument or amp.

MicroMics

Section:

02

Cardioid polar pattern rejects overspill from nearby instruments Full-metal housing with shock mount protects the precious capsule from hard beats Integrated mounting clamp for safe fit on a wide variety of instruments Included gooseneck holder always keeps the microphone in optimum position Detachable microphone cable easy to install and service

Cardioid polar pattern for problem-free use with high ambient noise rejection Flexible shock mount for efficient suppression of mechanical and body noise Rugged, highly stable gooseneck for precise placement of the microphone Detachable microphone cable easy to install and service Established as an industry-standard accordion mic on stages worldwide, day by day for decades

Included accessories: microphone bag, W44 Windscreen, h518 Drum bracket

Item Number: c518 m c518 ml

3064X00010 3064X00020

for external phantom powering for use with B29 l, mpA v-l and all AKG body-pack transmitters

Included accessories: microphone bag, W44 Windscreen, countersunk bolts (3 x 30mm), Self-tapping screws (2.9 x 13mm), Double-sided adhesive rubber plate, A400 Adaptor platea, Adhesive compound, h516 mount plate

Item Number: c516 ml    3063X00020

Page 71

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 72

druM set big ii
RefeRence dRum micRophone set

the Best for the Best
for drummers and bands on stage the Drum Set Big ii reference drum microphone set contains everything you need to professionally mike up or record a drum kit. the included microphones represent a “best of” selection containing legendary AKG mics for drummers and other instrument-miking applications: 1 x D112 bass drum microphone 2 x c1000 S for overheads and more 4 x c518 m for toms and snare the D112 has earned a well-deserved reputation worldwide as the best kick-drum microphone ever made. the versatile c1000 S is ideally suited for all kinds of recording and live-sound applications. the c518 m is the ultimate miniature condenser microphone for drums and percussion. this complete set comes in a protective aluminum carrying case.

Best of drum microphone kit includes one kick-drum, two overhead and four clip-on microphones Roadworthy, rugged aluminum carrying case for easy transport and storage Complete with all microphone clamps and stand adapters for plug and play

Item number: Drum Set Big ii 2581X00120

Microphone packs

Harman Pro Group | 2013

rhyThM pAck
pRofessional dRum micRophone set

groove pAck
high-peRfoRmance dRum micRophone set

the perfect pack

for drummers, percussionists and bands on stage the rhythm pack professional drum microphone set contains everything you need to professionally pick up a complete drum set. more than this, the microphones can be used for miking percussion, bass and guitar amps, brass, woodwind and lots of other instruments. the included microphones represent a selection of valuable tools: 1 x D112 bass drum microphone 2 x c430 for overheads 3 x D40 for toms, snare and more the D112 has earned a well-deserved reputation worldwide as the best kick drum microphone ever made. the versatility of the D40 will stand up to night-after-night onstage use. the c430 is compact with a uniquely crisp sound. this complete set comes in a protective aluminum carrying case.

the unBeataBle six-pack

for drummers and bands on stage and in the rehearsal room the perception Groove pack is a high-performance microphone starter kit with a sensational price/performance ratio. it contains everything you need to perfectly capture the sound of a complete drum set. the microphones can also be used for miking percussion, bass and guitar amps, brass, woodwind and lots of other instruments. the p17 overhead mics can be used for a quick stereo recording of your band’s rehearsal session. the Groove pack contains the following six high-performance microphones from the perception live series: 1 x p2 bass drum microphone 2 x p17* for overheads 3 x p4 for toms and snare the complete set comes in a protective aluminum carrying case. *the p17 is technically identical to the p170 and is not available as a single unit.

Section:

02

Complete drum-kit microphone pack including four dynamic and two condenser overhead microphones Roadworthy, rugged aluminum carrying case for easy transport and storage Complete with all microphone clamps and stand adapters for plug and play

Complete drum-kit microphone pack including four dynamic and two true condenser overhead microphones Roadworthy, rugged aluminum carrying case for easy transport and storage Complete with all microphone clamps and stand adapters for plug and play

Item number: rhythm pack 2581X00130

Item number: Groove pack 3100h00200

Page 73

p5
high-peRfoRmance dynamic vocal micRophone

p4
high-peRfoRmance dynamic instRument micRophone

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 74

for lead vocals

get the lead

for drums, percussion, wind instruments and guitar amps the perception p4 high-performance dynamic instrumental microphone delivers intense sound for use on drums, percussion, wind instruments and guitar amps. the cardioid polar pattern makes it very easy to use, as it focuses on sound in front of the microphone while reducing feedback and unwanted noise from behind. the perception p4 comes in a solid metal case to withstand tough day-by-day stage use. An integrated stand adapter for snare, tom-tom and the like makes this microphone highly versatile and easy to use. the package also includes a zip bag for safe transport and storage.

let´s get loud

the perception p5 high-performance dynamic vocal microphone delivers powerful sound for lead vocals. its supercardioid polar pattern ensures utmost gain before feedback and ambient noise suppression, even on the noisiest stage. the perception p5 comes in a heavy-duty metal body to withstand tough stage performances. An integrated windscreen efficiently eliminates pop and wind noise. the microphone is available with (p5 S) or without (p5) on/off switch. the package includes a stand adapter and a zip bag.

High feedback suppression with supercardiod polar pattern for trouble-free use with on-stage monitoring Integrated windscreen for elimination of pops and wind noise 24-carat gold-plated XLR connector For optimum conductivity and resistance to corrosion Rugged wire-mesh cap and full metal body withstand every live performance Complete with stand adapter and zip bag for daily use and easy transport

For sound pressure levels up to 157dB handles extremely loud instruments without any distortion Built-in hum compensation coil rejects emc noise for the cleanest sound Cardioid polar pattern for trouble-free use in narrow-stage environments Flat and sweet frequency response for neutral reproduction of your instrument’s sound Integrated stand adapter and external bracket for easy mounting on drums and mic stands

Included accessories: microphone bag, SA45 table stand

Included accessories: microphone bag, h440 Adapter plate

Item Number: p5 3100h00110 p5 S 3100h00120

Item Number: p4    3100h00130 with switch

p3 s
high-peRfoRmance dynamic micRophone

p2
high-peRfoRmance dynamic bass micRophone
Harman Pro Group | 2013

rage hard

for backing vocals, guitar and wind instruments the perception p3 S is a high-performance dynamic microphone ideal for backing vocals, guitar and wind instruments. its cardioid polar pattern picks up sound from in front of the microphone while reducing feedback and unwanted noise from behind. the perception p3 S provides a sturdy metal case and wire-mesh grille for exceptional ruggedness. the microphone offers a convenient on/off switch for noiseless muting.

gimme some Bass

for kick drum, deep brass and bass amp miking the perception p2 high-performance dynamic bass microphone delivers a profound, high-energy low end for use on kick drums, trombones and bass amps. its cardioid polar pattern reduces feedback and crosstalk coming from other instruments behind the microphone. the perception p2 comes in a rugged, all-metal housing to withstand tough on-the-road conditions. An integrated stand adapter makes the microphone very easy to use. the package also includes a carrying case for safe transport and storage.

PeRCePtIOn lIVe MICROPHOneS

Section:

02

Cardioid polar pattern optimum feedback rejection for trouble-free use on small stages Integrated windscreen for elimination of pops and wind noise Rugged wire-mesh cap and sturdy die-cast metal body withstand tough day-to-day stage use 24-carat gold-plated XLR connector for optimum conductivity and resistance to corrosion On/off switch for noiseless muting

Powerful sound with profound bass range especially tuned for low-pitched instruments High-performance capsule withstands extreme sound pressure levels Built-in hum compensation coil rejects emc noise for the cleanest sound Rugged wire-mesh cap and sturdy die-cast metal body withstand tough day-to-day stage use Integrated stand adapter for easy mounting on mic stands

Included accessories: microphone bag, SA45 table stand

Included accessories: microphone bag

Item Number: p3 S    3100h00140

Item Number: p2    3100h00150

Page 75

d88 s
dynamic vocal micRophone

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 76

tough shouter
for lead vocals on stage the D88 S is a dynamic handheld microphone for lead vocalists. its super cardioid polar pattern guarantees optimal gain before feedback and makes the voice cut through the mix more easily. the robust capsule can handle the high sound pressure levels of loud voices without any distortion. its heavy-duty metal body will take rough handling. the D88 S offers a convenient on/off switch for noiseless muting. the package contains a rugged stand adapter and a 5m (16ft) microphone cable with professional Xlr connectors.

Supercardioid polar pattern for maximum feedback suppression Handles highest sound pressure levels for pickup of extreme loud voices without distortion Internal shock-mount of microphone capsule eliminates any handling noise All-inclusive package contains stand adapter and microphone cable with Xlr connectors

Included accessories: SA44 Stand adapter, Xlr cable 5m (16ft)

Item Number: D88 S    3100h00080

d55 s
dynamic plug-and-play micRophone

d44 s
dynamic kaRaoke micRophone
Harman Pro Group | 2013

massive metal mic
for vocals and speech on stage the D55 S is a dynamic plug-and-play microphone, ideal for jobs ranging from hi-fi recording and karaoke to live speech or speech recording applications. the cardioid polar pattern makes it very easy to use, as it reduces feedback and unwanted noise from stage monitors. the microphone provides a robust metal case and wire-mesh grille for exceptional ruggedness. the D55 S is a true all-around microphone with an integrated on/ off switch and a fixed 5m (16ft) cable with professional mini jack connector and 1/4" adapter.

your first microphone
for vocal and speech applications the D44 S is a dynamic karaoke microphone, ideal for ambitious vocalists as well as for speech applications. the cardioid polar pattern makes it very easy to use as it reduces feedback and unwanted noise from stage monitors. the D44 S is a true all-around microphone with an impact-resistant plastic body, an on/off switch and a fixed 5m (16ft) cable with standard mini jack connector and 1/4" adapter.

CCS MiCrophoneS

Section:

02

Cardioid polar pattern for trouble-free use on small stages Sturdy die-cast metal body withstands tough, everday stage use On/off switch for noiseless muting Mini jack connector including 1/4" adapter connects directly to a mixer, recording device and pc All-inclusive package contains stand adapter and 5m (16ft) microphone cable

Cardioid polar pattern for problem-free use On/off switch for noiseless muting Mini jack connector including 1/4" adapter a choice of two standard connectors for plug and play All-inclusive package contains stand adapter and 5m (16ft) microphone cable

Included accessories: SA44 Stand adapter, jack cable fixed 5m (16ft)

Included accessories: SA44 Stand adapter, jack cable fixed 5m (16ft)

Item Number: D44 S    3100h00030

Item Number: D55 S    3100h00040

Page 77

dMs700 v2
RefeRence digital wiReless micRophone system for theater, conference, live-production and toursound applications

011000010110101101100111

coordination and monitoring of multichannel systems by pc software System Architect™, Apple iphone/ipad/ipod® or Soundcraft vi consoles. For easy configuration of large systems, all components are available individually.
All Products share these features:

AKG’s revolutionary DmS700 v2, the reference digital wireless microphone system, is designed to deliver premium digital audio quality and quick-and-easy operation. With a bandwidth of up to 155mhz, the transmitters and receiver give the user the necessary flexibility for even the most crowded radio environment. the state-of-the-art 512-bit audio encryption offers the highest security available for courtroom, boardroom and other confidential meeting environments. An optional network remote control allows frequency

Up to 40 channels for simultaneous use high-end antenna system and multichannel accessories available HiQnet network remote control and monitoring from pc via harman System Architect™ software, Apple iphone/ ipad/ipod® or Soundcraft vi consoles Digital wireless audio transmission eliminates any distortion and significant noise level 155MHz ultrawide frequency range ideal for worldwide touring in frequency-crowded environments 512-bit encryption state-of-the-art protection for sensitive audio information

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

dsr700 v2
RefeRence digital wiReless stationaRy ReceiveR
the DSr700 v2 reference two-channel digital wireless receiver offers an ultra-wide bandwidth of up to 155mhz for reliable operation with great flexibility. it comes in a durable, 19" housing and works with all DmS700 v1 and v2 transmitters. the receiver finds interference-free channels and synchronizes the corresponding setup data to the transmitter via infrared. the environment scan converts the DSr700 v2 into a spectrum analyser. it scans the receiver’s entire frequency band for active radio frequencies and displays the spectrum.

Two channels in a compact 19" metal casing for secure rack-mounting and transportation Graphic spectrum analyzer provides a clear overview of radio frequencies User-friendly operation fast and intuitive system setup Integrated digital signal processing with low-cut filter, three-band equalizer, dbx® compressor and dbx® limiter Analog and digital audio outputs 2 x balanced Xlr, 2 x unbalanced jack connectors and AeS/ eBu-output with world clock input

Included accessories: 2 x Bnc uhF Antennas, iec power chord eu, iec power chord uS, Front mount cable rF cable

Page 78

dhT700 v2
RefeRence digital wiReless handheld tRansmitteR
the Dht700 v2 reference digital wireless handheld transmitter comes with a robust and slim metal body and works with the receivers of the DmS700 v2 digital wireless system. the Dht700 v2 is available in three different versions. With AKG ́s legendary D5, D7 dynamic or c5 condenser microphone heads, it delivers a powerful sound, even on the noisiest stage. the Dht700 v2 provides an ultra-wide bandwidth of 155mhz and a selectable radio output power of 10, 20, 30 or 50mW. the built-in helix antenna provides reliable wireless audio transmission. the state-of-the-art 512-bit encryption technology keeps the audio signal secure against tapping.

Robust metal housing rugged and reliable construction

MUltICHAnnel WIReleSS SySteMS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Helix antenna optimized signal strength with switchable rF power D5, D7 or C5 microphones available in different styles for demanding vocals Two-hour quick-charging of standard rechargeable nimh batteries by integrated charging contacts Quick and easy setup via infrared data communication

Included accessories: Stand adapter, 2 x AA Batteries, W3004 Windscreen

Section:

dpT700 v2
RefeRence digital wiReless body-pack tRansmitteR
the Dpt700 v2 reference digital wireless body-pack transmitter provides an ultra-wide bandwidth of 155mhz and a selectable radio output power of 10, 20, 30 or 50mW. it can be programmed remotely via infrared data transmission from the DSr700 v2 receiver. the state-of-the-art 512-bit encryption technology keeps the audio signal secure against tapping. the Dpt700 v2 provides an optional external mute switch, allowing muting of the audio even when the transmitter is hard to reach. the three-pin mini Xlr audio input is compatible with any lavalier and head-worn microphones and provides a bias voltage of 5v.

02

Switchable radio output power for best signal quality in multichannel applications Professional three-pin mini XLR connector compatible with headset, lavalier and instrument microphones Two-hour quick-charging of standard rechargeable nimh batteries via integrated charging contacts Quick and easy setup via infrared data communication from the receiver Remote microphone mute through external mute switch connector

Included accessories: 2 x AA Batteries, Bc400 Belt clip, Bc700 Belt clip

Page 79

wMs4500
RefeRence wiReless micRophone system for large theatre, installed sound and tour sound applications

stress free

iphone/ipad/ipod® or via Soundcraft vi consoles. For easy configuration of customized systems, all system components are available individually.
All Products share these features:

the WmS4500 analog reference wireless microphone system provides highest channel quantity, maximum reliability and easy setup. combining several frequency bands allows to operate up to 70 channels simultaneously providing an enormous headroom of security for channel management. in combination with the outstanding audio quality WmS4500 gained worldwide recognition as a reliable workhorse in huge installations and on tour. An optional network remote control allows frequency coordination and monitoring of multi-channel systems via pc software System Architect™, Apple

Auto Setup, Environment Scan, and Rehearsal functions for quick and easy setup HiQnet network remote control and monitoring from pc via harman System Architect™ software, Apple iphone/ ipad/ipod® or Soundcraft vi consoles Up to 70 simultaneous channels for safe channel management in huge productions Supreme audio quality for highly demanding vocals, guitar and e-bass Pilot Tone transmission for transmitter battery status monitoring and tone code squelch

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

sr4500
RefeRence wiReless stationaRy ReceiveR
the Sr4500 analog true diversity reference wireless receiver provides maximum ease of use with an automatic setup function and scan of the radio frequency environment. the rehearsal mode supports the engineer during soundchecks with information on the systems signal quality. the programmable status monitor shows all relevant system information on an illuminated multicolor leD ring. its precise battery life readout in hours is a valuable advantage in wireless applications. A wide range of professional antenna splitters, power supplies and high-quality remote antennas is available to set up a reliable wireless system, even in a large area.

Rugged half-rack metal housing for flexible, space-efficient system configurations Environment scan and rehearsal functions for secure operation even in crowded radio frequency environments Backlit display and programmable multicolor status ring for clear, selectable warning signals Logic input and output connectivity for external systems, such as AmX, crestron, Dmm External antenna connectors connect splitters, remote antennas and long cable runs to a large multichannel system

Included accessories: rmu4000 rack mount unit, 2 x Bnc uhF Antennas

Page 80

RefeRence wiReless handheld tRansmitteR
the ht4500 is an analog reference wireless handheld transmitter that connects to a choice of four different microphones to cover a wide range of applications. the unique dipole-antenna design ensures reliable transmission even when one pole of the antenna is covered completely by the user's hand. the pilot tone continuously sends transmitter data, including mute switch position and remaining battery life to the receiver. the ht4500 offers an extended battery lifetime of 15 hours with two standard AA alkaline batteries. With integrated charging contacts, the optional Bp4000 battery pack can be charged inside the transmitter. the readout of its exact battery life in hours is a valuable advantage in wireless applications.

Interchangeable microphone heads a variety of premium dynamic and condenser vocal microphones available Leading-edge dipole-antenna technology optimum performance even when the antenna is covered Up to 50mW transmission power maximum radio signal strength for long-distance applications 15 hours of battery life with two standard AA alkaline batteries Remaining battery lifetime in hours real-time display of the remaining operating time

Multichannel Wireless systeMs

hT4500

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Included accessories: 2 x AA Batteries, Stand adapter

Section:

pT4500
RefeRence wiReless body-pack tRansmitteR
the pt4500 is an analog reference wireless body-pack transmitter with supreme wireless audio quality for instrumental and vocal use. the pilot tone prevents unexpected system startup noise, continuously sending transmitter data, including mute switch position and remaining battery life, to the receiver. An optional rmS4000 external mute switch allows the user to mute the transmitter remotely. WmS4500 transmitters offer an unmatched battery life of 15 hours with two standard AA-size alkaline batteries. With the integrated charging contacts, the optional Bp4000 battery-pack can be charged inside the transmitter.

02

Supreme audio quality best with guitar, electric bass and highly demanding vocals Up to 50mW transmission power maximum radio signal strength for long-distance applications 15 hour battery life with two standard AA-size alkaline batteries Remaining battery life in hours real-time display of operating time left Integrated charging contacts for quick charging of Bp4000 battery-packs inside the transmitter

Included accessories: 2 x AA Batteries, Bc4000 Belt clip

Page 81

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

C535 Wl1
RefeRence condenseR micRophone head
for high demanding lead vocals

C5 Wl1
pRofessional condenseR micRophone head
for lead and backing vocals

the wireless voice

gold plated wireless sound

the c535 Wl1 reference handheld condenser vocal microphone head is a classic legendary microphone that we did “our way”. it provides the ultimate combination of excellent, highly detailed audio and exceptional ruggedness. the c353 Wl1 microphone head brings this classic sound to the wireless world. it is designed to fit the ht4500 handheld transmitter.

With the c5 Wl1 professional condenser vocal microphone head your voice will cut through the loudest mix – on any stage. its cardioid polar pattern ensures maximum gain before feedback and has been optimized for use with in-ear monitor systems. the c5 Wl1 microphone head provides a gold plated transducer case to protect the capsule from corrosion and humidity. it is designed to fit the ht4500 handheld transmitter.

One of the most legendary vocal stage microphones valuated by iconic artists for more than four decades Delicate gold plated condenser capsule for detailed pickup of unique individual timbres Self-cleaning contacts ensure reliable operation and long life

Delicate cardioid condenser capsule for detailed pickup of unique individual timbres 24-carat gold plated transducer case for maximum resistance to corrosion and humidity Self-cleaning contacts ensure reliable operation and long life

Item Number: c535 Wl1    2782Z00150

Item Number: c5 Wl1    3082X00020

Page 82

Multichannel Wireless systeMs

Harman Pro Group | 2013

d7 Wl1
RefeRence dynamic micRophone head

d5 Wl1
pRofessional dynamic micRophone head

wireless powersound
for loud and demanding lead vocals the D7 Wl1 reference dynamic vocal microphone head creates the subtle and opened sound of a condenser capsule with the powerful resonance of a dynamic microphone. the patented dual layer varimotiontm diaphragms can vibrate unhindered which results in an extraordinary crisp and clean sound. the unique laminated material damps high resonance peaks in the frequency response. in combination with the tight, supercardioid polar pattern enables the D7´s outstanding high gain before feedback. the D7 Wl1 features a precision metal dust filter that provides a consistent protection for the diaphragm, ensuring an extra long life. it is designed to fit the ht4500 handheld transmitter.

wireless cuts
for lead and backing vocals the D5 Wl1 premium dynamic vocal microphone head for lead and backing vocals delivers a powerful sound even on the noisiest stage. its frequency independent supercardioid polar pattern ensures maximum gain before feedback. the D5 Wl1 stands for a crisp sound that cuts through every mix. it is designed to fit the ht 4500 handheld transmitter.

Section:

02

Dual thickness VarimotionTM diaphragm provides a subtle and opened sound in all frequency ranges Highest feedback suppression laminate diaphragm material damps critical resonance peaks Integrated hum compensation coil for utmost clean sound Precision metal dust filter protects the capsule from sound changing pollution Self-cleaning contacts ensure reliable operation and long life

Patented Laminated VarimotionTM Diaphragm for crisp sound that cuts through every mix High feedback suppression with supercardiod polar pattern for trouble-free use with on stage monitoring Integrated pop filter for elimination of pops and wind-noise Self-cleaning contacts ensure reliable operation and long life

Item Number: D5 Wl1    3082X00010

Item Number: D7 Wl1    3082X00030

Page 83

WMs4500 sets
wMs4500
d7 set
WmS4500 is a reference multichannel wireless microphone system providing the highest channel quantity, maximum reliability and easy setup. the vocal Set D7 includes a ht4500 handheld transmitter featuring a D7 reference dynamic vocal microphone which combines the subtle and open sound of a condenser capsule with the powerful resonance of a dynamic microphone.

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 84

WMS4500, D7 Set package includes:
• • • •

1 x SR4500 True-diversity receiver 1 x HT4500 Handheld transmitter 1 x D7 WL1 Reference dynamic microphone head 1 x Stand adapter, 2 x AA size batteries, 2 x Antennas, 1 x rack mounting kit, 1 x power supply

wMs4500
instRumental set
WmS4500 is a reference multichannel wireless microphone system providing the highest channel quantity, maximum reliability and easy setup. the instrumental Set includes a pt4500 body-pack transmitter with supreme wireless audio quality in a rugged metal housing. the package contains a professional instrument cable to safely connect the transmitter with electric guitar, electric bass, keyboard and other electronic instruments.

The WMS4500 Instrumental Set package includes:
• • • •

1 x SR4500 True-diversity receiver 1 x PT4500 Body-pack transmitter 1 x mKG l instrument cable 1 x Stand adapter, 2 x AA size batteries, 2 x Antennas, 1 x rack mounting kit, 1 x power supply

ck77 set
WmS4500 is a reference multichannel wireless microphone system providing highest channel quantity, maximum reliability and easy setup. the cK77 Set includes a rugged pt4500 body-pack transmitter and a moisture resistant, miniature lavalier microphone. the cK77 Wr-l’s ruggedness and superior sound quality make it an excellent tool for theatre and broadcast applications.

WMS4500 CK77 Set package includes:
• • • •

1 x SR4500 True-diversity receiver 1 x PT4500 Body-pack transmitter 1 x CK77 Professional miniature Lavalier microphone 1 x Stand adapter, 2 x AA size batteries, 2 x Antennas, 1 x rack mounting kit, 1 x power supply

Multichannel Wireless systeMs

wMs4500

Harman Pro Group | 2013

wMs4500
hc577 set
WmS4500 is a reference multichannel wireless microphone system providing the highest channel quantity, maximum reliability and easy setup. the hc577 Set includes a rugged pt4500 body-pack transmitter with supreme audio quality. the package includes a hc577 premium skin colour head-worn microphone for on-stage use. it´s patented body design protects the microphone from moisture and perspiration and the unique dual diaphragm capsule cancels out mechanical and cable noise.

Section:

WMS4500 HC577 Set package includes:
• • • •

02

1 x SR4500 True-diversity receiver 1 x PT4500 Body-pack transmitter 1 x HC577 Reference miniature head-worn microphone 1 x Stand adapter, 2 x AA size batteries, 2 x Antennas, 1 x rack mounting kit, 1 x power supply

wMs4500
cm311 set (available in usa only)
WmS4500 is a reference multichannel wireless microphone system providing the highest channel quantity, maximum reliability and easy setup. the cm311 Set includes a pt4500 body-pack transmitter with supreme wireless audio quality in a rugged metal housing. the enclosed cm311 reference head-worn microphone is designed for touring and live sound applications. it provides the best sound for handheld microphones - full, clear, and distortion-free, even with the loudest singers.

WMS4500 CM311 Set package includes:
• • • •

1 x SR4500 True-diversity receiver 1 x PT4500 Body-pack transmitter 1 x CM311 Reference head-worn microphone 1 x Stand adapter, 2 x AA size batteries, 2 x Antennas, 1 x rack mounting kit, 1 x power supply

Page 85

pr4500 eng
RefeRence wiReless eng/efp system for ENG/EFP, event video and videography applications

heavy-duty moBility

exceptional transmission stability and long transmitter and receiver battery life for all enG, eFp and live reporting situations.
All Products share these features:

the WmS4500 reference wireless microphone system provides the highest channel quantity, maximum reliability and easy setup. the outstanding audio quality WmS4500 gained worldwide recognition as a reliable workhorse in broadcast, huge installations and on tour. the pr4500 enG system comprises the pr4500 enG camera receiver as well as compatible WmS4500 transmitters and microphones, allowing for the setup of a compact, rugged wireless system for use with any camcorder, DSlr camera or other A/v equipment. it ensures unparalleled ease of use,

Two-antenna diversity for highest reliability even in a crowded rF environment Heavy-duty metal housing meets the tough requirements in field productions Up to 12 hrs of operation time security for long enG and live reporting situations Headphone output for signal monitoring Superior radio and audio performance for highly demanding applications

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

pr4500 eng
RefeRence wiReless cameRa ReceiveR
for ENG and broadcast studio applications the pr4500 enG is a reference wireless diversity camera receiver, providing maximum ease of use with an automatic setup function and scan of the radio frequency environment. the outstanding audio quality with a very high signal to noise performance avoids any disturbing ground noise whilst recording. A separate headphone output provides a direct monitoring possibility and the three step leD audio meter shows signal quality. All relevant system information is shown on a prominent illuminated display. its precise battery life readout is a valuable advantage during demanding field work.

Auto setup and environment scan for quick and easy setup Up to 18 simultaneous channels for safe channel management in huge productions

Page 86

pr4500 eng
set/ht
WmS4500 is a reference multichannel wireless system providing the highest channel quantity, maximum reliability and easy setup. the pr4500 enG Set/ ht includes a pr4500 enG portable wireless camera receiver and a ht4500 handheld transmitter with an interchangeable D5-Wl1 dynamic microphone head. in addition the package contains a hot-shoe adapter and two different connecting cables for the receiver so you can use this complete wireless microphone system for a wide range of applications.

PR4500 ENG Set/HT package includes:

Multichannel Wireless systeMs

Harman Pro Group | 2013

• • • •

1 x PR4500 ENG Camara diversity receiver 1 x HT4500 Handheld transmitter 1 x D5 WL1 Professional dynamic microphone head 1 x hot shoe mounting adapter, 1 x Xlr connection cable, 1 x mini jack connection cable, 1 x Bc4500 Belt clip, 4 x AA size batteries

Section:

02

pr4500 eng
set/pt
WmS4500 is a reference multichannel wireless system providing the highest channel quantity, maximum reliability and easy setup. the pr4500 enG Set/pt includes a pr4500 enG portable wireless camera receiver; a pt4500 body-pack transmitter with belt clip; and a cK99l condenser lavalier microphone. in addition the package contains a hot-shoe adapter and two different connecting cables for the receiver so you can use this complete wireless microphone system for a wide range of applications.

PR4500 ENG Set/PT package includes:
• • • •

1 x PR4500 ENG Camara diversity receiver 1 x PT4500 Body-pack transmitter 1 x CK99 L Condenser Lavalier microphone 1 x hot shoe mounting adapter, 1 x Xlr connection cable, 1 x mini jack connection cable, 2 x Bc4500 Belt clip, 4 x AA size batteries

Page 87

wMs470
for conference, medium theater and houses of worship applications
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

pRofessional wiReless micRophone system

flexiBle and expandaBle

charged while remaining within the transmitter using the optional cu400.
All Products share these features:

WmS470 professional analog wireless microphone system is the best choice for a cost-efficient, high-performance multichannel system. up to 16 channels can be used simultaneously within the same frequency band. the pilot tone prevents the user from unexpected startup noise and it continuously sends transmitter data including low battery information to the receiver. A revolutionary power management allow up to 14 hours of operation with one AA-size lithium battery. if a nimh rechargeable battery is used, it can be

Compatible with WMS4000 accessories for multichannel systems in critical environments 14 hours operation with one single battery lowest operating costs using AA-size lithium dry battery Pilot Tone transmission for transmitter battery status monitoring and tone code squelch Up to 48 simultaneous channels when combining several frequency bands Enhanced automatic setup with channel preview for quick and easy system setup

02

sr470
pRofessional wiReless stationaRy ReceiveR
Sr470 analog space diversity professional wireless receiver comes in a rugged half-rack metal housing. the enhanced Auto Setup, environment Scan and rehearsal mode allows a very quick and easy system setup. the programmable backlight changes color to warn the user of critical operating conditions e.g. transmitter low battery information, audio peaks, or low radio signal strength. A wide range of professional antenna splitters, power supplies, and high quality remote antennas are available to handle complex antenna systems and up to 48 simultaneous wireless channels, even with large covering area.

Enhanced automatic setup with channel preview for quick and easy system setup Pre-coordinated TV channel frequency presets maximum channel density for multichannel systems Environment scan and rehearsal functions for secure operation even in crowded radio frequency environments Programmable multicolor backlight display clear visual information of selectable warning signals External antenna connectors connect splitters, remote antennas and long cable runs to multi channel systems

Included accessories: rmu4000 rack mount unit, 2 x Bnc uhF Antennas, pSu12v lockable 500mA eu/uS/ uK power supply

Page 88

hT470
pRofessional wiReless handheld tRansmitteR
the rugged ht470 is an analog professional wireless handheld transmitter with pilot tone transmission to prevent unexpected startup noise. it continuously sends transmitter data, including low-battery information, to the receiver. An infrared data link in conjunction with the automatic frequency setup makes the ht470 extremely simple to use. the unique dipole-antenna design ensures reliable transmission even when one pole of the antenna is covered completely by the user's hand. An enhanced battery identification automatically detects the used battery type and allows up to 14 hours of operation on one AA-size battery. the display shows the remaining operating time in hours.

Pilot Tone transmission for transmitter battery status monitoring and tone code squelch Leading edge dipole-antenna design optimum performance even when the antenna is covered Infrared synchronization for instant transmitter setup Up to 50mW transmission power maximum radio signal strength for long-distance applications Integrated charging contacts quick charging of a standard nimh battery inside the transmitter

Multichannel Wireless systeMs

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Included accessories: 1 x AA Battery, Stand adapter

Section:

pT470
pRofessional wiReless body-pack tRansmitteR
the pt470 is an analog professional wireless body-pack transmitter in a small, rugged housing. A pilot tone transmission prevents unexpected startup noise, continuously sending transmitter data, including low battery information, to the receiver. An enhanced battery management allows up to 14 hours of operation on a single AA-size battery. With the integrated charging contacts, a standard nimh rechargeable battery can be charged inside the transmitter. An optional rmS4000 external mute switch allows the user to mute the transmitter remotely. its professional mini Xlr audio connector makes the body pack compatible with a broad range of lavalieres and headsets.

02

Pilot tone transmission for transmitter battery status monitoring and tone code squelch Compact, rugged body-pack design for maximum wearing comfort External mute switch connector for remote muting of the microphone Integrated charging contacts for charging of a standard nimh battery inside the transmitter Infrared synchronization for instant transmitter setup

Included accessories: 1 x AA Battery, Bc400 Belt clip

Page 89

WMs470 sets
wMs470
vocal set d5
WmS470 is a professional multichannel wireless microphone system with pilot tone transmission to prevent unwanted noise. the vocal Set D5 includes a ht470 handheld transmitter featuring a dynamic D5 capsule for well-balanced, powerful sound. the space diversity receiver offers both a microphone level and a line level output.

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 90

The WMS470, Vocal Set D5 package includes:
• • •

1 x SR470 Receiver 1 x HT470 Handheld transmitter with D5 capsule 1 x Stand adapter, 1 x rack mount kit, 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 1 x AA size battery, 2 x Antennas

wMs470
vocal set c5
WmS470 is a professional multichannel wireless microphone system with pilot tone transmission to prevent unwanted noise. the vocal Set c5 includes a ht470 handheld transmitter featuring a c5 condenser microphone capsule for clear and detailed voice reproduction. the space diversity receiver offers both a microphone level and a line level output.

The WMS470, Vocal Set C5 package includes:
• • •

1 x SR470 Receiver 1 x HT470 Handheld transmitter with C5 capsule 1 x Stand adapter, 1 x rack mount kit, 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 1 x AA size battery, 2 x Antennas

instRumental set
WmS470 is a professional multichannel wireless microphone system with pilot tone transmission to prevent unwanted noise. the instrumental Set includes a pt470 body-pack transmitter in a compact and rugged housing providing supreme audio quality for demanding guitars and e-basses. the space diversity receiver offers both a microphone level and a line level output.

The WMS470, Instrumental Set package includes:
• • • •

1 x SR470 Receiver 1 x PT470 Body-pack transmitter 1 x mKG l instrument cable 1 x rack mount kit, 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 1 x AA size battery, 2 x Antennas, 1 x Belt clip

MUltICHAnnel WIReleSS SySteMS

wMs470

Harman Pro Group | 2013

wMs470
spoRts set
WmS470 is a professional multichannel wireless microphone system with pilot tone transmission to prevent unwanted noise. the Sport Set includes a pt470 body-pack transmitter in a compact and rugged housing. the package also enclose a c544 l condenser head-worn microphone featuring a cardioid polar pattern and an external shock mount for high mechanical-noise rejection. its moisture shield ensures a high degree of humidity protection for the microphone.

Section:

The WMS470, Sports Set package includes:
• • • •

1 x SR470 Receiver 1 x PT470 Body-pack transmitter 1 x C544 L Head-worn microphone 1 x rack mount kit, 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 1 x AA size battery, 2 x Antennas, 1 x Belt clip

02

wMs470
pResenteR set
WmS470 presenter Set is a professional multichannel wireless microphone system. the enclosed cK99 l cardioid condenser lavalier microphone provides a cardioid polar pattern and a natural sound, with a slight rise above 10khz for added clarity. the package also includes a c555 condenser head-worn microphone featuring a cardioid polar pattern and high intelligibility, even at high ambient noise levels. its moisture shield ensures a high degree of humidity protection for the microphone.

The WMS470, Presenter Set package includes:
• • • • •

1 x SR470 Receiver 1 x PT470 Body-pack transmitter 1 x C555 L Head-worn microphone 1 x CK99 L Lavalier microphone 1 x rack mount kit, 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 1 x AA size battery, 2 x Antennas, 1 x Belt clip

Page 91

ivM4500 ieM
RefeRence wiReless in-eaR-monitoRing system for live applications and professional installations

no compromise

to listen to the audio signals of different channels. An optional network remote control allows frequency coordination and monitoring of multi-channel systems via pc software System Architect™, Apple iphone/ipad/ipod® or via Soundcraft vi consoles.
All Products share these features:

ivm4500 iem is the only wireless in-ear monitoring system featuring an binaural room simulations that provides musicians, vocalists and presenters with a uniquely natural listening experience.
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

Diversity Receiver two matched antennas ensures reliable transmission Sophisticated, narrow RF filter design for best radio signal performance HiQnet network remote control and monitoring from pc via harman software System Architect™, Apple iphone/ ipad/ipod® or Soundcraft vi consoles Patented DSP filter technology for reference sound quality Quick frequency swap function to support monitor engineers

its high-end radio electronic radio circuitry includes a manual radio signal attenuator for more robust radio reception in crowded environments. An enhanced frequency setup shows the number of free channels. integrated preset groups support tv channels and allows the operation of up to 14 channels simultaneously within the same frequency band. A quick frequency swap function supports monitor engineers

02

ssT4500 ieM
RefeRence wiReless in-eaR monitoRing steReo tRansmitteR
SSt4500 iem is a reference wireless in-ear monitoring stereo transmitter for live applications and professional installations. An integrated dbx compressor, different eQ settings, and the unique binaural room simulation algorithms provide outstanding audio performance. its frequency preset banks support tv-channels and ensure easy and reliable frequency coordination. the radio output power can be set to 10, 20, 50 and 100mW (country-dependent). optimized radio output power is important when the in-ear monitor system is used together with a wireless microphone system. the optional network remote control allows frequency coordination and monitoring via pc software System Architect™, iphone/ipad/ipod or via Soundcraft vi consoles. A complete line of accessories allows you to set up an absolutely reliable system with a large covering area.

Patented digital MPX Stereo signal creation for premium S/n ratio and ultra linear frequency response Rugged half 19" all-metal case transmitter for flexible, space-efficient system configurations Up to 14 pre-programmed frequencies per group for quick selection of clean transmission frequencies Integrated digital signal processing with low-cut filter, 3-band equalizer, dbx® compressor and dbx® limiter Unique IVA binaural room simulation for a natural listening experience

Included accessories: rmu4000 rack mount unit, pSu12v lockable 500mA eu/uS/uK power supply, Bnc uhF Antenna

Page 92

RefeRence wiReless in-eaR-monitoRing ReceiveR
Spr4500 iem is a reference wireless diversity in-ear-monitoring receiver for live applications and professional installations. its provides antenna diversity, with two matched antennas, reference radio electronics design and a manual radio signal attenuator for more robust radio reception in crowded environments. Spr4500 iem features an automatic set-up function for finding clean frequencies. the receiver provides a backlit display indicating signal strength and battery status. A central positioned on/off/volume control can be operated intuitively. With the “individual mix”-function a personalized monitor mix can be set up easily. integrated charging contacts allow the optional Bp4000 battery pack to remain inside the receiver while being charged on the cu4000 charger (optional).

Reliable transmission two matched antennas and a new reference radio electronic design Best radio signal performance with manual rF gain control Enhanced automatic setup shows number of free channels and quickly finds a rugged frequency set Reference audio quality powerful headphone amplifier with ultra linear frequency response Individual mix stereo, mono and dual modes

Multichannel Wireless systeMs

spr4500 ieM

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Included accessories: Bc4000 Belt clip Belt clip, 2 x AA Batteries

Section:

02

ip2
high-peRfoRmance in-eaR headphones

tiny phones, huge sound
for in-ear monitoring the ip2 high-performance in-ear headphones provide wide-range sound and excellent isolation to suppress high ambient noise levels, on loud stages, for example. this makes the ip2 an ideal tool for in-ear monitoring applications. thanks to the dynamic driver, it delivers a perfectly contoured bass even at very low frequencies. An integrated sliding cable tie and the soft-rubber sleeves enable the ip2 to adapt to every ear. the ip2 earphones are also included in the AKG professional in-ear monitoring system, the ivm4500.

In-ear, closed-back design for isolation of stage noise High-performance dynamic driver ensures high dynamic range, even at very low frequencies Individual fit with three different sleeves (S, M, L) protective carrying case and bag included

Page 93

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

SRA2 W
Passive directional wide-band UHF antenna
For indoor or outdoor use with short cable lengths The SRA2 W is a passive directional wide-band UHF antenna that can be used as a transmitting or receiving antenna for wireless microphones and in-ear monitoring systems. It operates in a frequency range from 500MHz to 865MHz and provides a covering angle of 70° and an antenna gain of 6dB. The SRA2 W is built in a passive technology and requires no powering. It works for short cable lengths up to 10m and supports a professional BNC connector. The antenna has waterproof construction and can be used for indoor and outdoor applications. With the included universal thread adapter, it can be mounted on floor stands with 3/8" or 5/8" screws.

SRA2 B/W
active directional wide-band UHF antenna
for indoor or outdoor use with long cable lengths

Universal directivity

closer to the hot spot

The SRA2 B/W is an active directional wide-band UHF receiving antenna for use with wireless microphone systems. It operates in a frequency range from 500MHz to 865MHz, provides a covering angle of 70° and has a built-in amplifier. With a total gain of 22dB, it compensates for long cable runs. In combination with dedicated antenna components, it works for cable lengths up to 300m and can be remotely powered through the antenna cable. The antenna has waterproof construction and can be used for indoor and outdoor applications. With the included universal thread adapter, it can be mounted on floor stands with 3/8" or 5/8" screws.

Works as transmitting and receiving antenna a partner for wireless microphones and in-ear monitoring Operates in an ultra-wide frequency range from 500MHz to 865MHz for universal use 70° covering angle to reduce unwanted radio signals 6dB antenna gain for long-distance applications Water-resistant construction to withstand extreme weather conditions

Integrated high-performance antenna booster 22dB total gain for cable lengths up to 300m (1000 ft) Remote powering via the antenna cable eliminates any extra installation effort Operates in an ultra-wide frequency range from 500MHz to 865MHz for universal use 70° covering angle to reduce unwanted radio signals Water-resistant construction to withstand extreme weather conditions

Item Number: SRA2 W    3009Z00150

Item Number: SRA2 B/W    3009Z00160

Page 94

AntennA SyStemS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

RA4000 W
Passive omnidirectional wide-band UHF antenna

RA4000 B/W
active omnidirectional wide-band UHF antenna

the all-aroUnder

for indoor or outdoor use with short cable lengths The RA4000 W is a passive omnidirectional wide-band UHF antenna that can be used as a transmitting or receiving antenna for wireless microphones and in-ear monitoring systems. It operates in a frequency range from 500MHz to 865MHz, providing a covering angle of 360° and an antenna gain of 1dB. The RA4000 W is built with passive technology and requires no powering. It works for short cable lengths up to 10m and supports a professional BNC connector. The antenna has waterproof construction and can be used for indoor and outdoor applications. Using the included universal stand adapter, the RA4000 W can be mounted on floor stands with 3/8" or 5/8" screws.

extra power

for indoor or outdoor use with long cable lengths The RA4000 B/W is an active omnidirectional wide-band UHF receiving antenna for use with wireless microphone systems. It operates in a frequency range from 500MHz to 865MHz, providing a covering angle of 360° and a total gain of 18dB. The RA4000 B/W has a built-in amplifier to compensate long cable runs. With dedicated antenna components, it works for cable lengths up to 300m. The RA4000 B/W is remotely powered through the antenna cable. The antenna has waterproof construction and can be used for indoor and outdoor applications. Using the included universal stand adapter, the RA4000 B/W can be mounted on floor stands with 3/8" or 5/8" screws.

Section:

02

Works as a transmitting or receiving antenna a partner for wireless microphones and in-ear monitoring Operates in an ultrawide frequency range from 500MHz to 865MHz for universal use Water-resistant construction to withstand extreme weather conditions

Integrated high-performance antenna booster 17dB total gain for cable lengths up to 300m (1000 ft) Remote powering via the antenna cable eliminates any extra installation effort Operates in an ultrawide frequency range from 500MHz to 865MHz for universal use Water-resistant construction to withstand extreme weather conditions

Included accessories: Stand adapter

Item Number: RA4000 W    2632Z00310

Included accessories: Stand adapter

Item Number: RA4000 B/W    2632Z00320

Page 95

FlooRpAd AntennA
Passive directional near Field antenna

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 96

stick aroUnd

for lecture spaces, worship sanctuaries and other close range applications The FLOORPAD is a passive directional near field UHF antenna designed for close range applications in highly congested RF environments. It can be used as a transmitting or receiving antenna for wireless microphones and in-ear monitoring systems. It operates in a frequency range from 470 to 740 MHz and provides a covering area of about 12 m/37 ft. Its negative antenna gain of 1 dB provides optimal quality for the wanted signal while decreasing unwanted signals outside its range. The FLOORPAD is designed to meet the rigorous demands of touring and rental companies. The tough, PVC molded pad can withstand the weight of a forklift and is not adversely affected if stood on during use. Its coaxial tail connector is pull tested to 50 lbs.

Near field antenna decreases unwanted signals in highly congested radio environments Works as transmitting and receiving antenna for wireless microphones and in-ear monitoring Operates in a wide frequency range 470 to 740 MHz for universal use worldwide 19" diameter, 1/4" thick tough PVC floor pad for easy hiding under carpeting, podiums or stages Water-resistant construction for indoor and outdoor use

Item Number: Floorpad Antenna    3009H00220

HelicAl AntennA
Passive circUlar Polarized directional antenna
Harman Pro Group | 2013

spin doctor
For indoor or outdoor use The HELICAL antenna is a passive circular polarized directional wide-band UHF antenna which can be used as a transmitting or receiving antenna for wireless microphones and in-ear monitoring systems. It operates in a frequency range from 470 to 740 MHz and provides an antenna gain of 9dB. This circular polarized HELICAL antenna is specially designed for tour sound, sports and broadcast applications where long range FOH positions of many hundreds of feet often require a high gain. With the included universal threat adapter it can be mounted on floor stands with both 3/8" or 5/8" screws. The HELICAL antenna comes with a durable, water resistant nylon cover which also helps to compress the antenna to easily fit inside a rack drawer.

AntennA SyStemS

Section:

02

Circular polarized antenna design for high directionality and strong signal reception Works as transmitting and receiving antenna for wireless microphones and in-ear monitoring 9 dB antenna gain for long distance applications Operates in a wide frequency range 470 to 740 MHz for universal use worldwide Foldable from 12" extended to 3" compressed to easily fit inside a rack drawer

Item Number: Helical Antenna    3009H00210

Page 97

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

ps4000 W
active wide-band uhf antenna splitteR
for DMS700, WMS4500, WMS470, WMS450 receivers pS4000 W is an active wide-band uhF antenna distributor to feed up to five receivers with the rF signal of a pair of antennas. it is capable of adjusting the radio signal strength transmitted to a receiver. Adjustable rF-level settings guarantee maximum operating distance even when using different cable lengths and different types of cable. it supports the wireless system with optimal radio power and improves multichannel capability. the pS4000 W comes in a rugged half-rack metal housing and works with all active and passive AKG antennas, rA4000 B/W, rA4000 W, SrA2 B/W and SrA2 W.

Zapd 21
passive wide-band uhf antenna combineR/splitteR
for DMS700, WMS4500, WMS470, WMS450 receivers the ZApD21 is a passive, wide-band uhF antenna combiner/ splitter. it can be used with active and passive transmitter and receiver antennas. it passes through the power from transmitters, receivers and power supplies, enabling remote powering of connected antennas. the ZApD21 comes in a rugged, waterproof metal housing and works bi-directionally with all active and passive AKG antennas, rA4000 B/W, rA4000 W, SrA2 B/W and SrA2 W. it operates in a frequency range from 500mhz to 2000mhz with a low insertion loss of 3dB.

split up

two-way crossing

Cable length adjustment switch for optimizing antenna signal levels Remote power for antennas and receivers power via antenna cable eliminates any extra installation effort Operates in an ultrawide frequency range from 500mhz to 865mhz for universal use Link output to cascade up to three pS4000 Ws for large systems

Bi-directional operation for splitter and combiner use Pass-through of remote power for extremely flexible installation Operates in an ultrawide frequency range from 500mhz to 2000mhz for universal use worldwide Water-resistant construction to withstand extreme weather conditions

Included accessories: rmu4000 rack mount unit

Item Number: ZApD 21    ServSon760

Item Number: pS4000 W    2996Z00100

Page 98

AntennA SyStemS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

ab4000
antenna boosteR

asu4000
Remote antenna poweR supply

Beyond all limits

for DMS700, WMS4500, WMS470, WMS450 receivers AB4000 is a high-performance antenna booster to compensate signal loss on long antenna cables. one AB4000 can compensate 3.5 to 17.5 dB of cable attenuation. up to two boosters can be cascaded in case of extremely long cable runs. the AB4000 comes in a rugged, waterproof metal housing and features an in-line power leD display and cable length adjustment switches. it works with all active and passive AKG antennas, rA4000 B/W, rA4000 W, SrA2 B/W and SrA2 W, and operates in a frequency range from 500mhz to 865mhz.

remote dc power

for RA4000 B/W, SRA2 B/W antennas and AB4000 booster the ASu4000 is a remote antenna power supply unit for large-scale antenna distribution or small antenna systems where no pS4000 W is in use. it provides the necessary power for up to three active antenna elements (rA4000 B, SrA2 B, AB4000) via the antenna cable. the ASu4000 comes in a rugged, waterproof metal housing and features lockable Dc input and a status leD for fail-safe operation.

Section:

02

17dB amplification for extremely long cable runs Remote powering via the antenna cable eliminates any extra installation effort Cable length adjustment switch for optimizing antenna signal levels Water-resistant construction to withstand extreme weather conditions

Powers up to three active antenna elements Dc power for rA4000 B/W, SrA2 B/W and AB4000 Remote powering via the antenna cable eliminates any extra installation effort Lockable DC input for secure, failure-free connection Water-resistant construction to withstand extreme weather conditions

Item Number: AB4000    3009Z00020

Item Number: ASu4000    3009Z00100

Page 99

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

hub4000 Q
hiqnet etheRnet inteRface

aKg systeM Architect plugin
hiqnet Remote contRol pc softwaRe
supports DMS700, WMS4000/4500 and IVM4/4500

supports DMS700, WMS4000/4500 and IVM4/4500 the huB4000 Q reference hiQnet® ethernet interface allows you to connect up to eight AKG wireless devices to a hiQnet network. huB4000 Q connects to the network via a standard cAt-5 cable. For large wireless systems, several huB 4000 Qs can be cascaded using commercial ethernet switches (or routers, wireless hubs, etc.), allowing you to configure and monitor complex systems from a single application. huB4000 Q connects the wireless system to the applications harman System Architect™, AKG Wireless app and vm2. the huB4000 Q comes in a rugged half-rack metal housing and provides 10 leDs with information on the data transfer status as well as 4 Dip switches to set up the ip address.

make the connection

connect. configure. control.

AKG´s System Architect™ plug-in automatically identifies all huB4000 Qs connected to a hiQnet® system. the channel-oriented user interface provides intuitive control of all parameters of the wireless channels. With the unique 1 click Setup frequency coordination can be done with a single click. it performs an environment Scan, calculates the discrete and intermodulation free frequencies and programs them into the wireless receivers. 1 click Setup Xpert offers an advanced frequency coordination mode, with which restricted tv-channels and non AKG wireless frequencies can be included in the calculation. Additional tools including Device manager, programmer Guide and custom panels make managing complex wireless systems easy and straight forward.

Connects up to 8 wireless devices to HiQnet® network enables remote control via System Architecttm, AKG Wireless app and vm2 Cascadable via standard ethernet switches for easy setup of large system configurations Central 10 LED operating display for full control on data transfer status Covered DIP switches on front panel for quick and safe setup of the ip address Rugged half-rack metal housing for flexible, space efficient system configurations

1 Click Setup automatic frequency coordination with a single click 1 Click Setup Xpert for advanced frequency coordination of large wireless systems Custom Control Panels for easy control interface customizing Intuitive tools for settting up and monitoring of multichannel wireless systems Environment Scan of RF spectrum for graphical visualization of radio environment

Item Number: huB4000 Q    2999Z00140

Page 100

vM2
soundcRaft vistonics micRophone monitoRing

wireLess iphone App
hiqnet Remote contRol ios app

Network SyStemS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

total control

supports DMS700, WMS4000/4500 and IVM4/4500 With vm2 vistonics microphone monitoring, Soundcraft and AKG are making the Foh engineer’s life easier. For the first time the status of any hiQnet-compatible AKG wireless microphone can directly be monitored from a Soundcraft vi consoles surface. vm2 provides real time visual display of battery life, rF status and mic muting, right there on the relevant channel strip. expanded information are instantly available by touching the vistonics™ screen. e.g. pressing the locate button on the consol causing the receiver´s display to flash, for easy location in the rack. vm2 is supported by all Soundcraft vi Series mixing (vi1, vi2, vi4, vi6) consoles with v4.5 software or higher.

ilike

supports DMS700, WMS4000/4500 and IVM4/4500 the AKG Wireless iphone™ App is a reference remote control for ioS devices. it enables monitor and control of a complete AKG wireless system from an Apple iphone, ipad™ or ipod™ touch via Wi-Fi™. the app offers unique functions like the radio frequency graph, which is the easiest way to find areas of good radio coverage by walking around the stage. Device list offers an instant overview of system alerts, information on the transmitters battery life, radio signal strength and audio signal quality. Furthermore the AKG Wireless App enables to remotely mute individual receivers. the AKG Wireless app is available for free from the Apple itunes™ Store.

Section:

02

Integrated in the Vistonics™ console user interface allows the monitoring of AKG wireless systems from the console Real time visuals of wireless status right on the relevant channel strip Detailed information on all critical functions rF signal strength, battery status and audio level More efficient workflow for one less thing to worry about No computer needed works with huB4000 Q and hiQnet®

Optimized touch user interface setup and monitor wireless systems from an ioS device Graph of RF signal strength over time for walk around tests on stage with direct graphical feedback Device List keep the overview over the entire system Alerts within device list for instant information of critical system parameters No computer needed works with huB4000 Q and standard Wi-Fi™ routers

Page 101

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CU700
Charging unit
for DHT700 and DPT700 transmitters The CU700 is a charger that rapidly boosts the rechargeable batteries inside the transmitter without damaging the cells' elements. The CU700 charger determines the optimum charge current and has a quiet cooling fan to control the temperature of the cells. Integrated charging contacts allow the batteries to remain inside the transmitter while charging on the CU700. The CU700 charger uses pulse technology, in which a pulse is fed to the battery. With pulse charging, high instantaneous voltages can be applied without overheating the battery. The CU700 provides two charging compartments for simultaneous charge of two devices. The housing can be rack-mounted using the optional 19" rack-mount unit.

CU4000
Charging unit
for HT4500 and PT4500 transmitters and SPR4500 IEM receiver The BP4000 and CU4000 represent a premium charging system for the transmitter of the WMS4500 wireless microphone system as well as for the body-pack receiver of the IVM4500 IEM in-ear monitoring system. The CU4000 provides two charging compartments for simultaneous charge of two devices. An integrated microprocessor monitors battery status and calculates the remaining battery life. It informs the user about the time needed to return to maximum service capability. Integrated charging contacts allow the BP4000 battery-pack to be used separately or to remain inside the transmitter or receiver while charging on the CU4000. The BP4000 plus CU4000 system helps to reduce battery costs as well as environmental hazards from used batteries.

Fast and cool

save some money

Charger with two charging compartments for two DPT700, or DHT700 Smart current management system operates with two AA-size NiMH rechargeable batteries Two-hour quick charging for up to eight hours of battery life Optional 2U 19" rack-mount unit for easy installation without loose parts

Accurate remaining battery life intelligent charge count One-hour quick charge for twelve hours of operation Charger with two charging compartments for HT4500 and PT4500 transmitters, SPR4500 or BP4000 battery-packs Smart current management system prevents overcharging and shows recovery time Microprocessor-controlled life-cycle management with up to 1000 charging cycles

Included accessories: PSU12V Lockable 2000mA EU/US/UK/AU  Power supply, 4 x NiHM Rechargeable Batteries

Item Number: CU700    3158H00010 with power supply

Included accessories: 2 x BP4000 rechargeable battery pack

Item Number: CU4000 EU/US/UK/AU CU4000 none

2887X01060 2887X00060

with PSU12V Lockable 2000mA EU/US/UK/AU Power supply without power supply

Page 102

Charging Units

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CU400
Charging unit

PSU4000
Central power supply unit

drop it in

for WMS450 and WMS470 series transmitters The AKG CU400 is a high-performance drop-in-style battery charger for WMS450 and WMS470 series wireless handheld and body-pack transmitters. The charger's design and the integrated charging contacts of the transmitter conveniently eliminate the need to remove the battery before charging; simply drop the entire transmitter into the slot. The charger monitors battery voltages and temperatures during charging and automatically ends the cycle when the batteries are fully charged. The CU400 provides a status display LED for full control of the charging status.

power it up

for PS4000, SPC4500, HUB4000 Q, WMS receivers and charging units The PSU4000 is a central power supply unit for components of the WMS wireless microphone and IVM in-ear monitoring systems. It provides an IEC power socket and a switch mode power supply for worldwide use. The PSU4000 features three high current 12V/2A DC outputs via lockable DC connectors. The PS4000 comes in a rugged half-rack metal housing. It can supply up to 12 stationary receivers via the PS4000 W antenna splitter or four stationary IEM transmitters via SPC4500. Alternatively, it can power up to three charging units (CU4000 or CU700) or HUB4000 Q.

Section:

02

Charger with two charging compartments for two HT450/470 or PT450/470 Two-hour quick charging for up to eight hours of battery life Smart current management system operates with one AA-size NiMH rechargeable battery

Rugged half-rack metal housing for a flexible, space-efficient system configurations Lockable DC output for secure, failure-free connection Three high-current 12V/2A DC outputs universal power supply for large systems

Included accessories: 2 x NiHM Rechargeable Batteries

Item Number: CU400 EU/US/UK CU400 none

Included accessories: RMU4000 Rack Mount Unit, 3 x DC-DC Cable

2934H00010 2934H00040

with PSU5V 2000mA EU/ US/UK Power supply without power supply

Item Number: PSU4000 EU PSU4000 UK PSU4000 US PSU4000 none

2997Z00010 2997Z00030 2997Z00020 2997Z00040

with EU mains cable with UK mains cable with US mains cable without mains cable

Page 103

dMs70
pRofessional digital wiReless micRophone system for license-free operation, worldwide

Boundless freedom

— automatically! the DmS70 is up and running in fractions of a second. the digital receiver and transmitter diversity provide rock-solid, drop-free signal transmission. A maximum of eight channels can be operated simultaneously.

the DmS70 is a professional digital 2.4Ghz wireless microphone system for worldwide, license-free operation. With 24bit, 48khz audio coding, it provides uncompressed studio-quality transmission and a linear frequency response, for uncompromising vocal and instrumental performances. 128bit AeS standard encryption prevents tapping of the audio signal, which makes it a perfect companion for high-security conferences. the dynamic frequency selection (DFS) ensures that only the cleanest frequency bands are selected for the connection between receivers and transmitters

All Products share these features:

True uncompressed transmission for best audio quality Standard AES 128-bit encryption prevents tapping of the audio signal Plug-and-play solution up and running in a second Digital receiver and transmitter diversity for unmatched signal stability Dynamic frequency selection automatically selects the best frequency band

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

dsr70
pRofessional digital wiReless multichannel ReceiveR
the DSr70 professional digital wireless diversity receiver features bidirectional communication between the transmitter and receiver, which offers a number of valuable functions including remote power-off for all transmitters, battery status monitoring and more. the dynamic frequency selection (DFS) intelligently chooses only the cleanest frequency bands to establish a robust connection to the transmitters. thanks to the one-click pairing function, the system is up and running immediately. DrS70 is available in two versions, DSr70 Dual for up to two channels and DSr70 Quattro for up to four channels. two DSr70 receivers can operate together, providing up to eight simultaneous channels. the package includes a universal power supply kit for worldwide use.

Dynamic frequency selection automatically selects the best frequency band Standard AES 128-bit encryption prevents tapping of the audio signal Auto correction switch more processor power for clearer signals DSR70 Dual two-channel receiver with two individual 1/4" jack outputs DSR70 Quattro four-channel receiver four channel outputs and one miX output via Xlr connector

Included accessories: pSu12v 500mA eu/uS/uK power supply, rmu2 rack mount unit

Item Number: DSr70 Dual DSr70 Quattro

3355h00010 3255h00010

Page 104

pRofessional digital wiReless handheld tRansmitteR
the Dht70 is a professional digital wireless handheld transmitter for worldwide, license-free operation. With 24bit, 48khz audio coding, it provides uncompressed studio-quality transmission and a linear frequency response. it is available in two versions, with D5 or p3 dynamic capsule, perfect for uncompromising vocal performances. the Dht70 provides digital diversity and an out-of-range warning function to ensure a stable and drop-free signal within the entire operating area. A high/low input gain switch allows optimum level adjustment for clear, distortion-free signals.

P3 or patented state-of-the-art D5 dynamic capsule different versions for demanding vocals True uncompressed audio transmission for best studio-quality sound Out-of-range warning for secure operation Auto power-off function saves battery life and reduces operating costs Digital transmitter diversity for unmatched signal stability

Plug‘n‘Play Wireless systems

dhT70

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Included accessories: Stand adapter, 2 x AA Batteries

Item Number: Dht70 D5 Dht70 p5

3257X00010 3357h00010

Section:

dpT70
pRofessional digital wiReless body-pack tRansmitteR
the Dpt70 is a professional digital wireless body-pack transmitter for worldwide, license-free operation. With 24-bit 48khz audio coding, it provides uncompressed studio-quality transmission and a linear frequency response, perfect for demanding instrumental performances. 128-bit AeS standard encryption prevents tapping of the audio signal, which makes it a perfect companion for high-security conferences. the Dpt70 provides digital diversity and an out-of-range warning function to ensure a stable and drop-free signal within the entire operating area. its input is fully adjustable between mic and line level for noise- and distortion-free signal reproduction from loud guitars or gentle microphone signals.

02

Professional three-pin mini XLR connector compatible with guitar cables, headset and instrument mics True uncompressed audio transmission for best studio-quality audio transmission Plug-and-play solution up and running in a second Out-of-range warning for drop-free operation Auto power-off function saves battery life and reduces operating cost

Included accessories: mKG l instrument cable, 2 x AA Batteries, Bc700 Belt clip

Item Number: Dpt70

3256h00010

Page 105

dMs70 sets
dMs70 QuAttro
vocal set
the DmS70 Quattro vocal Set is a professional digital 2.4Ghz wireless system for worldwide license-free operation. it provides uncompressed studio quality and a ruler-flat frequency response. the two included Dht70 handheld transmitters provide a D5 dynamic capsule for uncompromising vocal performance. the receiver offers four channels in one rugged 19" housing. its one-click pairing function gets the system up and running in seconds.

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 106

The DMS70 Quattro, Vocal Set package includes:
• • •

1 x DSR70 Quattro receiver 2 x DHT70 Handheld transmitter with D5 capsule 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 4 x AA size battery, 2 x Stand adapter

Item Number: DmS70 Quattro vocal Set

3258X00010

dMs70 QuAttro
instRumental set
the DmS70 Quattro instrumental Set is a professional digital 2.4Ghz wireless system for worldwide license-free operation. it provides uncompressed studio quality and a ruler-flat frequency response. each of the two included Dpt70 body-pack transmitters provides a professional three-pin mini Xlr connector, fully compat- ible with all guitar and bass levels, headsets and instrumental mics. the receiver offers four channels in one rugged 19" housing. its one-click pairing function gets the system up and running in seconds.

The DMS70 Quattro, Instrumental Set package includes:
• • • •

1 x DSR70 Quattro receiver 2 x DPT70 Body-pack transmitter 2 x MKG L Instrument cable 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 4 x AA size battery

Item Number: DmS70 Quattro instrumental Set

3258h00020

vocal / instRumental set
the DmS70 Quattro vocal/instrumental Set is a professional digital 2.4Ghz wireless system for worldwide license-free operation. it provides uncompressed studio quality and a ruler-flat frequency response. the included Dpt70 body-pack transmitter provides a professional three-pin mini Xlr connector, compatible with guitar and bass guitar levels, headsets and instrumental mics. the included Dht70 handheld transmitter provides a D5 dynamic capsule for uncompromising vocal performance. the receiver offers four channels in one rugged 19" housing. its one-click pairing function gets the system up and running in seconds.

The DMS70 Quattro, Vocal / Instrumental Set package includes:
• • • •

1 x DSR70 Quattro receiver 1 x DHT70 Handheld transmitter with D5 capsule 1 x DPT70 Body-pack transmitter, 1 x MKG L Guitar cable, 1 x Stand adapter 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 4 x AA size battery

Plug‘n‘Play Wireless systems

dMs70 QuAttro

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Item Number: DmS70 Quattro vocal/instrumental Set

3258X00030

dMs70 duAl
vocal set
the DmS70 Dual vocal Set is a professional digital 2.4Ghz wireless system for worldwide license-free operation. it provides uncompressed studio quality and a ruler-flat frequency response. the included Dht70 handheld transmitter provides a super cardioid dynamic capsule for professional vocal performance. the receiver offers two channels in one rugged half 19" housing. its one-click pairing function gets the system up and running in seconds.

Section:

02

The DMS70 Dual, Instrumental Set package includes:
• • •

1 x DSR70 Dual receiver 1 x DHT70 Handheld transmitter with P5 capsule 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 2 x AA size battery, 1 x Stand adapter

Item Number: DmS70 Dual vocal Set

3358h00010

dMs70 duAl
instRumental set
the DmS70 Dual instrumental Set is a professional digital 2.4Ghz wireless system for worldwide license-free operation. it provides uncompressed studio quality and a ruler-flat frequency response. the included Dpt70 body-pack transmitter provides a pro- fessional three-pin mini Xlr connector, compatible with all bass/guitar levels, head- sets and instrumental mics. the receiver offers two channels in one rugged half 19" housing. its one-click pairing function gets the system up and running in seconds.

The DMS70 Dual, Instrumental Set package includes:
• • •

1 x DSR70 Dual receiver 1 x DPT70 Body-pack transmitter, 1 x MKG L Guitar cable 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 2 x AA size battery

Item Number: DmS70 Dual instrumental Set

3358h00020

Page 107

perCepTion Wireless
high-peRfoRmance wiReless micRophone system for houses of worship, hotels, clubs and band applications
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

no more caBles

which dramatically reduces the operating costs in day-to-day use. the system is available in complete set packages for different applications. All include a universal connector kit for worldwide use.

perception Wireless is a high-performance analog wireless microphone systems which delivers brilliant sound and is easy to use. it is the optimum plug and play wireless solution for small stages, clubs, places of worship, hotels, and gyms. the preset frequency sets allow easy setup from single-channel applications to multichannel systems. perception Wireless offers exceptional eight hours of operation from a single AA size battery,

All Products share these features:

30MHz selection bandwidth save operation for simple multichannel systems Eight hours of operation from a single AA size battery saves money in day-to-day use Auto Setup Mode plug and play solution for easy setup Switched mode power supply universal connector kit for worldwide use

02

sr45
high-peRfoRmance wiReless stationaRy ReceiveR
the Sr45 analog high-performance space diversity wireless receiver provides maximum ease of use with different channel presets up to six channels. it is perfect for instrumental and vocal performances in small clubs as well as for use in houses of worship and in conference rooms. the Sr45 provides an audio clipping and rF signal strength leD for easy monitoring of systems status. Best audio signal output is provided via both a professional Xlr and a 1/4" jack connector. For worldwide use, the receiver comes with a universal, switched mode power supply kit.

30MHz selection bandwidth simultaneous use of up to 6 channels Professional balanced XLR and ¼" jack output for best audio signal Audio clip and RF control LED on receiver for easy monitoring of your performance Switched mode power supply universal connector kit for worldwide use Adjustable squelch level for secure audio transmission in all environments

Included accessories: pSu12v 500mA eu/uS/uK power supply

Page 108

hT45
high-peRfoRmance wiReless handheld tRansmitteR
the ht45 analog high-performance wireless handheld transmitter features a dynamic microphone capsule for demanding vocal performances. the cardioid polar pattern ensures maximum gain before feedback and lets your voice cut through any mix. its spring-steel wire-mesh front grille protects the transducer from the hardships of on-stage use. the ht45 provides a gain control for perfect adjustment of the input volume and a noiseless on/off/mute switch. A battery status indicator shows red before the battery goes dead, allowing the user to fully control his performance time.

Eight hours of operation from a single AA battery saves money in day-to-day use Gain control on transmitter for immediate volume adjustment Noiseless on/off/mute switch for easy operation

Plug‘n‘Play Wireless systems

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Included accessories: Stand adapter, 1 x AA Battery

pT45
high-peRfoRmance wiReless body-pack tRansmitteR
the pt45 is an analog high-performance wireless body-pack transmitter in a small, rugged housing. A professional mini Xlr audio connector makes the body-pack compatible with all kinds of guitars, basses, instrumental pickups and headsets. it is designed for stress-free work on small stages, in houses of worship and in conference rooms. the pt45 provides a gain control for perfect adjustment of the input volume and a noiseless on/off/mute switch. A battery-status indicator shows red before the battery goes dead, allowing the user full control of performance time. the package includes a rugged guitar cable.

Section:

02

Eight hours of operation from a single AA-size battery saves money in day-to-day use Professional three-pin mini XLR connector compatible with guitar cables, headset and instrument mics Gain control on transmitter for immediate volume adjustment Noiseless on/off/mute switch for easy operation Compact and rugged body-pack design for maximum wearing comfort

Included accessories: mKG l instrument cable, Bc400 Belt clip, 1 x AA Battery

Page 109

perception Wireless 45 sets

perCepTion Wireless
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

vocal set
the perception Wireless high performance vocal Set delivers brilliant sound and is surprisingly easy to use. the included ht45 handheld transmitter features a dynamic microphone with cardioid polar pattern, ensuring voices to cut through any mix. the Sr45 receiver provides professional Xlr and 1/4" jack outputs.

The Perception Wireless, Vocal Set package includes:
• • • •

1 x SR45 Receiver 2 x HT45 Handheld transmitter 1 x Stand adapter 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 1 x AA size battery

02

perCepTion Wireless
instRumental set
the perception Wireless high performance instrumental Set delivers brilliant sound for an exceptionally wide range of applications. the included pt45 body-pack transmitter is the smallest and lightest transmitter in its class. it provides a professional three-pin mini Xlr connector and can be used with the included guitar cable or one of the optionally available AKG miniature microphones.

The Perception Wireless, Instrumental Set package includes:
• • • •

1 x SR45 Receiver 1 x PT45 Body-pack transmitter 1 x MKG L Instrument cable 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 1 x AA size battery

Page 110

perCepTion Wireless
spoRts set
the perception Wireless high performance Sports Set delivers brilliant sound and is surprisingly easy to use. the included pt45 body-pack transmitter is the small- est and lightest transmitter in its class. the package also includes a c544 l condenser head-worn microphone featuring an external shock mount for high mechanical-noise rejection. its moisture shield ensures a high degree of humidity protection for the microphone.

PlUG‘n‘PlAy WIReleSS SySteMS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

The Perception Wireless, Sports Set package includes:
• • • •

1 x SR45 Receiver 1 x PT45 Body-pack transmitter 1 x C544 L Head-worn microphone 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 1 x AA size battery

Section:

02

perCepTion Wireless
pResenteR set
the perception Wireless high performance presenter Set delivers brilliant sound and is surprisingly easy to use. the included cK99 lavalier microphone clips on quickly and easily, and provides optimum intelligibility for theater performances, presentations or talk shows. the Sr45 receiver provides professional Xlr and 1/4" jack outputs.

The Perception Wireless, Presenter Set package includes:
• • • •

1 x SR45 Receiver 1 x PT45 Body-pack transmitter 1 x CK99 L Lavalier microphone 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 1 x AA size battery

Page 111

wMs40 Mini
wiReless micRophone system for houses of worship, hotels, gyms and band applications

small size - Big sound
All Products share these features:

the WmS40 mini wireless microphone system provides crystal clear sound and is a true plug`n`play solution. “up and running” in a second, it is the optimum wireless solution for small stages, clubs, places of worship, hotels, and gyms. the system is available in different application optimized set packages, all of which includes a universal, switched mode power supply for worldwide operation. the WmS40 mini system stands out for its extremely long battery life of 30 hours with a single AA battery which helps saving money in the long run.

Crystal clear sound best audio quality for powerful performances “Up and running” in a second plug and play solution for easy setup 30 hours of operation from a single AA size battery saves money in day-to-day use Switched mode power supply universal connector kit for worldwide use

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

sr40 Mini
wiReless stationaRy ReceiveR
the Sr40 mini and Sr40 mini DuAl stationary receivers provide crystal clear audio quality for powerful performances. they features three status leDs indicating on/off status, received signal strength (rF oK) and audio clipping (AF clip) the receivers provide a volume control potentiometer and a noiseless on/off switch to protect the connected speakers. the Sr 40 mini DuAl integrates two separate wireless receivers in one compact housing. the Sr40 mini features one, the Sr40 mini DuAl two balanced outputs via ¼" jack connector. the supplied switched mode power supply operates on any Ac voltage from 110 to 240vAc and includes eu, uK, and uS adapters.

Crystal clear sound For best audio quality “Up and running” in a second plug and play solution for easy setup Switched mode power supply universal connector kit for worldwide use Ultra compact metal housing rugged and lightweight Available as single or dual receiver

Included accessories: pSu12v 500mA eu/uS/uK power supply

Page 112

hT40 Mini
wiReless handheld tRansmitteR
the ht40 mini is a wireless handheld transmitter with a dynamic microphone capsule designed for stressless work in houses of worship, in clubs and on small stages. its cardioid polar pattern ensures maximum gain before feedback and the unique hDAp (high Definition Audio performance) technology delivers brilliant sound. the rugged transmitter features an on/off/mute switch and a sturdy wire-mesh cap to protect the microphone element. the ht40 mini system's stand-out feature is its extremely long battery life of 30 hours off a single AA battery. it represents ultimate ease of use at an unbeatable price-performance ratio.

High Definition Audio Performance technology for crystal clear audio quality Cardioid polar pattern for trouble-free use on narrow stages Robust spring steel grille extreme ruggedness for long stage life Noiseless on/off/mute switch to protect the connected speakers Unbelievable 30 hours of working time with one AA battery saves money in day-to-day use

PlUG‘n‘PlAy WIReleSS SySteMS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Included accessories: Stand adapter, 1 x AA Battery

Section:

pT40 Mini
wiReless body-pack tRansmitteR
the pt40 mini is a wireless body-pack transmitter in a small, rugged housing, perfect for houses of worship, clubs, small stages and gyms. A professional mini Xlr audio connector makes the body-pack compatible with all kinds of guitars, basses, instrumental pickups and headsets. the pt40 mini provides a gain control for perfect adjustment of the input volume and a noiseless on/off/mute switch. it stand-out feature is its long battery life of 30 hours on a single AA battery. it represents ultimate ease of use at an unbeatable price/performance ratio.

02

Unbelievable 30 hours life with a single AA battery lowest operating cost in its class Professional three-pin mini XLR connector compatible with guitar cables, headset- and instrument mics Gain control on transmitter for immediate volume adjustment Noiseless on/off/mute switch to protect the connected speakers Compact and rugged body-pack design for maximum wearing comfort

Included accessories: mKG l instrument cable, Bc400 Belt clip, 1 x AA Battery

Page 113

WMs40 Mini sets

wMs40 Mini duAl
vocal set
the WmS40 mini Dual vocal Set is a true plug’n’play wireless solution. each of the two included ht40 mini handheld transmitter features a dynamic cardioid capsule for maximum gain before feedback. their extremely long battery life of 30 hours off a single AA battery saves money in day-to-day use. the receiver offers two balanced outputs via 1/4" jack connectors.

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 114

The WMS40 Mini Dual, Vocal Set package includes:
• • •

1 x SR40 Dual Mini Receiver 2 x HT40 Mini Handheld transmitter 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 2 x AA size battery

wMs40 Mini duAl
instRumental set
the WmS40 mini Dual instrumental Set is a true plug’n’play wireless solution providing crystal clear audio sound. each of the two included pt40 mini body-pack transmitter provides a professional 3pin mini Xlr connector, compatible to all guitars, basses and AKGs micromics, from line to mic level. their extremely long battery life of 30 hours off a single AA battery saves money in day-to-day use. the receiver offers two balanced outputs via 1/4" jack connectors.

The WMS40 Mini Dual, Instrumental Set package includes:
• • • •

1 x SR40 Dual Mini Receiver 2 x PT40 Mini Handheld transmitter 2 x MKG L Instrument cable 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 2 x AA size battery

wMs40 Mini duAl
vocal instRumental set
the WmS40 mini Dual vocal/instrumental Set is a true plug’n’play wireless solution. the included pt40 mini body-pack transmitter provides a professional 3pin mini Xlr connector, compatible with guitar and bass levels, headsets and instrumental mics. the included ht40 mini handheld transmitter features a dynamic cardioid capsule for maximum gain before feedback. their extremely long battery life of 30 hours off a single AA battery saves money in day-to-day use. the receiver offers two balanced outputs via 1/4" jack connectors.

The WMS40 Mini Dual, Vocal/Instrumental Set package includes:
• • • •

1 x SR40 Dual Mini Receiver 1 x HT40 Mini Handheld transmitter 1 x PT40 Mini Body-pack transmitter 1 x mKG l instrumentcable, 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 2 x AA size battery

PlUG‘n‘PlAy WIReleSS SySteMS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

wMs40 Mini single
vocal set
the WmS40 mini Single vocal Set is a true plug’n’play wireless solution providing crystal clear audio sound. the included ht40 mini handheld transmitter features a dynamic cardioid capsule for maximum gain before feedback. it`s extremely long battery life of 30 hours off a single AA battery saves money in day-to-day use. the receiver comes in an ultra compact housing and offers a 1/4" jack output.

Section:

02

The WMS40 Mini Single, Vocal Set package includes:
• • •

1 x SR40 Mini Receiver 1 x HT40 Mini Handheld transmitter 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 1 x AA size battery

wMs40 Mini
instRumental set
the WmS40 mini Single instrumental Set is a true plug’n’play wireless solution providing crystal clear audio sound the included pt40 mini body-pack transmitter provides a professional 3pin mini Xlr connector, compatible with guitar and bass levels, headsets and instrumental mics. its extremely long battery life of 30 hours off a single AA battery saves money in day-to-day use. the receiver comes in an ultra compact housing and offers a 1/4" jack output.

The WMS40 Mini Single, Instrumental Set package includes:
• • • •

1 x SR40 Dual Receiver 1 x PT40 Mini Body-pack transmitter 1x MKG L Instrument cable 1 x universal power supply with uS/uK/eu adapter, 1 x AA size battery

Page 115

aKg by TiËsTo
dJ headphones ideal for live sound monitoring, DJ use and studio work

the only headphones engineered for dance music.

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

the “AKG by tiËSto” headphones range features tuning and styling directed by legendary Dj and producer tiËSto. comprising three professional-grade headphones, the tiËSto Series will appeal to a broad range of end users; from studio engineers, to artists, fans and tiËSto himself - whether in the studio, at a show or on the go. “AKG is rooted in the passion for music at the same time as having a unique eye for design and style,” tiËSto says. “together we’ve created a line of headphones that are perfect for those who want the best quality of sound, but don’t wish to compromise on style, whether you’re looking to mix in the studio, perform live or even listen when you’re on the move.”

K267 tiËsto
RefeRence dJ headphones
for professional DJ use

Boost the Bass

the K267 tiËSto reference Dj headphones stand for appealing product design and robustness. its over-ear, closed-back design offers the best sound performance in its class. With an oversized low resonance driver, the K267 tiËSto headphones provide higher Spl while still maintaining a matched low frequency bass response. A switchable bass boost maximizes deep sub-bass frequencies. the K267’s Dual plug-in feature allows the user to attach the cable to either side for maximum comfort. With high-quality materials and superior workmanship, its lightweight construction is exceptionally rugged. in addition, each set boasts 3D-Axis folding mechanisms for optimum fitting and flat storage.

All Products share these features:

Over-ear, closed-back design for high comfort and maximum noise rejection Oversized 50 mm driver with low resonance for higher sound pressure and matched low frequency responce User adjustable bass boost keeps sound neutral or maximizes deeper sub bass frequencies Anodized aluminium parts offer maximum durability for heavy-duty use Dual Plug-In feature allows alternate cable dressing from either the left or right side

Powerful drivers with low resonance for higher sound pressure and matched low frequency response Closed-back design for maximum noise rejection Rugged and roadworthy design maximum durability for heavy-duty use 3D-Axis professional folding mechanism for easy transportation Comfortable ear pads and light-weight construction the perfect choice for long working hours

Included accessories: eK300 Straing cable, eK500 coiled cable

Item Number: K267 tiËSto    3285h00010

122

Page 116

PROFeSSIOnAl HeADPHOneS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

K167 tiËsto
pRofessional dJ headphones

K67 tiËsto
high-peRfoRmance dJ headphones

get connected

for live sound monitoring, DJ use and studio work the K167 tiËSto professional Dj headphones feature over-ear, closed-back design for high comfort and maximum noise rejection. the 40 mm drivers deliver high sound pressure levels with an impressive sound quality – even in loud environments such as small clubs. thanks to its slick design and roadworthy construction, the K167 tiËSto headphones are suitable for multiple applications, from the stage to the studio. the rugged headband bends easily and folds into any listening position. For easy transportation the headphones can be collapsed into a thin package.

hook up

for live sound monitoring, DJ use and studio work the K67 tiËSto high-performance Dj headphones feature high noise attenuation and are ideal for both stage and studio work. the compact on-ear design delivers sound quality wherever necessary, even outdoors. thanks to their 40 mm transducers, they deliver high sound pressure levels. the comfortable leatherette ear pads and light-weight design ensure that they are a great choice for long working hours at small clubs or in large venues. the K67 tiËSto headphones include the 3D-Axis folding mechanism, which allows them to collapse into a thin package for easy transportation.

Section:

02

Over-ear, closed-back design for high noise attenuation and maximum wearing comfort Powerful 40 mm driver with low resonance for high sound pressure even at very low bass frequencies XRP³ glass-fiber reinforced polymer parts offer maximum durability at a low weight 3D-Axis professional folding mechanism for flat storage and easy transportation Roadworthy design ensures reliable operation for many years

On-ear, closed-back design for high noise attenuation Powerful 40 mm drivers deliver extraordinary high sound pressure XRP³ glass-fiber reinforced polymer parts offer maximum durability at a low weight 3D-Axis professional folding mechanism for flat storage and easy transportation Compact, roadworthy design ideal for outdoor use

Item Number: K167 tiËSto    3284h00010

Item Number: K67 tiËSto    3283h00010

Page 117

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 118

K702
RefeRence studio headphones

pure perfection

for precision listening, mixing and mastering the K702s are reference, open, over-ear studio headphones for precision listening, mixing and mastering. they combine an extremely accurate response with agility and spaciousness. this is achieved by using revolutionary flat-wire voice coils and a patented varimotion two-layer diaphragm. A totally open design and a high-performance cable complete these reference headphones. the K702s' comfortable, specially shaped 3D-foam ear pads and a padded genuine-leather headband ensure a perfect fit. they provide a professional mini Xlr connector for quick replacement of the cable. the K702s are individually tested and serial-numbered.

Over-ear design maximum wearing comfort for long work sessions Sophisticated open technology for spacious and airy sound without compromise Patented Varimotion two-layer diaphragm for improved high-frequency range and better performance at low frequencies Unique flat-wire voice coil for higher sensitivity, better impulse and treble response Specially shaped 3D-foam ear pads for optimum fit and ease of use

Included accessories: Gold plated mini jack Adaptor

Item Number: K702    2458Z00190

PROFeSSIOnAl HeADPHOneS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

K271 Mkii
pRofessional studio headphones

universal genius

for monitoring, mastering, studio and live sound mixing the K271 mKiis are professional over-ear headphones for studio and live use. they combine the comfort of an over-the-ear design and the benefits of closed-back technology for best possible sound reproduction. the sealed design ensures low signal bleeding into microphones in the studio and maximum isolation for live mixing applications. the K271 mKiis feature a switch in the headband that mutes the audio just as soon as the headphones are taken off. they provide a professional mini Xlr connector for quick replacement of the cable. the package includes a 3m (10ft) straight and 5m (16ft) coiled cable.

Section:

02

Over-ear design maximum wearing comfort for long work sessions Advanced closed technology high noise insulation, best possible sound reproduction Auto-mute feature mutes headphones when they are taken off Sealed design with lowest signal bleeding for vocal and instrument recordings without unwanted spill Self-adjusting headband for optimum fit and ease of use

Included accessories: eK500 coiled cable, eK300 Straing cable, velvet earpads

Item Number: K271 mKii    2470X00190

Page 119

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 120

K171 Mkii
pRofessional studio headphones

smiling face

for live sound mixing [FOH] and drummers the K171 mKii professional on-ear, closed studio headphones provide the highest possible noise insulation, perfect for live sound mixing. in order to support familiar hearing habits, the K171 mKiis show a slight “smiley face” eQ curve with a little bass and treble boost. their well-defined bass reproduction makes the K171 mKiis the number one playback headphones for demanding bass players and drummers worldwide. the professional mini Xlr connector allows quick replacement of the cable. the package includes a 3m (10ft) straight cable, a 5m (16ft) coiled cable, and leatherette and velvet ear pads.

On-ear design for highest possible noise attenuation Advanced closed technology high noise insulation for best possible sound reproduction Slight bass and treble boost for appealing sound reproduction

Included accessories: eK500 coiled cable, eK300 Straing cable, velvet earpads

Item Number: K171 mKii    2908X00190

PROFeSSIOnAl HeADPHOneS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

K240 Mkii
pRofessional studio headphones

K240 studio
pRofessional studio headphones

everyBody´s darling
for precision listening, mixing and mastering the K240 mKii professional over-ear, semi-open headphones are a long-time standard in studios, in orchestras and on stages around the world. its advanced varimotion 30 mm XXl transducers deliver solid low end, accurate mids and crystal-clear highs. the semi-open design provides the airiness of open headphones with the powerful bass response of closed designs. For more than three decades, professional engineers and musicians have made the K240 the most widely used headphones in studios and at live consoles around the world.

classic cans

for precision listening, mixing and mastering the K240 Studio professional over-ear, semi-open studio headphones are designed for professional applications such as mixing, mastering and playback. the advanced XXl transducers with varimotion diaphragms deliver a wide dynamic range, increased sensitivity and high sound levels. the semi-open design provides a solid bass range and extremely clear highs. the over-ear pads envelop the ears nicely making them extremely comfortable to wear. the K240 Studio features a professional mini Xlr connector, allowing for quick replacement of the cable. the 3 m cable included provides a convertible jack plug for easily connecting portable equipment.

Section:

02

Over-ear design for comfort during long work sessions Semi-open technology for solid bass and airy highs Patented Varimotion 30 mm XXL transducer for accurate signal transfer and great dynamic range Self-adjusting headband for optimum fit The choice of professionals around the world stage and studio standard for more than two decades

Over-ear design provides high wearing comfort for long working sessions Semi-open technology for solid bass and clear highs Patented Varimotion 30 mm XXL transducer for accurate signal transfer and great dynamic range Self-adjusting headband for optimum fit Single sided cable for ease of use

Included accessories: eK500 coiled cable, eK300 Straing cable, velvet earpads

Item Number: K240 Studio    2058X00130

Item Number: K240 mKii    2058X00190

Page 121

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

K141 Mkii
pRofessional studio headphones
for superior vocal recordings

K121
high-peRfoRmance studio headphones
for monitoring and playback in studio

easy intonation

cost-efficient thrills

the K141 mKii professional semi-open, on-ear headphones are an advanced version of the legendary K141 headphones, ideal for studio monitoring. the patented 30mm XXl transducers with varimotion technology deliver higher sensitivity, a wide dynamic range and an incredible Spl. optimized for single-ear use as well, they deliver familiar sound and makes intonation easy. the K141 mKii headphones feature gimbal suspended leatherette and velvet ear cups and a self-adjusting headband for great fit and maximum comfort, even in long work sessions. A professional mini Xlr connector allows quick replacement of the cable.

the K121 mKii professional on-ear semi-open headphones are a cost-effective alternative to the K141 mK iis for studio monitoring and playback. Designed for single-ear use, they deliver familiar sound and make intonation easy. the K121 mKii headphones feature gimbal-suspended leatherette ear cups for easy cleaning. the self-adjusting headband makes them comfortable to wear and easy to use, even in long work sessions. the K121 mKiis come with a fixed, single-sided, straight cable.

On-ear, semi-open design for solid base and airy highs Optimized for single-ear use keeps the familiar sound and makes intonation easier Patented Varimotion 30mm XXL transducer for accurate signal transfer and great dynamic range Leatherette and velvet ear pads for maximum wearing comfort Self-adjusting headband for optimum fit and ease of use

On-ear, semi-open design for solid bass and airy highs Optimized for single-ear use for familiar sound and easier intonation Self-adjusting headband maximum comfort for long work sessions

Item Number: K121    2144X00170

Included accessories: eK500 coiled cable, eK300 Straing cable

Item Number: K141 mKii    2144X00190

Page 122

K99 perception
high-peRfoRmance headphones

K77 perception
studio headphones

K44 perception
studio headphones

PROFeSSIOnAl HeADPHOneS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

value for money
for project studios and rehearsals the K99 perception high-performance over-ear, semi-open headphones combine excellent sound quality and an astounding price/performance ratio. their large, high-performance 40mm (1-7/12") speakers provide a natural, uncolored sound, ideal for project studios. the K99 perception features gimbal-suspended leatherette ear cups for easy cleaning. the self-adjusting, lightweight headband ensures a pleasant fit for long hours. the K99s come with a 3m (9-3/4ft) fixed, straight cable, including convertible jack plug.

convincingly powerful

for project studios and rehearsal the K77 perception over-ear, closed headphones provide powerful sound at an amazing value, perfect for home and project studios. these closed-back headphones are an all-around performer, offering an accurate listening experience. K77 perception headphones include comfortable leatherette ear pads and a self-adjusting headband, allowing extended wear without discomfort. they come with a 2.5m (8ft), fixed, straight cable, including convertible jack plug.

feel like a pro

for project studios and rehearsals the K44 perception over-ear, closed headphones provide excellent sound with a powerful low end and clean highs. they offer pure listening experience for different applications, like project studios and home recording. the K44 perception headphones include comfortable leatherette ear pads and a self-adjusting headband that allow extended wear without discomfort. they come with a 2.5m (8ft), fixed, straight cable including convertible jack plug.

Section:

02

Over-ear, semi-open design for well-balanced sound quality Large, high-performance 40mm (1-7/12") speakers provide a natural, uncolored sound. Extremely lightweight for excellent comfort Leatherette ear pads for easy cleaning

Over-ear, closed design for high comfort Large, high-performance 40mm (1.6") speakers provide a powerful and convincing sound Extremely lightweight for excellent comfort

Over-ear, closed design for high comfort Solid bass and clean highs for well-balanced sound quality Leatherette ear pads for easy cleaning

Item Number: K77 perception    6000h09210

Item Number: K44 perception    6000h09170

Item Number: K99 perception    6000h09230

Page 123

daM+ series
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

RefeRence modulaR installed micRophones

for use in theatres, houses of worship and conference rooms

executive modularity

the DAm+ (Discreet Acoustics modular) Series is the logical evolution of AKG’s renowned DAm Series of installed microphones. targeting the premier league of the installation market, literally everything became even better with the DAm+ Series. its slimmer design and improved audio quality are a perfect fit in the high-end market. An additional interface between gooseneck module and phantom power adapter means added modularity and flexibility, resulting in significant advantages throughout the distribution chain, with fewer variations need to be stocked. the added modularity and new accessories enable solutions for applications never before dreamed of. With just a few components on hand, it allows a nearly unlimited number of useful combinations. the DAm+ Series microphones are reference electro-acoustic devices which carry out difficult work discreetly and reliably.

CK49
RefeRence shotgun condenseR capsule

for lectern, presentations and theatre-applications

increased intelligiBility

02

the cK49 is a reference condenser capsule with an 80° pickup angle and clean off-axis response. it is an ideal tool for inexperienced speakers; when people talk into the microphone from greater distances it focuses on the voice, and when they talk into it from very short distances it reduces pop-noise. its special capsule is a further development of the legendary cK47 capsule. like its predecessor, it has been designed using AKG’s unique staple technology for brilliant studio-quality audio performance. the cK49 capsule is integrated into an extremely slim and rugged metal housing. it fits all gooseneck modules of the DAm+ Series as well as the hm1000 m hanging module. to prevent contact problems the capsule is equipped with large-area, self-cleaning, gold-plated contacts with deep threads to prevent misalignment and ensure extra-long life. the cK49 comes complete with a windscreen that efficiently reduces wind and pop noise.

All Products share these features:

Tight, hypercardioid polar pattern eliminates off-axis noise 80° pickup angle for inexperienced speakers and greater distances Sophisticated staple capsule technology for studio-quality audio performance Highly reliable capsule contacts prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life Highly efficient windscreen reduces wind and pop noise

Sophisticated staple capsule technology for studio-quality audio performance Wide frequency range for perfect studio sound Integrated LED ring indicator for full control of the system status Added modularity enables solution for applications never before dreamed of RFi Shield technology provides high immunity to radio-frequency interference (e.g. mobile phones)

Included accessories: Windscreen

Item Number: cK49    3165Z00030

134

Page 124

CK43
RefeRence condenseR capsule

CK41
RefeRence condenseR capsule
Harman Pro Group | 2013

Better focus

for theatres, houses of worship and parliaments the pAe5 m reference phantom power module for fixed and mobile installation provides a five-pin Xlr connector that allows the audio signal and the control voltage for a leD ring to be fed separately. thus, the leD ring can be activated remotely by, for example, a 12-48v logic output from any automatic mixer to show the “mic on” status. With its wide voltage range the module will fit most available microphone mixers. the pAe5 m features a bass roll off for reduction of structure-borne noise. its integrated system connector with gold-plated contacts securely fits all available gooseneck modules of the DAm+ Series as well as the hm1000 m hanging module.

enhanced versatility

for discussions, round table and press conferences the cK41 is a reference condenser capsule with a wide cardioid polar pattern and a speech optimized frequency response. the cardioid is the most popular polar pattern, since it can be used almost universally. the 125° pickup angle is especially suited for inexperienced or very vivacious speakers as well as applications where more than one person uses the microphone in turn. the cK41 capsule is integrated into an extremely slim and rugged metal housing. it fits any mounting module of the DAm+ Series. to prevent contact problems, the capsule is equipped with large-area, self-cleaning, gold-plated contacts with deep threads to prevent misalignment and ensure extra-long life. the cK41 comes complete with a highly efficient windscreen.

GOOSeneCK MICROPHOneS

Section:

02

Sophisticated staple capsule technology for studio-quality audio performance Supercardioid polar pattern eliminates noise from the sides 95° pickup angle perfect where people talk from greater distances Highly reliable capsule contacts prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life Wide frequency range for speech-optimized audio performance

Cardioid polar pattern eliminates noise from the rear side 125° pickup angle for inexperienced or very vivacious speakers Highly reliable capsule contacts prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life Highly efficient windscreen reduces wind and pop noise equally Sophisticated staple capsule technology for studio-quality audio performance

Included accessories: Windscreen

Included accessories: Windscreen

Item Number: cK43    3165Z00020

Item Number: cK41    3165Z00010

Page 125

gn M
RefeRence gooseneck module

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 126

greater flexiBility

for discussion-systems, lectern, theatres and houses of worship the DAm+ Series premium gooseneck modules for permanent and mobile installation are available in three different lengths: 165mm (6.5in), 300mm (11.8in) or 500mm (19.7in). the extremely slim and rugged gooseneck modules feature an leD ring which indicates whether the phantom power is on or off. A special light-ring expander comes with every DAm+ gooseneck module to improve the visibility of the leD ring if necessary. For quick setup and maximum flexibility all gooseneck modules come with a DAm+ Series system connector. this high quality connector with gold- plated contacts reliably fits all available phantom power modules. the gooseneck module is compatible with all DAm+ Series capsules, cK41, cK43, cK49 via self-cleaning contacts. their extremely deep thread groove prevents misalignment and ensures a long useful life of all DAm+ components.

Extremely rugged gooseneck construction for an extra-long life of reliability and stability Highly reliable contacts for capsule modules prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life Integrated switchable LED ring to show system status Integrated system connector helps save stock keeping costs Broad assortment of mounting accessories available for quick and hassle-free installation

Included accessories: leD ring expander

Item Number: Gn15 m 3165h00080 Gn30 m 3165h00090 Gn50 m 3165h00100

165mm (6.5in) 300mm (11.8in) 500mm (19.7in)

gn155 M
RefeRence gooseneck flooR stand

hM1000 M
RefeRence hanging module
Harman Pro Group | 2013

more elegance

or presentations, houses of worship and choir recordings the Gn155 m is a reference 1490mm (58.7in) gooseneck module with a heavy, shock-mounted floor stand. it works perfectly as a stand-alone unit on stages or placed in front of a lectern as well as for pickup of violins and other instruments. An integrated light-ring shows the status of the microphone at a glance. A special light-ring expander comes with every DAm+ gooseneck module to improve the visibility of the leD ring if needed. the Gn155 m has an attached 10m (33ft) cable with a DAm+ Series system connector, fitting all available phantom power modules. the gooseneck module is compatible with all DAm+ Series capsules, cK41, cK43, cK49 via highly reliable contacts.

special discretion

for theatres, houses of worship and broadcast applications the hm1000 m is a reference hanging module compatible with all capsules of the DAm+ Series (cK41, cK43 and cK49). it is used to fly microphones from the ceiling to record music or speech in places of worship or conference rooms, or on theater stages. An integrated switchable light-ring shows the status of the microphone at a glance. A special light-ring expander comes with every DAm+ hanging module to improve the visibility of the leD ring if necessary. the hm1000 m provides a 10m (33ft) special cable that will not tend to twist, even if the temperature varies. A spring steel hanging clamp for precise microphone alignment is also included in the package. the integrated system connector fits all available phantom power modules of the DAm+ Series.

GOOSeneCK MICROPHOneS

Section:

02

Elegant, low profile floor stand fitting all environments Integrated switchable LED ring to show system status Extremely rugged gooseneck construction for an extra-long life of reliability and stability Quick-absorbing rubber shock mount for optimum suppression of structure-borne noise Highly reliable contacts for capsule modules prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life

Twist-free 10m cable included to fix and secure the designated mic position Highly reliable contacts for capsule modules prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life Spring clamp for vertical adjustment allows quick and hassle-free installation Integrated switchable LED ring indicator for full control of the installation status Ingenious system connector interface adapter adds flexibility to all mounting modules

Included accessories: leD ring expander, floor stand

Included accessories: leD ring expander, hanging clamp

Item Number: Gn155 m    3165h00240

Item Number: hm1000 m    3165h00250

Page 127

paesp M
RefeRence poweRing module
for small discussion-systems, lectern and press conferences

pae5 M
RefeRence poweRing module
for podium discussions, houses of worship and broadcast applications the pAe5 m reference phantom power module for fixed and mobile installation provides a five-pin Xlr connector that allows the audio signal and the control voltage for a leD ring to be fed separately. thus, the leD ring can be activated remotely by a 9-52v logic output from any automatic mixer to show the “mic on” status. With its wide voltage range the module will fit most available microphone mixers. the pAe5 m features a bass roll off for reduction of structure-borne noise. its integrated system connector with gold-plated contacts securely fits all available gooseneck modules of the DAm+ Series as well as the hm1000 m hanging module.

pae M
RefeRence poweRing module

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

innovative ingenuity extended connections

expanded reliaBility

the DAm+ Series pAeSp m is a programmable phantom power module for fixed and mobile installation. With its wide voltage range the module will fit most available microphone mixers. it comes with a unique BcD (binary coded decimal) switch to recall one of the operating modes. Several functions can be adjusted, e.g. bass roll off, leD ring mode (on, off, follow mic function) as well as the mic switch mode (push to mute, push to talk, push on – push off). the pAeSp m features a completely noiseless microphone switch. rather than actually disconnecting the signal, it reduces the level by 26dB, thus avoiding the irritating crackling sound when phantom powering is interrupted. the switch is inconspicuously placed but easily accessible for simple handling even by inexperienced talkers. the integrated system connector with gold-plated contacts securely fits all available mounting modules of the DAm+ Series.

for conference, houses of worship and theatre applications the pAe m reference phantom power module for fixed and mobile installation provides a gold-plated three-pin Xlr connector. With its wide voltage range the module will fit most available microphone mixers. the module also features a 250 hz bass roll off for reduction of structure-borne noise. the pAe m comes with an integrated system connector with gold- plated contacts. this unique connection securely fits all available gooseneck modules of the DAm+ Series as well as the hm1000 m hanging module.

Programmable on/mute/off switch offers noiseless switching Selectable operating modes for switchable bass roll off and light-ring function RFi Shield technology provides high immunity to radio-frequency interference Accepts 9-52V input for almost any available mixer inputs Feeds all DAM+ Series capsules for highest flexibility

Extra feeding of LED ring to show mic status for use with automixers including logic outputs Highly reliable contacts to mounting modules prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life RFi Shield technology provides high immunity to radio-frequency interference Feeds all DAM+ Series capsules for highest flexibility Switchable bass roll off for reduction of body noise and proximity effect

Feeds all DAM+ Series capsules for highest flexibility RFi Shield technology provides high immunity to radio-frequency interference Accepts 9-52V input for almost any available mixer inputs Switchable bass roll off for reduction of body noise and proximity effect Highly reliable contacts to mounting modules prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life

Item Number: pAeSp m    3165h00170

Item Number: pAe m    3165h00150

Item Number: pAe5 m    3165h00160

Page 128

dAM+ Accessories
sT6
the St6 is a heavy duty table stand for universal use. it provides two professional 3-pin Slr connectors as audio interface. the St6 is compatible with wide range of microphones, e.g. the gooseneck microphones of the 99er and DAm+ series. Due to its heavy weight it is very well shock absorbing and holds the microphone firm on place. Item number: St6 2966h00040

sTs dAM+
the StS DAm+ is a heavy duty table stand with extremely good shock absorbing properties. it provides a 4 pin connector compatible with all DAm+ Series goosenecks as well as with the gooseneck microphones of the cS3 discussion system. the StS DAm+ features an extremely rugged switch which can be programmed to the following functions: push to talk, push to mute, push on/off, low cut on/off. the status of the microphone is displayed by an leD square. Item number: StS DAm+ 2966h00030

GOOSeneCK MICROPHOneS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Mf M
the mF m is a flush-mount module that efficiently reduces body noise from tables. its slim design can integrate each powering module of the DAm+ Series and allows the microphones to be detached when not in use. A special blind cap seals the connector outlet, leaving an attractive flush interface in the table and simultaneously sealing the connector to protect it against dust. Item number: mF m 3165h00220

Section:

02

uwa9 M
the uWA9 m is a holder for wireless body-pack transmitters. it fits perfectly on the Gn155 m floor stand gooseneck module. in combination with the mK150 ml it creates a wireless floor stand microphone for presentations or for choir and instrumental recording. the rugged metal plate is covered with foam to prevent scratching the transmitter housing. A universal velcro strip is used to hold any AKG wireless body-pack transmitter. Item number: uWA9 m 3165h00280

w40 M
the W40 m is a reference windscreen with the highest performance in its class. two layers of mesh and a combination of foam reduce wind and pop noise to a minimum. its rugged wire-mesh grill securely protects the microphone even under rough day-to-day usage. the W40 m is compatible with the cK41 and cK43 capsules from the DAm+ Series. Item number: W40 m 3165h00290

Page 129

daM series
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

high-peRfoRmance modulaR installed micRophones

for use in houses of worship, conference rooms and theatres

proven reliaBility

the DAm (Discreet Acoustics modular) Series is a range of high-performance installed microphones which have proven its worth for many years worldwide. it brilliantly fulfills the three key requirements that are essential for sound system applications: modularity, reliability and a low profile. the DAm Series offers a choice of five capsule modules with different polar patterns and frequency responses. A wide range of goosenecks and special-purpose installation modules make this microphone series extremely versatile and easy to use. the excellent response and extremely good intelligibility make the DAm Series the first choice whenever quality and reliability have top priority.

CK33
high-peRfoRmance condenseR capsule

02

for use in conference and house-of-worship applications the cK33 is a high-performance hypercardioid condenser capsule and a good choice in situations when noise comes from the sides or people talk into the microphone from greater distances. the cK33 capsule is integrated into a rugged metal housing and fits any mounting module of the DAm Series. to prevent contact problems, the capsule is equipped with large-area, self-cleaning, gold-plated contacts with deep threads to prevent misalignment and ensure extra-long life. the package includes a special two-part windscreen, which reduces wind and pop noise.

full focus

All Products share these features:

Highly efficient 2-in-1 windscreen reduces wind and pop noise Wide frequency range for a speech-optimized audio performance Hypercardioid polar pattern eliminates noise from the sides 95° pickup angle perfect when people talk from greater distances Highly reliable capsule contacts prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life

Extremely rugged gooseneck construction for an extra-long life of reliability and stability Integrated LED ring indicator for full control of the system status Switchable bass roll off for reduction of body noise and proximity effect Highly reliable contacts for capsule modules prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life Broad assortment of mounting accessories available for quick and hassle-free installation

Included accessories: W30 Windscreen

Item Number: cK33    2765X00220

130

Page 130

GOOSeneCK MICROPHOneS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CK32
high-peRfoRmance condenseR capsule

CK31
high-peRfoRmance condenseR capsule

omnisensitive virtuoso
for use in theater and surveillance applications the cK32 is a high-performance omnidirectional condenser capsule and an excellent choice for situations requiring ambience pickup, like surveillance and recording applications. the cK32 capsule is integrated into a rugged metal housing and fits any mounting module of the DAm Series. to prevent contact problems the capsule is equipped with large-area, self-cleaning, gold-plated contacts with deep threads to prevent misalignment and ensure extra-long life. the package includes a special two-part windscreen, which reduces wind and pop noise.

all-round genius

for use in conference and house-of-worship applications the cK31 is a high-performance condenser capsule with a wide cardioid polar pattern, especially designed for inexperienced speakers and applications where more than one person uses the microphone in turn. the cK31 capsule is integrated in a rugged metal housing and fits any mounting module of the DAm Series. to prevent contact problems, the capsule is equipped with large-area, self-cleaning, gold-plated contacts with deep threads to prevent misalignment and ensure extra-long life. the package includes a special two-part windscreen, which efficiently reduces wind and pop noise.

Section:

02

Highly efficient 2-in-1 windscreen reduces wind and pop noise Wide frequency range for a speech-optimized audio performance Omnidirectional polar pattern high sensitivity in all directions 360° pickup angle for ambient recording and surveillance applications Highly reliable capsule contacts prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life

Cardioid polar pattern eliminates noise from the rear 125° pickup angle for inexperienced or very vivacious speakers Highly reliable capsule contacts prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life Highly efficient two-in-one windscreen reduces wind and pop noise equally Wide frequency range for a speech-optimized audio performance

Included accessories: W30 Windscreen

Included accessories: W30 Windscreen

Item Number: cK32    2765h00210

Item Number: cK31    2765h00200

Page 131

CK47
high-peRfoRmance shotgun condenseR capsule

CK80
high-peRfoRmance shotgun condenseR capsule

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
• • • • •

for use in conference, house-of-worship and theater applications the cK47 is a high-performance condenser capsule with an 80° pickup angle, studio-quality audio and clean off-axis response. it is an ideal tool for inexperienced speakers and wherever professional studio sound is required. the cK47 capsule is integrated into rugged metal housing and fits any mounting module of the DAm Series. to prevent contact problems, the capsule is equipped with large-area, self-cleaning, gold-plated contacts with deep threads to prevent misalignment and ensure extra-long life. the cK47 comes complete with a W70 windscreen that reduces wind and pop noise.

summit of sound

for use in conference, house-of-worship and theater applications the cK80 high-performance shotgun capsule provides an 80° pickup angle and offers a speech-optimized frequency response. it offers an unbeatable price/performance ratio and good speech intelligibility in acoustically critical applications. the cK80 capsule fits any mounting module of the DAm Series. to prevent contact problems, the capsule is equipped with large-area, self-cleaning, gold-plated contacts with deep threads to prevent misalignment and ensure extra-long life. the cK80 comes complete with a professional windscreen that reduces wind and pop noise.

focus of the puBlic

Highly reliable capsule contacts prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life Highly efficient 2-in-1 windscreen reduces wind and pop noise Tight, hypercardioid polar pattern eliminates noise from the sides 80° pickup angle for inexperienced speakers and greater distances Legendary AKG C747 sound for studio-quality audio performance

Tight, hypercardioid polar pattern eliminates noise from the sides Speech-optimized frequency response for excellent intelligibility in acoustically critical environments Highly reliable contacts for capsule modules prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life

Included accessories: W80 Windscreen

Item Number: cK80    2765Z00240

Included accessories: W70 Windscreen

Item Number: cK47    2765Z00230

Page 132

gn155 set
high-peRfoRmance gooseneck flooR stand

hM1000
high-peRfoRmance hanging module
Harman Pro Group | 2013

smart solution

for on-stage use or in front of a lectern the Gn155 is a 155cm (4ft 11in) gooseneck module with a heavy, shock-mounted floor stand, suitable for stand-alone use on stages or placed in front of a lectern. A supplied screw-on extension tube can be used to raise the microphone for tall users and in choir applications. the Gn155 has an attached 10m (33ft) cable with Xlr phantom power adapter. it is excellently suited for use as a lectern microphone in houses of worship and meeting halls. the gooseneck module fits all DAm Series capsules, cK31, cK32, cK33, cK47 and cK80, via highly reliable contacts.

hang loose

for use in houses of worship and theaters the hm1000 is used to fly microphones from the ceiling to pick up music or speech in houses of worship and conference rooms and on theater stages. the hm1000 provides a 10m (33ft) cable, specially treated to reduce twisting, even if the environment temperature varies. A spring steel hanging clamp for precise microphone alignment keeps the microphone securely in position. A switchable leD ring helps the sound engineer in monitoring system function during the soundcheck. the hanging module fits all DAm Series capsules, cK31, cK32, cK33, cK47 and cK80, via highly reliable contacts.

GOOSeneCK MICROPHOneS

Section:

02

Low-profile floor stand gooseneck module for permanent installations and mobile applications Extremely rugged gooseneck construction for an extra-long life of reliability and stability Quick-absorbing rubber shock mount for optimum suppression of structure-borne noise Highly reliable contacts for capsule modules prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life Optional extension tube available raises the microphone for tall users or choir pickup

Mounting module for hanging microphones for unobtrusive pickup in difficult places Twist-free 10m cable included to fix and secure the designated mic position Highly reliable contacts for capsule modules prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life Special mounting accessories included for quick and hassle-free installation Integrated LED ring indicator for full control of the installation status

Included accessories: St305 table stand

Item Number: hm1000    2765h00100

Item Number: Gn155 Set    2765h00180

Page 133

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

gn
high-peRfoRmance gooseneck module
for permanent installations

gn e
high-peRfoRmance gooseneck module
for fixed and mobile applications

rugged and discreet

safe and sound

the DAm Series Gn gooseneck modules for permanent screw-on installation are available in three different lengths: 15cm (6in), 30cm (12in), 50cm (20in). except for the Gn30 oc with unterminated cable ends, all come with an in-line Xlr phantom power adapter with integrated 250hz bass rolloff, leD ring and on/oFF jumper. A mini Xlr connector eliminates the need for large holes in the furniture or time-consuming soldering work during installation. the gooseneck module fits all DAm Series capsules, cK31, cK32, cK33, cK47 and cK80, via highly reliable contacts.

the DAm Series Gn e gooseneck modules for fixed and mobile installation comes with an integrated Xlr phantom power adapter with 250hz bass rolloff, leD ring and on/oFF jumper. it connects to any standard mixer input with 9v – 52v power supply. the DAm Series Gn e gooseneck modules are available in three different lengths: 15cm (6in), 30cm (12in), 50cm (20in). they work perfectly with the extensive range of mounting accessories available in the AKG catalog. the gooseneck module fits all DAm Series capsules, cK31, cK32, cK33, cK47 and cK80, via highly reliable contacts.

Discreet, screw-on mounting module for permanent installations Detachable phantom power adapter eliminates time-consuming soldering work Special mounting accessories included for quick and hassle-free installation Extremely rugged gooseneck construction for an extra-long life of reliability and stability Highly reliable contacts for capsule modules prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life

Gooseneck with XLR connector module for quick setup and takedown Integrated phantom power adapter connects to any standard mixer Integrated LED ring indicator for full control of the system status Switchable bass rolloff for reduction of body noise and proximity effect Highly reliable contacts for capsule modules prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life

Included accessories: Screw Set Gn

Included accessories: Screw Set Gn 

Item Number: Gn15 2765h00010 Gn30 2765h00030 Gn30 cS 2765h00270 Gn30 oc 2765h00050 Gn50 2765h00080 Gn50 cS 2765Z00280

160mm/6.3in length 305mm/12in length 305mm/12in length 305mm/12in length 500mm/20in length 500mm/20in length

Item Number: Gn15 e 2765h00020 Gn30 e 2765h00040 Gn50 e 2765h00090

160mm/6.3in length 305mm/12in length 500mm/20in length

Page 134

Gooseneck Microphones

Harman Pro Group | 2013

gn esp
high-peRfoRmance gooseneck module

gn e5 pin
high-peRfoRmance gooseneck module

interactive moBility
for fixed and mobile applications the DAm Series Gn eSp gooseneck modules for fixed and mobile installation features a programmable mute switch that can be set to various functions, e.g. on/off, push-to-talk or push-to-mute. together with the clearly visible leD ring for mic on/oFF indication, the Gn eSp modules can serve perfectly as a small-discussion system. the Gn eSp gooseneck modules are available in three different lengths: 15cm (6in); 30cm (12in) and 50cm (20in). the electronic circuit design provides high immunity to radio-frequency interference. the gooseneck module fits all DAm Series capsules, cK31, cK32, cK33, cK47 and cK80, via highly reliable contacts.

unrivaled flexiBility
for fixed and mobile applications the Gn e 5pin high-performance gooseneck modules for fixed and mobile installation provide a five-pin Xlr connector that allows the audio signal and the control voltage for the leD ring to be fed separately. thus, the leD ring can be activated remotely by, for example, a logic output from any automatic mixer. the leD ring is extra-large for enhanced visibility. the DAm Series Gn e five-pin gooseneck modules are available in three different lengths: 15cm (6in), 30cm (12in) and 50cm (20in). the gooseneck module fits all DAm Series capsules, cK31, cK32, cK33, cK47 and cK80, via highly reliable contacts.

Section:

02

Programmable on/mute/off switch offers basic discussion system functions Gooseneck with XLR connector module for quick setup and takedown Programmable LED ring indicator provides a clearly visible mic on/oFF indication Switchable bass rolloff for reduction of body noise and proximity effect RFi Shield technology provides high immunity to radio-frequency interference

Gooseneck with 5-pin XLR connector module for remote control of integrated leD ring Extra-large LED ring indicator provides enhanced visible mic on/oFF indication Switchable bass rolloff for reduction of body noise and proximity effect Extremely rugged gooseneck construction for an extra-long life of reliability and stability Highly reliable contacts for capsule modules prevent contact problems and ensure extra-long life

Included accessories: Screw Set Gn

Included accessories: Screw Set Gn

Item Number: Gn15 eSp 2765h00450 Gn30 eSp 2765h00460 Gn50 eSp 2765h00470

160mm/6.3in length 305mm/12in length 500mm/20in length

Item Number: Gn15 e 5pin Gn30 e 5pin Gn50 e 5pin

2765Z00390 2765h00400 2765Z00410

160mm/6.3in length 305mm/12in length 500mm/20in length

Page 135

CoMpaCT 99er series
plug ‘n’ play installed micRophones for use in houses of worship, conference rooms and theatres

an easy JoB

the 99ers is a unique range of high class microphones for applications where budget, not modularity, is a major consideration. the 99er Series offers a user-friendly system that fulfills its basic functions perfectly. While an excellent price-performance ratio was achieved by focusing on essential features, no compromise was made with regard to the sound of the capsules. All microphones are equipped with proper rF shielding to meet the high demands for electromagnetic compatibility in everyday installations. the mix of high class acoustics, rF shielding and the rugged all-metal part design makes the 99ers easy to install and absolutely reliable in use. the 99er Series offer a high class microphone for any application at a remarkable price point.

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Cgn99 c
condenseR gooseneck micRophones
for conference and house-of-worship applications the cGn99 c/S and cGn99 c/l, part of the 99ers Series, are condenser gooseneck microphones with a cardioid polar pattern. they are specially designed for inexperienced speakers who talk into the microphone from widely varying angles. the rugged gooseneck is available in two different lengths (c/S: 30cm (12in); c/l: 50cm (20in) and ideal for fixed and mobile installations. cGn99 c/S and cGn99 c/l come with an integrated Xlr phantom power adapter with 250hz bass rolloff. the phantom power adapter connects to any standard mixer input with 9v to 52v power supply.

open to the puBlic

All Products share these features:

Compact solution for plug and play Cardioid polar pattern eliminates noise from the rear Two different gooseneck lengths 30cm (c/S) or 50cm (c/l) available

Compact solution for plug ‘n’ play All metal housing withstands the tough requirements of everyday usage Sophisticated RF shielding for maximum reliability and excellent audio

Included accessories: Windscreen

Item Number: cGn99c/large cGn99c/Small

2965h00130 2965h00110

580mm/23in length 380mm/15in length

136

Page 136

GOOSeneCK MICROPHOneS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Cgn99 h
condenseR gooseneck micRophones

ChM99
hanging micRophone module

closer to the source

for conference, lecture and house-of-worship applications the cGn99 h/S and cGn99 h/l, part of the 99ers Series, are condenser gooseneck microphones with a hypercardioid polar pattern. they are a good choice for all situations when unwanted noise arrives from the sides or where people talk into the microphone from greater distances. the rugged gooseneck is available in two different lengths (c/S: 30cm (12in); c/l: 50cm (20in) and ideal for fixed and mobile installations. cGn99 h/S and cGn99 h/l come with an integrated Xlr phantom power adapter with 250hz bass rolloff. the phantom power adapter connects to any standard mixer input with 9v to 52v power supply.

Black and white

for use in houses of worship, conference rooms and theaters the chm99, part of the 99ers Series, is a hanging microphone module with cardioid polar pattern, used to record music or speech in houses of worship, conference rooms or on theater stages. the chm99 is available in black or white. A 10m (33ft) special cable that is treated specially to reduce twisting to a minimum and a spring steel hanging clamp for precise microphone alignment keeps the microphone securely in its position. the attached phantom power adapter connects to any standard mixer input with 9v to 52v power supply.

Section:

02

Compact solution for plug and play Hypercardioid polar pattern perfect where people talk from greater distances Two different gooseneck lengths 30cm (c/S) or 50cm (c/l) available

Compact solution for plug and play Wide pickup angle for unobtrusive pickup in difficult places Twist-free cable to fix and secure the designated mic position Spring steel hanging clamp included for quick and hassle-free installation Available in black and white blends perfectly into its environment

Included accessories: Windscreen

Item Number: cGn99h/large cGn99h/Small

2965X00140 2965X00120

580mm/23in length 580mm/23in length

Included accessories: Windscreen

Item Number: chm99 Black chm99 White

2965h00150 2965h00160

Black color White color

Page 137

Cgn321 sts
pRofessional tabletop micRophone set

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 138

come closer

for conference tables, courtrooms and houses of worship the cGn321 StS is a heavy duty professional tabletop microphone with excellent shock absorbing properties. it features a cGn321 condenser gooseneck microphone with a cardioid polar pattern on a slim, 30 cm long gooseneck. this professional microphone is specially designed for inexperienced speakers who talk into the microphone from widely varying angles. the tabletop microphone provides an extremely rugged switch capable of withstanding more than 25,000 switching cycles. it can be programmed for the following functions: push to talk, push to mute, push on/off and low cut on/off. A leD square clearly indicates the microphone’s status. the cGn321 StS comes with a professional, gold plated 3-pin Xlr audio output.

30 cm gooseneck microphone for wherever table space is limited Heavy duty metal housing for excellent shock absorbing properties Programmable switch for push to talk, push to mute, push on/off and low cut on/off functions LED status square for clear indication of the microphone status Gold plated connector for long lasting and secure contact

Item Number: cGn321 StS    2966h00010

Cgn521 sts
pRofessional tabletop micRophone set
Harman Pro Group | 2013

keep the distance

for lecterns, courtrooms and houses of worship the cGn521 StS is a heavy duty professional tabletop microphone with excellent shock absorbing properties. it features a cGn521 condenser gooseneck microphone with a cardioid polar pattern on a slim, 50 cm long gooseneck. this professional microphone is specially designed for inexperienced speakers who talk into the microphone from widely varying angles. the tabletop microphone provides an extremely rugged switch capable of withstanding more than 25,000 switching cycles. it can be programmed for the following functions: push to talk, push to mute, push on/off and low cut on/off. A leD square clearly indicates the microphone’s status. the cGn521 StS comes with a professional, gold plated 3-pin Xlr audio output.

Gooseneck Microphones

Section:

02

50 cm gooseneck microphone for big tables and standing applications Heavy duty metal housing ensures a firm support for long goosenecks Programmable switch for push to talk, push to mute, push on/off and low cut on/off functions LED status square for clear indication of the microphone status Gold plated connector for long lasting and secure contact

Item Number: cGn521 StS    2966h00020

Page 139

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

C547 BL
Professional boundary layer microPhone
for houses of worship, theater and bass drum recording The C547 is a hypercardioid professional boundary layer microphone. The rugged, non-crush case and a switchable bass-cut filter make the C547 an ideal choice for tough on-stage assignments. Using PCC® (Phase Coherent Cardioid®) technology with hypercardioid polar pattern, the microphone provides high directivity and neutral sound. The C547 is built on the same acoustical components as the legendary C747 V11. Primarily designed for use in houses of worship, theaters and conferencing, the C547 BL is also a good choice for miking kick drums and other instruments. The highly efficient RFi-Shield technology substantially reduces interference noise due to electromagnetic pollution.

PCC160
Professional boundary layer microPhone
theater on stage

Live on stage

great act

The PCC160 is a professional boundary layer microphone and an industry standard stage floor microphone. It´s capable of withstanding up to 120dB SPL without distortion. A bass-tilt switch allows the user to tailor the low-end response for particular applications. PCC® (Phase Coherent Cardioid®) technology uses diaphragms so small that any phase cancellations are above the audible range. This results in a wide, smooth frequency response free of phase interference. The PCC160 uses a supercardioid polar pattern that improves gain before feedback and reduces unwanted room noise from the rear.

Hypercardioid polar pattern for maximum rejection of disturbing signals Acoustics based on C747 V11 for wide, smooth frequency response RFi-Shield technology reduces interference noise due to electromagnetic pollution Rugged, low profile housing withstands the rigors of the stage Paintable grille assembly to blend in with stage decoration

Supercardioid polar pattern for impressive gain before feedback PCC® (Phase Coherent Cardioid®) technology for a wide, smooth frequency response Three-position bass-tilt switch for optimized body noise suppression Extremely low profile for inconspicuous placement on the stage floor Finely crafted, rugged housing to withstand the rigors of the stage

Included accessories: W547 Windscreen

Item Number: PCC160    3332H00010

Item Number: C547 BL    2447Z00010

Page 140

PZM30 D
high-Performance hemisPherical boundary layer microPhone

PZM6 D
high-Performance hemisPherical boundary layer microPhone

Boundary Layer Microphones

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Livin´ on the edge

houses of worship, on-stage recording and broadcasting The PZM30 D high-performance hemispherical boundary layer microphone is a Pressure Zone Microphone® designed for professional recording, sound reinforcement and broadcasting. The capsule is mounted in the “pressure zone”, an area where direct sound and reflected sound are in phase, which provides a 6dB higher sensitivity. Two selectable frequency responses (flat/rising) provide greater flexibility in mic placement and sonic character. The rising position of the frequency switch adds brilliance and a crisp attack on percussion, drums, or piano. The PZM30 D comes in a very rugged, low-profile, metal housing with detachable cable that makes it sturdy and reliable for heavy duty applications.

smaLL but mighty

music-recording, on-stage and broadcast applications The PZM6 D high-performance hemispherical boundary layer microphone is designed for many applications, from miking full orchestras or individual musical instruments to security or teleconferencing, as well as film and video productions. A very small metal housing makes the PZM6 D even more inconspicuous than the PZM30 D. Two selectable frequency responses (flat/rising) provide greater flexibility in mic placement and sonic character. The rising position delivers bright sound without boosting high frequencies on the recording console. The flat position provides a smooth, flat, high-frequency response for natural sound reproduction. The PZM6 D provides a professional XLR connector on a fixed cable.

Section:

02

Hemispherical polar pattern, for intelligible pickup of sound from any direction PZM® (Pressure Zone Microphone®) technology prevents sound coloration from surface reflections Switchable dual-frequency response for greater flexibility in mic placement and sonic character Rugged, low-profile housing withstands the rigors of the stage Detachable cable easy to install and service

Hemispherical polar pattern for intelligible pickup of sound from any direction PZM® (Pressure Zone Microphone®) technology prevents sound coloration from surface reflections Switchable dual-frequency response for enhanced flexibility in mic placement and sonic character Small, lightweight metal housing for mobile and studio applications Fixed cable with XLR connector for easy handling

Item Number: PZM30 D    6000H50790

Item Number: PZM6 D    6000H50780

Page 141

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

PCC170
Professional boundary layer microPhone

PCC130
high-Performance boundary layer microPhone

for conference and house-of-worship applications

taking care of business

conference, courtroom and distance-learning applications The PCC130 and the PCC130 SW are cardioid boundary layer microphones of professional quality that, due to their small size, fit perfectly on small tables. Thanks to low self-noise and very high sensitivity, the microphone picks up even distant voices clearly and naturally. A bass-tilt switch allows the user to tailor the low-end response and reduce subsonic noise. The PCC130 SW has a silent-operating programmable membrane switch that can be configured for touch on/off, momentary on or momentary off. A high-intensity LED lights when the unit is on. For easy installation, both microphones offer an XLR connector and a detachable cable.

make your statement

The PCC170 and the PCC170 SW are professional boundary layer microphones with supercardioid polar pattern to minimize background noise and feedback. The microphones are designed for use on boardroom tables or lecterns. Both microphones provide a bass-tilt switch, allowing the user to tailor the low-end response and reduce subsonic noise. The included RFI suppression ensures trouble-free operation even with active cell phones nearby. The PCC170 SW has a silent-operating programmable membrane switch that can be configured for touch on/off, momentary on or momentary off. For easy installation, both microphones offer an XLR connector and a detachable cable.

Supercardioid polar pattern offers high gain before feedback PCC® (Phase Coherent Cardioid®) technology for optimum speech intelligibility Three-position bass-tilt switch for optimized suppression of subsonic noise Silent-operating on/off switch (PCC170 SW only) to reduce the number of simultaneously open mics Detachable cable easy to install and service

Cardioid polar pattern reduces background noise and feedback PCC® (Phase Coherent Cardioid®) technology for optimum speech intelligibility Three-position bass-tilt switch for optimized suppression of subsonic noise Silent-operating on/off switch (PCC130 SW only) to reduce the number of simultaneously open mics Detachable cable easy to install and service

Item Number: PCC170 PCC170 SW PCC170 SW PCC170 SWO PCC170 SWO

3331H00010 3330H00010 6000H50860 3329H00010 6000H50850

With mute switch With mute switch, non RoHS conform With mute switch open cable ends With mute switch open cable ends, non RoHS conform

Item Number: PCC130 PCC130 SW PCC130 SW

3334H00010 3333H00010 6000H50890

With mute switch With mute switch, non RoHS conform

Page 142

Boundary Layer Microphones

Harman Pro Group | 2013

PZM185
hemisPherical boundary layer microPhone

MB3
high-Performance, flush-mount boundary layer microPhone

bLends in perfectLy
broadcast and video production The PZM185 is a Pressure Zone Microphone® designed for applications such as group discussions, interviews, broadcast and home video production. The paddle can be detached, which makes it nearly invisible when mounted on tables, floors, walls, lecterns or cameras. The PZM185 is powered by either an internal AAA 1.5V battery or 12–48V phantom power. It provides a wide, smooth frequency response and is protected against static and RFI. The XLR output is balanced and low-impedance, which allows long cable runs without hum pickup or high-frequency loss.

spread the word

theater, conference, meeting-room and security applications The MB3 is a high-performance, miniature boundary microphone for flush-mount installation. Thanks to its supercardioid pickup pattern, the MB3 greatly reduces ambient noise and pickup of room reverberation. The result is a clearer, more intelligible sound for applications such as teleconferencing, distance learning, boardrooms, courtrooms and security. The MB3 provides a three-pin XLR-type, low-impedance, balanced mic-level output and is powered by 12–48V phantom power.

Section:

02

Hemispherical polar pattern for clear, intelligible pickup of speech Universal power concept works with battery or phantom power Low-impedance XLR-type output no hum pickup or high-frequency loss

Supercardioid polar pattern offers high gain before feedback PCC® (Phase Coherent Cardioid®) technology for optimum speech intelligibility Miniature design virtually disappears when installed LED indicator for clear mic on/off notification Mounts easily into tabletops, walls and ceilings for fixed applications

Item Number: PZM185    6000H50800

Item Number: MB3 6000H50920 MB3 3336H00010

non RoHS conform

Page 143

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Mb4
miniatuRe boundaRy layeR micRophone

CbL410 pcc
pc micRophone

House-of-worship, conference and ticket-window applications the mB4 is a miniature boundary microphone for table-top installation. thanks to its supercardioid pickup pattern, the mB4 greatly reduces ambient noise and pickup of room reverberation. the result is a clearer, more intelligible sound for applications such as teleconferencing, distance learning, boardrooms and courtrooms. the mB4 has a cable leading to an Xlr-type output connector with built-in mic electronics. it is powered by 12–48v phantom power and is low-impedance balanced.

little Big mic

for VoIP and teleconferencing applications

connects the world

the cBl410 pcc is a microphone for use with any pc or laptop. it improves audio quality when conferencing via voip. the microphone reproduces the voice with a clear and natural sound. With its 3.5mm stereo jack, it is a real plug-and-play device. no drivers are needed. its cascading capability makes the cBl410 pcc the perfect tool for single-person usage in the office and/or for multiperson usage in a meeting room. this microphone provides optimum intelligibility and audio quality for your meetings.

Supercardioid polar pattern offers high gain before feedback PCC® (Phase Coherent Cardioid®) technology for optimum speech intelligibility Removable grille assembly can be painted to blend in with furniture LED indicator for clear mic on/off notification Balanced, low-Z output prevents hum and high-frequency loss

Cascadable for multiperson use Plug and play 3.5mm jack connector, no software drivers needed Universal power concept works with power from pc´s mic input

Item Number: mB4    3335h00010

Item Number: cBl410 conference Set black cBl410 conference Set white cBl410 pcc Black cBl410 pcc White cBl410 Workstation Set

3177h00110 3177h00120 3177h00010 3177h00020 3177h00130

Black color White color

Page 144

Boundary Layer Microphones

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CbL99
hemispheRical boundaRy layeR micRophone

sound grAbber ii
hemispheRical boundaRy layeR micRophone

what a Bargain
for recording applications the cBl99 is a hemispherical boundary layer microphone designed to deliver superior results for a multitude of recording applications. the cBl99 is small, lightweight and easy to place. Since the transducer sits in a metal plate only 5mm (0.2 in) thick, the plate doesn’t interfere with or color the sound. Frequency response is very uniform within its hemisphere, and it captures the “room sound” of an instrument very accurately. the cBl99 requires 9v – 52v phantom power. its output is unbalanced via a professional Xlr connector with switchable bass-cut filter.

i´m all ears

for home-video production the Sound Grabber ii hemispherical boundary layer microphone utilizes pressure Zone microphone® technology in which sound waves reinforce themselves in the area nearest a flat surface. thus, the Sound Grabber ii will pick up sounds at distances with clarity while speakers or vocalists can move freely around the microphone without their tone quality changing. the Sound Grabber ii is powered by an internal AAA 1.5v battery. the 3.5mm jack output is unbalanced and of mid-impedance, which allows it to connect directly to cameras and recorders.

Section:

02

Studio-quality microphone capsule offers a sensational price/performance ratio High sensitivity and low self-noise to ensure generous headroom in critical situations Extremely small and inconspicuous for mobile and installed solutions

Universal power concept works with battery or phantom power Mid-impedance phone connector type output perfectly fits cameras and recording gear Detachable boundary “paddle” for very low profile mounting

Item Number: cBl99    2762X00110

Item Number: Sound Grabber ii    3321h00010

Page 145

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

C562 cM
pRofessional flush-mount boundaRy layeR micRophone

pZM10
pRofessional flush-mount boundaRy layeR micRophone

for recording, courtroom, surveillance and security applications the c562 cm is a professional flush-mount boundary microphone, designed for permanent, “invisible” mounting in ceilings, walls, tables and stages. owing to its high sensitivity, the c562 cm is characterized by excellent clarity and a consistent pickup anywhere around the mic. the c562 cm is a perfect tool for surveillance or live recording. the included Xlr phantom power adapter connects to the microphone cable through a miniature connector, so installation holes can be smaller than the diameter of the phantom power adapter.

invisiBle ear

for ticket-window, courtroom and security applications the pZm10 and pZm10 ll, part of the pressure Zone microphone® line, are designed for security, surveillance, and conference-table use. the special housing design allows the microphones to be mounted into tables, walls or ceilings easily and inconspicuously. using pressure Zone microphone® technology, the pZm10 and pZm10 ll are highly sensitive and deliver a wide and smooth frequency response. thus the pZm10 and pZm10 ll are characterized by excellent clarity and a consistent pickup anywhere around the mic.

inconspicuous assistant

Hemispherical polar pattern for clear, intelligible pickup of speech High sensitivity for a great pickup area Low-profile, cylindrical design, perfect for wall or tabletop installation

Hemispherical polar pattern for clear, intelligible pickup of speech Low-profile, cylindrical design, perfect for wall or tabletop installation Choice of mic level output or line-level output (PZM10 LL) for optimized level matching PZM10 powered by 12V – 48V phantom power, XLR connector connects to all standard mixers with phantom power out PZM10 LL powered by 12V – 24V/DC, unterminated wires for the most flexible connectivity

Item Number: c562 cm    2262X00030

Item Number: pZm10    3328h00010

Page 146

Boundary Layer Microphones

Harman Pro Group | 2013

pZM11
pRofessional flush-mount boundaRy layeR micRophone

pZM11 ll Wr
pRofessional weatheR-Resistant hemispheRical boundaRy layeR micRophone

listen up

for ticket-window and security applications the pZm11 professional boundary layer microphone is designed for security and surveillance applications. the pZm11 is characterized by a consistent pickup anywhere around the mic. low frequencies below the voice range are rolled off to reduce the pickup of heating, ventilation or air-conditioning rumble (hvAc noise). the high-frequency response is boosted slightly to aid clarity and articulation. the pZm11 has a mic-level output and is powered by 12–48v phantom power. electronics on the rear of the plate offer screw terminals, eliminating the need for connectors.

it can stand the rain

for outdoor intercoms, toll booths and SOS telephones the pZm11 ll Wr is a professional weather-resistant boundary layer microphone designed for fast-food restaurants, outdoor intercoms, toll booths, SoS telephones, theme-park security and the like. A plastic membrane inside the microphone protects the mic capsule from water damage. the pZm11 ll Wr will work during and after rainfall. if water freezes on the membrane, the mic’s frequency response will change but will return to normal when the ice melts and the membrane dries. the pZm11 ll Wr is powered by 12v –24v Dc, provides line-level output and can be plugged directly into a vcr line input without the need for a costly mic preamp.

Section:

02

Hemispherical polar pattern for clear, intelligible pickup of speech Low-frequency rolloff effectively reduces hvAc rumble Screw terminal no need for connectors

Hemispherical polar pattern for clear, intelligible pickup of speech Weather-resistant model for outdoor use Line-level output connects directly to video recorders

Item Number: pZm11    3326h00010

Item Number: pZm11 ll Wr    6000h50810

Page 147

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 148

HC577 L
RefeRence head-woRn micRophone

No Sweat

for theater and broadcast applications The HC577 L is an extremely small reference head-worn microphone, designed for on-stage use. The microphone uses a CK77 omnidirectional transducer that has been an industry standard for lavaliere capsules for years and ensures superior audio performance. A patented body design protects the microphone from moisture and perspiration. The capsule uses the signal of two vertical diaphragms mounted back to back, mixed out of phase to cancel out mechanical and cable noise. The HC577 L provides a professional three-pin mini XLR connector that fits the body-pack transmitters of all AKG wireless microphone systems.

Adjustable headband and left/right selectable boom for maximum comfort and flexibility Dual-diaphragm transducer for suppression of cable noise Resistant to moisture, perspiration and salts withstands sudorific stage performances Interchangeable capsule module for quick and easy service Omnidirectional polar pattern for unchanging sound quality in all directions

Included accessories: W77 MP Windscreen, Dropring, PB77 Adaptor

Item Number: HC577 L    3141Z00010

C544 L
high-peRfoRmance spoRts head-woRn condenseR micRophone

Head-worn and LavaLier MicropHones

Harman Pro Group | 2013

1-2-3-4, ruN, turN hip aNd jump
for aerobics and handsfree speech applications The C544 L high-performance head-worn miniature condenser microphone with an easily fitting headband is perfect for gymnastics instruction and other handsfree speech applications. A transducer shock mount reduces body noise to a minimum and the short microphone arm places the microphone in the right position to the mouth to minimize pop and breathing noise. A special moisture shield on the boom prevents the microphone from being clogged by sweat or makeup. The C544 L comes with a three-pin mini XLR connecter which fits all AKG WMS Series body-pack transmitters. The package also includes a special windscreen.

Section:

02

Fully rugged sports headband for secure fit in all situations and movements Cardioid polar pattern for problem-free use with high ambient noise rejection Flexible shock mount for efficient suppression of mechanical and body noise Moisture shield ensuring a dry microphone capsule Includes four drop rings for sweat and water protection

Included accessories: W444 Windscreen, Dropring

Item Number: C544 L    2793Z00060

Page 149

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CK97
RefeRence lavalieR micRophone

CK77 Wr
pRofessional lavalieR micRophone

for broadcast and theater applications

reliaBle companion

for theater, house-of-worship and broadcast applications the cK77 Wr is an extremely small, omnidirectional professional lavalier microphone. the patented dual-diaphragm capsule has been designed to protect the transducer from moisture and perspiration. the cK77 Wr uses two vertical diaphragms mounted back to back to cancel out mechanical and cable noise by mixing the signals of both capsules out of phase. its ruggedness and superior sound quality make it an excellent tool for theater and broadcast applications. the screw-on module capsule allows quick and easy service of the microphone. the cK77 Wr l is available in three versions, differing in color and connector.

stands high and dry

the cK97 c/l is a reference condenser lavalier microphone with a consistent cardioid pattern. it ensures minimum ambience pickup and high gain before feedback in live-sound applications, including houses of worship, lectures and theaters. thanks to its small housing and the included rugged metal clip, it can be inconspicuous, with secure mounting to jackets and costumes. the cK97 c/l provides a professional three-pin mini Xlr connector that fits the body pack transmitters of all AKG wireless microphone systems.

Cardioid accurate axial response and uniform pattern control for uncolored sound quality and high gain before feedback 125° pickup angle for inexperienced or very vivacious talkers Professional three-pin, mini XLR connector fits all AKG wireless pocket transmitters

Dual-diaphragm transducer for suppression of cable noise Resistant to moisture, perspiration and salt withstands sudorific stage performances Interchangeable capsule module for quick and easy service Omnidirectional polar pattern for unchanging sound quality in all directions

Item Number: cK97 c/l cK97 cvr Wl

2497Z00080 1400Z00970

for use with B29 l, mpA v-l and all AKG bodypack transmitters with short gooseneck with a male mini-Xlr plug for direct plug into pocket transmitter

Included accessories: h40/1 tie clip, h41 tie pin, W77 Windscreen

Item Number: cK77 Wr l Black

2441Z00390

cK77 Wr l Fleshtone c577 Wr

2441Z00400 2441Z00310

with mini Xlr connector for use with B29 l, mpA vl and all AKG bodypack transmitters with mini Xlr connector with external phantom power adaptor

Page 150

C417
pRofessional lavalieR micRophone

CK99 l
condenseR lavalieR micRophone

Head-worn and LavaLier MicropHones

Harman Pro Group | 2013

a hidden secret

for theaters, broadcast and conference applications the c417 is a professional lavalier microphone with omnidirectional polar pattern. its broadband, flat audio reproduction is ideal for all types of broadcast and theatrical applications. the sound is extremely open and natural, making it ideal for wireless or hardwire multi-mic situations. thanks to its small housing, it can be inconspicuously and securely attached to jackets and costumes. An attachment clip, tie pin and windscreen are supplied with each c417. the c417 is available in two versions. the c417 pp features a standard Xlr connector while the c417 l provides a professional three-pin mini Xlr connector that fits the body pack transmitters of all AKG wireless microphone systems.

hide and speak

for house-of-worship, conference and theater applications the cK99 l is a condenser lavalier microphone with cardioid polar pattern. it provides a natural sound, with a slight rise above 10khz for added clarity, perfect for applications in houses of worship, lectures and theaters. thanks to its small housing and the included durable metal clip, it can be inconspicuously and securely mounted on jackets and costumes. the cK99 l provides a professional three-pin mini Xlr connector that fits the body pack transmitters of all AKG wireless microphone systems.

Section:

02

Omnidirectional polar pattern for unchanging sound quality in all directions Extremely lightweight and inconspicuous for excellent comfort and perfect fit Professional three-pin, mini XLR connector fits all AKG wireless pocket transmitters Balanced sound characteristics for natural reproduction of instruments

Cardioid polar pattern eliminates noise from the rear 125° pickup angle for inexperienced or very vivacious talkers Small housing and durable metal clip for inconspicuous, secure mounting

Included accessories: Windscreen

Included accessories: h40/1 tie clip, h41 tie pin, microphone bag, W407 Windscreen

Item Number: cK99 l    6000h51040

Item Number: c417 l Black c417 pp Black c417 l Fleshtone

2577X00080 2577X00120 2577X00160

Black color, for use with B29 l, mpA v-l and all AKG bodypack transmitters Black color, with standard Xlr connector for phantom powering Fleshtone color, for use with B29 l, mpA v-l and all AKG bodypack transmitters

Page 151

dsT99 s
dynamic paging micRophone

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 152

puBlic announcement

for paging systems, ticket windows and reception desks the DSt99 S, part of the 99ers family, is a paging microphone with cardioid polar pattern for general public address and communication use. the DSt99 S provides a frequency response tailored to speech use, for optimum intelligibility as well as good off-axis rejection, high gain before feedback and suppression of unwanted ambient noise. the all-metal body ensures a long useful life for the microphone, even in tough day-to-day use. the DSt99 S is mounted on a table stand with an on/off switch and supplies a coiled cable with three-pin Xlr connector. using a dynamic capsule, the DSt99 S does not require any powering.

Compact solution for plug and play Rugged gooseneck and all-metal body for long life even in tough day-to-day usage Coiled cable with three-pin XLR connector for quick and hassle-free installation

Item Number: DSt99 S    6000h51030

d58 e
pRofessional dynamic noise-canceling micRophone

dgn99
dynamic gooseneck micRophone
Harman Pro Group | 2013

come closer

for intercom use at ticket windows and in public transport the D58 e is a dynamic, hypercardioid, close-talking microphone for talkback and intercom applications. in order to improve speech intelligibility in noisy environments, the D58 e is tuned to a mid-frequency range. thus it compensates for proximity effect and provides a flat response to near sources. the D58 e is rugged and lightweight, operating over a wide range of temperatures and humidity. using a dynamic capsule, the microphone does not require any powering. it has an integral Xlr connector for mounting on a gooseneck such as the optional GnS36.

message delivered

for paging systems, ticket windows and reception desks the DGn99 and DGn99 e, part of the 99ers family, are dynamic gooseneck microphones with cardioid polar pattern for general public address and communication use. the microphones provide a frequency response tailored for optimum intelligibility, good off-axis rejection for high gain before feedback and suppression of unwanted ambient noise. the all-metal body ensures a long, useful life for the microphone even in tough day-to-day use. the DGn99 e comes with an integrated Xlr connector while the DGn99 offers open cables for universal use. using a dynamic capsule, the microphones do not require any powering.

PAGInG MICROPHOneS

Section:

02

Hypercardioid polar pattern eliminates noise from the sides Close-talking optimized frequency tuning will give a flat response to near sources Small, rugged metal housing fits gooseneck modules like the GnS36

Compact solution for plug and play Cardioid polar pattern eliminates noise from the rear Rugged gooseneck and all-metal body for long life even in tough day-to-day usage

Item Number: D58 e    1632Z00150

Item Number: DGn99 6000h51010 DGn99 e 6000h51020

dynamic paging mic dynamic paging mic

Page 153

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 154

DMM12
Professional digital stereo automatic mixer

Helping Hand

for boardroom, community center and broadcasting applications The DMM12 is a professional digital stereo automatic mixer with twelve mic/line inputs, two stereo master outputs and one assignable stereo record output. The mixer offers a full stereo bus and a high sophisticated algorithm for seamless mixing. It provides highest S/N ratio while reducing the number of open microphones to a minimum. The unique user interface combines an analog look and feel with the comfort and accuracy of digital controls. Each input channel features low-cut, treble and bass filters, a dbx® compressor/limiter, a pan/balance and a priority (ducking) function. An integrated matrix allows each channel to be routed to one of the outputs individually. In addition delay lines can be established. The DMM12 can be cascaded up to 10 units or 120 inputs. An RS232 interface allows external control e.g. via AMX or Crestron remotes.

Twelve inputs, two stereo master outputs via professional XLR/RCA connectors High sophisticated mixing algorithm prevents the loss of syllables Connectivity to media control systems via RS232 for AMX/Crestron compatibility Full digital signal processing per channel including dbx® compressor/limiter Integrated matrix function to create different mixes to different outputs

Item Number: DMM12    6500H00020

Auto Mixer

Harman Pro Group | 2013

DMM6
HigH-Performance digital stereo automatic mixer

Meet Me

for boardroom, community center and houses of worship applications The DMM6 is a high-performance digital stereo automatic mixer with six mic/line inputs and one stereo master output. The mixer offers a full stereo bus and a high sophisticated algorithm for seamless mixing. It provides highest S/N ratio while reducing the number of open microphones to a minimum. The unique user interface combines an analog look and feel with the comfort and accuracy of digital controls. Each input channel features low-cut, treble and bass filters, a dbx® compressor/ limiter, a pan/balance and a priority (ducking) function. An integrated matrix allows each channel to be routed to one of the outputs individually. The DMM6 can be cascaded up to 10 units or 60 inputs. An RS232 interface allows external control e.g. via AMX or Crestron remotes.

Section:

02

Six inputs, one stereo master output via professional XLR/RCA connectors High sophisticated mixing algorithm prevents the loss of syllables Connectivity to media control systems via RS232 for AMX/Crestron compatibility Full digital signal processing per channel including dbx® compressor/limiter Integrated matrix function to create different mixes to different outputs

Item Number: DMM6    6500H00010

Page 155

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CS5

Premium digital conference system

AN Asset to ANy coNfereNce hAll

Hardwired for ultimate reliability Although there is a trend toward using wireless equipment in conferencing, AKG decided to play it safe. WiFi conference systems are quick to set up but the risk of radio dropouts or even total failure caused by smart phones with WiFi interfaces is high. By using standard shielded CAT cables the CS5 is very easy to set up, extremely reliable in day-to-day operation and absolutely immune to listening-in (for debates of sensitive issues). Quintessentially digital Optimum quality of the audio system is only one part of a high end conference system. Ease of use and enough headroom for the unexpected can often save a conference. The CS5 offers up to 64 free assignable digital audio channels for excellent intelligibility and maximum flexibility. The included user friendly conference management software allows operators to focus on the essentials of their job. Full expandability Designing a conference system at AKG begins with careful research and consulting to find out exactly what the requirements are. With only a few versatile components, the CS5 ensures maximum flexibility at an outstanding price/ performance ratio that includes both the basic equipment and all thinkable extras. The CS5 is a sure success for speakers, delegates, financial decision makers, and system designers on more than one level.

Using digital technology and user friendly interfaces

The CS5 is the most flexible premium, hardwired, digital conference system on the market. With less than 10 different components the CS5 can be configured to work as a small and mobile discussion system as well as a huge fix installed conference system with voting, delegate management, simultaneous translation and language distribution functions. The CS5 is compatible with all capsules of the Modular Series.

Page 156

flexibility, reliAbility, security
A conference system, and particularly its powering equipment, should be quick and easy to install. The CS5 therefore uses a CAT5 closed-circuit bus and distributed power supplies, saving cables, time, and design expense. The CS5 uses CAT5/RJ45 cables only, so if you need to improvise, you can easily get the cables you need.
CAT 5 bus Power wiring

CS5 IU

iNtelligibility – iN ANy lANguAge
Depending on the number of working languages for your conference, you will need one or more interpretation booths with two CS5 IU interpreter stations each. The CS5 IU meets AIIC standards and provides all the functions your interpreters need in order to do a perfect job. As an additional benefit, the wiring system allows you to connect the IUs to the CAT5 bus at any point in the line, e.g., the point closest to the interpretation booth(s), to keep cables short.
CAT 5 bus Power wiring USB wiring

CS5 ConferenCe SyStemS

CS5

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CS5 Irt

Section:

lArge coNfereNce, mANy observers
Observers too may need interpretation. The CS5 IRT 1 or IRT 2 infrared radiators transmit up to seven language channels to any number of CS5 IRR7 infrared receivers. The IRR7 operates for up to twelve hours on a single battery charge and is small enough to fit into every vest pocket.
CAT 5 bus Power wiring USB wiring XLR wiring

02

CS5 systems

from zero to 500 iN 100 miNutes
There is always room for expansion. Whenever the need arises, you can add all AKG CS5 components even to the largest existing system. The closed-loop bus saves lots of cabling over more conventional star wiring systems, and the time saved in the process will appreciably relieve your budget. The theoretical limit is 5.000 microphone stations.
CAT 5 bus Power wiring USB wiring XLR wiring Coaxial wiring

Page 157

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CS5 BU
RefeRence digital confeRence base unit
for conferences of any size

CS5 DU
RefeRence confeRencing delegate unit
for fixed and mobile conference applications The CS5 DU reference digital microphone station is the basic delegate unit for the CS5 conference systems. It provides both an integrated loudspeaker and two headphone outputs and can be used for up to two delegates. A bank of dip switches allows each headphone output to be assigned independently to either the floor channel or one of three interpreted language channels. The PTT key also provides a simple aye/no voting function. The CS5 DU is compatible with all premium acoustics of the AKG modular microphone series.

Central intelligenCe

lone spokesman

The CS5 BU is the base unit for the CS5 reference digital conference system and integrates the central intelligence for discussion, voting, interpretation and language distribution functions in a sensationally compact 1HU, 19" housing. The CS5 BU provides all the necessary inputs and outputs to manage a complex conference system. It controls up to 64 audio channels that can be assigned for discussion or for interpretation purposes. All microphone and interpreter stations are daisy-chained, using cost-efficient, standard CAT 5 cables, and can be configured in a redundant closed-circuit digital audio bus. No matter how many microphone stations the system includes, it only needs a single CS5 BU to control the entire setup.

All-in-one digital controller for systems of any size and complexity Integrated infrared signal modulator for wireless language distribution Failsafe power supply concept by using decentralized and redundant components Stand-alone or computer-controlled operation ensures easy, flexible and user-friendly handling 5 external inputs and 4 outputs open for a wide range of external system extensions

Delegate station with PTT button intuitive and easy to use Aye/no poll function for basic voting applications 3+1 selectable languages for basic multilingual applications Standard RG45 connectors for quick mounting and takedown Interchangeable microphone capsules to meet the acoustical requirements of any type of conference room

Item Number: CS5 BU    7650X01000

Item Number: CS5 DU    2770Z00210

Page 158

CS5 ConferenCe SyStemS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CS5 VU
RefeRence confeRencing voting unit

CS5 IU
RefeRence confeRencing inteRpReteR unit

group leader

for conference and voting applications The CS5 VU reference digital microphone station is the voting, delegate and chairman unit for the CS5 conference systems. In president mode, it provides a priority function and allows the user to start votes or polls. The CS5 VU includes an integrated loudspeaker, two headphone outputs, five soft buttons, an LC display and a chip-card reader, for up to two delegates. The CS5 VU can be set to different priority modes and 1- 3- or 5-way voting/polling functions. In computer-controlled conference systems, an optional chip-card identification is available. The CS5 VU is compatible with all premium acoustics of the AKG modular microphone series.

universal translator
for fixed and mobile applications The CS5 IU reference digital interpreter station has been designed in accordance with the relevant international standards. The CS5 IU features an intuitive input selection, floor and relay language selectors, and cough button. The CS5 IU provides microphone input for gooseneck microphones and a separate input/output for headsets. AKG offers a wide choice of professional headsets such as the HSC271 and many more. The CS5 IU is also compatible with all premium acoustics of the AKG modular microphone series.

Section:

02

Delegate/president station with LCD display provides two operating modes 5 voting buttons for voting/polling and multiple-choice applications 63 selectable languages independently selectable for two users Large LED ring indicator on optional gooseneck provides enhanced visible MIC ON/OFF indication Interchangeable microphone capsules to meet the acoustical requirements of any type of conference room

Interpreter station with LCD display Intuitive, easy-to-use controls Meets international interpretation equipment standards for safe and easy operation 63 selectable languages for multilingual applications Inputs for headsets and gooseneck mics for fatigue-proof working conditions for interpreters Large LED ring indicator on optional gooseneck provides enhanced visible MIC ON/OFF indication

Item Number: CS5 VU    2770Z00220

Item Number: CS5 IU    7650X00200

Page 159

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CS5 IRT
RefeRence confeRencing infRaRed tRansmitteR
for fixed and mobile multilingual conference setups The CS5 IRT1 and CS5 IRT2 reference infrared radiators transmit up to seven language channels to delegates and observers of debates and conferences. They work with the CS5 BU base unit and CS5 IRR7 infrared receivers. The CS5 IRT1 and CS5 IRT2 differ in size and radiated power, and can be used in any desired combination. For large installations, it is possible to daisy-chain as many radiators as needed.

CS5 IRR7
RefeRence confeRencing infRaRed ReceiveR
for installed and mobile multilingual conference setups The CS5 IRR7 reference wireless infrared receiver can pick up seven language channels from CS5 IRT1 and IRT2 infrared transmitters. A LED on the receiver indicates its battery status at any time. The supplied NiMH rechargeable battery operates for more than 12 hours on a single charge. The CS5 IRR7 battery can be recharged in the CS5 CU50 charging and storage unit. The receiver will drive any headphones — AKG offers a wide selection — with a mini jack plug.

enlighten the world

BaBel Fish

Digital audio transmission using PPM modulation robust against interference from fluorescent light Unlimited daisy-chaining to “light up” any size conference room Transmits up to 7 different languages for multilingual conference applications Meets international interpretation equipment standards for safe and easy operation Universal mounting bracket included for fixed and mobile applications

Digital data transmission using PPM modulation prevents fluorescent-light interference Receives up to seven different languages for multilingual conference applications 12 hours operation with a single battery low operating cost using 9V alkaline dry battery Integrated charging contacts for quick charging of a standard NiMH battery inside the receiver

Item Number: CS5 IRR7    7650H00600

Item Number: CS5 IRT1 7650H00500 CS5 IRT2 7650H00510

Page 160

CS5 ConferenCe SyStemS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CS5 CU50
chaRging and stoRage unit

K20
high-peRfoRmance steReo confeRence headphones

Cost-saver

for installed and mobile multilingual conference setups The CS5 CU50 flight-case charger can store and charge up to 50 CS5 IRR7 infrared receivers. The intelligent charging circuitry monitors the status of each NiMH battery and automatically switches to trickle charging when finished. The LED on each receiver indicates its battery status at any time.

never miss a word

Section:

for schools, conferences and courtrooms The K20 are lightweight and extremely comfortable stereo headphones. A single-sided cable makes these conference headphones perfect for their application. Their cleanable plastic ear cups can be used with or without foam ear pads and comply with all hygienic standards. The K20 are an ideal choice for applications like schools, conference venues, courtrooms and similar locations.

02

Sturdy flight-case housing for up to 50 CS5 IRR7 infrared receivers Intelligent charging circuitry for quick charging of a standard NiMH battery inside the receiver Trickle charging mode keeps the battery ready

Lightweight and extremely comfortable maximum comfort for long work sessions Cleanable plastic ear cups comply with all hygienic standards Rugged, foldable construction for easy transport and storage

Item Number: CS5 CU50    7650H00650

Included accessories: K20 Earpad for K20 headphones

Item Number: K20    3126H00200

Page 161

Cs5 softWAre
Standard

Cs5 bAsic control softWAre
cS5 control is a basic software package for planning, setting up, managing and logging a conference based on an SQl database. the personal data and specific rights of each delegate are entered into a database. Another screen provides lists of ballots, topics and speakers for planning the conference. handling a conference is as easy as calling up lists of speakers and when and how long they will speak. microphone stations are then activated or muted by dragging and dropping delegates’ names into the appropriate columns. the cS5 Basic control Software is included in every cS5 Bu package.

Import/export

+ +

Delegate Functions

SQL database Create groups Assign rights Limit individual speaking times Include pictures Import/export SQL database Plan topics inc. start and finish times Include room pictures/drawings Plan secret/open votes

+ + + + + +

Section:

02
Delegate Functions

+ + +

Select language Projection signal to 2nd output Projection signal to 3rd output Import/export conference log Interpreter remote setup Comment request soft key Chip card ID Attendance check Create conference for one-time use Create basic conference for multiple use List control mode Graphic control mode Vote with bar diagram

Pro

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Run Conference

Harman Pro Group | 2013

+

+ + +

Cs5 pro control softWAre
the versatile conference-system design and a graphic user interface for monitoring of all system components make the new cS5 pro control software a powerful tool for every conferencing application. in addition to using lists to manage a conference, cS5 pro provides a graphic control mode, allowing the operator to activate or mute a station simply by clicking on its related image on a conference room layout/picture. to facilitate votes, the system allows voting rights to be assigned to delegates as required for quick and well-documented results. A “comment” option enables delegates to signal to the chairperson that they wish to comment on the subject at hand.

+ + + + + + + + + +

+ + + + + + + + + + + + +

Vote with cake diagram Priority call from computer Mute internal speakers Show vote on hall screen Show list of talkers on hall screen Show agenda on hall screen

Page 162

Cs5 Accessories
CK31, CK33, CK47
the cK31 cardioid microphone with its 125-degree pickup angle is the most popular solution for inexperienced talkers. the cK33 hypercardioid microphone with its narrow pickup angle of 95 degrees is the perfect choice where talkers are further away from the microphone. the cK47 with its 80-degree pickup angle provides absolutely accurate, studio quality audio even for off-axis talkers. Item number: cK31 2765h00200, cK32 2765h00210, cK47 2765Z00230

CS5 COnFeRenCe SySteMS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

gn30 cs/gn50 cs
the Gn30 cS (12 in./30 cm) and Gn50 cS (20 in./50 cm) goosenecks feature an extra wide leD ring and highly reliable electrical contact to the microphone module. Item number: Gn30 cS 2765h00030, Gn50 cS 2765h00080

Cs5 id cArd
each iD card carries a special chip identifying its carrier to a computer-controlled cS5 system. Item number: cS5 iD card 7650h01600

Section:

02

Cs5 ps 12
the cS5 pS 12 is an external power supply for twelve microphone stations in the cS5 conference system. For systems with need for high redundancy, we recommend using one cS5 pS 12 for every six microphones. Item number: cS5 pS 12 7650h01020

Cs5 ru repeAter
Signal amplifier for driving long cable runs. Item number: cS5 ru repeater 7650h03000

Cs5 Mf instAllAtion frAMe
optional, dedicated frame for permanently installing a cS5 Du or cS5 vu station in a conference table. ensures secure, low-profile flush mounting and theft protection. Item number: cS5 mF 2770Z00100

Page 163

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Cs3

plug ‘n’ play confeRence system

comes in two choices – the cS321 cardioid condenser capsule on a 30cm (12in) long gooseneck and the 50cm (20in) long cS521. the cS3 combines easiness in setup and use with professional AKG audio quality. the rugged and elegant design fits in any venue.

keeps it simple

for mobile and fix installed conferences

the cS3 System is a modular and flexible conference system for small and medium size applications. it´s reliable components can be easily set up, wired and expanded. one cS3 base unit can support 60 microphones. With the help of a second base unit the system can be expanded to up to 120 units. the base unit connects to all relevant devices like pA, recording, external audio sources and camera control systems. Different operating modes enable automatic or controlled conferences, even without pc remote. the cS3 microphone station comes with a robust interface connector, which makes it easy to interchange the stations microphone. the detachable microphone

All in one conference controller for discussion systems of up to 120 stations (up to 240 delegates) Stand alone or computer controlled operation ensures easy and user-friendly handling Four selectable operating modes for flexible conference management Interchangeable microphones maximum flexibility for any type of conference situation Plug ‘n’ Play set includes all components for a quick set-up

Page 164

CS3 ConferenCe SyStemS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Cs3 bu
confeRence base unit

power in a Box

for mobile and fix installed conferences the cS3 Bu is the base unit for the cS3 conference system and provides all the necessary inputs and outputs to manage a conference for up to 60 microphone stations. it is the interface to all audio devices in a meeting room and offers a rS232 interface to connect an optional camera control system. the cS3 Bu can even work in a stand-alone mode in four selectable operating modes offering maximum flexibility in conference management. With the nom limitation function, the maximum number of active stations can be programmed to 1, 2, 4 or 6 simultaneous open microphones. if necessary, two cS3 Bu´s can be combined to control a large conference system with up to 120 microphone stations.

Section:

02

All in one conference controller for discussion systems of up to 60 stations per base unit Four selectable operating modes for flexible conference management Connects to all relevant devices e.g. pA, recording, ext. audio and camera control systems Extension interface combines two units to control up to 120 stations Compact 19" housing for easy rack mounting

Item Number: cS3 Bu    3361h00010

Page 165

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Cs3 cu
chaiRman micRophone station
for fixed and mobile conference applications the cS3 cu chairman unit is a microphone station with two operating modes. in “priority call” mode, the user can manually mute all connected delegate stations. in “next in line” mode the cS3 cu automatically activates the next delegate station in the waiting list. the station provides a built in speaker and 2 x 3.5 mm stereo jacks to connect headphones for up to two delegates. the cS3 cu comes with a robust interface connector, which makes it easy to interchange the stations microphone. the detachable microphone comes in two choices - the cS321 cardioid condenser capsule on a 30 cm long gooseneck and the 50 cm long cS521. the cS3 cu set-box contains a 2 m long plug ‘n’ play connector cable as well as the preferred microphone choice.

Cs3 du
delegate micRophone station
for fix installed and mobile conference applications the cS3 Du microphone station is the basic delegate unit for the cS5 conference systems. it provides both an integrated loudspeaker as well as two 3.5 mm stereo headphone outputs and could be used for up to 2 delegates. Depending on the selected operating mode, the ptt key enables the speaker to directly switch on their microphone or to enter the system waiting list. the cS3 Du comes with a robust interface connector, which makes it easy to interchange the stations microphone. the detachable microphone comes in two choices - the cS321 cardioid condenser capsule on a 30 cm long gooseneck and the 50 cm long cS521. the cS3 Du set-box contains a 2 m long plug ‘n’ play connector cable as well as the preferred microphone choice.

get in control

Just talk

Chairman functions with “Priority” and “Next in line” buttons give full control over the entire conference/system Interchangeable microphones maximum flexibility for any type of conference situation Built in speaker for near field reinforcement Two separate 3.5 mm stereo jacks to connect headphones for up to two delegates Plug ‘n’ Play set includes all components for a quick set-up

Delegate station with PTT button intuitive and easy to use Interchangable microphones for maximum flexibility for any type of conference situation Built in speaker for near field reinforcement Two separate 3.5 mm stereo jacks to connect headphones for up to two delegates Plug ‘n’ Play set includes all components for a quick set-up

Item Number: cS3 cu 30 3361h00220 cS3 cu 50 3361h00240

chairman unit with 30cm (12in) Gn chairman unit with 50cm (20in) Gn

Item Number: cS3 Du 30 3361h00210 cS3 Du 50 3361h00230

Delegate unit with 30cm (12in) Gn Delegate unit with 50cm (20in) Gn

Page 166

Cs3 Accessories
Cs321 And Cs521
the cS321 and cS521 are high-performance condenser gooseneck microphones specially designed for the cS3 conference system. their cardioid polar pattern is the perfect choice for inexperienced speakers who talk into the microphone from widely varying angles. the rugged gooseneck microphones are available in two different lengths (cS321: 30cm (12in); cS521: 50cm (20in) and feature the high-quality modular plus Series system connector. Both the cS321 as well as the cS521 provide a leD light ring to show the microphone stations status. the leD ring is extra-large for enhanced visibility.

CS3 ConferenCe SyStemS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Compact solution for plug ‘n’ play Cardioid polar pattern eliminates noise from the rear side Extra-large LED ring indicator provides enhanced visible mic on/oFF indication Two different gooseneck lengths available cS321: 30cm (12in) or cS521: 50cm (20in) Extremely rugged gooseneck construction for an extra-long life of reliability and stability

Section:

Item Number: cS321 cS521

3361h00180 3361h00190

02

Cs3 ec 2-100 systeM cAble
the cS3 ec connection cables are specially designed to quickly set up a cS3 discussion system. they are equipped with professional female and male 8-pin Din connectors. the cS3 ec cables are available in six different lengths - 2m, 5m, 10m, 20m, 50m and 100m. Item Number: cS3 ec 2m (6.56ft) cS3 ec 5m (16.4ft) cS3 ec 10m (32.8ft) cS3 ec 20m (65.62ft) cS3 ec 50m (164ft) cS3 ec 100m (328ft) 3361h00080 3361h00090 3361h00100 3361h00110 3361h00120 3361h00130

Cs3 tc t-connector
the cS3 tc is used to split one branch line into two. it comes with professional 8-pin Din connectors. the cS3 tc can be used exclusively in combination with cS3 components. Item Number: cS3 tc 3361h00160

Page 167

Windscreens

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Accessories
186

Page 168

Windscreens

pf80
universal pop filter for use with vocal recording microphones Item Number: pF80    6000h06320

w23
Windscreen for use with ball head microphones approx. 50mm (2 in.) Item Number: W23    6000h06210

w30
Windscreen for use with cK31, cK32 and cK33 Item Number: W30    2765h00300

AccessoRIes

Harman Pro Group | 2013

w44
Windscreen for use with c520 Item Number: W44    2344Z01010

w48
Windscreen for use with cK69 ulS Item Number: W48    2568Z40010

w49
Windscreen for use with cK69 ulS Item Number: W49    2568Z41010

Section:

02

w68
Windscreen for use with c568 B Item Number: W68    2168Z30010

w70
Windscreen for use with cK47 and c747 v11 Item Number: W70    2421Z01010

w77
Windscreen for use with cK77 Wr and c577 Wr Item Number: W77    9999n06240

w77 M
Wire-mesh windscreen for use with cK77 Wr and c577 Wr Item Number: W77 m    6000h05760

w77 Mp
Windscreen for use with cK77 Wr and c577 Wr (finish: flesh-tone) Item Number: W77 mp    6000h05780

w77 set
colored foam windscreen set for cK77 Wr, c577 Wr Item Number: W77 Set    6000h05750

Page 169

Windscreens

w90
Windscreen for use with AKG Blue line capsules cK91/92/93/94 and c451 B. Item Number: W90    2496Z00010

w98
Windscreen for use with cK98 Item Number: W98    2439Z30010

w407
Windscreen for use with the c417. Item Number: W407    2366Z06010

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

w414
Windscreen for use with c414 XlS, c414 Xlii and c3000. Item Number: W414    2802Z05010

w444
Windscreen for use with c555 l Item Number: W444    2656Z10010

w547
Windscreen for use with c547 Bl Item Number: W547    2448Z00010

w880
Windscreen for use with ball head microphones approximately 40mm to 50mm (1-5/8" to 2") in diameter Item Number: W880    6001h05120

w1000
Windscreen for use with c1000 S. Item Number: W1000    2331Z14010

w3001
Windscreen for use with ball head mirophones approximately 40mm to 50mm (1-7/12" to 2") in diameter. Item Number: W3001    2630Z00010

w3004
Windscreen for use with D5, D7, D5 Wl1, D7 Wl1, p3 S, p5 and p5 S Item Number: W3004    2630h00040

w4000
Windscreen for use with c4000, c4500 Bc, perception p120, p220, p420 and p820 Item Number: W4000    2802Z02010

w40 M
the W40 m windscreen with rugged wiremesh grill is compatible with the cK41 and cK43 capsules from the modular plus series. Item Number: W40 m    3165h00290

Page 170

stAnds & supports

CC519
clarinet clamp for c519 or B-flat clarinet Item Number: cc519    3069h00010

gns36
360mm (14") gooseneck, black Item Number: GnS36    6000h03440

h30
universal shock mount Item Number: h30    2183Z00010

AccessoRIes

Harman Pro Group | 2013

h40/1
tie clip for use with all lavaliere microphones Item Number: h40/1    2544Z00030

h41
tie pin for use with all lavaliere microphones Item Number: h41    2544Z00020

h47
Shock mount for use with c747 v11 Item Number: h47    2423Z01010

Section:

02

h50
Stereo bar e.g. for c 747 v11 Item Number: h50    6000h05710

h500
Shock mount for goosenecks with integrated Xlr connector, such as the cGn321 e Item Number: h500    6000h01900

h600
Shock mount for all goosenecks 8mm (1/3") diameter including reducing socket A608 Item Number: h600    2426X00030

h85
universal shock mount for all microphones with shaft diameters from 19mm to 26mm (3/4" to 1"), such as the c414 XlS and the c414 Xlii. Item Number: h85    2803Z00080

Mf-dA
mounting flange for use with Gn gooseneck series Item Number: mF-DA    2647Z00010

Msh70
Short gooseneck for use with c747 v11 Item Number: mSh70    2419m01020

Page 171

stAnds & supports

ps3 f-lock
lockable panel-mount Xlr connector for goosenecks with integrated three-pin Xlr connector, such as cGn321 e Item Number: pS3 F-locK    2425Z00010

sa44
Standadapter for vocal microphones Item Number: SA44    6001h06320

sa47
Standadapter for use with c747 v11 Item Number: SA47    2186Z00050

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013

sa60
Stand adapter for use with straight-shaft microphones Item Number: SA60    6000h60010

sa61
Standadapter for use with conical-shaft microphones Item Number: SA61    6000h61010

sa63
Standadapter for use with wireless microphone systems handheld transmitters Item Number: SA63    6000h63010

shZ80
Slotted screw link for use with c747 v11 Item Number: ShZ80    2416Z01020

sT1
Folding mini tripod Item Number: St1    6000h04200

sT45
low-profile table stand with off-center threaded stub Item Number: St45    6000h03080

sT46
miniature stand for small microphones Item Number: St46    6000h03060

sT305
heavy-duty table stand Item Number: St305    6000h03050

Mf M
mounting flange for use with modular plus microphone series Item Number: mF m    3165h00220

Page 172

poWering AdApters & cAbles

b18
Battery-operated phantom power supply for one condenser microphone Item Number: B18    2198h00020

b29 l
Battery-operated power supply and mini mixer for one or two microphones with l-plug Item Number: B29 l    6000h04620

b48 l
Battery-operated phantom power supply for one p48 condenser microphone. Item Number: B48 l    3163Z00010

Accessories

Harman Pro Group | 2013

MK ps
rG58 (50 ohms) 0.6m (2 ft) connecting cablebetween WmS receivers and antenna splitter Item Number: mK pS    6000h02060

MK150 M
the mK150 m extension cable is equipped wit the modular plus system connector and fits all modular plus mounting and powering modules. the mK150 m comes with a cable length of 150cm. Item Number: mK150 m    3165h00260

MK150 Ml
the mK150 ml is a connection cable to combine microphones of the modular plus Series with any AKG bodypack transmitter. Item Number: mK150 ml    3165h00270

Section:

02

MKa20
Antenna cable 20m (66ft) long Item Number: mKA20    6000h02050

MKa5
Antenna cable 5m (16ft) long Item Number: mKA5    2455Z00620

MKg l
instrument cable for wireless body-pack transmitters with mini Xlr and 6.3mm (1/4") jack Item Number: mKG l    2455Z00500

Mpa v l
phantom power adapter with Xlr connector for l type micromic microphones with integrated bass roll-off switch Item Number: mpA v l    3170h00020

uwa9 M
the uWA9 m is a holder for wireless bodypack transmitters. it perfectly fit on the Gn155 m floor stand gooseneck module Item Number: uWA9 m    3165h00280

Page 173

NOTES:

Section:

02

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 174

Section:

03

Harman Pro Group | 2013

2013
Professional Audio Signal Processing
And Distribution Equipment

Page 175

CONT E NT S :
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

03

Soundweb™ London: networked signal processors

GS724T: 24 port Ethernet AVB switch

FCS-960: dual mode graphic equalizer

Page 176

Section:

FCS-966: constant Q graphic equalizer

Product Specifications

03

Harman Pro Group | 2013

AR-133: active DI box/line balancer

WHISEWORKS™ Neville Thiele Method™ Filters

Page 177

AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESSING
BSS Audio is world renowned for outstanding sound quality and reliable equipment that satisfies the real demands of professional musicians and high-profile installations. Products from BSS Audio are used on major tours, in recording and broadcast studios, churches, casinos, arenas, and nightclubs on every continent. Why do so many sound industry veterans swear by BSS Audio? Because with every performance, installation, broadcast, and recording, these professionals put their reputations on the line. The pros demand superior sound quality and a proven track record. They can count on it with BSS Audio.

Section:

03

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 178

RELIABILITY

The uncompromising reliability achieved through superb design and meticulous quality assurance is why more artists regularly choose BSS Audio systems. From the rock-solid AR-133 Direct Injection Box, to the state of the art Soundweb London networked signal processors, BSS Audio offers the very best in signal processing.

Section:

03

Harman Pro Group | 2013

LIVE SOUND

For over 25 years, BSS Audio equipment has been manhandled on and off of trucks and planes, city after city, tour after tour. And every time the show started, the performers and the techs knew their BSS Audio gear would work. No wonder top performing artists like Metallica, Diana Krall, David Bowie, and Oasis regularly choose BSS Audio systems.

Page 179

SOUNDWEB™ LONDON
Networked Signal Processors

Section:

03
The power, flexibility and reliability for any scale of installed sound system.
Long before networked digital audio, BSS Audio™ gained its reputation for elegant-sounding signal processing and crossovers. Innovative technologies like Progressive Knee Subtractive Compression, mid-filter crossover limiting, dynamic equalization and ADE™ restoration of leading-edge information in noise gates have elevated BSS Audio to almost cult status among live sound and recording engineers. We’ve leveraged this analog audio expertise into what many believe are the best-sounding digital signal processing algorithms available. Beginning with Soundweb™ Original…and now with the Soundweb™ London family of networked digital signal processing systems, we’ve brought the same warmth and clarity to a vast palette of DSP modules. All are deployed within an intuitive, easy-to-use design and maintenance interface called HiQnet™ London Architect™. So you’re not just getting, for example a generic compressor module; you’re getting digital processing closely based on the acclaimed sound of our DPR-402. From automixers to graphic and parametric EQs, from duckers to delays, you can hear the BSS Audio difference. Bottom line: we’re a highly-regarded

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 180

crossover and analog signal processing company who started making digital signal processing devices, not a DSP company who ventured into the complex world of high-end professional audio. Built on the foundations of an industry standard Our Soundweb™ Original series sent ripples through the sound contracting world. The first large-scale system to offer a distributed, programmable DSP system with robust capabilities and simple controls on a single Cat 5 cable, it has inspired a host of imitators. Yet there are key areas where the original Soundweb philosophy still stands above the rest: • Easy creation of virtually any audio system design with a free-design programmable DSP system that places no restrictions on signal path, sub-mixing or object location • The ability to change how your audio system behaves according to the type of event you are holding, just with the recall of a preset • Easy and quick addition of more signal processing within the system without increasing your hardware budget • Fast implementation of specification changes during or post-design • The appropriate level of end-user control without providing overlycomplex interfaces The same philosophy is at the heart of Soundweb™ London. Moreover, the experience with, and suggestions from thousands of clients have enabled BSS

Audio to enhance Soundweb London’s power and flexibility to unprecedented levels including: • Pristine audio quality, with advanced A/D and D/A conversion, together with 96kHz-capable audio processing and networking • Simple, easy-to-learn drag-and-drop system design, now even more powerful with named CobraNet™ bundle assignment, signal path navigation and scalable DSP objects • Ethernet based control over Cat 5 cable, with network audio via CobraNet™ with redundant capability • An extensive range of control options to offer clients simple or sophisticated control interfaces • Easy expansion or reconfiguration of system hardware in the field With years of experience to count on, Soundweb London represents your wisest choice when investing in programmable DSP technology. The system approach fully realized No one else can offer our level of integration. Because only Soundweb London is the backbone of a completely unified system solution with microphones, consoles, amplifiers and loudspeakers from sister Harman Pro companies AKG Acoustics® , Soundcraft®, Crown Audio® and JBL Professional® , as well as dbx Professional Products® and BSS Audio™ signal processing devices.

Harman Pro is in the unique position to be able to provide components for the entire signal path and through the use of HiQnet™, the Harman Pro Communications Protocol, integration of these components has never been easier. System integrators will be familiar with having to waste expensive engineering time translating different protocols, so that products using disparate languages will communicate. Imagine how much easier it is when all of your system elements “speak” the same language. Via HiQnet™ London Architect™ software, you can also add integrated monitoring of Crown Audio PIP-LITE, USP3 and USP3/CN Programmable Input Processor (‘PIP’) modules, as used in the CTs series of amplifiers. You can also configure BSS Audio FDS-334T and FDS-336T Minidrive processors and the industry standard FDS-366T OMNIDRIVE COMPACT plus system. One control application can monitor amplifier performance, speaker conditions, log events and report errors back to the operator.

Section:

03

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 181

Easy to design System design should be drag-anddrop easy. Our Soundweb™ Original software application, Soundweb™ Designer took system design and control to an unprecedented level. Now HiQnet™ London Architect™ brings even more power to your design creativity. You enjoy total flexibility of signal path flow and connectivity, a massive range of processing objects modeled on classic BSS Audio processors, and the freedom to design the system exactly how you want it. HiQnet™ London Architect™ uses the familiar drag-and-drop design interface that Soundweb users will know well, but has been dramatically enhanced to provide a more powerful, flexible and user-oriented interface: • dockable tool menus • creation of zones • layout scrolling, zooming and minimap windows • new innovative processing objects such as scalable mixers that make design and object selection easier than ever • new control panels with vast galleries of controls • highly informative docking windows • the ability to copy control values across objects — these are just a few of the ways in which we’ve made HiQnet London Architect the most powerful design software in its class.

Create custom control panels One of the advantages inherited from Soundweb™ Designer has been made even easier. Simple mouse clicks create control panels and pages and add “unbound” elements such as meters and faders that can then be tied to distinct processing objects. Not forgotten is the “traditional” method of creating panels by dragging controls directly onto these custom panels. Pages can also be nested within panels, increasing their versatility, offering neater layout of controls and taking the concept to an unprecedented level.

Digital audio bus The digital audio bus featured on the BLU-800, BLU-320, BLU-160 and BLU-120, is a fault-tolerant bus of 256 channels. In addition to providing a backbone for the transportation of multiple channels, the bus also facilitates the creation of large, fault-tolerant, centralized matrices containing multiple bus-capable devices.

Soundweb™ London Family of Products With a choice of seven different processors within the Soundweb London family and input / output card flexibility within each device, Soundweb London represents a truly flexible and scalable system. Whether you require the high bandwidth audio networking of a digital audio bus, CobraNet compatibility, DSP capability, input / output expansion or a specific mix of functionality, Soundweb London offers the building blocks of a tailor made system.

Section:

03

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 182

Proven DSP processing objects All the familiar Soundweb™ Original processing objects are included; many modeled on the classic and respected BSS Audio analog processors. The platform has also been designed to enable future software releases to include new leading edge DSP functions.

Easy to install Each Soundweb London processor is totally self-contained, so devices can be installed locally to their amplifier racks rather than in one centralized location. Category 5 cable is used to interconnect system devices and Ethernet hardware, with network hops of 300 feet (100 meters) possible.
Including BSS Audio components as an integral part of any sound installation will ensure years of dependable performance and reliability.

Soundweb™ London Family of Products

Section:

03

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Page 183

SOUNDWEB™ LONDON - 100 SERIES
Networked Programmable DSP Systems

Section:

03

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 184

The Soundweb London 100 Series devices offer a fixed configuration of inputs and outputs (see comparison table for further information). The analog inputs of the devices provide software configurable gain in 6dB steps up to +48dB per channel and software selectable Phantom Power per channel. Phantom Power, Signal Present and Clip information per channel is easily accessible, without the requirement for a PC, from clear front panel LED indication. The Soundweb London 100 Series devices feature configurable signal processing and logic processing. The signal path between the inputs and outputs can be completely tailored to an application, and all of the processing objects and logic objects used in larger Soundweb London systems are made available to designers within the 100 Series. The configurable signal processing offered by the 100 Series devices is roughly twice that of the Soundweb London BLU-80 and BLU-16 devices. The BLU-101 and BLU-102 devices feature the same Acoustic Echo Cancellation algorithm used on the Soundweb London Acoustic Echo Cancellation Input Cards. The BLU-101 offers 12 AEC algorithms while the BLU-102 offers eight AEC algorithms and a telephone hybrid. The AEC algorithms run on dedicated processors but are represented within

software as a Processing Objects. This means that all of the configurable DSP is available for other processing but AEC inputs can be sourced locally, from networked audio or even post-mix for budget-constrained applications. The 100 Series devices feature a low latency, fault tolerant digital audio bus of 48 channels which uses standard Category 5e cabling. The Soundweb London 100 Series is an example of where user feedback, combined with the leveraging of Soundweb London’s technology, functionality and flexibility has resulted in the development of a truly game-changing product. The 100 Series broadens the reach of Soundweb London and makes a solution strongly associated with high-profile projects available to many more applications. The 100 Series devices and the other members of the Soundweb London family provide the building blocks of the perfectly tailored system solution.

BLU-BOB1 & 2 & BLU-BIB
Output/Input Expanders
(BREAK-OUT/IN BOXES)

SOUNDWEB™ LONDON

Harman Pro Group | 2013

The Soundweb London BLU-BOB or “break-out box” offers 8 channels of analog audio output expansion via the Soundweb London high bandwidth, fault tolerant digital audio bus. The BLU-BOB output channels are easily configured by six DIP switches located on the rear of the device, which select consecutive channels in groups of eight. This simple configuration allows selection of any 8-channel range from the 256 channels available on the digital audio bus. Output channel assignments are configured by DIP switch selection only.

The Soundweb London BLU-BIB or “break-in box” offers 8 channels of analog audio input expansion via the Soundweb London high bandwidth, fault tolerant digital audio bus. The BLU-BIB input channels are easily configured by six DIP switches located on the rear of the device, which select consecutive channels in groups of eight. This simple configuration allows assignment to any 8-channel range within the 256 channels available on the digital audio bus. Input channel assignments are configured by DIP switch selection only.

Section:

03

Wall Controllers and Accessories
BLU-10
(available in white, black and blue)

BLU-6

BLU-HIF
Telephone Headset Interface

BLU-MC1
Fiber Optic Media Converter

BLU-8v2
(available in white and black)

BLU-3

BLU-3

sw9015US

sw9012US

Page 185

GS724T

24 Port Ethernet AVB Switch

The BSS Audio / NETGEAR GS724T Ethernet Switch is a 24-port, Ethernet AVB enabled, fully-managed Gigabit switch.
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

KEY FEATURES • 24 Port Gigabit Network Switch • Ethernet AVB support • 802.1ak - Multiple Registration Protocol (MRP/ MMRP) • 802.1AS - Timing and Synchronization for TimeSensitive Applications in Bridged Local Area Networks (PTP) • 802.1Qat - Stream Reservation Protocol (SRP) • 802.1Qav - Forwarding and Queuing Enhancements for Time-Sensitive Streams • 802.1AB-REV - Station and Media Access Control Connectivity Discovery (LLDP) • 2 Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) slots for optional fiber connectivity • Smart Control Center utility program automatically discovers devices • Administrative management via web-browser interface • Port configuration • Port monitoring • Port trunking • VLAN support • Class of Service (CoS) • Layer 2 management • MAC address Filter • Ethertype Filtering • MAC address Filter • Universal 100-240V AC/50-60 Hz power supply • Rack-Mount Ears (included)

With full support of Ethernet AVB technology, the GS724T allows audio, video, and data to be shared amongst Ethernet AVB compatible devices such as dbx products fitted with the SC Ethernet AVB High Speed Option Card. The 24 ports are each capable of accommodating 2000 Mbps of data throughput in full-duplex mode, yielding a total bandwidth of 48000 Mbps (48 Gbps). The GS724T delivers 10/100/1000 automatic speed sensing, full/half-duplex sensing, and Auto Uplink™ (MDI/MDI-X) to every port. This simplifies the combination of 10, 100, and 1000 Mbps devices. Two hot-swappable Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) slots provide optional fiber connectivity for the greater distances often encountered in large systems. An intuitive web-browser interface offers straight forward administrative management for performance monitoring, port configuration, VLAN for traffic control, Class of Service (CoS) for traffic prioritization, port trunking for increased bandwidth, traffic filtering, and other advanced features. Smart Control Center—a standalone utility program included on the accompanying software CD—allows automatic discovery of GS724T devices (even across subnets) and provides basic device configuration tools.

03

Page 186

FCS-960

Graphic Equalizers

Harman Pro Group | 2013

FCS Series
Of all the features that distinguish the FCS series among professional-grade equalizers, Constant Q filters are probably the most prominent. Compared to the earlier “gyrator” style of filters, Constant Q filters provide a smoother and more predictable interaction between adjacent faders, and the resulting EQ curve more closely resembles the actual fader positions. And each fader on the FCS equalizers has +/– 15dB of adjustable gain, more than many competitive graphic equalizers. When you consider the FCS series’ proven history of quality and reliability as well as their impressive feature set, you understand why so many industry veterans include these equalizers in their racks.

FCS-960 Dual Mode Graphic Equalizer
The FCS-960 is the graphic EQ of choice among some of the biggest names in the touring business. Dual mode operation accommodates both Wide Q for Room Contouring (to find the smoothest response) and Narrow Q for monitoring (to “notch out” particular frequencies) on each channel. The FCS-960 provides two channels in 3U of rack space. Constant Q-filters with filter-bypass center taps are controlled by high grade, 45mm faders with molded polymer fader knobs. These prominent knobs eradicate visual parallax error even under low light conditions. Also included are sweepable/switchable Hi-pass filter, Gain control and electronically balanced inputs and outputs.

Section:

03

Page 187

FCS-966

Constant Q Graphic

Section:

03

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 188

FCS-966
The FCS-966 is commonly used for stage monitors and is engineered using knowledge and experience gained from the FCS-960. Modern components and manufacturing techniques allow premium quality and reliability to be retained at a lower price point. Traditionally, much general equalization takes place on the faders alone, but this restricts the use of the faders at each end of the scale for further precision EQ work. So BSS Audio provides the FCS-966 with separate LF and HF contour filters, which can change an overall sound balance without disturbing a detailed room or loudspeaker response. These filters are very musical gentle boost and cut shelving type, which can be used to add (or remove) room effects that change with temperature, audience numbers or humidity.

Twenty years of live sound experience let you focus on the job at hand.

ACTIVE DI, LINE BALANCING & SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION

AR-133 Active DI Box/Line Balancer
The AR-133 is a single channel DI box with high input impedance, 1/4” jack input and parallel link ouputs to feed backline amps. Though it’s a favorite among high-profile touring professionals, the AR-133 is priced to be affordable for all musicians, studios and PA companies. The rugged aluminum extrusion case’s unique arch design lets you run cables back underneath the unit for neat cable management. The AR-133 uses an enhanced version of the same audio path as the AR-116, regarded by many as an industry standard. The sound quality is legendary, particularly on acoustic and bass guitars. The AR-133 includes phantom power and battery supplies. Should the phantom power from the console fail or accidentally switch off, the AR-133 automatically switches over to the internal 9V battery, providing uninterrupted use. Numerous applications can be satisfied by the AR-133. For example, as well as the traditional guitar use, the AR-133 can be used with keyboards, DJ mixers, link outputs, and other electronic sources. The AR-133 can also be used as an active balancing device.

Section:

03

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 189

WHISEWORKS –
What are NTM™ Filters all about?
A NTM™ Crossover Filter is a new type of electrical/acoustical filter offering significant performance advantages over all previous crossover filter types in audio applications. The filter was developed by Neville Thiele (pronounced “Teel”). How do they work? The NTM crossover uses a unique notched response to achieve a very steep roll-off rate outside the passband. The 4th order NTM crossover amplitude response looks like this:
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

NEVILLE THIELE METHOD FILTERS
Included with Soundweb™ London, Soundweb™ Original, OMNIDRIVE COMPACT plus and Minidrive
Advantages Like the Linkwitz-Riley crossover shape, NTM crossovers maintain a flat amplitude response against frequency, and hold the drivers inphase throughout the crossover region, preventing beam tilting. Additionally however, the 8th order NTM filter gives the fastest roll-off rate of any of the common crossover shapes. The 4th order NTM filter also offers the best group delay flatness of any crossover shape with a roll-off of at least 24dB/ Octave, whilst offering a higher cut-off rate than any other 4th order crossover. For many years, Linkwitz-Riley crossovers have been the ‘industry standard’ as they offered the best compromise for most of the important parameters. The new NTM crossover shapes now represent the optimal combination of characteristics for most applications, assuring it at least a place alongside Linkwitz Riley, if not becoming the new industry standard. “The cleanest and clearest filters I’ve heard to date.” NTM Roll-off Notches in the responses speed-up the rate of roll-off. Beyond the notch, the response rises again, but remains respectably attenuated.
Andy Dockerty, Adlib Audio, UK

03

*WHISEWORKS - NTM™* and WHISEWORKS - Neville Thiele Method™ are trademarks of Precision Audio Pty. Ltd.

“The biggest step forward in digital crossover technology since Linkwitz-Riley.”
Jerry Wing, Britannia Row Productions, UK

“The new filters allow me to put more power to the devices without fear of overload or over-excursion. Once adjusted, sounds better than standard filters. The system seemed louder and clearer. We were setting off alarms in the car park!”
Ferrit, Promix/Electrotec, Las Vegas, Nevada, USA

Page 190

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:
The BSS Audio website, located at bssaudio.com is updated regularly and provides a great source for all the latest news and product specifications. You will find useful information in the form of brochures, user manuals, technical data sheets, applications guides and software updates. The website also contains contact information for all sales, technical support and service enquiries.
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

03

Page 191

Soundweb London
BLU-805, BLU-325 (rear diagram) BLU-160/BLU-120 (rear diagram) BLU-800, BLU-320

BLU-16, BLU-32, BLU-80,BLU-120,

Networked Signal Processors

BLU-160, BLU-320, BLU-325, BLU-800, and BLU-805

4

3

2

1

B
S

4

3

1

2

A

S
C + –
OPTO

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

C

1 1

2 2

CONTROL INPUTS LOGIC OUTPUTS

7 7

8 8

R R

R R

D
S + – S + – S + – S + – S + – S + – S + – S + –

C

4

3

2

1

B
S

4

3

1

2

A

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

(rear diagram) BLU-16 (rear diagram) BLU-32/BLU-80 (rear diagrams)
100-240VAC ~ 50/60Hz 35VA

C + –
OPTO

C

1 1

2 2

CONTROL INPUTS LOGIC OUTPUTS

7 7

8 8

R R

R R

D
S + – S + – S + – S + – S + – S + – S + – S + –

C

4

3

2

1

B
S

4

3

1

2

A

C C OPTO + –

1 1

2 2

CONTROL INPUTS LOGIC OUTPUTS

7 7

8 8

R R

R R

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

Section:

03

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 192

D
100-240VAC ~ 50/60Hz 35VA

C
S + – S + – S + – S + –

T1AL-250V FUSE

LOCATE

RS232

ETHERNET

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

4 IN PRIMARY SECONDARY OUT S + – S
C C OPTO + – 1 1 2 2 CONTROL INPUTS LOGIC OUTPUTS 7 7 8 8 R R R R

3

2

1

B
S + – S + – S + – S + – S

4

3

1

2

A

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

D
+ – S + – S + – S + – S + – S + – S + –

C

T1AL-250V FUSE

LOCATE

RS232

ETHERNET

BUDDYLINK / 48K

Front Panel Led Indicators: Per Input: Other: Analogue Inputs: Mic/Line Inputs Input Impedance Maximum input level CMRR Input Noise (E.I.N.) Phantom power A/D Latency: Digital Inputs: Input impedance: Sample Rate: Sample Rate conversion: THD+N: Latency: Analogue Outputs: Maximum Output Level Frequency Response THD Dynamic Range Crosstalk D/A Latency Digital Outputs: Input impedance:

Signal Present, CLIP, SYNC/48V, I/O card type (IN, OUT, DIG) LCD Display, Conductor active, Net Link active, Data Activity. Up to 16 electronically balanced on Phoenix Combicon removable screw connectors Nominal gain 0dB, electronically switchable up to +48dB,in +6dB steps 3.5kΩ +20dBu with 0dB input gain,+8dBu with 12dB gain >75dB at 1KHz <-128dBu typical with 150Ω source 48V nominal, selectable per input 38.7/Fs Up to 16 AES/EBU or S/PDIF on Phoenix/Combicon removable screw connectors 110 ohm (AES/EBU), 75 ohm (S/PDIF) 48kHz or 96kHz 8kHz-96kHz -140dB 3/Fso + (56.581/Fsi) + (55.658/Fso). Up to 16 electronically balanced on Phoenix/Combicon removable screw connectors +19dBu 15Hz-20KHz (+0.5dB/-1dB) <0.01% 20Hz to 20KHz, +10dBu output 108dB typical, 22Hz-22KHz unweighted <-75dB 28/Fs Up to 16 AES/EBU or S/PDIF on Phoenix/Combicon removable screw connectors. 110 ohm (AES/EBU), 75 ohm (S/PDIF)

Sample Rate: 48kHz or 96kHz Sample Rate conversion: 8kHz-96kHz THD+N: -140dB Latency: 3/Fso + (56.581/Fsi) + (55.658/Fso). Control Ports: 12 inputs and 6 outputs Control Input Voltage 0 to 4.5v Control Input Impedance 4.7kΩ to +5V (2-wire mode), >1MΩ (3-wire mode) Logic Output Voltage 0 or +5V unloaded Logic Output Impedance 440Ωs Logic Output Current 10mA source, 60mA sink Watchdog Output: Phoenix/Combicon connector for failsafe control Opto Output current 14mA maximum Withstanding voltage 80V maximum (Off) Series Impedance 220Ω (isolated) Control Network (All Models): Connectors RJ45 Ethernet connector Maximum cable length 100m/300ft on Category 5 cable between device and Ethernet switch CobraNet™ Audio Network: (BLU-80, BLU-32 only) Connectors: 2 x RJ45 connectors Maximum cable length 100m/300ft on Category 5 cable between device and Ethernet switch Power and Dimensions: Mains Voltage 85-270V AC, 50/60Hz Power Consumption <35VA BTU Rating <120 BTU/hr Operating Temperature Range: 5(41) to 35(95) degrees C(degrees F) Dimensions (h (U) x w x d): 1.75" (1U) x 19" x 11.3" (45mm x 483mm x 287mm) Weight 18.6 lbs / 8.4kgs (estimated)

Soundweb London 100 Series
BLU-100, BLU-101
C C

Networked Signal Processor

(rear diagram)

+ –

OPTO

1 1

2 2

CONTROL INPUTS LOGIC OUTPUTS

7 7

8 8

R R

R R

BLU-102 (rear diagram)
C + –
OPTO

TEL
C 1 1 2 2 CONTROL INPUTS LOGIC OUTPUTS 7 7 8 8 R R R R

Front Panel Led Indicators: Per Input: Signal Present, CLIP, 48V (Input only) Other: COM, STAT, ERR, PWR Analog Inputs: 12 electronically balanced on Phoenix Combicon removable screw connectors Mic/Line Inputs: Nominal gain 0dB, electronically switchable up to +48dB,in +6dB steps Input Impedance: 3.5kΩ Maximum Input Level: +20dBu with 0dB input gain,+8dBu with 12dB gain CMRR: >75dB at 1KHz Input Noise (E.I.N.): <-128dBu typical with 150Ω source Phantom Power: 48V nominal, selectable per input A/D Latency: 37/Fs [0.77ms@48k] Analog Outputs: 8 electronically balanced on Phoenix/Combicon removable screw connectors Maximum Output Level: +19dBu Frequency Response: 20Hz-20KHz (+0.5dB/-1dB) THD: <0.01% 20Hz to 20KHz, +10dBu output Dynamic Range: 108dB typical, 22Hz-22KHz unweighted Crosstalk: <-75dB Output Impedance: 40Ω balanced and 20Ω unbalanced D/A Latency: 29/Fs [0.60ms@48k] Control Ports: 12 inputs and 6 outputs Control Input Voltage: 0 to 4.5v Control Input Impedance: 4.7kΩ to +5V (2-wire mode), >1MΩ (3-wire mode)

DSP
BLU-100 BLU-101 BLU-102

BLU LINK

AEC

HYBRID

Harman Pro Group | 2013

E E E

E E E

48 Ch.

X

X X

48 Ch.

E E

12 Ch.

48 Ch.

8 Ch.

E

Logic Output Voltage: Logic Output Impedance: Logic Output Current: Watchdog Output: Opto Output Current: Withstanding Voltage: Series Impedance: Control Network: Connectors: Maximum Cable Length: BLU link: Connectors: Maximum Cable Length: Latency: Pass Through Latency: Power and Dimensions: Mains Voltage: Power Consumption: BTU Rating: Operating Temp. Range: Dims: (H(U) x W x D): Weight:

0 or +5V unloaded 440Ωs 10mA source, 60mA sink Phoenix/Combicon connector for failsafe control 14mA maximum 80V maximum (Off) 220Ω (isolated) RJ45 Ethernet connector 100m/300ft on Category 5 cable between device and Ethernet switch 2 x RJ45 Ethernet connectors 100m/300ft on Category 5e cable between devices Max. Number of Nodes: 60 11/Fs [0.23ms@48k] 4/Fs [0.08ms@48k] 100-240V AC, 50/60Hz <55VA <188 BTU/hr 5 (41) to 35 (95) degrees C (degrees F) 1.75” (1U) x 19” x 9.0” (45mm x 483mm x 229mm) 7.5 lbs / 3.4 kgs (estimated)

Section:

03

Page 193

AR-133
Section: Input Max Input Level Connectors Output Section: Output Transformer Connector 1MΩ (pad at 0dB), 47kΩ (pad at -20dB), 47kΩ (pad at -40dB) +9dBu (pad at 0dB), +29dBu (pad at -20dB), +49dBu (pad at -40dB) Two Parallel ¼" jacks, parallel XLR connector (unbalanced) Max Output Level +8dBu into 600Ω or greater XLR3-32

Active DI Box/Line Balancer
General Performance: Distortion (THD) < 0.005% at 1kHz, 0dBu output Noise <-105dB unweighted, 22Hz-22kHz* Frequency 30Hz to 20kHz, +0dB/-1dB Power and Dimensions Main/Standby Power 9 volt PP3 type, battery preferably alkaline Current drain phantom: <7.5mA; battery: <2mA Phantom Power +20 volts DC to +48 volts DC Dimensions 2.3" x 4.9" x 5.6" / 59 mm x 124 mm x 143 mm Weight 1.4 lbs / 650 gms, excluding batteries * Noise measured relative to maximum output.

FCS Series
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

Graphic Equalizers

FCS-960, FCS-966

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 1 INPUT OUTPUT INPUT

FCS-960 (rear diagram)

MAINS POWER

OUTPUT

220
ON

SELECT VOLTAGE

Pin 2 + (Hot) Pin 3 - (Cold)

Pin 2 + (Hot) Pin 3 - (Cold)

FCS-966
240

BALANCED CONNECTIONS
Tip + (Hot) Ring - (Cold)

BALANCED CONNECTIONS
Tip + (Hot) Ring - (Cold)

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

(rear diagram)

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 2

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 2

03

FCS-960

Inputs: Impedance Max Input Level Connector Output Section: Output Max Output Level Connector System Performance: Frequency Response Distortion (THD) Output Noise (Flat)

10kΩ, electronically balanced +20dBu XLR3-31 Electronically balanced and floating +20dBu into 600Ω XLR3-32 ±0.25dB 20Hz-20kHz <0.005% 20Hz-20kHz @ +4dBu <-93dBu 22Hz-22kHz unweighted

Channel Separation (FCS-960) Gain Control Range Peak Indicator Bypass Filter Power and Dimensions: Power Requirements Power Consumption Dimensions (HxWxD): Weight

>80dB from 20Hz-20kHz ±10dB +18dBu Passive fail-safe bypass relay MFB Constant Q type 50/60Hz, 90V-264V < 00VA 00” x 19” x 00” 000mm x 483mm x 000mm 6.6 lbs / 3 kg (estimated)

FCS-966

Input Section: Input Impedance Maximum Input Level CMRR Output section: Output Impedance Maximum Output Level Filters: HP filter LF contour HF contour

10kΩ, electronically balanced >+20dBu >-40dB @1kHz <50Ω, electronically balanced >+20dBu into 600Ω OUT to 250Hz @ 12dB/octave ±6dB shelving @ 50Hz 6dB/octave ±6dB shelving @ 14kHz 6db/octave

Frequency bands General Performance Frequency Response Noise Dynamic Range Cross Talk Distortion Gain control Power and Dimensions: AC Power Dimensions Weight

±15dB on ISO centers with a Q of 4 5Hz to 45kHz ±1dB <-94dBu 22Hz to 22kHz > 115dB >-80dB @1kHz <0.005%THD (80kHz measurement BW) 20Hz-20kHz +10dB to ∞ 115/230V AC, 50/60Hz, 30VA 19” x 5.25” x 7.1” / 483mm x 134mm x 180mm 6.6lbs / 3kgs

Page 194

Section:

03
All specifications are subject to change. ©2012 All Rights Reserved, Harman International Industries, Inc. BSS Audio, Soundweb, London Architect, OMNIDRIVE, Minidrive, and HiQnet are trademarks of Harman International Industries. WHISEWORKS NTM and Neville Thiele Method are trademarks of Whiseworks Pty., Ltd. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

BSS Audio incorporates high quality mechanical fans in some products. All mechanical fans have a limited life expectancy. We recommend annual inspection of fans for dust occlusion and excessive noise. Fan assemblies should be replaced after six to ten years of use. Environmental factors such as elevated temperature, dust, and smoke can adversely affect fan life. Systems exposed to these conditions should be inspected more frequently. Fan replacement can be performed either at the factory or by an experienced technician in the field. Please contact BSS Technical Support for more information on purchasing replacement parts or product service. BSS Audio has a policy of continued product improvement and accordingly reserves the right to change features and specifications without prior notice.

Page 195

Section:

03

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Professional Audio Signal Processing and Distribution Equipment
8760 S. Sandy Parkway, Sandy, Utah 84070, USA tel: +1 (801) 566-8800, Fax: +1 (801) 568-7662

www.bssaudio.com
PN-18-0701
10/12

Page 196

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013

POWERED BY
Full Line Catalog|2013
Installed Sound Commercial Audio Portable PA Tour Sound Cinema Sound
Page 197

INSTALLED SOUND
DCi: The New Standard DCi2|300, DCi2|600, DCi4|300, DCi4|600, DCi8|300, DCi8|600, DCi2|300N, DCi2|600N, DCi4|300N, DCi4|600N, DCi8|300N, DCi8|600,
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

04

CUTTING EDGE
` FEATURES
• Uses cutting edge DriveCoreTM amplifier technology. • True Rack Density – Power points of 300W or 600W in 2/4/8 channel configurations. • DCi Amplifiers are guaranteed to deliver at least the rated power in the specifications over a longer period of time than any other competing amplifier • Ground-breaking 100V direct drive 300W amplification, drives signals over smaller gauge wire • ADVANCED POWER FACTOR CORRECTED (PFC) UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY – The most advanced power supply in an installation amplifier delivers power more efficiently in almost any condition than anyone else, resulting in less power dissipated and less heat in your racks. • AUX Port provides additional flexibility for amplifiers to be integrated in control systems for remote on/off and amplifier fault monitoring

Models

2-ohms

4-ohms

8-ohms

POWER OUTPUT*
70V Vrms

100V Vrms

4-ohms (Bridged)

8-ohms (Bridged)

140V (Bridged)

*Maximum average 200V (Bridged) power in watts at rated

DCi 2|300 DCi 2|600 DCi 4|300 DCi 4|600 DCi 8|300 DCi 8|600
Page 198

150W 300W 150W 300W 150W 300W

300W 600W 300W 600W 300W 600W

300W 600W 300W 600W 300W 600W

300W 600W 300W 600W 300W 600W

300W 600W 300W 600W 300W 600W

600W 600W 600W 1200W 1200W 1200W

600W 600W 600W 1200W 1200W 1200W

600W 600W 600W 1200W 1200W 1200W

600W 600W 600W 1200W 1200W 1200W

THD, 20 Hz - 20 kHz.

` SPECIFICATIONS
Input Impedance (balanced, unbalanced): 20kOhms, 10kOhms S/N ratio, A-weighted: >108dB Total Harmonic Distortion: < 0.35% Voltage Gain: 31dB – 300W models; 34 dB – 600W models Input Sensitivity: 1.4V for 4/8Ω and 70V; 2.0V for 100V Maximum Input Level before Compression: +20dBu. Maximum Input Level before Clip: +26dBu. Frequency Response: (1W into 8Ω, 20Hz-20kHz): ±0.25dB Phase Response: (at 1W 10 – 20 kHz): ±35° Crosstalk: > 80dB (below rated power 20Hz– 1kHz)

Performance Specifications

DC output offset (with inputs shorted): ±10mV Common Mode Rejection: >55dB, >70dB Typical Damping Factor: ≥500, 20 Hz

Weight: <30 lbs

Power Specifications
Operating Voltage: 100V – 240V ±15% Mains Connector: 15 Amp IEC connector Power Draw at Sleep: Less than 1W

Physical Specifications
Input connectors: Balanced 3-pin block connectors, one per channel Output connectors: 2 Pin terminal strip. Accepts up to 10 AWG fork terminals or bare wire. AUX connector: 3-pin block connector Attenuation Control: 21 detent potentiometer for levels from ∞ to 0 dB Cooling: Variable Fans, airflow from front to back Dimensions: 3.5" x 19" x 14.25" (8.75cm x 47.5cm x 35.63cm) DCi 8|600: 3.5” x 19” x 17” (8.75cm x 47.5cm x 42.5cm)

Regulatory Certifications

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013

The new DriveCore install series amplifiers is a complete line of high performance installation amplifiers based on the proprietary DriveCore technology. DCi Series amplifiers are designed, engineered and manufactured to the industry’s highest quality standards, and provide system integrators with the advanced features and flexibility required for challenging 21st century installed sound applications. Versatile, compact and highly energy-efficient, DCi Series amplifiers continue the unbroken Crown tradition of leadership in professional and commercial power amplifier technology.

Page 199

INSTALLED SOUND
ComTech DriveCore Series: The CT475, CT875, CT4150, CT8150

New Standard

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013

FLEXIBILITY
` FEATURES
• • • • • • High power density: Four/eight-channel models in a 1U chassis DriveCore technology Light weight design Convection (Fan-less) cooled Life safety features Cascading inputs for added flexibility

POWER OUTPUT*
8-ohm Dual Models (per channel)

CT 475 CT 875 CT 4150 CT 8150

75W 75W 125W 125W

*Average power in watts at rated THD, 20 Hz - 20 kHz.

Page 200

` SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 20 Hz - 20 kHz): <0.5 dB. Signal to Noise Ratio below rated power (20 Hz to 20 kHz): 110 dB A-weighted. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at 1 watt, from 20 Hz to 20 kHz: < 0.05%. Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) < 0.05% (typical). Crosstalk (below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz): > 70 dB. Common Mode Rejection (CMR) (20 Hz to 1 kHz): >70 dB. DC Output Offset (shorted input): < ±5 mV. Input Impedance (nominal): 20 kilohms balanced, 10 kilohms unbalanced. Maximum Input Level (before input compression): + 20 dBu. Voltage Gain (at maximum level setting), 1.4V sensitivity, 4/8 Ohm Operation: 20:1 (26 dB); AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available (±10%): 120V/60 Hz, 220/230/240V/50 Hz. Power Draw at Idle (120VAC mains, all channels in 4/8 ohm mode): 5W. Cooling: Fanless convention cooled Dimensions: 19 in. (48.3 cm) W x 1.75 in. (4.4 cm) H x 14.25 in. (36.2 cm) D. (This applies to all models) Weight (Net, Shipping): 10 lb (4.5 kg), 15 lb (6.8 kg). (This applies to all models)

Thermal Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, flashes when thermal stress. Fault Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, flashes when a fault condition has occurred in the channel. Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates amplifier has been turned on and AC power is available. Indicator also flashes if the amplifier shuts off due to an under-/over-voltage condition on the AC mains. Power Switch: Amplifier is on when the switch is in the IN position. Indicator flashes if the amplifier shuts off due to an under/over voltage condition on the AC mains or if the amplifier is in DEEP SLEEP mode and the power button is pushed.

Protection Systems

Back Panel Controls and Connectors

AC Power Cord Connector: IEC inlet, type 320; 100/120VAC units: 15A; 220/230/240VAC units: 10A. Voltage is indicated above IEC inlet. Output Connectors: 8-PIN Phoenix Connectors for every four channels. Input Connectors: Removable Phoenix-style barrier connectors for balanced input. High-Pass Filter: A fixed 70-Hz high-pass filter settings. The high-pass filter can be set by using the DIP switch located on the back panel. Auto-Standby: After 30 minutes of idle, amp will go into Standby. Amplifier will come out of Standby once signal is recieved. Green Power: Crown's most efficient mode of operation. The power consumption of the amplifier will only match the input load. This means that the amplifier will operate at maximum efficiency at all times. Input/Output Switches: The ampliefier can be configured so that input signals can be routed to multiple outputs. LifeSafety: Amplifier will produce a 2Hz "heart beat" pulse on a 12VDC signal indicate amplifier is operationg within non-fault condition. Options XFMR 4/8: This is a rack-mountable transformer that allows 100V/70V output from the amplifier, and allows other amplifiers without direct constant voltage output to be easily integrated into distributed systems.

Thermal Level Control (TLC): If an amplifier channel starts to overheat, the TLC circuit will engage that channel’s input compressor. By compressing the input, the amplifier will not generate as much heat and will have a chance to cool down. The degree of compression is proportional to the amount of overheating. If the channel becomes too hot for safe operation even after full TLC limiting, the channel will shut off, and the Thermal Indicator for that channel will flash brightly to alert the user that a state of thermal stress or overload has cause the channel to shut down. FIT (Fault Isolation Topology): Isolates faults within affected channels. Fault: If an amplifier channel requires service, the corresponding Fault indicator will illuminate to alert the user of this condition. If this occurs, return the amplifier to the Crown factory or to an authorized Crown service center. AC Under-/Over-Voltage Protection: If the AC line voltage varies out of an acceptable range, the amplifier’s power supply turns off and the blue Power LED flashes. The amplifier will turn back on when the AC line voltage returns to safe operating levels.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Models 100VAC 120 VAC units 220V/230V/240V units

Under-Voltage Limit 90VAC 108VAC 198VAC

Over-Voltage Limit 110VAC 132VAC 264VAC

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Ready Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when the channel is initialized and ready to produce audio output. Signal Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates to indicate the presence of analog input signals above –40 dBu. Clip Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, illuminates when the THD of the channel’s output signal rises to a level typically considered as the onset of audible clipping. The Clip Indicator also will illuminate during Thermal Level Control (TLC) or input overload.

Power Fuse: A fuse protects the amplifier from excessive AC current draw. Inrush Limiting: A soft-start circuit in the power supply minimizes the amplifier’s current draw during power-on.

Section:

Regulatory Certifications

04

Crown’s CT DriveCore Series offers wide flexibility for a wide range of installed sound applications. These amplifiers offer independent selection of high- and low-impedance operation for each channel pair, making these amps ideal for multi-zone installations.

Page 201

INSTALLED SOUND
CTs Series: The Standard CTs 600, CTs 1200, CTs 2000, CTs 3000
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

04

` FEATURES
• • • •

FOUNDATION
High power density. All two channel models in a 2U chassis Crown Switching Power Supply for lighter weight “Constant-Voltage” or low-impedance operation per channel Fully PIP2-compatible

POWER OUTPUT*
Models 2-ohm Dual 4-ohm Dual 8-ohm Dual 16-ohm Dual 70V Dual 100V Dual (per channel) (per channel) (per channel) (per channel) (per channel) (per channel) 4-ohm Bridge 8-ohm Bridge 16-ohm Bridge 100V Bridge 140V Bridge 200V Bridge

CTs 600 150W 300W 300W CTs 1200 250W 600W 600W CTs 2000 1,000W 1,000W 1,000W CTs 3000 1,500W 1,500W 1,250W
*Maximum average power in watts at rated THD, 20 Hz - 20 kHz.

300W 300W 300W‡ 300W 300W 600W 600W‡ 500W 625W 1,000W 1,000W 2,000W 625W 1,500W 1,500W 3,000W
‡With T-170V or TP-170V.

600W 600W 600W‡ 600W 600W‡ 1,200W 1,200W 1,200W‡ 1,200W 1,200W‡ 2,000W 2,000W 2,000W 2,000W 2,000W 3,000W 2,500W 3,000W 3,000W 3,000W

Page 202

` SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 20 Hz - 20 kHz): ±0.25 dB. Signal to Noise Ratio below rated power (20 Hz to 20 kHz): 105 dB A-weighted. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at full rated power, from 20 Hz to 20 kHz: CTs 600/1200: < 0.1%. CTs 2000/3000 < 0.35%. Damping Factor: 10 Hz to 100 Hz: > 3000. Crosstalk (below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz): > 80 dB. Common Mode Rejection (CMR) (20 Hz to 1 kHz): 50 dB. DC Output Offset: < ±2 mV. Input Impedance (nominal): 10 kilohms balanced, 5 kilohms unbalanced. Maximum Input Level: +20 dBu before input compression, +32 dBu absolute maximum. Load Impedance: (Note: Safe with all types of loads) CTs 600/1200 Stereo: 2/4/8/16 ohms, 70V, 100V Bridge Mono: 4/8/16 ohms, 140V. CTs 2000/3000 Stereo: 2/4/8/16 ohms, 70V, 100V Bridge Mono: 4/8/16 ohms, 140V, 200V. Voltage Gain (at maximum level setting): 8/4 ohm operation, 1.4V sensitivity CTs 600 35:1 (31 dB) CTs 1200 50:1 (34 dB) CTs 2000 63.9:1 (36 dB) CTs 3000 71.4:1 (37 dB). 26 dB: 20:1 (26 dB). 70V operation, 1.4V sensitivity or 100V operation, 2.0V sensitivity: 50:1 (34 dB). AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available (±10%): 120VAC/60Hz, 230VAC/50 Hz. Power Draw at Idle (120VAC mains): CTs 600/1200: 24W (standby mode) CTs 2000/3000: 35W (standby mode). Cooling: Continuously variable speed forced air, front-to-back airflow. Dimensions: 19 in. (48.3 cm) W x 3.5 in. (8.9 cm) H x 14.25 in. (36.2 cm) D. Weight: Net, Shipping CTs 600: 22.8 lb (10.3 kg), 27.7 lb (12.6 kg) CTs 1200: 23.4 lb (10.6 kg), 28.3 lb (12.8 kg) CTs 2000: 27.0 lb (12.2 kg), 32.0 lb (14.5 kg) CTs 3000: 27.7 lb (12.6 kg), 32.7 lb (14.8 kg). Ready Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when the channel is initialized and ready to produce audio output. Indicator is off when PIP puts the amplifier in standby mode via the control system. Signal Indicators: Three green LEDs per channel indicate the amplifier’s input and output signal levels. Signal: input signal is above –40 dBu. –20 dB: amplifier output is 20 dB below clipping. –10 dB: amplifier output is 10 dB below clipping. Clip Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, illuminates when the channel’s output signal reaches the onset of audible clipping. The Clip Indicator also will illuminate during Thermal Level Control (TLC) limiting or when the input compressor/limiter is protecting the amplifier from input overload. Thermal Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, illuminates when the channel has shut down, or is very near shutting down, due to thermal stress or overload. Fault Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, flashes when the amplifier output channel has stopped operating. Data Indicator: Yellow LED indicates control data activity (if the amplifier is equipped with HiQnet control, and connected to a control system). Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates amplifier has been turned on and AC power is available. The LED will flash when the AC line voltage is 15% above or 25% below the nominal rated value. Cooling Vents: Front-to-rear forced airflow. Power Switch: Push-on / push-off switch. Highpass Filter: One 3-position switch per channel selects between OFF, 35Hz and 70Hz 3rd-order filters. “Y” Input Switch (Located on the PIP-BBY Module): When set to ON, this switch parallels the input signals of the two channels for use when the input signal is mono. Also can be used to daisy-chain the signal to another amplifier. Ventilation Grille: Front-to-rear forced airflow.

Options

PIP2 modules, including the PIP-Lite, PIP-USP3/ CN, and PIP-USP4/CN.

Protection Systems

Thermal Level Control (TLC): If an amplifier channel starts to overheat, the TLC circuit will engage the input compressor. By compressing the input, the amplifier will not generate as much heat and will have a chance to cool down. Junction Temperature Simulation (JTS): In the CTs 600/1200, if excess power is demanded, JTS circuitry limits the drive level of the output devices to a safe range, preventing damage. Fault: The amplifier will light the Fault LED if the amplifier output stage stops operating. AC Under-/Over-Voltage Protection: If the AC line voltage drops below 25% or rises above 15% of the nominal operating voltage of the amplifier, the amplifier’s power supply turns off and the blue Power LED flashes. The amplifier will turn back on when the AC line voltage returns to safe operating levels. Circuit Breaker: This breaker protects the amplifier from excessive AC current draw. DC Output Servo: The output servo circuit protects your drivers by eliminating DC offset, even in the presence of very large asymmetrical signals. In-rush Limiting: A soft-start circuit in the power supply minimizes the amplifier’s current draw during power-on. Variable-speed Fan: Two continuously variable speed fans direct the airflow through the amplifier for cooling.

Section:

Back Panel Controls and Connectors

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Power Cord Connector: Standard 15 amp IEC inlet. Voltage is indicated above IEC inlet. Reset Switch: Resets the circuit breaker that protects the power supply. Speaker Connectors: One four-pole touch-proof terminal strip. Accepts up to 10 AWG terminal forks. Input Connectors: Balanced 3-pin terminal block connector, one per channel, on the standard PIP2-BBY module. Channel Level Control: One 21-position detented rotary attenuator per channel, ranging from minus infinity (–70 dB) to 0 dB gain. Mode Switch: Two-position switch is used to select the amplifier’s mode of operation: Dual or Bridge-Mono.

Regulatory Certifications
R

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Bridge Mode Indicator: Yellow LED illuminates when the rear-panel Mode Switch is set to the “Bridge” position.

Other Applications
Cinema

V ge

0W‡ 0W‡ 0W 0W

Crown’s CTs Series amplifiers provide exceptional performance, flexibility and value for installed sound applications. CTs Series amplifiers feature independent selection of high and low impedance operation for a specific channel, plus power levels and features that were carefully chosen to match the requirements of fixed install design. Easy integration with HiQnet™ and CobraNet™ allows CTs amplifiers to deliver a comprehensive lineup of monitoring and control features along with digital audio transport for an award-winning digital audio solution.

Page 203

INSTALLED SOUND
CTs Multi-Channel Series: The CTs 4200, CTs 8200

Standard

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013

` FEATURES
• • • •

FLEXIBILITY
High power density: Four-channel model in a 2U chassis, eight-channel model in a 3U chassis Crown Switching Power Supply for lighter weight Selectable “Constant-Voltage” or low-impedance (4/8 ohm) operation per channel-pair. “FIT” (Fault Isolation Topology) circuitry isolates fault conditions without affecting neighboring channels

POWER OUTPUT*
Models All channels driven 4-ohm Dual 8-ohm Dual 70V Dual

CTs 4200 CTs 8200

260W 200W

180W 220W † 160W 200W

4-ohm Dual

270W 270W

1 channel driven 8-ohm Dual 70V Dual †

220W 220W

250W † 250W

All channel pairs driven 8-ohm Bridge 16-ohm Bridge 100V Bridge †

520W 400W

400W 320W

220W † 200W

1 channel pair driven 8-ohm Bridge 16-ohm Bridge 100V Bridge †

560W 540W

440W 250W † 440W 250W

*Maximum average power in watts at 1kHz at 0.1% THD. †Constant Voltage full-bandwidth power ratings support 100 Hz to 20 kHz due to automatic high-pass filters.

Page 204

` SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 20 Hz - 20 kHz): ±0.5 dB. Phase Response (at 1 watt, 10 Hz - 20 kHz): ±35°. Signal to Noise Ratio below rated power (20 Hz to 20 kHz): 100 dB unweighted. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at 1 watt, from 20 Hz to 20 kHz: < 0.05%. Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) 60 Hz and 7 kHz at 4:1, from 163 milliwatts to full bandwidth power: < 0.05% (typical). Damping Factor: 10 Hz to 400 Hz: >180. Crosstalk (below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz): > 80 dB. Common Mode Rejection (CMR) (20 Hz to 1 kHz): > 50 dB. DC Output Offset (shorted input): < ±5 mV. Input Impedance (nominal): 20 kilohms balanced, 10 kilohms unbalanced. Maximum Input Level (before input compression): + 20 dBu. Load Impedance: (Note: Safe with all types of loads) Stereo: 4/8 and 25 ohms (70V) Bridge Mono: 8/16 and 50 ohms (100V) Voltage Gain (at maximum level setting), 1.4V sensitivity, 4/8 Ohm Operation: 20:1 (26 dB); 70V Operation: 50:1 (34 dB) 100V Operation: 71.4:1 (37 dB) AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available (±10%): 120V/60 Hz, 220/230/240V/50 Hz. Power Draw at Idle (120VAC mains, all channels in 4/8 ohm mode): 58W. Power Draw at Idle (120VAC mains, all channels in 70V mode): 77W. Cooling: Continuously variable speed forced air, front-to-back airflow. Dimensions (Width, Height, Depth): CTs 4200: 19 in. (48.3 cm) W x 3.5 in. (8.9 cm) H x 16.25 in. (41.3 cm) D. CTs 8200: 19 in. (48.3 cm) W x 5.25 in. (13.3 cm) H x 16.25 in. (41.3 cm) D. Weight (Net, Shipping): CTs 4200: 27 lb 8 oz (12.5 kg), 32 lb (14.5 kg) CTs 8200: 36 lb 6 oz (16.5 kg), 47 lb (21.3 kg).

Signal Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates to indicate the presence of analog input signals above –40 dBu. Clip Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, illuminates when the THD of the channel’s output signal rises to a level typically considered as the onset of audible clipping. The Clip Indicator also will illuminate during Thermal Level Control (TLC) or input overload. Thermal Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, flashes when a state of thermal stress or overload has caused the channel to shut down. If the power supply goes into thermal overload, all channel LEDs will flash. Fault Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, flashes when a fault condition has occurred in the channel. Ventilation Grille: Front-to-rear forced airflow. Data Indicator: Yellow LED indicates HiQnet data activity (if the amplifier is equipped with an USPCN Module and connected to a control network). Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates amplifier has been turned on and AC power is available. Indicator also flashes if the amplifier shuts off due to an under-/over-voltage condition on the AC mains. Power Switch: Amplifier is on when the switch is in the IN position.

TP-170V: This is a rack-mountable panel with four autoformers as described above.

Protection Systems

Back Panel Controls and Connectors

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Bridge Mode Indicator: Yellow LED, one per channel pair, illuminates when the channel pair’s Mode Switch is set to the “Bridge” position. If Mode switch is changed while amplifier is powered up, Bridge LED will flash, indicating that the amplifier must be powered off and on to reset the Mode. Ready Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when the channel is initialized and ready to produce audio output.

AC Power Cord Connector: IEC inlet, type 320; 100/120VAC units: 15A; 220/230/240VAC units: 10A. Voltage is indicated above IEC inlet. Output Connectors: One four-pole terminal strip for every two channels with touch-proof cover. Accepts up to 10 AWG terminal forks. Accessory Panel: CTs 4200 accepts an optional VCA-MC4A module. CTs 8200 accepts an optional VCA-MC8 module. Channel Level Controls: One 21-position detented rotary potentiometer per channel, ranging from infinity (–70 dB) to 0 dB attenuation. Input Connectors: Removable Phoenix-style barrier connectors for balanced input. When the USPCN module is installed, these can also can be used as a CobraNet input or a backup for CobraNet. Mode Switch: Used on each consecutive pair of channels, this four-position switch is used to select the amplifier’s mode of operation: Dual 8/4 ohms, Dual 70V, Bridge-Mono 16/8 ohms, and BridgeMono 100V. Cooling Vents: Front-to-rear forced airflow. Options Control Modules: USPCN HiQnet and CobraNet Module VCA-MC4A: VCA module for CTs 4200A. VCA-MC8: VCA module for CTs 8200. Wall-mount level control panels for use with VCA module: 1-VCAP: Single-gang panel with 1 VCA channel volume control. 4-VCAP: Two-gang panel with 4 VCA channel volume controls. T-170V: This is an autoformer that allows 100V output from the amplifier, and allows other amplifiers without direct constant voltage output to be easily integrated into distributed systems.

Thermal Level Control (TLC): If an amplifier channel starts to overheat, the TLC circuit will engage that channel’s input compressor. By compressing the input, the amplifier will not generate as much heat and will have a chance to cool down. The degree of compression is proportional to the amount of overheating. If the channel becomes too hot for safe operation even after full TLC limiting, the channel will shut off, and the Thermal Indicator for that channel will flash brightly to alert the user that a state of thermal stress or overload has cause the channel to shut down. FIT (Fault Isolation Topology): Isolates faults within affected channels. Fault: If an amplifier channel requires service, the corresponding Fault indicator will illuminate to alert the user of this condition. If this occurs, return the amplifier to the Crown factory or to an authorized Crown service center. High-Pass Filter: A fixed 35-Hz (70-Hz in CTs 4200) high-pass filter per channel pair is automatically inserted when the mode switch is set to either of the constant-voltage settings. The high-pass filter corner frequency in the CTs 8200 can be set to 70 Hz, or bypassed, with a service option. AC Under-/Over-Voltage Protection: If the AC line voltage varies out of an acceptable range, the amplifier’s power supply turns off and the blue Power LED flashes. The amplifier will turn back on when the AC line voltage returns to safe operating levels.
Models 100VAC (CTs 8200 only) 120 VAC units 220V/230V/240V units Under-Voltage Limit 90VAC 108VAC 198VAC Over-Voltage Limit 110VAC 132VAC 264VAC

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Power Fuse: A fuse protects the amplifier from excessive AC current draw. Inrush Limiting: A soft-start circuit in the power supply minimizes the amplifier’s current draw during power-on. Variable-speed Fan: Continuously variable speed fan directs the airflow through the amplifier for cooling. Regulatory Certifications
R

Other Applications
Cinema

Crown’s CTs Multi-Channel Series offers wide flexibility for a wide range of installed sound applications. CTs Multi-Channel Series amplifiers offer independent selection of high- and low-impedance operation for each channel pair, making these amps ideal for multi-zone installations.

Page 205

INSTALLED SOUND
CTs Multi-Channel Series: With CobraNet CTs 4200USP/CN, CTs 8200USP/CN
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

04

` FEATURES (with USPCN module)

COBrANET CAPABLE
TM • 100 Mbps Ethernet single-plug solution for CobraNet audio, and HiQnet™ control and monitoring • Analog audio inputs allow CobraNet network audio input, CobraNet audio backup, or a hardwire emergency override of CobraNet audio • 24 bit digital to analog conversion with 32 bit, floating point DSP processing • Firmware upgrades via the network • 10 user selectable presets • Reliable FLASH memory backup of all parameters

POWER OUTPUT*
Models All channels driven 4-ohm Dual 8-ohm Dual 70V Dual

CTs 4200USP/CN CTs 8200USP/CN

260W 200W

180W 160W

220W † 200W

1 channel driven 4-ohm Dual 8-ohm Dual 70V Dual

270W 220W 250W † 270W 220W 250W

All channel pairs driven 8-ohm Bridge 16-ohm Bridge 100V Bridge † †

520W 400W

400W 320W

220W † 200W

1 channel pair driven 8-ohm Bridge 16-ohm Bridge 100V Bridge †

560W 540W

440W 440W

250W † 250W

*Maximum average power in watts at 1kHz at 0.1% THD. †Constant Voltage full-bandwidth power ratings support 100 Hz to 20 kHz due to automatic high-pass filters.

Page 206

` SPECIFICATIONS
USP/CN CobraNet Module Specifications
(for amplifier specifications, see the CTs MultiChannel Series pages)

Connectors:

Data Indicator Flashes when the module receives a valid command that is addressed to the CTs 4200 USP/CN and CTs 8200USP/CN.

D/A and A/D Conversion: 24 bit.

AUX Connector Configurable for AUX input, AUX output and Listen Bus. Listen Bus is also supported through CobraNet. Network Connector The dual RJ45 CobraNet connectors allow a Primary & Secondary connection to the 100Mb Ethernet network. Should the Primary connection lose link activity with the network, the input module will automatically switch to the Secondary connection to ensure uninterrupted audio and control. The indicators on the RJ45 connectors display network information concerning the Ethernet and CobraNet connections.

Switches:

Reset/Preset Switch Used to change presets, restore settings to factory default or restore all the presets to the factory defaults. During operation of the switch, the Data indicator flashes as an aid to the user. Accessible with a straightened paper clip through the rear panel, the switch selects the next user preset if pressed for less than 2 seconds, resets the module to preset “0” if pressed for more than 2 seconds.

DSP processing: 1 ms or 1000 µs. Digital-to-analog conversion: 250 µs. Analog-to-digital conversion: 250 µs. Amplifier: 100 µs. Total: 1.6 ms or 1000 µs. Dynamic Range: 103 dB typical (A-weighted, 20Hz–20kHz, audio sourced from muted CobraNet channel). Distortion: < 0.1% THD+N, 20Hz–20kHz. Frequency Response: ± 0.5 dB, 20Hz–20kHz. Input/Output Monitor Accuracy: Typically ±1dB. Maximum Input Level: + 20 dBu.

Latency:

General:

Indicators:

Preset Indicator Signals the number of the current preset, if active, by flashing a series of flashes equal to the current preset number.

Memory Backup: Non-volatile FLASH memories for backup of run-time parameters, presets, and program storage. Communications: 100Mb Fast Ethernet conforming to IEEE 802.3.

Regulatory Certifications
R

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Overall Audio Performance:

DSP Processing: Two processors, 32 bit, Floating Point, 724 µs latency.

Other Applications
Cinema

Section:

04

CTs 8200USP/CN Back Panel (note USP/CN CobraNet™ module at top left)

The Crown ® CTs 4200USP/CN and CTs 8200USP/CN power amplifiers have an integrated 3rd generation, DSP-based input module. It connects the amplifier to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network allowing it to be remotely controlled and monitored via System Architect™ software. In addition, the input module allows the transport of real-time digital audio via CobraNet™ over the same Ethernet network. The amplifiers connect to a HiQnet™ audio control/monitor network using standard 100 Mbps Ethernet hardware (switches, Network Interface Cards, and cables). CobraNet™ audio is available over the same 100 Mbps Ethernet network, providing a simple-to-install, single-plug solution for audio distribution, control, and monitoring.

Page 207

INSTALLED SOUND
CDi Series: 2/4/8 Ohm, 70V/100V per CDi 1000, CDi 2000, CDi 4000, CDi 6000

channel

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013

` FEATURES
• • • • • •

VErSATILITY
Onboard digital signal processing includes crossovers, EQ filters, delay, and output limiting Computer connectivity via USB allows fast setup and configuration with HiQnet™ Barrier strip outputs, removable Phoenix-style input Extremely versatile, handling a wide range of speaker impedances and outputs Switch-mode universal power supply Speaker presets for crossover frequencies, EQ, limiting, compression, delay

POWER OUTPUT*
Models 2-ohm Dual (per channel) 4-ohm Dual (per channel) 8-ohm Dual (per channel) 70V Dual (per channel) 4-ohm Bridge 100V‡ Dual (per channel) 140V Bridge

CDi 1000 700W** 500W CDi 2000 1,000W** 800W CDi 4000 1,600W** 1,200W CDi 6000 3,000W** 2,100W

275W 500W 475W 800W 650W 1,000W 1,200W 2,500W
‡100Vp

1,400W** 500W 2,000W** 800W 3,200W** 1,000W 6,000W** 2,500W

1,000W 1,600W 2,000W 5,000W

*Maximum average power in watts at 1 kHz at 0.5% THD. **With 1% THD.

Page 208

` SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Output Power: See power charts. Voltage Gain at 1kHz: CDi 1000: 30.5 dB CDi 2000: 32.9 dB CDi 4000: 34.2 dB CDi 6000: 37.1 dB Frequency Response: +0/–1 dB from 20 Hz to 20 kHz at 1 watt into 4 ohms. Load Impedance: Safe with all types of loads. Rated for 2 to 8 ohms in Stereo mode, 4 to 16 ohms in Bridge-Mono mode. Sensitivity: 1.4V. Signal to Noise Ratio (below rated 8-ohm power at 1 kHz): 100 dB (A weighted). Damping Factor: Better than 500 from 20 Hz to 400 Hz. Crosstalk: > 70 dB below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz. Input Stage: Input is electronically balanced and employs precision 1% resistors. Input Impedance (nominal): 20 k ohms, balanced; 10 k ohms, unbalanced. Maximum Input Signal: +22 dBu typical. AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available: 100V, 120V, 220-240V, 50/60 Hz. AC Line Current: CDi 1000: 6.8A CDi 2000: 8.3A CDi 4000: 10.5A At Idle: Draws no more than 38 watts. CDi 6000: 15.3A At Idle: Draws no more than 180 watts. Operating Temperature: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing). Output EQ: 8 parametric filters per channel with adjustable Q, ±15 dB boost/cut. This 8-filter EQ section can NOT be bypassed. Filters are enabled individually. Delay: Up to 50 msec total delay per channel. Output Limiter: Prevents clipping and protects loudspeakers. Choice of –3, –6, or –12 dB threshold per channel. Presets: 20 presets. 19 are user-definable Output Connectors: 4-position barrier strip with connectors for dual louspeakers or bridge-mono loudspeaker. Dual connectors work with 2-8 ohm or 70V/100V loads. Bridge-mono connectors work with 4-8 ohm or 140V loads. HiQnet USB Connector: Type B, connects to a USB port on a PC.

Protection

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Level: Detented rotary level control, one per channel. Power Switch: On/off switch applies AC power to the amplifier. Sel/Prev/Next Buttons: Three buttons near the LCD screen are used to access menu items and front panel lockout. LCD Screen: Backlit liquid crystal display shows speaker presets and signal processing. Signal Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when a very low-level signal is present at input. –10 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal exceeds –10 dB below clip. –20 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal level exceeds –20 dB below clip. Ready Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when the amplifier is ready to produce audio. Clip Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, turns on at the threshold of audible distortion. Temp Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, illuminates under excessive temperature conditions. Power Indicator: Blue LED illuminates when the amplifier has been turned on and has power.

CDi Series amplifiers are protected against shorted, open or mismatched loads; overloaded power supplies; excessive temperature; chain destruction phenomena; excessive output current, and input overload damage. They also protect loudspeakers from input/ output DC, large or dangerous DC offsets and turn-on/turn-off transients.

Included Accessories

Non-touch cover Locking level-control knobs.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Construction
Chassis: Steel. Cooling: Proportional speed fan with front-torear airflow. Dimensions: EIA Standard 19-in. rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B), 3.5 in. (8.9 cm) high and 12.25 in. (31.11 cm) deep behind mounting surface. CDi 6000 is 16.2 in. (41.15 cm) deep. Net Weight: CDi 1000, 2000, 4000: 19 lb (8.6 kg). CDi 6000: 24 lb (10.9 kg). Shipping Weight: CDi 1000, 2000, 4000: 22 lb (10.0 kg). CDi 6000: 30 lb (13.6 kg).

Section:

04

regulatory Certifications

DSP Section

Input EQ: 6 parametric filters per channel with adjustable Q, ±15 dB boost/cut. Also adjustable high and low shelving filters. This 8-filter EQ section can be bypassed. Crossover Filters: Highpass and lowpass per channel. Butterworth 6/12/18/24 dB per octave and Linkwitz-Riley 24/48 dB per octave. Also includes ±15 dB bandpass gain and polarity control.

rear Panel Controls and Connectors
AC Line Connector:

CDi 1000, 2000, 4000: NEMA 5-15P (15A). CDi 6000: NEMA 6-10P (20A) IEC C20 (20A).

Input Connector: Two 3-pin removable Phoenix-type connectors each accept a balanced line-level input signal.

Note: All measurements apply to all models of CDi Series amplifiers in stereo mode with 8-ohm loads and an input sensitivity of 1.4V, 1 kHz at rated power unless other otherwise specified. Specifications for units supplied outside the U.S.A. may vary slightly at different AC voltages and frequencies.

The CDi Series of Crown® amplifiers are professional tools designed and built for installed sound applications. The series includes four models which are identical except for output power: CDi 1000, CDi 2000, CDi 4000 and CDi 6000. All are rugged and lightweight, and offer unmatched value in their class. CDi-Series amplifiers feature an LCD screen with DSP speaker presets. Other features include a switch-mode universal power supply, useful function indicators, proportional-speed fan-assisted cooling, removable Phoenix-style inputs, barrier strip outputs for low-Z or 70V/140V loads, short-circuit protection and more.

Page 209

COMMERCIAL AUDIO
CSA-2120, CST-2120
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

04

COMPACT
` FEATURES
• • • • • • • DriveCore™ powered 2 x 120W commercial amplifier UL2034 Plenum Rated *NEW* Convection cooled design for silent operation Compact size and light weight Auto-Standby mode for energy savings Summing RCA inputs for each channel CST2120 provides 70V & 100V operation allowing the CSA2120 to be easily integrated into a distributed system

POWER OUTPUT*
Models 4-ohm 8-ohm

CSA-2120

120W

120W

*Two Channels at 1 kHz power, THD+N<0.5%

Page 210

` SPECIFICATIONS
CSA-2120
+/- 1 dB

O

Frequency Response(1 watt into 4 or 8 Ohms): Load Impedance: Rated for 4 or 8 Ohms Sensitivity (8 ohms load): 1.4 Vrms Signal to Noise Ratio (below rated 8-ohm power at 1 kHz, A weighted): 100 dB Crosstalk (A weighted): 70 dB below rated from 20 Hz to 1k Hz; 50 dB below rated at 20 kHz Input Impedance (nominal): Balanced: 20k Ohms Unbalanced: 10k Ohms AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available: 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz

Maximum Input Signal: +20 dBu typical Operating Temperature: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing) Dimensions (W x H x D): 8.2” x 1.7” x 7” (209 mm x 44 mm x 178 mm) Net Weight: +20 dBu typical Shipping Weight: 1.7 Kg (3.8 lbs)

Dimensions (W x H x D): 8.2” X 1.7” X 7” (209 mm x 44 mm x 178 mm) Net Weight: 2.1 Kg (4.6 lbs) Gross Weight: 2.4 Kg (5.3 lbs)

Regulatory Certifications

CST-2120
Max Input Power: 125W/CH Max Input Voltage: 32Vrms (AMP rated at 125W into 8 ohms) Insertion Loss: Less than 1dB Frequency Response: +0/–1 dB (at 70 V tap/40 ohms load or 100 V tap/80 ohms load, 1 watt output, 70Hz – 15kHz)

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013

The JBL Commercial® CSA-2120 power amplifier is a professional tool designed and built for installed sound applications. The amplifier is two-channel model providing simple analog frontend processing, with a switch-mode universal power supply. The rack-mountable JBL Commercial® CST-2120 transformer module provides impedance and voltage matching from the CSA-2120 amplifier (with 4 and 8 ohms outputs) to drive 70V and 100V distributed speakers systems.

Page 211

COMMERCIAL AUDIO
14M, 28M
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

04

` FEATURES
• • • • • • •

ADAPTABLE
4 or 8 inputs, 1 or 2 output channels Ideal for commercial and industrial use Balanced Phoenix-type mic/line inputs; RCA inputs Balanced Phoenix-type line outputs Any input can be sent to any output Priority muting Independent bass and treble controls for each input

Model

Inputs

System Zones

14M 28M

4 8

Single-zone Two-zone

Page 212

` SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Frequency Response (at line out): 20 Hz to 20 kHz +/- 1 dB. Signal to Noise Ratio (master volume at minimum): 100 dB. THD: 0.05% typical with 800 mV balanced input, 1V output. Input Sensitivity (volts RMS for full output at maximum gain): Balanced mic inputs: 3 mV. Balanced line inputs: 800 mV. RCA connectors: 400 mV. Input Impedance (nominal): Mic: 400 ohms. Line: 100 kilohms. RCA: 50 kilohms. Crosstalk (all controls at “10”): –50 dB at 1kHz. Line Output Level (nominal): 1.2 V into 10 kilohms. Phantom Power: 15 VDC. AC Line Voltages Available: 100V 50/60 Hz 120V 60 Hz 220V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 240V 50/60 Hz Operating Temperature/Humidity: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing). Storage Temperature: –20° C to 85° C. Tone Controls: Bass and Treble non-detented potentiometers on each input channel. Bass ±10 dB at 100 Hz, Treble ±10 dB at 10 kHz. Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates power on. Input Signal Presence Indicator: Green LED, one for each input channel, illuminates when input signal exceeds –24 dBu (line) or –70 dBu (mic). Output Signal Presence Indicator: Green LED, one for each output channel, illuminates when output signal level exceeds 100 mV. Clip Indicators: Red LED, one per output channel. Illuminates at threshold of audible distortion. Output Level Controls: One per output channel. Detented potentiometer with knob. Line Out Connector: One 3-pin balanced Phoenix-type connector per output channel. Level controlled by master volume control. Input Connectors: Mic/Line Connector: 3-pin Phoenix-type, balanced, one per input channel. Dual RCA Input Connector: For stereo music signals, unbalanced, summed together, two connectors per input channel. Mic/line Switch: Selects mic-level or line-level signals. One switch for each balanced input

O

Included Accessories

Power cord Detachable rack ears Phoenix-type connectors

Back Panel Controls and Connectors
Fuse: Protects the power supply. AC Power Inlet: Detachable IEC. Auxiliary Power Input: 2-position terminal strip for 24 VDC (±10%) backup power. Accepts up to 10 AWG terminal forks. Mixer Config Switch: A DIP switch with two functions: 1. Assigns an input as the priority input for each output, thereby temporarily muting the remaining inputs. Muting is activated by contact closure. 2. Global enable switch for phantom power. Does not affect RCA inputs. Default position is off. Priority Connector: 3-pin Phoenix-type connector allows Input 1 or Input 5 (28M only) to mute other input signals by contact closure. Input Routing Switch (28M only): DIP switches that assign each input signal to each output. Two switches per input.

Dimensions

EIA Standard 19-inch (48.3-cm) rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B) with rack ears, 1.7-inch (4.3-cm) height and 10.7-inch (27.18-cm) depth behind the mounting surface.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Weight

Net Weight: 14M: 8.7 lb (3.9 kg) 28M: 8.7 lb (3.9 kg) Shipping Weight: 14M: 14 lb (6.4 kg) 28M: 14 lb (6.4 kg)

Regulatory Certifications

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Section:

Power Switch: Pushbutton on-off switch. The power switch does not affect the 24V DC auxiliary power input. Input Level Controls: Microphone/line, four in 14M, eight in 28M. Detented potentiometers with knobs.

04

The Crown® 14M and 28M are high-value mixers for commercial and industrial audio. The mixers are part of Crown’s Commercial Audio Series, which also includes mixer-amplifiers and power amplifiers. These low-cost units provide all necessary features in a simple building-block format. Some applications include schools, hospitals, factories, restaurant/retail, houses of worship, fitness facilities, A/V boardrooms, correctional facilities, and small offices. Typical uses are paging, background music, security and evacuation instructions. Input routing allows each input to be assigned to any output. You can add more mixers for more inputs, or add more power amps (or mixer-amps) to handle more zones. Other features include priority muting and phantom power.

Page 213

COMMERCIAL AUDIO
180A, 280A, 1160A
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

04

` FEATURES

POWEr ZONE
• Ideal for commercial and industrial use • Balanced Phoenix-type line inputs; touch-proofed screw-terminal speaker outputs • Advanced protection system includes output current limiting, DC protection, circuit breaker/fuse, and thermal protection • 1 or 2 inputs; 1 to 2 amplifier output channels

POWER OUTPUT*
Models 4-ohm 70V/100V Inputs System Zones

180A 280A 1160A

80W 80W 160W

80W 80W 160W

1 2 1

Single-zone Two-zone Single-zone

*Minimum guaranteed power in watts at 1 kHz with 0.5% THD.

Page 214

` SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Frequency Reponse (at 1 watt from 4-ohm tap): 70 Hz to 19 kHz +/- 1 dB. Frequency Response (at line out): 20 Hz to 20 kHz +/- 1 dB. Power Bandwidth (at 4-ohm tap, 2 dB below maxium 1 kHz power): 50 Hz to 20 kHz with < 0.5% THD Signal to Noise Ratio (ref. to rated power, master volume at minimum): 85 dB. DC Output Offset: < ±5 mV. THD: Less than 0.5% at rated power at 1 kHz. Input Sensitivity (for full output at maximum gain): 800 mV. Input Impedance (nominal): 100 kilohms. Minimum Load Impedance: 100V output: 160 ohms. 70V output: 80 ohms. 4-ohm output: 4/8 ohms. Crosstalk (all controls at “10”): –70 dB at 1kHz. Line Output Level (nominal): 1V into 10 kilohms. AC Line Voltages Available: 100V 50/60 Hz 120V 60 Hz 220V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 240V 50/60 Hz Operating Temperature/Humidity: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing). Storage Temperature: –20° C to 85° C. Output Signal Presence Indicator: Green LED, one for each output channel, illuminates when output signal level exceeds 100 mV (45 dB below full power) from the 4-ohm tap. Clip Indicators: Red LED, one per output channel. Illuminates at threshold of audible distortion. Master Level Controls: One per output channel. Detented potentiometer with knob. Tone Controls: Bass and Treble non-detented potentiometers on each channel. Bass ±10 dB at 100 Hz, Treble ±10 dB at 10 kHz. Current Limit Protection: Included. Thermal Limit Protection: Over-temperature thermal cutout. DC-Fault Load Protection: Included.

Protection

O

Included Accessories

Power cord Detachable rack ears Screws for rack ears Non-touch cover for output connectors Phoenix-type connectors Spade lugs

Back Panel Controls and Connectors

Reset Switch: Resets the circuit breaker that protects the power supply. 220/230/240V units have a fuse instead. AC Power Inlet: Detachable IEC. Auxiliary Power Input: 2-position terminal strip for 24 VDC (±10%) backup power. Accepts up to 14 AWG terminal forks. Amplifier Outputs Connectors: One per channel, 4-position terminal strip with COM (Common), 4 ohms, 70V and 100V terminals. Accepts up to 10 AWG terminal forks. Nontouch cover included. Output VCA Connector: One for every two channels, 4-pin Phoenix-type connector for two VCA control lines of +10 VDC and ground. Compatible with Crown 1-VCAP and 4-VCAP modules. Line Out Connector: One 3-pin balanced Phoenix-type connector per output channel. Post master, pre-VCA. Level controlled by master volume control. Amp Input Connector: 3-pin Phoenix-type, high-impedance balanced, one per amplifer channel.

Optional Accessories

1-VCAP remote volume control for one channel. 4-VCAP remote volume control for four channels.

Dimensions

EIA Standard 19-inch (48.3-cm) rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B) with rack ears, 3.5-inch (8.9-cm) height and 12.2-inch (31.0-cm) depth behind the mounting surface (not including nontouch cover). 4.1 inches (10.5 cm) high including feet. 13.9 inches (35.2 cm) deep from front of knobs to back of non-touch cover.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Weight

Net Weight:

180A: 21.0 lb (9.5 kg) 280A: 25.3 lb (11.5 kg) 1160A: 25.3 lb (11.5 kg)

Shipping Weight:

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Power Switch: Pushbutton on-off switch. The power switch does not affect the 24V DC auxiliary power input. Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates power on.

180A: 26.0 lb (11.8 kg) 280A: 30.3 lb (13.7 kg) 1160A: 30.3 lb (13.7 kg)

Section:

04

Regulatory Certifications

Cooling

Convection cooled.

The Crown® 180A, 280A and 1160A are high-value amplifiers for commercial and industrial audio. They provide 4-ohm and constant-voltage outputs (70V and 100V). The amps are part of Crown’s Commercial Audio Series, which also includes mixers and mixer-amps. These low-cost units provide all necessary features in a simple building-block format.

Page 215

COMMERCIAL AUDIO
180MA, 280MA, 1160MA
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

04

` FEATURES
• • • • •

PrACTICAL
4 to 8 inputs, 1 to 2 amplifier output channels Ideal for commercial and industrial use Balanced Phoenix-type mic/line inputs; touch-proofed screw-terminal speaker outputs Any input can be sent to any output Priority muting

POWER OUTPUT*
Models 4-ohm 70V/100V Inputs System Zones

180MA 280MA 1160MA

80W 80W 160W

80W 80W 160W

4 8 4

Single-zone Two-zone Single-zone

*Minimum guaranteed power in watts at 1 kHz with 0.5% THD.

Page 216

` SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Frequency Reponse (at 1 watt from 4-ohm tap): 70 Hz to 19 kHz ± 1 dB. Frequency Response (at line out): 20 Hz to 20 kHz ± 1 dB. Power Bandwidth (at 4-ohm tap, 2 dB below maxium 1 kHz power): 50 Hz to 20 kHz with < 0.5% THD Signal to Noise Ratio (ref. to rated power, master volume at minimum): 85 dB. DC Output Offset: < ±5 mV. THD: Less than 0.5% at rated power at 1 kHz. Input Sensitivity (for full output at maximum gain): Balanced mic inputs: 3 mV. Balanced line inputs: 800 mV. RCA connectors: 400 mV. Input Impedance (nominal): Mic: 400 ohms. Line: 100 kilohms. RCA: 50 kilohms. Crosstalk: –70dB at 1kHz. Line Output Level (nominal): 1V into 10 kilohms. Phantom Power: 15 VDC. AC Line Voltages Available: 100V 50/60 Hz 120V 60 Hz 220V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 240V 50/60 Hz Operating Temperature/Humidy: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing). Storage Temperature: –20° C to 85° C. below full power) from the 4-ohm tap. Does not respond to signals from the AMP INPUT connector. Clip Indicators: Red LED, one per output channel. Illuminates at threshold of audible distortion. Does not respond to signals from the AMP INPUT connector. Output Level Controls: One per output channel. Detented potentiometer with knob. Amp Input Connector: 3-pin Phoenix-type, high-impedance balanced, one per amplifer channel. Used to link an additional mixer to the mixer-amplifier. Can be used to connect an external processor. Mic/line Switch: Selects mic-level or line-level signals. One switch for each balanced input. Link In/Out Switch: Slide switch, one per channel. With the Link Switch IN, any signal applied to the Amp Input connector will be mixed with the input signal(s). With the Link Switch OUT, only the signal from the Amp Input Connector will appear at the amplifier output.

O

Back Panel Controls and Connectors

Reset Switch: Resets the circuit breaker that protects the power supply. 220/230/240V units have a fuse instead. AC Power Inlet: Detachable IEC. Auxiliary Power Input: 2-position terminal strip for 24 VDC (±10%) backup power. Accepts up to 10 AWG terminal forks. Amplifier Outputs Connectors: One per channel, 4-position terminal strip with COM (Common), 4 ohms, 70V and 100V terminals. Accepts up to 10 AWG terminal forks. Nontouch cover included. Output VCA Connector: 4-pin Phoenix-type connector for two VCA control lines of +10 VDC and ground. Compatible with Crown 1-VCAP and 4-VCAP modules. Amp Config Switch: A DIP switch with two functions: 1. Assigns an input as the priority input for each output, thereby temporarily muting the remaining inputs. Muting is activated by contact closure. 2. Global enable switch for phantom power. Does not affect RCA inputs. Default position is off. Priority Connector: 3-pin Phoenix-type connector allows Input 1 or Input 5 (280MA only) to mute other input signals by contact closure. Input Routing Switch (280MA only): DIP switches that assign each input signal to each output. Two switches per input. Line Out Connector: One 3-pin balanced Phoenix-type connector per output channel. Post master, pre-VCA. Level controlled by master volume control. The tone generator has been omitted. Call Crown Tech Support if you have a tone generator question. Input Connectors: Mic/Line Connector: 3-pin Phoenix-type, balanced, one per input channel. Dual RCA Input Connector: For stereo music signals, unbalanced, summed together, two connectors per input channel.

Cooling

Convection cooled.

Protection

Current Limit Protection: Included. Thermal Limit Protection: Over-temperature thermal cutout. DC-Fault Load Protection: Included.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Included Accessories

Power cord Detachable rack ears Screws for rack ears Non-touch cover for output connectors Phoenix-type connectors Spade lugs

Optional Accessories

1-VCAP remote volume control for one channel. 4-VCAP remote volume control for four channels.

Dimensions

Section:

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Power Switch: Pushbutton on-off switch. The power switch does not affect the 24V DC auxiliary power input. Input Level Controls: Microphone/line, four on 180MA and 1160MA, eight on 280MA. Detented potentiometers with knobs. Tone Controls: Bass and Treble non-detented recessed potentiometers on each input channel. Bass ±10 dB at 100 Hz, Treble ±10 dB at 10 kHz. Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates power on. Input Signal Presence Indicator: Green LED, one for each input channel, illuminates when input signal exceeds –24 dBu (line) or –70 dBu (mic). Output Signal Presence Indicator: Green LED, one for each output channel, illuminates when output signal level exceeds 100 mV (45 dB

EIA Standard 19-inch (48.3-cm) rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B) with rack ears, 3.5-inch (8.9-cm) height and 12.2-inch (31.0-cm) depth behind the mounting surface (not including nontouch cover). 4.1 inches (10.5 cm) high including feet. 13.9 inches (35.2 cm) deep from front of knobs to back of non-touch cover.

04

Weight

Net Weight: 180MA: 21.0 lbs. (9.5 kg). 280MA: 25.3 lbs. (11.5 kg) 1160MA: 25.3 lbs. (11.5 kg) Shipping Weight: 180MA: 26.0 lbs. (11.8 kg) 280MA: 30.3 lbs. (13.8 kg) 1160MA: 30.3 lbs. (13.8 kg)

regulatory Certifications

Crown’s Commercial Audio mixer/amplifiers deliver legendary Crown quality to the commercial audio industry. These highvalue mixer-amplifiers provide both 4-ohm and constant-voltage outputs (70V and 100V) for use in a wide range of commercial applications including schools, hospitals, factories, restaurant/retail, houses of worship, fitness facilities, A/V boardrooms, correctional facilities, and small offices. Easily configured for a range of uses such as paging, background music, security, and evacuation instructions, Crown’s Commercial Audio units are the smart choice for commercial sound.

Page 217

COMMERCIAL AUDIO
135MA, 160MA
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

04

` FEATURES
• • • • •

PrACTICAL
3 inputs and one 35W amplifier output channel in 135MA 4 inputs and one 60W amplifier output channel in 160MA Ideal for paging, background music, and music-on-hold Voice-activated priority muting (VOX) Pre-amp outputs

POWER OUTPUT*
Models 8-ohm 70V/100V Inputs System Zones

135MA 160MA

35W 60W

35W 60W

3 4

Single-zone Single-zone

*Minimum guaranteed power in watts at 1 kHz with 0.5% THD.

Page 218

` SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Frequency Response (at 1 watt from line out): 50 Hz to 20 kHz ± 1 dB. 19 Hz to 34 kHz +0, –3 dB. Signal to Noise Ratio (ref. to rated power, master volume at minimum): Mic: > 58 dB. Line: > 60 dB. Telephone: > 60 dB. Inputs 2 or 3 (and 4 in 160MA): > 78 dB. THD + N: < 0.5% at rated power at 1 kHz. < 0.1% at 5W at 1 kHz. Input Sensitivity (for full output at maximum gain): Input 1: Mic 3mV, Line 800mV. Input 2: 400mV. Input 3: 400mV. Input 4 (160MA only): 400mV. Input Impedance (nominal): Mic: 2.2 kilohms. Line: 10 kilohms. RCA: 10 kilohms. Crosstalk: –82 dB at 1kHz (Ch. 1 line input 0.8V, Ch. 1 volume at minimum, other channel volumes at maximum). Line Output Level (nominal): 1V into 10 kilohms. Phantom Power: 15 VDC. AC Line Voltages Available: Universal Power Supply. Line voltage tolerance +15%, –20%. Operating Temperature/Humidity: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing). Storage Temperature: –20° C to 85° C. Input Signal Clip Indicators: Green LED, one above each channel's input attenuator, flashes brightly at threshold of audible distortion. Output Signal Presence Indicator: Green LED above master output volume control illuminates when any input signal exceeds –40 dBu. Output Signal Clip Indicators: Red LED above master output volume control flashes brightly at threshold of audible distortion. Master Output Level Control: Detented potentiometer with knob. 4. On: CH1 VOX mutes other channels by sensing signal through Input 1. 5. On: Routes CH1 to MOH output. 6. On: Routes CH2 to MOH output. 7. On: Routes CH3 to MOH output. 8. On: 15V phantom power. VOX Threshold: Trim pot controls how loud the voice on CH1 must be before muting other channels. Can be set for no muting.

O

Cooling

Convection cooled.

Back Panel Controls, Connectors and Indicators

Protection

AC Power Inlet: Detachable IEC accepts US or Euro style power cords. Amplifier Output Connector: 4-position terminal barrier block with COM (Common), 8 ohms, 70V and 100V terminals. Accepts up to 10 AWG terminal forks. Non-touch cover included. Preamp Line Out Connector: 3-pin balanced Phoenix-type for connection to external amplifiers. Level independent of master volume control. Input Connector 1: 5-terminal Phoenix connector. 3 terminals for balanced signal, 2 terminals for priority contact closure, which mutes other channels when DIP switch 3 is on. Input Connector 2: Unbalanced line-level RCAtype connectors. Input Connector 3: Unbalanced line-level RCAtype connectors. Input Connector 4 (160MA only): Unbalanced line-level RCA-type connectors. Telephone (MOH) Output Connector: 4-terminal Phoenix connector (2 terminals for 1W output to 8-ohm speaker, 2 terminals for 600-ohm output to PBX music-on-hold port). MOH Level Control: Trim pot adjusts level for Music-On-Hold output from Telephone (MOH) Output Connector. Amp Configuration DIP Switch: DIP switch selection for multiple functions. 1. On: Sets CH1 to Mic Input. Off: Sets CH1 to Line Input. 2. On: Sets CH1 to Normal mode (no priority). 3. On: CH1 priority contact closure mutes other channels.

Included protection mechanisms are current limiting, over-temperature thermal cutout, and DC-fault load protection. The unit is protected against turn-on/turn-off thumps.

Included Accessories

Power cord No-touch cover for output connectors Phoenix-type connectors

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Optional Accessories

Part no. IST 600-ohm Isolation Transformer for Telephone Output or Input 1. Part no. RM1 single rack mount kit for mounting a single MA unit in a rack. Part no. RM2 double rack mount kit for mounting two MA units side-by-side in a rack. Part no. S-Cover 10-pack of security knobs.

Dimensions

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Power Switch: Pushbutton on-off switch. Input Level Controls: Four controls, one per input. Detented potentiometers with knobs. Tone Controls: Bass and Treble non-detented recessed potentiometers under master output volume control. Bass ±10 dB at 100 Hz, Treble ±10 dB at 10 kHz. Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates power on. Input Signal Presence Indicators: Green LED, one above each channel's input attenuator, illuminates when input signal exceeds –40 dBu.

Width: Half rack width (9.5 in. or 24.1 cm). Height (front panel): 3.5 in. (8.9 cm). Height (including feet): 4.1 in. (10.5 cm). Depth (front panel to back panel): 12.2 in. (31.0 cm). Depth (front of knobs to back panel): 13.9 in. (35.2 cm).

Section:

04

Weight

Net Weight: 135MA: 8 lb 2 oz (3.7 kg). 160MA: 9 lb 7 oz (4.3 kg). Shipping Weight: 135MA: 10 lb 16 oz (4.9 kg). 160MA: 12 lb 4 oz (5.6 kg).

regulatory Certifications

Crown’s Commercial Audio mixer/amplifiers deliver legendary Crown quality to the commercial audio industry. These highvalue mixer-amplifiers provide both 8-ohm and constant-voltage outputs (70V and 100V) for use in a wide range of commercial applications including schools, hospitals, factories, restaurant/retail, houses of worship, fitness facilities, A/V boardrooms, correctional facilities, and small offices. Easily configured for a range of uses such as paging, background music, security, and evacuation instructions, Crown’s Commercial Audio units are the smart choice for commercial sound.

Page 219

PORTABLE PA
XTi 2 Series: World Class XTi 1002, XTi 2002, XTi 4002, XTi 6002
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

04

WOrLD CLASS
` FEATURES
• • • • Complete system processing solution including XOVER, EQ, Delay, & Limiting NEW Peakx Plus™ Limiters provide the ultimate in performance and protection NEW Advanced Monitoring provides visibility of AC Line Voltage and Power Supply Temperature USB network for real-time monitoring and control

POWER OUTPUT
Model 2-ohm Dual (per channel) 4-ohm Dual (per channel) 8-ohm Dual (per channel) 4-ohm Bridge 8-ohm Bridge

XTi 1002 XTi 2002 XTi 4002 XTi 6002

700W* 500W 275W 1,000W* 800W 475W 1,600W* 1,200W 650W 3,000W* 2,100W 1,200W

1,400W* 2,000W* 3,200W* 6,000W*

1,000W 1,600W 2,400W 4,200W

1 kHz power with 0.5% THD. * With 1% THD.

Page 220

` SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Frequency Response: (at 1 watt, 20 Hz to 20 kHz): +0 dB, –1 dB Signal-to-Noise Ratio (below rated 1kHz power at 8 ohms): XTi 1002/2002/4002: 100 dB (A weighted), XTi 6002: 103 dB (A weighted) Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): < 0.5% Damping Factor 20 Hz to 1 kHz: > 500 Crosstalk (below rated power): 20 Hz - 1 kHz: > 70 dB Input Impedance (nominal): 20k ohms balanced, 10k ohms unbalanced Maximum Input Signal: +22 dBu typical AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations: 100 VAC, 120 VAC, 220-240 VAC 50/60 Hz AC Line Current (120 VAC amplifier playing 1/8 power pink noise into 4 ohms per ch): XTi 1002: 6.8A; no more than 38W at idle, XTi 2002: 8.3A; no more than 38W at idle, XTi 4002: 10.5A; no more than 38W at idle, XTi 6002: 15.3A; no more than 180W at idle Operating Temperature: 0oC to 40oC at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing) Temp Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, illuminates under excessive temperature conditions. Power Indicator: Blue LED illuminates when the amplifier has been turned on and has power. Presets: 50 total presets; 49 of which are user-definable.

Input/Output Connectors

Controls

Level: Two front-panel rotary level controls, one for each channel. Power Switch: On/Off switch applies AC power to the amplifier. Sel/Prev/Next Buttons: Three buttons near the LCD screen that are used to access menu items and front panel lockout. LCD Screen: Backlit liquid crystal display that shows preset and processing status.

Input Connectors: XLR, one per channel Link/Out Connector: Loop-thru signal from input connector for linking another amplifier, one per channel. Output Connectors: Two Neutrik® Speakon® NL4MP output connectors. Channel-1 Speakon® is wired with Ch. 1 and Ch. 2 outputs for use with optional single 4-conductor cable. Two binding post outputs (in parallel with Speakon® connectors). HiQnet™ USB Connector: Type B, connects to HiQnet™ network.

Construction

Integrated Processing

Indicators
Signal Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when a very low-level signal is present at input (may be used for troubleshooting cable runs). –10 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal exceeds –10 dB below clip. –20 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal level exceeds –20 dB below clip. Ready Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when the amplifier is ready to produce audio. Clip Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, turns on at the threshold of audible distortion.

Input EQ: 6 parametric filters per channel with adjustable Q, ±15 dB boost/cut. Also adjustable high and low shelving filters. This 8-filter EQ section can be bypassed. Crossover Filters: Highpass and Lowpass per channel. Butterworth 6/12/18/24 dB per octave. Linkwitz-Riley 24/48 dB per Octave. Also includes ±15 dB bandpass gain and polarity control. Output EQ: 8 parametric filters per channel with adjustable Q, ±15 dB boost/cut. This 8-filter EQ section can be bypassed. Delay: For signal alignment of driver; 50 ms of total delay. SubHarmonic Synth: Takes the low-frequency content of the input signal and “synthesizes” a new signal that is the same as the input signal but one octave lower. The new synthesized signal is then mixed with the original signal to create the effect. New users now have control over frequency, gain, and filter type. Peakx Plus™ Limiter: User defeatable limiter that allows users to control Threshold, Attack, and Release times.

Chassis: Steel Front Panel: Cast aluminum Cooling: Proportional speed fan with front-to-rear airflow. Dimensions: XTi 1002/2002/4002: 19” (W) x 3.5” (H) x 12.25” (D) XTi 6002: 19” (W) x 3.5” (H) x 16.2” (D) Net Weight: XTi 1002/2002/4002: 18.5 lbs (8.4kg) XTi 6002: 24.0 lbs (10.9kg) Shipping Weight: XTi 1002/2002/4002: 21.5 lbs (9.8kg) XTi 6002: 30.0 lbs (13.6kg)

Regulatory Certifications

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Other Applications

Installed, Cinema, Touring

The XTi Series of Crown ® amplifiers are professional tools designed and built for portable PA applications. The series includes four models which are similar except for output power: XTi 1002, 2002, 4002 and 6002. All are rugged and lightweight, and offer unmatched value in their class. XTi-Series amplifiers feature an LCD screen with speaker presets for crossover frequencies, EQ, limiting, delay, and a subharmonic synthesizer. Other features include a switch-mode universal power supply, useful function indicators, proportional-speed fan-assisted cooling, XLR inputs, Speakon ® and binding-post outputs, shortcircuit protection and more.

Page 221

PORTABLE PA
XLS DriveCore™ Series: Performance and XLS1000, XLS1500, XLS2000, XLS2500
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

Flexibility

04

` FEATURES

INNOVATION
• High Performance, Lightweight Class-D amplifier – weighs less than 11 lbs • Integrated PureBand™ Crossover system ensures seamless transitions from low to high frequency drivers • Integrated PeakX™ Limiters provide maximum output while protecting your speakers • XLR, 1/4", RCA Inputs ensure compatibility with any source • 1/4" Inputs can be used as loop-thrus to distribute signal to additional amplifiers

POWER OUTPUT*
Models 2-ohm Dual (per channel) 4-ohm Dual (per channel) 8-ohm Dual (per channel) 8-ohm Bridge 4-ohm Bridge

XLS1000 XLS1500 XLS2000 XLS2500

550W 775W 1,050W 1,200W

350W 525W 650W 775W

215W 300W 375W 440W

700W 1,050W 1,300W 1,550W

1,100W 1,550W 2,100W 2,400W

*Maximum average power in watts at 0.5% THD, 1 kHz.

Page 222

` SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Sensitivity (for full rated power at 4 ohms): 1.4 Vrms. Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 20 Hz to 20 kHz): +0 dB, –1 dB. Signal-to-Noise Ratio Rated as dBr to full rated 8 ohms power output (A-weighted): XLS1000: > 97 dB. XLS1500, XLS2000, XLS2500: > 103 dB. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): < 0.5%. Intermodulation Distortion (IMD): (60 Hz and 7 kHz at 4:1) from full rated output to –30 dB: < 0.3%. Damping Factor (8 ohm) 10 Hz to 400 Hz: > 600. Crosstalk (below rated 8 ohm power): at 1 kHz: > 85 dB. at 20 kHz: > 60 dB. Input Impedance (nominal): 20 kilohms balanced, 10 kilohms unbalanced. Load Impedance: 2 to 8 ohms per channel in Stereo, 4 to 8 ohms in Bridge Mono. AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available (±10%): 120 VAC 60 Hz, 100 VAC 50/60 Hz, 220 and 240 VAC 50 Hz.

PureBandTM Crossover System
Crossover Filter: Linkwitz-Riley 24dB per ocatve.

Protection

Crossover Mode: Crossover (CH1=LPF, CH2=HPF), Low Pass (both channels LPF), High Pass (both channels HPF), Bridge (LPF or HPF). PeakXTM Limiters: Channel independent clip limiter designed to provide maximum output while protecting your loudspeakers.

XLS Series amplifiers provide extensive protection and diagnostic capabilities, including output current limiting, DC protection, circuit breaker, and thermal protection.

Construction

Ventilation: Flow-through ventilation from front to back. Cooling: Internal heat sinks with forced-air cooling for rapid, uniform heat dissipation. Air Volume Requirements (per minute per unit): 80.15 ft³ (2.27 m³). Dimensions:EIA Standard 19-inch (48.3-cm) rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B), 3.5-inch (8.9-cm) height. XLS1000/1500: 8.10-inch (20.6-cm) depth. XLS2000/2500: 10.35-inch (26.3-cm) depth.

Indicators

Signal Presence Indicators: Two green LEDs, one for each channel, illuminate when the channel’s input signal exceeds –40 dBu. –10 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal exceeds –10 dB below clip. –20 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal level exceeds –20 dB below clip. Clip Indicators: Two red LEDs, one for each channel, illuminate when the channel’s output is being overdriven. Thermal Indicator: Two red LEDs, one for each channel, illuminate when thermal compression begins.

Weight

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Net Weight: XLS1000: 8.6 lb (3.9 kg) XLS1500: 8.6 lb (3.9 kg) XLS2000: 10.75 lb (4.9 kg) XLS2500: 10.75 lb (4.9 kg) Shipping Weight: XLS1000: 13.6 lb (6.2 kg) XLS1500: 13.6 lb (6.2 kg) XLS2000: 15.75 lb (7.1 kg) XLS2500: 15.75 lb (7.1 kg)

Input/Output

Controls

Level: Two front-panel rotary level controls, one for each channel. LCD Screen: Back-lit LCD allows for crossover configuration, amp mode configuration and clip compressor configuration. Menu/Prev/Select: Three buttons located near the LCD screen that are used to configure and access the integrated processing. Power: Front-panel switch; on when in the IN position. Blue LED will illuminate when on. Circuit Breaker: Back-panel breaker provides overload protection.

Input Connectors: XLR (one per channel), 1/4 inch (one per channel), and RCA (one per channel). The 1/4 inch inputs can be used as loop-thrus to distribute signal to multiple amplifiers. Output Connectors: Two 4-Pole Speakon® Output Connectors accept 2-pole or 4-pole Speakon® connectors. The top Speakon connector is wired for both channels so it can be used for bridge-mono wiring or for stereo wiring of two speakers to a single Speakon connector. One pair of back-panel binding posts per channel; accepts banana plugs or bare wire. (European models do not accept banana plugs.)

regulatory Certifications

Section:

04
Other Applications
Installed, Cinema

Take command of center stage with Crown's new XLS amplifiers. The high-performance class-D amplifier combined with its integrated PureBand™ Crossover System deliver unmatched performance and sound; while its multiple inputs let you plug in anything you want. PeakX™ Limiters effortlessly protect your speaker investment, and at 11 pounds moving from show to show is nearly effortless. Powerful, flexible, portable, and reliable – RUN THE SHOW with a power amplifier designed to play hard all night long.

Page 223

PORTABLE PA
XLi Series: Powerful.reliable. Affordable. XLi800, XLi1500, XLi2500, XLi3500
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

04

` FEATURES

rAW POWEr
• Stereo/parallel/bridge-mono mode • User selectable input sensitivity - 0.775V and 1.4V • RCA and XLR inputs; Speakon® and Binding Post outputs • Two level controls, power switch, power LED, and six LEDs which indicate signal presence, clip and fault for each channel • Protection against shorts, no-load, on/off thumps and radio-frequency interference

POWER OUTPUT*
Models 4-ohm Dual (per channel) 8-ohm Dual (per channel) 8-ohm Bridge-Mono

XLi 800 XLi 1500 XLi 2500 XLi 35000

300W 450W 750W 1,350W

200W 330W 500W 1,000W

600W 900W 1,500W 2,700W

*Maximum average power in watts at 0.5% THD, 1 kHz.

Page 224

` SPECIFICATIONS
Sensitivity (for full rated power at 4 ohms): 0.775V or 1.4V Signal to Noise Ratio (below rated power 20Hz to 20kHz, A-Weighted): >103 dB Totoal Harmonic Distortion (THD) (20Hz-20kHz): <0.1% Intermodulation Distortion (IMD): (60 Hz and 7 kHz at 4:1 from full rated output to –30 dB): = / 0.35% Frequency Response (at 1W, 20 Hz - 20 kHz): ± 0.5 dB Crosstalk (below rated power): at 1 kHz: - 78 dB. at 20 kHz: - 59 dB. Damping Factor (from 10 Hz to 400 Hz, 8ohm load): >200 AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available (±10%): 120VAC 60Hz, 220V and 240VAC 50Hz Dimensions:EIA Standard 19-inch (48.3-cm) rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B), 3.5-inch (8.9-cm) height. XLi800/1500/2500: 12.4-inch (31.5-cm) depth XLi3500: 14.4-inch (36.58-cm) depth.

Regulatory Certifications

Weight

Net Weight: XLi800: 25.1 lb (11.4 kg) XLi1500: 28.0 lb (12.7 kg) XLi2500: 29.7 lb (13.5 kg) XLi3500: 43.0 lb (19.5 kg) Shipping Weight: XLi800: 29.5 lb (13.4 kg) XLi1500: 32.4 lb (14.7 kg) XLi2500: 34.2 lb (15.5 kg) XLi3500: 47.4 lb (21.5 kg)

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013

The XLI Series of power amplifiers from Crown represents a new era in affordable quality power amplification. All four models in the series are powerful, rugged and reliable. They are suited for musicians, DJs, and entertainers as well as houses of worship, discos, and pubs.

Page 225

TOUR SOUND
VRack Series:

Complete Amplification System
VRack

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 226

` FEATURES
• Three IT12000HD or three IT4X3500HD amplifiers • Fully assembled package from one source • Worldwide power distribution with both L21-30 and 32A CEE-Form connections • Flexible input panel with Analog, AES, and VDrive • Versatile output panel (IT12000HD VRack only) • Fail-over AES and network connection • Rear rack lighting • VDrive AES digital distribution over CAT5 • Built-in network control • Built-in captive suspension • Shock-mounted rack • Removable dolly board • Side-storing rack doors • Entire package is UL/CSA/ETL • HiQnet™ control

` CROWN'S VRACK SYSTEM
We know you’ve got enough to worry about in preparing your venue for each performance. That’s why the new VRack, designed by Crown for optimum performance and setup simplicity, puts all your amplification needs in one customized, turnkey package, complete with full safety approvals. With Crown-engineered components already built in, it provides you with an easy-to-configure, all-in-one amplifier solution that eliminates the time-consuming process of building amp racks, and frees your technical team to handle other important setup tasks. The VRack delivers superb power distribution anywhere in the world and features innovative software for convenient, simplified control, giving you a versatile, worry-free rack system that’s always ready to go.

` VRACK INCLUDES
Summary
Three I-Tech HD 12000 amps. A custom package from one source. All components professionally engineered by Crown. Simplified configuration capabilities for easier setup in any market.

Innovative software allows:
• Monitoring and adjustment on rack-byrack basis • All changes for all 3 amps made with one interface • Monitors input metering (peak and RMS), output metering (peak and RMS) and overall gain reduction • Built-in network and AES failover protects speakers in case of AC mains loss • Standardized package configurations designed to optimize speaker performance • Greater cross-renting options with “go anywhere” capability

Vrack Industry's Exclusives
Worldwide power distribution – goes anywhere, plays anywhere. Power distro, rigging hardware and entire rack are safety certified to UL/CSA/ ETL – all safety information in order for local fire/safety inspectors.

Crown OmniDriveHD™ Digital Signal Processing, including:
• LevelMAX™ Limiters • Audibly superior FIR Filters • One amplifier per phase • Innovative Power Factor Correction technology • Optimal output at all AC main voltages and frequencies • 5 pin CEE form and 5 pin Hubbell Twist Lock

More Versatility
Allows multiple configurations for different types of speakers. AES, Analog and Network inputs for multiple connections. Dimensions permit easy shipment: US and European truck configurations, sea containers, etc. Captive suspension provides lifting and hoisting options for venue flexibility. Run 120VAC or 208VAC (US) or 220VAC to 240VAC (international) with the flip of a switch.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

regulatory Certifications

Section:

04

With three I-Tech HD 12000 amps in each VRack, power concerns are not a concern at all. The completely original switching power amp design provides greater fidelity at high and low power levels, more efficiency because it produces less waste heat, and more reliability because it’s not subjected to excessive heat or stressed to its limits. With constant access to full rail voltage, you’ll always have power on demand, and it greatly extends the V-I Plane boundaries to drive speaker loads no other amplifier can. For good measure, Crown’s innovative Power Factor Correction technology and optimal output at all AC main voltages and frequencies, and one amp per phase, all factor into the unrivaled power generated by the VRack. Not to mention the 5 pin CEE Form and 5 pin Hubbell® Twist-Lock® for global power distribution. Even better is something else only Crown does: the power distro, rigging hardware and entire rack are all safety-certified to UL/CSA/ETL standards for local fire and safety inspectors.

Page 227

TOUR SOUND
I-Tech HD Series: Excellence Without IT5000HD, IT9000HD, IT12000HD

Compromise

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013

` FEATURES

rAISING THE BAr–AGAIN

• BSS OMNIDRIVEHD™ DSP processing with IIR and linear phase FIR filters • Global Power Supply designed to deliver maximum power no matter where your schedule takes you.Universal AC input accepts100-240VAC, 50/60 Hz (±15%) • High power density, up to 9000 watts in a 2U chassis • Highest output voltage in the industry (200V peak) provides clean transient peaks • 5th-generation patented Class I (BCA®) circuitry • Front-panel USB connector transfers presets to/from a USB drive to the amp’s DSP • True Ethernet backbone–fast, reliable and scalable

POWER OUTPUT*
Model 20 mS BURST 2-ohm Dual 2-ohm Dual 4-ohm Dual 2-ohm Dual (per ch.) (per channel) (per channel, 1 kHz) (per channel) 8-ohm Dual (per channel) 4-ohm Bridge 8-ohm Bridge

IT5000HD 3,000W IT9000HD 4,700W IT12000HD 6,000W

2,000W 2,800W 3,750W

2,000W 3,500W 4,500W

2,500W 3,500W 4,500W

1,250W 1,500W 2,100W

4,000W 5,600W 7,500W

5,000W 7,000W 9,000W

*Guaranteed minimum power in watts at 20 Hz-20 kHz with 0.1% THD

Page 228

` SPECIFICATIONS
Summary Specifications
Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 20 Hz - 20 kHz): ±0.25dB. Signal to Noise Ratio below rated full-bandwidth power, A-weighted: > 112 dB. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at full rated power: < 0.1%. Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) 60 Hz and 7 kHz at 4:1, from full rated output to –35 dB: < 0.2%. Damping Factor (20 Hz to 100 Hz at 8 ohms): > 5000. Crosstalk (below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz): > 80 dB. Common Mode Rejection (CMR) (20 Hz to 1 kHz): > 70 dB typical. Latency (analog, digital inputs): 1.13 mS analog, 1.81 mS digital (96 kHz). A/D, D/A Converters: 24-bit 192 kHz Cirrus Logic. Digital Input: AES/EBU, 24-bit, 32-96 kHz. Onboard sample-rate converter. Network: Onboard TCP/IQ and HiQnet, compatible with standard 100 Mb Ethernet hardware. DSP: 24-bit conversion with 32-bit, floatingpoint DSP processing. World-class IIR and linear phase FIR filters. Has 64 assignable filters with 9 different filter types. Includes all-pass filters, over 2 seconds of delay available per channel, and dual uncorrelated-noise and sinewave generators. Load Impedance: (Note: Safe with all types of loads) Stereo: 1/2/4/8/16 ohms. Bridge Mono: 2/4/8 ohms. Input Sensitivity (referenced to 8 ohm rated output): Adjustable in 0.1V steps from 1.4V to 7.75V. Required AC Mains: Universal AC input, 100240VAC, 50/60 Hz (±15%). Maximum AC mains voltage 277VAC. AC Line Connector: Five cordsets supplied with amplifier (USA, UK, European, Australia, India).

Back Panel Connectors, Controls, and Indicators
Connectors: Balanced XLR analog inputs, balanced analog XLR loop-thru outputs, AES/EBU digital input, AES/EBU digital loop-thru output, 4-Pole Speakon output connectors, binding post output connectors, power cord, EtherCon® Ethernet connector for networking via HiQnet or CobraNet. Reset Switch/Circuit Breaker: If the current draw of the amplifier exceeds safe limits, this breaker automatically disconnects the power supply from the AC mains. The switch resets the circuit breaker. Preset Indicator: LED flashes to signal the number of the current preset if active. LED is green if the preset values have not been changed once loaded. LED is yellow if the preset values have been changed since they were loaded.

Front Panel Indicators, Controls and Connectors
Indicators: Bridge mode, Ready, Signal level, Clip, Thermal error, Fault, Network data, Power, AC mains. LCD Control Screen and Controls: These let the user adjust the amplifier’s attenuation and muting, configure the amp, set up and view error monitoring (such as temperature and load supervision), set IP and HiQnet addresses from the front panel, and recall DSP presets. The presets allow the user to quickly reconfigure the amp for various applications. Level Controls (Encoders): Speed-sensitive rotary encoders, 0.5 dB steps, range 0 to –100 dB. These two knobs affect the Channel-1 and Channel-2 output levels. They also select Menu items and adjust parameter values that are displayed on the LCD Control Screen. Power Switch: Push-on/push-off switch with built-in green AC mains present indicator. USB 2.0 Connector: Accepts a USB drive to transfer presets from the drive to the amplifier DSP, and vice versa.

Construction
Cooling: Dual-zone, microprocessor controlled, continuously variable speed fans, front-to-back airflow. Dimensions: 19 in. (48.3 cm) W x 3.5 in. (8.9 cm) H x 16.2 in. (41.1 cm) D. Weight: 28 lbs (12.7 kg) net, 36 lbs (16.3 kg) shipping. Included Accessories: Rear rack ears, rack screws, operation manual, power cords, foam air filter.

regulatory Certifications

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Other Applications
Installed, Cinema

Crown continues the tradition of excellence and innovation with the Crown® I-Tech HD Series, delivering unmatched versatility, power and performance for touring sound applications. Featuring onboard high-definition BSS OMNIDRIVEHD™ DSP with 24-bit, 192 kHz Cirrus Logic SHARC A/D and D/A converters, the I-Tech HD Series also offers a new software interface that provides easier system-level changes, and includes a configuration wizard. Providing up to 9 kW continuous power in a 2U rack space and delivering the highest output voltage in the industry, the I-Tech HD Series outperforms all the competition.

Page 229

TOUR SOUND
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

I-Tech 4x3500 HD: Excellence DriveCore™ Series

Without Compromise

04

` FEATURES

More Flexibility, No Compromise. NO COMPArISON

• BSS OMNIDRIVEHD™ DSP processing with Industry Leading IIR filters and linear phase FIR filters • The only Tour Sound Amplifier that provides four routable inputs to any output (analog, AES, VDRive, or CobraNet) • LevelMAX™ peak voltage and RMS power limiters communicate with each other, resulting in smooth and accurate response, better sound • 6th-generation patented Class-I (BCA®) circuitry couples power efficiently to the load and provides low AC current draw • Global Power Supply with Power Factor Correction designed to deliver maximum power no matter where your schedule takes you. Universal AC input accepts100-240VAC, 50/60 Hz (±15%)

POWER OUTPUT*
Model
(per channel)

2-ohm Dual

(per channel)

4-ohm Dual

8-ohm Dual (per channel)

4-ohm Bridge

8-ohm Bridge

20 Hz - 20 kHz Bench Power (2 sec. all channels driven)

IT4x3500HD

2,000W 2,000W 3,500W 3,500W

1,500W
1 kHz 20ms Burst

4,000W 7,000W

4,000W 8,200W

1,900W

*Guaranteed minimum power in watts at 20 Hz-20 kHz with 0.35% THD

Page 230

` SPECIFICATIONS
The power amplifier shall be a solid-state fourchannel model employing Class I (BCA® ) output circuitry. The amplifier shall contain protection from shorted, open and mismatched loads, general overheating, DC, high frequency overloads, under/over voltage, and internal faults. If an amplifier channel starts to overheat, the Thermal Level Control (TLC) circuit shall engage the channel’s input compressor in an amount proportional to the amount of overheating, in order to generate less heat. If the channel becomes too hot for safe operation, the channel shall shut off, and the Thermal Indicator for that channel shall illuminate brightly to alert the user that a state of thermal stress or overload has caused the channel to shut down. The front-panel controls shall be a power switch, Menu/Exit button, Previous button, Next button, Encoder knob with push button, and a touch screen color LCD screen. The encoder knob and button combined with the touch screen shall allow changes to be made to the amplifier via the LCD screen. Rear-mounted controls shall include a reset switch for the circuit breaker. The recommended load impedance in NonBridge/Mono mode shall be 1/2/4/8/16 ohms. The load impedance in Bridge-Mono mode shall be 2/4/8 ohms across Channels 1+2 and/or Channels 3+4. The amplifier shall be safe when driving any kind of load, including highly reactive ones. The rear-mounted output connectors for the Speakon version shall be two high-current 50A Neutrik SpeakON NL4MLP (mates with NL4FC or NL4) and one high-current 50A Neutrik SpeakON NLT8MP (mates with NL8FC). The rearmounted output connectors for the Binding Post version shall be four pairs of high-current, 60A color-coded 5-way binding posts (for banana plugs, spade lugs, or bare wire). The rear-mounted input connectors shall be a 3-pin female XLR analog input connector for each channel, and two 3-pin female XLR digital input connectors that accepts a digital signal in the AES3 format for Channel inputs 1+2 and 3+4. The rear-mounted Ethernet connector accepts an RJ-45 EtherCON connector for HiQnet™, CobraNet™ and VDrive from a standard network cable. Built into this connector shall be a yellow LINK ACTIVITY indicator that shows network activity, and a green 100Mb indicator that shows a 100Mb network connection.

Summary Specifications

The rear-mounted Data indicator shall be a yeallow LED that indicates data activity. The rear-mounted Preset indicator shall be a yellow LED that flashes to signal the number of the current preset active. The I-Tech 4x3500HD DriveCore Series shall be fully compatible with Harman Pro System Architect, JBL HiQnet Performance Manager, and the Powered by Crown iOS app. The I-Tech 4x3500HD DriveCore Series shall also be compatible with CobraNet networks. Front panels indicators shall include a 4.3” Color Touch Screen LCD with backlight to control the amplifier’s setup and operation. A yellow Bridge-Mode Indicator illuminates when the amplifier is set to Bridge-Mono mode for Channels 1+2 and/or Channels 3+4. A Ready Indicator (one per channel) illuminates when the channel is initialized and ready to produce audio output and is off when the amplifier is in standby mode via the control software, a green Signal Indicator (one per channel) that illuminates to indicate the presence of input signals above -40dBu, a red Clip Indicator that illuminates when the THD of the channel’s output signal reaches the onset of audible clipping and illuminates during Thermal Level Control (TLC) limiting, a red Thermal Indicator (one per channel) that illuminates when the channel has shut down due to thermal stress or overload, a red Fault Indicator (one per channel) that illuminates when the amplifier output channel has stopped operating, a yellow Data Indicator that flashes during network data activity, a blue Power Indicator that illuminates when the amplifier has been turned on and AC power is available (and flashes when the AC line voltage is 15% above or below the nominal rated value), and a green AC Mains Preset Indicator in the power switch that indicates AC power is preset at the power cord. The amplifier shall include onboard BSS OMNIDRIVEHD DSP with 24-bit conversion and 32-bit floating-point processing, DSP presets in firmware and downloadable, load supervision, error reporting, and a global power supply with Power Factor Correction. The amplifier shall meet or exceed the following performance criteria. Input sensitivity for rated output: adjustable in 0.1V steps from 1.4V to 7.75V. Voltage gain: 37.9 dB to 23 dB.

Rated output of all four channels driven with 0.35% THD (20Hz to 20kHz): 2000 watts per channel into 2 ohms, 2000 watts per channel into 4 ohms, and 1900 watts per channel into 8 ohms. Rated output in Bridge-Mono mode with Channel 1+2 and Channel 3+4 both in BridgeMono mode and driven at 0.35% THD (20Hz to 20kHz): 4000 watts into 4 ohms and 4000 watts into 8 ohms. Frequency Response at 1 watt, 20Hz to 20kHz: =/-0.25dB. Signal to Noise Ration below rated power, A-weighted: greater than 112dB. Total Harmonic Distortion at full rated power: less than 0.35%. Intermodulation Distortion (60Hz and 7kHz at 4:1 , from full rated output to -35dB): less than 0.35%. Damping Factor (20Hz to 100Hz): greater than 5000. Crosstalk (below rated power, 20Hz to 1kHz): greater than 80 dB. Common Mode Rejection (20Hz to 1kHz): greater than 70dB. DC Output Offset: less than +/-3mV. Input Impedance (nominal) 20 kilohms balanced, 10 kilohms unbalanced. Maximum Input Level: +15 dBu or +21 dBu, depending on the input sensitivity. Latency (analog, digital inputs): 1.13 mS analog, 1.81 mS digital (96kHz). The amplifier chassis shall be constructed of aluminum with a durable powder coat finish with microprocessor controlled, continuously variable-speed forced-air ventilation from the front panel to the back panel The dimensions of the amplifier shall allow for 19 inch (48.3 cm) EIA standard (RS-310-B) rack mounting. The amplifier shall be 3.5 inches (8.9 cm) tall, and 16.95 inches (43.1 cm) deep behind the rack mounting surface. The amplifier shall weigh 29 pounds (13.1 kg). The amplifier shall be designated the I-Tech 4x3500HD DriveCore Series.

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013

regulatory Certifications

The I-TechHD DriveCore Series offers amazing power, light weight and ease of use for touring sound applications. Unlike other amplifiers, it includes onboard high-definition DSP, a Color Touchscreen LCD control screen, and a built-in network connection. Modern power amplifiers are sophisticated pieces of engineering capable of producing extremely high power levels.

Page 231

TOUR SOUND
Macro-Tech i Series: The Macro-Tech i Series

Legend Continues

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013

` FEATURES

THE LEGEND CONTINUES
• The Macro-Tech® i Series continues the Crown® Macro-Tech legacy of unparalleled sonic accuracy and detail, putting sound quality above all else

• Patented, cutting-edge Class-I circuitry gets more power out of an amplifier with less waste • Rugged construction ensures that all Macro-Techs are built to withstand years of abuse on the road • Global Power Supply — designed to deliver maximum power no matter what country you work in • Built-in load, line voltage, input and output monitoring • Standard Ethernet networking via Performance Manager™ lets system operators monitor and control the amplifier from any location

POWER OUTPUT*
Model 20 mS BURST 2-ohm Dual 2-ohm Dual 4-ohm Dual 2-ohm Dual (per ch.) (per channel) (per channel, 1 kHz) (per channel) 8-ohm Dual (per channel) 4-ohm Bridge 8-ohm Bridge

MA-5000i 3,000W MA-9000i 4,700W MA-12000i 6,000W

2,000W 2,800W 3,750W

2,000W 3,500W 4,500W

2,500W 3,500W 4,500W

1,250W 1,500W 2,100W

4,000W 5,600W 7,500W

5,000W 7,000W 9,000W

*Guaranteed minimum power in watts at 20 Hz-20 kHz with 0.1% THD

Page 232

` SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 20 Hz - 20 kHz into 8 ohms): ±0.25 dB. Signal to Noise Ratio (below rated full-bandwidth power, A-weighted): >112 dB. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) (at 2 watts into 8 ohms): < 0.1%. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Plus Noise (at full rated power): < 0.35%, 20 Hz to 20 kHz. Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) (60 Hz and 7 kHz at 4:1, from full rated output to –30 dB): < 0.35%. Damping Factor (20 Hz to 100 Hz at 8 ohms): > 5000. Crosstalk (below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz): > 80 dB. Common Mode Rejection (CMR) (20 Hz to 1 kHz): 55 dB, typically >70 dB. DC Output Offset (shorted input): < ± 3 mV. Input Impedance (nominal): 10 kilohms balanced, 5 kilohms unbalanced. Maximum Input Level: +20 dBu typical. Network: Onboard HiQnet™, compatible with standard 100 Mb Ethercom hardware. Load Impedance: (Note: Safe with all types of loads) Stereo: 1/2/4/8/16 ohms. Bridge Mono: 2/4/8 ohms. Input Sensitivity (referenced to 8 ohm rated output): 1.4V, 32 dB gain, and 26 dB gain. Voltage Gain (referenced to 8 ohm rated output): MA-5000i: 37.1 dB to 22.2 dB MA-9000i: 37.9 dB to 23.0 dB MA-12000i: 39.3 dB to 24.5 dB Required AC Mains: Universal AC input, 100240VAC, 50/60 Hz (±10%). Maximum AC mains voltage 264VAC. AC Line Connector: Five cordsets supplied with amplifier (USA, UK, European, Australia, India). Bright green: Channel’s output signal has reached the onset of audible clipping. Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates amplifier has been turned on and AC power is available. The LED will flash when the AC line voltage is 10% above or below the nominal rated value. Data Indicator: Yellow LED on front panel indicates network data activity. Data indicator flashes only when the amplifier is polled for data, or is polled to see whether it is online Power Switch: Push-on/push-off switch with built-in green AC mains present indicator. Volume Control: Precision detented attenuator with 31 steps, press-and-hold mute function. Volume Control LED Ring: A ring of green LEDs around each volume control show the position of the control. Entire ring flashes when channel is muted. Can be converted to be a level meter. Preset Indicator: Green/yellow LED flashes to signal the number of the current preset. LED is green if current preset is active, or is yellow if current preset is modified. Input Sensitivity Switch: Three-position switch providing 1.4V, 32 dB, and 26 dB settings for both channels.

Firmware/Software

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Bridge Mode Indicator: Amber LED illuminates when the amplifier is set to Bridge-Mono mode. Ready Indicator: Green LED, one per channel. On (bright): Ready. On (dim): Onset of compression. Off: Thermal failure. Signal Indicators: One green LED per channel. Solid green: Input signal is above –40 dBu.

Power Cord Connector: Detachable 20 amp IEC inlet. Cord locks with suppliled cord retention clip. Voltage range is indicated above IEC inlet. Reset Switch/Circuit Breaker: If the current draw of the amplifier exceeds safe limits, this breaker automatically disconnects the power supply from the AC mains. The switch resets the circuit breaker. Output Connectors: Two high-current, 50A Neutrik® Speakon® NL4MLP (mates with NL4FC or NL4), one per channel. Ch 1 Speakon® is wired with Ch 1 and Ch 2 outputs for use with single 4-conductor cable. Two pairs of high-current, 60A color-coded 5-way binding posts (for banana plugs, spade lugs or bare wire). Analog Input Connectors: A 3-pin female XLR connector for each channel. Analog Loop Thru Connectors: Two male XLR passive analog loop through. Mode Switch/Indicator: Sets amplifier to Stereo, Bridge, or Input Y mode. OFF=Stereo, YEL=Bridge, GRN=Y. Network Connectors: Two Neutrik® Ethercon connector accepts RJ-45 type connectors for HiQnet™ networking. Next to each connector is a yellow LINK ACT indicator that shows network activity, and a green 100Mb indicator that shows a 100Mb network connection. Data Indicator: Yellow LED on back panel indicates network data activity. Data indicator flashes only when the amplifier is polled for data, or is polled to see whether it is online.

Back Panel Controls, Indicators and Connectors

Firmware can be updated at www.crownaudio. com > Support > Downloads. Software features: Same as PIP-Lite module (except no Listen Bus): User Presets, Clip Event Monitor, Input Signal Level Monitor, Output Signal Level Monitor, Thermal Headroom Level Monitor, Power/Standby Control, Signal Mute, Polarity Inverter, Input Signal Fader, Dynamic Gain Monitors (Ghost Faders), Amplifier Information, User and Channel Labels, Amplifier Mode, Amplifier Output Mode, Line Voltage Monitor, Error Reporting, Auto Standby, Input Signal Compressor/Limiter, Peak Voltage Limiter, Average Power Limiter, Clip Eliminator, Thermal Limiter, Limiter Tie, Load Supervision.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Construction

Cooling: Dual-zone, microprocessor controlled, continuously variable speed fans, front-to-back airflow. Front Panel: Cast aluminum with integrated handles. Dimensions: 19 in. (48.3 cm) W x 3.5 in. (8.9 cm) H x 16.2 in. (41.1 cm) D. Weight: 28 lbs (12.7 kg) net, 36 lbs (16.3 kg) shipping. Protection: Amplifier is protected against reactive loads, faults and shorts. If one channel experiences a catastrophic failure, the entire amplifier will shut down. Included Accessories: Rear rack ears, rack screws, operation manual, power cords, foam air filter.

Section:

04

regulatory Certifications

Other Applications

Installed, Portable PA

The Crown Macro-Tech i Series amplifiers continue the Macro-Tech legacy of unparalleled sonic accuracy and detail, putting sound quality above all else. Their patented, cutting-edge Class-I circuitry gets more power out of an amplifier with less waste. Each model features a Global Power Supply designed to deliver maximum power in any country. The i Series offers studio-quality analog signal processing with built-in load, line voltage, input and output monitoring. Standard Ethernet networking via System Architect provides integrated monitoring and control to give system operators access to the system from any location.

Page 233

CINEMA SOUND
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

DSi Series: 2/4/8 Ohm DSi 1000, DSi 2000, DSi 4000, DSi 6000

04

` FEATURES
• • • • • •

ONE-TOUCH PErFOrMANCE
Intuitive front-panel LCD screen, automatic presets for popular JBL cinema speaker systems for quick, easy configuration Onboard digital signal processing includes crossovers, EQ filters, delay, and output limiting Computer connectivity via USB allows fast setup and configuration with HiQnet™ System Architect® software Rear-panel HD-15 connector provides easy input/output connectivity between DSi amplifiers and new DSi-8M System Monitor Barrier strip outputs, removable Phoenix-style input All models are THX®-approved

POWER OUTPUT
Models 2-ohm Dual (per channel) 4-ohm Dual (per channel) 8-ohm Dual (per channel) 4-ohm Bridge 8-ohm Bridge

DSi 1000 DSi 2000 DSi 4000 DSi 6000

1,000W* 1,450W* 3,000W*

700W*†

475W 275W 800W 475W 1,200W 650W 2,100W 1,200W

1,400W*† 2,000W* 3,000W* 6,000W*

950W 1,600W 2,400W 4,200W

Maximum average power in watts at 1 kHz at 0.5% THD. *With 1% THD.

†Not rated for 100V versions.

Page 234

` SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Voltage Gain at 1kHz: DSi 1000: 30.5 dB DSi 2000: 32.9 dB DSi 4000: 34.2 dB DSi 6000: 37.1 dB Frequency Response: +0/–1 dB from 20 Hz to 20 kHz at 1 watt into 4 ohms. Load Impedance: Safe with all types of loads. Rated for 2 to 8 ohms in Stereo mode, 4 to 16 ohms in Bridge-Mono mode. DSi 1000 A1 (100V version) is rated for 4 to 8 ohms in Stereo mode, 8 to 16 ohms in Bridge-Mono mode. Sensitivity: At 8 ohm rated output: DSi 1000: 1.4V DSi 2000: 1.4V DSi 4000: 1.4V DSi 6000: 1.4V At 4 ohm rated output: DSi 1000: 1.3V DSi 2000: 1.2V DSi 4000: 1.3V DSi 6000: 1.3V At 2 ohm rated output: DSi 1000: 1.1V DSi 2000: 1.0V DSi 4000: 1.0V DSi 6000: 1.1V Signal to Noise Ratio (below rated 8-ohm power at 1 kHz): 100 dB (A weighted). Damping Factor: Better than 500 from 20 Hz to 400 Hz. Crosstalk: > 70 dB below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz, A-weighted. Input Stage: Input is electronically balanced and employs precision 1% resistors. Input Impedance (nominal): 20 k ohms, balanced; 10 k ohms, unbalanced. AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available: 100V, 120V, 220240V, 50/60 Hz. AC Line Current:
DSi 1000: 6.8A DSi 2000: 8.3A DSi 4000: 10.5A At Idle: Draws no more than 38 watts.

DSP Section

Input EQ: 6 parametric filters per channel with adjustable Q, ±15 dB boost/cut. Also adjustable high and low shelving filters. This 8-filter EQ section can be bypassed. Crossover Filters: Highpass and lowpass per channel. Butterworth 6/12/18/24 dB per octave, Linkwitz-Riley 24/48 dB per octave. Also includes ±15 dB bandpass gain and polarity control. Output EQ: 8 parametric filters per channel with adjustable Q, ±15 dB boost/cut. This 8-filter EQ section can NOT be bypassed. Filters are enabled individually. Output Limiter: Prevents clipping and protects loudspeakers. Choice of –3, –6, or –12 dB threshold per channel. Delay: Up to 50 msec total delay per channel. Presets: 20 presets. One is “DSP OFF.” Fifteen are factory-set for JBL Cinema systems. Four are user-definable.

Rear Panel Controls and Connectors
AC Line Connector: DSi 1K, 2K, 4K: NEMA 5-15P (15A). DSi 6000: NEMA 6-10P (20A) IEC C20 (20A). Input Connector: Two 3-pin removable Phoenix-type connectors each accept a balanced line-level input signal. Output Connectors: 4-position barrier strip with connectors for dual louspeakers or bridge-mono loudspeaker. HiQnet USB Connector: Type B, connects to a HiQnet network. HD-15 Connector: For cinema I/O compatibility with DSi-8M System Monitor. See Figure 1.

Protection

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

DSi 6000: 15.3A At Idle: Draws no more than 180 watts.

Level: Detented rotary level control, one per channel. Power Switch: On/off switch applies AC power to the amplifier. Sel/Prev/Next Buttons: Three buttons near the LCD screen are used to access menu items and front panel lockout. LCD Screen: Backlit liquid crystal display shows speaker presets and signal processing. Signal Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when a very low-level signal is present at input. –10 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal exceeds –10 dB below clip. –20 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal level exceeds –20 dB below clip. Ready Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when the amplifier is ready to produce audio. Clip Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, turns on at the threshold of audible distortion. Temp Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, illuminates under excessive temperature conditions. Power Indicator: Blue LED illuminates when the amplifier has been turned on and has power.

DSi-Series amplifiers are protected against shorted, open or mismatched loads; overloaded power supplies; excessive temperature; chain destruction phenomena; excessive output current, and input overload damage. They also protect loudspeakers from input/output DC, large or dangerous DC offsets and turn-on/turn-off transients

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Construction

Chassis: Steel. Cooling: Proportional speed fan with front-torear airflow. Dimensions: EIA Standard 19-in. rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B), 3.5 in. (8.9 cm) high and 12.25 in. (31.11 cm) deep behind mounting surface. DSi 6000 is 16.2 in. (41.15 cm) deep. Net Weight: DSi 1K. 2K, 4K: 19 lb (8.6 kg). DSi 6K: 24 lb (10.9 kg). Shipping Weight: DSi 1K, 2K, 4K: 22 lb (10.0 kg). DSi 6K: 30 lb (13.6 kg).

Section:

04

Regulatory Certifications
R

Operating Temperature: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing).

Note: All measurements apply to all models of DSi Series amplifiers in stereo mode with 8-ohm loads and an input sensitivity of 26 dB gain, 1 kHz at rated power unless other otherwise specified. Specifications for units supplied outside the U.S.A. may vary slightly at different AC voltages and frequencies.

The Crown ® DSi Series of power amplifiers provides onboard digital signal processing including crossovers, EQ filters, delay and output limiting. A rear panel HD-15 connector provides easy input/output connectivity between DSi amplifiers and the new DSi-8M System Monitor. The intuitive front panel LCD screen guides installers through a setup process— featuring presets for the industry-standard JBL cinema loudspeaker systems—to make configuration quick and easy. At the touch of a button, Crown’s DSi cinema amplifiers deliver perfectly matched performance with each award-winning JBL ScreenArray® system, making this the ultimate cinema solution.

Page 235

CINEMA SOUND
DSi-8M: Convenient DSi-8M

Monitoring

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013

` FEATURES
• • • • • •

PErFOrMANCE MONITOr
Compact 2-rack unit 8 channels for monitoring processor or amplifier inputs All inputs and outputs are balanced to interface with new cinema processors No level jumps when switching between processor and amplifiers 25-pin D-sub connectors, plus removable terminal blocks and HD-15 for quick, hassle-free connections Designed to work with bi-amplified sound systems to monitor the high- and low-frequency outputs from the left, center and right channels

Page 236

` SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Input Impedance (processor inputs): 10 kilohms.

rear Panel Controls and Connectors

Input Impedance (Processor Inputs): 10 k ohms. Input Impedance (Power Amplifiers Inputs): > 50 k ohms. Power Requirements: 100-240V , 50-60 Hz, 32 watts.

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Channel Select Buttons and LEDs: Eight pushbutton switches, one for each input channel. Pressing a button monitors the signal from that channel, and lights the corresponding LED. Any combination of eight channels can be selected. Volume Control: Rotary potentiometer with knob controls the volume of the internal or external speaker. Has no effect on the VU Bargraph Meter display. Processor/Amplifier Selector Switch and LEDs: Pushbutton switch with corresponding LEDs selects inputs from cinema procesor or power amplfiers for monitoring. VU Bargraph Meter: 12-segment meter displays input level of selected channels from –40 VU to +3 VU. May be calibrated by the rear-panel trim adjustment. Operates independently of the Volume Control. Test Jack: 1/4" phone jack lets the user monitor the audio output of the DSi-8M. Inserting a mono or stereo 1/4" phone plug here disables the internal speaker and routes the audio output to the Test Jack. Internal Speaker: For convenenient monitoring at the monitor panel. Power Switch and Power LED: Rocker switch turns power on or off. LED illuminates when power is on.

IEC AC Power Receptacle: Connects to an IEC AC power cord. Input Connector 1: 10-pin Phoenix terminal block connects to the power amplifier speaker outputs for the Left Surround, Right Surround, Back Surround Left, Back Surround Right and Subwoofer channels. This connector lets you monitor the output of amplifiers that do not include HD-15 connector options. Input Connector 2: 10-pin Phoenix terminal block connects to the power amplifier speaker output for the Left High, Left Low, Center High, Center Low, Right High and Right Low channels. This connector lets you monitor the output of amplifiers that do not include HD-15 connector options. Amplifier Level Control: Trimpot adjusts the level of the input signals from the power amplifiers. Processor Level: Trimpot adjusts the level of the input signals from the processor. Outputs to Power Amplifier Inputs: The six HD-15 connectors in this section connect to DSi amplifiers for both input and output signals. The HD-15 connectors have two functions: 1. Connect DSi 8M outputs to DSi amplifier inputs. 2. Connect DSi amplifier outputs to DSi 8M inputs for monitoring. Using VGA cables, the HD-15 connectors can be connected to Crown DSi power amplifier HD-15 connectors as described below. HD-15 Connector 1: For cinema I/O compatibility. Connects to Ls/Rs amplifier. HD-15 Connector 2: Connects to Bsl/Bsr amplifier. HD-15 Connector 3: Connects to Rl/Rh amplifier.

HD-15 Connector 4: Connects to Sw amplifier. HD-15 Connector 5: Connects to Ll/Lh amplifier. HD-15 Connector 6: Connects to Cl/Ch amplifier. Optional Input Connector: 25-pin D-sub connector connects to the EX output of the processor. Bargraph Level: Trimpot adjusts the sensitivity of the front-panel VU Bargraph Meter. Main Input Connector: 25-pin D-sub connector connects to the main outputs of the processor. “EX” Selector Switch: 8-position DIP switch. Turn on switches 1-4 if system is without EX. Turn on switches 5-8 if system is with EX. This routes the correct Ls/Rs inputs to the DSi-8M circuitry.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Construction

Chassis: Steel. Dimensions: EIA Standard 19-inch rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B), 3.5 inches (8.9 cm) high and 9.625 inches (24.4 cm) deep behind front mounting surface. Net Weight: 10 lb 2 oz (4.63 kg). Shipping Weight: 16 lb (7.26 kg).

regulatory Certifications

Section:

04

The Crown ® DSi-8M is a projection booth monitor designed to work with bi-amplified cinema systems using the Crown DSi Series amplifiers. All controls necessary for daily operation of the DSi-8M are easily accessible on the front panel. 8-channel monitoring allows you to monitor either the processor or the power amplifier’s outputs: L, C, R, Ls, Rs, Bsl, Bsr, and Sub in any combination. Input levels from the processor and power amplifier can be adjusted independently. There are no huge level jumps when switching between processor and power amplifiers. The bargraph display can be calibrated to the reference level for your theater. The projectionist can see auditorium levels instantly.

Page 237

TCP / IQ

ANALOG AUDIO INPUTS

PIP LITE
T

SmartAmp Automation for Networked Audio
he Crown PIP LITE is a PIP (Programmable Input Processor) input module for CTs 2 channel amplifiers. The PIP-LITE connects to an audio control network via 100 Mb Ethernet. The audio path in the PIP LITE is processed totally in the analog domain. The SmartAmp™ feature set offers a range of automation functions which provide greater control over amplifier operation and helps to save both time and money.

PIP USP3/CN
SmartAmp Automation for TCP/IQ

T

he Crown PIP-USP3/CN is a 3rd generation DSP-based PIP™ (Programmable Input Processor) input module for CTs 2 channel amplifiers.* It connects the amplifier to a 100 Mb Ethernet network allowing it to be remotely controlled and monitored. In addition, the USP3/CN allows the transport of real-time digital audio via CobraNet™ over the same Ethernet network.

` FEATURES
• A Programmable Input Processor with system networking capabilities (connects via 100 Mb Ethernet) • Remote control and monitoring of CTs 2 channel • Can be connected to the same network used to transmit CobraNet™ audio • Implements SmartAmp features: input compressors, multimode output limiters, error reporting and load monitoring • AUX connector with AUX input, AUX output, or Foldback

` FEATURES
• 100 Mb Ethernet single-plug solution for both CobraNet™ audio and networked control and monitoring • Analog audio inputs allow audio input to the CobraNet™ network, CobraNet™ audio redundancy, or a hardwire emergency override of CobraNet™ audio • Foldback amplifier output monitor via CobraNet™ • 24 bit digital to analog conversion with 32 bit, floating point DSP processing • 64 assignable filters with 9 different filter types including all-pass filters

Section:

04
` FEATURES

Harman Pro Group | 2013

PIP BLU
he BSS & Crown PIP-BLU is a PIP™ (Programmable Input Processor) input module for CTs 2 Channel Amplifiers (CTs 600,1200, 2000, 3000). It connects the amplifier to a 100 Mb Ethernet network allowing it to be remotely controlled and monitored using HiQnet™ London Architect as well as providing digital audio transport via BLU link.
®

• Digital Audio Transport via BLU link • Programmable Input Processor with HiQnet Control • Remote control and monitoring of CTs 2 channel amplifiers • 2 analog line level inputs and outputs for 2 x 2 BLU link I/O expansion • Five Year, No-Fault, Fully Transferable Warranty completely protects your investment and guarantees its specifications • Implements SmartAmp™ features • Input compressors • Multimode output limiters • Error reporting • Real time load monitoring

T

The PIP-BLU offers 2 channels of audio via the Soundweb London digital audio bus informally known as BLU Link. This high bandwidth digital audio bus provides easy connectivity with fault tolerance. BLU link features a low latency, fault tolerant digital audio bus of 256 channels which uses standard Category 5e cabling giving a distance of 100m between compatible devices. The BSS Audio MC-1 fiber optic media converter can be used to increase the distance between devices to over 10km (6.2 miles) using single mode fiber.

Page 238

` FEATURES
• Onboard high-definition 96kHz OMNIDRIVEHD™ processing with 24-bit, 192 kHz Cirrus Logic A/D and D/A converters • World-class FIR and IIR filters • LevelMAX™ peak, RMS and transducer thermal voltage power limiters combine for a smooth and accurate response, better sound, and higher usable SPL • 100Mb Ethernet single-plug solution for CobraNet™ audio and HiQnet™ control and monitoring • Auto Standby for increased energy efficiency • Multiple Input Options Include: Analog, CobraNet™ or AES3 Digital Audio • Digital Audio On/Off Ramp allows users to send pre or post processed analog signal out of the module to adjacent amplifiers • Amplifier output monitor using the Foldback control through the CobraNet network • SLM (Sweep Load Monitoring) with system-level diagnostics • 64 assignable filters with 9 different filter types including all-pass filters • Over 4 seconds of delay available per channel • Input compressors for each channel • Full error reporting • Firmware upgrades via the network • 50 user selectable presets • Reliable FLASH memory backup of all parameters • Five Year, No-Fault, Fully Transferable Warranty completely protects your investment and guarantees its specifications • Ambient Leveler senses the ambient sound level of a room via the connected loudspeakers

PIP USP4-CN
T
he Crown® PIP-USP4 is a 4th generation DSP-based PIPTM (Programmable Input Processor) input module for CTs Series two channel amplifiers. The USP4 connects to an Ethernet network allowing it to be remotely controlled and monitored via HiQnet, System Architect or London Architect. In addition, the USP4 allows the transport of real-time digital audio via AES3 and CobraNetTM.

The USP4 is a HiQnetTM series component and connects to the audio control/ monitor network using 100Mb Ethernet hardware (switches, Network Interface Cards, and cables). The CobraNet audio signal is available over the same 100Mb Ethernet network, providing a simple to install, single plug solution for audio distribution, control, and monitoring. The USP4’s OMNIDRIVEHDTM processor gives the user an enormous amount of digital signal processing. LevelMAXTM limiters, proprietary FIR and IIR filters, audio routing, faders, meters, polarity & mute, compressors, delays, error reporting and load monitoring are all available. Built in noise and sine-wave generator provide noise masking and test capabilities. The enhanced AUX port allows users to interface with the USP4 to provide additional external control and monitoring. Offering crisp clear sound and the widest dynamic range possible, the PIPUSP4 provides unprecedented power and flexibility in one compact—and very affordable—module.

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 239

Section:

04

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Crown Audio
1718 W. Mishawaka RD, Elkhart, IN 46517, USA • Tel: (574) 294-8000 For product availability and pricing please contact your local dealer. www.crownaudio.com

Page 240

Harman Pro Group | 2013

05

Section:

Page 241

Section:

05

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 242

Be sure to join us today at www.facebook.com/dbxpro and www.twitter.com/dbxpro for news, inside scoops and giveaways!

dbxpro.com

youtube.com/ dbxprofessional

facebook.com/ dbxpro

twitter.com/ dbxpro

HISTORY

It began over 40 years ago with the vision of a single man to create a better way to record audio and that vision has continued into a new millennium. The late David Blackmer, who is universally considered to be the father of modern Compression, had a quest to improve the dynamic range of analog recordings using decibel expansion. This quest produced the decilinear VCA and RMS detector which taken together have changed the sonic landscape and made possible so many of our current audio technologies. In 1971, Mr. Blackmer founded dbx® which has collectively produced over 35 patents

that continue to forge and reshape the landscape in the Live Sound, Studio Recording, and Installed Sound professional audio markets today. Our award-winning team of designers and engineers have embraced Mr. Blackmer’s passion for audio purity with a vengeance, and continue to design and build the precise and accurate tools necessary for today’s audio production. From our rock-solid Analog products like the 20-Series EQs and 10-Series Compressors, to our cutting-edge Performance and Commercial Audio products – our System Core (SC), DriveRack and ZonePRO lines – we provide the tools to accommodate all of your audio needs. This brochure is designed to help you navigate through our many product solutions and find the ones that meet your exact needs.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CONTENTS
DriveRack
®

Dynamics
160A 166xs 1066 1046 1074 266xs

DriveRack 4800 DriveRack 4820 DriveRack 260 DriveRack 220i DriveRack PA+ DriveRack PX

Personal Monitor Solutions
TR1616 PMC16

Crossovers
223s 223xs 234s 234xs

Section:

05

ZonePRO™
ZonePRO 1260 (m)/1261(m) ZonePRO 640 (m)/641 (m) ZonePRO Zone Controllers

Mic Preamps
386 376

SC
SC 64 SC 32

EQs
215s 231s 1215 1231 131s 2015 2231 2031 iEQ-15 iEQ-31

Premium Direct Boxes
dB10 dB12

Other Products
AFS 224 120A 286s PB-48

Compressors
160SL 162SL

Product Specs

Page 243

DriveRack 4800 | 4820
®
COMPLETE EQUALIZATION AND LOUDSPEAKER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The 4820 is based on the same operating system as the DriveRack 4800 without the Full Color QVGA Display Interface
®

DriveRack 4800 | DriveRack 4820
® ®

COMPLETE EQUALIZATION AND LOUDSPEAKER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Designed to provide incredible flexibility, sonic excellence and intuitive control for performance applications, the DriveRack 4800 is the new flagship of the hugely successful DriveRack family. From the powerful 96 kHz DSP engine and standard analog and digital I/O, to the QVGA display and multiple control surfaces, the 4800 provides all the processing, flexibility and control necessary for both installation and live use. The DriveRack 4800 is the next generation of the famous DriveRack family, and like its predecessor it is engineered to provide “Everything you need between the mixer and the power amps”. In keeping with this philosophy the 4800 includes four inputs and eight outputs with both analog and digital connectivity. The 96 kHz processing engine is capable of offering insert processing functions to customize the processing path for your application, in addition to the standard system processing functions all with extremely low latency and extended frequency response. From Signal Routing, EQ, and Bandpass Filters, to classic dbx® Dynamics and AFS® Advanced Feedback Suppression, all the processing is available and with the sonic excellence that you would expect from the world’s leading system processing manufacturer. With all this processing power available, control is of paramount importance. The DriveRack 4800 provides a full color display to speed manual operation; this combined with intuitive front panel controls, an easy to use GUI and optional wall panel controllers means that whether your application is tour sound or installation, the DriveRack 4800 has what it takes.

Section:

05

M 9 48 and 96 kHz operation with Wordclock input 9 Full Color QVGA Display (4800 only) 9 4 analog and AES/EBU inputs 9 8 analog and AES/EBU outputs 9 Optional Jensen® I/O Transformers 9 Full Bandpass Filter, Crossover and Routing Configurations with Bessel, Butterworth, and LinkwitzRiley filters 9 31-Band Graphic and 9-band Parametric EQ on every input
Page 244

Harman Pro Group | 2013

9 6-band Parametric EQ on every output 9 Loudspeaker Cluster and Driver Alignment Delays 9 Selectable DSP inserts on all inputs and outputs including Classic dbx Compression, PeakStopPlus™, Limiting and AFS® Advanced Feedback Suppression among others 9 Ethernet HiQnet networking and control 9 dbx ZC wall panel control

COMPLETE EQUALIZATION AND LOUDSPEAKER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DriveRack 260

®

Harman Pro Group | 2013

DriveRack 260
®

COMPLETE EQUALIZATION AND LOUDSPEAKER CONTROL SYSTEM
The DriveRack 260 was designed to provide state-of-the-art signal processing, while maintaining a simple and intuitive control interface. This goal has been realized. From the powerful DSP modules to the multiple control surfaces, the 260 provides all the processing and control necessary for both installation and live use. Additionally, the Wizard function enables any user to quickly set up and use the 260 to its full potential by streamlining the setup process and providing a menu-based setup procedure that includes system setup and configuration, Auto-EQ, and Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS™). The DriveRack 260 is based on the same unparalleled design philosophy as the other products in the DriveRack family, namely, to provide “Everything you need between the mixer and the power amps.” In keeping with that philosophy, the 260 offers 2 inputs and 6 outputs on XLR connectors. Each input channel provides a choice of EQ, either a 9-band Parametric or a 28-band Graphic EQ. Each input channel also boasts two selectable insert processors with a selection of Notch Filtering, classic dbx® Compression, Auto Gain Control, Sub-Harmonic Synthesis, or our own patented Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS™). The DriveRack 260 also offers a configurable Delay with 2.7 seconds of total delay time. The 260 provides full Bandpass and Crossover filtering and routing including Bessel, Butterworth and Linkwitz-Riley topologies. There is parametric EQ available on each output as well as dbx PeakStopPlus™ Limiting. The 260 provides a full-time RTA for live sound applications, while contractors will appreciate its control inputs for wall-panel logic and volume control.

9 Feedback Elimination 9 2.7 Seconds of Alignment and Zone Delay 9 RS-232 PC GUI control 9 Classic dbx Compression and Limiting 9 Graphic and Parametric EQ 9 Auto-EQ Function 9 Full Bandpass, Crossover, and Routing Configurations 9 Auto Gain Control 9 Pink Noise Generator and full-time RTA 9 Setup Wizard with JBL speaker and Crown Power Amplifier Tunings 9 Security Lockout 9 Wall Panel Control Inputs 9 Optional RTA-M microphone

Section:

05

“My clients say ‘Thanks for a great sounding show with no feedback,’ I just say, ‘Thanks dbx.’ ”
- Emerson Jones -Via Facebook

Page 245

DriveRack 220i
®
SYSTEM PROCESSOR WITH ADVANCED FEEDBACK SUPPRESSION

Section:

05

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 246

DriveRack 220i
®

SYSTEM PROCESSOR WITH ADVANCED FEEDBACK SUPPRESSION
Designed from the ground up to provide state-of-the-art signal processing, the DriveRack 220i is the perfect tool for any fixed-install application. With a full complement of processing features and Mic/Line inputs the DriveRack 220i can provide both system and microphone processing. Featuring the new, patented Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS®) algorithm, equalization, dynamics processing, delay, matrix mixing, and bandpass filters, the DriveRack 220i will exceed your expectations. The DriveRack 220i is piloted from the intuitive DriveWare GUI that offers both Configuration and Control of the processing modules. Modules can be accessed, edited and saved as part of programs. Processing modules can be linked between the channels for true stereo processing. If independent processing is desired, parameters can be copied from one channel to the next to ensure that setup is quick and easy. Stored programs can be loaded from either the front panel or from wall mounted Zone Controllers. Zone Controllers can also be used for output muting or adjusting output volumes.

Use the DriveRack 260 and 220i with Zone Controllers for control at the flick of a switch!
(See page 12 for more details)

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS) Graphic and Parametric EQ Compressor PeakStopPlus™ Limiter Auto Gain Control Noise Gating De-Esser Ducker

9 9 9 9 9 9 9

Bandpass Filters 2x2 Matrix Mixer 1.3 Seconds of Delay RS-232 PC GUI control Mic/Line Inputs Wall Panel Control Security Lockout

DriveRack PA+
®

COMPLETE EQUALIZATION AND LOUDSPEAKER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

DriveRack PA+
®

COMPLETE EQUALIZATION AND LOUDSPEAKER CONTROL SYSTEM
The best just got even better! The DriveRack PA, far and away the world’s most popular loud speaker management system has now become the DriveRack PA+. Showcasing all the features that users around the world have come to expect, including easy set up, rock-solid reliability and unparalleled sound quality, the new version has gone to great lengths to earn its “plus.” With more settings, more control and enhanced circuitry, the sound you seek is right at your fingertips. Although the DriveRack PA+ is loaded with functions and features, it is easy to set up and use. The dbx exclusive Set Up Wizard walks you through system set up with easy to follow step-by-step instructions. Just pick your speakers and amps from the built-in list on the PA+ and then let the Auto Level™ Wizard fine tune the level settings of each speaker. You can then let the Auto EQ™ Wizard help you further optimize your sound. Finish up by using the AFS® Wizard, which automatically sets filters to eliminate any feedback during performances. Within minutes, your system will sound like it was tuned by a pro. No experience required! Get the most out of your PA with the DriveRack PA+, the worldwide standard in loudspeaker management. The optional RTA-M real time audio analyzing mic is the perfect accessory tool for the DriveRack PA and 260. Used in conjunction with the System Setup Wizard, the RTA-M is ideal for optimizing the sound quality of even the most difficult of acoustic environments.

9 Setup Wizard Steps Through Speaker and Amp Selection and Levels 9 Auto EQ™ Wizard with 28-Band RTA 9 Auto Level™ Wizard 9 AFS® Wizard 9 Stereo Feedback Elimination with 12 feedback notch filters 9 dbx 120A Sub-harmonic Synthesizer 9 Classic dbx Input Compression 9 JBL® Speaker and Crown® Power Amp Tunings included 9 USB Firmware and Speaker Tunings Field Updatable With Harman HiQnet® System Architect 9 Full time RTA function 9 Front-Panel Output Mutes 9 Pink Noise Generator (used with Auto EQ and Auto Level Wizards) 9 Linked Stereo DSP Processing for ease of use 9 24-Bit ADC/24-Bit DAC, >113 dB Dynamic Range 9 2-Channel XLR Input and 6-Channel XLR Output 9 2x3, 2x4, 2x5, 2x6 Crossover Configurations 9 Dual 28-band Graphic EQ- Linked or Dual Mono 9 Stereo Multi-band Parametric EQ 9 Stereo Output Limiters 9 Output Alignment Delay 9 Power on/off Mute Circuitry 9 Front-panel RTA-M XLR input with phantom power 9 25 User Programs/25 Factory Programs 9 Full Graphic LCD Display 9 Front Panel Input and Output Meters

Section:

05

Harman Pro Group | 2013

“Don’t take chances with the db police use a designated Driverack.”
- Dan Montecalvo -Via Facebook

Page 247

DriveRack PX
®
POWERED SPEAKER OPTIMIZER

Section:

05

Harman Pro Group | 2013

DriveRack PX
®

POWERED SPEAKER OPTIMIZER 9 Optimized for powered speakers 9 Support stereo speakers and subwoofer(s) 9 Supports JBL and other popular powered speakers 9 Easy-to-use wizards for setup, Auto-EQ™, and AFS® 9 dbx® M2 measurement mic included 9 Classic dbx compression with graceful PeakPlus™ limiters 9 Patented AFS Advanced Feedback Suppression 9 120A Subharmonic Synthesizer 9 Auto-EQ optimizes sound quality for any room 9 Patented dbx Type IV™ conversion system 9 2 channel XLR input 9 2 channel XLR output 9 2 Channel XLR subwoofer output
®

Powered speakers are a beautiful thing. Everything you need bundled into one simple, portable package. Just grab ‘em and go, right? Well, you may think your powered speaker system is complete, but you’re missing half the picture. DriveRack PX is the other half. In another dbx industry first, we’ve created a processor specifically tailored for powered speakers. Utilizing our highly-acclaimed DriveRack technology, the PX picks up where your powered speakers leave off. The DriveRack PX Powered Speaker Optimizer has everything you need to get the most out of your stereo powered speaker system. It even includes stereo or mono subwoofer support. With the included dbx M2 measurement mic, Auto-EQ corrects for audible deficiencies in the room environment. Our patented Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS) kills nasty feedback, allowing problem-free operation at higher sound levels, while our patented Subharmonic Synthesizer

extends bass response for enhanced bottom end. With all that, you also get classic dbx compression and the protection offered by our graceful PeakPlus™ limiting. Your ears, your audience, and your powered speakers will forever thank you. In spite of all that sophistication, rest assured we won’t overcomplicate the simplicity of your rig. Our exclusive Setup, Auto-EQ, and AFS Wizards, and out-of-the-box support for a host of JBL and other popular powered speakers, make setup a snap. Louder, clearer, better sound from your powered speakers has never been so easy.

“dbx DSP keeps you out of the red zone!”
-Thomas Lê
-Via Facebook

Page 248

ZonePRO
ZonePRO 1260/m | ZonePRO 1261/m
™ ™

TM

DIGITAL ZONE PROCESSORS

DIGITAL ZONE PROCESSORS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

ZonePRO 640/m | ZonePRO 641/m
™ ™

DIGITAL ZONE PROCESSORS

Each of the eight members of the ZonePRO family of Digital Zone Processors represents an inexpensive and quickly deployed solution for a diverse range of commercial audio applications. Designed with contractors in mind, the ZonePRO devices feature Euroblock connectors for easy termination of balanced signals and RCA connectors for straightforward connection of consumer equipment. A simple analog bus allows sources to be shared among multiple ZonePRO devices, facilitating scalability of outputs for larger applications. Input processing features gain control and EQ for all inputs and selectable DSP Inserts for microphone channels. Input Insert options include Automatic Gain Control (AGC), Notch Filter, Compressor, Gate, De-Esser and Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS™). The routing section of ZonePRO provides Primary Source Selection, Source Ducking for Paging and Priority Override. Output processing includes AutoWarmth®, a psychoacoustic function that maintains full frequency bandwidth even when the signal level has dropped. Each output also offers Crossover, EQ,

AGC, Compressor, Limiter and Delay for system optimization. All ZonePRO devices offer a built-in Real Time Clock that can provide programmable system changes at predetermined times. The recently-introduced ZonePRO devices, the 640m, 641m, 1260m and 1261m share the same total numbers of inputs and outputs as their equivalent siblings but feature additional mic/line inputs. This increase in the number of available microphone inputs further extends the suitability of the ZonePRO family into applications such as conference rooms and presentation spaces. Ambient Noise Compensation (ANC) is also introduced on the ZonePRO ‘m’ devices. This processing function allows the level of zone outputs to track the ambient noise level, monitored through a microphone and microphone input. This feature is particularly well-suited to applications such as retail environments where the volume of the audio system can be matched automatically to the number of shoppers and their associated noise level.

9 Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS™) 9 AutoWarmth® 9 Automatic Gain Control (AGC) 9 Notch Filter 9 Compressor 9 Gate 9 De-Esser 9 Limiter 9 Parametric EQ 9 Bandpass and Crossover Filters 9 Security Lockout 9 Wall Panel Control 9 RS-232 Control 9 Ethernet Control (see table)

Section:

05

ZonePRO devices are configured using ZonePRO Designer, a software application which contains a Configuration Wizard, which guides users through the step-by-step configuration process.

Page 249

DIGITAL ZONE PROCESSORS

ZonePRO
ZonePRO Product Matrix

TM

The ZonePRO™ family of Digital Zone Processors consists of eight devices with different functionality (see table below). Each device, with optional control from an extensive range of Zone Controllers, represents an inexpensive and quickly-deployed solution for a diverse range of commercial audio applications. The Configuration Wizard guides you through the step-by-step configuration process, ensuring that you go from requirements to solution in just a few mouse clicks.
Front Panel Control Mix Functionality

Section:

05

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 250

Inputs 1260m 1260 1261m 1261 640m 640 641m 641 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 6

Outputs 6 6 6 6 4 4 4 4

Mic Preamps 6 2 6 2

S/PDIF

Ethernet

ANC*

Q Q

Q Q Q Q

Q Q Q Q Q

Q Q Q Q Q

Q

Q

Q Q

4 2 4 2

Q

Q

Q

Q

*Ambient Noise Compensation

Zone Controllers
The Zone Controllers use analog DC voltages to provide logic control ranging from Volume and Mute control to Contact Closure Program selection and can be used with SC 64 and 32, the DriveRack® 4800, 4820, 260 and 220i, and ZonePRO™ units. Wired with readily available and affordable CAT5 cable with universally accepted RJ-45 connectors, the ZC Zone Controllers offer simple yet elegant solutions to the contractor.

ZC1

Programmable Volume Control

ZC2

Programmable Volume & Mute

ZC3

Programmable Selection

ZC4

Program Selection

ZCBOB

“home-run” or parallel wiring

ZC6

Programmable Volume Control

ZC7

Programmable Push-To- Programmable Volume Talk Page Assignment and Source Select

ZC8

ZC9

Source Selection

ZCFIRE

Fire Safety Interface

DIGITAL MATRIX PROCESSOR

SC 64

SC 64
D I G I TA L M ATR I X P R O C E S S O R Harman Pro Group | 2013
The SC 64 (System Core) is one of the first offerings in a new family from dbx® Professional Products. Wizard-driven configuration using HiQnet™ System Architect makes unprecedented DSP power, incredible routing flexibility and a rich palette of processing tools accessible with the minimum of training. The SC 64 represents the professional foundation on which to build even the most demanding integrated system. The SC 64 has a total analog I/O count of 64, configurable in banks of eight. The chassis supports up to eight analog input and/or analog output cards facilitating nine different fully loaded configurations. Analog input cards accommodate a wide range of sources with mic/line switching and phantom power per input. Two high speed option slots provide facility for adding forthcoming high bandwidth audio transport I/O cards. With dedicated DSP for common processing functions and insert positions for specialized processing, the SC 64 offers many processing functions including Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS™), Ambient Noise Compensation (ANC), priority ducking, parametric equalization (PEQ), delay and dynamics. The SC 64 has a diverse range of control options including HiQnet™ System Architect custom control panels, Ethernet, serial, contact closure, the popular ZC wall controllers and even automatically scheduled events. With so many methods of control, an SC system can truly be tailored to suit the needs and technical expertise of the intended user.

HiQnet is a communications protocol or language with which all device-types within the full audio signal path can communicate. Co-developed and shared by elite engineers from all the brands within the Harman Pro group, HiQnet merges the best features of all previous brand-independent communications protocols and thereby benefits from years of combined experience and is simultaneously optimized for all components of the full professional audio system.

Section:

05

9 9 9 9 9 9

“The dbx SC64 is a total solution for matrix routing of multiple audio signals in many of our installations. The HiQ Net interface is second to none. Flawless.”
-James Welsh, Project Manager, Welsh Sound -Via Facebook

9 9 9 9 9 9

64 channels of analog I/O configurable in banks of 8 Mic / Line and Phantom Power per channel on Analog Input Cards Ethernet / Serial Control GPIO Rich Palette of Processing Tools Selectable DSP inserts on all inputs and outputs including Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS™), Automatic Gain Compensation (AGC), Compression, De-Essing and Notch Parametric Equalization Complete routing flexibility Comprehensive configuration, control and monitoring from HiQnet System Architect Wizard configuration Events Scheduler Optional Media Engine for media playback and delayed page Optional ZC wall panel control

Page 251

SC 32

DIGITAL MATRIX PROCESSOR

SC 32
D I G ITA L M AT R IX P R O C E S S O R
The SC 32 (System Core) is one of the firstofferings in a new family from dbx® Professional Products. Wizarddriven configuration using HiQnet™ System Architect makes unprecedented DSP power, incredible routing flexibility and a rich palette of processing tools accessible with the minimum of training. The SC 32 represents the professional foundation on which to build even the most demanding integrated system. The SC 32 has a total analog I/O count of 32, configurable in banks of eight. The chassis supports up to four analog input and/or analog output cards facilitating five different fully loaded configurations. Analog input cards accommodate a wide

range of sources with mic/line switching and phantom power per input. One high-speed option slot provides facility for adding forthcoming high-bandwidth audio transport I/O cards. All of these features are housed in a sleek 2U rack chassis. With dedicated DSP for common processing functions and insert positions for specialized processing, the SC 32 offers many processing functions including Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS™), Ambient Noise Compensation (ANC), priority ducking, parametric equalization (PEQ), delay and dynamics. The SC 32 has a diverse range of control options including HiQnet System Architect custom control panels, Ethernet, serial, contact closure, the popular Zone Controller wall controllers and even automatically scheduled events. With so many methods of control, an SC system can truly be tailored to suit the needs and technical expertise of even the scrutinizing contractor.

Section:

05

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 252

9 32 channels of analog I/O configurable in banks of 8 9 Mic / Line and Phantom Power per channel on Analog Input Cards 9 Ethernet / Serial Control 9 GPIO 9 Rich Palette of Processing Tools

9 Selectable DSP inserts on all inputs and outputs including Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS), Automatic Gain Compensation (AGC), Compression, De-Essing and Notch Parametric Equalization 9 Complete routing flexibility

9 Comprehensive configuration, control and monitoring from HiQnet System Architect 9 Wizard configuration 9 Events Scheduler 9 Optional Media Engine for media playback and delayed page 9 Optional ZC wall panel controllers

Zone Controllers
The Zone Controllers offer extended utility to the SC, DriveRack and
®

ZonePro families. The nine Zone Controllers use analog DC voltage to provide logic control ranging from zone source selection, volume and muting, to program or scene selection and fire safety interface. Wired with readily available and affordable CAT5 cable with universally accepted RJ-45 connectors at distances up to 1000 ft, the ZC Zone Controllers offer simple yet elegant solutions to the contractor. For more information on Zone Controllers, see page 12.

160SL / 162SL

COMPRESSOR / LIMITER

160SL
COMPRESSOR/LIMITER
The 160SL combines the best features of all the great dbx® compressors, past and present, and gives you more versatile performance than ever before. In addition to having the auto attack and release as well as the hard knee threshold characteristics of the classic dbx 160, the 160SL now offers AutoVelocity manual mode, in addition to our classic OverEasy® mode. dbx AutoVelocity technology allows you to find the exact attack and release effect you are looking for. Still on board is the venerable dbx Auto mode. Now you can set your maximum preferred settings in manual mode, and let the 160SL do the rest. The dbx 160SL features dual proprietary V8 VCA modules.

This state-of-the-art implementation of dbx’s original Blackmer decilinear VCA boasts an unheard-of 127dB dynamic range and ultra-low distortion. Encased in a specially designed aluminum-zinc housing for shielding and thermal characteristics, the V8 maintains its superior performance even in the harshest environments. The 160SL offers a plethora of features which include: variable attack and release controls, as well as dbx’s latest limiting algorithm PeakStopPlus™, precision 0.1% and 1% resistors, gold-palladium-nickel contacts, Jensen® transformers, gold plated Neutrik® XLRs, and rare earth magnet signal switching relays with gold contacts, housed in a hermetically-sealed nitrogen environment and mounted on military-grade glass epoxy circuit boards. The end result is the most technologically advanced compressor in the world.

Section:

05

Harman Pro Group | 2013

162SL
COMPRESSOR/LIMITER
The 162SL combines the best features of all the great dbx compressors, past and present, and gives you more versatile performance than ever before. In addition to having the auto attack and release, and the hard knee threshold characteristics of the classic dbx 160, the 162SL offers AutoVelocity manual

algorithm PeakStopPlus™, are included in the 162SL. Its state-ofthe-art implementation of dbx’s original Blackmer decilinear VCA boasts an unheard of dynamic range and ultra-low distortion seen only previously in the Blue 160SL. With sonic clarity designed for the studio, the 162SL maintains its superior performance in harsh environment. Like its big brother, the 162SL takes full advantage of the best parts available and dbx’s advanced manufacturing, including Jensen® transformers on each output standard. Following in the footsteps of the Blue Series® 160SL with the Purple Series 162SL, dbx continues to create to the most technologically advanced compressors in the world.

mode, along with our classic dbx OverEasy® mode, made standard by the legendary dbx 165A. All of the 160SL’s features, including variable attack and release controls and dbx’s latest limiting

Page 253

Dynamics
160A
COMPRESSOR/LIMITER Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

from smooth, subtle compression to “brick wall” peak limiting. Its electronically balanced output stage is an outstanding driver for long cable runs (an output transformer is optional). With its unique “INFINITY +” inverse-compression mode, the 160A actually decreases the audio output level below unity gain when the input exceeds threshold. You can even stereo-couple two 160A’s to process a stereo mix without shifting the left/ right image. The dbx 160A is truly the standard for dynamics processing.

The 160A offers such time-tested features as switchable OverEasy® and hard knee compression, extremely wide threshold ranges, and controls for ratio and output gain. The 160A also includes true RMS level detection, providing the most transparent dynamics processing available–

05

9 OverEasy® or classic hard knee compression with dbx’s® ultra-musical program dependent attack and release times 9 Compression ratio variable from 1:1 through infinity :1 to negative compression

9 Precision dual RMS LED display monitors input or output and gain reduction over a wide range and calibrates for different operating levels 9 Over 60dB of gain reduction available 9 Exclusive Infinity+ compression allows negative compression

9 Independent balanced and unbalanced outputs can drive 600 loads to +24dBm simultaneously. New floating balanced output stage drives any load 9 Optional output transformer capable 9 Strappable with another 160A for true RMS stereo summing operation

166xs
COMPRESSOR/LIMITER/GATE
With auto attack and release controls and separate precision LED displays for gain reduction, compression threshold, and gate threshold, the 166xs allows for quick and accurate setup. Using our True RMS Power Summing™ feature, the Stereo Couple mode provides you with a rock solid stereo image The 166xs also makes advanced applications a breeze with full sidechain functionality, the ability to use either hard knee or OverEasy® compression algorithms, and the venerable PeakStop® limiter. The dbx® 166xs is the industry standard compressor/gate at a cost within everyone’s reach.

9 Goof proof operation to smooth uneven levels, add sustain to guitars,, fatten drums or tighten up mixes 9 New gate timing algorithms ensure the smoothest release characteristics 9 Program-adaptive expander/gates 9 Great sounding dynamics control for any type of program material 9 Separate precision LED displays for gain reduction, compression threshold and gate threshold allow quick, accurate setup

9 Stereo or dual-mode operation 9 Balanced inputs and outputs on 1/4” TRS and XLR 9 Side Chain insert 9 Classic dbx “Auto” mode 9 dbx PeakStop® Limiter
®

Page 254

Dynamics
1066
compress entire mixes while preventing low frequencies from punching holes in the overall mix. The 1066’s gate section enables you to clean up unwanted frequencies or mic bleed using its frequency-dependent gain control and the Side Chain External button. With the Side Chain Monitor button and an equalizer, you can select which frequencies will trigger the gate. For overall speaker protection, our innovative PeakStopPlus™ technology prevents unwanted transients from blowing your drivers and minimizes the distortion common to many other “hard” limiters.

COMPRESSOR/LIMITER/GATE
Whether you’re looking for “heavy” compression or subtle gain leveling, the 1066 stereo compressor/limiter/gate with selectable hard knee or OverEasy® compression is ideal. The 1066’s compressor section allows you to set attack and release times manually or automatically using our convenient Auto Mode. In addition, our famous Contour switch allows you to smoothly

Harman Pro Group | 2013

9 Selectable auto (classic dbx®) or manual (variable Attack and Release) compression 9 Contour switch removes unwanted low frequency information from detector circuit 9 Selectable Overeasy® or Hard Knee compression modes

9 PeakStopPlus™ limiting for setting maximum allowable level with minimal distortion 9 SC Ext and SC Mon for setting up and monitoring external devices for gating function 9 True differentially balanced gold-plated XLR and 1/4” inputs and outputs

9 True RMS level detection 9 Precision metering of input level, output level, and gain reduction 9 True stereo or dual mono operation 9 Switchable +4dBu or -10dBV operation per channel

Section:

05

1046

QUAD COMPRESSOR/LIMITER
Each of the 1046’s four channels allows you to individually select between our classic OverEasy® or hard knee compression, as well as connect each channel for separate purposes. Additionally, our PeakStopPlus™ circuitry is the most comprehensive limiting technology available. For easy interfacing with other devices, each of the 1046’s channels also utilizes balanced, gold-plated XLR and ¼" inputs and outputs and switchable +4dBu or -10dBV operating levels. The 1046 incorporates our standard-setting designs, state-of-the-art manufacturing techniques, and of course, our highly sought-after sound quality.

9 Four independent channels of operation, stereo linkable in two pairs 9 PeakStopPlus™ limiting control for setting maximum allowable level regardless of compressor settings 9 Independent Threshold and Release controls 9 Switchable OverEasy® or Hard Knee compression 9 Classic dbx® compression 9 Differentially balanced gold-plated XLR and 1/4” inputs and outputs 9 True RMS level detection 9 Precision metering of input level, output level, and gain reduction 9 Dual True stereo or quad mono operation 9 Switchable +4dBu or -10dBV operation per channel

Page 255

Dynamics
1074
QUAD GATE Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

The 1074 Quad Gate is the perfect companion to the 1066 and 1046. The 1074 offers 4 channels of gating with threshold, depth and release controls on each channel. The 1074, like the rest of the products in dbx’s® 10 Series, is based on the legendary dbx V2 VCA and offers XLR inputs and outputs, and ¼" side-chain input. In addition to an external key input per channel, the 1074 also has an internal filter that can be independently activated and controlled on a channel per channel basis. This filter allows the 1074 to not only clean up tracks but gives you frequency selective control on each gate, to open exactly when you want it to.

9 Four independent channels of gating 9 Independent key filtering 9 Independent Threshold and Release controls 9 Differentially balanced gold-plated XLR and 1/4” inputs and outputs 9 True RMS level detection 9 Stereo Coupling mode 9 Switchable +4dBu or -10dBv operation per channel

05

266xs
COMPRESSOR/GATE

The 266xs delivers everything from mellow “leveling” to aggressive peak limiting.
9 Goof proof operation to smooth uneven levels, add sustain to guitars, fatten drums or tighten up mixes 9 New gate timing algorithms ensure the smoothest release characteristics 9 Program-adaptive expander/gates 9 Great sounding dynamics control for any type of program material 9 Separate precision LED displays for gain reduction, compression threshold and gate threshold allow quick, accurate setup 9 Stereo or dual-mode operation 9 Balanced inputs and outputs on 1/4” TRS and XLR 9 Side Chain insert 9 Classic dbx “Auto” mode
®

The 266xs puts pleasing compression and smooth gating within reach of everyone. The classic dbx® compression delivers everything from mellow “leveling,” to aggressive peak limiting. In addition, the 266xs’s AutoDynamic™ circuitry continuously adjusts attack and release settings in real time in order to optimally match program material. The advanced gating circuitry in the 266xs uses a program-dependent timing algorithm to produce ultra-smooth release characteristics—even with complex signals. Thanks to the dynamic range of the dbx® VCA, the 266xs can provide reliable gating for any circumstance. The 266xs also includes separate LED ladders measuring gain reduction, compression threshold, and gate threshold, making the 266xs intuitive and easy to use.

Page 256

Mic Preamps
386
DUAL CHANNEL TUBE MIC PREAMP
The Silver Series 386 dual channel tube mic preamp puts the best of both worlds into one affordable package by combining the warmth of the irreplaceable vacuum tube with the proprietary dbx® Type IV™ conversion system. The 386 boasts many of the same features as other products in the Silver Series, such as +48V phantom power, phase invert switch, and low-cut filtering. In addition, the 386 also offers up to 96kHz, 24-Bit digital output capabilities in both AES/EBU, and S/PDIF formats as standard features.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

9 Two channel tube microphone preamplifier 9 Selectable 96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, or 44.1kHz sampling rate 9 24, 20, and 16-bit wordlengths 9 Selectable dither and noise shaping 9 AES/EBU and S/PDIF digital outputs

9 Word clock sync input and output 9 Separate analog and digital output control 9 Type IV™ conversion system 9 60dB of gain and +/- 15dB of output gain

9 9 9 9 9 9

Selectable mic/line switch 48 volt phantom power 20dB pad 75Hz low cut filter Phase reverse Segment LED analog/digital

Section:

05

376
TUBE PREAMP CHANNEL STRIP WITH DIGITAL OUT
The 376 has taken the essential tools needed for recording and put them all on a single channel strip. The mic/line section on the 376 provides a 12AU7 vacuum tube and offers +48V phantom power, a phase invert switch, a high impedance ¼" instrument input, 20dB pad, and low-cut filtering. The processing section

offers a 3-Band parametric EQ, a classic dbx Compressor, and DeEsser. The 376 also offers digital output capabilities in both AES/ EBU, and S/PDIF formats with selectable sampling rates including 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz with selectable dithering and noise shaping as standard features. The LED meters provide a clear and concise visual of the signal processing at a glance. We think you’ll agree that the 376 lives up to the uncompromising standards of dbx Professional Products.

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

Tube microphone pre-amp 200V tube plate voltage Selectable mic/line switch +48 Volt phantom power 3-Band Parametric EQ Compressor De-Esser Front panel instrument input Drive meter LEDs Threshold and De-Esser meters

9 8 segment analog or digital meter 9 Type IV™ conversion system 9 Selectable sampling rate (96, 88.2, 48, 44.1kHz) 9 24, 20 and 16 bit wordlengths 9 AES/EBU and S/PDIF digital outputs 9 Selectable dither and noise-shaping algorithms 9 Word clock sync input and output

Digital outputs on the 386 and 376 are standard features

Page 257

2 Series
GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS
The dbx® 2 Series equalizers were designed to make versatile, pro-quality sound available to users of all levels, while offering the simplicity of straightforward controls. The 2 Series represents a major step forward in the performance of entry-level graphic equalizers. From its amazing 10Hz to 50kHz frequency response, to its 108dB dynamic range, the 2 Series offers great specifications with, a downto-earth price point. Sure to find a home in the studio, on tour and with installed sound venues, the 2 Series is destined to take its rightful place in the lineage of great dbx signal processors that are the professional’s choice in signal processing. With such affordable quality, there’s no longer any excuse for compromising your sound with a lesser EQ than one from dbx.

The 2 Series represents a major step forward in the performance of entry-level equalizers.

Section:

05
215s DUAL 15-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 258

131s SINGLE 31-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER

231s DUAL 31-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER

9 9 9 9

Constant Q frequency bands Switchable boost/cut ranges of ±6 or ±12 dB 12dB per octave 40Hz low-cut filter Front panel bypass switch

9 ±12 dB input gain range 9 4-segment LED ladders for monitoring output levels 9 XLR and TRS Inpts and Outputs 9 Internal Toroidal Transformer

9 Frequency Repsonse of <10Hz to >50kHz 9 Dynamic range of greater than 108dB

12 Series
GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS
The dbx® 12 Series Equalizers were designed to make versatile, pro-quality sound available to users of all levels, while offering the simplicity of straightforward controls and providing years of maintenance-free operation in any application. The magneticallyisolated transformer, electronically balanced inputs and servo balanced outputs, RF-filtered inputs and outputs, and power-off hard-wire relay bypass with 2 second power up delay were steps our engineers took to ensure compatibility for all installations. Only the best components were utilized, yielding a 10Hz to 50kHz frequency response, greater than 90dB SNR (ref +4dBu), less than 0.005% THD +Noise (1kHz at +4dBu), and interchannel crosstalk of less than -80dB from 20Hz to 20kHz. All this attention to detail is contained in a sturdy steel/aluminum chassis.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

1215 DUAL 15-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER

Section:

05
1231 DUAL 31-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER

9 9 9 9

Switchable boost/cut ranges of ±6 or ±15 dB Electronically balanced/unbalanced inputs Servo balanced/unbalanced outputs RF filtered inputs and outputs

9 9 9 9

XLR, Barrier Strip, and 1/4” TRS connectors -12dB/+12dB input gain range 18dB/octave 40Hz Bessel low-cut filter Chassis/signal ground lift capability

9 Internal power supply transformer 9 Power-off hardwire relay bypass with 2-second power-up delay

Page 259

20 Series
GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS

2215 DUAL 15-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

05

2231 DUAL 31-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER

2031 SINGLE 31-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER
Since their introduction, the 20 Series equalizers have become crucial links in the sound systems of countless professionals all over the world. From a value perspective, the 20 Series EQs offer an unequalled feature set. The crowning feature of each model in the 20 Series is our patented Type III™ Noise Reduction, which enables you to increase signal-to-noise ratios by up to 20dB. With Type III, the 20 Series can significantly improve the noise specs for almost any sound system. Add our patented PeakPlus™ limiter topology; XLR, ¼", and Barrier strip inputs and outputs; durable 45mm nylon sliders; a +12dB input gain range; and informative, four-step LED ladders to the mix and you’ve got three powerful tools that will let you use your system with confidence.

The 20 Series can significantly improve the noise specs for almost any sound system.

9 Revolutionary instant encode/decode Type III Noise Reduction in-circuit at the push of a button. Increases S/N ratio by up to 20dB 9 Patented PeakPlus Limiter threshold range from 0dBu to +24dBu (off) can transparently tame the wildest hits or the subtlest nuances of any signal

9 An extremely high quality EQ, patented Type III Noise Reduction, and the elegant new PeakPlus Limiter all in one great sounding box 9 Four segment LED bar graphs for BOTH Gain Reduction AND Output Level offers the most comprehensive visual feedback available

9 Status LEDs offer visual feedback for all settings on the front panel

“dbx 2231, D best for foldback equalizer.”
- Drix Calimlim -Via Facebook

Page 260

iEQ
DIGITAL GRAPHIC EQALIZERS W / AFS ®
With an EQ heritage that has produced countless industry standard patents and dates back more than 30 years, the dbx® iEQs™ easily live up to the dbx legacy of uncompromising sonic integrity. In addition to unsurpassed Equalization specs, the iEQ also offers the built-in necessities which include patented AFS® Advanced Feedback Suppression (which removes unwanted feedback at the push of a button), Type V™ Noise Reduction and PeakStopPlus™ limiting. The iEQ-Series represents a major step forward in the performance of graphic equalizers. From its amazing 10Hz to 22kHz frequency response, to its 110dB dynamic range the iEQs offer out of this world specifications with a down to earth price point. Sure to find a home in the studio, on tour and with installed sound venues, the iEQs are destined to take their rightful place in the lineage of great dbx signal processors that are the professionals’ choice.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

iEQ-15 DUAL 15-BAND DIGITAL GRAPHIC EQ/LIMITER

Section:

05
iEQ-31 DUAL 31-BAND DIGITAL GRAPHIC EQ/LIMITER

9 Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS) 9 Type V Noise Reduction 9 PeakStopPlus Limiting 9 1/3-octave Constant Q frequency bands 9 Switchable boost/cut ranges of ±6 or ±15dB

9 18 dB per octave 40Hz low-cut filter 9 ±12dB input gain range 9 XLR, TRS and Euroblock Inputs and Outputs 9 Internal Toroidal Transformer 9 Frequency Response of 10Hz to 22kHz

9 Dynamic range of greater than 113dB 9 User Power Up Features 9 Relay Bypass for Power Failure System Protection

Page 261

Personal Monitor Solutions
TR1616
PERFORMANCE I/O
The TR1616 is a 16 in/16 out analog to BLU link and BLU link to analog audio interface. With 16 precision dbx mic preamps and combo style input jacks, the TR1616 accepts line level or mic level signals. Configurable in 16 channel blocks, the modular design of the TR1616 allows you to create the digital snake or BLU link network that’s right for you. As your needs change, additional TR1616s can easily be added to the network, providing expansion of up to 256 channels at 48 kHz (or 128 channels at 96 kHz). And with its plug and play functionality, getting into an audio over Ethernet system no longer requires long hours of training and programming.

Section:

05

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 262

9 16 Channel Mixer With Level, Pan, Mute, Solo, & Reverb Send Control 9 16 Preset Locations For Mixer & Effect Parameter Recall 9 Lexicon Courtesy Reverb 9 dbx PeakStopPlus™ Limiting 9 BLU link Compatibility 9 XLR & 1/4” Stereo Or Mono Outputs 9 1/8” & 1/4” Headphone Outputs 9 Setup Wizard 9 Supports 48 kHz & 96 kHz Sampling Rates 9 Channel Linking & Grouping Capabilities 9 Supports Up To 60 PMC16s On A Single Network
©

PMC16
PERSONAL MONITOR CONTROLLER
Whether using headphones, in-ear monitors, powered monitors, or traditional wedge monitors, the PMC16 allows performing musicians to control their own personalized stage monitor mix with ease. Using BLU link, the PMC16 is capable of receiving up to 16 channels of high-end digital audio via CAT5e cable. The

PMC16 comprises a 16 channel mixer section with full control of levels, panning, effect send levels, muting, and soloing. Built-in Lexicon© courtesy reverb rounds out the all-star processing power of the PMC16. With a Setup Wizard for ease of configuration, full 16 channel mixer level metering, channel grouping, 16 preset locations for future recall of mixes, and an intuitive yet powerful user interface, PMC16 gives you the power to dial in YOUR mix exactly as YOU want it, in real time.

Crossovers
Crossovers may do nothing more than direct frequencies, but the thought that went into the 223s and 234s is what really elevates the dbx® crossovers above the rest. The 223s and 234s both feature differentially balanced TRS ¼" inputs and outputs. To prevent accidental changes of critical settings during performance (which could be disastrous), several of the 223s and 234s’s controls are located on their rear panels. On the 223s, the first of these selects between stereo two-way or mono three-way operation, while on the 234s it selects between stereo two-way, stereo three-way, or mono four-way operation (the selected mode is always visible via two front panel LEDs). Also located on the back panels are switches that allow you to individually select crossover frequency ranges for both channels (again, the front panels feature LEDs to indicate when the back panel x10 switch is activated). The rear panels also allow you to mono-sum the low frequency outs. Both crossovers feature Linkwitz-Riley 24dB/octave filters–the professional standard. Each of the units’ channels has a +12dB input gain control and a recessed 40 Hz low-cut (high-pass) filter for removing low frequency rumble. Both the low and high outputs on each channel have phase reverse switches (reconfigurable to operate as mute switches) and gain controls ranging from ∞ to +6 dB, allowing level matching and muting of individual outputs. The 223s and 234s give you great performance, the features you expect from professional crossovers, and the reassurance that you’re buying from the company that has been making the world’s finest audio gear for over 30 years. 223xs and 234xs XLR versions

Harman Pro Group | 2013

To provide you with even more flexibility, the 223s and 234s are also available in the form of the 223xs and 234xs which offer balanced XLR input and output connectors.

Section:

223s/223xs STEREO 2-WAY, MONO 3-WAY CROSSOVER

05

9 1/4” TRS (223s) / XLR (223xs) differentially balanced inputs and outputs 9 Mode switch for stereo 2-way or mono 3-way operation 9 Stereo/Mono status LEDs indicate the selected mode

9 9 9 9 9 9

Low frequency summed (subwoofer) output x10 range switch on both channels 40Hz low-cut (high-pass) filter both channels Phase reverse switch on all outputs Individual level controls on all outputs 24dB per octave Linkwitz-Riley filters

(the professional standard) 9 dbx 2 year parts and labor as standard 9 CSA NRTL/C approved 9 CE compliant
®

234s/234xs STEREO 2/3-WAY, MONO 4-WAY CROSSOVER

9 1/4” TRS (234s) / XLR (234xs) differentially balanced inputs and outputs 9 Mode switches for mono 4-way or stereo 2-way/3-way operation 9 Low frequency summed (subwoofer) output

9 9 9 9 9

x10 range switch on both channels 40Hz low-cut (high-pass) filter both channels Phase reverse switch on all outputs Individual level controls on all band outputs 24dB per octave Linkwitz-Riley filters (the professional standard)

9 Stereo/Mono status LEDs indicate the selected mode 9 dbx 2 year parts and labor as standard 9 CSA NRTL/C approved 9 CE compliant
®

Page 263

Direct Boxes
dB10 PASSIVE & dB12 ACTIVE

Section:

05

Harman Pro Group | 2013

9 Premium performance 9 Rugged attractive design 9 Stackable chassis w/durable rubber base 9 Gold-plated Neutrik® XLR connector 9 Recessed chrome toggle switches 9 Transformer isolated 9 Premium shielded custom dbx transformer 9 Hi-Z 1/4” input jack 9 Parallel 1/4” thru jack 9 Balanced XLR Lo-Z output 9 Handles instrument/line/ speaker levels 9 Flat/high-cut filter switch 9 Output polarity invert switch 9 Ground lift switch 9 5 year U.S. warranty!

At dbx, when we do something, we do it right. So when we decided to create our new direct injection boxes, we didn’t settle for the same old tired approach to direct box design. With our dbx name on the line, how could we? One look at our new dB10 Passive and dB12 Active direct boxes will tell you that these are clearly different. With their bullet-proof construction, and extraordinary audio performance to rival their looks, finally there’s a direct box worthy of the dbx name.

Utilizing custom dbx mu-metal-shielded audio transformers, high-quality Neutrik® connectors, and low-noise circuitry preserves the sonic integrity and true characteristics of the signal source. Both boxes include a pad switch that accomodates instrument, line and even speaker level signals. Take even more control of your sound by utilizing the polarity invert switch to set the phase relationship between the direct and mic’d sound.

SAMPLE SETUP

4 2 0 4 2 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5

6 8 2

4

6 8 2

4

6 8 2

4

6 8 2

4

6 8 2

4

6 8 2

4

6 8 2

4

6 8

Aux 1 10
6 8 2

0 4

Aux 1 10
6 8 2

0 4

Aux 1 10
6 8 2

0 4

Aux 1 10
6 8 2

0 4

Aux 1 10
6 8 2

0 4

Aux 1 10
6 8 2

0 4

Aux 1 10
6 8 2

0 4

Aux 1 10
6 8

Aux 2 10
0 +1 +2

0 -1 -2 +3 -3

Aux 2 10
0 +1 +2

0 -1 -2 +3 -3

Aux 2 10
0 +1 +2

0 -1 -2 +3 -3

Aux 2 10
0 +1 +2

0 -1 -2 +3 -3

Aux 2 10
0 +1 +2

0 -1 -2 +3 -3

Aux 2 10
0 +1 +2

0 -1 -2 +3 -3

Aux 2 10
0 +1 +2

0 -1 -2 +3 -3

Aux 2 10
0 +1 +2 +3 +4

+4 -4

+4 -4 -5

+4 -4 -5

+4 -4 -5

+4 -4 -5

+4 -4 -5

+4 -4 -5

Pan

+5

Pan

+5

Pan

+5

Pan

+5

Pan

+5

Pan

+5

Pan

+5

-5

Pan

+5

Mute L/R

Mute L/R

Mute L/R

Mute L/R

Mute L/R

Mute L/R

Mute L/R

Mute L/R

+10 +5 0 -5 -10

+10 +5 0 -5 -10

+10 +5 0 -5 -10

+10 +5 0 -5 -10

+10 +5 0 -5 -10

+10 +5 0 -5 -10

+10 +5 0 -5 -10

+10 +5 0 -5 -10

-20 -30 -

-20 -30 -

-20 -30 -

-20 -30 -

-20 -30 -

-20 -30 -

-20 -30 -

-20 -30 -

Guitar Output on Rear Panel
INPUT PAD THRU
0dB 20dB 40dB

1

2

3

4

5

6

Mixer

“When you wanna do it right...dbx it.”
- Bart Leggiero -Via Facebook

Mic Amplifier

Page 264

Other Products
AFS 224
®

the neighborhood of the status quo. So, to raise the bar once again, they developed a dedicated feedback suppression processor that offers up to 24 filters per channel with filter Qs as narrow 1/80 of an octave. With such narrow filter Qs, the AFS 224 is able to remove unwanted feedback, while preserving the sonic integrity with precision and accuracy. To achieve these staggering numbers, dbx utilized their patented AFS technology that had previously only been available in the upper echelon of dbx products and made it available in this stand-alone processor. In addition to the plethora of feedback suppression filters available, the AFS 224 also offers selectable modes, live filter lift, and multiple types of filtration.

ADVANCED FEEDBACK SUPPRESSION PROCESSOR
The AFS 224 Advanced Feedback Suppression processor has been designed to provide stateof-the-art feedback elimination processing, while maintaining a simple and intuitive control interface. The AFS 224 utilizes a no-nonsense user interface providing all the processing and control necessary for both installation and live use while the AFS is an absolute must for any live sound application. Ten and twelve filter-per-channel feedback elimination processors have become the de facto standard, but the engineering staff at dbx® have never been content residing in

9 dbx’s Patented (Advanced Feedback Suppression) AFS technology 9 24 Programmable Filters per Channel 9 Stereo or Dual Independent Channel Processing 9 Live and Fixed Filter Modes 9 Selectable Filter Lift Times 9 Application-specific filter types include Speech and Music Low, Med and High 9 Input channel Metering 9 24 LED per Channel Filter Metering 9 XLR and 1/4” TRS Inputs and Outputs

Section:

05

Harman Pro Group | 2013

120A
SUBHARMONIC SYNTHESIZER
Unlike other attempts at bass synthesis, the 120A’s patented subharmonic synthesis process produces smooth, musical low frequencies that don’t interfere with mid- or high-band information–even at maximum levels. The result is unmatched low-end punch at levels that won’t destroy your system. In fact, the 120A is optimized to allow audio professionals to get the most out of their highperformance, low frequency speaker systems, and includes both a subwoofer output (with its own level control) and main outputs that can be configured as either full-range (including synthesis) or high frequency-only.

9 Individual control for two ranges of subharmonic frequencies 9 Separate Low Frequency Boost Circuit 9 Separate Subwoofer Output 9 1/4” Balanced inputs and outputs 9 RCA Input Connectors 9 Front panel LEDs that show crossover status and synthesis activity 9 Patented circuitry ensures that mid and high frequencies are not affected

9 Built-in crossover with choice of 80Hz or 120Hz crossover point 9 Enhance bass audio material for use in a variety of professional applications such as: - Nightclub and dance mixing - DJ Mixing - Theater and Film Sound - Music Recording - Live Music Performance - Broadcasting

“dbx - the only choice when every db counts!”
- Seth Zirin -Via Facebook

Page 265

Other Products

Section:

05

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 266

286s
MIC PREAMP PROCESSOR
The dbx® 286s’s Mic Preamp and Five processors can be used independently or in any combination. Why mic up vocals and instruments through a noisy, blurry mixer? The dbx 286s’s sonically pristine Mic Preamp has all the features you need, including wide-ranging input gain control, switchable 48V phantom power and an 80Hz high-pass filter. Use the 286s’s newly designed and patented OverEasy® Compressor to transparently smooth out uneven acoustic tracks or deliver that classic “in your face” rock vocal. Take out vocal sibilance and high frequency distortion in cymbals with the 286s’s frequency tunable De-Esser. Fine-tune the Enhancer’s HF Detail control to add sparkle and crispness to tracks. LF Detail control adds fullness and depth to vocals and bass instruments while simultaneously cleaning up muddy low midrange frequencies.

And, the Expander/Gate’s separate threshold and ratio controls allow you to subtly reduce headphone leakage or radically gate noisy guitar amps. The dbx 286s’s full complement of metering and status LEDs visually guide you to achieving the right sound. The floating balanced XLR mic input accepts balanced or unbalanced inputs. An additional 1/4” TRS phone jack can accept balanced/ unbalanced line signals to process live electronic instruments or pre-recorded tracks at mixdown. An insert jack between the 286s’s Mic Preamp and signal processing sections can be used to “loop out” to external processors (such as EQ) or to mix the Mic Preamp’s signal out to an external destination. The cost and hassle of patching together multiple processors for use on one track can be frustrating. The dbx 286s gives you all the tools you’ll need in one box, with the shortest signal path to help keep your music sounding clean.

PB-48
PATCH BAY
The PB-48 patchbay features 48 front panel and 48 rear panel patch points, with 24 user- adjustable board assemblies that can be configured–without soldering or wire cutting–for

half-normalled or de-normalled operation. Rugged and noisefree, the PB-48 is designed to serve all your patchbay needs. Whether you want clear and easy access to your mixer and studio gear, reduced wear on your equipment’s jacks, or the ability to quickly re-route devices within your setup, the PB48’s balanced TRS and unbalanced TS ¼" plugs pave the way.

PRODUCT SPECS

PRODUCT SPECS

Mic Preamps & Channel Strips
286A

100kΩ

386

376

• • • • • • • • • • • • 48V 48V 48V • • • -120 -120 -120 • •
20k-40kΩ

• •
20k-40kΩ

• • • •
+21dBu

• • • •
+18dBu


+21dBu

• • • • >21 • TS • • • •

• • >18 • • • • • •

• • • >21 • • •
1.75"x 19"x 5.75"

• • • • • • • • • • • • 07dB 107dB 1
1.75"x 19"x 7.75"

• • • • •
1.75"x 19"x 7.75"

MICROPHONE INPUT Connector: Female XLR Pin 2 Hot Type: Electronically balanced/unbalanced Maximum Input Level: -10dBu or +10 dBu with 20dB pad engaged Maximum Input Level: -9 dBu or +11 dBu with 20 dB pad engaged Gain Adjustment Range: +10dB to +60dB Gain Adjustment Range: +30dB to +60dB Phantom Power Pad: 20dB Equivalent Input Noise: Typically -(dBu) typical with a 150Ω source load "A-weighted" LINE INPUT Connector: TRS ¼" Jack Type: Electronically Balanced/unbalanced Impedance: bal/unbalanced Maximum Input Level: 0 dBu or +20dBu with 20dB pad engaged Maximum Input Level: +21dBu balanced or unbalanced Maximum Input Level: +18dBu balanced or unbalanced INSTRUMENT INPUT (Front Panel) Connector: TS ¼" Jack Type: Unbalanced Impedance: 470 kΩ Maximum Input Level (unbalanced) Insert Connector: TRS ¼" Type: Unbalanced LINE OUTPUT Connector: Male XLR Pin 2 Hot and impedance balanced TRS ¼" Connector: ¼" TRS phone balanced/unbalanced Type: Electronically balanced Type: transformer balanced/unbalanced Maximum Output Level: (XLR) +dBu DIGITAL OUTPUTS Connectors: XLR for AES/EBU, RCA for S/PDIF l = both connector types INSERT Connector: TRS ¼" Ring Impedance: >5kΩ Maximum Level: >+21dBu Word Sync Input/Output Connectors: BNC Input Impedance: 75Ω terminated by internal jumper Input: 96, 88.2, 48, or 44.1kHz word clock Output: 96, 88.2, 48, or 44.1kHz word clock A/D CONVERSION Type: dbx Type IV® A/D Conversion System Sample Rate: 96, 88.2, 48, or 44.1kHz selectable Wordlength: 24, 20, or 16 bit selectable Dither Type: TPDF, SNR2, or none Noise Shape: Shape 1, Shape 2, or none Output Format: S/PDIF or AES/EBU Converter Dynamic Range: typical, A-Weighted, 22kHz Bandwidth D/A CONVERSION D-A Conversion 24-bit Dynamic Range: 103 dB typical, A-weighted, 20 kHz bandwidth, 101 dB typical, unweighted, 20 kHz bandwidth THD+Noise: 0.002% typical at +4 dBu, 1 kHz, output gain at 0 dB Frequency Response: 20 Hz to 20 kHz, +0/-0.5 dB Interchannel Crosstalk: < -85 dB at 1 kHz, output gain at 0 dB DIMENSIONS HxWxD

Section:

05

Harman Pro Group | 2013
27
Page 267

PRODUCT SPECS PRODUCT SPECS
4800/4820

SC 64

SC 32

220i

PA+

260

Section:

05

INPUTS Number of Inputs (RTA Mic Input) Connectors: Female XLR Connectors, Euroblock Connectors, RCA Type: Electronically bal/RF filtered Impedance, >40K Impedance, balanced, Euroblock Impedance, unbalanced, Euroblock (& RCA 1260/1261) • • • Max Input Level: Hardware selectable for +30, +22, +14 dBu • • Max Input Line Level: +20dBu Mic/Line, +12dBu RCA Max Input Line Level: +22dBu • CMRR: >40dB typical, >55 dB at 1kHz • • • • CMRR: >45dB 0-48dB 0-48dB 30-60dB 30-60dB 30-60dB 30-60dB Mic Pre gain • • • • • • Mic EIN: <-118dB, 22Hz-22kHz, 150kΩ • Input Gain Range RTA: 10dB to 70dB w/60dB typical 15V DC 15V DC 15V DC 48V DC 48V 48V 15V 15V 15V 15V RTA Mic Phantom Voltage: OUTPUTS 6 4 6 8 2 64 32 4 6 4 6 Number of Outputs • • • • • Connectors: XLR • • • • • • • Connectors: Euroblock • • • • • • • • • • • Type: Electronically balanced, RF filtered 120Ω 120Ω 120Ω 120Ω 120Ω 44Ω 44Ω 120/60 20/60 120/60 120/60 1 Impedance • Maximum Output Level: +25.5 dBu into 1kΩ, +22 dBu into 600Ω • • • • • • • • Maximum Output Level: +20dBu • • Maximum Output Level: +22dBu A/D PERFORMANCE • • • • • • • • • Type: dbx Type IV™ Conversion System 110 110 114 115 114 113 113 113 113 113 113 Dynamic Range: (dB) A-weighted 107 107 112 112 112 110 110 110 110 110 110 Dynamic Range: (dB) Unweighted l l l l Type IV dynamic Range: >119 dB, A-weighted, 22kHz,BW >117 dB, unweighted, 22kHz BW 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 96kHz 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz Sample Rate 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 A/D Wordlength: (bit) D/A PERFORMANCE 112 112 112 115 112 113 113 112 112 112 112 Dynamic Range: (dB) A-weighted 110 110 110 112 110 110 110 109 109 109 109 Dynamic Range: (dB) unweighted 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 96kHz 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz Sample Rate 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 A/D Wordlength: (bit) SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 48 bits 32 bits 32 bits Internal Wordlength • Dynamic Range: >109 dB A-weighted, >106dB unweighted • • • • • • • • • Dynamic Range: >110 dB A-weighted, >107dB unweighted 0.004 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.002 0.004 0.004 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 THD + Noise: % typical at +4dBu, 1kHz, 0dB input gain • • • • • • • • • • • Frequency Response: 20Hz - 20kHz, +/-0.5dB • • • • • • Interchannel Crosstalk: >80dB typical • • • • • • Crossalk input to output: >80dB typical 0.6 msec 0.6 msec 0.6 msec 0.6 msec Propagation Delay PRE EQ – (Input) 28-Band 28-Band 28-Band 31-Band 28-Band 9-Band 9-Band 4-Band 4-Band Type: Graphic EQ per input channel, or PEQ per input channel • • • • • • • Range: +/-12dB range NOTCH FILTERS • Number: 1-5 per input channel not to exceed 10 for all input channels • • • • Number: 6 per input channel • • Number: 4 per output channel PRE DELAY – (Input) N/A N/A configurable 680 N/A 5120 5120 Length: ms/channel POST DELAY (DRIVER ALIGNMENT) – (Output) 10 10 configurable 170 configurable 5120 5120 Length: ms/channel 2.7sec 2.0sec 2.7sec TOTAL DELAY TIME CROSSOVER • Type: 1x2, 1x3, 1x4, 1x5, 1x6, 2x3, 2x4, 2x5, 2x6, 2x7, 2x8, 3x4, 3x5, 3x6, 3x7, 3x8, 4x6, 4x8 • • • • Filter Type: Butterworth, Bessel, or Linkwitz-Riley - Note: PA+, PX - offer no bessel • • • • Slope: 6, 12, 18 or 24 dB/octave for Butterworth or Bessel filters 12, 24, 36 or 48 dB/octave for Linkwitz-Riley filters Note: PA+, PX - offer only 12 and 24 LR • • Type: 1x1, 1x2, 1x3, 1x4, 2x2, 2x4, 2x6 and 2x8 - Bessel 6, 12, 18 and 24 dB/Octave Butterworth 6, 12, 18 and 24 dB/Octave - Linkwitz-Riley 12 and 24 dB/Octave POST EQ - (Output) 3(2) 3(2) 4(2) 4 4 6 6 6 6 Number: EQ bands per output channel • • • • • Range: +/-12dB range DYNAMICS • • • • • • • • • Type: Compressor/Limiter with PeakStopPlus® • • • • • • • • Type: Compressor/Limiter with PeakPlus® • • Ambient Noise Compensation Pink Noise Generator • • • • Position: Pink noise inserted on selected input(s) • • Pink/White/Sine Phase Compensation • • • Amount: 0-180 degrees phase shift • • • • • Output Polarity: Reversible MISCELLANEOUS • Output Transformers: Optional • ROM Upgrade: Flash upgradable through USB • • • GUI: RS-232 for computer display and configuration • • • • RTA Microphone: Optional (RTA mic included on PX) • • • • • • • • • ROM Upgrade: Flash upgradable through RS-232 Dimensions: H x W x D 1.75"x 1.75”x 1.75"x 3.5"x 1.75"x 3.5"x 3.5"x 1.75"x 1.75"x 1.75"x 1.75"x 2 (1) 2 (1) 2 (1) 4(1) • • • • • • • • • • • • 2 • • • • 64 32 6 12 6 12 • • • • • • 4 8 2 4 • • • • • • 3.5k 3.5k >50kΩ >50kΩ >50kΩ >50kΩ >75kΩ >25kΩ >25kΩ >25kΩ • • • • • • • • • • • •
19"x 5.75" 19”x 5.75” 19"x 7.7" 19"x 12.25" 19"x 5.75" 19"x 15" 19"x 15" 19"x 5.75" 19"x 5.75" 19"x 5.75" 19"x 5.75"

28

Page 268

640 641

PX

1260 1261

640m 641m

1260m 1261m

DriveRack, SC, ZonePRO
®

Harman Pro Group | 2013

PRODUCT SPECS PRODUCT SPECS

IEQ15

INPUTS/OUTPUTS Connectors: 1/4" TRS, XLR (pin 2 hot), and barrier terminal strip Connectors: 1/4" TRS, XLR (pin 2 hot), and Euroblock Connectors: 1/4" TRS, XLR (pin 2 hot) Type: Electronically balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered Input Impedance: Balanced 40kΩ, unbalanced 20kΩ +22dBu +22dBu Maximum Input Level: >+21dBu balanced or unbalanced • • CMRR: >40dB, typically >55dB at 1kHz Output Impedance: Electronically balanced 200Ω, unbalanced 100Ω • • Output Impedance: Electronically balanced 120Ω, unbalanced 60Ω Output Impedance: balanced 100Ω, unbalanced 50Ω +21dBu >+21dBu >+21dBu >+21dBu >+21dBu >+21dBu >+21dBu >+21dBu >+20dBu >+20dBu Maximum Output Level SYSTEM PERFORMANCE • • • • • • • • • • Bandwidth: 20Hz to 20kHz, +/-0.5dB • • • • • • • • • • Frequency Response: <10Hz to >50kHz , +0.5/-3dB • • • • • • • THD + Noise: <0.004%, at +4dBu 1kHz • • • THD + Noise: <0.04% , 0.02% typical at +4dBu, 1kHz • • • • • • • • • • Interchannel Crosstalk: <-80dB, 20Hz to 20kHz • • • Dynamic Range: >108dB, unweighted 22kHz measurement bandwidth • • • Signal to Noise Ratio: 90dB • • • • • Dynamic Range: >112dB, unweighted • • • • • Signal to Noise: >94dB, unweighted, ref. : +4dBu, 22kHz measurement bandwidth • • • Dynamic Range: 108dB • • • Signal to Noise Ratio: 90dB • • • Noise Reduction: Up to 20dB of dynamic broadband noise reduction • • Noise Reduction: Up to 10dB of dynamic broadband noise reduction Noise Reduction In (+/-6dB and +/-15dB range) • • • Dynamic Range: >120dB , unweighted • • • Signal to Noise Ratio: >102dB, unweighted , ref: +4dBu, 22kHz measurement bandwidth • • Dynamic Range: 109dB 115dB • • • • • Signal to Noise: >94dB, unweighted, ref. : +4dBu, 22kHz measurement bandwidth • • Digital Resolution: 24 bits • • Sample Frequency: 48kHz • • Latency: 2msec FUNCTION SWITCHES • • AFS: Activates dbx AFS™ Advanced Feedback Suppression • • Type V: Activates dbx Type V™ Noise Reduction • • • Type III: Activates dbx Type III™ Noise Reduction • • • • • • • • • • EQ Bypass: Bypasses the graphic equalizer section in the signal path • • • • • • • Low Cut (recessed): Active the 40Hz 18dB/octave Bessel high-pass filter • • • Low Cut: Active the 50Hz 12dB/octave high-pass filter • • • • • • • Range: (recessed) Selects either +/-6dB or +/- 15dB slider boost/cut range • • • Range: Selects either +/-6dB or +/- 12dB slider boost/cut range INDICATORS • • • • • • • • • • 4-LED bar graph (Green, Green, Yellow, Red) at -10, 0, +10, and +18dBu • • • • • Gain Reduction Meter: 4-LED bar graph (all Red) at 3, 6, and 10dB • • • Type III™ NR Active: Yellow LED • • Type V™ NR Active: Yellow, Green, Red LED • • AFS™ Advanced Feedback Suppression Active: Red LED • • • • • • • • • • EQ Bypass: Red LED • • • • • • • • • • Clip: Red LED • • • • • • • • • • Low Cut Active: Red LED • • • • • +/-6dB range: Red LED • • • +/-12dB range: Red LED • • • • • • • +/-15dB range: Red LED POWER SUPPLY • • • • • • • • Operating Voltage: 100VAC 50/60Hz, 120VAC 60Hz - 230VAC 50/60Hz 12 w 12 w 15 w 24 w 24 w 12 w 24 w 24 w 17 w 17 w Power Consumption: (watts) • • • • • • • • • • Mains Connection: IEC receptacle 1.75"x 1.75"x 3.5"x 3.5"x 5.25"x 3.5"x 3.5"x 5.25"x 3.5"x 5.25"x DIMENSIONS: H x W x D • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
19"x6" 19"x6" 19"x6" 19"x7.9" 19"x7.9" 19"x7.9" 19"x7.9" 19"x7.9" 19"x7.9" 19"x7.9"

IEQ31

Graphic EQs

1215

1231

2031

2215

2231

131s

215s

231s

Section:

05

Harman Pro Group | 2013
29
Page 269

PRODUCT SPECS PRODUCT SPECS

160SL

162SL
X,T • >40 V8 T X,T • •
>30/>15 >+24/>+22

266xs

166xs

Dynamics, Blue/Purple Series
INPUTS Connectors: X=XLR, T=TRS ¼" Type: Electronically balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered Impedance: Balanced/Unbalanced (ohms) Max Input Level: Balanced or Unbalanced CMRR: Typical @ 1kHz VCA TYPE SIDECHAIN INSERT Connectors: X=XLR, T=TRS ¼" OUTPUTS Connectors: X=XLR, T=TRS ¼" Type: Electronically balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered (*266XL is impedance balanced) Type: Transformer balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered Impedance: Balanced/Unbalanced (ohms) Max Output Level: (dBu) SYSTEM PERFORMANCE Bandwidth: 20 Hz to 20 kHz, +0/-0.5 dB (162SL=+0/-0. dB) Noise: < (dBu), unweighted, 22 kHz measurement bandwidth Stereo Coupling; True RMS Power Summing COMPRESSOR Threshold Range: -40 dBu to +20 dBu Threshold Range: -40 dBu to +30 dBu Ratio: 1:1 to ∞:1 Threshold Characteristic: Selectable OverEasy® or hard knee Attack/Release: Selectable manual or auto Attack/Release: Auto Output Gain: -20 to +20 dB Output Gain: -25 to +25 dB LIMITER Type (162SL two-stage) OPTIONS 704X Digital Output System Output Transformer: Jensen® JT-123-dbx or JT-11-dbx, BCI™ RE-123-dbx or RE-11-dbx; Jensen standard on 160SL/162SL DIMENSIONS: H x W x D

160A

1074

1046
X,T •
>+22dBu

X,T •
>40k >+20dBu

X,T •
>+24dBu

X,T •
>+24dBu

X •
>+22dBu

1066
X,T • >45 V2 T X,T •
>30/>15 >+21

X,T • >80 V8 X X •
>50/>25 >+30

>50k/>25k >100k/>50k >50k/>25k >40k/>20k >40k/>20k >20k/>10k >50k/>25k >+22dBu +30dBu/+26 +24dBu

>45 V1 T X,T *
>+21

>45 V1 T X,T •
>120/>60 >+21

>45 V1 T X,T •
>30 >+24

>45 V2 T X,T •
>60/>30 >+22

>45 V2 T X •
>30/>15 >+22

• -90 • • • • • •

• -90 • • • • • •
Peakstop

• -90 • • • • • •
N/A

• -94 • •

• -94 • • • • • •

• -94 • • • • • •

• -94 • • • • • • •

• -93 • • • • • •
Plus®

Section:

05

223xs

INPUTS Connectors Type: Electronically balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered Impedance: Balanced > 50 kΩ, unbalanced > 25 kΩ Max Input Level: > +21 dBu balanced or unbalanced CMRR: > 40 dB, typically > 55 dB at 1 kHz OUTPUTS ¼" TRS XLR ¼" TRS XLR Connectors: • • • • Impedance: Balanced 200Ω, unbalanced 100Ω • • • Electronically balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered • • • • • Max Output Level: > +21 dBu balanced/unbalanced into 2 kΩ or greater SYSTEM PERFORMANCE • • • • Bandwidth: 20 Hz to 20 kHz, +0/-0.5 dB • • • • Frequency Response: < 3 Hz to > 90 kHz, +0/-3 dB • • • • Signal-to-Noise: Ref: +4 dBu, 22 kHz measurement bandwidth • • Low Output: > 94 dB (Stereo Mode) > 94 dB (Mono Mode) • • Low Mid Output: >94 dB (Mono Mode) • • High-Mid: > 92 dB (Mono Mode) • • • • Mid Output: > 93 dB (Mono Mode) • • High-Mid Output: > 92 dB • • • • High Output: > 92 dB (Stereo Mode) > 92 dB (Mono Mode) • • • • Dynamic Range: > 114 dB, unweighted, any output • • • • THD+Noise: < 0.004% at +4 dBu, 1 kHz, < 0.04% at +20 dBu, 1 kHz • • • • Interchannel Crosstalk: < -80 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz CROSSOVER FREQUENCIES • • • • Stereo Mode: Low/High: 45 to 960 Hz or 450 Hz to 9.6 kHz (x10 setting) Mono Mode: Low/Mid: 45 to 960 Hz or 450 Hz to 9.6 kHz (x10 setting) Mid/High: 45 to 960 Hz or 450 Hz to 9.6 kHz (x10 setting) Filter Type: Linkwitz-Riley, 24 dB/octave, state-variable POWER • • • • Operating Voltage: 100 VAC 50/60 Hz; 120 VAC 60 Hz, 230 VAC50 HZ 15 w 15 w 15 w 15 w Power Requirements (watts) 1.75"x 1.75"x 1.75"x 1.75"x DIMENSIONS H x Wx D
¼" TRS • • • • XLR • • • • ¼" TRS • • • • XLR • • • •
19"x 6.9" 19"x 6.9" 19"x 6.9" 19"x 6.9"

30

Page 270

234xs

223s

234s

Harman Pro Group | 2013

N/A

N/A Peakstop Peakstop Peakstop Peakstop Plus® Plus® Plus®

1.75"x 19"x 5.75"

1.75"x 19"x 6.75"

1.75"x 19"x 6.5"

1.75"x 19"x 9"

1.75”x 19”x 9”

1.75”x 19”x 9”

3.5”x 19” x 10”

• •

3.5”x 19” x 10”

Crossovers

PRODUCT SPECS PRODUCT SPECS

AFS224

Digital Signal Processors
dB10
INPUTS Connectors: X=XLR, T=TRS ¼" Type: Electronically balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered Impedance: Balanced/Unbalanced (ohms) Max Input Level: balanced or unbalanced CMRR: >40dB at 1kHz, typically >55dB @1kHz OUTPUTS Connectors: X=XLR, T=TRS ¼" Type: Electronically balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered Balanced: 120Ω/Unbalanced: 60Ω Max Output Level: +20dBu A/D SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A-D Conversion: 24-Bit dbx Type IV™ Conversion System Converter Dynamic Range: >113dB typical, A-weighted, >110 dB typical, unweighted, 22kHz bandwidth Type IV™ Dynamic Range: Up to 127dB with transient material, A-weighted, 22kHz bandwidth Up to 125dB with transient material, unweighted, 22kHz bandwidth Typically 119dB with program material, A-weighted, 22kHz bandwidth Typically 117 dB with program material, unweighted, 22kHz bandwidth Frequency Response: 20Hz to 20kHz, +0/-0.5dB Interchannel Crosstalk: <-80dB at 1kHz, input gain at 0dB D/A SYSTEM PERFORMANCE D-A Conversion: 24-Bit Dynamic Range: 112dB typical, A-weighted, 22kHz bandwidth, 109dB typical, unweighted, 22kHz bandwidth THD+ Noise: 0.003% typical at +4 dBu, 1 kHz, input gain at 0dB Frequency Response: 20Hz to 20kHz, +0/-0.5dB Interchannel Crosstalk: <-80dB at 1kHz, input gain at 0dB DIMENSIONS: H x W x D P 1 • • • •

dB12
A 1 • • • •
1MΩ 65kΩ 70kΩ

Direct Boxes
Circuit Type: A=Active, P=Passive INPUTS Number of Connectors: Instrument/line/speaker level 1/4” TS Connection (Tip Hot, Sleeve GND) Unbalanced, RF Filtered Attenuation Pad: Switchable 0, 20, 40 dB Filter: Switchable, Low Pass @ 6 kHz (40 dB pad position only) Max Input Level (0 dB Pad) Max Input Level (20 dB Pad) Max Input Level (40 dB Pad) Input Impedance (0 dB) Input Impedance (-20 dB) Input Impedance (-40 dB) OUTPUTS Main Output: Male XLR Balanced, Pin 2 Hot Thru Output: 1/4” Unbalanced, TS (Tip Hot, Sleeve GND) Main Output Impedance: 600Ω Typical, balanced Main Output CMRR: 128 dB typical @ 60 Hz, 104 dB typical @ 1 kHz, 98 dB typical @ 10 Hz Main Output CMRR: 106 dB typical @ 60 Hz, 123 dB typical @ 1 kHz, 108 dB typical @ 10Hz PERFORMANCE Bandwidth: 20 Hz to 20 kHz +/-0.1 dB typical Bandwidth: 20 Hz to 20 kHz +0/-2 typical with 600Ω load Frequency Response: <10 Hz to 80 kHz, -3 dB Frequency Response: 10 Hz to 70 kHz, -3 dB with 2 kΩ or higher load Insertion Loss: 21 dB typical Insertion Loss: 1 dB typical Harmonic Distortion: (THD+N) 0.002% typical @ 1 Hz, 0dBu Harmonic Distortion: (THD+N) 0.003% typical @ 1 Hz, 0dBu Noise Floor: -120 dBu, 22 Hz to 22 kHz, unweighted Noise Floor: -112 dBu, 22 Hz to 22 kHz, unweighted Dynamic Range: 153 dB, 22 Hz to 22 kHz, unweighted Dynamic Range: 122 dB, 22 Hz to 22 kHz, unweighted POWER SUPPLY Voltage: +48 V Phantom Power Current: < 8 mA DIMENSIONS: H x W x D

X,T • +20dBu •
50k/25k

X,T • • •

+33dBu +10dBu +33dBu +30dBu +33dBu +33dBu 80kΩ 65kΩ 70kΩ

• • • • • • • • • •
1.75"x 19"x 5.75"

• • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Harman Pro Group | 2013

TR1616

TR1616

2.20” x 2.20” x 5.44"x 5.44”x 5.82” 5.82”

Section:

ANALOG INPUTS 16 Number of Inputs • Connectors: Combination Female XLR and 1/4” Jack • Type: Electronically balanced, RF Filtered • Impedance: XLR input: 3kΩ, 1/4” input: 20kΩ balanced, 10kΩ unbalanced • Max Input Level: XLR Input: +18dBu at minimum gain 1/4” Input: +33dBu at minimum gain • Gain: XLR Input: 0 to +60dB, 1/4” Input: -15 to +45dB • EIN: -125dBu, 22Hz-22kHz, 150Ω source impedance • CMRR: >40dB, typically 55dB, 22Hz-22kHz • Dynamic Range: 110dB unweighted, 113dB A-weighted • Frequency Response: 10Hz to 40kHz, +/- 0.25dB at 96kHz, 10Hz to 20kHz, +/- 0.25dB at 48kHz • THD+N: Typically 0.002% at 1kHz, 0dBu XLR input, gain set to minimum • Interchannel Crosstalk: <100dB, 22Hz to 22kHz • ADC Latency: 37/Fs (0.77msec at 48kHz) +48VDC Phantom Power: applied to XLR pins 2 and 3 through 6.81k resistors 20dB Pad • Low Cut Filter: 2-pole Butterworth filter at 80Hz • Polarity: Normal or Reverse ANALOG OUTPUTS 16 Number of Outputs • Connectors: Male XLR • Type: Cross-Coupled Electronically balanced, RF Filtered • Impedance: 40Ω balanced, 20Ω unbalanced • Maximum Output Level: +20dBu into 2kohm load or greater • Dynamic Range: 112dB unweighted, 115dB A-weighted • Frequency Response: 10Hz to 40kHz, +/- 0.25dB at 96kHz 10Hz to 20kHz, +/- 0.25dB at 48kHz • THD+N: Typically 0.006% at 1kHz, 0dBu output • Interchannel Crosstalk: <-100dB, 22Hz to 22kHz • DAC Latency: 29/Fs (0.60msec at 48kHz)

05

PMC16
• • • • • • • • 60 •
20 dBu 40Ω

PMC16
AUDIO PERFORMANCE Frequency Response: +0/-0.2 dB 20 Hz – 20 kHz (Measured at 0 dBu output level) Dynamic Range: >108 dB unweighted 22 Hz – 22 kHz bandwidth >112 dB A-weighted THD+N: <.005% 20 Hz – 20 kHz (Measured at 0 dBu output level) Crosstalk: <97 dB 20 Hz – 20 kHz BLU LINK DIGITAL AUDIO BUS Bit Depth: 24-bit Sample Rate: 48 kHz or 96 kHz Connectors: 2 x RJ45 Ethernet connectors Max Cable Length: 100 m/300 ft between devices (Category 5e cable) Max Number of Nodes Latency Per Node: 4/Fs [0.08 ms @ 48 kHz, 0.04 ms @ 96 kHz] ANALOG OUTPUTS (XLR & 1/4”) Max Output Level Output Impedance HEADPHONE OUTPUTS (1/8” & 1/4”) Power/Impedance: 900 mW per channel at 50Ω Ω (1/8” and 1/4” jacks are in parallel) POWER Adapter: PS0920DC-01 (100-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz) Power Consumption: Power Requirements: 9 V DC 2.0 A WEIGHT/DIMENSIONS Product Weight Power Supply Weight Dimensions

• •
18 W


2.26 lb (1.03 kg)

0.31 lb

(0.14 kg)

2 1/8”(H) 11 5/16”(W) 4 13/16” (D)

31

Page 271

Harman Pro Group | 2013

05

Section:

Page 272

Harman Pro Group | 2013

06

Section:

Page 273

Section:

06

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Digital Paging, Voice Announcement, Background Music, and Audio Content over digital transport, at your control, accessible anywhere, anytime, on your schedule. That’s the power of IDX 100. Leverage existing Ethernet networks and integrate legacy audio systems with scalable hardware components. Add any General Purpose Input/Output device. More than future proof, IDX is the future of networked digital audio systems. IDX 100 is the base system to a family of IDX solutions by Harman Professional, a leading manufacturer of high-quality, high fidelity audio products for the professional market. IDX is a proven and trusted system solution used in over 250 Airports and Transportation Facilities worldwide. Whether your audio needs are small or large, it’s time to put the power of IDX to work in your business. At the core of IDX 100 is a turn-key software interface paired with DSP hardware capable of distributing pre-recorded messages, live paging, and audio content over digital transport to multiple zones without the need to learn a programming language. Controlled by paging stations using the Cobranet digital audio transport protocol, and managed by intuitive software, IDX is a powerfully simple way to provide public address and mass communication systems to a single building or an entire campus of facilities.

Page 274

Section:

06

Harman Pro Group | 2013

IDX 100 Overview
Distributed Audio and DSP Over digital transport Uses BLU link and Digital Audio Transports Premium Audio Hardware By BSS , CROWN , And AKG
® ® ®

Create Events and Schedules For Automated System Functions Configure, Control and Monitor Systems Remotely via Client Software Integrate any General Purpose I/O Devices for Added Functionality Comprehensive System Logs and Fault Reporting Optional Automated Amplifier Failover to Backup Amplifier Channels

Wizard-Driven Configuration Using IDX 100 Designer Software Application Simple Zone Assignment and System Control with Easy-to-Use Paing Stations Store and Play Back Audio Files and Paging Chimes

Page 275

A Completely Scalable System
Start small and go big. IDX 100 is easy to expand and is decentralized. Need more inputs? Add an additional DSP. Want more zones? Add another output box. Need more paging locations? Drop in a Ethernet line and add more paging stations. IDX 100 is a seamless solution with components designed to work together.

IDX SERVER 2 MESSAGE CHANNELS AUDIO INPUT 2 MESSAGE CHANNELS UP TO 14 BACKGROUND MUSIC CHANNELS AUDIO OUTPUT UP TO 96 CHANNELS

Section:

06
PDP-DSP PROCESSOR ETHERNET SWITCH

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 276

AUDIO PLAYER

PDP-BOB OUTPUT EXPANDER

PAGING STATION

EXPANSION STATION UP TO 10 PER PAGING STATION

12 GPI / 6 GPO PER PDP-DSP

Audio Line

Ethernet Connection

CobraNet

Amplifier Line

BLU Link

Speaker Line

Control

Network Redundancy
IDX Paging Stations and Processors include primary and secondary CobraNet based audio ports. Under normal operation the primary port only receives and transmits audio data from and to the network. Should the primary port or connection fail, the device automatically switches to receive and transmit audio from and to the secondary port. The PDP-DSP and BLU-BOB feature a low latency, fault tolerant digital audio bus transport protocol developed by Harman known as BLU Link. In IDX 100, BLU Link transports 96 channels of audio over Cat 5e up to a distance of 100m between compatible devices. Fiber optic media converters can be used to increase the distance between devices to over 40km. IDX 100 is completely decentralized; system components can be located wherever space allows. Never before has networked audio been so easy to integrate. Find additional design information at idx.harman.com

PRIMARY AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER FAILOVER 8:1 OR 1:1 BACKUP

FIRE ALARM SIGNAL

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CT16S AMPLIFIER SWITCH

ZONE 1

BACKUP AMPLIFIER ZONE 8

Section:

06
ZONE 16 16 GPI / 5 GPO PER CT16S PRIMARY AMPLIFIER

CT16S AMPLIFIER SWITCH

ZONE 17

BACKUP AMPLIFIER ZONE 24

ZONE 32

Page 277

One Company for the Entire Audio System
Harman’s family of brands invent, design, and manufacturer a complete line of audio products matched perfectly with IDX 100. Guarantee the highest level of audio quality throughout every stage of the signal chain with these legendary Harman brands.
For over sixty years AKG Acoustics has been making some of the most respected pro quality microphones in the world. The DTE-715 uses the same components in AKG’s Gooseneck microphones to provide clean, intelligible sound for voice paging. Fifteen soft-touch paging buttons with colored LED feedback provide an easy to use interface for zone assignments. With up to twelve ten-button expansion modules, each paging station can host up to 135 buttons.

Section:

06

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 278

The digital signal processing, audio and logic I/O of IDX 100 are derived from the BSS Audio Soundweb London platform. The PDPDSP contains a pre-configured signal path and is controlled by the PDC-100 Controller. PDP-BOB Output Expanders receive eight channels of digital audio from the PDP-DSP Processors via BLU link. BLU link is a device-to-device connection of up to 100m, where no network appliances are required. These devices are backed by the award winning, industry trusted support and quality of BSS Audio.

Since 1974, Crown International has grown to become one of the world’s largest and most respected manufacturers of power amplifiers. Crown amplifiers feature proven technologies and state-of-the-art advancements for high-quality, high-performance systems with the rocksolid reliability that professionals demand. With a broad catalog of two, four, and eight channel amplifiers to choose from, there is an amplifier solution perfect for every installation. The CT16S Amplifier Switcher adds automatic failover to backup amplifier channels for high availability applications.W

Take a deeper look at the specifications of the IDX 100 hardware at idx.harmanpro.com

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Every installation requires a different loudspeaker to solve a unique acoustic challenge. The design of good loudspeaker coverage that is matched to the acoustic space is critical to the quality of the IDX 100 system. The loudspeaker is the ambassador to the sound system, represent like a pro with JBL. The engineers at JBL have created a complete range of surface-mount, in-ceiling, in-wall, pendant, and column loudspeakers that give you complete mastery of any architectural, aesthetic or system performance requirement. JBL is the worldwide standard for pro-quality loudspeaker installations.

Section:

06

Page 279

Designer Software
IDX 100 Designer is the configuration, control and monitoring software application for IDX 100 systems.

So Intuitive

Section:

06

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 280

The software runs on a Windows 7 PC and provides wizard-driven configuration of the PDC-100 Controller. After completing the 12 steps of the IDX 100 Designer Wizard, the configuration can be saved locallyMalls Shopping as a file and/or deployed to a PDC-100 Controller.
Automate bell schedules for classes and control morning announcements from the main office. Play prerecorded messages at the bus pickup/drop off to route students. Create and manage custom emergency/evacuation messages and integrate with existing fire or blue-light systems. Provide music and announcement capabilities to sports and performing arts facilities.  

Step-by-Step Setup Wizard
Never before has it been this easy to set up a networked communication system. Name your project, choose your failover and jump to the next step. The Wizard walks you through every important process, from setting up hardware, adding paging stations, adding music playback, creating logic, adding audio files, and assigning buttons.

Event Scheduling

Client Monitoring

The heart of automation It’s all in the details, and lies in the Event Scheduler. anything that happens in the Create simple playback alerts IDX 100 system is logged. on a calendar, or create Complete monitoring of all lists of actions that can be activities 24/7 with client and SYSTEM TRAINING, TESTING, SUPPORT, data to .csv triggered manually. The simple, server logs. Export AND EXTENDED WARRANTY for review. Five different straightforward interface allows files you to 100 systems are backed All IDX add delay times between by queries to choose from: All, the warranty and support actions, repeat events, the or Event, of world of Harman International, add parent companyWarning, renowned subtract events, and JBL, a Error and Debug. audio brands includingcreateCrown, AKG, and BSS Audio.  weekly calendar.

Full Solution Provider

Control essential audio functions of the system in real time through the client software. Make EQ changes by output channel, raise and lower the volume of zones, view the status of paging stations. These are just a few of the powerful features of the IDX 100 software. Hospitals  WantConvention Centers to see more?
Visit idx.harman.com for an even more in-depth look at the IDX 100 Designer Software. Automate pre-function space welcome messages, pre/post meeting chimes, and traffic announcements, exhibit floor notifications. Provide back of house support for audio/visual and food services vendors with paging capabilities.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Warehouses

Route traffic through emergency areas with announcement message loops. Provide television audio or music in multiple waiting areas. Set up security paging for nurses, doctors, and security staff. Integrate patient call buttons in recovery rooms throughout the facility. Provide reception paging to private and public areas.

Provide paging capabilities for operators to office cubicle areas and to private offices. Provide background music in lobbies, break areas, fitness facilities, and customer interface areas. Integrate emergency and fire announcements into existing systems. Automate message playback for repeating and essential functions. Integrate fire and safety controls in sensitive equipment areas for quick alert capabilities. 

Section:

06

With over 65 years of award winning history in audio design and development, Harman brands have created revolutionary audio system solutions for the world’s most demanding applications where quality, reliability and superb audio performance are required. Harman systems are used throughout the world in a wide range of applications including sports arenas, theme parks, airports, and convention centers. With constant technological advancement, rigorous testing, and 24/7 support, the Harman team stands behind every IDX system installed anywhere in the world.

MISSION CRITICAL TESTING System quality assurance and specified performance validations are achieved through thorough factory and site acceptance testing. Testing of your system will include testing certification of components networks and other devices to ensure that all design goals are met.

Page 281

Designed to Serve
Hotels

Ways to Harness the Power of IDX 100

Create unique audio environments in the lobby, recreational areas, and meeting spaces with zoned background music. Integrate paging stations in back of house operations to streamline work processes.

Section:

06

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Educational Facilities
Automate bell schedules for classes. Create and manage custom emergency/evacuation messages and integrate with existing fire or blue-light systems.

Provide customized in-store audio and paging capabilities for tenants. Send audio into common areas, food courts, and even monetize by providing audio advertising services to vendors.

Shopping Malls

Full Solution Provider
SYSTEM TRAINING, TESTING, SUPPORT, AND EXTENDED WARRANTY
All IDX 100 systems are backed by the warranty and support of Harman International, the parent company of world renowned audio brands including JBL, Crown, AKG, and BSS Audio.

Page 282

Hospitals

Provide television audio or music in multiple waiting areas. Set up security paging for nurses, doctors, and security staff. Integrate patient call buttons in recovery rooms throughout the facility.

Provide paging capabilities for operators to office cubicle areas and to private offices. Provide background music in lobbies, break areas, fitness facilities, and customer-facing areas.

Warehouses

Section:

06

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Automate pre-function space welcome messages, pre/post meeting chimes, exhibit floor notifications. Provide back of house support for audio/visual and food services vendors with paging capabilities.

Convention Centers

With over 65 years of award winning history in audio design and development, Harman brands have created revolutionary audio system solutions for the world’s most demanding applications where quality, reliability and superb audio performance are required. Harman systems are used throughout the world in a wide range of applications including sports arenas, theme parks, airports, and convention centers. With constant technological advancement, rigorous testing, and 24/7 support, the Harman team stands behind every IDX system installed anywhere in the world.

Mission Critical Testing System quality assurance and specified performance validations are achieved through thorough factory and site acceptance testing. Testing of your system will include testing certification of components networks and other devices to ensure that all design goals are met.

Page 283

Section:

06

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 284

Harman Professional

Mission

At At Harman Professionalwe understand and respect that we have a duty to serve ourour Harman Professional we understand and respect that we have a duty to serve customers customers and our employees by serving the planet. We accept that responsibility and strive and our employees by serving the planet. We accept that responsibility and strive to be to be energy efficient and environmentally minded in our everyday business. When we design, energy efficient and environmentally minded in our everyday business. When we design, produce, and deliver our products we look for opportunities to do so more efficiently and produce, and deliver our products we look for opportunities to do so more efficiently and sustainably. We’re committed to a healthier planet and healthier life for every living thing.
sustainably. We’re committed to a healthier planet and healthier life for every living thing.

8500 Balboa Boulevard. CA 91329

© 2013 Harman International Industries, Incorporated

JBL Professional

JBL is the largest brand within Harman. JBL’s home base is part of the Harman International Business Campus, located in Northridge in the San Fernando Valley of Los Angeles. The 44 acre site comprises the offices of JBL Professional, along with Harman Corporate Engineering activities and other corporate functions. JBL Professional’s transducer design and manufacturing processes including machining, diaphragm forming, wire milling, voice coil winding, finishing, assembly and testing are all carried out by dedicated, quality-oriented personnel. JBL Professional loudspeaker enclosures are constructed from components produced in JBL’s extensive wood mill. Automated equipment is used extensively for uniformity and efficiency. Innovative techniques in enclosure materials, construction and assembly methods are employed. JBL Professional has the most rigorous standards for system power rating in the professional loudspeaker industry. Power testing of transducers is an ongoing activity at JBL Professional. Samples from all production lots are tested at full rated power to industry standards to ensure that they meet the rigid performance specifications set for them. This is the professional customer’s assurance that JBL loudspeakers will continue to perform as expected in the most rigorous professional applications.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

THE JBL STORY: 60 YEARS OF AUDIO INNOVATION
Celebrating sixty years of success in the speaker industry, this book offers details on the people and products that have made JBL famous. It features full-color photos, historical advertisements, and hundreds of diagrams and images, many taken right from JBL’s archives. Topics include stories behind the development of innovative applications for consumer products, as well as systems installations for stadiums, tour sound, movie theaters, recording studios, and places of worship. In addition to the technical info that explains the innovation, this book covers the brilliant engineers, and colorful record producers, musicians and technicians who had the vision to pursue a “better way.” Available at bookstores and on line.

Page 285

Portable Products

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

EON. PRX Series. JRX Series. STX Series. VRX Series.
With nearly one million EON’s shipped and millions more passive and powered speakers delivered worldwide, JBL sets the standards for audio quality, ergonomics and reliability in portable PA. From the cost effectiveness of the JRX line, the simplicity of EON, to the groundbreaking line-array designs of the VRX, JBL’s commitment to performance, value and experience are in full force when it comes to portable audio.

From Concerts to Clubs
Our passive system solutions like JRX, PRX400, STX and VRX incorporate the cabinet and driver technology developed specifically for Tour Sound, Cinema and Installed Sound markets. VRX900 and STX800 Series speakers deliver the power and performance you should expect from the highest quality, professional speaker systems. JBL’s patented Differential Drive® speaker technology has reduced speaker weight dramatically while still maintaining the highest level of performance available from a portable PA speaker. And taking the lead from VRX900 and STX800 Series speakers, PRX400 delivers extraordinary sound quality, power handling and performance at an affordable price.

The Whole is Greater Than the Sum of the Parts
Our powered systems incorporate not only the proprietary JBL driver technologies, but integrate signal processing and amplifier technology from sister companies dbx® and Crown®. PRX600 Series offer stellar performance, tremendous utility and exceptional value in a light-weight, rugged package. VRX powered technology is commonly used in demanding situations where high-output and sonic integrity are critical factors in an audio system. And EON Series is the undisputed leader in portable, light-weight plastic enclosures.

JBL means “Portable Performance.”

Page 286

PAGE 2

PORTABLE PRODUCTS

EON®

The Next Generation

Harman Pro Group | 2013

For the past 16 years JBL has led the portable PA market with EON, the best selling powered speaker in professional audio history. Since 2008 this new generation continues the class-leading traditions of design, performance, and quality. Featuring three models in the EON500 series and two models in the EON300 series, EON delivers more power, portability, and versatility than any other speaker in its class, raising the bar dramatically for advanced powered loudspeaker systems, while retaining that signature JBL EON® sound.
Versatility
EON’s flexible mounting capability, awesome power and extreme light weight set the new standard as the performance do-it-all system for gigging musicians, entertainers, presenters, touring bands and mobile DJ’s. Main or monitor, pole or stand mounted, and even suspended, EON is right at home regardless of the venue or application. Audience expectations are high, and EON delivers.

Section:

07

Powered by Crown®
JBL and Crown® collaboration results in designs of unmatched integration and efficiency. At the heart of the 515XT’s massive output is a Crown Class-D amplifier that delivers high volume, low distortion and continuous performance with superb headroom and power to spare.

Portability
EON is synonymous with portability. One person can easily lift, load, and mount an EON system virtually anywhere. Deep-welled, full-size handles feature ergonomically designed grip points, while balanced weight distribution and composite enclosures make EON truly one of the lightest and easiest sound reinforcement systems to transport and setup.

Built-in Mixers
The innovative built-in 3 channel mixer on the EON515XT all but eliminates the need for an outboard mixer and is one of the keys to the EON’s unmatched popularity. The professional plug-and-play architecture appeals to any artist that has to set up quickly and deliver professional sound. Line level and direct microphone input capability, user selectable EQ, plus a clever mix/loop function for adding additional EONs or sending sub-mixes, ensure EON delivers unmatched simplicity with plenty of expansion capability.

Performance Refined
EON offers the highest power-to-weight ratio of anything in its class. Extend the low frequency performance of all EON systems with the EON518S. This subwoofer features an 18" JBL Differential Drive® low frequency driver with a massive 500 Watts of power in a compact package that is nearly half the weight of the competition.

Proven Reliability
JBL has drawn from over 60 years of world-class speaker design to develop the latest durable lightweight technologies. In addition to the legendary performance of JBL transducers, the new EON series incorporates special limiter circuitry that will protect the electronic components when driven hard, rigorously tested by the world-famous 100-hour torture test. Covered by a full metal grille with protective backing fitted to a robust composite shell, you can assure EON will stand up to the rigors of road abuse and deliver the performance you need every time.

High Quality Drivers
JBL’s exclusive Differential Drive® technology ensures EON has more power and less weight. These patented low-frequency drivers use neodymium magnets and dual voice coils to perform better than conventional designs with less distortion and at a fraction of the weight. JBL’s next-generation neodymium compression drivers deliver stunningly accurate high frequencies through a new 1" exit design.

Coverage
JBL is constantly advancing waveguide technology to ensure that consistent, balanced sound reaches all of your audience clearly and intelligibly. The Next Generation EON full-range cabinets feature a new 100º H x 60º V asymmetrical design guaranteeing an exceptionally wide coverage pattern and lower distortion.

Page 287

PORTABLE PRODUCTS

EON® 500 Series
key features
f LIGHT WEIGHT FOR TRUE PORTABILITY f COMFORTABLE GRIPS FOR EASY TRANSPORT f BUILT-IN 3-CHANNEL MIXER (EON 510 & 515) f DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE® LOW FREQUENCY TRANSDUCERS f EFFICIENT CLASS-D DIGITAL AMPLIFIER TECHNOLOGY

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
EON515XT EON510 EON518S

EON515XT
The EON515XT was engineered for durability, high performance and ease of use. We’ve extended the reach of the current EON technology by improving input sensitivity, lowering the noise floor, adding user selectable EQ control and re-voicing the system for peak performance and enhanced audio precision. The sturdy construction and superior ergonomic design will guarantee a lifetime of reliability and simplicity. Put it all together and the EON515XT is the toughest, smartest and most impressive EON ever.

EON510
The EON510 is a 10-inch, two-way, powered, portable speaker system. Capable of reproducing full bandwidth sound at high levels it offers the additional utility of a 3 channel built-in mixer. The EON510 is comprised of a 254 mm (10 in) Differential Drive® woofer, a 25.4 mm (1 in) neodymium high frequency compression driver coupled to a 100° H by 60° V waveguide. Both components are driven by the discrete channels of a 280 watt Class-D integrated power amplifier. The input section contains all crossover functions, protection, and mixer functionality.

EON518S
The EON518S is an 18-inch, direct radiating, high performance powered compact subwoofer system designed to extend low frequency performance of any EON system. It also offers the convenience of an integrated crossover and stereo loop-thru capability. The EON518S is comprised of a 460 mm (18") Differential Drive® woofer driven by a 500 watt Class-D digital amplifier.

specifications
EON510
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE (-10dB) COVERAGE PATTERN CROSSOVER FREQUENCY SENSITIVITY MAXIMUM SPL SYSTEM POWER RATING TRANSDUCERS: LF HF CONNECTORS: INPUT 3

EON515XT
Self-powered 15", two-way, bass-reflex design 39 Hz -20 kHz 100º H x 60º V nominal 1.7 kHz 132 dB Crown Class-D 625 Watts (525 + 100) 1 x JBL 265F-1 380 mm (15 in) 1 x JBL 2414H 25.4 mm (1 in) Balanced XLR / 1/4 inch combo jack with XLR loop through Balanced XLR / 1/4 inch TRS jack Balanced male XLR, +20 dBu (peak) 35 mm pole socket with stabilizing screw 4 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 pull-back point 673 x 406 x 368 mm 26.5 x 16 x 14.5 in 14.8 kg (32.5 lb)

EON518S
Self-powered 18", bass-reflex design 36 Hz -130 Hz 120 Hz (HPF selectable on outputs) 129 dB 500 W continuous, 1000 W peak 1 x JBL 268G 460 mm (18") (4 ohm ) Balanced XLRs with loop through (stereo) to balanced XLR satellite outputs. 1/4 inch speaker level input 35 mm pole socket on top

Self-powered 10", two-way, bass-reflex design 58 Hz - 18.5 kHz (EQ in ‘Flat’ position) 100º H x 60º V nominal 1.6 kHz 121 dB 280 W continuous, 560 W peak 1 x JBL 261F 254 mm (10 in) 1 x JBL 2414H-1 25.4 mm (1in) Balanced XLR / 1/4 inch TRS combo jack 1/4 inch TRS jack Balanced male XLR, +20 dBu (peak) 35 mm pole socket with stabilizing screw 3 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 490 x 315 x 262 mm 19.3 x 12.4 x 10.3 in 7.7 kg (17 lb)

INPUT 1 & 2 OUTPUT SUSPENSION/MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
Page 288

595 x 569 x 652 mm 23.4 x 22.4 x 25.7 in 29.5 kg (65 lb)

EON® 300 SERIES

EON® 300 Series
key features
f 15" LOW-FREQUENCY DRIVER WITH A

64MM 2-1/2") DIAMETER EDGE WOUND RIBBON VOICE COIL

f 100° H x 60° V ASYMMETRICAL WAVEGUIDE

FOR UNIFORM AUDIENCE COVERAGE

f LIGHT WEIGHT FOR TRUE PORTABILITY

f EFFICIENT CLASS-D DIGITAL AMPLIFIER TECHNOLOGY (EON315)

Harman Pro Group | 2013

EON305

EON315

Section:

specifications
EON305
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE (-10dB) COVERAGE PATTERN CROSSOVER FREQUENCY SENSITIVITY MAXIMUM SPL SYSTEM POWER RATING TRANSDUCERS: LF HF CONNECTORS: INPUT OUTPUT SUSPENSION/MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

EON changed the way people looked at portable PA well over ten years ago as the all-purpose solution for instant sound reinforcement no matter where you are. And now, EON300 series speakers puts the next generation of EON systems within reach of an even broader range of users, delivering the fundamental elements that make a speaker system an EON at an even more affordable price.

EON305
The EON305 is a 15-inch, two-way, passive, portable speaker system. It is a light weight loudspeaker system capable of fullbandwidth reproduction at high levels. The EON305 is comprised of a 380 mm (15 in) JBL woofer, a 25.4 mm (1 in) neodymium high frequency compression driver coupled to a 100° H by 60° V waveguide. The system will handle 250 watts continuously and 1000 watts peak.

EON315
The EON315 is a 15-inch, two-way, powered, portable speaker system. It is a complete self contained sound reinforcement system, capable of full-bandwidth reproduction at high levels with the added benefit of a microphone pre-amp enabling the direct connection of a dynamic microphone. The EON315 is comprised of a 380 mm (15 in) JBL woofer, a 25.4 mm (1 in) neodymium high frequency compression driver coupled to a 100° H by 60° V waveguide. Both components are driven by the discrete channels of a 280 watt Class-D integrated power amplifier. The input section contains all cross-over functions, protection, and system EQ functionality.

07

EON315
Self-powered 15", two-way, bass-reflex design 38 Hz - 20 kHz (EQ in ‘Flat’ position) 100° H x 60° V nominal 1.8 kHz 127 dB 280 W continuous, 560 W peak 1 x M115-2 380 mm (15 in) 1 x JBL 2414H-1 25.4 mm (1 in) Balanced XLR / 1/4 inch TRS combo jack Balanced male XLR, +20 dBu (peak) o/p level 35 mm pole socket with stabilizing screw 4 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 pull-back point 685 x 438 x 366 mm 27 x 17.3 x 14.4 in 15.9 kg (35 lb)

15", two-way, bass-reflex design 38 Hz - 20 kHz 100° H x 60° V nominal 1.9 kHz 98 dB (1w/1m) 128 dB 250 W continuous, 500 W program, 1000 W peak 1 x M115-8 380 mm (15 in) woofer 1 x JBL 2414H-1 25.4 mm (1 in) Parallel Neutrik® NL4 /1/4" combo connectors 35 mm pole socket with stabilizing screw 4 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 pull-back point 685 x 438 x 366 mm 27 x 17.3 x 14.4 in 15 kg (33 lb)

Page 289

289

PRX600 Series

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

PRX600 Series

Self-Powered Loudspeakers - compact, ultra-lightweight systems … performance you can trust.
The PRX 600 Series represents an evolutionary step in the efficient use of amplifier power, rugged durability and enhanced versatility in a self-powered loudspeaker. The speakers were designed from the ground up to perform in the real world of sound reinforcement where challenging audio environments, high ambient noise levels and loud volumes are the norm. And we’ve built these speakers to last a lifetime using tour tested technology that’s reliable and trustworthy. Knowing you can rely on your system to deliver everything you need gives you the freedom to deliver your best. That’s performance you can trust. With the PRX600 Series, as always, JBL delivers.

Page 290

key features

f BUILT-IN MULTI-CHANNEL CROWN® CLASS-D DIGITAL AMPLIFIER f FULLY-FEATURED INPUT SECTION WITH PROPRIETARY DSP f USER SELECTABLE SYSTEM EQ

f EIGHT (8) M10 SUSPENSION POINTS AND ONE (1) PULL-BACK POINT FOR EASY INSTALLATION f JBL DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE® WOOFERS f NEODYMIUM COMPRESSION DRIVERS

PRX600 Series PRX600 Series

The PRX 600 Series is a platform technology that allows you to create the system you need from an intelligent range of models. While each model was designed to excel at a specific application, the PRX Series integrate seamlessly with one another offering a multitude of choices when tailoring a system to fit your specific needs. Whether you need a single speaker on a stand for public address situations, a fullrange stereo set up with two top cabinets and a subwoofer for live performance or DJ applications, or multiple cabinets for a scalable, highly professional sound reinforcement situation, the PRX600 Series offers the solutions. In fact, you can even suspend any of the top cabinets for use in a commercial installation or House of Worship. If versatility, scalability, portability and affordability are what you’re looking for in a system, PRX 600’s are the intelligent choice.
PRX 612M
12" 2-WAY MULTIPURPOSE SELF-POWERED SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM PRX612M is the most compact and versatile speaker in the PRX600 Series line. It has been designed to deliver superior performance for its weight and size as both a stage monitor and a front of house main PA. Two user selectable EQ settings are provided to optimize the system for either application. With a dual socket pole mount, the PRX612M is a perfect match with either the PRX618S subwoofer or the PRX618SXLF subwoofer. Additionally the PRX612M’s microphone input allows for instantaneous use as convenient, single source PA.

Section:

PRX625
DUAL 15" 2-WAY SELF-POWERED SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM If a simple set-up is required and full bandwidth output at high levels is a must, then the PRX625 is most likely the optimum solution. Dual 15” drivers, coupled with the Crown class D amplifiers offer tremendous punch and depth at heart stopping volume levels – maximum levels are rated at 139 db! As with the entire PRX fullrange models user selectable EQ is provided in addition to a direct microphone input option.

PRX618S
18" SELF POWERED SUBWOOFER SYSTEM Compact and powerful, the PRX618S offers the performance of an 18” subwoofer in a package not much larger than a typical 15” sub. With a pole receptacle (that accepts a SS3-BK) on the top panel and integrated stereo pass-thru, with digital cross-over, this is the perfect compliment to the PRX600 full-range systems. Configured with a PRX612M or PRX615m; the result is a highly transportable, high performance subsatellite system. The addition of a polarity reverse option further enables system optimization.

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

PRX635
15" 3-WAY SELF POWERED SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM The PRX635 offers the highest level of performance in the PRX600 Series that can be mounted on a pole. It is a 3-way configuration and by design, it is the most accurate in the PRX600 Series. With a horn loaded midrange, pattern control is maintained to a much lower frequency resulting in exceptional clarity and uniform sonic projection over the defined coverage area. Ideally suited to applications where the program material, live or prerecorded, has many subtle nuances that are critical to the success of the performance. As with all the full-range PRX600 Series systems, two EQ selections can be used to optimize the system for the program material and/or environment. The input section also accommodates either Line or Mic/Instrument level inputs.

PRX600S-XLF
18" SELF POWERED EXTENDED LOW FREQUENCY SUBWOOFER SYSTEM Featuring an extended low frequency response, this high performance 18” subwoofer system utilizes a 700 watt Crown® class D amplifier in addition to JBL’s Dual-Bridge Technology™, an 18” 2268FF dual voice coil Differential Drive® woofer – technology you need when want to move serious air! The PRX618S – XLF also features a DSP driven input section with selectable crossover, polarity reverse and loopthrough capability for “smart patching” all housed in a rugged, DuraFlex™ covered plywood enclosure with foam backed steel grille, M20 pole mount and non-skid rubber feet.

PRX615M
15" 2-WAY MULTIPURPOSE SELF-POWERED SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM The 2-way 15” is the most recognizable form of a portable PA loudspeaker, the perfect balance between size and performance. Due to the unique shape of the cabinet, the PRX615M can double as a stage monitor or a front of house main speaker and for applications requiring full bandwidth sound reproduction, using only a pair of speakers, the PRX615M delivers the optimum balance. For live music, recorded music playback and speech the user has the option of tailoring the EQ, ‘flat’ for speech intelligibility or use with a sub, and ‘monitor’ for enhanced feedback suppression. As with the PRX612M, a microphone can be directly connected to the speaker input for quick on-the-fly PA applications.

Page 291

291

PORTABLE PRODUCTS

PRX612M PRX615M

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
PRX612M

PRX625 PRX635

PRX618S

PRX618S-XLF

PRX615M

specifications
PRX612M
SYSTEM TYPE MAXIMUM SPL OUTPUT FREQ. RANGE (-10 dB) FREQ. RESPONSE (±3 dB) INPUT CONNECTORS COVERAGE PATTERN AMPLIFIER DESIGN SYSTEM POWER RATING LF DRIVER MID DRIVER HF DRIVER ENCLOSURE SUSPENSION/MOUNTING FINISH DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT GROSS WEIGHT
1 x JBL2408H-1 37.5 mm (1.5 in) Asymmetrical, 18mm plywood Dual 36 mm pole socket 8 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 pull-back point Obsidian DuraFlex™ 592 x 353 x 340 mm 25.3 x 13.9 x 13.4 in 15.6 kg (34.5 lb) 19.2 kg (42.5 lb) Self Powered 12" Two-way Bass-reflex 134 dB (full range) peak 133 dB (monitor) peak 50 Hz - 19.5 kHz 60 Hz - 17.5 kHz Balanced XLR / 1⁄4 in combo jack w/ XLR loop through 90° x 50° nominal Crown Class D 1,000 W (2 x 500) 1 x JBL 262F-1 305 mm (12 in) Differential Drive®

PRX615M

PRX625
Self Powered Dual 15" Two-way Bass-reflex 139 dB peak 40 Hz - 19.5 kHz 55 Hz - 17.5 kHz Balanced XLR / 1⁄4 in combo jack w/ XLR loop through 90° x 50° nominal Crown Class D 1,500 W (3 x 500) 2 x JBL 265F-1 380 mm (15 in) Differential Drive® 1 x JBL2408H-1 37.5 mm (1.5 in) Trapezoidal, 18mm plywood Dual 36 mm pole socket 8 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 pull-back point Obsidian DuraFlex™ 1053 x 430 x 413 mm 41.47 x 16.9 x 16.27 in 27.2 kg (60 lb) 29.2 kg (64.5 lb)

PRX635
Self Powered 15" Three-way Bass-reflex 135 dB peak 41 Hz - 19 kHz 53 Hz - 18 kHz Balanced XLR / 1⁄4 in combo jack w/ XLR loop through 90° x 50° nominal Crown Class D 1,500 W (3 x 500) 1 x JBL 265F-1 380 mm (15 in) Differential Drive® 1 x JBL 195H 165 mm (6.5 in) horn loaded transducer 1 x JBL2414H-1 25.4 mm (1 in) Trapezoidal, 18mm plywood Dual 36 mm pole socket 8 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 pull-back point Obsidian DuraFlex 921 x 429 x 413 mm 36.29 x 16.9 x 16.27 in 27.2 kg (60 lb) 29.2kg (64.5 lb)

PRX618S
Self Powered 18" Bass-reflex 129 dB peak 41 Hz - 130 Hz 50 Hz - 100 Hz Balanced XLR w/ XLR loop thru, 1⁄4 in speaker level input (mono) Crown Class D 600 W 1 x JBL 268G 460 mm (18 in) Differential Drive®

PRX618S-XLF
Self Powered 18" Bass-reflex 133 dB peak 30 Hz - 105 Hz 39 Hz - 93 Hz Balanced XLR / 1⁄4 in combo w/ XLR loop through (stereo) Crown Class D 1,000 W (2 x 500) 1 x JBL 2268FF 460 mm (18 in) Differential Drive®

Self Powered 15" Two-way Bass-reflex 135 dB (full range) peak 134 dB (monitor) peak 45 Hz - 19 kHz 54 Hz - 18 kHz Balanced XLR / 1⁄4 in combo jack w/ XLR loop through 90° x 50° nominal Crown Class D 1,000 W (2 x 500) 1 x JBL 265F-1 380 mm (15 in) Differential Drive® 1 x JBL2408H-1 37.5 mm (1.5 in) Asymmetrical, 18mm plywood Dual 36 mm pole socket 8 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 pull-back point Obsidian DuraFlex™ 660 x 429 x 414 mm 26 x 16.9 x 16.3 in 19.7 kg (43.5 lb) 24.2 kg (53.5 lb)

Rectangular, 18mm plywood

Rectangular, 18mm plywood

Obsidian DuraFlex 685.8 x 530.9 x 614.7 mm 27 x 20.9 x 24.2 in 32.2 kg (70.5 lb) 37.2 kg (82 lb)

Obsidian DuraFlex 685.8 x 530.9 x 716.3 mm 27 x 20.9 x 28.2 in 37 kg (81.5 lb) 42.3 kg (93 lb)

Page 292

JRX100 Series
JRX118S JRX118SP

key features

f PROGRESSIVE TRANSITION™ WAVEGUIDES FOR WELL-CONTROLLED COVERAGE, LOW DISTORTION, AND SMOOTH RESPONSE f SONICGUARD™ HIGH FREQUENCY DRIVER PROTECTION

f ACOUSTICALLY SUPERIOR 3⁄4" MDF ENCLOSURE CONSTRUCTION FOR RUGGEDNESS AND BETTER LOW END PERFORMANCE f TOUGH, NON-RESONANT HANDLES AND 18 GAUGE STEEL GRILLE

JRX125

JRX115

JRX112M

Harman Pro Group | 2013

JRX100 delivers the performance and prestige of JBL at an affordable price point. Everything that makes a speaker perform and sound its best is included and the things that don’t were eliminated. JRX100 delivers unprecedented value.
JRX115, JRX115i
The JRX115 is a trapezoidal, 15" speaker system for use in live sound, dance music, and speech reinforcement. The speaker includes a dual-angle, 35 mm pole mount socket as well as Neutrik® SpeakOn® and 1⁄4" input connectors. Installation version also available with M10 suspension points.

JRX125
The JRX125 is a “quasi three-way” design, with the upper woofer covering both lows and mids. The bottom woofer uses a lower crossover frequency and covers only lows, acting as a builtin subwoofer. It offers the extra low-end of a dual 15" speaker while maintaining the superior midfrequency performance of a single driver system.

JRX118S
The JRX118S subwoofer is driven by a massive JBL 18" woofer with a cast frame and 3" voice coil. We’ve even created settings for the dbx DriveRack® PA Loudspeaker Controller.

Section:

JRX118SP
The JRX118SP is a self-powered version of the JRX118S. It includes a specially designed amplifier with 500 watts (peak) and 300 watts (continuous) power output. This subwoofer features dual inputs with balanced XLR connectors, built-in stereo crossover network, and a peak limiter to protect the amplifier and speaker from clipping.

07

JRX112M, JRX112Mi
The JRX112M is a compact and low-profile stage monitor with optimized performance in the critical mid-range. It also includes JBL‘s dualangle pole socket for use as a front-of-house speaker. Installation version also available with M10 suspension points.

specifications
JRX115, JRX115i
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB)1 FREQUENCY RESPONSE (±3 dB)1 SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE POWER CAPACITY2 PEAK POWER CAPACITY2 MAXIMUM SPL NOMINAL DISPERSION COMPONENTS
Two-Way Speaker 38 Hz - 16 kHz 50 Hz - 12.5 kHz 98 dB SPL 8 ohms 250 watts 1000 watts 128 dB 90° x 50° LF: JBL M115-8A HF: JBL 2412 1 in exit compression driver on Progressive Transition™ Waveguide Neutrik® Speakon® NL-4 (x1); 1⁄4 in TS phone jack (x1); parallel 699 x 460 x 432 mm 27.5 x 18.1 x 17 in 27.4 kg (61 lb)

JRX125
Dual-15" Two-Way Speaker 35 Hz - 16 kHz 45 Hz - 12 kHz 100 dB SPL 4 ohms 500 watts 2000 watts 133 dB 90° x 50° LF: JBL M115-8A x 2 HF: JBL 2412 1 in exit compression driver on Progressive Transition Waveguide Neutrik Speakon NL-4 (x1); 1⁄4 in TS phone jack (x1); parallel 1092 x 464 x 426 mm 43 x 18.3 x 16.8 in 42.6 kg (94 lb)

JRX112M, JRX112Mi
Two-Way Stage Monitor 60 Hz - 16 kHz 70 Hz - 12 kHz 99 dB SPL 8 ohms 250 watts 1000 watts 129 dB 90° x 50° LF: JBL M112-8 HF: JBL 2412 1 in exit compression driver on Progressive Transition Waveguide Neutrik Speakon NL-4 (x1); 1⁄4 in TS phone jack (x1); parallel 584 x 399 x 325 mm 23 x 15.7 x 12.8 in 19.5 kg (43 lb)

JRX118S
18" Subwoofer 38 Hz - 300 Hz 55 Hz - 300 Hz 96 dB SPL 4 ohms 350 watts 1400 watts 127 dB LF: JBL 2043-G

JRX118SP
18 " Powered Subwoofer 38 Hz - 300 Hz 55 Hz - 300 Hz Internal Power Peak: 500 watts Continuous: 300 watts with < 0.2% THD LF: JBL 2043-G

INPUT CONNECTORS OUTPUT CONNECTORS DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

Neutrik Speakon NL-4 (x 2); 1⁄4 in TS phone jack (x 1); parallel 605 x 508 x 551 mm 23.8 x 20 x 21.7 in 32.2 kg (71 lb)

1 “Frequency Range” and “Frequency Response” are based on half-space response. 2 “Power Capacity” and “Peak Power Capacity” ratings are based on the average and peak power handling capacity of product

XLR/M x 2 (line level, balanced); 1⁄4 in TS phone jack x1 (spkr level) XLR/F x 2 (Selectable, Thru or Hi Pass) 605 x 508 x 592 mm 23.8 x 20 x 23.3 in 40.4 kg (89 lb)

samples subjected to a 100 hour power test of the system design using IEC filtered random noise with a crest factor of 6 dB.

Page 293

PORTABLE PRODUCTS

PRX400 Series
PRX400 passive speakers were designed to provide the sensitivity, frequency response and power handling needed for almost any professional audio environment while still being reasonably priced. Whether you use a powered mixer or an equipment rack full of amps and signal processing, PRX400 passive speakers deliver the sound power and bandwidth necessary to make loud music sound natural and even quiet speech intelligible. PRX400 passive speakers are comprised of tour tested JBL components and feature professional connectivity via Neutrik® Speakon combination connectors. PRX400 cabinets are artfully constructed from an 18mm Birch/Poplar multi-laminate hardwood covered in highly resilient DuraFlex™ and feature rugged 16 gauge steel grilles. All full range models utilize twelve M10 suspension points for safe deployment in light duty installations. With three 2-way designs and an 18" sub-woofer, PRX400 passive series tackle tough jobs affordably and professionally. At Home Anywhere Perfect for musicians, DJ’s, House of Worship, public address, or even suspended in a commercial environment like a school or nightclub, PRX400 speakers were crafted to address a multitude of demanding audio environments. The PRX412M and PRX415M can be used as mains or monitors and with the addition of the PRX418 subwoofer you’ll have a sub/sat system capable of generating 135 dB of full-range, high quality audio. The PRX425 dual 15" two-way is the perfect choice for DJ’s and bands who need low-frequency extension from the convenience of a stand-alone cabinet. Installation versions of the PRX412M and PRX415M in white (-WH) are also available.
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

07

PRX425

PRX412M

PRX415M PRX418

PRX415M PRX412M

Page 294

PRX400 SERIES

Grille | Rugged 16-gauge grilles provide serious protection for the JBL tour tested components. Backed with acoustically transparent cloth the grilles are designed for sonic accuracy, structural strength and professional good looks.

Suspension Points | Permanently mounting the PRX400 is easily managed via twelve built-in M10 suspension points constructed from 14 gauge steel. They have been tested with a yield-strength of 1000 pounds each ensuring a safe and secure mount.

Handles | Ergonomically engineered handles are made from light-weight glass-filled nylon for added strength and durability. Intelligently engineered for both balance and comfort in the hand, they make carrying, mounting and positioning each enclosure easily managed in any situation.

Pole Sockets | Built in dual-angle pole mount sockets allow the PRX412M and PRX415M to be stand mounted at different angles to accommodate the best audience coverage pattern. With a 10º down angle, the speaker can be directed down toward your audience, enhancing sound coverage and clarity.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

PRX412M

PRX415M

PRX425

specifications
PRX412M, PRX412M-WH
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE 1 FREQUENCY RESPONSE 1 SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE POWER RATING Continuous/Program/Peak MAXIMUM SPL @ 1 m COVERAGE PATTERN TRANSDUCERS: LF HF FINISH INPUT CONNECTORS DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

PRX418S

PRX415M, PRX415M-WH
15" Two-Way Stage Utility/Monitor 55 Hz - 19 kHz (-10 dB) 66 Hz - 16 kHz (± 3 dB) 98 dB SPL 8 ohms 300 W / 600 W / 1200 W, 2 hrs 2 129 dB SPL peak 4 90° x 50° nominal 1 x JBL M115-8A 380 mm (15 in) 1 x JBL 2414H-C 25 mm (1 in) DuraFlex™ Black, White available Parallel Neutrik® Speakon® NL-2 / ¼" phone combo jacks (x2) 650 x 429 x 457 mm 25.6 x 16.9 x 18 in 21.0 kg (46 lb)
3 30 Hz to 130 Hz pink noise with 6 dB crest

PRX425
Dual 15" High-Power, Two-Way Speaker 48 Hz - 19 kHz (-10 dB) 61 Hz - 16 kHz (± 3 dB) 100 dB SPL 4 ohms 600 W / 1200 W / 2400 W, 2 hrs 2 134 dB SPL peak 4 90° x 50° nominal 2 x JBL M115-8A 380 mm (15 in) 1 x JBL 2414H-C 25 mm (1 in) DuraFlex™ Black Parallel Neutrik® Speakon® NL-2 / ¼" phone combo jacks (x2) 1044 x 429 x 521 mm 41.1 x 16.9 x 20.5 in 33.5 kg (74 lb)
4 Calculated based on power rating and

PRX418S
18" High-Power Subwoofer 35 Hz – 250 Hz (-10 dB) 52 Hz – 120 Hz (± 3 dB) 95 dB SPL; 100 dB SPL 8 ohms 800 W/ 1600 W/ 3200 W, 2 hrs 3 130 dB SPL peak 5 90° x 50° nominal 1 x JBL Selenium SWS1000W 457 mm (18 in) DuraFlex™ Black Two Neutrik® Speakon® NL-2 / ¼" TS phone combo jacks 678 x 536 x 615 mm 26.7 x 21.1 x 24.2 in 36 kg (79 lb)
5 Calculated on half space condition

12" Two-Way Stage Utility/Monitor 50 Hz - 20 kHz(-10 dB) 62 Hz - 19 kHz (± 3 dB) 95 dB SPL 8 ohms 300 W / 600 W / 1200 W, 2 hrs 2

126 dB SPL peak 4 90° x 50° nominal 1 x JBL MB112-8 305 mm (12 in) 1 x JBL 2414H-C 25 mm (1 in) DuraFlex™ Black, White available Parallel Neutrik® Speakon® NL-2 / ¼" phone combo jacks 574 x 353 x 399 mm 22.6 x 13.9 x 15.7 in 16 kg (35.0 lb)
1 Based on π acoustical loading. 2 IEC standard, full bandwidth pink noise

factor for specified period

sensitivity

with 6 dB crest factor for specified period.

Page 295

PORTABLE PRODUCTS

STX800® Series

STX812M

STX825

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 296

STX835 STX818S STX815M

STX828S STX812M STX815M

The STX800 Series embodies the Total Performance principle that drives JBL's development of audio products that make a real difference in the world of professional audio. Their superb sonic performance is based on time tested JBL technology: high power handling transducers that deliver extremely low distortion, precision waveguides for precise pattern control, and intelligent cabinet architecture that is engineered for easy handling, minimal space displacement and rugged transport. And the appearance was sculpted to complement our high end VTX touring systems as well as our current PRX portable PA offerings. But it doesn’t stop there… STX is VTX Series compliant with tunings available in Performance Manager™ and Crown® ITHD power amplifiers. The STX800 Series was designed to bridge the space between light-duty portable PA speakers and flown full-size line array tour sound systems. Our goals at the inception of this project were simple: Offer a high performance, high density system solution in a truck-pack friendly format Develop concert-worthy floor monitors and side fills that could affordably complement any touring sound system Deliver an affordable, great sounding subwoofer that could reproduce true low frequency at elevated sound pressure levels With four full-range systems and two subwoofers, the STX Series can cover just about any professional application. As with all JBL sound reinforcement products, the technology of the STX Series is designed from the ground up employing the best componentry JBL has to offer in products of this class. STX800 speakers feature the latest evolution of our Vented Gap Cooling: Super Vented Gap Technology. Building on the advantages of VGC - low power compression, low distortion, high power handling, lower weight and smoother response - SVG transducers attain higher power handling capabilities due to more effective heat sinking, with minimal dynamic compression and magnet topology enhancements for even lower distortion. Whether you’re in need of ancillary speakers for a full-blown tour sound system, ground-stacking for a live concert performance, installing speakers in dance clubs or performance venues, touring clubs with your band, or you are a performing mobile DJ, STX800 Series is the smart choice.

STX800 SERIES

CMCD™ Cone Midrange Compression Driver: The STX835 features JBL’s patented CMCD Cone Midrange Compression Driver technology that provides very low mid-range distortion, increased sensitivity, extended bandwidth and improved phase coherence. Coupled to the CMCD is JBL’s Progressive Transition™ (PT) waveguide providing optimal array ability and predictable acoustic performance in real world applications. High-Frequency Compression Drivers: High frequencies are handled by JBL 2432H 3" voicecoil or 2453H 4" voice-coil, titanium diaphragm, neodymium compression drivers. In addition to the weight reduction provided by neodymium, the large voice coils and diaphragms in these drivers are capable of handling high power levels with reduced distortion and increased phase coherence resulting in smooth, crystal clear high frequencies. Patented Progressive Transition (PT) Waveguides: High frequency drivers use JBL’s patented Progressive Transition Waveguides which offer dramatically advanced constant beamwidth and directivity, lower distortion, and overall smooth frequency response free of high-Q peaks. Wide coverage angles are achieved without compromise and harmonic distortion is minimized to allow maximum SPL capability of the compression drivers without harshness.

Bi-Amp or Full-Range Operation: All STX800 two and three-way models may be operated full-range or bi-amplified. The selection is made by means of a high-current, recessed switch mounted on the input plate. The same switch arrangement is used on the subwoofer to select ±1 or ±2 operation. 100 Hour Torture Test: Like all JBL Professional products, the STX Series is brutalized in JBL’s speaker torture test. Unique in the industry, the JBL torture extended life test submits each component and the complete system to 100 hours of continuous, high level input, ensuring that your system will deliver extraordinary sound even after years of tough handling and thousands of hours of performance. Enclosures: The STX Series multi-ply enclosures are manufactured with precision CNC engineering techniques that allow precise tolerances and consistent production. All STX enclosures are constructed from top quality birch/poplar plywood with extensive use of internal braces and bulkheads reducing acoustically harmful internal resonances. Coated in JBLs rugged DuraFlex™ finish, they will stand up to years of real world abuse. All speakers feature road tough 14-gauge steel grilles lined with acoustically transparent cloth to provide minimal acoustic interference and maximize driver protection.

Suspension: All full range STX800 enclosures (except the STX812M monitor) include multiple M10 rigging points for fast, safe and secure suspension. Seamless Integration: STX800 Series is compatible with Crown® Audio VRack, with V5 Level processing, ensuring that STX Series enclosures are optimally powered and processed. There is no need for laborious rack building, no chance that a component might be improperly connected, and a dramatically lower chance of connection failure. VRack also ensures compatibility when integrating STX Series enclosures with a VTX Line Array system. JBL HiQnet® Performance Manager™ Software: The STX Series integrates with JBL HiQnet Performance Manager which guides the system design, configuration and control process in a user friendly fashion much like a simple step-bystep wizard. And since Performance Manager is compatible with VTX Line Array systems, integrating STX enclosures is managed in an efficient and intelligent fashion. All test, tuning and calibration control interfaces are embedded eliminating the need to design control panels and the dedicated “show mode” provides all the monitoring and control needed to run a live performance.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

STX812M
Designed specifically to be a high performance 12" two-way floor monitor, it can also do double duty as a utility speaker for use on a tripod stand or over a subwoofer, utilizing a singleposition pole mount. A 70 degree by 70 degree waveguide is utilized for precise coverage.

STX825
A dual 15" two-way speaker designed for maximum impact, portability and ease of use. With a wide frequency range and broad 90 degree by 50 degree coverage angles, this speaker is ideal for bands or DJ’s as their primary PA, use as a side-fill on a concert stage, or as an install speaker in a dance club or performance venue.

STX818S
A single 18" compact high power subwoofer system in a front-loaded, vented enclosure designed for minimum frontal area provides 1,000 watts of continuous pink noise power handling, 2 kW program and 4 kW peak. The STX818S also comes equipped with a top-mounted M20 polemount and an optional wheel kit.

STX815M
A single 15" lightweight two-way system designed to function as a high-power handling, FOH loudspeaker system or as an extended range floor monitor, it offers an extremely high level of performance either ground, pole or stand mounted. A 70 degree by 70 degree coverage angle for focused directivity control.

STX835
A slot-loaded dual 15" three-way system with horn-loaded mid and high sections, designed for full-range use in stand-alone applications or for use in high performance environments as the premier ground stack passive top box. Designed to be placed over the STX828, this cabinet can be used in multiples in a high density situation; the STX835 can deliver amazing sound clarity at high SPL’s. The STX835’s 60 degree by 40 degree mid- and high-frequency waveguides allows two cabinets to be splayed for wide angle coverage.

STX828S
A dual 18" high power subwoofer system in a front-loaded, vented enclosure designed for maximum low-frequency performance. The STX828 has an optional wheel kit. Two drivers give 2,000 watts of continuous pink noise power handling, 4kW program and 8 kW peak.

Page 297

key features

f BI-AMPLIFIED OR FULL-RANGE PASSIVE OPERATION f POLE SOCKET FOR APPLICATIONS REQUIRING POLE OR TRIPOD MOUNTING f HIGH POWER HANDLING, LOW DISTORTION VGC™ LF DRIVERS

f RUGGED DURAFLEX™ COATED ENCLOSURE SIZED TO BE TRUCK PACK FRIENDLY f 14-GAUGE STELL GRILLE LINED WITH ACOUSTICALLY TRANSPARENT CLOTH

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

STX812M
SYSTEM TYPE 12" Two-Way, Bass-Reflex, FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB) FREQUENCY RESPONSE (±3 dB) COVERAGE PATTERN SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m POWER RATING: 2 (Continuous/Program/Peak) RATED MAXIMUM SPL 3 NOMINAL IMPEDANCE INPUT CONNECTORS OPERATIONAL MODES DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each) SUSPENSION/MOUNTING ACCESSORIES
Stage Monitor/Utility 50 Hz-20 kHz 75 Hz-20 kHz 70˚ × 70˚ nominal 95 dB 800 W / 1600 W / 3200 W 130 dB SPL Peak 8 ohms Two NL4 Full Range/Bi-Amp 571 x 355 x 264 mm (22.5 x 13.4 x 10.4 in) 19 kg ( 42 lb) N/A STX812M-YK Suspension/Mounting Yoke

STX815M
15" Two-Way, Bass-Reflex, Stage Monitor/Utility 41 Hz-20 kHz 55 Hz-20 kHz 70˚ × 70˚ nominal 96 dB 800 W / 1600 W / 3200 W 131 dB SPL Peak 8 ohms Two NL4 Full Range/Bi-Amp 721 x 436 x 329 mm (28.4 x 17.2 x 13.0 in) 26 kg (58 lb) Twelve M10 Suspension Points Eyebolt Kit

STX825
Dual 15" Two-Way, Bass-Reflex 34 Hz-20 kHz 42 Hz-19 kHz 90˚ × 50˚ nominal 98 dB 1600 W / 3200 W / 6400 W 136 dB SPL Peak 4 ohms Two NL4 Full Range/Bi-Amp 1066 x 568 x 573 mm (42.0 x 22.4 x 22.6 in) 51 kg (112 lb) Twelve M10 Suspension Points Eyebolt Kit

STX835
Dual 15" Three-Way with Horn-Loaded MF/HF section, slot-loaded LF 32 Hz-20 kHz 43 Hz-20 kHz 60˚ × 40˚ nominal 96 dB 1600 W / 3200 W / 6400 W 134 dB SPL Peak 4 ohms Two NL4 Full Range/Bi-Amp with internal passive mid-high crossover network 1066 x 568 x 573 mm (42.0 x 22.4 x 22.6 in) 57 kg (126 lb) Twelve M10 Suspension Points Eyebolt Kit

STX818S
SYSTEM TYPE Single 18" Bass Reflex FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB) FREQUENCY RESPONSE (±3 dB) COVERAGE PATTERN SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m POWER RATING: 2 (Continuous/Program/Peak) RATED MAXIMUM SPL 3 NOMINAL IMPEDANCE INPUT CONNECTORS OPERATIONAL MODES DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each) SUSPENSION/MOUNTING ACCESSORIES
35 Hz-250 Hz 40 Hz-120 Hz N/A 96 dB 1000 W / 2000 W / 4000 W 132 dB SPL Peak 8 ohms Two NL4 Subwoofer 558 x 568 x 718 mm (22.0 x 22.4 x 28.3 in) 45 kg (100 lb) N/A WK-4 Caster Kit; SS4-BK Adjustable heavy-duty pole, M20 thread to 35 mm
1 Based on 2π acoustic load

STX828S
Dual 18" Bass Reflex 32 Hz-250 Hz 37 Hz-120 Hz N/A 99 dB 2000 W / 4000 W / 8000 W 138 dB SPL Peak 4 ohms Two NL4 Subwoofer 564 x 1137 x 708 mm (22.2 x 44.8 x 27.9 in) 82 kg (180 lb) N/A WK-4 Caster Kit

TRUCK PACK FRIENDLY
All STX800 Series cabinets were sized in an effort to maximize the interior compartments of most standard transport vehicles. Considerations were made to help STX owners exploit the given area in an effort to reduce fuel costs by eliminating additional vehicles or extra trips.

2 IEC Filtered Noise with 6 dB Crest Factor, 2 hours duration

3 Calculated based on power rating and sensitivity

Page 298

VRX900 SERIES

VRX900 Series
VRX928LA and VRX915S are now available in white (-WH). Three VRX928LA-WH and one VRX915S-WH are shown.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

The new VRX Series addresses the growing need for a small format professional sound system for sound rental companies, fixed installations and musicians looking for the ultimate in performance and portability. Sharing components with the JBL VERTEC® Line Array Series, the worldwide touring industry standard, the VRX Series features the performance of high end line arrays in a compact format. It’s affordable and flexible and provides outstanding coverage and output coherence, while delivering extraordinary power handling, clarity and flexibility. The VRX Series features the hallmark of all JBL products – stunning, legendary JBL sound.

Section:

07
VERSATILE CONFIGURATIONS
Fly your VRX900 Array: The VRX Series is equipped with JBL’s exclusive integral rigging hardware that allows the enclosures to be quickly and securely locked to one another by simply swinging a hinged bar into place and securing it with the included quick release pins. VRX900 line arrays and subwoofers may be suspended using the VRX-AF and VRX-SMAF array frame providing an easy to use, elegant suspension system for flown arrays. Pole Mount: To create a small, compact nonflying system, the VRX may be mounted on a tripod. For greater power and low-frequency extension, one or two VRXs may be pole-mounted over their companion subwoofer. Single Cabinet: When configured for smaller venues, or musicians working alone, the compact size, portability, light weight and stunning performance of the VRX allow it to be used as a single cabinet two-way utility speaker system that can be conveniently mounted on a tripod. Ground Stack: For reaching bleacher and stadium seating from ground level, the VRX’s ingenious cabinet design allows it to be ground stacked in configurations of up to 4 enclosures delivering all of the power, clarity and control of a full flown line array system without the additional labor and expense.

CONSTANT CURVATURE LINE ARRAY
The VRX waveguide mounts three compression drivers on a continuous arc enabling them to work together acoustically as if they were a single source, while dramatically increasing the power handling and acoustic output when compared to a single driver system. Additional enclosures can be added creating an uninterrupted, continuous arc with all of the drivers working together seamlessly as if they were one driver on a very long waveguide.

DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE® WOOFERS
JBL designed the VRX’s drivers with much less weight than comparable drivers and yet significantly increased power handling and output. Super lightweight neodymium magnets positioned inside the voice coil of each driver, a key feature of JBL’s patented Differential Drive woofer design, reduce the massive steel top plates, back plates and pole pieces found in the ‘magnetic circuits’ of conventional loudspeakers. The VRX’s dual voice coil design delivers greater power handling while maximizing the performance of each driver.

AMPLITUDE SHADING
For a smooth, consistent sound field, the VRX uses JBL’s Array Configuration Selector, a convenient series of switches on each enclosure that controls the output of each high-frequency section in the array so each section of the venue can be fine tuned for a balanced, seamless overall coverage pattern.

ARRAY TOOL
The VRX932LA and VRX928LA array tools provide visual help for the user to better understand and deploy a VRX900 Line Array. Acoustic performance can be quickly assessed by simply creating a two dimensional view of the environment the VRX900 system would be used in. The effect of adding systems to the array and adjustments of the Array Configuration Selector can be quickly analyzed. Information can be found online at: http://www.jblpro.com/vrx/ ARRAYTOOL.HTML .
Page 299

key features

f PATENTED DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE® WOOFERS WITH NEODYMIUM MAGNETS f MULTIPLE NEODYMIUM, ANNULAR DIAPHRAGM RING DRIVERS PER SPEAKER f CONSTANT CURVATURE WAVEGUIDE

f DUAL ANGLE POLE SOCKET f INTEGRAL RIGGING HARDWARE f ARRAY CONFIGURATION SELECTOR FOR “ARRAY SHADING”

VRX900 Series

VRX915M
The VRX915M is a dedicated, compact and lightweight 15" two way touring-class floor monitor, with only a 375 mm (14.75 in) stage height and JBL’s latest neodymium-magnet transducers. Bi-amp or full-range passive operation may be selected via a recessed, highcurrent switch mounted alongside the NL4 input connector in one of the handle cups. An additional NL4 connector is mounted in the other handle cup for a convenient loop-thru connection.

VRX932LAP
The VRX932LA is a powered, lightweight, compact 12" two-way linearray speaker system designed for use in arrays of up to five units. VRX932LAP is the ideal choice when line-array performance is needed but the venue size doesn’t call for the very long-throw characteristics of larger line-arrays and a fast and easy setup is vital. One or two VRX932LAP’s may also be used on a tripod or over subwoofers. The integrated rigging hardware is used to securely lock the array together while the dual-angle pole socket provides aiming flexibility. As many as five VRX932LAP speaker systems may be suspended in a single array for a nominal vertical coverage of up to 75°. Suspended applications require the JBL VRX-AF array frame or eye bolts (available separately).
VRX932LAP

VRX928LA
The VRX928LA is a lightweight (28 lb / 13 kg) compact 8" two-way linearray speaker system designed for use in arrays of up to six units. VRX928LA is the ideal choice when line-array performance is needed but the venue size doesn’t call for the very long-throw characteristics of the larger VRX932LA. As many as six VRX928LA speaker systems may be suspended in a single array for a nominal vertical coverage of up to 90°. Suspended applications require the JBL VRX928LA-SMAF array frame (available separately). For applications in which the array must be aimed sharply down, a second Array Frame may be installed to the bottom of the array serving as a pull-back.

VRX918S
For applications requiring the sonic and practical advantages of integrating the subwoofers into the flying array JBL offers the VRX918S, a compact, high power, suspendable subwoofer system using an 18" Differential Drive® woofer in a front-loaded, vented enclosure. The VRX918S was designed specifically for use in arrays with the VRX932LA Line Array speaker and VRX-AF Array Frame. It may also flown in arrays consisting entirely of VRX918S or ground stacked. The VRX918S, with the exception of the VRX918SWH, is equipped with a top-mounted, threaded, 20 mm socket that can receive the optional SS4BK pole. Users who don’t require a suspendable subwoofer can opt for the acoustically identical SRX718S sub.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

VRX915S
The VRX915S is a compact, high power suspendable subwoofer system containing a 2265G-1 neodymium magnet, patented Differential Drive®, 15" woofer in a frontloaded, vented enclosure. The VRX915S was designed specifically for use in arrays with the VRX928LA Line Array speaker and VRX-SMAF Array Frame. In addition it may also be used in arrays consisting entirely of VRX915S subwoofers. The system offers complete input connection flexibility for compatibility with a variety of cabling schemes.

VRX932LA-1
The VRX932LA is designed for use in arrays of up to six units. Each VRX932LA contains three drivers, which results combined power handling and acoustic output far greater than a single driver could achieve. As many as six VRX932LA speaker systems may be suspended in a single array for a nominal vertical coverage of up to 90°. Suspended applications require the JBL VRX932LA-AF array frame (available separately). For applications in which the array must be aimed sharply down, a second array frame may be installed to the bottom of the array serving as a pull-back. One or two VRX932LAs may also be used on a tripod or over subwoofers, with the exception of VRX932LA-WH. The integral rigging hardware is used to securely lock the array together while the dual-angle pole socket provides aiming flexibility.

VRX918SP
The VRX918SP is a powered, suspendable subwoofer system containing a 2268FF neodymium magnet, patented Differential Drive®, 18" woofer in a front-loaded, vented enclosure. The VRX918SP was designed specifically for use in arrays with the VRX932LAP Line Array speaker and VRX-AF Array Frame. In addition it may also be used in arrays consisting entirely of VRX918SP subwoofers. Equally at home in ground stacked applications, the VRX918SP is equipped with a top-mounted, threaded, 20 mm socket that can receive the optional SS4-BK pole.

VRX918SP (Back View)

VRX932LAP (Back View)

The two most popular VRX900 models are now available in a powered version for a setup that’s even faster and easier. The JBL DrivePack® DPC-2 amplifier module with integrated DSP provides the power and system management. Dual Bridged Technology directly links discrete amplifier channel outputs with each voice-coil in the Differential Drive woofer to deliver the most efficient power match.

Page 300

PORTABLE PRODUCTS

The VRX928LA is designed to fit perfectly on top the compact VRX915S 15" subwoofer. This system is designed to work in even smaller spaces and to be ultra portable.

VRX932LA-1 (3 shown) VRX932LAP

VRX928LA (2 shown)

Harman Pro Group | 2013

VRX918S VRX918SP

VRX915S

Section:

07
VRX915M

specifications
VRX915M
SYSTEM TYPE FREQ. RANGE (-10 dB)1 FREQ. RESPONSE (±3dB)1 SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE: PASSIVE BI-AMP MAXIMUM SPL @ 1 m POWER RATING: PASSIVE BI-AMP Continuous/Program/Peak NOMINAL DISPERSION TRANSDUCERS: LF HF ENCLOSURE FINISH INPUT CONNECTORS DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
8 ohms 127 dB SPL continuous 133 dB SPL peak 2 800 W / 1600 W / 3200 W 2

VRX928LA VRX928LA-WH

VRX932LA-1 VRX932LA-WH
12" Two-way, Powered Line Array Loudspeaker System 57 Hz - 20 kHz 75 Hz - 20 kHz Passive: 95 dB SPL, Bi-Amp LF: 95 dB SPL Bi-Amp HF 114 dB SPL3 8 ohms LF: 8 ohms/HF: 16 ohms Passive: 130 dB SPL 2 Bi-amp LF: 130 dB SPL Bi-amp HF: 139 dB SPL 3 800 W / 1600 W / 3200 W LF: 800 W / 1600 W / 3200 W 2 HF: 75 W / 150 W / 300 W 100º x 15º 1 x JBL 2262H (12 in) 3 x JBL 2408J (1.5 in) 18 mm - 25 mm multi-ply birch plywood Black DuraFlex finish Neutrik Speakon NL-4 (x2) 349 x 597 x 381 mm 13.75 x 23.5 x 15.0 in 21.0 kg (46 lb)

VRX932LAP
12" Two-way, powered Line Array Loudspeaker System 57 Hz - 20 kHz 75 Hz - 20 kHz Passive: 95 dB SPL, Bi-Amp LF: 95 dB SPL Bi-Amp HF 114 dB SPL3

VRX915S VRX915S-WH
15" Bass-reflex Subwoofer 35 Hz - 250 Hz 40 Hz - 250 Hz 91 dB SPL

VRX918S VRX918S-WH
18" Bass-reflex Subwoofer 31 Hz - 220 Hz 34 Hz - 220 Hz 95 dB SPL

VRX918SP
18" Bass-reflex Powered Subwoofer 31 Hz - 220 Hz 34 Hz - 220 Hz

15" Two-way Stage Monitor 12" Two-way, Powered Line Array Loudspeaker System 60 Hz - 20 kHz 70 Hz - 20 kHz 70 Hz - 20 kHz 87 Hz - 19 kHz 98 dB SPL Passive: 90 dB SPL, Bi-Amp LF: 90 dB SPL Bi-Amp HF 108 dB SPL3 8 ohms LF: 8 ohms/HF: 16 ohms Passive: 122 dB SPL 2 Bi-amp LF: 122 dB SPL Bi-amp HF: 128 dB SPL 3 400 W / 800 W / 1600 W LF: 400 W / 800 W / 1600 W 2 HF: 30 W / 60 W / 120W 100º x 15º 1 x JBL 2168H-1 (8 in) 2 x JBL 2414H (1 in) 15 mm - 25 mm multi-ply birch plywood Black DuraFlex finish Neutrik Speakon NL-4 (x2) 230 x 419 x 267 mm 9.0 x 16.5 x 10.5 in 12.7 kg (28 lb)

LF: 2 x 2 ohms / HF: 4 ohms 4 ohms 136 dB SPL 2 126dB SPL peak 2

8 ohms 130 dB SPL peak 2

2 x 2 ohms 126dB SPL peak 2

Internal DPC-2 : 875W Cont. / 1750W Peak LF: 750 W / HF:125 W 100º x 15º 1 x JBL 2262FF (12 in) 3 x JBL 2408J (1.5 in) 15mm - 25 mm multi-ply birch plywood Black DuraFlex finish AC: Neutrik PowerCon (NAC 3MPA) 349 x 597 x 444 mm 13.75 x 23.5 x 17.5 in 24.0 kg (52 lb)

800 W / 1600 W / 3200 W 4 800 W / 1600 W / 3200 W4

Internal DPC-2 : 750W

50º x 90º 1 x JBL 2265H 1 x JBL 2452H (4 in) 15/18 mm birch plywood Black DuraFlex™ finish Neutrik® Speakon® NL-4 (x2) 629 x 432 x 324 mm 24.75 x 17 x 12.75 in 21 kg (46 lb)

1 x JBL 2265G-1 (15 in) Differential Drive Woofer 15/18 mm birch plywood Black DuraFlex finish Neutrik Speakon NL-4 (x2) 496 x 420 x 597 mm 19.5 x 16.5 x 23.5 in 26 kg (57 lb)

1 x JBL 2268H (18 in) Differential Drive Woofer 18 mm, 11- ply birch plywood Black DuraFlex finish Neutrik Speakon NL-4 (x2) 508 x 597 x 749 mm 20.0 x 23.5 x 29.5 in 37 kg (81 lb)

1 x JBL 2268FF (18 in) Differential Drive Woofer 18 mm, 11- ply birch plywood Black DuraFlex finish AC: Neutrik PowerCon (NAC 3MPA) 508 x 597 x 749 mm 20.0 x 23.5 x 29.5 in 38.5 kg (85 lb)

1 “Frequency Range” and “Frequency Response”

are based on half-space conditions.

2 IEC filtered noise with 6 dB crest factor, 2 hrs.

3 HF driver sensitivity is based on measurements

averaged between 1.5 kHz – 16 kHz

4 40 - 120 Hz pink noise, 6 dB crest factor, 2 hrs.

Page 301

Tour Sound Products

Section:

07
2269H Ultra Long Excursion 18" Woofer

Harman Pro Group | 2013 JBL VERTEC® Line Array Systems (VT4889, VT4880A) for World’s Largest Music Festival (Rock In Rio, Lisbon and Madrid) Rental System Contractor: Gabisom
Perhaps more than any other single company in the professional sound industry, JBL Professional, under the guiding wisdom of founder James B. Lansing, has shaped large scale forms of public entertainment we now take for granted. Through Mr. Lansing’s development of revolutionary transducers and the resulting sound reinforcement technologies, concerts and special events of all types can now enjoy exceptional sound quality.

2166H Long-Throw 6.5" Woofer

D2430K Dual Diaphragm Compression Driver

JBL has continued this tradition of revolutionary technology with VERTEC® line arrays – a flexible, high performance product line including subcompact, compact, midsize and fullsize line array elements and companion subwoofers, along with powered options equipped with JBL DrivePack® technology. It’s the ideal solution to a broad range of sound reinforcement challenges for both portable rental inventories, and fixed performance-venues.

Page 302

PAGE 18

TOUR SOUND PRODUCTS

VERTEC® Series
JBL’s early research into column-type line arrays nearly 40 years ago provides a solid foundation for VERTEC – line arrays with lineage. Combining JBL’s latest generation of high-powered lightweight transducers with proven line array theory, precisely-adjustable array elements and accurate prediction software, this industry-leading product line enables tour sound system operators, rental companies and performance venues to achieve predictable, consistent results. All models in the VERTEC product line are engineered to offer sound reinforcement professionals solutions to meet nearly any challenge. Each model is compatible with others in the line, both mechanically and acoustically. With built-in advantages like lightweight construction, high output, and integral suspension hardware, each VERTEC model is designed to deliver premium-quality audio for a wide range of applications including concert touring, corporate A/V, and fixed installation in performance venues.
HIGH-PERFORMANCE FEATURES
Each model in the VERTEC system family features high performance technologies, engineered to work together to maximize utility and audio performance. PlyMax® enclosure technology is used for constructing the VT4889-1, VT4888, VT4887A, VT4882, VT4881A and VT4880/80A systems. PlyMax offers rigid enclosure characteristics along with dramatic weight savings. Advanced Transducers give each VERTEC system its performance edge. All models feature dual voice coil Differential Drive™ technology, providing unparalleled output capability for which VERTEC is legendary, while ensuring pristine, low-distortion audio reproduction. Precision waveguides are coupled to the advanced-technology compression drivers to create an uninterrupted vertical ‘ribbon’ of high frequency energy in the full-range system. Radiation Boundary Integrators™ for the midrange section of each system reduce diffraction effects providing smooth high frequency coverage.

ARRAY FRAME OPTIONS
The VERTEC suspension system includes several frame options for suspending arrays. “AF”(Array Frames) and “SF”(Short Frames) are available for use with sub compact, compact, midsize and fullsize elements. The Short Frames can also be used as an ‘anchor’ at the bottom of large arrays, providing a separate rear pickup point to tilt the array. These frames are also suitable for groundstacking up to 6 enclosures (AF models) or 4 enclosures (SF models).

VT4887A
Compact, lightweight line array element housing two 8" woofers, four 4" midrange transducers, and two high frequency compression drivers. Offering the best low frequency extension and output in its class, it can be used in stand-alone arrays or in combination with other VERTEC system products.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

VT4886
Subcompact Passive Three-Way Line Array Element fitted with two 6.5” woofers, four 2.5” midrange transducers, and two high frequency drivers with a highly-refined internal passive network. Designed for stand-alone use or in multibox arrays, and ideal for use in combination with the VT4883 Subcompact subwoofer.

LINE ARRAY CALCULATOR
This predictive software provides a wealth of technical information about VERTEC line array system performance expectations for various audience configurations.

Section:

07

VT4889-1
Fullsize, lightweight enclosure housing two 15" woofers, four 8" midrange transducers, and three high frequency compression drivers. These advanced components provide the highest power-to-weight ratio of any speaker in the fullsize line array class.

VT4880/VT4880A
Fullsize, lightweight, centrally-vented arrayable subwoofers housing two 18" woofers. These advanced components, each fitted with dual voice coils, provide high output capabilities and are fully compatible with VT4889-1 fullrange systems.

VT4882
Midsize, lightweight, centrally-vented subwoofer enclosure housing two long-excursion 15" woofers. These advanced components, each with dual voice coils, provide high output capabilities and best-in-class power-to-weight ratio.

TOUR-READY SYSTEMS
Each model in the VERTEC line is intended to support the type of rugged use encountered when transported from venue to venue. Care has been given to system design ergonomics, making VERTEC arrays among the simplest and fastest to setup and takedown. All enclosures feature JBL Professional’s rugged DuraFlex™ exterior finish. Each system features loudspeaker components with weather-resistant cone treatment.

VT4888
Midsize, lightweight line array element housing two 12" woofers, four 51⁄2" midrange transducers, and two high frequency compression drivers. Designed for use in stand-alone arrays or in combination with other VERTEC system products.

VT4881A
Compact, lightweight, vented subwoofer enclosure housing a dual voice coil 18" woofer. This advanced component has a compliance capable of nearly 3" (76 mm) peak-topeak cone excursion, providing unparalleled low frequency extension and output

S.A.F.E.™ SUSPENSION HARDWARE
All models in the VERTEC line are fitted with integral side-mounted suspension frames. These load-rated, heat-treated, premium-grade tubular frames couple together using quick-release pins and hinge bars to create arrays that are rigid for maximum strength, yet flexible in design and application.

VERTEC line array elements are available with dolly wheel-boards that double as a protective front plate, and reinforced, padded covers for maximum protection during handling and transport.

VT4883
Subcompact Dual 12" Cardioid-Arrayable Subwoofer is a companion low frequency extension for the VT4886 subcompact 3-way enclosure. Fitted with a pair of long-excursion 12” woofers to deliver high quality sound reinforcement of sub-low frequencies for a variety of applications where small enclosure size is key.

Page 303

TOUR SOUND PRODUCTS

VERTEC® SYSTEM FEATURES

VERTEC®

Flexible Line Array Solutions
VT4889-1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

PRECISION WAVEGUIDES

RBI™: RADIATION INPUT PANEL WITH BOUNDARY INTEGRATOR PARALLEL CONNECTORS

2255H 15" DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE® LOUDSPEAKER

2250H 8" MIDRANGE CONE TRANSDUCER

2435H HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPRESSION DRIVER

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

FULLSIZE

MIDSIZE

COMPACT

SUBCOMPACT

full range
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RESPONSE COVERAGE (H) -6 dB SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE INPUT POWER RATING1: LF MF/HF TRANSDUCERS ENCLOSURE FINISH INPUT CONNECTORS DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

VT4889-1
Fullsize Three-way Line Array Element 45 Hz - 16 kHz (± 3 dB) 90° nominal (250 Hz – 16 kHz) LF: 99 dB, MF: 102 dB, HF: 116 dB LF: 2 x 8 ohms, MF: 8 ohms, HF: 16 ohms 2 x 1000 W 1400 W MF/ 225 W HF LF: 2 x 2255H (15 in) MF: 4 x 2250H (8 in) VERTEC® VT4889 HF: 3 x 2435H Wedge Frustrum PlyMax® DuraFlex™ NL8, 2 each 489 x 1213 x 546 mm 2001 WINNER 19.25 x 47.75 x 21 in 79.8 kg (176 lb)
1 AES 2 hour Standard, free air.

VT4888
Midsize Three-way Line Array Element 60 Hz - 16 kHz (± 3 dB) 90° nominal (250 Hz – 16 kHz) LF: 98 dB, MF: 102 dB, HF: 114 dB LF: 2 x 8 ohms, MF: 8 ohms, HF: 16 ohms 2 x 1000 W 600 W MF/ 150 W HF LF: 2 x 2262H (12 in) MF: 4 x 2106H (5 1⁄2 in) HF: 2 x 2431H Wedge Frustrum, PlyMax DuraFlex NL8, 2 each 355 x 991 x 508 mm 14 x 39 x 20 in 51.3 kg (113 lb)

VT4887A
Compact Bi-amped Line Array Element 67 Hz - 20 kHz (± 3 dB) 100° nominal (500 Hz - 16 kHz) LF: 97 dB, MF/HF: 103 dB LF: 8 ohms, MF/HF: 8 ohms 1000 W 225 W (MF/HF) LF: 2 x 2168J-1 (8 in) MF: 4 x 2104H (4 in) VERTEC® VT4887 HF: 2 x 2408H Wedge Frustrum, PlyMax DuraFlex NL8 and NL-4, 2 each 281 x 787 x 415 mm 2003 WINNER 11 x 31 x 16.3 in 30.4 kg (67 lb)

VT4886
Subcompact Passive 3-Way Line Array Element 75 Hz - 18 kHz 110° nominal (250 Hz – 16 kHz) 101 dB 12 ohms 900 W LF: 2 x 2166H Dual-Coil (6.5" in) MF: 4 x 2103G (2.5 in) VERTEC® VT4886 HF:2 x 2414H Wedge Frustrum, PlyMax DuraFlex NL8 and NL-4, 2 each 197 x 579 x 261 mm 2011 WINNER 7.8 x 22.8 x 10.3 in 15.4 kg (34 lb)

subwoofers

VT4880
Fullsize Dual 18" Subwoofer 29 Hz - 120 Hz (± 3 dB) 98 dB 2 x 8 ohms 2 x 1000 W 2 x 2258H Dual-Coil (18 in) Wedge Frustrum DuraFlex NL4, 2 each 493 x 1229 x 860 mm 19.42 x 48.38 x 33.85 in 71 kg (157 lb)

VT4880A
Fullsize Dual 18" Ultra Long Excursion Subwoofer 28 Hz - 120 Hz (-3 dB) 95 dB 2 x 8 ohms 2 x 2000 W 2 x 2269H Dual-Coil (18 in) Wedge Frustrum DuraFlex NL8 and NL4, 2 each 493 x 1229 x 860 mm 19.42 x 48.38 x 33.85 in 83.9 kg (185 lb)

VT4882
Midsize Dual 15" Subwoofer 32 Hz - 110 Hz (± 3 dB) 95 dB 2 x 8 ohms 2 x 700 W 2 x 2266H Dual-Coil (15 in) Wedge Frustrum DuraFlex NL8 and NL4, 2 each 457 x 1013 x 858 mm 18 x 39.9 x 33.8 in 53.5 kg (118 lb)

VT4881A
Compact 18" Subwoofer 34 Hz - 125 Hz (± 3 dB) 91 dB 8 ohms (Each coil independently wired) 2000 W 1 x 2269H Dual-Coil (18 in) Rectangular, PlyMax DuraFlex NL8 and NL4, 2 each 569 x 787 x 654 mm 22.4 x 31 x 25.8 in 50.4 kg (111 lb)

VT4883
Subcompact Dual 12" Cardioid-Arrayable Subwoofer 40 Hz - 300 Hz (± 3 dB) 95 dB 2 x 8 ohms 2 x 1000 W 2 x 2263H-1 Dual-Coil (12 in) Rectangular, PlyMax DuraFlex NL8 and NL4, 2 each 398 x 579 x 643 mm 15.7 x 22.8 x 25.3 in 29.5 kg (65 lb)

SYSTEM TYPE

FREQUENCY RESPONSE SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE INPUT POWER RATING1 TRANSDUCERS ENCLOSURE FINISH INPUT CONNECTORS DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
Page 304

key features
ACCESSORY KITS

V ER T EC SERIES

f ADVANCED TECHNOLOGY COMPONENTS f PRECISION WAVEGUIDES PROVIDE VERTICAL LINE SOURCE COUPLING f RADIATION BOUNDARY INTEGRATOR (RBI™) TECHNOLOGY INTEGRATES OUTPUT OF INDIVIDUAL BANDPASS ELEMENTS

f EXCEPTIONALLY RIGID, LIGHTWEIGHT ENCLOSURE CONSTRUCTION f RUGGED DURAFLEX™ EXTERIOR FINISH AND WEATHERIZED COMPONENTS f INTEGRATED S.A.F.E.™ SUSPENSION SYSTEM

f INDUSTRY’S SMALLEST, LIGHTEST, MOST POWERFUL HIGH FREQUENCY COMPRESSION DRIVERS

Separately-ordered accessories for: VT4889-1, VT4880, VT4880A, VT4888, VT4882, VT4887A and VT4881A
VT4889-1-ACC Dolly/wheelboard and padded protective cover for one VT4889-1. VT4880-ACC Dolly/wheelboard, padded protective cover and suspension hinge bars for one VT4880. Dolly/wheelboard and padded protective cover for one VT4888. Dolly/wheelboard and padded protective cover for one VT4882. Dolly/wheelboard and padded protective cover for one VT4887A. Dolly/wheelboard and padded protective cover for one VT4881A.

VT4886-HB

VT4880A-ACC Dolly/wheelboard and padded protective cover for one VT4880A. VT4888-ACC VT4882-ACC VT4887-ACC VT4881-ACC

VT4886-DF88

SUSPENSION ACCESSORIES
VT4889-AF VT4889-SF Array Frame for suspending or ground stacking VTX-V25, VTX-S28, VT4889-1, VT4880, VT4880A enclosures. Short Frame for suspending or ground stacking VTX-V25, VTX-S28, VT4889-1, VT4880, VT4880A enclosures; can also be used on the bottom of arrays for rear pullback suspension. Array Frame for suspending or ground stacking VT4888 or VT4882 enclosures. Short Frame for suspending or ground stacking VT4888 or VT4882 enclosures; can also be used on the bottom of arrays for rear pullback suspension.
VT4889-AF (Array Frame) VT4886-SF

Harman Pro Group | 2013

VT4888-AF VT4888-SF

VT4886-DF88
VT4889-SF (Short Frame)

VT4886-HB

VT4887-AF VT4887-SF VT4800-CA VT4800-DA VT4800-UA

Array Frame for suspending or ground stacking VT4887A or VT4881A enclosures. Short Frame for suspending or ground stacking VT4887A or VT4881A enclosures; can also be used on the bottom of arrays for rear pullback suspension. Compact Adaptor, use to suspend VT4887 or VT4887A from VT4888 or VT4882. Downfill Adaptor, use to suspend up to 4 VT4887As or VT4887 enclosures from VTX-V25, VTX-S28, VT4889, VT4889-1, VT4880 or VT4880A enclosures. Universal Adaptor Frame, use to suspend midsize or compact models from VTX-V25, VTX-S28, VT4889, VT4889-1, VT4880 or VT4880A enclosures.
VT4886-UB1 Universal Bracket VT4886-DF89 (Downfill Adaptor) SS5-BK (Hand Crank) VT4886-SF

Section:

07

SS5-BK (Hand Crank)

VT4886-HB

Accessories available for the VT4886 and VT4883
VT4886-AF VT4886-SF Array frame for suspension or ground stacking of VT4883, VT4886, or mixed VT4883/VT4886 arrays. Short Array frame for suspension of smaller VT4886 arrays. Can also be used at the bottom of arrays for rear pull-back suspension.

VT4886-UB

VT4886-UB1

VT4886-DF88 Downfill Adapter for suspending VT4886 under VT4888 or VT4882. VT4886-DF89 Downfill Adapter for suspending VT4886 under VTX-V25, VTX-S28, VT4889-1, VT4880, VT4880A. VT4886-UB VT4886-UB1 VT4886-HB SS5-BK Universal Bracket with extension arms for pole mounting, stacking, underbalcony suspension or wall mounting of 1x, 2x, 3x or 4x VT4886 enclosures, respectively. Basic Universal Bracket for pole mounting, stacking, underbalcony suspension or wall mounting of 1x, 2x or 3x VT4886 enclosures, respectively. Horizontal bracket for arraying VT4886 enclosures as a constant curvature horizontal line array. (Suspended or pole mounted.) Adjustable extension rod with M20 thread for attachment to VT4883 subwoofer. Secure, hand crank height adjustment. Vibration isolation adapter for attachment to optional VT4886-UB, -UB1 or -HB accessories.

Page 305

TOUR SOUND PRODUCTS

VERTEC® DP Series

Powered Line Array Systems
VERTEC® VT4888DP

2005 WINNER

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

The JBL VERTEC DP Series couples industry-leading loudspeaker technology to the innovative JBL DrivePack® technology platform delivering superb audio quality and robust power, perfectly matched to the enclosures, with comprehensive internal digital signal processing. Based on JBL’s industry-leading VERTEC line array elements, these systems are lightweight, powerful, and cost-effective. Designed in cooperation with development partners Crown, dbx and BSS, JBL DrivePack models are designed to exceed all expectations for loudspeaker performance, power handling and audio system control.
VT4889ADP-DA
Fullsize, powered enclosure housing two 15" woofers, four 8" midrange transducers, and three high frequency compression drivers that combine to provide a high power-to-weight ratio. Equipped with a JBL DrivePack DP3 fully integrated power and DSP electronics package featuring BSS OmniDrive HD™ signal processing. The VT4889ADP-DA is designed to deliver high-quality reinforcement of music and speech in large-scale, maximum-performance applications including concert audio, corporate A/V and theatrical presentations for both portable users and performance venue installations.

VT4887ADP-DA
Compact, powered enclosure housing two 8" woofers, four 4" midrange transducers and two high frequency compression drivers. Equipped with a JBL DrivePack DP2 fully integrated power and DSP electronics package featuring BSS OmniDrive HD™ signal processing. The VT4887ADP-DA is designed to deliver highquality reinforcement of music and speech in a variety of applications where smaller-sized arrays are appropriate, including concert audio, corporate A/V and theatrical presentations for both portable users and performance installations.

VT4882DP-DA
Midsize, powered sub-woofer housing two long excursion 15" woofers and a JBL DrivePack DP3 fully integrated power and DSP electronics package featuring BSS OmniDrive HD™ signal processing. The VT4882DP-DA is designed to deliver high quality sound reinforcement of sub-low frequencies for concert audio and multi-media presentations of all types. The VT4882DP-DA is an ideal companion to VT4888 or VT4888DP-DA midsize full-range systems.

VT4881ADP-DA
Compact, powered sub-woofer housing one Ultra-Long Excursion 18" woofer and a JBL DrivePack DP1 fully integrated power and DSP electronics package featuring BSS OmniDrive HD™ signal processing. The VT4881ADP-DA is designed to deliver high quality sound reinforcement of VLF musical information for a variety of applications including concert audio, corporate A/V and theatrical presentations of all types. Suitable for both portable users and fixed venue installations. Ideal companion to VT4887ADP-DA or VT4887A compact three-way systems.

VT4880ADP-DA
Fullsize, powered sub-woofer housing two 2269G Ultra-Long Excursion 18" woofers and a JBL DrivePack DP-3 fully integrated power and DSP electronics package featuring BSS OmniDrive HD™ signal processing. The VT4880ADP-DA is designed to deliver high quality reinforcement of VLF (Very Low Frequency) musical information for a broad range of applications. Ideal companion to VT4889ADPDA fullsize powered three-way systems.

VT4888DP-DA
Midsize, powered enclosure housing two 12" woofers, four 5.5" midrange transducers and two high frequency compression drivers. Equipped with a JBL DrivePack DP3 fully integrated power and DSP electronics package featuring BSS OmniDrive HD™ signal processing. The VT4888DP-DA is designed to deliver highquality reinforcement of music and speech in a variety of general-purpose applications including concert audio and corporate A/V presentations for both portable users and fixed venue installations.

Page 306

V ER T EC DP SERIES

f INTEGRATED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING f JBL DRIVEPACK® ELECTRONICS PACKAGE f AUTOMATIC SELECTION OF 50 OR 60 Hz WORLDWIDE AC LINE VOLTAGES f STANDARD NETWORK INPUT MODULES

key features

Standard DPDA Input Module (AES digital audio, BSS Audio OmniDrive HD processing, EtherCon connectors)

DPIP Optional Non-Networked Input Module (analog audio only)

Software Device Panel Available in Harman Pro’s HiQnet™ System Architect Software

INPUT MODULE & CONNECTIVITY
JBL DrivePacks are equipped with a modular input bay. The standard HiQnet-compatible DPDA input module offers ethernet connectivity for remote control and monitoring. The DPDA module also provides AES digital audio inputs with analog backup, BSS Audio OmniDrive HD™ signal processing with LevelMax™ multi-stage limiting, high-performance FIR/IIR filters, array/box I.D. mechanism and robust EtherCon® connectors optimized for tour/ rental applications. The optional, non-networked lower-cost DPIP input module from dbx features analog audio inputs. Like the DPDA module, it includes sophisticated DSP technology incorporating digital equalization, time alignment, frequency-dividing networks, classic dbx limiting functionality, and dbx Type IV® analog-to-digital converters. Two operating modes can be selected via rear panel switch (fullrange or subwoofer filter enable).

Harman Pro Group | 2013

full-range
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RESPONSE HORIZONTAL COVERAGE (-6 dB) MAXIMUM PEAK OUTPUT NOMINAL IMPEDANCE: LF MF HF DRIVEPACK POWER RATING TRANSDUCERS: LF MF HF ENCLOSURE FINISH INPUT CONNECTORS DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

VT4889ADP–DA
Powered Fullsize 3-way Line Array, Integrated Audio System 45 Hz – 16 kHz (± 3 dB) 90° nominal (250 Hz - 16 kHz) 143 dB, 1m LF:4 ohms MF: 8 ohms HF: 16 ohms (wired in series) 6000W Peak, 3000W Continuous 2 x 2265H (15 in) (Dual-Coil) 4 x 2169H (8 in) 3 x 2435H (3" exit compression driver) Wedge Frustrum DuraFlex™ Female XLR/Male XLR, EtherCon 1215 x 494 x 692 mm 47.8 x 19.4 x 27.2 in 93.1 kg (205 lb)

VT4888DP–DA
Powered Midsize 3-way Line Array, Integrated Audio System 60 Hz - 16 kHz (± 3 dB) 90° nominal (250 Hz - 16 kHz) 139 dB, 1m LF:4 ohms MF: 8 ohms HF: 16 ohms 6000W Peak, 3000W Continuous 2 x 2262H (12 in) (Dual-Coil) 4 x 2106H (5 1⁄2 in) 2 x 2431H (1.5" exit compression driver) Wedge Frustrum DuraFlex™ Female XLR/Male XLR, EtherCon 355 x 1013 x 678 mm 14 x 39.9 x 26.7 in 67.2 kg (148 lb)

VT4887ADP–DA
Powered Compact 3-way Line Array, Integrated Audio System 67 Hz - 20 kHz (± 3 dB) 100° nominal (250 Hz - 16 kHz) 136 dB,1m LF:4 ohms MF, HF: 8 ohms 2200W Peak 1100W Continuous 2 x 2168H-1 (8 in) (Dual-Coil) 4 x 2104H (4 in) 2 x 2408H (1" exit compression driver) Wedge Frustrum DuraFlex Female XLR/Male XLR, EtherCon 279 x 787 x 563 mm 11 x 31 x 22.1 in 39.7 kg (87.5 lb)

accessories
Separately-ordered accessories for: VT4889ADP-DA, VT4888DP-DA, VT4887ADP-DA

Section:

07

VT4889ADP-ACC Dolly/wheelboard and padded protective cover for one VT4889ADP-DA VT4888DP-ACC Dolly/wheelboard and padded protective cover for one VT4888DP-DA

VT4887ADP-ACC Dolly/wheelboard and padded protective cover for one VT4887ADP-DA

subwoofers
VT4880ADP–DA
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RESPONSE MAXIMUM PEAK OUTPUT NOMINAL IMPEDANCE DRIVEPACK POWER RATING TRANSDUCERS ENCLOSURE FINISH INPUT CONNECTORS DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

VT4882DP–DA
Powered Midsize 2-15" Subwoofer, Integrated Audio System 32 Hz - 110 Hz (± 3 dB) 133 dB SPL, 1m LF: 8 ohms (Each transducer) 3400W Peak, 1700W Continuous 2 x 2266H (15 in) (Dual-Coil) Wedge Frustrum DuraFlex Female XLR/Male XLR, EtherCon 457 x 1013 x 1011 mm 18 x 39.9 x 39.8 in 69.9 kg (154 lb)

VT4881ADP–DA
Powered Compact 1-18" Subwoofer, Integrated Audio System 34 Hz - 125 Hz(± 3 dB) 131 dB SPL,1m VLF:4 ohms 3600W Peak, 1800W Continuous 1 x 2269G (18 in) (Dual-Coil) Rectangular Enclosure DuraFlex Female XLR/Male XLR, EtherCon 569 x 787 x 800 mm 22.4 X 31 X 31.5 in 62.2 kg (137 lb)

Separately-ordered accessories for: VT4880ADP-DA, VT4882DP-DA, VT4881ADP-DA

Powered Fullsize 2-15" Subwoofer, Integrated Audio System 29 Hz – 120 Hz (± 3 dB) 143 dB SPL, 1m LF: 4 ohms (Each transducer) 6900 W Peak, 3500 W Continuous 2 x 2269G (18 in) (Dual-Coil) Wedge Frustrum DuraFlex Female XLR/Male XLR, EtherCon 1229 x 493 x 1011 mm 48.4 x 19.4 x 39.8 in 99.4 kg (219 lb)

VT4880ADP-ACC Dolly/wheelboard and padded protective cover for one VT4880DP-DA VT4882DP-ACC Dolly/wheelboard and padded protective cover for one VT4882DP-DA

VT4881ADP-ACC Dolly/wheelboard and padded protective cover for one VT4881ADP-DA

Page 307

TOUR SOUND PRODUCTS

Next Generation Line Array System Solutions
Of all the achievements JBL has made over the years, the VTX Series stands as a milestone in the practical application of creative engineering. The next generation in line arrays, VTX heralds a new era in performance, system integration and user friendliness. Supported by multiple patents in driver, waveguide and suspension technology, VTX is also supported by technologies from Harman Professional sister companies for amplification, DSP, control and system management. In addition to high performance components, VTX is backed by JBL’s high performance engineering support - the human factor and technical tools that are key to the proper specification and configuration of the VTX system in any venue, anywhere in the world. The VTX Series is a result of JBL’s continued effort to deliver more powerful, more compact, lightweight and flexible sound reinforcement systems. Designed for portable and fixed-venue system operators alike, VTX features JBL’s legendary sound quality coupled with the most advanced sound reinforcement technology and support available.
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

07

Refined RBI Waveguide for Improved Vertical Coupling and Horizontal Coverage D2 Dual Diaphragm: Dual Voice Coil Compression Driver
The revolutionary, patented D2 Dual Driver dramatically improves the sound and performance of high frequencies by overcoming the limitations of conventional compression driver technology. By merging two annular, polymer diaphragms into a single compact transducer, the D2 driver has the same radiating area as a conventional device, however overall output and power handling are dramatically increased due to lower moving mass and enhanced heat transfer obtained by using two separate voice coils. The result is dramatically improved efficiency, power handling and smoother, more extended high frequency response with significantly lower levels of distortion. VTX V25 features 3rd generation HF waveguide technology that produces a coherent, timealigned high frequency wavefront that maximizes the combined output of three D2 Dual Drivers. The waveguide creates a wavefront that is sufficiently flat to couple properly at extreme high frequencies and the active radiating surface area extends to the edge of the enclosure, ensuring optimized line source coupling from 0-10 degrees. JBL’s patented Radiation Boundary Integrator™ seamlessly combines high- and mid-frequency sections, providing broad, stable 90 degree horizontal coverage.

S.A.F.E™ Suspension
VTX’s patented S.A.F.E. suspension system is streamlined for speed and efficiency with improved hardware for faster setup with fewer pinning operations and greater security. All suspension hardware is integrated into the enclosure and strategically-positioned for fast and secure operation. Front flip hinges and captive rear hinge bars utilizing a unique Angle Stop Mechanism (ASM) allow for efficient assembly that is not only secure, but anti-rattle. Also included is provision for mounting a VTX Laser accessory for greater ease and precision in array focus and system tuning.

Page 308

VTX SERIES

V25

G28

S28

Complete System Integration and Support
With the VTX Series you are not just using a product, you are gaining access to an expert system. Tools for system design and all the components to analyze, configure, set up and control a VTX system are all part of the JBL commitment to total system integration and support. The goal is maximum efficiency and the highest possible level of performance in any venue, anywhere in the world.

Crown® Audio VRack
A rugged touring rack fitted with three Crown ITech HD Series power amplifiers, power input panel, input / output panels that is available in two configurations: VRack 12000 or VRack 4x3500 (loaded with three Crown IT12000HD or IT4x3500HD, respectively). The Crown VRack standard ensures that VTX enclosures are optimally powered and processed while ensuring compatibility for cross rental between VTX Network Partners.

JBL Line Array Calculator
Acoustic modeling software accurately predicts performance in the user-defined venue, allowing for determination of the appropriate number of cabinets, required angles and installation parameters along with circuit level gain shading and frequency tapering using the JBL Line Array Control Panel equalization interface.

JBL HiQnet Performance Manager™ Software
Designed specifically for touring, the patented workflow paradigm of the Performance Manager interface makes the complex simple by guiding the system designer through the complete system design, configuration and control process.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

VTX-V25
VTX Series V25 is a fullsize 3-way line array element featuring patented D2 dual diaphragm dual driver technology and patented Differential Drive® LF and MF cone transducers. Includes captive suspension hardware; transportation and handling accessories supplied separately.

VTX-G28
VTX Series G28 is a rectangular ground-stack dual 18" subwoofer featuring ultra long throw, patented Differential Drive® VLF transducers configured in a pseudo-vented-bandpass alignment with inverted woofers (motors out) for improved cooling and large area, laminarflow, low-turbulence central port. Includes front NL4 connector for use when G28 enclosures are configured in rear-firing mode to create reverse-cardioid subwoofer arrays. VTX-V25-VT Vertical Transporter for 4x VTX V25 including padded protective cover Array Frame for suspending or ground stacking VTX V25 and/or VTX S28 enclosures Accessory Kit: dolly/wheelboard and padded protective cover for one VTX S28

VTX-S28
VTX Series S28 is a suspendable, trapezoidal dual 18" subwoofer featuring ultra long throw, patented Differential Drive® VLF transducers configured in a front-loaded alignment with large area, laminar-flow, low-turbulence central port. Includes front NL4 connector for use when S28 enclosures are configured in rear-firing mode to create reverse-cardioid subwoofer arrays. Transportation and handling accessories supplied separately. VTX-S28-VT VTX-G28-ACC Vertical Transporter for 3x S28 including padded protective cover Accessory Kit: dolly/wheelboard and padded protective cover for one VTX G28 Laser Kit: (power supply and 2x VTX-LZ lasers) Laser only (1 piece) Power supply only (1 piece)

Section:

07

accessories
VTX-V25-ACC VTX-V25-ASP VTX-V25-MSP Accessory Kit: dolly/wheelboard and padded protective cover for one VTX V25 Acoustic Spares Kit: (1x 2267H, 3x D2430K diaphragm kit, 2x 2169H) Mechanical Spares Kit: (hinges, quick release pins, grills, handles, suspension frames)

VTX-V25-AF

VTX-LZ-K VTX-LZ VTX-LZ-PS

VTX-S28-ACC

specifications
V25
SYSTEM TYPE COMPONENTS HORIZONTAL COVERAGE (-6 dB) FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB) FREQUENCY RESPONSE (±3 dB) SENSITIVITY (1W/1m) NOMINAL SECTION IMPEDANCES CONTINUOUS POWER RATING DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

G28
Full Size Ground Stack-Only, Cardioid-Arrayable, Dual 18" Subwoofer with Ultra Long Excursion Transducers 2 x 2269H Differential Drive® 18"

S28
Full Size Suspendable, Cardioid-Arrayable, Dual 18" Subwoofer with Ultra Long Excursion Transducers 2 x 2269H Differential Drive® 18"

Full Size 3-Way High Directivity Line Array Element with D2 Dual Drivers 2 x 2267H 15" Differential Drive® LF 4 x 2169H 8" Differential Drive® MF 3 x 2430K D2 Dual Driver 90 degrees nominal (250 - 16k Hz) 35 - 20k Hz 41 - 18k Hz 99 dB LF, 103 dB MF, 116 dB HF 2 x 8 ohms LF, 8 ohms MF, 8 ohms HF 2 x 2000W LF, 1400W MF, 600W HF 414 x 1223 x 614 mm (16.3 x 48.2 x 24.2 in) 82.6 kg (182 lb)

22 - 160 Hz 27 - 120 Hz 95 dB 2 x 8 ohms 2 x 2000W 493.3 x 1210.8 x 1211.1 mm (19.4 x 47.7 x 47.7 in) 92.5 kg (204 lb)

24 - 400 Hz 27 - 300 Hz 96 dB 2 x 8 ohms 2 x 2000W 493.3 x 1222 x 926.5 mm (19.4 x 48.1 x 36.5 in) 83.0 kg (183 lb)

Page 309

Installation Products
Attractions Casinos Clubs Concert Venues Convention Facilites Corporate Education Performance Theaters Professional Offices Restaurants Retail Sporting Facilities Sports Bars Theme Parks Transit Centers A/V Systems Fitness and Recreation Government Facilities Health Facilities Hotels Houses of Worship Museums Music Cafes

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013 New Meadowlands Stadium East Rutherford, NJ Harrahs, Chicago, IL Oriental Art Center, Shanghai, China HSBC Arena, Buffalo, New York 2nd Baptist Church, Houston, Texas
Page 310

Experience Music Center, Seattle, WA

Overture Center for the Arts, Madison, Wisconsin No matter where you go in this world, you’ll find JBL Installed Sound Speaker Systems at many of the most notable venues. With that kind of global perspective, JBL has come to respect the one indisputable truth of business: every customer is unique. A speaker system that is perfectly right for one job might be perfectly wrong for another. That’s why JBL Installed Sound products offer a range of options without equal. From the extraordinary value of the Control Contractor Series to the ultimate precision of the JBL Precision Directivity Series, there’s a JBL Installed Sound product with a solid business solution based on equally solid business savvy. For more than 60 years, JBL has been the professional speaker of choice wherever sound matters. We’d like to believe it should be your choice, too.

INSTALLATION PRODUCTS

VP Series
VP7315/95DP

Self-Powered Integrated Audio Systems
VP SERIES

VP7215/95DP VPSB7118DP

VP7212/95DP VP7215/64DP VP7212/64DP VP7215/95DPC

2007 WINNER

VP7210/95DP VP7212/95DPC

Harman Pro Group | 2013

VP7212MDP

Venue Performance Series—a family of self-powered loudspeaker systems consisting of ten models, suitable for portable or fixed installation sound reinforcement applications where high-output, low-distortion, and the highest quality sound are required.
JBL Dri vePack®
A key feature of the VP Series are the highly adaptable JBL DrivePack amplifier and signal processing modules. The two channel DP-2 module provides 1100 watts of total continuous power to each fullsize, full-range system while the DP-1 sub-woofer module provides 1800 watts continuous power to the loudspeaker. The JBL DP-1 and DP-2 DrivePacks operate on auto-selecting line voltages at 50 or 60 Hz for worldwide operation. The compact three channel DPC-2 module used on the smaller VP Series models uses two of the three amplifier channels to enable JBL’s Dual Bridge Technology™ (DBT) allowing the most efficient power transfer to the JBL Differential Drive® woofers. DP-1 and DP-2 DrivePack models incorporate Crown’s BCA™ (Balanced Current Amplification) Class-I circuitry with temperature-compensated modulation and state of the art feedback circuitry. An extraordinarily efficient passive cooling system eliminates expensive and noisy fans, effecting heat dissipation for optimal cooling.

Section:

INPUT MODULES & CONNECTIVITY
JBL DrivePacks DP-1 and DP-2 are equipped with a modular input bay. Standard DPIP input modules from dbx feature analog audio inputs and sophisticated DSP technology incorporating digital pre-equalization filters, frequencydividing networks, and limiter circuitry from one of the industry’s most trusted names in signal processing. Classic dbx Limiting functionality, dbx Type IV® analog-to-digital converters, and full bandpass and crossover configurations are all packed into the standard input module on every JBL DrivePack unit. With JBL DrivePack, dbx’s heritage of unrivaled system/loudspeaker control continues. The optional DPDA input module allows most JBL VP Series systems to link seamlessly into Harman Professional’s HiQnet system. The modular input design allows for future developments in audio distribution and networking topologies.

07
DPDA Input Module – HiQnet™ Network Compatible with AES Digital Audio and BSS OMNIDRIVE™ HD Signal Processing

DPDA Input Module
The DPDA Input Module can be used as a retrofit sub-assembly with any JBL DrivePack®equipped loudspeaker system utilizing the DP-1, DP-2, or DP-3 amplifier modules. Upgrading to the DPDA module provides powered loudspeaker system users with AES/EBU digital audio capabilities, the sonic benefits of advanced signal processing features, and a variety of input and connectivity options. The onboard 100 Mb Ethernet networking switch with daisy-chain capability allows for Remote Control and Monitoring via HiQnet System Architect™ software. Additionally, a rotary mechanical encoder switch provides easy array identification and box positioning, up to 99 different speaker positions and up to 99 different speaker arrays or locations. Twenty type-selectable input filters (10 System and 10 Guest filters) are available for system equalization along with user-adjustable input delay of up to 2 seconds and many more user features.

FEATURE LOADED
The VP Series also includes: • JBL Differential Drive cone transducers • JBL 2452H-SL 1.5" exit, 4" diaphragm compression driver • Newly-created stylized, ergonomically designed powder-coated steel handle • Multiple attachment points for ultimate rigging flexibility with overhead suspension

Page 311

key features

f NEW 2452H-SL 4" DAMPED DIAPHRAGM HIGH-FREQUENCY COMPRESSION DRIVER f JBL DRIVEPACK® TECHNOLOGY, CO-ENGINEERED WITH CROWN f COMPREHENSIVE ON-BOARD DSP f HIQNET™ SYSTEM ARCHITECT™ COMPATIBILITY

f OPTIONAL DPDA INPUT MODULE FOR AES/EBU DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT CONNECTIVITY f DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE® LOW-FREQUENCY DRIVERS f INTEGRATED RIGGING HARDWARE f ERGONOMICALLY DESIGNED HANDLES

VP Series
VP7210/95DP

VP7215/95DPC
The VP7215/95DPC is a 15" two-way compact system with a 2452H-SL compression driver. This model features a 90° x 50° PT waveguide. The system is equipped with the JBL DrivePack model DPC-2 with 875W of continuous power.

The VP7210/95DP is a 10" two-way system with the 2452H-SL compression driver. This model features a 90°x 50° rotatable horn. The system is driven by an 875W continuous power three channel DPC-2 JBL DrivePack®.

VP7215/64DP (60° x 40°) VP7215/95DP (90° x 50°)
The VP7215/64DP and VP7215/95DP are two-way speaker systems housing one 15" Differential Drive low frequency transducer and the new 2452H-SL compression driver. The VP7215 is available with either a 60° x 40° or 90° x 50° JBL Progressive Transition™ Waveguide.

VP7212MDP
The VP7212MDP is a dedicated 12" two-way floor monitor and features 2452H-SL 4" voice coil compression driver. The VP7212MDP is equipped with the JBL DrivePack model DPC-2 with 875W continuous power available.

VP7212/64DP (60° x 40°) VP7212/95DP (90° x 50°)
The VP7212/64DP and VP7212/95DP are two-way speaker systems housing one 12" Differential Drive low frequency transducer and the new 2452H-SL compression driver. The VP7212 is available with either a 60° x 40° or 90° x 50° JBL Progressive Transition™ Waveguide.

VP7315/64DP
The VP7315/64DP is a three-way system housing one 15" Differential Drive low frequency transducer, the CMCD-82H 8" midrange transducer and the new 2452H-SL compression driver mounted on a JBL PT-K64-MHF Progressive Transition Waveguide.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

VP7212/95DPC
The VP7212/95DPC is a 12" two-way compact system with a 2452H-SL compression driver. This model features a 90° x 50° PT waveguide. The system is equipped with the JBL DrivePack model DPC-2 with 875W of continuous power.

VPSB7118DP
The VPSB7118DP subwoofer system features one 18" Differential Drive low frequency transducer. This model includes an integrated pole mount, and is sized to readily combine into arrays of various configurations using other models in the line.

specifications
VP7210/95DP
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RESPONSE NOMINAL COVERAGE DRIVEPACK POWER RATINGS TRANSDUCERS: LF HF (MF) HF (MF) HORN FINISH GRILLE INPUT CONNECTOR DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
Self-Powered Two-way Speaker System 80 Hz – 20 kHz (±3 dB) 90° x 50° 1750W Peak (875W Cont) 10 in Differential Drive 2452H-SL 1.5" exit compression driver JBL Progressive Transition™ Waveguide Black Duraflex™ 14-gauge perforated steel M/FM XLR 521 x 293 x 303 mm 20.5 x 11.5 x 11.9 in 18.4 kg (40.5 lb)

VP7212MDP
Self-Powered Two-way Speaker System 80 Hz - 18 kHz (±3 dB) 50° x 90° 1750W Peak (875W Cont) 12 in Differential Drive 2452H-SL 1.5" exit compression driver JBL Progressive Transition™ Waveguide Black Duraflex™ 14-gauge perforated steel M/FM XLR 346 x 565 x 413 mm 13.6 x 22.3 x 16.2 in 20.7 kg (45.5 lb)

VP7212/95DPC
Self-Powered Two-way Speaker System 65 Hz – 18 kHz (±3 dB) 90° x 50° 1750W Peak (875W Cont) 12 in Differential Drive 2452H-SL 1.5" exit compression driver JBL Progressive Transition™ Waveguide Black Duraflex™ 14-gauge perforated steel M/FM XLR 533 x 358 x 334 mm 21.0 x 14.1 x 13.1 in 21.3 kg (47 lbs)

VP7215/95DPC
Self-Powered Two-way Speaker System 60 Hz – 18 kHz (±3 dB) 90° x 50° 1750W Peak (875W Cont) 15" Differential Drive 2452H-SL 1.5" exit compression driver JBL Progressive Transition™ Waveguide Black Duraflex™ 14-gauge perforated steel M/FM XLR 613 x 434 x 359 mm 24.1 x 17.1 x 14.1 in 24.7 kg (55 lbs)

VP7212/64DP & VP7212/95DP
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RESPONSE NOMINAL COVERAGE DRIVEPACK POWER RATINGS TRANSDUCERS: LF HF (MF) HF (MF) HORN FINISH GRILLE INPUT CONNECTOR INPUT CONNECTOR OPTION DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
Page 312 Self-Powered Two-way Speaker System 60 Hz - 18 kHz (±3 dB) VP7212/64: 60 x 40 VP7212/95: 90 x 50 2200W Peak (1100W Cont) 12 in Differential Drive 2452H-SL 1.5" exit compression driver JBL Progressive Transition™ Waveguide Black Duraflex™ 14-gauge perforated steel Female XLR/Male XLR DPCN (CobraNet compliant) 2 x RJ45 connectors + M/FM XLR 701.8 x 383.8 x 523.5 mm 27.63 x 15.11 x 20.61 in 35.4 kg (78 lb)

VP7215/64DP & VP7215/95DP
Self-Powered Two-way Speaker System 45 Hz - 18 kHz (± 3 dB) VP7215/64: 60 x 40 VP7215/95: 90 x 50 2200W Peak (1100W Cont) 15 in Differential Drive 2452H-SL 1.5" exit compression driver JBL Progressive Transition™ Waveguide Black Duraflex™ 14-gauge perforated steel Female XLR/Male XLR DPCN (CobraNet compliant) 2 x RJ45 connectors + M/FM XLR 765.3 x 447.6 x 523.5 mm 30.13 x 17.62 x 20.61 in 38.6 kg (85 lb)

VP7315/64DP
Self-Powered Three-way Speaker System 45 Hz - 18 kHz (± 3 dB) VP7315/64: 60 x 40 2200W Peak (1100W Cont) 15 in Differential Drive 2452H-SL 1.5" exit compression driver CMCD-82H (8" Midrange) JBL PT-K64-MHF Progressive Transition™ Waveguide Black Duraflex™ 14-gauge perforated steel Female XLR/Male XLR DPCN (CobraNet compliant) 2 x RJ45 connectors + M/FM XLR 914.4 x 528.3 x 624.8 mm 36 x 20.8 x 24.6 in 44 kg (97 lb)

VPSB7118DP
Self-Powered Sub-woofer System 35 Hz - 125 Hz (±3 dB)

3600W Peak (1800W Cont) 18 in Differential Drive

Black Duraflex™ 14-gauge perforated steel Female XLR/Male XLR DPCN (CobraNet compliant) 2 x RJ45 connectors + M/FM XLR 414.4 x 701.8 x 812.8 mm 20.25 x 27.63 x 32 in 58.5 kg (129 lb)

INSTALLATION PRODUCTS

Marquis Dance Club Series

Harman Pro Group | 2013

As a club designer, your creativity, vision and passion are the heart of an electrifying experience, whether it’s a world-class mega-club or an intimate lounge. Knowing this illuminated our vision in creating the new JBL Marquis Dance Club Series - specifically designed for the extreme requirements of large and mega-size clubs. The Marquis Series comprises eight powerful multiway systems and subwoofer models that combine JBL’s extraordinary sound, proven reliability and state-of-the-art technology with striking architectural design and versatile configurability. From thumping mega dance floors to tranquil VIP lounges, from eclectic chill rooms to complex sound booths, the Marquis Series systematic loudspeaker designs are scalable to smaller venues, ultra lounges, and mega clubs alike. Regardless of the application, the Marquis Series is a multi faceted tool for you to achieve your vision.

Section:

07

Create the Ultimate Experience
The goal of every premier dance club designer is to create the ultimate space, outfitted with the best equipment, so gifted DJ’s can express every creative impulse to drive an irresistible experience for everyone - on and off the dance floor. JBL knows what you need in order to accomplish this. JBL led the way in club loudspeaker design, helping to define club sound at the very beginning of the industry. During the disco boom of the 70’s nearly all dance club systems utilized JBL loudspeaker components. The massive amount of engineering development since then, combined with JBL’s driving passion and commitment to creating the best, highest performing sound systems in the dance world, make the Marquis Dance Series the premier sound system for the ultimate dance club experience.

Superb Architectural Design and Versatile Configurability
The Marquis Dance Series features stunning, high design that is fully complementary with premier club environments. Rugged as well as versatile, the Marquis Series is built to the highest professional standards to withstand continuous, demanding professional use. Whether you choose to deploy their stunning architectural features into your overall aesthetic, or configure them into the background, their technical performance is specifically designed for dance clubs to ensure your patrons will be immersed in the soul and depth of the music regardless of where they are in your club. Their wide array of configurability ensures compatibility with the specific design goals, power requirements and coverage needs of any environment you envision.

Stack Security and Precise Adjustment
Secure mounting in any floor configuration is assured by the JBL Marquis Dance Stacking Bracket kit (MDSB-1). Custom designed for the series, the brackets securely fasten multiple boxes to each other and mount into M10 rigging connections for further configurability. The MDSB bracket adjusts the upper cabinet through 0, 5, 10, and 15 degrees of downward angle to accommodate precise adjustment of the coverage area.

Beautifully Durable
The ruggedized cabinet covering and architecturally designed grille pattern bring high-design to the overall look of the Marquis Series while providing superb protection for all components.

Page 313

INSTALLATION PRODUCTS

Marquis Dance Club Series
key features
JBL Selenium Ultra High Frequency Bullet Drivers
Super high frequencies are handled by the MD1 Super Tweeter module, ensuring extremely high sensitivity and low distortion for transparent response, excellent coverage and long throw.
f LEGENDARY JBL TECHNOLOGY f OUTSTANDING PATTERN CONTROL f VERSATILE CONFIGURATIONS f SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR PREMIER DANCE CLUBS

JBL Differential Drive® Technology
The entire complement of Marquis Series drivers employ JBL’s patented Differential Drive technology which incorporates two voice coils and two magnetic gaps providing higher peak output with less power compression. The MD7 subwoofer also employs JBL’s Vented Gap Cooling™ that provides immediate heat transfer for reduced operating temperatures. The result of these technologies is consistent sound quality even at non-stop, mega-club volumes.

JBL Progressive Transition™ Waveguides
JBL’s patented Progressive Transition™ Waveguides direct the sound of all the Marquis Series compression drivers to provide outstanding pattern control with smooth sound and extremely low distortion even at extraordinarily high dance club volume levels.

Section:

07
MD1 MD2 MD3 MD52 MD55 MD46 MD49 MD7

Harman Pro Group | 2013

specifications
MD1
SYSTEM TYPE
Dual JBL Selenium Super Tweeters Dual ST400 100W 108 dB SPL 5.5 kHz - 20 kHz 6.5 kHz - 20 kHz 184.2 x 421.3 x 305.8 mm 7.2 x 16.6 x 12 in 8.2 kg (18 lb)

MD2
High Power Mid-High Loudspeaker System Dual 2169H 8" MF Drivers; 2453H-SL HF Driver MF 700W; HF 100W MF 109 dB SPL: HF 113 dB SPL 270 Hz - 20 kHz 320 Hz - 20 kHz 1142.8 x 844.8 x 508.5 mm 45 x 33.3 x 20 in 52.2 kg (115 lb)

MD3
High Power Dual 15" Low-Frequency Loudspeaker Dual 2265H Woofers 1600W 103 dB SPL 60 Hz - 400 Hz 70 Hz - 350 Hz 1142.8 x 599.8 x 762.5 mm 45 x 22 x 30 in 73.0 kg (161 lb)

MD7
Ultra Long Excursion High Power Dual 18" Subwoofer Dual 2269H Woofers 4000W 100 dB SPL (25 - 150 Hz) 20 Hz - 200 Hz 25 Hz - 150 Hz 762 x 1121.7 x 965.7 mm 30 x 44.2 x 38 in 108.0 kg (238.0 lb)

DRIVER POWER RATING (2 hrs. Continuous Pink Noise) SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB) FREQUENCY RESPONSE (±3 dB) DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

MD52
SYSTEM TYPE DRIVER POWER RATING (2 hrs. Continuous Pink Noise) SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB) FREQUENCY RESPONSE (±3 dB) DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
Medium Power 90 x 50 12" 2-way Full-Range Loudspeaker 262H Woofer; 2408H-1 HF Driver 550W 96 dB SPL 39 Hz - 20 kHz 53 Hz - 19 kHz 711.2 x 369.4 x 400.1 mm 28 x 14.5 x 15.8 in 20.6 kg (45.5 lb)

MD55
Medium Power 90 x 50 15" 2-way Full-Range Loudspeaker 265H Woofer; 2408H-1 HF Driver 550W 97 dB SPL 39 Hz - 20 kHz 51 Hz - 19 kHz 781.1 x 417.9 x 457.7 mm 30.8 x 16.5 x 18 in 23.8 kg (52.5 lb)

MD46
High Power 60 x 40 Dual 15" 4-way Full-Range Loudspeaker System LF: Dual 2265H; MF: CMCD-82H; HF: 2432H; UHF: Dual ST400 ST LF: 2000W; MF: 35; HF: 100W; UHF: 100W LF: 98 dB SPL; MF :108 dB SPL; HF: 113 dB SPL; UHF 107 dB SPL 42 Hz - 20 kHz 48 Hz - 19 kHz 1524 x 559.8 x 655.3 mm 60 x 22.0 x 25.9 in 65.8 kg (145 lb)

MD49
High Power 90 x 50 Dual 15" 4-way Full-Range Loudspeaker System LF: Dual 2265H; MF: CMCD-82H; HF: 2432H; UHF: Dual ST400 ST LF: 2000W: MF: 350W; HF: 100W; UHF: 100W LF: 98 dB SPL; MF: 108 dB SPL; HF: 113 dB SPL; UHF: 107 dB SPL 42 Hz - 20 kHz 48 Hz - 19 kHz 1524 x 559.8 x 655.3 mm 60 x 22.0 x 25.9 in 65.8 kg (145 lb)

Page 314

VLA SERIES

VLA Series
key features

Variable Line Array Loudspeakers
f HORN-LOADED LINE ARRAY f STANDARD & HIGH-OUTPUT VERSIONS AVAILABLE f COMBINES PD700 & VT TECHNOLOGIES

Variable Line Array Series (VLA Series) is a revolutionary product providing high-impact sound reinforcement at throw distances beyond the reach of traditional loudspeaker designs. The modular design concept provides the system designer the ability to build large line array systems for larger venue applications or to design smaller line array systems for use as distributed clusters in arenas, domed stadiums and larger performance spaces, including large houses of worship. VLA is designed specifically for permanent installation applications where even coverage, intelligibility, and levels capable of overcoming crowd noise are required. VLA modules are based on the same advanced engineering used in the highly successful VERTEC® Series line array systems. VLA provides six large format horn-loaded modules with three horizontal horn coverage patterns (30°, 60°, & 90°). This modular concept provides the designer the additional flexibility to vary the horizontal pattern within a vertical array by incorporating different modules with wider or narrower coverage patterns while still maintaining the vertical directivity.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

VLA301
SYSTEM TYPE Three-way Full Range FREQUENCY RESPONSE1 HORIZONTAL COVERAGE SENSITIVITY 4: 1 W, 1 m LF/MF/HF NOMINAL IMPEDANCE 4 ohms/4 ohms/ 16 ohms LF/MF/HF SYSTEM POWER RATING 2: LF 1600 W (6400 W peak), 2 hrs. MF HF MAXIMUM SPL3: LF MF HF TRANSDUCERS: LF MF HF ENCLOSURE FINISH INPUT CONNECTORS DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
1200 W (4800 W peak), 100 hrs. 700 W (2800 W peak), 100 hrs. 225 W (900 W peak), 2 hrs. 132 dB SPL continuous average 139 dB SPL continuous average 142 dB SPL continuous average 2 x 2226H (380 mm/ 15 in) 2 x CMCD82H (200 mm/8 in cone) 3 x 2431H (38 mm/ 11⁄2 in) 12-ply birch plywood DuraFlex™ Neutrik Speakon® NL8 Plus covered barrier strip 533 x 1351 x 1384 mm 21.0 x 53.2 x 54.5 in 140 kg (309 lb) Loudspeaker 58 Hz - 12 kHz (± 3 dB) 30° 100/111/120 dB SPL

VLA301H
High Output Three-Way Full Range Loudspeaker 58 Hz - 12 kHz (± 3 dB) 30° 100/111/119 dB SPL 4 ohms/8 ohms/ 4 ohms 1600 W (6400 W peak), 2 hrs. 1200 W (4800 W peak), 100 hrs. 1400 W (5600 W peak), 100 hrs. 450 W (1800 W peak), 2 hrs. 132 dB SPL continuous average 142 dB SPL continuous average 146 dB SPL continuous average 2 x 2226H (380 mm/ 15 in) 4 x CMCD82H (200 mm/8 in cone) 6 x 2431H (38 mm/ 11⁄2 in) 12-ply birch plywood DuraFlex™ Neutrik Speakon® NL8 Plus covered barrier strip 533 x 1351 x 1384 mm 21.0 x 53.2 x 54.5 in 155 kg (342 lb)

VLA601
Three-way Full Range Loudspeaker 58 Hz - 12 kHz (± 3 dB) 60° 100/109/117 dB SPL 4 ohms/4 ohms/ 16 ohms 1600 W (6400 W peak), 2 hrs. 1200 W (4800 W peak), 100 hrs. 700 W (2800 W peak), 100 hrs. 225 W (900 W peak), 2 hrs. 132 dB SPL continuous average 137 dB SPL continuous average 141 dB SPL continuous average 2 x 2226H (380 mm/ 15 in) 2 x CMCD82H (200 mm/8 in cone) 3 x 2431H (38 mm/ 11⁄2 in) 12-ply birch plywood DuraFlex™ Neutrik Speakon® NL8 Plus covered barrier strip 533 x 1351 x 772 mm 21.0 x 53.2 x 30.4 in 102 kg (225 lb)

VLA601H
High Output Three-Way Full Range Loudspeaker 58 Hz - 12 kHz (± 3 dB) 60° 100/110/117 dB SPL 4 ohms/8 ohms/ 4 ohms 1600 W (6400 W peak), 2 hrs. 1200 W (4800 W peak), 100 hrs. 1400 W (5600 W peak), 100 hrs. 450 W (1800 W peak), 2 hrs. 132 dB SPL continuous average 141 dB SPL continuous average 144 dB SPL continuous average 2 x 2226H (380 mm/ 15 in) 4 x CMCD82H (200 mm/8 in cone) 6 x 2431H (38 mm/ 11⁄2 in) 12-ply birch plywood DuraFlex™ Neutrik Speakon® NL8 Plus covered barrier strip 533 x 1351 x 772 mm 21.0 x 53.2 x 30.4 in 116 kg (256 lb)

VLA901
Three-way Full Range Loudspeaker 58 Hz - 12 kHz (± 3 dB) 90° 99/106/115 dB SPL 4 ohms/4 ohms/ 16 ohms 1600 W (6400 W peak), 2 hrs. 1200 W (4800 W peak), 100 hrs. 700 W (2800 W peak), 100 hrs. 225 W (900 W peak), 2 hrs. 131 dB SPL continuous average 134 dB SPL continuous average 139 dB SPL continuous average 2 x 2226H (380 mm/ 15 in) 2 x CMCD82H (200 mm/8 in cone) 3 x 2431H (38 mm/ 11⁄2 in) 12-ply birch plywood DuraFlex™ Neutrik Speakon® NL8 Plus covered barrier strip 533 x 1351 x 640 mm 21.0 x 53.2 x 25.2 in 96 kg (211 lb)
from boundary loading.

VLA901H
High Output Three-Way Full Range Loudspeaker 58 Hz - 12 kHz (± 3 dB) 90° 99/108/115 dB SPL 4 ohms/8 ohms/ 4 ohms 1600 W (6400 W peak), 2 hrs. 1200 W (4800 W peak), 100 hrs. 1400 W (5600 W peak), 100 hrs. 450 W (1800 W peak), 2 hrs. 131 dB SPL continuous average 139 dB SPL continuous average 142 dB SPL continuous average 2 x 2226H (380 mm/ 15 in) 4 x CMCD82H (200 mm/8 in cone) 6 x 2431H (38 mm/ 11⁄2 in) 12-ply birch plywood DuraFlex™ Neutrik Speakon® NL8 Plus covered barrier strip 533 x 1351 x 640 mm 21.0 x 53.2 x 25.2 in 109 kg (241 lb)

1 With recommended active tuning. (Digital signal processing is

required in order to achieve specified performance.) 2 AES standard, one decade pink noise with 6 dB crest factor

within device’s operational band, free air. Standard AES ratings are specified for low-frequency transducers. 3 Calculated based on power rating and sensitivity.

4 Anechoic sensitivity in free field, no additional sensitivity gains

Page 315

INSTALLATION PRODUCTS

Precision Directivity® PD700
key features
f FSA™ FORWARD STEERED ARRAY ENCLOSURE CONFIGURATIONS f PATTERN CONTROL MAINTAINED WELL BELOW 400 Hz

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

PD743 PD764

One of the challenges in large arenas, stadiums, houses of worship and performance spaces is to provide quality sound to every seat with the volume and clarity demanded by today’s concert, sporting and special events. JBL Professional’s Precision Directivity® (PD) line of speakers uses a full range, full bandwidth total system approach that allows contractors and consultants to design a fully integrated sound system solving the audio challenges inherent to these types of large installations.

PD743 (40° x 30°) AND PD764 (60° x 40°)
The PD743 and PD764 mid-high loudspeaker systems provide high-impact sound reinforcement at throw distances that are beyond the reach of traditional single-driver designs. A single module produces greater than 104 dB SPL (continuous) at distances of 65 m (215 ft) with a 40° by 30° coverage pattern (PD743) or a 60° by 40° coverage pattern (PD764). These systems may be used in arrays with other PD Series modules or singly as part of a distributed system.

specifications
PD743
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESPONSE NOMINAL COVERAGE SENSITIVITY ( 1 W, 1 m) NOMINAL IMPEDANCE INPUT POWER RATING TRANSDUCERS ENCLOSURE FINISH INPUT CONNECTORS DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
Page 316 Mid High Loudspeaker System 150 Hz - 17 kHz (-10 dB) 200 Hz - 15 kHz (± 3 dB) 40° x 30° (H x V) MF:111 dB, HF: 118 dB MF:8 ohms, HF: 16 ohms MF:700 W, AES; 2800 W peak HF:150 W, AES; 600 W peak 2 x 2250J (203 mm/8 in) 2 x 2430H (75 mm/3 in) Dual Trapezoidal 25° V, 35° H Black DuraFlex™ 1 x NL4 Neutrik® Speakon® 991 x 991 x 1146 mm 39 x 39 x 45.1 in 111.4 kg (245 lb)

PD764
Mid High Loudspeaker System 150 Hz - 17 kHz (-10 dB) 200 Hz - 15 kHz (± 3 dB) 60° x 40° (H x V) MF:109 dB, HF: 116 dB MF:8 ohms, HF: 16 ohms MF:700 W, AES; 2800 W peak HF:150 W, AES; 600 W peak 2 x 2250J (203 mm/8 in) 2 x 2430H (75 mm/3 in) Dual Trapezoidal 35° V, 55° H Black DuraFlex 1 x NL4 Neutrik Speakon 991 x 991 x 883 mm 39 x 39 x 34.75 in 97.7 kg (215 lb)

Honda Center, Anaheim, California

PD5000 SERIES

Precision Directivity® PD5000 Series
The PD5000 Series joins JBL’s broad lineup of installed sound loudspeakers, complementing the larger PD700 mid-high cabinets with a more compact size and supplementing the smaller AE Series cabinets with higher SPL capability and larger horns for pattern control to a lower frequency.The PD5000 Series loudspeakers deliver high power and constant coverage in a low profile form. Featured across the PD5000 Series, are 24 by 24 inch PT™ Progressive Transition mid-frequency rotatable waveguides that provide versatility, excellent pattern control with low distortion and extremely natural sound character. This is an evolution of the waveguide technology of the successful JBL Professional Application Engineered™ (AE) install series. Also incorporating sophisticated, steep-slope passive crossover networks minimize band overlap, further enhancing off-axis pattern control. User accessible internal switches allow for a fully active crossover.
PD5200/43 (40° x 30°) PD5200/64 (60° x 40°) PD5200/95 (90° x 50°)
The PD5200 Series Precision Directivity midhigh frequency loudspeakers are designed for applications requiring high output capability with excellent pattern control. The CMCD-82H cone midrange compression driver consists of a driver/phasing plug assembly providing high output with low distortion. CMCD-82H’s extended response allows for smoother transition to the high frequency driver and the smaller entrance diameter into the waveguide provides for better pattern control. The internal 200 mm (8 inch) CMCD-82H features a high power neodymium Differential Drive® dual voice coil design. The 2431H large format high frequency compression driver utilizes a neodymium magnet and aluminum diaphragm to deliver clear and intelligible high frequency projection, extended frequency response, and low distortion at even the highest drive levels.

PD5322/43 (40° x 30°) PD5322/64 (60° x 40°) PD5322/95 (90° x 50°)
The PD5322 Precision Directivity full range, three way loudspeakers are designed for applications requiring high output sensitivity with excellent pattern control. They can be utilized standalone in demanding music or speech systems where low frequency extension to 40 Hz is required. The low frequency section features two 2206H 300 mm (12 in) VGC™ Vented Gap Cooled low frequency transducers featuring high sensitivity and low power compression for high continuous SPL capability. A newly designed loading plate covering the slot loaded low frequency tranducers provides the highest possible sensitivity, low frequency output and system reliability. The mid and high frequency sections are hornloaded for additional low-mid and midrange sensitivity and improved pattern control. The CMCD-82H cone midrange compression driver consists of a driver/phasing plug assembly providing high output with low distortion. The integral 200 mm (8 in) cone driver features a high power neodymium Differential Drive® dual, voice coil design. The 2431H large format high frequency compression driver utilizes a neodymium magnet and aluminum diaphragm to deliver clear and intelligible high frequency projection, extended frequency response, and low distortion at even the highest drive levels.

PD5122
The PD5122 is intended for use as a flown or ground supported, high power low frequency module used in conjunction with mid/high-only or full range systems of the PD5000 series to construct arrays with extended low frequency pattern control. Low frequency transducers are the 2206H 300 mm (12 in) VGC™ Vented Gap Cooled drivers. They deliver excellent low frequency extension with minimal power compression and low distortion plus high sensitivity and power handling.

PD5125
The PD5125 is a high power low frequency loudspeaker comprised of two 380 mm (15 in) VGC Vented Gap Cooled low frequency drivers in a front-loaded, vented configuration. Though it is intended for use as a flown or ground supported, high power low frequency module used in conjunction with mid/high or full range systems of the PD5000 and PD700 series, the PD5125 will perform well in any application where high output low bass is required. Low frequency transducers are the 2226H 380 mm (15 in) VGC Vented Gap Cooled drivers. They deliver excellent low frequency extension with minimal power compression and low distortion plus high sensitivity and power handling. Large vent area assures minimal port compression and low distortion at high output levels.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

PD5212/43 (40° x 30°) PD5212/64 (60° x 40°) PD5212/95 (90° x 50°)
The PD5212 Series Precision Directivity full range two-way loudspeakers are designed for applications requiring high output capability with excellent pattern control. The speakers can be utilized alone in music or speech systems where frequency extension to 80 Hz is adequate or combined with subwoofers to create extended bandwidth full range systems. The M222-8A 300 mm (12 in) low frequency transducer features high sensitivity and low power compression for high continuous SPL capability. It is horn-loaded for additional sensitivity and improved pattern control. A newly designed low frequency phasing plug extends frequency response, providing smoother transition to the high frequency driver. The 2451H-1 large format high frequency compression driver utilizes a neodymium magnet and pure titanium diaphragm to deliver clear and intelligible high frequency projection, extended frequency response, and low distortion at even the highest drive levels.

PD5000 Series loudspeaker inputs include both Speakon® and CE-compliant covered barrier strips. The cabinets are fitted with twenty M10 threaded suspension points, supporting a wide variety of installation approaches. All cabinets are constructed with 11 ply birch and finished with black DuraFlex™.

Page 317

key features

f CLEAR, INTELLIGIBLE HIGH FREQUENCY PROJECTION f LARGE PT™ PROGRESSIVE TRANSITION WAVEGUIDES FOR PATTERN CONTROL, LOW DISTORTION AND SMOOTH RESPONSE f ROTATABLE WAVEGUIDES FOR HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL CABINET ORIENTATION

f INTEGRAL, SOPHISTICATED STEEP-SLOPE PASSIVE CROSSOVER NETWORKS WITH BIAMP/ PASSIVE SWITCHABLE CROSSOVER MODES f TWO FULLY-COMPATIBLE LOW FREQUENCY LOUDSPEAKERS FOR INSTALLATION VERSATILITY

PD5000 Series

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

PD5200/43, PD5200/64 (shown) PD5200/95

PD5212/43 (shown), PD5212/64 PD5212/95

PD5322/43, PD5322/64 PD5322/95 (shown)

SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE 1 FREQUENCY RESPONSE SYSTEM SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1m NOMINAL COVERAGE TRANSDUCER POWER RATING (AES) 2

specifications
PD5200/43
Mid-High Frequency 200 Hz - 18 kHz (-10 dB) 240 Hz - 16 kHz (± 3 dB) 111 dB SPL (Passive Mode) 40° x 30° MF: 350 W (1400 W pk), 100 hrs HF: 75 W (300 W pk), 2 hrs 300 W (1200 W peak), 100 hrs

PD5200/64
Mid-High Frequency 200 Hz - 18 kHz (-10 dB) 240 Hz - 16 kHz (± 3 dB) 110 dB SPL (Passive Mode) 60° x 40° MF: 350 W (1400 W pk), 100 hrs HF: 75 W (300 W pk), 2 hrs 300 W (1200 W peak), 100 hrs

PD5200/95
Mid-High Frequency 200 Hz - 18 kHz (-10 dB) 240 Hz - 16 kHz (± 3 dB) 109 dB SPL (Passive Mode) 90° x 50° MF: 350 W (1400 W pk), 100 hrs HF: 75 W (300 W pk), 2 hrs 300 W (1200 W peak), 100 hrs

PD5212/43
Two-Way Full-Range 80 Hz - 18 kHz (-10 dB) 90 Hz - 16 kHz (± 3 dB) 109 dB SPL (Passive Mode) 40° x 30° LF: 400 W (1600 W pk), 2 hrs LF: 300 W (1200 W pk), 100 hrs HF: 75 W (300 W pk), 2 hrs 300 W (1200 W peak), 100 hrs 137 dB SPL (143 dB peak)

PD5212/64
Two-Way Full-Range 80 Hz - 18 kHz (-10 dB) 90 Hz - 16 kHz (± 3 dB) 107 dB SPL (Passive Mode) 60° x 40° LF: 400 W (1600 W pk), 2 hrs LF: 300 W (1200 W pk), 100 hrs HF: 75 W (300 W pk), 2 hrs 300 W (1200 W peak), 100 hrs 135 dB SPL (143 dB peak) 135 dB SPL (141 dB peak) 132 dB SPL (138 dB peak) Trapezoidal, 12.5° side angles 991 x 673 x 706 mm 39.0 x 26.5 x 27.8 in 69.0 kg (152 lb)

PD5212/95
Two-Way Full-Range 80 Hz - 18 kHz (-10 dB) 90 Hz - 16 kHz (± 3 dB) 106 dB SPL (Passive Mode) 90° x 50° LF: 400 W (1600 W pk), 2 hrs LF: 300 W (1200 W pk), 100 hrs HF: 75 W (300 W pk), 2 hrs 300 W (1200 W peak), 100 hrs 134 dB SPL (140 dB peak) 133 dB SPL (139 dB peak) 131 dB SPL (137 dB peak) Trapezoidal, 12.5° side angles 991 x 673 x 706 mm 39.0 x 26.5 x 27.8 in 69.0 kg (152 lb)

LONG-TERM 3 LF POWER RATING (IEC): MF/HF MAXIMUM SPL: 4 LF Cont. Avg. MF HF PASSIVE MODE: MF/HF ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

137 dB SPL (143 dB peak) 135 dB SPL (141 dB peak) 136 dB SPL (142 dB peak) Trapezoidal, 12.5° side angles 991 x 673 x 897 mm 39.0 x 26.5 x 35.3 in 69.0 kg (152 lb)

135 dB SPL (141 dB peak) 135 dB SPL (141 dB peak) 135 dB SPL (141 dB peak) Trapezoidal, 12.5° side angles 991 x 673 x 706 mm 39.0 x 26.5 x 27.8 in 58.8 kg (130 lb)

134 dB SPL (140 dB peak) 133 dB SPL (139 dB peak) 133 dB SPL (139 dB peak) Trapezoidal, 12.5° side angles 991 x 673 x 706 mm 39.0 x 26.5 x 27.8 in 58.8 kg (130 lb)

135 dB SPL (141 dB peak) 134 dB SPL (140 dB peak) Trapezoidal, 12.5° side angles 991 x 673 x 897 mm 39.0 x 26.5 x 35.3 in 75.5 kg (175 lb)

PD5322/43
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE 1 FREQUENCY RESPONSE SYSTEM SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1m NOMINAL COVERAGE TRANSDUCER POWER RATING (AES) 2 LONG-TERM 3 LF POWER RATING (IEC): MF/HF MAXIMUM SPL: 4 LF Cont. Avg. MF HF PASSIVE MODE: MF/HF ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
Three-Way Full-Range 41 Hz - 17 kHz (-10 dB) 49 Hz - 15 kHz (±3 dB) 111 dB SPL (Passive Mode) 40° x 30° LF: 1600 W (6400 W pk), 2 hrs LF: 1200 W (4800 W pk), 100 hrs MF: 350 W (1400 W pk), 100 hrs HF: 75 W (300 W pk), 2 hrs 1200 W (4800 W pk) 300 W (1200 W pk), 100 hrs 128 dB SPL (134 dB peak) 137 dB SPL (143 dB peak) 135 dB SPL 141 dB peak) 136 dB SPL (142 dB peak) Trapezoidal, 15° side angles 991 x 673 x 897 mm 39.0 x 26.5 x 35.3 in 87.3 kg (192 lb)

PD5322/64
Three-Way Full-Range 41 Hz - 17 kHz (-10 dB) 49 Hz - 15 kHz (±3 dB) 110 dB SPL (Passive Mode) 60° x 40° LF: 1600 W (6400 W pk), 2 hrs LF: 1200 W (4800 W pk), 100 hrs MF: 350 W (1400 W pk), 100 hrs HF: 75 W (300 W pk), 2 hrs 1200 W (4800 W pk) 300 W (1200 W pk), 100 hrs 128 dB SPL (134 dB peak) 135 dB SPL (141 dB peak) 135 dB SPL (141 dB peak) 135 dB SPL (141 dB peak) Trapezoidal, 15° side angles 991 x 673 x 706 mm 39.0 x 26.5 x 27.8 in 77 kg (170 lb)

PD5322/95
Three-Way Full-Range 41 Hz - 17 kHz (-10 dB) 49 Hz - 15 kHz (±3 dB) 109 dB SPL (Passive Mode) 90° x 50° LF: 1600 W (6400 W pk), 2 hrs LF: 1200 W (4800 W pk), 100 hrs MF: 350 W (1400 W pk), 100 hrs HF: 75 W (300 W pk), 2 hrs 1200 W (4800 W pk) 300 W (1200 W pk), 100 hrs 128 dB SPL (134 dB peak) 134 dB SPL (140 dB peak) 133 dB SPL 139 dB peak) 134 dB SPL (140 dB peak) Trapezoidal, 15° side angles 991 x 673 x 706 mm 39.0 x 26.5 x 27.8 in 77 kg (170 lb)

PD5122
Slot-Loaded Low Frequency 41 Hz - 1 kHz (-10 dB) 49 Hz - 300 Hz (±3 dB) 96 dB (60 Hz - 250 Hz) 5 1600 W (6400 W pk) 2 hrs 2

PD5125
Dual 15" Low Frequency 37 Hz - 2.5 kHz (-10 dB) 42 Hz - 2.1 kHz (±3 dB) 103 dB (50 Hz - 125 Hz) 5 1600 W (6400 W pk) 2 hrs 2
1 In bi-amp mode, with

recommended active tuning.

2AES standard, one decade

1200 W (4800 W pk), 100 hrs 6 128 dB SPL (134 dB pk) 4

1200 W (4800 W pk), 100 hrs 6 136 dB SPL (142 pk) (50 Hz - 125 Hz) 4

Trapezoidal, 15° side angles 357 x 673 x 706 mm 14.1 x 26.5 x 27.8 in 36.4 kg (80 lb)

Trapezoidal, 10° side angles 991 x 476 x 691 mm 39 x 18.75 x 27.2 in 53.4 kg (118 lb)

pink noise with 6 dB crest factor within device’s operational band, free air. Standard AES 2 hr rating plus long-term 100 hr rating are specified for lowfrequency transducers. 3 IEC standard, full bandwidth pink noise with 6 dB crest factor, 100 hours, passive mode. 4 Calculated based on power rating and sensitivity, exclusive of power compression. 5 Anechoic sensitivity in free field, no additional sensitivity gains from boundary loading. 6 AES standard, one decade pink noise with 6 dB crest factor, in cabinet, long-term 100 hr rating.

Page 318

AE SERIES

Application Engineered™ Series

Harman Pro Group | 2013

AE Series loudspeakers are ideal for a wide variety of fixed installation applications including performing arts facilities, theatrical sound design, auditoriums, houses of worship, live music clubs, dance-clubs/discotheques, sports facilities and themed entertainment venues. The special mid-high frequency models can be used without LF reinforcement in voice-only PA and delay-fill applications. The smaller models are ideal in lecture halls and corporate learning centers as well as in delay-fill locations of larger systems.
Scaled System Design Approach
AE Series models provide a wide variety of building blocks for your system design, stairstepped to give you just the right solution for your installation. Within the AE Series are three power levels. The high output level models are found in the 7000 and 6000 Series, the medium output models are found in the 5000 and 4000 Series, and the lower output power level is found in the 2000 Series.

Section:

Selectable Crossover Mode
Many AE Series speakers offer selectable crossover modes: tri-amp/bi-amp or bi-amp/ passive switchable.

Sophisticated Crossover Networks
AE Series models incorporate sophisticated crossover designs for outstanding sound quality and

consistent coverage. To minimize overlap between adjacent frequency bands, steep slopes are utilized in passive crossovers — most are 4th order (24 dB/octave). This reduces off-axis lobing, providing consistent coverage throughout the crossover region. Conjugate networks are added in some models to fine tune the frequency response for optimum sound quality.

07

Waveguide Scaling
Sometimes you need maximum pattern control. Other times the speaker needs to be as compact as possible. [AM] models are performancemaximized for the greatest pattern control. [AC] models are compact speakers that fit in areas where a smaller frontal profile is required.

There are 9 high-power 2-way full-range models. Four are shown here and five on the following page.
Page 319

INSTALLATION PRODUCTS

Rotatable Waveguides
The space often dictates how a speaker needs to be oriented. All [AM] two-way and three-way models include a rotatable waveguide, allowing the speaker to be installed in either vertical or horizontal orientation.

Differential Drive® Technology
JBL’s exclusive dual voice coil – dual gap Differential Drive technology is at the core of AM5212, AM5215, AM7212, AM7215, AM7315, AM7200 and AL7115 as well as the ASB6112, ASB6115, ASB6125, ASB7118 and ASB7128 subwoofer models. Patented in 1995, this groundbreaking JBL technology dramatically reduces driver weight while greatly enhancing all critical performance parameters: frequency response, power output, and distortion. The Differential Drive technology features a unique design with heat sinks integrated into the cast aluminum frame. The dual voice coil and dual gap places the neodymium magnets inside the dual voice coil assembly, completing the magnetic circuit without the heavy surrounding steel structure of conventional drivers.

PT™ Progressive Transition Waveguides
JBL’s new patent pending Progressive Transition Waveguides represent the latest in horn technology. In addition to providing smooth, low distortion sound, PT Waveguides deliver uniform offaxis frequency response to every point within the intended coverage area — not just in the horizontal and vertical planes — resulting in superior array-ability of multiple loudspeaker systems. PT Waveguides combine outstanding pattern control with undistorted sound for natural music and intelligible speech.

Versatile Model Options
All AE Series speakers are available in several versions for matching décor or for outdoor use. Any model can be finished in white (-WH) or left unfinished and ready to paint (-UF). Additionally, two degrees of weather resistance are available. For many environments the basic weather resistance option (-WRC) is suitable. An extra thick DuraFlex™ coating, multilayer grille and component treatments provide excellent environmental protection. For extreme environments, with high humidity and/or rapid temperature cycling, a maximum weather treatment (-WRX) adds a full fiberglass covering of the cabinet. AE Series brackets and overhead suspension accessories are also available.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CMCD™ Cone Midrange Compression Drivers
Incorporated into all cone midrange models — patented CMCD technology is more than a simple displacement plug. In addition to providing increased output and lower distortion, this cone-based true compression driver design extends operational bandwidth (both up and down in frequency) to cover the entire vocal range seamlessly, allows for better waveguide pattern control, and improves phase coherency of the midrange signal for clearer, more intelligible audio quality.

Legendary JBL Transducers
AE Series incorporates the legendary reliability of JBL’s VGC™ Vented Gap Cooled drivers, augmented by today’s new generation of JBL compression drivers and neodymium Differential Drive® cone transducers. Where reliability is important, JBL transducers are known as the best, most reliable drivers in the business.

Page 320

AE SERIES

key features

f VERSATILE SCALED SYSTEM APPROACH f VGC™ DRIVERS AND DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE® CONE TRANSDUCERS

f PT™ PROGRESSIVE TRANSITION WAVEGUIDES FOR EXCELLENT PATTERN CONTROL

Harman Pro Group | 2013

2432H 75mm (3”) voice coil, 1.5” exit compression driver is used all AM7200, AM7315, AM7212 and AM7215 Models

Large mouth rotatable Progressive Transition™ waveguides for precise directivity control are used in all AM5212, AM5215, AM7212, and AM7215 models

JBL’s patented dual voice coil – dual gap Differential Drive technology is at the core of all AM5000 and AM7000 Series loudspeaker systems.

Section:

07

AM7315/xx

AM7200/xx

AM | Maximized 3-Way

AM7315/95 & /64
High-power Three-way 38 Hz - 20 kHz (-10 dB) 45 Hz - 18 kHz (± 3 dB) AM7315/95 - 90° x 50° AM7315/64 - 60° x 40° 1000W 350W 100W 600W (2400W peak) 200W (800W peak) 126/132 dB 133/139 dB 133/139 dB 133/139 dB Bi-amp/Tri-amp 13 points 967 x 561 x 657 mm 38.1 x 22.1 x 25.9 in 45.8 kg (101 lb)

AM7200/95 & /64
High-power Mid-high 260 Hz - 20 kHz (-10 dB) 330 Hz - 20 kHz (± 3 dB) AM7200/95 - 90° x 50° AM7200/64 - 60° x 40° 350W 100W 200W (800W peak) 133/139 dB 133/139 dB Bi-amp/Passive 13 points 548 x 561 x 657 mm 21.6 x 22.1 x 25.9 in 27.2 kg (60 lb)

SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESPONSE NOMINAL COVERAGE

TRANSDUCER LF POWER RATING(AES) MF HF LONG-TERM LF POWER RATING(IEC): MF/HF MAXIMUM SPL 1: LF MF HF BI-AMP MODE: MF/HF SELECTABLE CROSSOVER MODES SUSPENSION DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

Page 321

INSTALLATION PRODUCTS

AM | Maximized 2-Way
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESPONSE NOMINAL COVERAGE

AM7212/xx

AM7215/xx

AM5212/xx

AM5215/xx

AM7212/64-66-95-00-26
High-power 12" Two-way 36 Hz - 20 kHz (-10 dB) 42 Hz - 18 kHz (± 3 dB) AM7212/64: 60° x 40° AM7212/66: 60° x 60° AM7212/95: 90° x 50° AM7212/00: 100° x 100° AM7212/26: 120° x 60° 1000 W (4000 W peak) 700 W (2800 W peak) 100 W (400 W peak) 600 / 1200 / 2400 W 126 dB 135 dB Passive/Bi-Amp 15 points (M10) 713 x 371 x 458 mm 28.06 x 14.6 x 18.1 in 23.1 kg (51 lb)

AM7215/64-66-95-26
High-power 15" Two-way 34 Hz - 20 kHz (-10 dB) 40 Hz - 18 kHz (± 3 dB) AM7215/64: 60° x 40° AM7215/66: 60° x 60° AM7215/95: 90° x 50° AM7215/26: 120° x 60° 1000 W (4000 W peak) 750 W (3000 W peak) 100 W (400 W peak) 600 / 1200 / 2400 W 126 dB 135 dB Passive/Bi-Amp 15 points (M10) 783 x 422 x 504 mm 30.8 x 16.6 x 19.9 in 27.2 kg (60 lb)

AM5212/64-66-95-00-26
Medium-power 12" Two-way 37 Hz - 20 kHz (-10 dB) 43 Hz - 18 kHz (± 3 dB) AM5212/64: 60° x 40° AM5212/66: 60° x 60° AM5212/95: 90° x 50° AM5212/00: 100° x 100° AM5212/26: 120° x 60° 400 W (1600 W peak) 300 W (1200 W peak) 40 W (160 W peak) 300 / 600 / 1200 W 122 dB 131 dB Passive/Bi-Amp 15 points (M10) 713 x 371 x 458 mm 28.06 x 14.6 x 18.1 in 20.2 kg (45 lb)

AM5215/64-66-95-26
Medium-power 15" Two-way 35 Hz - 20 kHz (-10 dB) 41 Hz - 18 kHz (± 3 dB) AM5215/64: 60° x 40° AM5215/66: 60° x 60° AM5215/95: 90° x 50° AM5215/26: 120° x 60° 500 W (2000 W peak) 350 W (1400 W peak) 40 W (160 W peak) 350 / 700 / 1400 W 125 dB 131 dB Passive/Bi-Amp 15 points (M10) 783 x 422 x 504 mm 30.8 x 16.6 x 19.9 in 25 kg (55 lb)

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

LF (2 Hours) TRANSDUCER LF (100 Hours) POWER RATING: HF (2 Hours) LONG-TERM POWER RATING(IEC) (Continuous/Program/Peak) MAXIMUM SPL 1: LF (Bi-Amp Mode) HF SELECTABLE CROSSOVER MODES SUSPENSION DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

AL7115

AC2215/xx

AC2212/xx

AC | Compact 2-Way

AC2215/95, /64 & /00
Lower-power Two-way 42 Hz - 19 kHz (-10 dB) 50 Hz - 17 kHz (± 3 dB) AC2215/95: 90° x 50° AC2215/64: 60° x 40° AC2215/00: 100° x 100° 275 W (1100 W peak) 30 W (120 W peak) 250 W (1000 W peak) 121 dB 127 dB 121 dB Bi-amp, Passive 15 points 637 x 422 x 504 mm 25.1 x 16.6 x 19.9 in 23.6 kg (52 lb)

AC2212/95, /64 & /00
Lower-power Two-way 50 Hz - 19 kHz (-10 dB) 55 Hz - 17 kHz (± 3 dB) AC2212/95: 90° x 50° AC2212/64: 60° x 40° AC2212/00: 100° x 100° 300 W (1100 W peak) 30 W (120 W peak) 250 W (1000 W peak) 120 dB 129 dB 120 dB Bi-amp, Passive 15 points 548 x 355 x 352 mm 21.6 x 14.0 x 13.9 in 18.1 kg (40 lb)

SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESPONSE NOMINAL COVERAGE

AL | Low Frequency

AL7115
High-power Low Freq. 40 Hz - 4.2 kHz 47 Hz - 3.0 kHz 1000W LF 600W (2400W peak) LF 126/132 dB Discrete Trapizoidal 15° side angles 13 points 548 x 561 x 657 mm 21.6 x 22.1 x 25.9 in 25.9 kg (57 lb)
1 Maximum long-term average SPL. Peak SPL is

TRANSDUCER LF POWER RATING(AES): HF LONG-TERM POWER RATING (IEC) MAXIMUM SPL 1: LF HF PASSIVE MODE SELECTABLE CROSSOVER MODES SUSPENSION DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
Page 322

SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESPONSE TRANSDUCER POWER RATING(AES) LONG-TERM SYSTEM POWER RATING MAXIMUM SPL1

SELECTABLE CROSSOVER MODES ENCLOSURE SUSPENSION DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

6 dB higher. Figure is for highest Q version.

AE SERIES
ASB6128 ASB4128 ASB6128V

ASH6118

ASB6118

ASB | Subwoofers

ASB6118
High-power Subwoofer 28 Hz - 1 kHz (-10 dB) 35 Hz - 1 kHz (± 3 dB) 1200 W (4800 W peak) (2 hrs) 800 W (3200 W peak) 100 hrs 30 Hz –100 Hz: 129 dB 100 Hz - 500 Hz: 129 dB Discrete Rectangular 14 points 548 x 561 x 816 mm 21.6 x 22.1 x 32.2 in 44.5 kg (98 lb)

ASB6128
High-power Subwoofer 30 Hz - 1 kHz (-10 dB) 38 Hz - 1 kHz (± 3 dB) 2400 W (9600 W peak) (2 hrs) 1600 W (6400 W peak) 100 hrs 30 Hz –100 Hz: 136 dB 100 Hz - 500 Hz: 136 dB Parallel, Discrete Rectangular 12 points 1094 x 561 x 816 mm 43.1 x 22.1 x 32.2 in 73.0 kg (161 lb)

ASB4128
Medium-power Subwoofer 30 Hz - 1 kHz (-10 dB) 40 Hz - 1 kHz (± 3 dB) 1000 W (4000 W peak) (2 hrs) 600 W (2400 W peak) 100 hrs 30 Hz –100 Hz: 133 dB 100 Hz - 500 Hz: 133 dB Parallel, Discrete Rectangular 14 points 1094 x 561 x 816 mm 43.1 x 22.1 x 32.2 in 64.9 kg (143 lb)

ASB6128V
Extended Response Sub 21 Hz - 300 Hz (-10 dB) 25 Hz - 300 Hz (± 3 dB) 2400 W (9600 W peak) (2 hrs) 1600 W (6400 W peak) 100 hrs 30 Hz –100 Hz: 134 dB 100 Hz - 500 Hz: 135 dB Parallel, Discrete Rectangular 13 points 967 x 561 x 1215 mm 38.1 x 22.1 x 47.85 in 89.8 kg (198 lb)

ASH | Horn Loaded Subwoofer
ASH6118
* Designed to be used in multiples (2 minimum, 4 optimum) with proximity placement or with proper boundary surface loading. Specifications shown are for one cabinet.

SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESPONSE TRANSDUCER POWER RATING(AES) LONG-TERM SYSTEM POWER RATING MAXIMUM SPL 1

Horn-loaded Subwoofer* 25 Hz - 250 Hz (-10 dB)* 30 Hz - 200 Hz (± 3 dB) 1200 W (4800 W peak) (2 hrs) 800 W (3200 W peak) 100 hrs 30 Hz –140 Hz: 133 dB Discrete Rectangular None 564 x 1530 x 1288 mm 22.3 x 56.4 x 50.7 in 159.3 kg (351 lb)

Harman Pro Group | 2013

SELECTABLE CROSSOVER MODES ENCLOSURE SUSPENSION DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

Section:

1 Maximum long-term average SPL. Peak SPL is 6 dB higher. Figure is for highest Q version.

07

ASB | Subwoofers

ASB6115
Single 15" Subwoofer 32 Hz - 1 kHz (-10 dB) 42 Hz - 1 kHz (± 3 dB) 800 W (2 hrs) 100 hrs 35 Hz - 400 Hz: 126 dB SPL cont average (132 dB peal) Discrete Rectangular 16 points (M10) 483 x 419 x 597 mm 19.0 x 16.5 x 23.5 in 20.6 kg (45.5 lb)

ASB6125
Double 15" Subwoofer 32 Hz - 1 kHz (-10 dB) 35 Hz - 1 kHz (± 3 dB) 1600 W, 2 x 800 W (2 hrs) 100 hrs 35 Hz - 400 Hz: 132 dB SPL cont average (138 dB peal) Parallel, Discrete Rectangular 16 points (M10) 965 x 419 x 597 mm 38.0 x 16.5 x 23.5 in 36.7 kg (81.0 lb)

ASB7128
Double 18" High Output Subwoofer with 2269 Woofer 20 Hz - 1 kHz (-10 dB) 25 Hz - 1 kHz (± 3 dB) 4000 W, 2 x 2000 W (2 hrs) 100 hrs 25 Hz - 200 Hz: 135 dB SPL cont average (141 dB peal) Parallel, Discrete Rectangular 16 points (M10) 1092 x 560 x 815 mm 43.0 x 22.0 x 32.1 in 71.9 kg (158.5 lb)

ASB7118
Single 18" High Output Subwoofer with 2269 Woofer 22 Hz - 1 kHz (-10 dB) 34 Hz - 1 kHz (± 3 dB) 2000 W (2 hrs) 100 hrs 25 Hz - 200 Hz: 129 dB SPL cont average (135 dB peal) Discrete Rectangular 16 points (M10) 546 x 560 x 815 mm 21.5 x 22.0 x 32.1 in 42.9 kg (94.5 lb)

ASB6112
35 Hz - 1 kHz (-10 dB) 43 Hz – 1 kHz (± 3 dB) 1000 W (2 hrs) 700 W (2800 W peak), 100 hrs 40 Hz - 300 Hz: 126 dB SPL cont average (132 dB peal) Discrete Rectangular 16 points (M10) 406 x 369 x 483 mm 16.0 x 14.5 x 19.0 in 16.3 kg (36.0 lb)
1 AES standard, one decade pink noise with 6 dB crest factor within

SYSTEM TYPE

Single 12" Subwoofer

FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESPONSE TRANSDUCER POWER RATING(AES) 1 LONG-TERM SYSTEM POWER RATING 2 MAXIMUM SPL 3 (1m, calculated) SELECTABLE CROSSOVER MODES ENCLOSURE SUSPENSION DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

device’s operational band, free air. Standard AES 2 hr rating plus long-term 100 hr rating are specified for low-frequency transducers. 2 AES standard, one decade pink noise with 6 dB crest factor, in cabinet, long-term 100 hr rating. 3 Calculated based on power rating and sensitivity, exclusive of power compression.

Page 323

INSTALLATION PRODUCTS

AE Series Compact Models
key features
For over sixty years JBL engineers have leveraged their mastery of physics to elevate the platform which millions of creative individuals worldwide use to broadcast their personal form of audible art. The engineering team strives to achieve the highest level of sonic quality to ensure the audience will hear every nuance of tonal clarity as intended by the artist.
AC16 f ULTRA COMPACT ENCLOSURES f MULTIPLE ATTACHMENT POINTS FOR ULTIMATE FLEXIBILITY f VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL ORIENTATION f HIGH PERFORMANCE VS. COST AC28/95 AC 28/26 AC26

AC25

Section:

07
JBL continues to support artists worldwide with the introduction of eight new AE Series Compact Loudspeakers. An extension of the industry leading AE Series, the AE Compact family consists of high output, 2-way loudspeaker systems combining flexibility with high fidelity. Ranging from a single 5.25" point-and-shoot box to dual 8" loudspeaker system that are specifically designed for better serving the needs of both designers and artists alike. The ultra-compact AC15 and AC25 models include a 1" dome tweeter while the AC16, AC26, AC18, and AC28 models feature 1" exit compression drivers providing sonic clarity and crisp detail. The AC18 and AC28 featuring JBL’s Progressive Transition™ Rotatable Waveguides, offer the system designer a choice of coverage patterns in either 90° x 50° or 120° x 60°.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

AC18/95 AC 18/26

AC15

AC15
The AC15 is an ultra compact enclosure with one 5.25" LF transducer and 90° x 90° waveguide with 25 mm (1in) dome tweeter. It is equipped with attachment points for a U-bracket and OmniMount® type bracket.

AC26
The AC26 has the features of the AC16 with two 6.5" LF transducers.

AC18/95 & AC18/26
The AC18/95 & AC18/26 are compact enclosures with one 8" LF transducer and a 90° x 50° Progressive Transition Field Rotatable Waveguide with a 1" exit compression driver (AC18/95) or 120° x 60° Progressive Transition™ Field Rotatable Waveguide with a 1" exit compression driver (AC18/26). They are equipped with attachment points for a U-bracket, OmniMount type bracket and stand mount adapter

AC25
The AC25 has the features of the AC15 with two 5.25" LF transducers.

AC16
The AC16 is an ultra compact enclosure with one 6.5" LF transducer and a 90° x 90° Progressive Transition™ Waveguide with a 25 mm (1 in) exit compression driver. It is equipped with attachment points for a U-bracket, OmniMount® type bracket and stand mount adapter.

AC28/95 & AC28/26
The AC28/95 & AC28/26 have the features of the AC18/95 & AC18/26 with two 8" LF transducers.

specifications
AC15
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB) FREQUENCY RESPONSE (±3 dB) SYSTEM SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m POWER RATING COVERAGE PATTERN DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
Ultra Compact 2-way Loudspeaker System with 1 - 5.25" LF 80 Hz -20 kHz 90 Hz -18 kHz 86 dB SPL 150W Continuous, 600W Peak 90° x 90° 241.3 x 150.3 x 177.8 mm 9.5 x 5.9 x 7.0 in 4.7 kg (10.5 lb)

AC25
Ultra Compact 2-way Loudspeaker System with 2 - 5.25" LF 80 Hz -20 kHz 90 Hz -18 kHz 91 dB SPL 225W Continuous, 900W Peak 90° x 90° 377.8 x 150.3 x 177.8 mm 14.9 x 5.9 x 7.0 in 7.5 kg (16.5 lb)

AC16
Ultra Compact 2-way Loudspeaker System with 1 - 6.5" LF 55 Hz -20 kHz 65 Hz -18 kHz 90 dB SPL 160 W Cont, 640W Peak 90° x 90° 381.0 x 199.4 x 226.1 mm 15.0 x 7.8 x 8.9 in 7.2 kg (15.8 lb)

AC26
Ultra Compact 2-way Loudspeaker System with 2- 6.5" LF 55 Hz -20 kHz 70 Hz -18 kHz 92 dB SPL 180W Cont, 720W Peak 90° x 90° 539.8 x 199.4 x 226.1 mm 21.3 x 7.8 x 8.9 in 11.0 kg (24.3 lb)

AC18/95 & AC 18/26
Compact 2-way Loudspeaker System with 1 - 8" LF 47 Hz -20 kHz 60 Hz -18 kHz 92 dB SPL 250W Continuous, 1000W Peak AC18/95: 90° x 50° AC18/26: 120° x 60° 469.9 x 237.5 x 254.0 mm 18.5 x 9.4 x 10.0 in 12.8 kg (28.2 lb)

AC28/95 & AC 28/26
Compact 2-way Loudspeaker System with 2 - 8" LF 47 Hz -20 kHz 60 Hz -18 kHz 94 dB SPL 375W Continuous, 1500W Peak AC28/95: 90° x 50° AC28/26: 120° x 60° 679.5 x 237.5 x 254.0 mm 26.8 x 9.4 x 10.0 in 18.6 kg (40.9 lb)

Page 324

ALL WEATHER SERIES

AE Series

Harman Pro Group | 2013

The JBL ALL WEATHER Series is a family of high power, lightweight, 2-way, full-range loudspeaker systems comprised of the JBL Differential Drive® dual voice coil and dual magnetic gap low frequency 12" and 15" woofers and 2432H high-frequency 38mm (1.5 in) exit, 75mm (3 in) voice-coil compression driver. The large format Progressive Transition wave-guides provide excellent highfrequency coverage patterns. The waveguides are rotatable so the loudspeaker system can used in either the vertical or horizontal orientation.

Section:

07

The enclosures are constructed of multilayer glass composite and are heavily braced to maximize low-frequency performance. The 14-gauge stainless steel grille, backed with open cell foam and stainless steel mesh, provides excellent protection in the harshest environments. The system is equipped with a 400W 70/100V transformer. A heavy-duty stainless steel U-type mounting bracket is included and allows for easy installation on flat surfaces or in 90° corners. The ALL WEATHER Series is part of JBL’s AE Series, a versatile family of loudspeakers intended for a wide variety of applications.
AW266
The AW266 is a high power, lightweight, 2-way, full-range loudspeaker system comprised of the JBL Differential Drive dual voice coil and dual magnetic gap 2262H 300 mm (12 in) lowfrequency driver and 2432H high-frequency 38 mm (1.5 in) exit, 75 mm (3 in) voice-coil compression driver. The large format Progressive Transition wave-guide provides excellent 60° x 60° coverage.

AW526
The AW526 is a high power, lightweight, 2-way, full-range loudspeaker system comprised of the JBL Differential Drive dual voice coil and dual magnetic gap 2265H-1 380 mm (15 in) low-frequency driver and 2432H high-frequency 38 mm (1.5 in) exit, 75 mm (3 in) voice-coil compression driver. The large format Progressive Transition wave-guide provides excellent 120° x 60° coverage. The system is equipped with a 400 W 70/100V transformer.

AW595
The AW595 is a high power, lightweight, 2-way, full-range loudspeaker system comprised of the JBL Differential Drive dual voice coil and dual magnetic gap 2265H-1 380 mm (15 in) low-frequency driver and 2432H high-frequency 38 mm (1.5 in) exit, 75 mm (3 in) voice-coil compression driver. The large format Progressive Transition wave-guide provides excellent 90° x 50° coverage. The system is equipped with a 400 W 70/100V transformer. A heavy-duty stainless steel U-type mounting bracket is included and allows for easy installation on flat surfaces or in 90° corners.

AW295
The AW295 is a high power, lightweight, 2-way, full-range loudspeaker system comprised of the JBL Differential Drive dual voice coil and dual magnetic gap 2262H 300 mm (12 in) lowfrequency driver and 2432H high-frequency 38 mm (1.5 in) exit, 75 mm (3 in) voice-coil compression driver. The large format Progressive Transition wave-guide provides excellent 90° x 50° coverage.

AW566
The AW566 is a high power, lightweight, 2-way, full-range loudspeaker system comprised of the JBL Differential Drive dual voice coil and dual magnetic gap 2265H-1 380 mm (15 in) low-frequency driver and 2432H high-frequency 38 mm (1.5 in) exit, 75 mm (3 in) voice-coil compression driver. The large format Progressive Transition wave-guide provides excellent 60° x 60° coverage.

Page 325

ALL WEATHER SERIES

AE Series - All Weather
key features
f WEATHER-RESISTANT, ALL FIBERGLASS ENCLOSURE f DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE® LOW FREQUENCY DRIVER f U-TYPE MOUNTING BRACKET INCLUDED f VARIETY OF COVERAGE PATTERNS FOR VERSATILE INSTALLATION USE

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 326

CBT 50LA

AW266 AW295

AW526 AW566 AW595

specifications
AW266
SYSTEM TYPE DRIVER POWER RATING (2 hrs. Continous Pink Noise) SENSITIVITY (1w / 1m) FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB) FREQUENCY RESPONSE (±3 dB) DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
High Power 12" 2-way Full Range 60° x 60° All Weather Loudspeaker LF: 2262H; HF: 2432H 500W 98dB 40Hz - 20kHz 51Hz - 18kHz 28.8 x 16.1 x 17.8 in 55.5 lb

AW295
High Power 12" 2-way Full Range 90° x 50° All Weather Loudspeaker LF 2262H; HF 2432H 500W 98dB 43Hz - 20kHz 53Hz - 18kHz 28.8 x 16.1 x 17.8 in 55.5 lb

AW526
High Power 15" 2-way Full Range 120° x 60° All Weather Loudspeaker LF 2265H; HF 2432H 600W 100dB 35Hz - 20kHz 55Hz - 17kHz 31.9 x 19.1 x 18.8 in 62.5 lb

AW566
High Power 15" 2-way Full Range 60° x 60° All Weather Loudspeaker LF 2265H; HF 2432H 600W 100dB 35Hz - 20kHz 54Hz - 18kHz 31.9 x 19.1 x 18.8 in 62.5 lbs

AW595
High Power 15" 2-way Full Range 90° x 50° All Weather Loudspeaker LF 2265H; HF 2432H 600W 100dB 35Hz - 20kHz 55Hz - 19kHz 31.9 x 19.1 x 18.8 in 62.5 lbs

AWC SERIES

AWC Series

Compact All-Weather Loudspeakers

JBL AWC82 and AWC 129: Compact, coaxial-driver, 2-way, highly weatherresistant full-range loudspeaker systems.
The AWC Series is ideal for speech and music in a wide variety of applications, including sports facilities, racetracks, stadiums, fairgrounds, rodeos, skating rinks, themed entertainment venues, cruise ships, water parks, outdoor background music/paging systems, swimming pools, and a wide variety of other outdoor or indoor venue types. The AWC82 has a high-power coaxial 200 mm (8 in) low frequency driver and 25 mm (1 in) high frequency compression driver, while the AWC129 is comprised of a high-power co-axial 300 mm (12 in) low frequency driver and 25 mm (1 in) high frequency compression driver. Both models feature a unique tapered pole-piece design that transitions to the cone of the low frequency driver to form a large diameter pattern control waveguide for the high frequencies, both eliminating high-frequency beaming, which is common among this category of speaker, and extending pattern control to the lowest possible frequencies. The result is extremely consistent coverage – wide 120° for AWC82 and more focused 90° for AWC129 – on a broadband basis. The Kevlar-reinforced low frequency cones are designed for reliability, featuring a well-damped surround for smooth frequency response, a high temperature voice coil and a reduced distortion design through saturated-gap magnet geometry. The high frequency compression driver features a new patented design, high temperature polymer diaphragm, and fluid-cooling for high output levels with low distortion. The enclosures are paintable to match color requirements. The corrosion-resistant zinc-rich extra-thick powder coated steel grille is backed with open cell foam and high thread-count mesh, providing protection in harsh environments. The systems are rated IP-56, per IEC529 and have passed ASTM G85 acid-air and salt-spray testing. The systems are equipped with a 200W 70V/100V multi-tap transformer. Outdoor-rated terminals in a recessed terminal cup are protected by a compartment cover and water-tight gland fitting. A heavy-duty weather-capable zinc-rich, thick powder coated U-type mounting bracket is included.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 327

AWC Series

f HIGHLY WEATHER RESISTANT IP56 RATING f CONSISTENT BROADBAND PATTERN CONTROL

key features

f EXTRAORDINARY SPEECH CLARITY f COMPACT CO-AXIAL DESIGN

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
AWC82 AWC129

specifications
AWC82
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE 1 FREQUENCY RESPONSE 1 COVERAGE PATTERN 2 DIRECTIVITY FACTOR DIRECTIVITY INDEX (DI) LONG TERM SYSTEM POWER RATING (IEC) 3 SENSITIVITY MAXIMUM SPL NOMINAL IMPEDANCE COMPONENTS: LF HF ENCLOSURE ATTACHMENT GRILLE TRANSFORMER TAPS: 100V 70V DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

AWC129
All-Weather Compact 2-Way Coaxial Loudspeaker with 12" LF 55 Hz – 20 kHz 80 Hz – 20 kHz 90° x 90° 10.1 (1 k – 16 kHz) 9.5 dB (1k – 16 kHz) 400 W (1600 W peak), 2 hrs. 250 W (1000 W peak), 100 hrs 96 dB (Avg 80 Hz – 20 kHz) Direct 8 ohms: 122 dB (peaks of 128 dB) 200 W Tap: 119 dB 8 ohms Kevlar-reinforced cone with weather treatment, 75 mm (3 in) voice coil 25 mm (1 in) diaphragm and voice coil diameter, high temperature polymer diaphragm, patented design, fluid-cooling ABS with glass enclosure Two M10 (fine-thread) points for included U-bracket; M6 secondary safety attachment point on back panel Corrosion-resistant zinc-rich extra-thick powder coated steel grille, 3-layer assembly with foam and woven poly mesh backing 70V: 200W, 100W, 50W, 25W 100V: 200W, 100W, 50W 402 x 402 x 445 mm (15.8 x 15.8 x 17.5 in) 15.9 kg (35.0 lb) 18.9 kg (41.5 lb) with u-bracket

All-Weather Compact 2-Way Coaxial Loudspeaker with 8" LF 80 Hz – 20 kHz 100 Hz – 20 kHz 120° x 120° 8.1 (1 k – 16 kHz) 8.4 dB (1 k – 16 kHz) 250 W 2 hrs 200 W 100 hrs 94 dB (Avg 100 Hz – 20 kHz) Direct 8 ohms: 118 dB (peaks of 124 dB) 200 W Tap: 117 dB 8 ohms Kevlar-reinforced cone with weather treatment, 50 mm (2 in) voice coil 25 mm (1 in) diaphragm and voice coil diameter, high temperature polymer diaphragm, patented design, fluid-cooling ABS with glass enclosure Two M10 (fine-thread) points for included U-bracket; M6 secondary safety attachment point on back panel Corrosion-resistant zinc-rich extra-thick powder coated steel grille, 3-layer assembly with foam and woven poly mesh backing 70V: 200W, 100W, 50W, 25W 100V: 200W, 100W, 50W 300 x 300 x305 mm (11.8 x 11.8 x 12.0 in) 9.8 kg (21.5 lb) 11.6 kg (25.5 lb) with U-bracket
1 Full-space (free-field) 2 Average 1 kHz to 10 kHz

3 IEC standard, full bandwidth pink noise with 6 dB crest factor. 4 Calculated based on power rating and measured full-space sensitivity.

Page 328

CBT SERIES

CBT Series

Line Array Column Loudspeakers
The JBL CBT Series line array columns with Constant Beamwidth Technology break new ground in performance, versatility, and affordability. Designed for venues that would typically use larger point-and-shoot speakers or powered columns, the CBT models incorporate technical advancements that allow them to vastly outperform competitive systems, with a level of user-friendliness that virtually eliminates the challenges of delivering great sound. With a slim compact design in fiberglass reinforced ABS enclosures, the CBT Series fits well into virtually any decor. Constant Beamwidth Technology™ locks in and maintains a specific coverage pattern over a very wide bandwidth. The CBT models deliver smooth, consistent coverage that is similar to — and in some respects, better than—complex and far more expensive line arrays. The CBT Series’ constant directivity coverage delivers consistent frequency response at every distance as well as off-axis. With the CBT Series, every seat in the house experiences the same quality of sound regardless of position. CBT models are outdoor capable, with an IEC529 rating of IP55 (when used with available MTC-PC2 panel cover). CBT Series column line array loudspeakers are ideal for any application requiring a speaker with discrete appearance, excellent sound and superb pattern control.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CBT 50LA-1
The CBT 50LA-1 is the most compact of the models. At 150 Watts, it holds its own against larger competitive columns. Reponse to 80 Hz works well for speech or music. Voicing can be set for music (flat) or speech via a switch. Applications include audio for video, retail stores, and concourses, fill applications, conference rooms, and spaces wanting minimum visual impact.

CBT 70JE-1
The CBT 70JE-1 extension speaker is purposebuilt for use with CBT 70J-1, lengthening the line array to extend the pattern control, extending the bass response, and increasing power handling and SPL levels in the LF range.

CBT 200LA-1
With a height of 200 cm (6.6 ft), CBT 200LA-1 is the tallest model, providing useful pattern control down to below 200 Hz. The top and bottom speaker modules allow individual adjustment of music (flat)/speech voicing and vertical pattern settings. Setting in Asymmetrcial Progressive Gradient coverage mode (top narrow; bottom broad) sends more sound toward the far listening area versus close for more even SPL near-to-far in the listening space. Applications include transit centers, conference centers, cathedrals, multipurpose spaces, gymnasiums, theme parks, long-throw spaces, and highly reverberant facilities requiring narrow vertical pattern control over as wide of a bandwidth as possible.

Section:

CBT 70J-1 + 70JE-1
The CBT 70J-1 + 70JE-1 array system is twice the height of a CBT 70J-1, which extends the pattern control down to below 400 Hz, to include the voice range and much of the music range. This unobtrusive column array system provides 1000 Watts of continuous power handling (peaks of 4000 Watts), high sensitivity and very high maximum output capability, with a frequency response that extends down to 45 Hz. Typical applications include: medium performance spaces that require more bass and/or more pattern control than a 70J-1 by itself, highly reflective small to medium houses of worship requiring more pattern control than a 70J-1, full-fidelity lecture halls with difficult acoustic environments or where full spectrum sound is desired, transit centers with highly reverberant acoustic environments, and multipurpose spaces that may require exceptional speech clarity and as well as full bandwidth music.

07

CBT 100LA-1
The CBT 100LA-1 contains sixteen 50 mm (2 in) drivers in a slim, compact cabinet, providing excellent pattern control. Vertical coverage is adjustable via a switch and voicing is switchable between music (flat) and speech voicings, making this model a great choice for wide variety of environments. 325 watts and high sensitivity provide high output capability. Applications include lecture halls, transit centers, conference rooms, cathedrals, and difficult acoustic spaces.

Accessories
MTC-CBT-SMB1 – Stand Mount Bracket fits all models for portable applications. Note: For stability, CBT 70J+E array system and CBT 200LA-1 requires larger, heavier-duty stand than JBL SS2-BK. MTC-CBT-FM1 – Low-profile, close-to-wall mounting bracket for use with CBT 50LA-1 and CBT 100LA-1 MTC-CBT-FM2 – Low-profile, close-to-wall mounting bracket for use ith CBT 70J-1 and CBT 70J-1/70JE-1 array. CBT Calculator Software – For designing CBT speakers into projects. Download from jblpro. com website.

CBT 70J and CBT 70J-1
The CBT 70J-1 is a two-way speaker with high fidelity and response down to 60 Hz, 500W power handling, high sensitivity and high SPL capability. This model provides Asymmetrical Progressive Gradient coverage, sending more sound toward the far area of the listening space than toward the near area, resulting in more even coverage from front to back. Vertical coverage is switchable as is the voicing. Applications include high level A/V, small to medium performance spaces, full fidelity lecture halls, large-scale surround systems, and outdoor systems such as baseball fields, racetracks and theme parks.

CBT 70JE-1

Page 329

key features

f CONSTANT BEAMWIDTH TECHNOLOGY™ f VERTICAL COVERAGE SWITCHABLE BETWEEN NARROW AND BROAD f FULL FIDELITY BANDWIDTH

CBT Series

f SELECTABLE VOICING PROVIDES FLAT RESPONSE IN MUSIC MODE OR MID-RANGE PRESENCE PEAK IN SPEECH MODE

CBT200LA-1 (Not to scale. Please note dimensions.) CBT 70J-1 + 70JE-1 Array System CBT 100LA-1 (shown in white -wh, with and without grille)

All models include grilles, which are removed in photos to illustrate driver composition. CBT 70J-1

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 330

CBT 50LA-1

specifications
CBT 50LA-1
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE 1 COVERAGE PATTERN: VERTICAL (±10°) HORIZONTAL (±20°) SENSITIVITY: SPEECH (2 kHz -14 kHZ) MUSIC MODE (300 Hz - 18 kHZ) COMPONENTS IMPEDANCE POWER CAPACITY: 8 OHM SETTING 2 MAXIMUM SPL 1: SPEECH MODE MUSIC MODE TRANSFORMER TAPS: 100V 70V MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
Compact Full-Range Speaker System 80 Hz – 20 kHz 20° (1.5 kHz - 16 kHz) 150° (ave, 1 kHz – 4 kHz) 93 dB 89 dB Eight 50 mm (2 in) Full-Range 8 ohms 150W (600W peak), 2 hrs 100 W (400W peak), 100 hrs 115 dB cont ave (121 peak) 111 dB cont ave (117 peak) 6O W, 30 W, 15 W 60 W, 30 W, 15 W, 7.5 W Wall bracket included 528 x 99 x 153 mm 20.8 x 3.9 x 6.0 in 4.1 kg (9.0 lb)
1 Full space

CBT 100LA-1
Pattern Control Full-Range Speaker System 80 Hz – 20 kHz Narrow: 15° (2 kHz - 16 kHz) Broad: 40° (1 kHz - 16 kHz) 150° (avg, 1 kHz – 4 kHz) Narrow: 96 dB / Broad: 93 dB Narrow: 93 dB / Broad: 90 dB Sixteen 50 mm (2 in) Full-Range 8 ohms 325 W (1300W peak), 2 hrs 200 W (800W peak), 100 hrs Narrow: 121 dB cont ave (127 peak) Broad: 118 dB cont ave (124 peak) Narrow: 118 dB cont ave (124 peak) Broad: 115 dB cont ave (121 peak) 120 W, 60 W, 30 W 120 W, 60 W, 30 W, 15 W Wall bracket included 1000 x 99 x 153 mm 39.4 in x 3.9 in x 6.0 in 7.2 kg (15.8 lb)

CBT 70J-1
Full-Range J-Shaped Speaker System 60 Hz – 20 kHz Narrow: 25° (2 kHz - 16 kHz) Broad: 45° (750 Hz - 16 kHz) 150° (500 Hz – 8 kHz) Narrow: 98 dB / Broad: 96 dB 4 Narrow: 93 dB / Broad: 92 dB Four 130 mm (5 in) LF drivers Sixteen 25 mm (1 in) HF drivers 8 ohms 500 W (2000W peak), 2 hrs 350 W (1400W peak), 100 hrs Narrow: 125 dB cont ave (131 peak) Broad: 123 dB cont ave (129 peak) Narrow: 120 dB cont ave (126 peak) Broad: 119 dB cont ave (125 peak) N/A Wall bracket included 694 x 170 x 237 mm 27.4 x 6.7 x 9.3 in 9.5 kg (21 lb)

CBT 70J-1 + 70JE-1 Array System
LF & Pattern Extension for CBT70J-1 45 Hz – 20 kHz Narrow: 25° (2 kHz - 16 kHz) Broad: 45° (350 Hz - 16 kHz) 150° (500 Hz – 8 kHz) Narrow: 98 dB / Broad: 97 dB 4 Narrow: 94 dB / Broad: 93 dB Eight 130 mm (5 in) LF drivers Sixteen 25 mm (1 in ) HF drivers 4 ohms 1000 W (4000 W peak), 2 hrs 700 W (2800 W peak), 100 hrs Narrow: 125 dB cont ave (131 peak) Broad: 124 dB cont ave (130 peak) Narrow: 121 dB cont ave (127 peak) Broad: 120 dB cont ave (126 peak) N/A Coupler plate to join CBT 70J-1 and 70JE-1 1388 x 170 x 237 mm 54.8 x 6.7 x 9.3 in 20.4 kg (45 lb)
4 1 kHz - 8 kHz

CBT 200LA-1
Full-Range Column Speaker System 80 Hz – 20 kHz Narrow: 15° (500 Hz – 16 kHz) Broad: 30° (400 Hz – 12 kHz) 150° (avg 1 kHz – 4 kHz) Narrow: 95 dB / Broad: 92 dB Narrow: 93 dB / Broad: 90 dB Thirty-two 50 mm (2 in) Full-Range Drivers 8 ohms per half, 4 ohms total 650W (2600W peak), 2 hrs 400W (1600W peak) 100 hrs Narrow: 123 dB cont ave (129 peak) Broad: 120 dB cont ave (126 peak) Narrow: 121 dB cont ave (127 peak) Broad: 118 dB cont ave (124 peak) 240 W, 120 W, 60 W 5 240 W, 120 W, 60 W 30 W 5 Swivel (pan) / tilt wall bracket, Coupler plate 2000 x 98.5 x 153 mm (78.8 x 3.8 x 6.0 in) 14.6 kg (33 lb)
5 Both modules combined.

2 IEC standard, full bandwidth pink noise with 6 dB crest factor. 3Calculated based on power rating and measured

sensitivity, exclusive of power compression.

CONTROL 60

Control® 60 Series
key features
JBL Control Contractor 60 Series Pendant loudspeakers bring renowned JBL sound and outstanding coverage to rooms and venues with open architecture or high-ceilings, while providing superior voice and musical clarity for rooms with difficult acoustics.
The diverse line-up, coupled with stylish design, is suitable for a wide variety of applications and decors–convention and exhibit spaces, atriums, restaurants, retail stores and more. Easy-to-install hanging hardware is included, featuring redundant suspension cables and UL listed adjustableheight hangers. JBL’s proprietary conical RBI Radiation Boundary Integrator is adapted from the groundbreaking VERTEC® Series of line array loudspeakers. This unique JBL patent-pending innovation combines a large diameter highfrequency waveguide with low-frequency projection apertures that work in tandem to provide a seamless integration of coverage between the two coaxially-mounted drivers. The result is extremely even pattern control and coverage, where all listeners hear a consistent flat, frequency response. This often allows the use of fewer speakers.
f DESIGNED FOR APPLICATIONS WITH OPEN ARCHITECTURE AND HIGH CEILINGS f HANGING HARDWARE WITH GALVANIZED STEEL CABLE AND EASY TO ADJUST CLAMP CONTROL 67P/T CONTROL 65P/T

Pendant Loudspeakers
f PROPRIETARY RBI RADIATION BOUNDARY INTEGRATOR ™ TECHNOLOGY FOR SEAMLESS INTEGRATION OF COAXIAL DRIVERS AND MORE CONSISTENT COVERAGE

CONTROL 67HC/T

CONTROL 62P

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CONTROL 65P/T
The Control 65P/T incorporates JBL’s exclusive RBI Radiation Boundary Integration technology to provide very consistent, wide coverage throughout the listening space.

CONTROL 67HC/T
The Control 67HC/T has well-controlled narrow coverage, ideal for improved voice intelligibility and musical clarity in high-ceiling venues or in rooms with difficult acoustics–convention centers, transit centers, exhibit venues and hotel atriums.

Section:

07

CONTROL 67P/T
The Control 67P/T incorporates a large enclosure and high-power 6.5” (165 mm) transducer for extended bass and high-fidelity. The extra-large RBI Radiation Boundary Integrator™ provides outstanding pattern control, which can allow fewer speakers to cover a venue.

CONTROL 62P
The Control 62P, with its 2.5" driver, is great for speech and mid-high music applications (external high-pass required) in visually sensitive applications. For full-range, wide bandwidth performance, up to 4 pieces can be driven from a Control 50S/T or 40CS/T subwoofer.

specifications
CONTROL 65P/T
SYSTEM TYPE

CONTROL 67P/T

CONTROL67HC/T

CONTROL62P

Ultra-Compact, Mid-High Satellite Compact Full-Range Pendant Full-Range Pendant Loudspeaker Narrow-Coverage, High Ceiling Pendant Pendant Speaker Loudspeaker with RBI with RBI Loudspeaker with RBI 150 Hz – 20 kHz 55 Hz – 20 kHz 58 Hz – 18 kHz 75 Hz – 17 kHz FREQUENCY RESPONSE (-10 dB) 1 200 Hz – 17 kHz 78 Hz – 18 kHz 78 Hz – 16 kHz 110 Hz – 16 kHz FREQUENCY RANGE (±3 dB) 50 W 150 W 150 W 150 W POWER CAPACITY 2: PROGRAM 15 W 75 W 75 W 75 W PINK 87 dB (4.0 V, 1 W); 84 dB (2.83 V) 3 86 dB 90 dB 93 dB NOMINAL SENSITIVITY 140° 120° 120° 75° NOMINAL COVERAGE ANGLE 3 16 ohms 8 ohms 8 ohms 8 ohms RATED IMPEDANCE (no transformer taps) 70V: 60 W, 30 W, 15 W & 7.5 W 70V: 60 W, 30 W, 15 W & 7.5 W 70V: 60 W, 30 W, 15 W & 7.5 W TRANSFORMER TAPS 100V: 60 W, 30 W, 15 W 100V: 60 W, 30 W, 15 W 100V: 60 W, 30 W, 15 W 60 mm (2 1⁄2 in), polypropylene-coated LF: 130 mm (5 ¼ in) polypropylene-coated LF: 165 mm (6 1⁄2 in) polypropylene-coated LF: 165 mm (6 1⁄2 in) polypropylene-coated TRANSDUCERS paper with pure butyl rubber surround paper with pure butyl rubber surround paper with pure butyl rubber surround paper with pure butyl rubber surround HF: 20 mm (¾ in) textile soft-dome with HF: 25 mm (1.0 in) textile soft-dome, HF: 25 mm (1 in) textile soft-dome, neodymium magnet assembly neodymium magnet assembly neodymium magnet assembly High impact polystyrene High impact polystyrene High impact polystyrene High impact polystyrene ENCLOSURE 128 x 121 mm 234 x 259 mm 312 x 330 mm 333 x 344 mm DIMENSIONS 5.1 x 4.8 in 1Half-spacex 10.2 in in-wall or in ceiling) 2 Continuous Pink13 in rating is IEC-shaped pink noise with 13.1 x 13.6 in normal speech and music program material, and is defined as 3 dB 9.3 (mounted 12.3 x Noise (DIAMETER x DEPTH) a6 dB crest factor for 100 hours continuously. Continuous Program .7 kg 3.7 kg (8 lb) 5.2 kg (11.5 lb) 5.9 kg (13 lb) above the Continous Pink Noise Rating. (1.5 lb) NET WEIGHT (each) power is a conservative expression of the system’s ability to handle
1 Full-space (suspended) 2 Continuous Pink Noise rating is IEC-shaped pink noise with a 6 dB peak-to-average crest

factor for 100 hours continuously. Continuous Program power is a conservative expression

3 Half-space (in ceiling) average 1 kHz to 16 kHz. of the system’s ability to handle normal speech and music program material and is defined as 3 dB above the Continuous Pink Noise rating. 3 Full-space (suspend in free air), average 1.5 kHz to 10 kHz.

Page 331

INSTALLATION PRODUCTS

Control® 50 Series
key features

Surface-Mount Subwoofer-Satellite System
f SELECTABLE 70V/100V OR LOW IMPEDANCE f WALL-MOUNT BRACKETS INCLUDED f MIX AND MATCH WITH CONTROL CONTRACTOR 40 SERIES f USE EITHER TWO OR FOUR SATELLITE SPEAKERS PER SYSTEM

The C50PACK includes 4) Control 52 satellite speakers and 1) Control 50 subwoofer as shown. The Control 50 Series is also available individually.
CONTROL 50

The Control 50 Series subwoofer-satellite loudspeaker system provides high fidelity sound in any location where full-range high fidelity foreground/background music is required from a surface-mount system. The Control 50S/T subwoofer can be utilized with either two of four Control 52 satellite speakers. The Control 50 system is mono. Both the Control 50S/T and Control 52 can be intermixed in systems along with the Control 40 Series in-ceiling models – Control 40CS/T subwoofer and Control 42 satellite speaker – to match the form factor requirements of a wide variety of applications.
CONTROL 52 SATELLITE SPEAKER
The Control 52 satellite loudspeaker produces superb high fidelity sound via a low distortion 60 mm (2½ in) driver. The included wall bracket allows each speaker to be angled up to 45° off-axis.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CONTROL 52

CONTROL 50S/T SUBWOOFER
The Control 50S/T subwoofer contains a high-power, long-excursion, 200 mm (8 inch) driver which provides extended low frequency response. The Control 50S/T installs quickly with its included two-piece easy-mount wall-bracket.

The built-in crossover network provides proper signal routing and output connectors for four Control 52 satellite loudspeakers. A Loop Out connector provides a full-range input signal to other loudspeakers or to other subwoofer/ satellite systems.

specifications
Control 52
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB)1 POWER CAPACITY: PROGRAM 2 PINK NOMINAL COVERAGE 3 SENSITIVITY: 1W, 1m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE TRANSFORMER TAPS: 100V 70V COMPONENTS: TERMINATION DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
Wall-Mountable Satellite Speaker 140 Hz – 20 kHz 30 W (100 hours) 15 W (100 hours) 150° x 150° omindirectional 85 dB 16 ohms

Control 50S/T
150 W Subwoofer 32 Hz – 200 Hz 200 W (100 hours) 100 W (100 hours) 95 dB (near corner), 89dB (center of wall) 8 ohms 80 W, 40 W, 20 W, 80 W, 40 W, 20 W, 10 W 8 ohm bypass/thru 200 mm (8 in) with polypropylene cone, butyl rubber surround, 38 mm (1.5 in) 4-layer copper-clad coil, vented aluminum former 6 Screw-down removable locking connectors 356 x 391 x 203 mm 14.0 x 15.4 x 8.0 in) 9.0 kg (20 lb)

Control 50PACK
Control 50S/T and 4 pcs Control 52 32 Hz – 20 kHz 200 W (100 hours) 100 W (100 hours) 87 dB 4 ohms 80 W, 40 W, 20 W, 80 W, 40 W, 20 W, 10 W 8 ohm bypass/thru
1 Half-space (mounted on wall). 2 Continuous Pink noise rating is IEC-

shaped pink noise with a 6 dB crest factor for 100 hours continuously. Continuous Program Power is a conservative expression of the system’s ability to handle normal speech and music program material, and is defined as 3 dB above the Continuous Pink Noise rating. 3 Half-space, average 1 kHz – 4 kHz

60 mm (2.5 in) with polypropylene cone, butyl rubber surround, 19 mm (0.75 in) copper-clad coil, copper sleeved magnet Screw-down removable locking connector 115 x 84 x 96 mm 4.5 x 3.3 x 3.75 in) .7 kg (1.5 lb)

6 Screw-down removable locking connectors

11.8 k (26 lb)

Page 332

CONTROL® CONTRACTOR

Control® Contractor
CONTROL 30-WH

Surface-Mount Speakers

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CONTROL 29AV-1 CONTROL 28/28T-60 CONTROL 25AV CONTROL 25/25T CONTROL 23/23T CONTROL CRV

Section:

The Control Contractor Surface speakers are compact systems with rugged, molded high impact polystyrene shells. Designed for wideranging indoor and outdoor (except SB-2) applications, the Control Contractor Series offers versatility, ease-of-installation and paintability. JBL’s Invisiball® mounting technology revolutionizes ease-of-installation with built-in hardware easily secured with a standard hex wrench from a front channel (except Control CRV). Mounting bracket is included.
CONTROL 23/CONTROL 23T
The most compact of the JBL Control Contractor Series speakers, the Control 23, has a 3 1⁄2" woofer and horn-loaded titanium-coated tweeter ideal for mid/high operation in limited space environments. The optional Control 23T has a pre-installed transformer for line distribution systems. Augmenting the bass with a JBL subwoofer results in an extremely full-fidelity subwoofer-satellite system.

07

CONTROL 25AV-LS
The Control 25AV-LS is UL1480 UUMW listed for use in fire alarm and/or emergency communication systems. It is also EN54-24 certified.

CONTROL 29AV-1
The Control 29AV-1 utilizes high power components and a complex network to achieve smooth high fidelity performance, extended bandwidth and well-controlled defined coverage from a compact loudspeaker. A rotatable 110° x 85° high-frequency horn allows use of the speaker in either vertical or horizontal orientation. Smooth frequency response and even coverage ensures excellent sound character throughout the listening area. Contains 10 inserts for suspending. Optional MTC-29UB U-bracket available.

CONTROL 25/CONTROL 25T
The Control 25 incorporates a 5 1⁄4" low frequency loudspeaker with a horn-loaded 1" titaniumcoated tweeter. Its full-range frequency response makes it an excellent choice for moderately large venues, providing superior dynamic performance. The optional Control 25T includes a multitap transformer for line distribution systems.

CONTROL 30
CONTROL 25AV-LS

CONTROL 25AV
The Control 25AV is an especially wide bandwidth, smooth response speaker. It features a top-quality 60 W multitap transformer for 70V/100V line distribution systems. The transformer may be bypassed allowing the Control 25AV to be used as an 8 ohm impedance speaker. Stainless steel grille and MTC-PC2 panel cover included for additional weather resistance.

CONTROL 28/CONTROL 28T-60
The Control 28 offers high power, performance, bandwidth and sensitivity in a compact, full-range speaker. Incorporating an 8" low-frequency woofer and 1" titanium- coated tweeter, the Control 28 provides vivid sound reproduction for largespace applications. The optional Control 28T-60 contains a multitap transformer for 70V/100V line distribution systems.

The Control 30 is a three-way high output speaker designed for multiple uses. Weather resistance has been maximized, making the Control 30 suitable for outdoor applications. It features a top-quality 150 W multitap transformer for 70V/100V line distribution systems with a bypass for use as an 8 ohm speaker. Contains 10 inserts for suspending. Optional MTC-30UB U-bracket available.

Page 333

INSTALLATION PRODUCTS

key features

f INVISIBALL® MOUNTING TECHNOLOGY f WEATHEREDGE™ FOR MOISTURE PROTECTION

f PAINTABLE TEXTURED ENCLOSURES f SELECTION OF VERSATILE MOUNTING HARDWARE

The unique curved shape of the CRV provides innovative installation solutions. When placed at the junction of the ceiling and wall or two walls, the speaker couples well with both boundary surfaces, forming a dual ground plane configuration.

JBL’s exclusive, patented InvisiBall Mounting System (most models) allows for quick, easy, theft-resistant installation with the built-in mount secured by a few turns of a standard hex wrench.

JBL's Control Contractor systems provide incredible design flexibility. All speakers are constructed with a similar sonic signature allowing mixing and matching of any of the various models. For décor considerations, all models (except SB-2) are available in black or white and are paintable.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CONTROL CRV
The Control CRV brings high design and versatility to both indoor and outdoor commercial applications. The Control CRV incorporates dual 4" woofers with Polyplas™ cones for durability and a ¾" titanium-laminate tweeter.

ACCESSORIES
MTC-PC2: The MTC-PC2 Panel Cover provides sealed entrance protection for input terminals and strain relief for incoming speaker wire. MTC-xxSSG and MTC-xxWMG: SSG stainless steel retrofit grilles for Control 23, 25, and 28. WMG WeatherMax™ grilles add a foam and tight-weave backing to break up driving rain.

MTC-xxV* Vertical Array Brackets: Allows vertical end- to-end mounting of up to three Control 23, 25, or 28 speakers. MTC-xxCM* Ceiling Brackets: The curved arm allows installation of Control 23, 25, 28, 29AV or 30 speakers down from a ceiling. MTC-30MK-WH: Marine grille kit for Control 30 (white only). SB-2 Installation Brackets: The MTC-SB2W wall/corner bracket allows mounting of the subwoofer onto a wall surface or into a corner. The MTC-SB2C ceiling bracket enables suspension of the SB-2 from above, projecting downward into the listening area.

CONTROL SB-2
The SB-2 functions as the subwoofer section of left/right music systems, preserving the stereo separation. The dual voice coil 10" bass transducer has been optimized to complement four Control 23 as satellite speakers. (Not outdoor capable.)

MTC-xxV* VERTICAL ARRAY BRACKETS

MTC-xxUB* U-BRACKET

MOUNTING BRACKETS
MTC-xxUB*: U-brackets for installing Control 29AV, 30 and SB210. Available in black or white.

CONTROL SB210
The Control SB210 subwoofer contains two high power 10" woofers suitable for a variety of applications both indoors and out. Its compact size, durable enclosure, insert points, and stacking options make it one of the most versatile subwoofers in the installation market. Optional input modules are available to provide passive subwoofer/satellite crossover (MTC-210-SAT), 70 V/100V subwoofer-band transformer (MTC-210T) or both (MTC-210T-SAT for use with low impedance satellite speakers.)

MTC-xxCM* CEILING BRACKETS

MTC-xxH* HORIZONTAL MTC-xxH* Horizontal ARRAY BRACKETS Array Brackets: Allows

horizontal arraying of two Control 23, 25 or 28 speakers. MTC-H brackets can be interconnected to 3) MTC-xxH* AS CLUSTER form a suspended ring for MODULE BRACKET mounting 6 or 3 speakers (SHOWN PARTIAL) in a 360˚ cluster module.

SB-2 BRACKETS

PMB-BK and PMB-WH: Control CRV pole-mount bracket for 4-speaker 360º hanging pendant cluster.
Various adaptors for installing via threaded pipe or rod available from third party. Contact JBL for information. * These models are available in different sizes. Specify speaker model when ordering.

CONTROL SB-2

CONTROL SB210

Page 334

CONTROL CONTRACTOR SERIES

specifications
CONTROL 23/23T
FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB)1 POWER CAPACITY: PROGRAM 2 PINK 3 NOMINAL COVERAGE SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE COMPONENTS: LOW FREQ. HIGH FREQ. TRANSFORMER TAPS: 100V 70.7V ENCLOSURE FINISH DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
85 Hz - 22 kHz (23) 100 Hz - 21 kHz (23T) 50 W (23) 25 W (23) 90˚ x 90˚ 86 dB SPL (23) 8 ohms (23) 3 1⁄2 in (88 mm) 1⁄2 in (13 mm) 10 W (23T) 5 W (23T) HIPS (High Impact Polystyrene) Black or white (-WH) 193 x 140 x 111 mm 7.6 x 5.5 x 4.4 in 1.8 kg (4 lb) (23) 2.2 kg (5 lb) (23T)

CONTROL 25/25T

CONTROL 25AV
70 Hz - 23 kHz 200 W 100 W 100˚ x 100˚ 87 dB SPL 8 ohms 5 1⁄4 in (130 mm) 3⁄4 in (20 mm) 60, 30, 15 W 60, 30, 15, 7.5 W HIPS (High Impact Polystyrene) Black or white (-WH) 236 x 186 x 159 mm 9.3 x 7.4 x 6.3 in 4.0 kg (9 lb)

CONTROL 25AV-LS
90 Hz - 23 kHz 200 W 100 W 110˚ x 85˚ 87 dB SPL 8 ohms 5 1⁄4 in (130 mm) 3⁄4 in (20 mm) 60, 30, 15 W 60, 30, 15, 7.5 W HIPS (High Impact Polystyrene) Black or white (-WH) 236 x 186 x 159 mm 9.3 x 7.4 x 6.3 in 3.8 kg (9 lb)

CONTROL 28/28T-60
60 Hz - 16 kHz (28) 55 Hz - 15 kHz (28T-60) 175 W (28) 87 W (28) 90˚ x 90˚ 92 dB SPL (28) 8 ohms (28) 8 in (200 mm) 1 in (25 mm) 60, 30, 15 W (28T-60) 60, 30, 15, 7.5 W (28T-60) HIPS (High Impact Polystyrene) Black or white (-WH) 380 x 280 x 220 mm 15.0 x 11.0 x 8.6 in 5.5 kg (12 lb) (28) 6.3 kg (14 lb) (28T-60)

CONTROL CRV
80 Hz - 20 kHz 150 W 60 W 105˚ x 80˚ 89 dB SPL 4 ohms 2 x 4 in (100 mm) 3⁄4 in (19 mm) 30 W, 15 W, 7.5 W 30 W, 15 W, 7.5 W, 3.8 W ABS Black or white (-WH) 127 x 364 x 262 mm 5 x 14.4 x 10.3 in 3.2 kg (7 lb)

80 Hz - 16 kHz (25) 80 Hz - 15 kHz (25T) 150 W (25) 75 W (25) 90˚ x 90˚ 88 dB SPL (25) 8 ohms (25) 5 1⁄4 in (135 mm) 3⁄4 in (19 mm) 30, 15, 7.5 W (25T) 30, 15, 7.5, 3.7 W (25T) HIPS (High Impact Polystyrene) Black or white (-WH) 236 x 188 x 149 mm 9.3 x 7.4 x 5.8 in 2.3 kg (5 lb) (25) 3.6 kg (8 lb) (25T)

Section:

1 Half-space (on wall). 2 Continuous Program Power, which is a conservative expression of the system’s ability to handle normal

speech and music program material and is defined as 3 dB above the Continuous Pink Noise rating (IECshaped pink noise with a 6 dB crest factor, for 100 hours continuously). 3 Continuous Pink Noise for 100 hours.

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CONTROL 29AV-1
FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB) 1 POWER CAPACITY: PROGRAM 2 PINK 3 NOMINAL COVERAGE SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE COMPONENTS: LOW FREQ. MID FREQ. HIGH FREQ. TRANSFORMER TAPS: 100V 70.7V ENCLOSURE FINISH DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
37 Hz - 18 kHz 300 W 150 W 110˚ x 85˚ (rotatable) 90 dB SPL 8 ohms 8 in (200 mm) 1 in (25 mm) comp. driver 110, 55, 28 W 110, 55, 28, 14 W HIPS (High Impact Polystyrene) Black or white (-WH) 520 x 306 x 277 mm 20.5 x 12.0 x 10.9 in 12.2 kg (27 lb)

CONTROL 30
38 Hz - 17 kHz 500 W 250 W 120˚ x 110˚ 93 dB SPL 4 ohms 10 in (250 mm) 5 in (125 mm) 1 in (25 mm) comp. driver 150, 75, 38 W 150, 75, 38, 19 W HIPS (High Impact Polystyrene) Black or white (-WH) 593 x 372 x 345 mm 23.3 x 14.6 x 13.5 in 18.9 kg (42 lb)

CONTROL SB-2
38 Hz - 160 Hz 340 W (both inputs) 170 W (both inputs) N/A 94 dB SPL (on wall) 100 dB SPL (near corner) 8 ohms per input 10 in (250 mm) long-throw with dual voice coils

CONTROL SB210
42 Hz - 200 Hz 800 W 400 W N/A 96 dB SPL (on wall) 102 dB SPL (near corner) 8 ohms 2 x 10 in (250 mm)

Particle Board Black 394 x 585 x 343 mm 15.5 x 23.0 x 13.5 in 19.1 kg (42 lb)

HIPS (High Impact Polystyrene) Black or white (-WH) 335 x 590 x 570 mm 14 x 23.3 x 22.5 in 17.1 kg (38 lb)

Page 335

INSTALLATION PRODUCTS

Control® Contractor
key features
f MINIMAL VISUAL IMPACT f HIGH POWER HANDLING CAPABILITY

In-Wall Speakers
f EASY TO INSTALL IN STANDARD STUD-WALL CONSTRUCTION f 70V/100V VERSIONS AVAILABLE

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

126W/WT

128W/WT

JBL Control 126W/WT and 128W/WT are premium in-wall speakers designed for applications where top performance from a loudspeaker with minimal visual impact is required. The Control 100 Series speakers are voiced similarly to other JBL Control Contractor models, allowing mixing with surface-mount and in-ceiling speakers within a single listening space. The premium sound quality makes these loudspeakers ideal for critical listening environments, yet they are high power and rugged enough to handle venues requiring high-SPL, heavy duty-cycle music.
CONTROL 126 W/WT and CONTROL 128W/WT
The Control 126 W and Control 128 W feature high performance woofers with a polymer coated aluminum cone, pure butyl rubber surround for long life and high reliability, and extended polepiece magnet design for long excursion and high reliability. The pure titanium dome high frequency driver is loaded with a built-in EOS™ (Elliptical Oblate Spheroidal) waveguide for low distortion and a smooth frequency response. A low-diffraction swivel mounting system enables the user to direct high frequencies where required without the diffraction distortion inherent in other aimable tweeter designs. A high-slope crossover network maintains natural midrange sound and produces more even coverage throughout the listening area. The speakers fit into the wall space of ordinary stud-wall construction. An optional rough-in frame is available for installing the speakers into standard stud walls in new construction projects. As is the case with all Control Contractor speakers, the baffles and grilles are paintable to match any décor. The optional Control 126WT and Control 128WT include 70V/100V transformers for use on distributed loudspeaker lines.

specifications
CONTROL 126W/WT
FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB) 1 POWER CAPACITY: PROGRAM 2 PINK 2 SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE TRANSFORMER TAPS: 100V 70.7 V COMPONENTS: LOW FREQ. HIGH FREQ. TERMINATION OPTIMUM AIR CAVITY BEHIND SPEAKER ROUGH-IN FRAME DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
38 Hz - 20 kHz 100 W 50 W 88 dB SPL 8 ohms 30, 15, 7.5 W (126WT) 30, 15, 7.5, 3.7 W (126WT) 6 1⁄2 in (165 mm) 1 in (25 mm) Screw-down Euroblock type 20 -40 liters (0.7 to 1.4 cu. ft.) MTC-126RIF 280 x 215 x 105 mm 11 x 8.5 x 4.1 in 126W: 2.1 kg (4.5 lb) 126WT: 2.7 kg (5.9 lb)

CONTROL 128W/WT
30 Hz - 20 kHz 120 W 60 W 90 dB SPL 8 ohms 50, 25, 12 W (128WT) 50, 25, 12, 6 W (128WT) 8 in (200 mm) 1 (25 mm) Screw-down Euroblock type 40 -80 liters (1.4 to 2.8 cu. ft.) MTC-128RIF 334 x 257 x 110 mm 13.1 x 10.1 x 4.3 in 128W: 2.6 kg (5.5 lb) 128WT: 3.3 kg (7.2 lb)

1Half-space (mounted in-wall or in ceiling) 2 Continuous Program Power, which is a

conservative expression of the system’s ability to handle normal speech and music program material and is defined as 3 dB above the Continuous Pink Noise rating (IEC-shaped pink noise with a 6 dB crest factor, for 100 hours continuously). 3 Rated in Continuous Pink Noise for 100 hours.

Page 336

CONTROL CONTRACTOR CEILING SPEAKERS

Control® 300 Series
key features
f PRECISION COVERAGE

Large Format Ceiling Speakers
f VERY HIGH OUTPUT LEVELS WITH HIGH FIDELITY PERFORMANCE f EASY TO DESIGN AND INSTALL f PREMIUM ACCESSORIES

CONTROL 312CS CONTROL 328C/CT CONTROL 321C/CT CONTROL 322 C/CT

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Control 300 Series represents the state of the art in large-format ceiling loudspeaker systems. True pointsource coax designs, multiple power levels and transformer choices, plus an in-ceiling subwoofer, make it easy to fulfill any system performance requirements. Premium components include Kevlar-reinforced cones, low-saturation transformers and legendary JBL compression drivers. Advanced high-slope crossover networks, combined with low system distortion and smooth frequency response provides full, natural music along with exceptional speech intelligibility.
In these Control 300 coax models, the throat and cone combine to form a Constant Coverage waveguide which provides extraordinary broadband control, ensuring even coverage and consistent sound throughout the listening space. And Control 328 goes a step further with a 12" diameter waveguide, providing the pattern control of a 12" horn from an 8" driver. The EZ-Rail™ feature (on 12" models) provides a “helping hand” to hold one side of the loudspeaker in place while fastening it to a pre-installed back box. A multi-pin locking connector allows for easy pre-wiring and quick clip-in during installation.

Section:

ACCESSORIES: Premium accessories include best-in-class back boxes made of heavy 16 gauge metal and lined with 1⁄2" MDF, as well as contemporary grilles
and an optional higher power transformer. Accessories include:

07

MTC- 300BB8
Cylindrical Backbox FITS: Control 328C/CT and 227C/CT DIMENSIONS: 15 dia x 10.6 in deep (380 x 270 mm)

MTC-300BB12
Premium 3 cu ft (28 cu l) Rectangular Backbox Control 321C/CT, 322C/CT and 312CS 23.1 x 18.2 x 12.6 in (587 x 461 x 324 mm)

MTC-RG6/8
Round Grille for 6 in(152 mm) and 8 in (200 mm) systems Control 227C/CT and 328C/CT 13.6 in dia x 0.64 in deep (345 x 16.3 mm)

MTC-SG6/8
Sq. Grille for 6 in(152 mm) and 8 in (200 mm) systems Control 227C/CT and 328C/CT 13.4 x 13.4 x 0.4 in deep (340 x 340 x 10 mm)

MTC-300SG12
Square Grille for 12 in (300 mm) systems Control 321C/CT, 322C/CT and 312CS 16.3 x 16.3 x 0.4 in deep (415 x 415 x 10 mm)

MTC-TB6/8
Tile bridge for 6 in (152 mm) and 8 in (200 mm) systems Control 227C/CT and 328C/CT 25.4 x 16.25 in (646 x 413 mm)

MTC-300T150
150 W Accessory Transformer Mounting studs included on MTC-300BB12 3.4 x 3.4 x 3.1 in (86 x 86 x 78 mm)

DESCRIPTION Premium 1 cu ft (28 cu l)

specifications
Control 328C/CT
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB)1 POWER CAPACITY: PROGRAM 2 PINK 3 NOMINAL COVERAGE SENSITIVITY: 1W, 1m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE TRANSFORMER TAPS: 100V 70V COMPONENTS: LF HF TERMINATION DIMENSIONS (W) (D) NET WEIGHT (each)

Control 321C/CT
12" Coaxial Ceiling Loudspeaker with HF Compression Driver 34 Hz – 18 kHz 500 W 250 W 90° conical 94 dB 8 ohms 60, 30 15 W 60, 30, 15, 7.5 W Optional 150W with MTC-300T150 12 in (300 mm) 1" diaphragm compression driver Screw-down removable locking connector 14.4 x 14.4 in (366 x 366 mm) square baffle 8.8 in (223 mm) for C321C 9.5 in (240 mm) for C321CT 7.3 kg (16 lb) for C321C 8.2 kg (18 lb ) for C321CT

Control 322 C/CT
High-output 12" Coaxial Ceiling Loudspeaker 32 Hz – 20 kHz 800 W 400 W 90° conical 95 dB 8 ohms 100, 50, 25 W 100, 50, 25, 12.5 W Optional 150W with MTC-300T150 12 in (300 mm) 1.5" diaphragm compression driver Screw-down removable locking connector 14.4 x 14.4 in (366 x 366) square baffle 8.8 in (223 mm) for C322C 9.5 in (240 mm) for C322CT 9.1 kg (20 lb) for C322C 10.0 kg (22 lb) for C322CT

Control 312CS
12" In-Ceiling Subwoofer Loudspeaker 30 Hz – 4.5 kHz 800 W 400 W 93 dB 8 ohms n/a n/a 12 in (300 mm) Screw-down removable locking connector 14.4 x 14.4 in (366 x 366 mm) square baffle 6.3 in (160 mm)

8" Coaxial Ceiling Loudspeaker with HF Compression Driver 45 Hz – 18 kHz 500 W 250 W 120° conical 93 dB 8 ohms 60, 30 15 W 60, 30, 15, 7.5 W 8 in (200 mm) 1" diaphragm compression driver Screw-down removable locking connector 12 in (305 mm) diameter round baffle 6.3 in (160 mm) for C328C 8.6 in (218 mm) for C328CT 4.5 kg (10 lb) for C328C 5.4 kg (12 lb) for C328CT

1 IEC filtered random noise (50 Hz - 5 kHz) with

a crest factor (peak to average ratio) of 6 dB

2 Continuous Program Power, which is a conservative expression of the system’s ability to

handle normal speech and music program material and is defined as 3 dB above the Continuous Pink Noise rating (IEC-shaped pink noise with a 6 dB crest factor).

3 Continuous Pink Noise for 2 hours.

Page 337

INSTALLATION PRODUCTS

Control® 200 Series
key features
CONTROL 227C

Medium Format Ceiling Speakers
f 6.5" KEVLAR-REINFORCED LF f 1" EXIT COMPRESSION DRIVER HF f INTEGRATED & INDEPENDENT BACKCAN VERSIONS f HIGH OUTPUT, PREMIUM SOUND QUALITY

CONTROL 226C/T

CONTROL 227CT

CONTROL 227C & 227CT Assembly with Backcan and Grille.

Section:

07
CONTROL 226C/T

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 338

Control 226C/T, 227C and 227CT are premium in-ceiling speakers designed to meet the increasing market demand for premium quality sound in ceiling-mount applications. The Control 200 Series loudspeakers incorporate breakthrough performance features such as best-in-class pattern control to provides a consistent sound throughout the listening area. Especially wide coverage allows fewer speakers to cover the space, reducing both the material and labor cost for the installation. The high-power kevlar-reinforced 6.5 in (165 mm) low-frequency driver along with the titanium-diaphragm compression driver and the advanced-technology steep-slope crossover network provide superb, wide-bandwidth sound quality.
CONTROL 227C
Control 227C is a high-output, low-impedance 8 ohm speaker assembly for installation with the separate MTC-200BB8 backcan and MTC-RG6/8 grille (both sold separately). Optional accessories include MTC-19NC new construction ring, MTC19MR plaster-ring, and MTC-TB6/8 tile bridge.

PREMIUM ACCESSORIES
MTC-200BB6: Backcan for Control 227C and 227CT. 13.3 inches (337 mm) max diameter x 8.1 inches (206 mm) deep. MTC-RG6/8: Round grille for Control 227C and 227CT. Also fits Control 328C & 328CT. 13.6 inches (345 mm) in diameter MTC-SG6/8: Square grille for Control 227C and 227CT. Also fits Control 328C & 328CT. 13.4 inches (340 mm) x 13.4 inches (340 mm). MTC-TB6/8: Tile bridge for Control 227C and 227CT. Also fits Control 328C & 328CT. MTC-19NC & MTC-19MR: New-construction and mud rings fit Control 226 for new construction applications requiring pre-installation rings.

Control 226C/T is a compact, easy-to-install speaker with integrated backcan for blindmounting into ceilings. It features a top-quality 60 W multi-tap transformer for 70V/100V line distribution systems. The transformer may be bypassed, allowing the Control 226C/T to be used as a low-impedance 8 ohm speaker. C-ring, tile rails and grille are included. This model is designed to be able to utilize the optional MTC-19NC new construction ring and MTC-19MR plaster-ring for new construction projects requiring pre-installation rings.

CONTROL 227CT
Control 227CT is a 70V/100V version of Control 227C, featuring a top-quality 60 W multi-tap transformer for 70V/100V line distribution systems.

specifications
CONTROL 226C/T
FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB) 1 POWER CAPACITY: PROGRAM PINK (2 hr) 2 (100 hr) 2 SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE NOMINAL COVERAGE 3 COMPONENTS: LOW FREQ. HIGH FREQ. TRANSFORMER TAPS: 100V 70.7V DIMENSIONS (DIA. X DEPTH) NET WEIGHT (each)

CONTROL 227C & 227CT
43 Hz – 19 kHz 300 W 150 W 100 W 90 dB 8 ohms (227C) 120° 6.5 in (165 mm) 1 in (25 mm) diaphragm compression driver 60W, 30W, 15W (227CT) 60W, 30W, 15W, 7.5W (227CT) 12.0 x 5.8 in (305 x 147 mm) 4.1 kg (9 lb) 227C 5.2 kg (11.5 lb) 227CT

47 Hz – 19 kHz 300 W 150 W 100 W 90 dB 8 ohms 120° 6.5 in (165 mm) 1 in (25 mm) diaphragm compression driver 60W, 30W, 15W 60W, 30W, 15W, 7.5W 13 x 9.7 in (330 x 246 mm) 9.1 kg (20 lb)

CONTROL 226C/T

1 Half-space (in ceiling)

2 IEC standard, full bandwidth pink noise with a

crest factor (peak to average ratio) of 6 dB.

3 Average 1 kHz to 16 kHz.

Control 200 models are available both in an independent backcan design (Control 227C & 227CT) and in an integrated backcan version (Control 226C/T).

CONTROL CONTRACTOR CEILING SPEAKERS

Control® 40 Series Extended Performance Small Format Ceiling Speakers
key features
f DESIGNED FOR HIGH-DEMAND PROFESSIONAL APPLICATIONS f THREE COAXIAL MODELS PLUS AN ULTRACOMPACT SATELLITE SPEAKER AND IN-CEILING SUBWOOFER f INTEGRATED BACKCANS FOR EASE-OFUSE IN THE FIELD f SWITCHABLE FOR USE AS AN 8 OHMS SPEAKER OR AS PART OF A 70V/100V DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM (EXCEPT 42C)

CONTROL 42C

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CONTROL 47C/T CONTROL 47LP

CONTROL 47HC

CONTROL 40CS/T

The Control 40 Series Ceiling Speakers are designed to work perfectly in environments that require a premium, in-ceiling speaker with an extremely wide bandwith and consistent coverage. Consisting of three 6.5" coaxial models, a 2.5" ultra-compact satellite speaker and in-ceiling subwoofer, the Control 40 Series can be configured in many different ways to accomodate a full range of applications in the field. JBL focused on ease-of-installation by including an integrated backcan, grille and tile rails (except Control 42C), locking 2-pin connectors and two knockouts. The Control 40 Series ceiling speakers are designed for use in air handling spaces.
CONTROL 47C/T
The Control 47C/T and Control 47LP are designed for applications that require extremely wide bandwidth and very consistent coverage. JBL’s RBI™ (Radiation Boundary Integrator®) allows for a seamless integration between the coaxially mounted tweeter and LF driver, resulting in consistent sound quality with little variation in the listening area.

Section:

CONTROL 47LP (Low Profile Backcan)
The Control 47LP is identical to the Control 47 but equipped with a shallow backcan for use in areas with restricted mounting depths.

CONTROL 42C
The Control 42C is an ultra-compact in-ceiling satellite loudspeaker designed for use with the Control 40CS/T subwoofer. It offers an unobstrusive design which is ideal for a wide range of installations.

07

CONTROL 47HC
The Control 47HC is designed for applications that require a narrow focused beamwidth pattern and very consistent coverage. The large backcan in combination with the LF driver design, provides extended bass response.

CONTROL 40CS/T
The Control 40CS/T is a direct radiating, high impact 8" subwoofer designed for powerful bass response in an in-ceiling loudspeaker. It features a built-in passive crossover network and 4 highpassed satellite outputs enabling it to be used as part of a subwoofer/satellite system.

specifications
CONTROL 47C/T
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE (-10dB) 1 POWER CAPACITY 2: PROGRAM PINK NOMINAL DISPERSION3 NOMINAL SENSITIVITY 1 W, 1 m RATED IMPEDANCE TRANSFORMER TAPS COMPONENTS: LOW FREQ. HIGH FREQ. ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS (DIAMETER x DEPTH) NET WEIGHT (each)
Two-Way 6.5" Coaxial Ceiling Loudspeaker w/ Extended Bass 55 Hz - 20 kHz 150 W 75 W 120° conical 91 dB

CONTROL 47LP
Two-Way 6.5" Coaxial Ceiling Low Profile Loudspeaker 68 Hz - 20 kHz 150 W 75 W 120° conical 91 dB 8 ohms 60 W, 30 W, 15 W, (& 7.5 W @70 V) 6 1⁄2 in (165 mm) 1 in (25 mm) Formed steel backcan 305 x 142 mm 12 x 5.6 in 4.3 kg (9.5 lb)

CONTROL 47HC
Two-Way 6.5" Coaxial Ceiling Loudspeaker for High Ceilings 55 Hz - 17 kHz 150 W 75 W 75° conical 93 dB 8 ohms 60 W, 30 W, 15 W, (& 7.5 W @70 V) 6 1⁄2 in (165 mm) 1 in (25 mm) Formed steel backcan 332 x 351 mm 13.1 x 13.8 in 6.4 kg (14 lb)

CONTROL 42C
2.5" Ultra-Compact In-Ceiling Satellite Loudspeaker 140 Hz - 20 kHz 30 W 15 W 160° conical 82 dB 16 ohms N/A 2 1⁄2 in (60 mm) Formed steel backcan 127 x 94 mm 5.0 x 4.2 in .7 kg (1.6 lb)

CONTROL 40CS/T
8" In-Ceiling Subwoofer with Crossover 32 Hz - 300 Hz 200 W 100 W Omnidirectional 95 dB (ceiling, near corner) 89 dB (center of ceiling) 8 ohms 80, 40, 20 (&10W @ 70V) 8 in (200 mm) Formed steel backcan 332 x 338 mm 13.1 x 13.3 in 8.1 kg (17.9 lb)

8 ohms 60 W, 30 W, 15 W, (& 7.5 W @70 V) 6 1⁄2 in (165 mm) 1 in (25 mm) Formed steel backcan 305 x 259 mm 12 x 10.2 in 5 kg (11 lb)

1Half-space (mounted in-wall or in ceiling)

2 Continuous Pink Noise rating is IEC-shaped pink noise with a 6

dB crest factor for 100 hours continuously. Continuous Program power is a conservative expression of the system’s ability to handle

normal speech and music program material, and is defined as 3 dB above the Continous Pink Noise Rating.
3 Half-space (in ceiling) average 1 kHz to 16 kHz.

Page 339

INSTALLATION PRODUCTS

Control® Contractor
key features

20 Series Premium Small Format Ceiling
f AGENCY APPROVED FOR USE IN AIR HANDLING SPACES f SONICGUARD™ OVERLOAD PROTECTION

f ALL-IN-ONE CONVENIENCE FOR FAST INSTALLATION AND EASY STOCKING f PREMIUM PERFORMANCE

JBL Control Contractor Ceiling Speakers deliver high power handling, overload protection and exceptional sound level capability and are packaged as complete assemblies, including integral backcan, front grille and tile bridge support hardware. Innovative design features such as titanium-coated tweeters and JBL’s unique diffraction-horn loading provide broad, even coverage throughout the listening area.
Installation of JBL Control Contractor Ceiling Speakers is quick and easy and can be accomplished without requiring access above the ceiling. Bracketry for suspended ceilings is included. The speaker is held securely in place via mounting ears which rotate into position and lock into place. Inputs are attached to a removable locking connector (included) which can be prewired before installing for ultra-fast snap-on installation. All models (except 26-DT) contain formed steel backcans and are suitable for use in air handling spaces per UL1480 and UL2043. Specific models (noted below) feature top quality transformers pre-installed inside the speaker assembly for use on 70V/100V distributed lines. Tap selection is conveniently located on the front of the speaker (except Micro).

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CONTROL 24C/CT MICRO AND CONTROL 24CT MICROPLUS
The Control 24C/CT Micro and Control 24CT MicroPlus are compact, easy-toinstall in-ceiling speakers, providing full, high quality sound for background music and music-pluspaging systems and include 24C/CT MICRO multi-tap transformers. 24CT MICROPLUS

CONTROL 26-DT
The Control 26-DT is an 8" driver assembly designed for sound systems requiring a higher fidelity sound and easy installation into standard backcans. A high quality, low insertion-loss transformer is supplied for use on 70V/100V distributed lines.

ACCESSORIES
New Construction Bracket: MTC-xxNC* Plaster Ring Bracket: MTC-xxMR* Trim Rings: Allow for installation into existing ceiling speaker cutouts that are larger than the speaker’s normal cutout size. MTC-xxTR*. MTC-48TRx12: Tile Rails for 4’ x 4’ ceiling tiles (pack of 12 rails)
* These models are available in different sizes. Specify speaker model when ordering.

CONTROL 24C/CT
The Control 24C contains a coaxially mounted 4" woofer and 3⁄4" titanium-coated tweeter, providing high-fidelity sound over a wide coverage area. The Control 24CT is available in black (C24CT-BK).

26-DT

CONTROL 19CS/CST
The unique Nested-Chamber design and Linear Dynamic™ port of the JBL Control 19CS subwoofer allows powerful low-frequency reinforcement from a compact in-ceiling enclosure. The Control 19CS is an ideal addition to any system, resulting in full-fidelity, high level sound. The optional Control 19CST has a special subwoofer-band transformer for use on 70V or 100V line distribution systems.

24C/CT

CONTROL 26C/CT and CONTROL 26CT-LS
The Control 26C contains a coaxially mounted 6 1⁄2" woofer and 3⁄4" titanium-coated tweeter, able to deliver maximum sound level over a defined area. The Control 26CT-LS is UL1480/ UUMW certified for use in fire alarm and voice evacuation systems.

FREQUENCY RANGE (-10dB) 1 POWER CAPACITY: PROGRAM 2 PINK 3 NOMINAL DISPERSION NOMINAL SENSITIVITY 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE TRANSFORMER TAPS: 100V 70.7 V COMPONENTS: LOW FREQ. HIGH FREQ. ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS (H x DIA.) NET WEIGHT (each)

specifications
24C/CT MICRO 24CT MICROPLUS
85 Hz - 25 kHz 30 W 15 W 150° conical 86 dB 8 ohms (24C Micro) 8, 4, 2, 1 W (24CT Micro) 25, 12 W (24 CT MicroPlus) 8, 4, 2, 1, .5 W (24CT Micro) 25, 12, 6 W (24CT MicroPlus) 4 1⁄2 in (115 mm) 1⁄2 in (12 mm) Formed steel backcan 106 x 195 mm 4.2 x 7.7 in 24C Micro: 1.6 kg (3.6 lb) 24CT Micro: 2.0 kg (4.4 lb) 24CT MicroPlus: 2.5 kg (5.5 lb)

26C/CT 26CT-LS

19CS/CST

24C/CT & 24 CT-BK
80 Hz - 20 kHz 80 W 40 W 130° conical 86 dB 16 ohms (24C) 30, 15, 7.5 W (24CT) 30, 15, 7.5, 3.7 W (24CT) 4 in (100 mm) 3⁄4 in (19 mm) Formed steel backcan 200 x 195 mm 7.9 x 7.7 in 24C: 2.7 kg (6 lb) 24CT: 3.5 kg (8 lb)

26C/CT & 26CT-LS
75 Hz – 20 kHz (26C/CT) 80 Hz – 20 kHz (26CT-LS) 150 W 75 W 110° conical 89 dB 16 ohms (26C) 60, 30, 15 W (26CT) 60, 30, 15, 7.5 W (26CT) 6 1⁄2 in (165 mm) 3⁄4 in (19 mm) Formed steel backcan 210 x 252 mm 8.3 x 9.9 in 26C: 3.4 kg (7.5 lb) 26CT: 4.2 kg (10 lb)

26-DT
70 Hz - 20 kHz

19CS/CST
42 Hz - 200 Hz 200 W 100 W Omnidirectional 95 dB (ceiling, near corner) 89 dB (center of ceiling) 8 ohms (19CS) 60, 30, 15 W (19CST) 60, 30, 15, 7.5 W (19CST) 8 in (200 mm) Formed steel backcan 345 x 345 mm 13.6 x 13.6 in 19CS: 5.5 kg (12 lb) 19CST: 6.3 kg (14 lb)

90° 89 dB (60 W tap)

60, 30, 15 W 60, 30, 15, 7.5 W 6 1⁄2 in (165 mm) * 3⁄4 in (19 mm) 120 x 200 mm 4.72 x 7.87 in 1.9 kg (4.2 lb)
* 8” compatible mounting

1Half-space (mounted in-wall or in ceiling) 2 Continuous Program Power, which is a conservative expression of the

system’s ability to handle normal speech and music program material

and is defined as 3 dB above the Continuous Pink Noise rating (IECshaped pink noise with a 6 dB crest factor, for 100 hours continuously). 3 Rated in Continuous Pink Noise for 100 hours.

Page 340

CONTROL CONTRACTOR CEILING SPEAKERS

8100 Series
key features

Sculpted Grille Dual-Cone Ceiling Speakers
f HIGH SENSITIVITY FOR MAXIMUM POWER EFFICIENCY f 6W TRANSFORMER FOR USE ON 70V / 100V DISTRIBUTED LINES f 8124 & 8128—OPEN-BACK DESIGN FOR APPLICATIONS NOT REQUIRING AN IN-CEILING BACKCAN f 8128—PRE-INSTALL BACKCAN DESIGN

Harman Pro Group | 2013

The 8124 and 8128 Ceiling Speakers are designed for fast and easy installation with built-in dog-ears for easy installations, light weight and open-back design for applications not requiring an in-ceiling backcan.

The 8124 (4-inch (100 mm) full-range loudspeaker) and the 8-inch (200 mm) full-range loudspeakers feature high sensitivity drivers that deliver maximum sound levels using minimal amplifier power. (8128/8130 shown) 8128

70V/100V taps for ease-of-use in the field. For additional installation help, accessories such as the MTC-RAIL tile rail sets and C-Rings are available separately.

High sensitivity at a cost-effective price point, the 8100 Series is an easy to install loudspeaker solution for a wide variety of commercial sound applications. With its contemporary grill design, the 8100 Series loudspeakers are ideal for a variety of settings ranging from restaurant and retail settings to professional offices and reception areas. All models feature 70V/100V taps.
8124
The 8124 is a 4-inch (100 mm) full-range loudspeaker, featuring a high sensitivity driver that provides 130° conical coverage in a lightweight (2.5 lb) package.

The 8100 Series is equipped with a contemporary grille, allowing the speakers to blend with a variety of interiors.

Section:

07
8124

8128
The 8128 is an 8-inch (200 mm) full-range loudspeaker, featuring a high sensitivity driver that provides 90° conical coverage in a lightweight (3.0 lb) package.

8138

ACCESSORIES
Because of the very light weight of 8124 and 8128, tile rails may not be required for some in-ceiling applications. They are not packaged with these models, however MTC-RAIL tile rail sets and MTC-8124C and MTC-8128C C-Rings are available separately. The 8138 is designed for use with MTC81BB8 backcan and MTC-81TB8 tile bridge.

8138
The 8138 is an 8-inch (200 mm) full-range loudspeaker designed for use with a pre-install in-ceiling backcan, resulting in high sensitivity performance at a cost effective price point.

specifications
8124
SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE (-10dB) DRIVER POWER CAPACITY NOMINAL DISPERSION NOMINAL SENSITIVITY 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE TRANSFORMER TAPS: 100V 70.7 V DIMENSIONS (DIA. x DEPTH BACKCAN CUTOUT DIMENSION NET WEIGHT (each)
100 mm (4 in) Full-Range 60 Hz – 18 kHz 20 W 130° conical 93 dB (1 kHz - 8 kHz) 8 ohms 6 W, 3 W, 1.5 W 6 W, 3 W, 1.5 W, 0.75 W 206 mm (8.1 in) diameter round baffle x 89 mm (3.5 in) depth from back of baffle Open-back, no backcan 175 mm diameter (6.9 in) 1.2 kg (2.5 lb)

8128
200 mm (8 in) Full-Range 50 Hz – 16 kHz 25 W 90° conical 97 dB (1 kHz - 8 kHz) 8 ohms 6 W, 3 W, 1.5 W 6 W, 3 W, 1.5 W, 0.75 W 287 mm (11.3 in) diameter round baffle x 104 mm (4.1 in) depth from back of baffle Open-back, no backcan 256 mm diameter (10.1 in) 1.4 kg (3.0 lb)

8138
200 mm (8 in) Full-Range 95 Hz – 18 kHz 25 W 90° conical 97 dB (1 kHz - 8 kHz) 8 ohms 6 W, 3 W, 1.5 W 6 W, 3 W, 1.5 W, 0.75 W 327 mm (12.9 in) diameter round baffle x 84 mm (3.3 in) depth from back of baffle MTC-81BB8 backcan with MTC-81TB8 tile bridge 300 mm diameter (11.75 in) with tile bridge & backbox 1.4 kg (3.0 lb)

The 8138 fits the MTC-81BB8 backcan and MTC81TB8 tile bridge, or can be used with most in-ceiling backcan/tile bridge systems designed with four mounting points on a 286 mm (11¼ in) diameter mounting circle.

Page 341

INSTALLATION PRODUCTS

Commercial Series
key features
Introducing JBL CS Series:

CSS Ceiling and Surface-Mount Speakers
f INTEGRATES WITH OTHER PRODUCTS IN THE JBL CS COMMERCIAL SOLUTIONS SERIES f SURFACE-MOUNT SPEAKER HANDLES 100V, 70V AND LOW-IMPEDANCE f CEILING SPEAKERS COME PRE-ASSEMBLED WITH GRILLE, SPEAKER AND TRANSFORMER AND HANDLE 100V, 70V AND 25V DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS

COMMERCIAL SOLUTIONS SERIES Sound Systems
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

CSS8018

CSS8004

CSS8008

07

The JBL Commercial CS (Commercial Solutions) Series consists of mixers (CSM), wall plate remotes (CSR), paging microphones (CSPM), amplifiers (CSA), transformers (CST) and speakers (CSS) –all designed to work optimally with one another as a commercial sound system solution. See the JBL Commercial CS Series section of this catalog for detailed information about these products and systems.
Technical support related to these systems is provided by Harman Signal Processing Group. CSM mixers, CSR wall plate remotes and CSPM paging microphones are made, sold and supported by Harman Signal Processing. CSA and CST amplifier and transformer modules are made, sold and supported by Crown. Loudspeakers are from JBL Professional.

The JBL Commercial Series provides affordable performance for paging and background music applications in retail stores, restaurants, schools and other facilities. For information on integrating these speakers with other products in the JBL Commercial CS Series, please see page 373.
CSS8004, CSS8008 and CSS8018
High sensitivity provides maximum sound level even at low tap settings. Triple voltage transformers (100V, 70V and 25V) ensure compatibility with any distributed system. Large diameter voice coil, Kapton™ coil-former, and high-temperature wire for superior power dissipation and long-term reliability. The driver, grille and transformer come pre-assembled for ease of installation. Accessories include matching pre-install back cans (required for proper installation) and tile rails. UL1480, UL2043.

CSS8004, CSS8008 and CSS8018 ACCESSORIES
MTC-BB4x6: Pre-install backcan for CSS8004. Pack of 6pcs; MTC-BB8x6: Pre-install backcan for CSS8008 and CSS8018. Pack of 6 pcs; MTC-TR4/8x12: Tile rails for CSS-BR4 and CSS-BR8 backcans. Pack of 12 pcs. for 6 speakers.

CSS-1S/T
CSS-1S/T is a versatile, compact two-way loudspeaker designed for use on 100V or 70V distributed speaker lines, or in 8 ohm direct mode. The 135 mm (5.25 inch) low frequency loudspeaker and 19 mm (.75 inch) tweeter reproduce full-range sound quality for foreground or background music. Aimable wall-mount bracket included.
CSS-1S/T

DRIVER SIZE (DUAL CONE) DRIVER SENSITIVITY (MID-RANGE) FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB) DRIVER /GRILLE ASSEMBLY INSTALLED IN CSS-BB BACKCAN COVERAGE DRIVER POWER HANDLING 1 TRANSFORMER TAPS: 100V 70.7 V 25 V MATCHING CSS BACKCAN CUTOUT DIAMETER: OPEN BACK CUTOUT DIAMETER: IN CSS-BB BACKCAN DEPTH (BEHIND GRILLE) GRILLE DIAMETER NET WEIGHT (each)

specifications
CSS8004
100 mm (4 in) 90 dB 85 Hz – 18 kHz 130 Hz – 18 kHz 175° 15 W 5 W, 2.5 W, 1.3 W 5 W, 2.5 W, 1.3 W, 0.7 W 5 W, 2.5 W, 1.3 W, 0.7 W CSS-BB4 125 mm (5.0 in) 170 mm (6.7 in) 94 mm (3.7 in) 198 mm (7.8 in) 0.90 kg (1.0 lb)

CSS8008
200 mm (8 in) 96 dB 55 Hz – 16 kHz 100 Hz – 16 kHz 120° 15 W 5 W, 2.5 W, 1.3 W 5 W, 2.5 W, 1.3 W, 0.7 W 5 W, 2.5 W, 1.3 W, 0.7 W CSS-BB8 (0.15 cu ft) 216 mm (8.5 in) 295 mm (11.7 in) 71 mm (2.8 in) 327 mm (12.9 in) 1.27 kg (2.8 lb)

CSS8018
200 mm (8 in) 97 dB 50 Hz – 17 kHz 90 Hz – 17 kHz 110° 20 W 10 W, 5 W, 2.5 W 10 W, 5 W, 2.5 W, 1.3 W 10 W, 5 W, 2.5 W, 1.3 W CSS-BB8 (0.15 cu ft) 216 mm (8.5 in) 295 mm (11.7 in) 73 mm (2.9 in) 327 mm (12.9 in) 1.58 kg (5 lb)

CSS-1S/T
135 mm (5.25 in) plus 19 mm (.75 in) 86 dB

n/a 120° x 120° 60W 10 W, 5 W and 8 ohms 10 W, 5 W, 2.5 W and 8 ohms n/a DIMENSIONS 229 x 159 x 143 mm (9.0 x 6.3 x 5.6 in) 2.0 kg (4.5 lb)

1Continuous Pink Noise Rating (IEC-shaped pink noise with a 6 dB crest factor, for 100 hrs continuously).

342 342 Page

Studio Monitors

Section:

07
JBL has more experience designing and building transducers for professional studio monitors than any other company. We not only use the latest engineering and design equipment, but also the most important test device of all, the human ear. We believe in physics, not fads, so while other companies pick parts off somebody else’s shelf, we utilize our 65 years of experience in transducer design to create the perfect transducer for each system. In the great tradition of JBL Studio Monitors, we proudly introduce the M2 Master Reference Monitor, which for the first time, makes large-format monitoring viable for a very broad range of facilities. The M2 joins our family of LSR Series Studio Monitors, leveraging the latest JBL transducer and system technologies to provide a most accurate studio reference. The Linear Spatial Reference (LSR) philosophy is based on a set of design goals that carefully control the overall performance of the system in a variety of acoustic spaces. Instead of focusing solely on a simple measurement such as on-axis frequency response, JBL measures systems in a field 360 degrees around the speaker and engineers the entire system to ensure the offaxis response reflected to the mix position is neutral. Then JBL goes a step further to overcome problems caused by low frequency room modes which plague mix engineers. A JBL first, the RMC™ Room Mode Correction system is included in the LSR6300 and LSR4300 Series monitors and the MSC1 Monitor System Controller. The RMC system includes everything needed to analyze LF problems and restore accuracy at the mix position. Our broad studio monitor line incorporates models to meet the most demanding performance and budgetary requirements. No matter which model you chose, your mixes will hit their mark.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

JBL PROFESSIONAL IS THE PROUD RECIPIENT OF THE 2005 TECHNICAL GRAMMY® The National Academy Of Recording Arts and Sciences Presented the 2005 Technical GRAMMY® Award to JBL Professional for Continual Mastery and Innovation in Concert, Studio, Cinema and Broadcast Sound and Monitors to Ensure Exacting Standards for the Most Accurate Sonic Experience.

Page 343

f DUAL DIAPHRAGM, DUAL VOICE COIL COMPRESSION DRIVER

M2 Master Reference Monitor
Until now, the impressive large-format monitoring experience has been unattainable in small and medium-size rooms. With the introduction of the M2 Master Reference Monitor, JBL brings world-class large-format monitoring to a broad range of production spaces. Leveraging a new generation of highoutput, ultra-low distortion JBL transducers, the M2 provides an in-room response of 20 Hz to 40 kHz, with the high SPL and dynamic range required for demanding music and film production. The M2’s revolutionary Image Control ™ waveguide ensures stunning imaging across a wide listening area. With a footprint of only 14 inches deep and 20 inches wide, the M2 two-way system outperforms many larger and more costly 3-way and 4-way systems, making big, detailed sound an option for artist studios, mastering facilities, small mix stages and screening rooms.

f DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE LOW FREQUENCY TRANSDUCER WITH DUAL VOICE COILS f IMAGE CONTROL™ WAVEGUIDE PROVIDES EXCEPTIONAL IMAGING AND DETAIL

f COMPACT FOOTPRINT ALLOWS PLACEMENT FLEXIBILITY AND USE IN BEHIND-SCREEN APPLICATIONS f VERY HIGH SPL AND DYNAMIC RANGE FOR DEMANDING MUSIC AND FILM PRODUCTION APPLICATIONS

The new standard of accuracy and performance for today's production rooms.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

ENABLING TECHNOLOGIES
The D2 Dual-Diaphragm, Dual Voice Coil HighFrequency Compression Driver provides smooth extended high frequency response to 40 kHz, with extraordinary output and ultra-low distortion. The advanced Image Control™ waveguide produces remarkable imaging, neutral broad-band in-room response and enhanced high-frequency coverage. The 2216ND Differential Drive® Low Frequency Transducer is made with two neodymium magnets and dual voice coils employing patented 2216ND low thermal coefficient of resistance wire. This allows very high output with minimal power compression, resulting in deep distortion-free bass even at very high SPL.

M2 (shown with removable grille)

specifications
M2
SYSTEM FORMAT FREQUENCY RANGE: IN-ROOM ANECHOIC WAVE GUIDE DISPERSION SENSITIVITY (1 W/1 m) CONTINUOUS/PEAK SPL (1 m) DRIVERS: LF HF INPUTS ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

2-Way Floor Free Standing or Soffit Mountable 20 Hz – 40 kHz 40 Hz – 22 kHz (±1 dB) 120° (H) x 100° (V) 92 dB 117 dB/123 dB; 108 dB peak SPL @ 25 ft 2216ND 15" Differential Drive Woofer D2430K Dual Diaphragm, Dual Voice Coil Compression Driver Spring terminals 25 mm (1 in) MDF Satin black laquer 1220 x 510 x 360 mm (48 x 20 x 14 in) 58.5 kg (129 lb)

CROWN POWER
The M2 System is bi-amplified and tuned with Crown iTech 5000HD amplifiers for unmatched power and transient response. Multiple systems can be networked and centrally controlled using Harman System Architect™ Software. System configurations include BSS Soundweb™ London signal processing and I/O options.* Each speaker can be calibrated and optimized for room placement and acoustics.
*The system requires one Crown iTech 5000HD power amp for each speaker, or BSS Soundweb London Processor with Crown MA5000i power amp.

Page 344

f LINEAR SPATIAL REFERENCE DESIGN f RMC™ ROOM MODE CORRECTION

f MOUNTING POINTS FOR INDUSTRY-STANDARD MOUNTING HARDWARE f EXCELLENT ON- AND OFF-AXIS PERFORMANCE f HIGH SPL CAPABILITY

The LSR Series

f BALANCED AND UNBALANCED INPUTS THAT ACCOMODATE A WIDE RANGE OF INPUT SIGNAL LEVELS

The JBL LSR6300, LSR4300 and the LSR2300 Series go “beyond accurate”all the way to “stunning”by incorporating features which reduce the effect of problems in the room. We start with JBL transducer and network technologies that provide ultra-flat response and exceptional dynamic range. Then we incorporate features that help to overcome the contributions of the room. So even if you work in a small home studio, you’ll have clear sound at the mix position. All LSR models are engineered for use in the most demanding production environments. With JBL’s LSR6300 Series, LSR4300 Series, and the New LSR2300 Series, mixing is a pleasure.
It takes more than an accurate speaker system to have accurate response at the mix position. Problems in the room dramatically color what you hear at the mix position. Walls and corners can affect response. And standing waves at the mix position can lead you to misjudge bass content. As a result, a speaker which measures flat in an anechoic chamber may “tell you a different story” in the room. The key to accuracy is tackling the effect of boundaries, standing waves and reflections. In developing the LSR Series, JBL examined each problem in the environment and created the perfect solution. Even if you work in a small control room, an LSR system will provide smooth accurate response at the mixer’s chair.

RMC™ (Room Mode Correction)
Room modes or standing waves can mislead you give you a false impression of low frequency content in the mix. JBL is first to supply a complete solution for identifying and overcoming the negative effect of room modes. The LSR6328P, LSR6312SP, all LSR4300 models and the MSC1 Monitor System Controller are equipped with RMC™, JBL’s ingenious Room Mode Correction System. The LSR6300 RMC Calibration kit includes everything needed to identify room modes and set the LSR6300 series on-board parametric equalizer. JBL engineers took the RMC solution one step further by equipping the LSR4300 Series speakers with an automated analyzer and corrective filter. Both systems dramatically improve low frequency performance at the mix position. The LSR2300 Series owner can enjoy the benefits of JBL RMC Technology by adding the optional MSC1 Monitor System Controller with RMC that, in addition to controlling the system, tunes it for perfect mixes in any room.
Carbon Fiber Composite Cone Dual Magnetic Gaps Dynamic Brake Coil Neodymium Magnet Aluminum Diecast Heatsink Dual Drive Coils Diecast Frame

Built-in Boundary Compensation
With the advent of multi-channel production, space limitations may compromise the positioning of the speakers. JBL’s powered LSR6300 models include boundary compensation switches, while the RMC™ Systems in the LSR4300 and the MSC1 Monitor System Controller include filters to offset the increase in bass response that occurs when the speaker is placed near a wall, in a corner or on a work surface.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Stunning Sound
Starting with application-designed and built transducers engineered for extremely accurate response and superb power handling, the stunning sound of the LSR Series Studio Monitors make long mix sessions a pleasure. The LSR6300 line* incorporates the single most significant advance in monitor history: JBL’s patented Differential Drive® Technology. Providing unparalleled performance, the woofer permanently dispels the notion that better linearity, higher power handling and greater dynamic accuracy are somehow unobtainable. JBL’s Differential Drive uses two drive coils with twice the thermal surface area of traditional speakers. As a result, LSR6300 systems provide higher peak output with less spectral shift that causes monitors to sound different when driven at different power levels. All LSR Series speakers withstand the JBL loudspeaker torture test driven at full rated power for over 100 hours. Meeting higher standards than any other loudspeaker manufacturer, JBL’s demanding test ensures that the LSR Studio Monitors give you accurate mixes year after year.
* (LSR6328P, LSR6332, LSR6312SP)

LSR (Linear Spatial Reference Technology)
Much of what you hear at the mix position is reflected—not direct sound. Linear Spatial Reference Technology ensures mid and high frequency response of our speakers is neutral at the mix position. The exact geometry of the waveguide, the interaction of the woofer and tweeter, and the network are designed to provide an accurate listening window of ± 30 degree horizontal, ± 15 degree vertical. As a result, the reflected sound that reaches the mix position is smooth and accurate.

Section:

07

Differential Drive® Technology

LSR6332
Elliptical Oblate Spheroidal (EOS) Waveguide Designed for a targeted listening window of ± 30 degrees horizontally and ±15 degrees vertically, the EOS provides smooth response through the entire listening window within 1.5 dB of the on-axis response. The result: The listener, even far off-axis, can hear an accurate representation of the on-axis response. Composite High Frequency Device The 1" magnetically shielded dome high frequency device incorporates titanium and composite materials to improve transient response and reduce distortion. The result: By reducing distortion in the lower operating range where the human ear is most sensitive, listener fatigue is dramatically reduced. 500G Midrange Transducer The midrange is a 2" neodymium motor with a 5-inch woven Kevlar™ cone. The powerful motor structure was chosen to support the low crossover point to the woofer. In order to achieve the goal of accurate spatial response, the crossover points match the directivity characteristics of the three transducers for optimum spatial response. The result: Absolute pinpoint accuracy. Dynamic Braking LSR6300 low frequency transducers are equipped with an electromagnetic braking coil that reduces the effects of extreme excursion with high transient material. This causes more linear compliance resulting in lower distortion, more accurate reproduction and increased reliability.

Reinforced mounting points on LSR speakers allow convenient positioning and installation of multi-channel surround systems for any mixing application, in any studio environment.

Page 345

f LINEAR SPATIAL REFERENCE DESIGN f RMC™ ROOM MODE CORRECTION SYSTEM

f INTEGRATED MOUNTING POINTS f PATENTED DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE® TECHNOLOGY
LSR6300 SERIES

LSR6300 Series
LSR6325P-1
The compact LSR6325P-1 provides exceptional performance for use in applications where accuracy is a must, but space is limited. With a 5.25" high-excursion woofer, 1" damped titanium composite tweeter, and 150 watts of amplification, it outperforms many larger systems. A boundary compensation setting adjusts response when used on workstation surfaces. When used with the LSR6312SP Subwoofer, the LSR6325P-1 is the heart of an exceptionally accurate yet space efficient full-range system.

f THX pm3® APPROVED

LSR6332
If you need a larger monitor with high SPL, for mid-field, soffit or behind the screen applications, the LSR6332 is your choice. This three-way non-powered system can handle 200 watts continuous pink noise/800 watts peak and will generate 112 dB SPL at 1 meter. The LSR6332 incorporates a 12" neodymium Differential Drive dual coil woofer, 5" Kevlar™ midrange speaker and 1" titanium composite tweeter. The system is exceptionally flat, +1 dB/ –1.5 dB from 60 Hz to 22 kHz with LF extension to 35 Hz. User features include a –1 dB HF level setting, and dual 5-way binding posts for bi-wire capability.

LSR6312SP

2004 WINNER

The LSR6312SP powered subwoofer is based on a 12" woofer with JBL’s patented neodymium Differential Drive and 260 watts of power. An integral bass-management system provides all the features you need for today’s multi-format surround production including: LCR and Direct LFE inputs, summed output for chaining multiple subwoofers, -4 dB alignment setting, and JBL’s new RMC Room Mode Correction system. RMC Calibration Kit included.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

LSR6328P
The LSR6328P is THE choice for stereo and multi-channel music and post audio applications where accuracy and high SPL are required. With ruler-flat +1 dB/-1.5 dB response from 50 Hz to 20 kHz, low frequency extension to 36 Hz, boundary compensation and JBL’s new RMC™ system, the LSR6328P gives you exceptional low frequency performance in any room. The system is bi-amplified with a 250 Watt LF amplifier and a 120 Watt HF amplifier. Based around JBL’s patented 8" Differential Drive® carbon-fiber woofer and a 1" titanium composite tweeter, the system produces smooth response and extraordinary SPL. Wall mounting provisions make the LSR6328P perfect for installation in multichannel editorial rooms.

RMC™ (Room Mode Correction) Calibration Kit The LSR6328P and LSR6312SP Subwoofer are equipped with RMC–JBL’s ingenious method of zeroing-out bass problems at the mix position caused by room modes. A built-in 1/10th octave parametric equalizer allows you to correct problems below 100 Hz. The RMC Calibration Kit gives you everything you need to identify problematic room modes and tune your system. The LSR6325P-1 and LSR6332 enjoy the benefits of RMC when used in a system with the LSR6312SP Subwoofer.

specifications
LSR6325P-1 LSR6328P

LSR6332

LSR6312SP

LSR6325P-1

LSR6328P
50 Hz - 20 kHz (+1, -1.5 dB) -10 dB : 36 Hz 250 W/120 W 108 dB/111 dB 8 in/1 in 96 dB/1m 1.7 kHz +1 dB/-1 dB RMC Calibration Kit XLR, 1⁄4 in included Yes with purchase of two or more Yes Dark Graphite 406 x 330 x 325 mm (16 x 13 x 12.5 in) 17.7 kg (39 lb)

LSR6332
60 Hz - 22 kHz (+1, -1.5 dB) -10 dB : 35 Hz

LSR6312SP
28 Hz - 80 Hz (-6 dB) -10 dB : 26 Hz 260 W 112 dB/115 dB 200 W cont/800 W peak 12 in 96 dB/1 W/1 m 80 Hz XLR, 1⁄4 in RMC Calibration Kit included with Yes LSR6312SP Yes Dark Graphite 394 x 635 x 292 mm (15.5 x 25 x 11.5 in) 22.7 kg (50 lb)

FREQUENCY RESPONSE LOW FREQUENCY EXTENSION AMPLIFIER POWER (LF/HF) SPL (CONTINUOUS/PEAK 1) LONG-TERM MAXIMUM POWER DRIVERS (LF, MF, HF) SENSITIVITY SYSTEM IMPEDANCE CROSSOVER FREQUENCIES HF ADJUSTMENT INPUTS MAGNETIC SHIELDING MOUNTING CAPABILITY FINISH DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each

70 Hz - 20 kHz (+1, -2 dB) -10 dB : 48 Hz 100 W/50 W 106 dB/109 dB 5.25 in/1 in 96 dB/1m 2.3 kHz +1.5 dB/-1.5 dB XLR, RCA Yes Yes Dark Graphite 269 x 173 x 241 mm (10.6 x 6.8 x 9.5 in) 7.7 kg (17 lb)

200 W cont/800 W peak 12 in/5 in/1 in 93 dB/2.83V/1 m (90 dB/1 W/1 m) 4 ohms 250 Hz/2.2 kHz -1 dB Dual 5-Way Binding Yes Yes Dark Graphite 635 x 394 x 292 mm (25 x 15.5 x 11.5 in) 20.4 kg (45 lb)

1 Calculated using average 1 watt/ 1 meter sensitivity and peak amplifier output.

Page 346

STUDIO MONITORS

f LINEAR SPATIAL REFERENCE DESIGN f AUTOMATED RMC™ ROOM MODE CORRECTION

f HARMAN HIQNET™ NETWORK FOR SYSTEM CONTROL f MOUNTING POINTS FOR INDUSTRYSTANDARD MOUNTING HARDWARE f EXCEPTIONALLY ACCURATE IN ANY MIX ENVIRONMENT

LSR4300 Series

f SUPPLIED WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL AND LSR4300 CONTROL CENTER SOFTWARE

LSR4326P

LSR4328P

LSR4312SP

Harman Pro Group | 2013

The first “self-aware” monitoring system, the JBL LSR4300 Studio Monitors incorporate powerful network intelligence and RMC™ Room Mode Correction in the speaker, to deliver superb sound and accurate mixes in any room. With digital inputs, and computer connectivity, the LSR4300s are the ultimate monitor for the modern production environment. The LSR4300 series have become THE choice of facilities engaged in music, post, broadcast, stereo and surround-sound production.
ACCURACY
JBL’s next generation automated RMC™ Room Mode Correction system incorporates a powerful analyzer into each speaker that measures and automatically compensates for problems caused by low frequency standing waves and proximity to boundaries. This creates a stunningly clear and articulate sound stage enabling reliable mixes that translate faithfully to the outside world.

CALIBRATION & CONFIGURATION
Truly putting technology to work, system calibration is accomplished by simply plugging the LSR4300 calibration microphone into the speaker and pushing a button. The results are a revolution in professional mixing: a calibrated listening environment where the monitors truly work in harmony with the room. LSR4300 System with Harman HiQnet™ Network allows centralized control of all system settings using the LSR4300 elegant front panel controls, supplied infrared remote control or computer software. The LSR4300 Series systems can be configured with up to eight main speakers in any desired mix of 6" and 8" models and two subwoofers. The system is automatically aligned so the sound arriving at the mix position from all speakers is balanced even in rooms with space limitations.

LSR4326P
The LSR4326P is a bi-amplified system with 6" woofer and 1" silk-dome tweeter.

LSR4328P
The LSR4328P is a bi-amplified system with 8" woofer and 1" silk-dome tweeter.

Section:

LSR4312SP
The LSR4312SP is a 450 watt, powered 12" subwoofer with automated RMC* and powerful features for stereo and surround sound production including bass management of the L, C, R, LS, RS channels with adjustable crossover points* plus a dedicated LFE (Low Frequency Effects) inputs.
*When used in a system with LSR4326P or LSR4328P

07

specifications
LSR4326P
FREQUENCY RESPONSE AMPLIFIER POWER (LF/HF) SPL (CONTINUOUS/PEAK 1) DRIVERS (LF/HF) SENSITIVITY (+4 dBU, -10 dBV) INPUTS:ANALOG DIGITAL DIGITAL PROCESSING DATA CONNECTIONS MAGNETIC SHIELDING MOUNTING CAPABILITY FINISH: BAFFLE/ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)
± 1.5 dB: 55 Hz – 20 kHz -3 dB: 47 Hz – 22 kHz -10 dB: 39 Hz – 32 kHz 150W/ 70W 106 dB / 112 dB 6.25" 436H / 1" 431 G; Self-Shielded Neodymium Motor Structures 94 dB/1m XLR, 1⁄4" Balanced, +4 dBU, -10 dBV

System calibration is accomplished by simply plugging the LSR4300 calibration microphone into the speaker and pushing a button.

LSR4328P
± 1.5 dB: 50 Hz – 20 kHz -3 dB: 43 Hz – 22 kHz -10 dB: 35 Hz – 32 kHz 150W/ 70W 106 dB / 112 dB 8" 438H / 1" 431G; Self-Shielded Neodymium Motor Structures 94 dB/1m XLR, 1⁄4" Balanced, +4 dBU, -10 dBV AES/EBU XLR, S/PDIF RCA 24 Bit, 96 kHz Harman HiQnet Network, USB, RMC Mic Yes Yes Gray Soft Touch/Gray 438 x 267 x 269 mm (17.25 x 10.5 x 10.6 in) 14.1 kg (31 lb)

LSR4312SP
27 Hz - 250 Hz (-6 dB) -3dB: 29 Hz -10 dB: 24 Hz 450W 116 dB / 125 dB 12" 432G; Self-Shielded 94 dB/1m XLR, 1⁄4" Balanced, +4 dBU, -10 dBV, LFE +10 dB Gain AES/EBU XLR IN, OUT; S/PDIF RCA IN, OUT 24 Bit, 96 kHz Harman HiQnet Network, USB, RMC Mic Yes No Gray Soft Touch/Gray 501 x 406 x 495 mm (19.75 x 16 x 19.25 in) 29.5 kg (66 lb)

LSR4300 Accessory Kit
Includes: • LSR4300 Calibration Microphone and mic clip • Remote Control • LSR4300 Control Center Software • USB Cable

AES/EBU XLR, S/PDIF RCA 24 Bit, 96 kHz Harman HiQnet™ Network, USB, RMC Mic Yes Yes Gray Soft Touch/Gray 387 x 236 x 262 mm (15.25 x 9.3 x 10.3 in) 12.7 kg (28 lb)

Included in the LSR4326P/PAK and LSR4328P/PAK

1 Measured using 6dB crest factor pink noise in free space at 1 Meter C weighted

Page 347

f LINEAR SPATIAL REFERENCE DESIGN FOR SUPERIOR ACCURACY AND IMAGING f EXCEPTIONAL LOW FREQUENCY PERFORMANCE

f HIGH OUTPUT f INTEGRATED MOUNTING POINTS f OPTIONAL MSC1 MONITOR SYSTEM CONTROLLER WITH RMC™ ROOM MODE CORRECTION

NO

M

IN E

E

NO

M

IN E

E

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 348

LSR2328P

LSR2325P

LSR2310SP

MSC1

JBL Professional proudly introduces the new LSR2300 Series and The MSC1 Monitor System Controller delivering professional performance at a price within reach of any studio. The LSR2300 models incorporate the same Linear Spatial Reference design that have made the LSR6300 and LSR4300 Series the choice of top professionals and facilities world-wide. To produce an extraordinary monitor system at these price points, our award-winning engineers pushed the limits in every aspect of the design. With the understanding that today’s audio mixing and recording is carried out in a broad range of environments, JBL designed a system that delivers perfect mixes in any room.
SONIC ACCURACY
Meeting LSR Linear Spatial Reference criteria produces superior imaging and ensures, what you hear at the mix position is neutral in a broad range of environments. The precision wave guide and crossover design, and a newly developed Elliptical Tweeter Aperture result in superior accuracy and imaging at the mix position.

HIGH OUTPUT
JBL-engineered high-sensitivity transducers, high-output amplifiers and paid careful attention to the thermal properties of the system, allowing each model in the LSR2300 line to produce exceptional sound pressure level (SPL). All three LSR2300 models have survived the JBL torture-test in which each system must play at full rated power for 100 hours before becoming a production-ready design. highly-acclaimed RMC ™ Room Mode Correction that measures and tunes your monitor system for better mixes. MSC1 main “A” speaker outputs include monitor EQ and RMC. The subwoofer output has its own level and crossover controls, and RMC to perfectly blend the sub with the “A” speakers. The very affordable MSC1 works with any speaker system.

EXTENDED LOW FREQUENCY RESPONSE
JBL developed long-excursion low frequency transducers, and custom tuned ports that work in concert to produce deep accurate Low Frequency Response.

MSCI MONITOR SYSTEM CONTROLLER
The new MSC1 Monitor System Controller is a desk-top unit that allows monitoring of a range of input sources and connection of two sets of speakers and a subwoofer. Since the bulk of today’s work is carried out in acoustically lessthan perfect rooms, he MSC1 incorporates JBL's

MSC1 Rear Panel

FREQUENCY RESPONSE (±3 dB) LOW FREQUENCY EXTENSION (-10dB) AMPLIFIER POWER (LF/HF) MAX SPL CONTINUOUS (EACH / PAIR ) MAX SPL PEAK (EACH/ PAIR ) DRIVERS (LF/HF) INPUT SENSITIVITY: XLR, 1/4" -10dBV; RCA -20 dBV INPUTS OUTPUTS USER CONTROLS MAGNETIC SHIELDING MOUNTING CAPABILITY FINISH: BAFFLE ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

specifications
LSR2328P
44 Hz - 18 kHz 37 Hz 95W / 70W > 103 dB / >109 dB > 117 dB / >123 dB 8" 238G / 1" 231H; Silk Substrate Neodymium 96 dB SPL / 1m XLR,1⁄4" Balanced, RCA Unbalanced N/A Input Level; HF Trim, LF Trim Yes Yes Metallic Anthracite Paint Matte Black PVC 395 x 254 x 310 mm 15.5 x 10 x 12.5 in 12.3 kg (27 lb)

MSC1 Features & Specifications:
• Master Volume Control • A/B Speaker Select • A/B/C Input Source Select • Subwoofer Output with Level Control and Selectable Crossover Frequencies • Adjustable Low and High Frequency Speaker EQ • Headphone Output with Volume Control • Monitor Mute Control • RMC On/Bypass Control • Balanced Outputs, Balanced & Unbalanced Inputs • Included: Calibration Microphone and MSC1 Control Center Software • Frequency Response: +0/-0.5 dB, 20 Hz - 20 kHz • S/N, Dynamic Range: 110 dB typical, A-weighted, 20 Hz - 20 kHz • Dimensions W x D x H: 198 x 165 x 83 mm (7.8 x 6.5 x 3.25 in)

LSR2325P
52 Hz - 18 kHz 43 Hz 50W / 35W > 99 dB / >105 dB >112 dB / >118 dB 5" 235G / 1" 231H; Silk Substrate Neodymium 96 dB SPL / 1m XLR,1⁄4" Balanced, RCA Unbalanced N/A Input Level; HF Trim, LF Trim Yes Yes Metallic Anthracite Paint Matte Black PVC 298 x 187 x 248 mm 11.75 x 7.38 x 9.63 in 6.8 kg (15 lb)

LSR2310SP
31 Hz - 150 Hz (-6dB) 29 Hz 180W > 103 dB >113 dB 10" 230H; Self-Shielded 96 dB SPL / 1m (80 Hz cross over) (L&R) XLR,1⁄4" Balanced, RCA Unbalanced (L&R) XLR,1⁄4" Balanced Input Level; Crossover 80 Hz, 120 Hz, External; Polarity Yes No Metallic Anthracite Paint Matte Black PVC; Black Metal Grille 415 x 381 x 438 mm 16.12 x 15 x 17.25 in 20.2 kg (44.5 lb)

STUDIO MONITORS

Control® Monitors
key features
CONTROL 5 f MOLDED ENCLOSURES WITH SHIELDED MAGNETIC STRUCTURES f HIGH SENSITIVITY AND POWER HANDLING CAPABILITY CONTROL 2P KEY FEATURES f INTERNAL 35W/CHANNEL POWER AMP f BALANCED AND UNBALANCED INPUT CONNECTORS f WALL MOUNT READY

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CONTROL 1 PRO

CONTROL 1 PRO-WH

CONTROL 2P

The JBL Control Series speakers offer well balanced sound and exceptional power handling , making these speakers ideal for any installation requiring professional control monitor performance from a compact source.

CONTROL 5™
The Control 5 is a high-performance, wide range control monitor suitable for use as the primary sound source in a variety of applications. The 165 mm (6 1⁄2 in) low-frequency driver and 25 mm (1 in) pure titanium dome tweeter are magnetically shielded for use in close proximity to video monitors.

CONTROL 2P
The Control 2P Compact Powered Reference Monitor System combines JBL’s legendary loudspeaker design with powerful amplification to deliver rich, accurate performance for the most demanding audio applications. The compact design, rugged enclosure, and professional feature-set make the Control 2P Compact Powered Reference Monitor ideal for desk-top recording and video production, audio visual presentations, professional broadcast applications, and monitoring of electronic musical instruments. Model C2PS - Control 2P Stereo Pair includes one C2PM powered master, one passive extension speaker, one power supply and two snap-on angle pedestals. Model C2PM: One Control 2P Powered Master speaker without passive extension speaker. MTC-2P: Wall mounting kit for Control 2P. Includes two wall mounts, one power supply holder.

Section:

07

CONTROL® 1 PRO
The Control 1 Pro is a high-performance compact loudspeaker system incorporating monitor-grade, magnetically shielded transducers, a professional crossover network and full-range SonicGuard™ overload protection resulting in a loudspeaker system that is perfect for a wide variety of nearfield audio applications, audio-visual applications, computer workstations, recording and broadcast studios, mobile audio-video control rooms and foreground and back- ground music. Includes wallmounting brackets.

specifications
CONTROL 1 PRO
FREQUENCY RESPONSE POWER CAPACITY 1 SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE COMPONENTS: LF HF ENCLOSURE
100 Hz - 18 kHz (± 3 dB) 150 W 87 dB SPL 4 ohms 135 mm (5 1⁄4 in) 19 mm ( 3⁄4 in) Polypropylene structural foam Black (C1Pro) or white (C1Pro-WH) 235 x 159 x 143 mm 9.25 x 6.25 x 5.6 in 1.8 kg (4 lb)

CONTROL 5
75 Hz - 20 kHz (± 3 dB) 175 W 89 dB SPL 4 ohms 165 mm (6 1⁄2 in) 25 mm (1 in) Polypropylene structural foam Black or white (-WH) 387 x 251 x 229 mm 15.25 x 9.8 x 9 in 4.5 kg (10 lb)

CONTROL 2P
FREQUENCY RANGE MAX. SPL INPUT SENSITIVITY AMPLIFIER POWER COMPONENTS: LF/HF ENCLOSURE INPUT CONNECTORS POWER REQUIREMENTS AC INPUT VOLTAGE DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT: MASTER EXTENSION
80Hz - 20 kHz 115 dB (pair); 111 dB (master only) +4 dBu XLR 1⁄4 in; 0 dBu RCA 35 Watts continuous per-channel 135 mm (5 1⁄4 in) / 19 mm ( 3⁄4 in) Polypropylene structural foam Balanced Neutrik®*; Combo XLR / 1⁄4 " TRS; Unbal. RCA 19 VDC / 3.42 Amps (use only supplied power supply) 100 - 240 V +/- 10% 50/60 Hz 235 x 159 x 143 mm 9.25 x 6.25 x 5.6 in 2.6 kg (5.5 lb) 2.2 kg (4.5 lb)

FINISH DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

1 IEC filtered random noise (50 Hz - 5 kHz) with a crest factor (peak to average ratio) of 6 dB.

* Neutrik and the names of Neutrik products referenced herein are either

trademarks and/or service marks of Neutrik.

Page 349

Cinema Loudspeaker Systems

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
The history of JBL Cinema Speakers is the history of cinema itself. When a company has a legacy nearly eight decades long, there’s little doubt that its ear is planted firmly to the ground. For most of the 20th Century, JBL has been the most trusted name in Cinema sound. In fact, its namesake and founder James B. Lansing began his company building the world’s first cinema speakers. That commitment to the core components of cinema speaker design is why, today, JBL Cinema speakers are found in 6 out of 10 movie theaters around the world. Ever since James B. Lansing developed cinema speakers at the very beginning of talking movies, JBL has consistently set the bar on just how good the movies can sound. That’s why the majority of Dolby® equipped cinemas worldwide use JBL loudspeakers. It’s also why Lucasfilm engineers chose JBL speakers as the standard with which the first THX® licensed commercial theaters were developed. Unparalleled in experience, technical leadership and customer support: a few reasons why, today, JBL speakers also grace the stages of the most coveted theatrical venues, such as The Academy of Motion Picture Arts and Sciences Samuel Goldwyn Theater, The Directors Guild of America and The Academy of Television Arts and Sciences.

Academy of Motion Picture Arts and Sciences Samuel Goldwyn Theater: Hollywood, California
“Academy Award” and “Oscar” image © AMPAS®. THX® Lucasfilm, LTD.

Page 350

CINEMA LOUDSPEAKER SYSTEMS

Ultra High Power Large Format ScreenArray®
key features
The 5742 four-way and 5732 three-way Ultra High Power ScreenArray speakers provide extreme power for large format cinemas and are designed as the ideal loudspeaker system to enhance the 3-D visual experience. Both systems feature a 150 watt, 4” titanium diaphragm high frequency driver on JBL’s patented Optimized Aperture waveguide.
5742 f THX® APPROVED f ULTRA HIGH POWER FOR LARGE CINEMAS f BOTH 3-WAY AND 4-WAY SPEAKERS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

5742
The 5742 Quad-Amplified System features true 4 way design with a quad midrange array of four 8" Differential Drive® cone midrange drivers providing 1400 Watts of smooth coverage coupled with a dual 18” low frequency section providing 1600 Watts of high impact power.

Section:

5732

07

5732
The 5732 Tri-Amplified System is ideal for premier cinemas and post production facilities requiring enhanced power and headroom. The 5732 features a powerful 700 watt midrange section with dual 8" Differential Drive transducers. The low frequency section provides 1200 watts of power from dual 15" Vented Gap Cooled low frequency drivers.

specifications
5742
FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESPONSE (±3 dB) COVERAGE ANGLES DIRECTIVITY FACTOR DIRECTIVITY INDEX MAXIMUM PEAK OUTPUT CROSSOVER FREQUENCIES: SENSITIVITY: 2.83V @ 1 m SYSTEM INPUT POWER RATING DRIVERS: LF MF HF SYSTEM ELEMENTS: LF MF/HF DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT
25 Hz - 20 kHz 30 Hz - 19 kHz 90° horizontal x 20° up 30° down 10.0 10 136 dB @ 1 m 220 Hz, 550 Hz, 1.3 kHz 115 dB LF:1600 W, MF:1400 W, HF:150 W 2 x 2242 HPL 4 x 2169H 2452H-SL 5749 5742-M/HF 2763 x 762 x 610mm 108.8 x 30.0 x 24 in 128.1 kg (282 lb)

5732
30 Hz - 20 kHz 40 Hz - 19 kHz 90° horizontal x 20° up 30° down 10.0 10 128 dB @ 1m 250 Hz, 1.3 kHz 115 dB LF:1200 W, MF:700 W, HF:150 W 2 x 2226 HPL 2 x 2169H 2452H-SL 5739 5732-M/HF 1937 x 762 x 450 mm 76.3 x 30.0 x 17.8 in 86 kg (190 lb) 5742 (Rear View)

5732 (SideView)

Page 351

CINEMA LOUDSPEAKER SYSTEMS

ScreenArray® Series
With the advent of digital cinema, today’s cinema patron is even more demanding of perfect coverage in every seat of the auditorium, wide dynamic range and extended bandwidth and inaudible levels of distortion. Continuing to provide cinema exhibition venues and post production facilities with unprecedented audio performance and advanced technology, JBL introduced the “Next Generation” of its award winning ScreenArray® digital cinema loudspeakers. The “Next Generation” ScreenArray 4722/4722N systems feature a new large format 3", neodymium, titanium diaphragm, highfrequency driver for ultra-high performance. The new high-frequency driver is coupled with a new patented high-frequency horn featuring Screen Spreading Compensation™ to correct for high frequency dispersion through perforated screens. Each of the new systems have improved, patented, crossover design and new Optimized Aperture Waveguides. Since their introduction, JBL ScreenArray systems have become the choice for premium cinemas throughout the world. with significant improvements in performance and design, the new ScreenArray systems will continue to be the most popular cinema loudspeakers throughout the world.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

JBL offers two ScreenArray systems to meet the challenges posed by lower cost installations. All systems products provide ultra smooth and accurate sound reproduction in a compact and highly cost effective system. The 3722N Passive system and 3722 Bi-amplified system, the 4722N Passive system and the 4722 Bi-amplified system feature feature the ultra-low distortion ScreenArray high frequency horn with SSC and dual 15" low-frequency sections.

3722/3722N
The 3722 and 3722N provide smooth and accurate reproduction of cinema soundtracks in a compact and very cost effective passive system. The system is comprised of two parts: the 3722-HF high-frequency pack and the 3739 lowfrequency system. The ScreenArray horn features a patented design that compensates for high frequency spreading caused by perforated screens for greatly improved audience coverage. Together, these elements provide clear, accurate reproduction of the mid/high frequency information. All of these components come pre-assembled to reduce field assembly time thus reducing installation costs.

4722/4722N
The 4722 and 4722N provide smooth and accurate reproduction of cinema soundtracks in a compact and very cost effective system. The system is comprised of two parts: the 4722-HF high-frequency pack and the 4739 low-frequency system. The 4722N passive system utilizes a sophisticated crossover network. Developed using computer optimization technology, it provides seamless transition resulting in excellent power response and controlled directivity.

specifications
3722/3722N
FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESPONSE COVERAGE ANGLES RATED MAXIMUM SPL: CROSSOVER FREQUENCIES: SENSITIVITY: 2.83V @ 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE: DRIVERS: LF HF SYSTEM ELEMENTS: LF MF/HF DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT
30 Hz - 18 kHz 40 Hz - 16 kHz 90° horizontal, -30°, +20° vertical 127 dB, @ 1 m 133 dB peak 1.3 kHz 104 dB 3722: 4ohm 3722N/HF: 8 ohm 3722 N/LF: 4 ohm 2 x M115-8A 2418H-1 3739 3722-HF [3722N-HF] 1265 x 762 x 450 mm 49.8 x 30 x 17.75 in 62.2 kg (137 lb)

3722/3722N

4722/4722N
30 Hz - 20 kHz 40 Hz - 19 kHz 90° horizontal, -30°, +20° vertical 130 dB, @ 1 m 136 dB peak 4722: 630 Hz 4722N: 800 Hz 104 dB 4722: 4 ohms 4722N: HF 8 ohms 4722N: LF 4 ohms 2 x 2035HPL 2432H 4739 4722-HF [4722N-HF] 1289 x 762 x 450 mm 49.9 x 30 x 17.75 in 48.6 kg (123 lb)

4722 & 4722N

Page 352

f DESIGNED FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT, OPTIMAL COVERAGE, AND MINIMUM DISTORTION

f ULTRA-LOW DISTORTION AND EXTREMELY UNIFORM FREQUENCY RESPONSE f FLAT-FRONT DESIGN FOR EASY BAFFLEWALL INSTALLATION f SHALLOW PROFILE FOR MINIMUM DEPTH BEHIND SCREEN (17 3⁄4")

key features
4732 [T]

f THX® APPROVED (4732-T, 3732-T and 3731-T) f SHIPS FULLY ASSEMBLED

The ScreenArray Series features true three-way system design enhanced by advanced engineering. JBL Professional’s best technical innovations are integrated in a system design that provides superior coverage, maximum power handling, and uniform acoustic power output, along with extremely low distortion.
3732 [T]

The 3731, 3732 and 4732 ScreenArray Series systems are available for bi-amplified or tri-amplified operation. The 3730 is bi-amplified or passive switchable.
3730

3731 [T]

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

4732T

3732T

3731T

specifications
4732 [T] 3732 [T]
FREQUENCY RANGE FREQ RESPONSE (± 3 dB) COVERAGE ANGLES DIRECTIVITY FACTOR (Q) DIRECTIVITY INDEX (DI) MAXIMUM PEAK OUTPUT: CROSSOVER FREQUENCIES: SENSITIVITY: 2.83V @ 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE: DRIVERS: LF MF HF SYSTEM ELEMENTS: LF MF/HF DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (EACH)
30 Hz - 20 kHz 40 Hz - 19 kHz 90° x 20° up, 30° down 10.0 10 dB 130 dB @ 1 m 250 Hz [1.2 kHz] 107 dB 4 ohms 2 x 2035HPL 4 x 165H 2432H 4739 4732-M/HF 2427 x 762 x 450 mm 95.6 x 30 x 17.75 in 84.4 kg (186 lb)

3731 [T]
30 Hz - 20 kHz 40 Hz - 19 kHz 90° x 20° up, 30° down 10.0 10 dB 125 dB @ 1 m 350 Hz [1.2 kHz] 103 dB 8 ohms 1 x 2226H 2 x 165H 2432H 5641 3732-M/HF 1600 x 762 x 450 mm 63 x 30 x 17.75 in 51.8 kg (114 lb)

3730
30 Hz - 18 kHz 40 Hz - 18 kHz 90° x 20° up, 30° down 10.0 10 dB 120 dB @ 1 m 450 Hz [2 kHz] 105 dB 4 ohms 2 x M115H-1 1 x 195H 2414H 3739 3730-M/HF 1734 x 762 x 450 mm 68.25 x 30 x 17.75 in 67.1 kg (147 lb)

30 Hz - 20 kHz 40 Hz - 19 kHz 90° x 20° up, 30° down 10.0 10 dB 125 dB @ 1 m 350 Hz [1.2 kHz] 103 dB 4 ohms 2 x M115H-1 2 x 165H 2432H 3739 [3732T:4739] 3732-M/HF 1937 x 762 x 450 mm 76.3 x 30 x 17.75 in 79.9 kg (172 lb)

Academy of Television Arts and Sciences North Hollywood, California

Page 353

CINEMA LOUDSPEAKER SYSTEMS

JBL Standard Cinema Systems
Large Format Three-Way
5674
The 5674 features four JBL 2226H 380 mm (15 in) low-frequency transducers in a unique DiamondQuad™ array. This array orientation allows the four drivers to create maximum output, while minimizing destructive interference effects caused by the use of multiple drivers operating in the same bandpass region. The 5674 requires tri-amplification and includes one 5644 Quad LF System and one 5674-M/HF System. The 5674 has earned THX Approval and is the same system used in The Academy of Motion Picture Arts and Sciences Samuel Goldwyn Theater and The Directors Guild Theater in Los Angeles. The JBL 5674, truly the world’s finest three-way loudspeaker.

Two-Way Systems
3252N
The JBL 3252N Screen Channel system provides smooth and accurate reproduction of cinema stoundtracks in a compact and cost effective 400 watt system. The convenient single enclosure, featuring dual 15" low frequency frivers and a Teonex diaphragm high frequency driver, requires no field assembly which simplifies installation.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
5674

3677
The 3677 combines classic JBL performance with a natural sound quality for both music and dialog. The ideal small system when minimum depth behind the screen is required. For extraordinary convenience, the all-in-one enclosure requires no field assembly.

3677 3252N

specifications
5674
FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESPONSE COVERAGE ANGLES (H x V) DIRECTIVITY FACTOR (Q) DIRECTIVITY INDEX (DI) MAX. PEAK OUTPUT: (LF/MF/HF) CROSSOVER FREQ. SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE: (LF/MF/HF) LF DRIVER(S) MF DRIVER/MF HORN HF DRIVER/HF HORN SYSTEM ELEMENTS DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (EACH)

3252N
FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESPONSE POWER CAPACITY COVERAGE ANGLES (H x V) CROSSOVER FREQUENCY SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE LF DRIVER(S) HF DRIVER DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (EACH)
37 Hz - 20 kHz (-10 dB) 53 Hz - 18 kHz (± 3 dB) 400 W 1 100° x 50° 2 kHz 103 dB SPL 4 ohms 2 x 381 mm (15 in) 1 x 2414H-C 1100 x 640 x 450 mm 43.5 x 25.2 x 17.75 in 46 kg (101 lb)

3677
40 Hz - 20 kHz (-10 dB) 45 Hz - 12 kHz (± 3 dB) 250 W 90° x 40° 1.2 kHz 99 dB SPL 8 ohms 2035H 2416-1 765 x 651 x 292 mm 30.125 x 25.625 x 11.5 in 39 kg (85 lb)

35 Hz - 16 kHz (-10 dB) 45 Hz - 12.5 kHz (± 3 dB) 80° x 45° (300 Hz - 16 kHz) 10.4 11 143/140/137 dB @ 1 m LF/MF: 297 Hz; MF/HF: 2.5 kHz LF:103; MF: 114; HF: 112 dB 4 (per driver pair) /8/8 ohms 4 x 2226H (2 pair in parallel) 2490H/2392 2451H/2352 LF: 5644; MF/HF: 5674-M/HF 2895.6 x 1118 x 863.6 mm 114 x 44 x 34 in 171.69 kg (378.5 lb)

1 IEC filtered random noise (50 Hz - 5kHz) with a crest factor (peak to average ratio) of 6 dB.

354 354 Page

CINEMA LOUDSPEAKER SYSTEMS

Spatially Cued Surrounds
key features
SCS 8
f 250 WATT POWER HANDLING f 120° x 120° CONSISTENT BROADBAND PATTERN CONTROL f OVERLOAD PROTECTION

SCS 12
f 400 WATT POWER HANDLING f EXTRAORDINARY CLARITY SURROUND WITH EXTENDED FREQUENCY RESPONSE f HIGH POWER PASSIVE CROSSOVER NETWORK

Section:

SCS 8

SCS 12

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

SCS 8
The SCS 8 is a two-way, full range cinema surround loudspeaker ideal for multi channel surround formats for medium sized auditoriums. The SCS 8 is comprised of a high-power coaxial 203 mm (8 in) low frequency driver and a 25 mm (1 in) high frequency compression driver.

SCS 12
The SCS 12 is a two-way, full range, high power cinema surround loudspeaker ideal for multi channel surround formats and is designed for overhead installation as well as for the standard on-wall installations. The SCS 12 is comprised of a high power coaxial 305 mm (12 in) low frequency driver and a 25 mm (1 in) high frequency compression driver.

specifications
SCS 8
FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESPONSE POWER CAPACITY 1 COVERAGE PATTERN CROSSOVER FREQUENCY SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE DRIVER: LF HF DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (EACH)

SCS 12
55 Hz - 20 kHz (-10 dB) 70 Hz - 20 kHz (± 3 dB) 400 W 90° x 90° 1.8 kHz 94 dB SPL 8 ohms 305 mm (12 in) 25 mm (1 in) 402 x 402 x 445 mm 15.8 x 15.8 x 17.5 in (enclosure) 542 mm (21.4 in) depth with bracket 15.9 kg (35 lb) 18.9 kg (41.5 lb) with U-bracket

70 Hz - 20 kHz (-10 dB) 90 Hz - 20 kHz (± 3 dB) 250 W 120° x 120° 2.1 kHz 91 dB SPL 8 ohms 203 mm (8 in) 25 mm (1 in) 300 x 300 x 305 mm 11.8 x 11.8 x 12 in (enclosure) 359 mm (14.2 in) depth with bracket 9.8 kg (21.5 lb) 11.6 kg (25.5 lb) with U-bracket

1 IEC standard, full bandwidth pink nowise with a 6 dB crest factor.

Page 355

SURROUND SYSTEMS

Surround Systems

key features

f DESIGNED FOR SMALL, MEDIUM, LARGE AND VERY LARGE VENUES f SMOOTH, EVEN COVERAGE f THX® APPROVED

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
8320
Page 356

8320

8350

8340A

8340A
The 8340A Surround speaker is an unbeatable choice when very high power handling, high sensitivity, extended bass response and a remarkably compact cabinet are the requirements. The two-way 8340A’s proven reliability and performance have positioned it as the industry standard for the extended dynamic range required by today’s digital sound formats. At 19 pounds, installation is quick and painless.

8350
The 8350 Surround offers very high power handling, high sensitivity, and extended bass response required for the extended dynamic range required by today’s digital cinemas. The 8350 features a high power long-throw 250 mm (10 in) low frequency driver and a high frequency 38 mm (1.5 in) coil diameter compression driver.

The 8320 features a 200 mm (8 in) low frequency driver and a 25 mm (1 inch) soft dome driver combined with internal Thermomaster® technology allowing for 150 watts of power. The two-way 8320 reliability and performance postion this surround as the ideal low cost, compact choice for today’s digital theatre.

specifications
8320
FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESPONSE POWER CAPACITY 1 COVERAGE ANGLES (H x V) CROSSOVER FREQUENCY: SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE DRIVERS: LF HF DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (EACH)
50 Hz - 20 kHz (-10 dB) 65 Hz - 18 kHz (± 3 dB) 150 W 100° x 90° 3 kHz 94 dB 8 ohms 203 mm (8 in) 25 mm (1 in) 406 x 343 x 224 mm 16 x 13.5 x 8.8 in 5 kg (11 lb)

8340A
45 Hz - 18 kHz (-10 dB) 70 Hz - 16 kHz (± 3 dB) 250 W 100° x 80° 2.2 kHz 96 dB 8 ohms 254 mm (10 in) 25 mm (1 in) exit 457 x 457 x 260 mm 18 x 18 x 10.25 in 8.6 kg (19 lb)

8350
60 Hz - 19 kHz (-10 dB) 75 Hz - 17 kHz (± 3 dB) 350 W 100° x 80° 1.4 kHz 99 dB 8 ohms 254 mm (10 in) 25 mm (1 in) exit 457 x 457 x 260 mm 18 x 18 x 10.25 in 9.5 kg (21 lb) Mann Grauman’s Chinese Theatre; Hollywood, California

1 IEC filtered random noise (50 Hz - 5 kHz) with a crest factor (peak to average ratio) of 6 dB.

CINEMA LOUDSPEAKER SYSTEMS

Subwoofers
4645C

key features

f EXCEPTIONAL LOW FREQUENCY AUGMENTATION f APPROVED FOR THX® INSTALLATIONS

3635

Harman Pro Group | 2013

4181

Section:

07
4641 4642A

3635
When a small cinema and an equally small budget are the orders of the day, the JBL 3635 is the perfect choice. It features one 460 mm (18 in) transducer, an unobtrusive shallow enclosure (14 1⁄2"), true JBL performance and a surprising price.

4641
When a 600 Watt cinema system is what you need, the 4641 is the perfect choice for cost effective, low frequency augmentation. The 4641 features one 460 mm (18 in) JBL 2241 VGC™ (Vented Gap Cooling) low-frequency transducer. The 4641 is THX® approved.

4645C
Approved by THX®, the 4645C is the industry standard. The 4645C is a single 460 mm (18 in) direct radiator bass reflex subwoofer system featuring the 2242 SVG™ (Super Vented Gap) low-frequency transducer for highest output with lowest distortion. The 4645C is the choice whenever a premium performance single 460 mm (18 in) 800 Watt system is required for lowfrequency augmentation.

4181
The JBL 4181 system is a cost effective, 500 watt subwoofer system featuring an advanced technology 460 mm (18 in) low frequency transducer mounted in a direct radiator, bassreflex enclosure. It's Ideal for low frequency augmentation of digital sountracks.

4642A
The 4642A is a dual 460 mm (18 in) subwoofer system featuring two VGC (Vented Gap Cooling) 2241H low-frequency transducers. This high-performance, cost effective 1200 Watt system is ideal for lowfrequency augmentation when smooth response down to the lowest audible frequencies is required. An outstanding performer! The 4642A is THX® approved. Also available with grilles.

specifications
3635
FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB) FREQUENCY RESPONSE (± 3 dB) POWER CAPACITY CROSSOVER FREQUENCY SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE LF DRIVER(S) DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (EACH)
28 Hz - 500 Hz 38 Hz - 100 Hz 300 W 100 Hz 100 dB 8 ohms 2042H (18 in) 1168 x 651 x 368 mm 46 x 25.625 x 14.5 in 51 kg (113 lb)

4181
28 Hz - 500 Hz (no EQ) 40 Hz - 100 Hz (no EQ) 500 W 80 to 150 Hz 99 dB (40 - 100 Hz) 8 ohms 457 mm (18 in) 1100 x 640 x 450 mm 43.3 x 25.2 x 17.75 in 50 kg (109 lb)

4641
25 Hz - 500 Hz See individual spec sheet 600 W 80 to 150 Hz 97 dB (40 - 100 Hz) 8 ohms 2241H (18 in) 990.6 x 647.7 x 450 mm 39 x 25.5 x 17.75 in 60 kg (131 lb)

4642A
22 Hz - 500 Hz See individual spec sheet 1200 W 80 to 100 Hz 101 dB SPL 4 ohms 2 x 2241H (18 in) 762 x 1219 x 610 mm 30 x 48 x 24 in 98 kg (216 lb)

4645C
To 22 Hz (no EQ) See individual spec sheet 800 W 80 to 100 Hz 97 dB (40 - 100 Hz) 8 ohms 2242H (18 in) 990.6 x 647.7 x 450 mm 39 x 25.5 x 17.75 in 63 kg (138 lb)

Page 357

LOUDSPEAKER COMPONENTS

Cone Transducers & Compression Drivers
2226H/J

Manufacturing our own component transducers has historically set JBL apart from most other loudspeaker system manufacturers, and some of our numerous component transducers are available as sales models. All low-frequency units and compression drivers have been pre-qualified during the design phase with JBL's rigorous 100-hour 'torture test'. Units shown are legendary workhorses, often purchased in quantity for use in custom system designs.

2241H 2206H 2426H/J 2451H/J 2450H/J

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

VGC™ SERIES CONE TRANSDUCERS MODELS: 2206H, 2226H/J, 2241H
These low-frequency transducers incorporate JBL’s patented Vented Gap Cooling technology in an improved Symmetrical Field Geometry (SFG) magnet structure. JBL engineers optimized both magnet weight, flux density and field saturation resulting in a reduction of overall driver weight and a significant reduction in harmonic distortion.

25 mm - 1" EXIT COMPRESSION DRIVER (44 mm - 1 3⁄4" Diaphragm)
The JBL 2426H/J incorporates JBL’s titanium diamond diaphragm for ruggedness and outstanding frequency response.

49 mm - 2" EXIT COMPRESSION DRIVER

(100 mm - 4" Diaphragm)
The 2450H/J uses the optimized configuration of the Coherent Wave phasing plug design, offering coherent summation of acoustical power up to much higher frequencies than previous designs. It also incorporates a neodymium rare-earth magnet assembly that provides the equivalent electromechanical conversion efficiency at twothirds the size and one-third the weight required by previous large format compression driver designs.

38 mm - 11⁄2" EXIT COMPRESSION DRIVER

(100 mm - 4" Diaphragm)
The 38 mm exit on the 2451H/J compression driver allows the Coherent Wave™ phasing plug to directly couple with Optimized Aperture™ Bi-Radial® horns for lower distortion and better coverage control. The large format 100 mm (4 in) diaphragm design includes JBL’s exclusive three dimensional diamond pattern which increases the driver’s output in the 5 kHz to 20 kHz range when combined with the Coherent Wave phasing plug.

SVG™ SERIES CONE TRANSDUCERS Low-frequency Maximum Output Transducers MODEL: 2242H
The 2242H low-frequency transducer incorporates JBL’s patented Super Vented Gap™ technology for improvement in power handling capability while minimizing power compression.

Note: H version is 8 ohms impedance and J version is 16 ohms impedance.

specifications
2206H
NOMINAL DIAMETER RATED IMPEDANCE POWER CAPACITY SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB) HIGHEST CROSSOVER VOICE COIL DIAMETER VOICE COIL MATERIAL
300 mm (12 in) 8 ohms 600 W 1 95 dB SPL 2 45 Hz - 3.5 kHz 1500 Hz 102 mm (4 in) Edgewound aluminum ribbon 2.5% 7.8 kg (17.1 lb)

2226H/J
380 mm (15 in) 8 ohms (H); 16 ohms (J) 600 W 1 97 dB SPL 2 30 Hz - 2.5 kHz 1200 Hz 102 mm (4 in) Edgewound aluminum ribbon 3.3% 8.7 kg (19.25 lb)

2241H
460 mm (18 in) 8 ohms 600 W 1 98 dB SPL 2 30 Hz - 3 kHz 800 Hz 102 mm (4 in) Edgewound aluminum ribbon 2.9% 10.7 kg (23.5 lb)

2242H
460 mm (18 in) 8 ohms 800 W 1 99 dB SPL 2 25 Hz - 1.6 kHz 1.0 kHz 102 mm (4 in) Edgewound aluminum ribbon 4% 13.2 kg (29 lb)

2242H
1 AES standard (50 - 500 Hz) 2 Based on a swept 100 to 500 Hz signal. 3 Based on standard IEC 268-1 4 Based on a swept 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz signal.

HALF SPACE REFERENCE EFFICIENCY NET WEIGHT (each)

1 W is 2.83 V @ 8 ohms, 4.0V @ 16 ohms.

2426H/J
NOMINAL IMPEDANCE POWER CAPACITY 1 SENSITIVITY, 1 W, 1 m (Averaged) FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB) RECOMMENDED CROSSOVER DIAPHRAGM: SIZE MATERIAL VOICE COIL MATERIAL FLUX DENSITY DIMENSIONS: DIAMETER DEPTH NET WEIGHT (each)
8 ohms (H) 16 ohms (J) 70 W above 800 Hz 100 W above 1.2 kHz 110 dB 2 (1 kHz - 4 kHz) 500 Hz - 20 kHz 800 Hz or higher 44 mm (1 3⁄4 in) Pure titanium Aluminum ribbon 1.8 T (18,000 gauss) 149 mm (5.875 in) 104 mm (4.125 in) 4.3 kg (9.5 lb)

2451H/J
8 ohms (H) 16 ohms (J) 100 W above 500 Hz 150 W above 1 kHz 111 dB 2 (500 Hz - 2.5 kHz) 500 Hz - 20 kHz 500 Hz or higher 102 mm (4 in) Pure titanium Aluminum ribbon 1.9 T (19,000 gauss) 167 mm (6.6 in) 76 mm (3 in) 4.5 kg (10 lb)

2450H/J
8 ohms (H) 16 ohms (J) 100 W above 500 Hz 150 W above 1 kHz 111 dB 2 (2 kHz octave band) 500 Hz - 20 kHz 500 Hz or higher 102 mm (4 in) Pure titanium Aluminum ribbon 1.9 T (19,000 gauss) 167 mm (6.6 in) 139 mm (5.5 in) 4.8 kg (10.5 lb)

1 Continuous program power is defined as 3 dB greater than continuous

pink noise and is a conservative expression of the transducer’s ability to handle typical speech and music program material.

2 Sensitivity measured on a horn with a Q of 6.3.

Page 358

LOUDSPEAKER COMPONENTS

Horns
2382A 2370A 2509A

OPTIMIZED APERTURE™ MID-SIZE BI-RADIAL® HORN MODEL: 2352
The Optimized Aperture Mid-Size Bi-Radial Horn are designed to provide high sound pressure level at low distortion over the bandwidth of 630 Hz to beyond 18 kHz with very uniform horizontal and vertical coverage from an optimum size horn. Extensive modeling was used to optimize the coverage pattern, reducing both distortion and size. Constant horizontal and vertical coverage patterns provide easily predictable performance at any frequency or orientation. Cluster design is simplified and typical problems such as lobing and size are greatly reduced.

FLAT-FRONT BI-RADIAL® HORNS
MODELS: 2370A, 2380A, 2382A, 2385A
The Flat-Front Bi-Radial Horns are designed for flush cabinet mounting or compact cluster applications. The horns provide uniform on and off axis frequency response at the rated frequencies. The horn’s small vertical mouth dimension (just slightly larger than the compression driver used to drive the horn) allows very compact single and multiple horn/driver systems to be put together. Should vertical pattern control be required below 2 kHz, two or more horns may be stacked vertically to restore full Bi-Radial™ performance.

HORN/DRIVER MOUNTING SYSTEM
MODELS: 2509A
The 2509 Professional Mounting Bracket is designed to facilitate easy installations and quick adjustability in a variety of applications. It is manufactured of rugged 1⁄8" steel and finished in black matte. The 2509 Professional Mounting Bracket is not intended for suspension applications. The 2509A is a two piece system that allows aiming and rotation in three planes—vertical, horizontal and rotation around axis. The width of the mounting slots and an included adaptor gasket allow use with the 2350 Series and the 2380 Series.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

specifications
2352
THROAT SIZE ACCEPTS JBL DRIVERS NOMINAL DISPERSION DIRECTIVITY FACTOR (Q) (Averaged) DIRECTIVITY INDEX (DI) (Averaged) USABLE LOW FREQ. LIMIT MIN. RECOMMENDED CROSSOVER AXIAL PRESSURE SENSITIVITY 1 CONSTRUCTION MOUTH: HEIGHT WIDTH LENGTH NET WEIGHT (each)
38 mm (1 1⁄2 in) 2447H/J, 2451H/J 90° H x 40° V 13 (630 Hz - 20 kHz) 11 (630 Hz - 20 kHz) 500 Hz 500 Hz @ 18 dB/oct min. 112 dB Fiberglass reinforced plastic 457 mm (18 in) 559 mm (22 in) 254 mm (10 in) 2.2 kg (6 lb)

Section:

07

OPTIMIZED APERTURE™ MID-SIZE BI-RADIAL® HORN MODEL 2352

2370A
THROAT SIZE ACCEPTS JBL DRIVERS NOMINAL DISPERSION DIRECTIVITY FACTOR (Q) (Averaged) DIRECTIVITY INDEX (DI) (Averaged) USABLE LOW FREQ. LIMIT MIN. RECOM. CROSSOVER AXIAL PRESSURE SENSITIVITY 1 CONSTRUCTION MOUTH: HEIGHT WIDTH LENGTH NET WEIGHT (each)
25 mm (1 in) 2426H/J 90° H x 40° V 12.2 (1 kHz - 16 kHz) 10.9 (1 kHz - 16 kHz) 500 Hz 630 Hz 110 dB High density solid polyurethane 173 mm (6.81 in) 445 mm (17.5 in) 174 mm (6.84 in) 1.4 kg (3 lb)

2380A
49 mm (2 in) 2446H/J, 2450H/J, 2485J 90° H x 40° V 10.7 (1 kHz - 16 kHz) 10.3 (1 kHz - 16 kHz) 400 Hz 500 Hz 112 dB Molded structural foam 279 mm (11 in) 445 mm (17.5 in) 236 mm (9.28 in) 2.2 kg (6 lb)

2382A
49 mm (2 in) 2446H/J, 2450H/J, 2485J 120° H x 40° V 9 (630 Hz - 20 kHz) 7.9 (500 Hz - 16 kHz) 400 Hz 500 Hz 110 dB Molded structural foam 279 mm (11 in) 445 mm (17.5 in) 236 mm (9.28 in) 1.62 kg (3.5 lb)

2385A
49 mm (2 in) 2446H/J, 2450H/J, 2485J 60° H x 40° V 19 (1 kHz - 16 kHz) 12.8 (1 kHz - 16 kHz) 400 Hz 500 Hz 114 dB Molded structural foam 279 mm (11 in) 445 mm (17.5 in) 236 mm (9.28 in) 2.2 kg (6 lb)

1 Measured on axis in the far field with 1 watt input and referred to 1 meter distance calculated by inverse square law.

Listed sound pressure level represents an average from 1 kHz to 4 kHz.

Page 359

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
424_CATALOGO_HPRO_02.indd 1

Page 360

30/11/2012 16:58:50

PROFESSIONAL
LINE
Harman Pro Group | 2013

SUBWOOFERS MIDBASS WOOFERS COMPRESSION DRIVERS HORNS SUPER TWEETERS

Section:

07

Page 361

SUBWOOFER
LINE

FEATURES
•Recommended for use as a subwoofer in a bass reflex or horn loaded cabinets. Capabilities: High power handling, Large linear excursion. •Bandpass extension into the very low frequency zone. •High power output with low distortion. •Magnetic assembly was designed with Finite Element Analysis (FEA) for precise utilization and distribution of the magnetic field. •Double poly-cotton spider for precise centering and increased linear displacement of the cone & coil. •4” diameter spun laced fiberglass former withstands high temperatures and is mechanically strong. •Cone is reinforced with non pressed synthetic fibers that greatly improve mechanical stability during large excursions. •Fabric surround treated with rubberized materials for greater durability, better damping, and reduced standing waves. •Exclusive MCS™ - Multi Cooling System for high SPL with less power compression. •Die-cast Aluminum frame is durable and made to perform. •High strength structural adhesives combined with materials that have good thermal resistance increase durability and reliability.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
MODEL
Diameter RMS (W) Voice Coil Basket

18SWS1000

COOLING SYSTEM DETAIL SUSPENSION DETAIL

15SWS1100 15SWS1000
15” 8 1,100 2,200 95 35 to 3,500 37 4 (100)
Edge wound Al

15SWS800
15” 8 800 1,600 93 35 to 1,500 37 4 (100) 4 Layer Cu

18SWS1100 18SWS1000
18” 8 1,100 2,200 97 30 to 3,000 34 4 (100)
Edge wound Al

18SWS800
18” 8 800 1,600 95 30 to 1,500 32 (4) 100 4 Layer Cu

15” 8 1,000 2,000 95 38 to 2,000 36 4 (100) 4 Layer Al

18” 8 1,000 2,000 96 37 to 2,000 37 (4) 100 4 Layer Al

Impedance (Ω) Musical Program (W) SPL 1W @ 1m (dB) Frequency Resp. @ -10dB (Hz) Resonance (Hz) Voice Coil diameter in. (mm) Magnet Weight oz. (g)

120 (3,400) Die cast aluminum with epoxy finish

Page 362

MIDBASS
LINE

MB
12MB3P

•For midbass boxes that require high power handling, efficiency, high fidelity, and low distortion. •Extremely versatile these speakers can be used in two-way, three-way and line array systems. •Magnet structure was designed with Finite Element Software (FEA) so that the magnetic field was optimized and evenly distributed. The 12” model has a copper shorted turn on the pole piece to lower distortion and extended the upper frequency response. •Specially treated paper cone is reinforced with special fibers making it lighter, stronger and better sounding in the midbass. •Edge treated surrounds are either accordion or m-roll style to increase linearity during large excursions. Added advantages include the reduction of standing waves and improved acoustic coupling. •Efficient venting cools the voice coil which reduces power compression, increases reliability and raises maximum SPL. •Low profile die cast aluminum frame is easer to install in smaller, shallower and horn loaded enclosures. •High temperature structural adhesives form a material bond with high sheer strength greatly improving the durability and reliability of the product.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

10MB3P

W4P
•Recommended for use in systems that require flat frequency response with extended range from the midbass to the upper midrange. •An excellent choice when small unobtrusive speakers are called for in houses of worship, hotels, schools, clubs, restaurants and retail localizations. •Durable copper voice coil on Kapton® is large enough to handle a lot of power but light enough for extended frequency response. •Special resins are used to treat the long fiber paper cone increasing strength and improving sound quality. •Cloth (8”) and foam (6”) half roll surrounds are treated to improve stability during high excursions, increase acoustic coupling and help dampen standing waves. •Stamped steel epoxy coated frame is resistant to oxidation and won’t bend even under harsh conditions.

Section:

07

6W4P 8W4P

MODEL
Diameter Impedance (Ω) RMS (W) Musical Program (W)
Kapton® - Trademark Du Pont

8MB4P
8” 8 250 500 97 80 to 5,000 105 1.8 (47) 45 (1,280)

10MB3P
10” 8 300 600 100 150 to 12,000 80 3 (75) Kapton®/Aluminum 91 (2,570)

12MB3P
12” 8 500 1,000 101 90 to 4,000 61 2.4 (61) 93 (2,640)

6W4P
6” 8 100 200 91 80 to 9,000 76 1.3 (32) 20 (560)

8W4P
8” 8 150 300 96 100 to 6,500 107 1.8 (47) 44 (1,240)

SPL 1W @ 1m (dB) Frequency Resp. @ -10dB (Hz) Resonance (Hz) Voice Coil Diameter in.(mm) Voice Coil Magnet weight oz.(g) Frame Material

Kapton®/Copper Stamped steel epoxy finish

Die cast aluminum with epoxy finish

Page 363

WOOFER
LINE

WS 600
•Recommended for smaller low frequency cabinets where high power handling, seamless linearity and low distortion sound is required. •Ideal for touring and fixed installations. Recommended for use in sidefill and stage monitor speakers. •Magnet assembly design optimized by finite element software (FEA) to improve the control of the flux in the gap. •Double spiders control the alignment of the cone during high excursions. •4” diameter Copper voice coil on a high temperature Kapton® former for increased power handling and structural durability. •Composite cellulose cone that is reinforced with long synthetic fibers improves mechanical stiffness, damping, and reduces standing waves. •Efficient vented cooling system reduces power compression and improves efficiency. •High temperature structural adhesives permanently bonds components increasing durability and reliability.

15WS600

Section:

07

Frequency Resp. @ -10dB (Hz) Resonance (Hz) Voice Coil Diameter in. (mm) Magnet Weight oz.(g) Frame Material

45 to 3,000 46 4 (100) 94 (2,700)

40 to 3,500 35 4 (100) 94 (2,700)

35 to 3,000 33 4 (100) 94 (2,700)

Die cast aluminum with epoxy finish

Page 364

Kapton® - Trademark Du Pont

Harman Pro Group | 2013
18WS600

12WS600

MODEL
Diameter Impedance (Ω) RMS (W) Musical Program (W) SPL 1W @ 1m (dB)

12WS600
12” 8 600 1,200 95

15WS600
15” 8 600 1,200 97

18WS600
18” 8 600 1,200 98

PW
•Recommended for use in small and medium-size venues where high performance reproduction of the critical midrange frequencies are desired. •The right choice for two way loudspeakers that are used for sound reinforcement in auditoriums, ballrooms, nightclubs, and live music stages. •Precision wound copper voice coil is bonded to a Kapton® former and coated so that it holds it’s structural shape under high power conditions. •Paper cone reinforced with long fibers is specially treated to ensure faithful reproduction and tone in the voice band. •Accordion edge fabric surround is specially treated to reduce fatigue and lower distortion. •Aluminum dust cap dissipates heat from the voice coil improving power handling and reducing power compression. No aluminum dust cap on (8PW7, 10PW7, 12PW7, and 15PW7). •Mechanically strong and weather resistant epoxy coated stamped steel frame.

15PW6

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

8PW7

15PW7

MODEL
Diameter Impedance (Ω) RMS (W)
Kapton® - Trademark Du Pont

8PW7
8” 8 140 300 93 70 to 8,000 79 1.3 (32) 20 (560)

10PW7
10” 8 150 300 95 60 to 4,000 67 1.8 (46) 32 (920)

12PW7
12” 8 250 500 95 40 to 4,500 42 2.4 (60) 46 (1300)

15PW7
15” 8 300 600 97 40 to 4,500 43 2.4 (60) 46 (1300)

15PW6
15” 8 400 800 97 60 to 4,000 37 3 (75) 86 (2,440)

Musical Program (W) SPL 1W @ 1m (dB) Frequency Resp. @ -10dB (Hz) Resonance (Hz) Voice coil Diameter in.(mm) Magnet Weight oz. (g) Frame Material

Stamped steel with epoxy finish

Page 365

COMPRESSION DRIVER LINE
PHENOLIC
•Recommended for midrange applications in multi-way PA’s, stage monitors, side fills and high SPL car audio systems. •High sensitivity, low distortion and smooth response. •Precisely formed phenolic diaphragm produces high fidelity sound through out the midrange. •Diaphragm voice coil is bonded to Kapton™ with high temperature adhesives to increase durability and raise power handling. •”Phase Plug” is an acoustic transformer with optimized geometry to reduce phase cancellations. •Magnetic Fluid in the gap (models D305 and D405) helps center the coil, improves heat dissipation, and reduces distortion. •Quick change drop in diaphragm for easy repair.

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 366

D305

D250-X

D405

D200

Throat diameter impedance (Ω) RMS (W) Musical Program (W) SPL 1W @ 1m (dB) Frequency Resp. @ -10dB (Hz) Rec. a 12 dB/8ª (Hz) Voice coil diameter in(mm) Magnet weight oz.(g) Housing material Horn connection

MODEL

D200

100(2) 50(1) 100 200 107 107 500 to 7.000 400 to 9.000 500 500 51 51 290 332 Plastic Aluminum Screw on

1” 8

D250-X

D305

75(2) 100(2) 150 200 110 110 400 to 9.000 300 to 7.000 500 75 100 1.600 2.640 Plastic Bolt on

2” 8

D405

(1)Xover 1.200Hz 12dB/oct (2)Xover 2.000Hz 12dB/oct

COMPRESSION DRIVER LINE
TITANIUM
•Recommended for use in high performance compact, two-way, multi-way and line array systems. •For use in sound reinforcement, side fill and stage monitor loudspeakers. •World class drivers with excellent performance. •High sensitivity and linear frequency response. •Pure TITANIUM Diaphragm is accurately shaped to produce high frequencies with clarity. •Innovative IPF® - Impregnated Polymer Fiber (models D3300Ti, D3305Ti) diaphragm surround reduces ringing and makes the high frequencies more linear. •DPD® - Driver Protection Device protection circuit (models D3300Ti, D3305Ti), protects the compression driver by reducing the input power during clipping and overload conditions. Precisely designed “Phase Plug” is an acoustic transformer that helps prevent phase cancellations. •Copper shorting ring on the pole piece reduces the modulation of the magnetic field, lowers distortion and increases high frequency output. •Magnetic Fluid in the gap (models D408Ti, D3300Ti, and D3305Ti) lowers distortion, helps to center the voice coil and wicks away heat. •Repair of the driver is easy because the quick change diaphragm indexes to center and has a unique gold-plated contact system (models D3300Ti and D3305Ti).

D202Ti

Harman Pro Group | 2013

D220Ti

Section:

07

D3305Ti

D408Ti

Throat diameter Impedance (Ω) RMS (W) Musical Program (W) SPL 1W @ 1m (dB) Frequency Resp. @ -10dB (Hz) Rec. X-over, 12dB/oct min. (Hz) Voice coil diameter in (mm) Voice coil Magnet Weight oz.(g) Housing material Horn connection

MODEL

D220Ti OMF D3305Ti DPD D408Ti 2” 8 60¹ 80¹ 75² 125³ 120 160 150 250 106 109 108 111 1,000 to 20,000 1,000 to 21,000 500 to 20,000 400 to 20,000 1,500 800 1.7 (44) 4 (100) 3(75) Kapton®/CCAW Kapton®/CCAW edgewound 8 (210) 24 (675) 57(1,600) 93 (2,640) Plastic Screw on Screw on Bolt on
(1) Xover 2,000Hz 12dB/oct (2) Xover 800Hz 12dB/oct (3) Xover 1,200Hz 12dB/oct

D202Ti

D220Ti 1”

Kapton® - Trademark Du Pont

Page 367

NEODYMIUM / TITANIUM

NEODYMIUM / TITANIUM
•High performance drivers recommended for use in stage wedges, side fills, high output compact systems, multi-way PA’s and line arrays. •World class NEO driver, excellent performance. •High sensitivity, extended top end output and linear frequency response. •Neodymium magnet and the low carbon steel return structure optimally designed using finite element software (FEA). The rare-earth “NEO” magnet generates high force levels (BL) so the size and weight of the driver can be greatly reduced. •Copper shorted turn on the pole piece reduces the modulation of the magnetic field and lowers the inductance of the voice coil improving the high frequency output. •Pure titanium diaphragm is accurately formed with a sophisticated surface pattern that greatly improves the high frequency sound qualities. •Optimized geometry of the ¨Phase Plug¨ acoustically loads the diaphragm, reduces resonances and improves phase response. •Aluminum rear cover has heat sink fins to increase thermal dissipation.

Heat sink cover detail D2500Ti-Nd

07

Min. X-over Freq. 12dB/oct. (Hz) Voice Coil Diameter in. (mm) Voice Coil Magnet weight oz. (g) Housing material Horn connection

1,500 1.7 (44) Kapton®/CCAW 4 (115) Aluminum Screw on
(1) Xover 2,000Hz 12dB/oct (2) Xover 800Hz 12dB/oct

TWEETER/ HORN DRIVER

DRIVER TWEETER
•Recommended for use in the upper midband and higher in systems that require extended frequency response. A good choice for use in compact multi-purpose speakers. •Compact device with reliable performance and high efficiency. •1” (25mm) convex dome phenolic diaphragm. •CCAW - copper clad aluminum - Voice coil. •60º H x 60º V coverage angle with included HM11-25 screw on horn. •Repair is simple and easy.

DT150

Throat diameter Impedance (Ω) RMS (W) Musical Program (W) SPL 1W @ 1m (dB) Frequency Resp. @ -10dB (Hz) Min. X-over Freq. 12dB/oct. (Hz) Voice coil Diameter in. (mm) Magnet weight oz. (g) Housing material Horn connection

MODEL

1” 8 75¹ 150 108 1,500 to 15,000 4,000 1” (25) 10 (290) Plastic Screw on
1)Xover 4,000Hz 12dB/oct

DT150

Page 368

Kapton® - Trademark Du Pont

Section:

Harman Pro Group | 2013

MODEL
Throat diameter Impedance (Ω) RMS (W) Musical Program (W) SPL 1W @ 1m (dB) Frequency Resp. @ -10dB (Hz)

D2500Ti-Nd
1” 8 and 16 80(1) 160 111 1,000 to 22,000

LONG THROW

HORN
LINE

FEATURES
HL 14-25

•Ideal for sound reproduction in small, medium and largesize environments. •Several models available with different sound dispersion designed to fit almost any application. •Optimized to increase directivity which raises max SPL, and to improve loading of the driver which magnifies efficiency. •Designed to couple with Selenium drivers to produce high clarity sounds.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Sound dispersion HL 4750-SLF

Section:

07

HL 14-50N

MODEL
Throat Material Sound Dispersion HxV Low Frequency Limit. (Hz) Driver Connection Width in. (mm) Height in. (mm) Length in (mm)

HL 14-25
1” Plastic 45° x 45° 600 Screw on 6.1 (156) 6.1 (156) 10.1 (258)

HL 14-50N
2” Aluminum 45° x 45° 600 Bolt on 6.1 (176) 6.1 (165) 5.1 (134)

HL 4750-SLF
2” Fiberglass 40° x 20° 400 Bolt on 17.5 (445) 11 (280) 13.8 (352)

Page 369

MEDIUM THROW
HM17-25 Sound dispersion

HM3950-SLF

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
MODEL
Throat Material Sound Dispersion HxV Driver Connection Width in (mm) Height in (mm) Length in (mm)

HM25-25

HM11-25
1” Plastic 60° x 60° 1,200 Screw on 4.5 (115) 4.5 (115) 3 (75)

HM17-25
1” Plastic 60° x 40° 1,500 Screw on 6.3 (160) 5.7 (145) 4.1 (103)

HM25-25
1” Aluminum 90° x 60° 1,200 Screw on 10.8 (274) 6.5 (164) 5.9 (151)

HM3950-SLF
2”

HM4750-SLF
2”

Fiberglass 60° x 30° 400 Bolt on 15.3 (390) 8.1 (206) 9.2 (234) 90° x 40° 400 Bolt on 17.5 (445) 11.4 (290) 8.3 (210)

Low Frequency Limit (Hz)

SHORT THROW

Sound dispersion

HC23-25

MODEL
Throat Material Sound Dispersion H x V Low Frequency Limit. (Hz) Driver Connection Width in. (mm) Height in. (mm) Length in. (mm)

HC23-25
1” Plastic 100° x 40° 600 Screw on 10 (254) 5 (128) 5.7 (145)

Page 370

SUPER TWEETER
LINE

SUPER TWEETER FEATURES
LINE
ST350

ST350

•Ideal super tweeter when the reproduction of high frequencies must define the instruments. •Recommended for PA systems, stage monitors and most sound reinforcement systems in general. •Extremely high sensitivity and lower distortion. •The geometry of the magnetic circuit was optimized with Finite Element •Ideal super tweeter when the reproduction of high frequencies must Analysis (FEA) in order to efficiently utilize and distribute the magnetic define the gap. field in the instruments. •Recommended for PA systems, to hold it’s shape is key to the •The Phenolic diaphragms ability stage monitors and most sound reinforcement systems in high frequency sound. production of high fidelity,general. •Extremely high super tweeter is increased by •Durability of thesensitivity and lower distortion.using a high temperature •The coil that’s bonded to a Kapton® was optimized with Finite Element voice geometry of the magnetic circuitformer. Analysis (FEA) are bonded with highutilize and distribute theadhesives to •Components in order to efficiently temperature structural magnetic field in the gap. and improve reliability. increase durability •The Phenolic diaphragms ability to holdrepairs. is key to the •Easy diaphragm replacement for faster it’s shape production of high fidelity, high frequency sound. •Durability of the super tweeter is increased by using a high temperature voice coil that’s bonded to a Kapton® former. •Components are bonded with high temperature structural adhesives to increase durability and improve reliability. •Easy diaphragm replacement for faster repairs.

FEATURES

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

ST304

ST400BLK

ST304

ST400BLK

Page 371

SOUND DISPERSION

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
MODEL
Impedance (Ω) RMS (W) Musical Program (W) SPL 1W @ 1m (dB) Frequency Resp. @ -10dB (Hz) Voice Coil Diameter Sound Dispersion HxV Magnet weight Diaphragm Housing material 8 (220)

ST200
8 70(1) 140 105 1.8 (46) 40° x 40°

ST304
8 40(2) 80 106

ST350
8 100(2) 100(2) 111

ST400 BLK
8 150(2) 150(2) 111 1.7 (42)

2,000 to 20,000 3,500 to 18,000 2,500 to 20,000 3,000 to 20,000 120° x 40° 11 (320) Plastic
(1) Xover 5,000Hz 12dB/oct (2) Xover 8,000Hz 12dB/oct

40° x 40° 15 (430)

17 (470)

Phenolic

Page 372

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CSM-32 & CSM-21
CS SERIES PUBLIC ADDRESS MIXERS

Page 373

Sophisticated digital processing made accessible through a simple analog-style control interface
The CS Series CSM Public Address Mixers do not require a computer for configuration and make sophisticated digital processing available through simple controls on the devices themselves.

E Q U A L I Z AT I O N
Bass and Treble controls are available for the paging microphone and each Zone Output. These controls allow the sound of the microphone to be tailored independently from the sound in each of the zones. This helps ensure crystal clear intelligibility of paging announcements, without impacting the fidelity of
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

the music in the output zones.

A U T O WA R M T H ™
AutoWarmth helps maintain musical warmth at all operating levels by automatically adjusting the tonal balance within a zone based upon the zone output level. This helps prevent music from sounding thin at lower levels or excessively resonant at higher levels.

LEVELGUARD™
LevelGuard helps maintain optimum levels through the system by automatically applying the correct amount of compression to the source signals based upon the incoming level. Even with source material of different levels, customers experience consistency from the system.

07

SOURCE PRIORITY
There are cases where it is desirable for particular sources to have priority over other sources. Examples of such sources are jukeboxes, message repeaters or live DJ. After some simple configuration on the CSM, the sources will play into the zones as specified until a signal is present on the priority source. The CSM device will automatically fade over to the priority source until a signal is no longer present on the priority source. This means that, for an application with a background music source and a jukebox, no switching from the background music source is required as customers put money in the jukebox. The CSM device automatically fades over to the jukebox immediately as the song starts to play. After the jukebox playlist has finished, the CSM device automatically fades back over to the background music source.

S E C U R I T Y PA N E L
Once everything is set up exactly the way you like it, the included security plate can be placed over the controls in the center of the CSM device to avoid uninvited changes. This means that the system will consistently deliver the same high performance as the day it was commissioned.

Page 374

Enhance your business music system and transform your customer’s experience…
CSM-21 FRONT

1

2 4

3

6 5 7 9

8
10

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CSM-32 FRONT
1) SOURCE SELECT CONTROL
Allows selection among sources within a zone or assignment of source selection to a remote wall controller with source selection capability

5 ) L E V E L G U A R D TM THRESHOLD CONTROL
Allows adjustment of how much LevelGuardTM is applied to sources

8) MIC CONTROLS
BASS and TREBLE controls allow adjustment of microphone tonal balance

Section:

07

9) DUCKING CONTROLS 6) MIC MINIMUM
Allows a minimum microphone level to be configured within a zone to avoid paging messages being turned down completely TRIGGER SENSITIVITY control allows adjustment of when music level is reduced during paging DUCKING DEPTH control allows adjustment of when music level is reduced during paging

2) VOLUME LEVEL CONTROL
Allows control of volume level within a zone or volume level limiting, when used in conjunction with a remote wall controller with volume level capability

7) ZONE CONTROLS
BASS and TREBLE controls allow adjustment of tonal balance to meet the requirements of a physical space STEREO/MONO switch allows zone to be run in stereo or mono SOURCE 1 PRIORITY switch enables/disables the priority of Source 1

10) POWER SWITCH
Allows CSM device to be turned on and off from the front panel

3) MIC LEVEL CONTROL
Allows control of microphone level within a zone

4 ) L E V E L G U A R D TM L E D
Indicates the application of LevelGuardTM on a source

Page 375

CSM-21 REAR

1

2

6 3 4 5
12 13

8 7

9

13

10

11

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 376

CSM-32 REAR
1) POWER CONNECTOR
For use with included CSM power supply

6) MUSIC MUTE
Allows source inputs to be muted by a contact closure

10) LINK PORTS
Allow multiple CSM devices to be linked to increase the number of output zones, Linking CSM devices shares sources from the main device and eliminates the requirement for Y-cables

2 ) F I R M WA R E U P D AT E P O R T
USB port for firmware updates

7) DIRECT INPUT
An input routed to all zones for ‘all-call’ purposes GAIN contol allows adjustment for DIRECT INPUT

3) ZONE OUTPUTS
Stereo or mono operation Connect to CS Series CSA Amplifiers and CSS Loudspeakers. Active crossover for subwoofer with dedicated output

11) MICROPHONE INPUT SECTION
Balanced microphone input GAIN control allows adjustment of microphone level SIGNAL / CLIP LED provides guidance for GAIN control adjustment and general monitoring

8) PRIORITY HOLD
Adjusts the time taken to fade back to the normal input source after the priority source stops

4 ) A U T O WA R M T H T M C O N T R O L S
Ensures full fidelity at all volume levels LED provides guidance for setup

9) INPUT SECTION
Left and Right RCA inputs GAIN control allows adjustment of source levels for consistency among sources SIGNAL / CLIP LED provides guidance for GAIN contol adjustment and general monitoring

12) ISO AUX OUT
Transformer-isolated output for musicon-hold systems or additional musiconly mono output AUX LEVEL control allows adjustment of transformer-isolated output

5) ZONE REMOTE PORTS
Allow connection of remote wall plates via inexpensive Cat. 5 cable for source selection and/or volume control within zones

1 3 ) PA G E A S S I G N
Routes pages to the desired zone(s) by contact closures

JBL Commercial CS Series Public Address Mixers
The CS Series CSM Public Address Mixers represent affordable, professional business music processing solutions for simple background music and paging applications. The mixers can be configured for a range of uses such as paging, background music, and security applications, do not require a computer for configuration and are designed with simple analog-style controls. An included security plate can be placed over the controls to avoid uninvited changes to a commissioned system. Three wall controllers are available for the CSM devices, which offer volume control and source selection from convenient remote locations. Further information about the CS Series family of products, including the CSA Amplifiers and the CSS Loudspeakers, can be found at www.jblcommercialproducts.com

STEREO SOURCE INPUTS

PAGING MICROPHONE INPUT

DIRECT INPUT

STEREO ZONE OUTPUTS

DEDICATED SUBWOOFER OUTPUT

MUSIC-ON-HOLD OUTPUT

STEREO / MONO OPERATION

MUSIC MUTE

PAGE ASSIGN

Harman Pro Group | 2013

CSM-21 CSM-32

2 3

Q Q

Q Q

1 2

Q Q Q

Q Q

Q Q

Q Q

ACCESSORIES
U N I T E D S TAT E S

• 1-Zone Paging Microphone • Push to Talk Button

CSPM-1

Section:

07

• 2-Zone Paging Microphone • 2 Zone Select Buttons • Push to Talk Button • Available in US or EU Form Factor • Available in Black or White Color • Volume Control • Source Selection (2 Sources) • RJ-45 / Cat. 5 Connection • Up to 1000’ (305m) from CSM device

CSPM-2

• Available in US or EU Form Factor • Available in Black or White Color • Volume Control • RJ-45 / Cat. 5 Connection • Up to 1000’ (305m) from CSM device

CSR-V

CSR-2SV

• Available in US or EU Form Factor • Available in Black or White Color • Volume Control • Source Selection (3 Sources) • RJ-45 / Cat. 5 Connection • Up to 1000’ (305m) from CSM device

CSR-3SV

EUROPEAN

• 4-Zone Paging Microphone • 4 Zone Select Buttons • Push to Talk Button

CSPM-4

Page 377

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

8760 South Sandy Parkway Sandy, Utah 84070 801.566.8800

Page 378

Product Index
Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10MB3P 10PW7 12MB3P 12PW7 12WS600 15PW6 15PW7 15SWS1000 15SWS1100 15SWS800 15WS600 18SWS1000 18SWS1100 18SWS800 18WS600 2166H 2206H 2226H/J 2241H 2242H 2250H 2255H 2269H 2352 2370A 2380A 2382A 2385A 2426H/J 2435H 2450H/J 2451H/J 2452H-SL 2509A 3252N 3635 3677 3722/3722N 3730 3731[T] 3732[T] 3739 4181 4641 4642A 4645C 363 364 363 365 364 365 365 362 362 362 364 362 362 362 364 302 358 358 358 358 304 304 302 359 359 359 359 359 358 304 358 358 312 359 354 357 354 352 353 353 353 353 357 357 357 357 Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4722/4722N 352 4732[T] 353 4739 353 5641 353 5674 354 5732 351 5742 351 6W4P 363 8124 341 341 8128 8138 341 8320 356 8340A 356 8350 356 8MB4P 363 8PW7 365 8W4P 363 AC15 324 AC16 324 AC18/26 324 AC18/95 324 AC2212/00, 64 & 95 322 AC2215/00, 64 & 95 322 AC25 324 AC26 324 AC28/26 324 AC28/95 324 AL7115 322 AM5212/64-66-95-00-26 322 AM5215/64-66-95-26 322 AM7200/64-95 321 AM7212/64-66-95-00-26 322 AM7215/64-66-95-26 322 AM7315/64-95 321 ASB4128 323 ASB6112 323 ASB6115 323 ASB6118 323 ASB6125 323 ASB6128 323 ASB6128V 323 ASB7118 323 ASB7128 323 ASH6118 323 AW266 325 AW295 325 Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page AW526 325 AW566 325 AW595 325 AWC129 327 AWC82 327 C2PM 349 C2PS 349 CBT 100LA-1 329 CBT 50LA-1 329 CBT 70J-1 329 CBT 70JE-1 329 CBT Software 329 CBT200LA-1 329 349 Control 1 Pro Control 126W/126WT 336 Control 128W/128WT 336 Control 19CS/19CST 340 Control 226C/T 338 Control 227C 338 Control 227CT 338 Control 23/23T 333 Control 24C/24CT 340 Control 24C/24CT Micro 340 Control 24CT Micro Plus 340 Control 25/25T 333 Control 25AV 333 Control 25AV-LS 333 Control 26-DT 340 Control 26C/26CT/26CT-LS 340 Control 28/28T-60 333 Control 29AV-1 333 Control 2P 349 Control 30 333 Control 312CS 337 Control 321C/CT 337 Control 322 C/CT 337 Control 328C/CT 337 Control 40CS/T 339 Control 42C 339 Control 47C/T 339 Control 47HC 339 Control 47LP Control 5 Control 50PACK Control 50S/T Control 52 339 349 332 332 332

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Page 379

379

Product Index
Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Control 62P Control 65P/T Control 67HC/T Control 67P/T Control CRV Control SB-2 Control SB210 CSM-21 CSM-32 CSPM-1 CSPM-2 CSPM-4 CSR–25V CSR–35V CSR-V CSS Accessories CSS-1S/T CSS8004 CSS8008 CSS8018 D200 D202Ti D220Ti D220Ti OMF D2430K D250-X D2500Ti-Nd D305 D3305Ti DPD D405 D408Ti DPDA Input Module DT150 EON305 EON315 EON510 EON515XT EON518S G28 HC23-25 HL 14-25 HL 14-50N HL 4750-SLF HM11-25 HM17-25 HM25-25 331 331 331 331 334 334 334 373 373 377 377 377 377 377 377 342 342 342 342 342 366 367 367 367 302, 308, 350 366 368 366 367 366 367 311 368 289 289 288 288 288 309 370 369 369 369 370 370 370 Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page HM3950-SLF HM4750-SLF JRX112M JRX115 JRX118S/118SP JRX125 LSR2310SP LSR2325P LSR2328P LSR4300 Accessories LSR4312SP LSR4326P LSR4328P LSR6312SP LSR6325P-1 LSR6328P LSR6332 M2 MD1 MD2 MD3 MD46 MD49 MD52 MD55 MD7 MSCI MTC-19MR MTC-19NC MTC-200BB6 MTC-200BB8 MTC-2P MTC-300BB12 MTC-300BB8 MTC-300SG12 MTC-300T150 MTC-30MK-WH MTC-48TRx12 MTC-8124C MTC-8128C MTC-81BB8 MTC-81TB8 MTC-81TB8 MTC-BB4x6: MTC-BB8x6 MTC-CBT-FM1 370 370 293 293 293 293 348 348 348 347 347 347 347 346 346 346 346 344 314 314 314 314 314 314 314 314 348 338 338 338 338 349 337 337 337 337 334 340 341 341 341 341 341 342 342 329 Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page MTC-CBT-FM2 MTC-CBT-SMB1 MTC-CM Series MTC-H Series MTC-PC2 MTC-RAIL MTC-RG6/8 MTC-SB2 Series MTC-SG6/8 MTC-SSG MTC-TB6/8 MTC-TR4/8x12 MTC-UB MTC-V Series MTC-WMG MTC-xxMR MTC-xxNC MTC-xxTR PD5122 PD5125 PD5200/43, 64 & 95 PD5212/43, 64 & 95 PD5322/43, 64 & 95 PD743 PD764 PMB-BK/-WH PRX412M PRX415M PRX418 PRX425 PRX612M PRX615M PRX618S PRX618S-XLF PRX625 PRX635 S28 SCS 12 SCS 8 SS3-BK SS4-BK ST200 ST304 ST350 ST400 BLK STX812M 329 329 334 334 334 341 338 334 337 334 337 342 334 334 334 340 340 340 317 317 317 317 317 316 316 334 295 295 295 295 291 291 291 291 291 291 309 355 355 291 298 372 372 372 372 297

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013 380

Page 380

Product Index
Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page STX815M . . . . STX818S . . . . . STX825 . . . . . . STX828S . . . . . STX835 . . . . . . V25 . . . . . . . . VLA301 . . . . . VLA301H . . . . VLA601 . . . . . VLA601H . . . . VLA901 . . . . . VLA901H . . . . VP7210/95DP . VP7212/64DP . VP7212/95DP . VP7212/95DPC . VP7212MDP . . VP7215/64DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 297 297 297 297 309 315 315 315 315 315 315 312 312 312 312 312 312 Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page VP7215/95DP . . VP7215/95DPC . . VP7315/64DP . . VPSB7118DP . . . VRX915M . . . . . VRX915S . . . . . . VRX915S-WH . . . VRX918S . . . . . . VRX918S-WH . . . VRX918SP . . . . . VRX928LA . . . . . VRX928LA-WH . . VRX932LA-1 . . . VRX932LA-1/WH . VRX932LAP . . . . VT Accessories . . VT4880 . . . . . . . VT4880A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 312 312 312 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 305 304 304 Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page VT4880ADP-DA VT4881A . . . . . VT4881ADP-DA VT4882 . . . . . . VT4882DP-DA . VT4883 . . . . . . VT4886 . . . . . . VT4887A . . . . . VT4887ADP-DA VT4888 . . . . . . VT4888ADP-DA VT4889-1 . . . . VT4889ADP-DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 304 307 304 307 304 304 304 307 304 307 304 307

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

JBL AUDIO ENGINEERING FOR SOUND REINFORCEMENT
by John Eargle and Chris Foreman
This book comprehensively covers all aspects of speech and music sound reinforcement. It is divided into four sections: Section 1 provides the tutorial fundamentals that all audio engineers will need, discussing subjects such as fundamentals of acoustics, psychoacoustics, basic electrical theory and digital processing. Section 2 deals with the fundamental classes of hardware that the modern engineer will use, such as loudspeaker systems and components, microphones, mixers, amplifiers and signal processors. Special attention is given to digital techniques for system control and to audio signal analysis. Section 3 deals with the basics of system design, from concept to final realization. It covers topics such as basic system type and speech intelligibility, site survey, user needs analysis and project management. Section 4 discusses individual design areas, such as sports facilities, large-scale tour sound systems, high-level music playback, systems for the theater, religious facilities, and other meeting spaces. The book is written in an accessible style, but does not lack for ample amounts of technical information. JBL and HPro brand products are prominently featured as examples to illustrate the principles and applications. Available at bookstores and on line.

Page 381

381

Section:

07

Harman Pro Group | 2013

JBL LIMITED WARRANTY
The JBL Warranty on professional loudspeaker products (except for enclosures) remains in effect for five years from the date of the first consumer purchase. JBL amplifiers are warranted for three years from the date of the original purchase. Enclosures and all other JBL products are warranted for two years from the date of the original purchase. Your JBL Warranty protects the original owner and all subsequent owners as long as: A.) Your JBL product has been purchased in the Continental United States, Hawaii or Alaska. (This Warranty does not apply to JBL products purchased elsewhere except for purchases by military outlets. Other purchasers should contact the local JBL distributor for warranty information.) and B.) The original dated bill of sale is presented whenever warranty service is required. Except as specified below, your JBL Warranty covers all defects in material and workmanship. The following are not covered: Damage caused by accident, misuse, abuse, product modification or neglect; damage occurring during shipment; damage resulting from failure to follow instructions contained in your Instruction Manual; damage resulting from the performance of repairs by someone not authorized by JBL; claims based upon any misrepresentations by the seller; any JBL product on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed. JBL will pay all labor and material expenses for all repairs covered by this warranty.

JBL continually engages in research related to product improvement. New materials, production methods and design refinements are introduced into existing products without notice as a routine expression of that philosophy. For this reason, any current JBL product may differ in some respect from its published description but will always equal or exceed the original design specifications unless otherwise stated.

Telephone Domestic Sales Fax International Sales Fax Customer Service Fax

(818) 894-8850 (818) 830-7801 (818) 830-7802 (818) 830-7881

JBL Professional 8500 Balboa Boulevard Northridge, CA 91329 USA Visit us online at www.jblpro.com

Page 382

RECORDING INTERFACES REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS

PRODUCT GUIDE 2013
Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

08

Page 383

LEXICON

PRODUCT GUIDE

Touchstone Heritage
Lexicon® occupies a unique position as a leading innovator in both professional and consumer audio industries. Since the release of the first digital reverb in 1971, Lexicon has stood at the forefront of digital audio with a reputation as a manufacturer of exceptional professional audio and home theater products and an inventor of new technologies. Years of research, development, and experience allow us to continue expanding the boundaries of the listening experience. Our professional products are prominent in the creation of worldwide music, television and film productions. These products have won numerous awards, including an Emmy® and numerous TEC awards, most recently a TEC Hall of Fame award for the Lexicon Delta T-101, the world’s first digital delay. Lexicon processors have been embraced as the standard in professional signal processing since the introduction of the 480L Digital Effects Processor, which has retained tremendous popularity for the past 22 years. It has since been replaced as the standard in professional signal processing by the 960L Multi-channel Digital Effects System, which has itself garnered an impressive following of producers, artists, and engineers. Growing demand for proprietary Lexicon technologies has led to its appearance in numerous applications – with dramatic results. Our processing is relied upon to enhance the sound of prestigious live halls and venues. Our critically acclaimed LOGIC7® technologies have been successfully incorporated in several world-renowned automobiles, including select

Section:

08

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 384

models from BMW® and Mercedes®. LOGIC7 technologies have also been licensed to other audio companies such as harman/ kardon® and AKG®. Knowingly or unknowingly – you experience Lexicon products and technologies on a daily basis. Chances are that Lexicon processing was involved in the television program you watch at home, the film you see at the cinema, or the song you listen to on the radio. From the initial tracks to your listening room or automobile, Lexicon is part of the process that brings these recordings to life. Our commitment to the audio professional and content delivery ensures an unbroken chain between the artist and the audience. Now hear this…

PRODUCT GUIDE

LEXICON

Section:

08
Content
RECORDING INTERFACES
I•O USB 2.0 DESKTOP USB I•O FIREWIRE

Harman Pro Group | 2013

REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS
MX SERIES PCM SERIES MPX NATIVE PLUG-IN LXP NATIVE PLUG-INS PCM NATIVE PLUG-INS

Page 385

USB 2.0 04

RECORDING INTERFACES

Take Your Recording Studio. To The Next Level.

Section:

08
RECORDING INTERFACE STUDIOS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

A complete recording solution in a small, streamlined package. Each recording interface is a hardware mixer that connects to your DAW via FireWire or USB, each with it’s own I/O configuration to fit your personal needs. Front panel controls let you adjust Direct/Playback mix and input levels, toggle monitoring between stereo and mono, plug in an instrument directly and monitor with headphones. Also included is a software suite that has all the tools necessary to complete your mix and compete with the major labels.

Page 386

R E R E CRO RI D IG GN ITN T E R F A C E S S CO D N N I ERFACESS

UU S B 205 SB .0

I•O 42
Brilliantly designed to fit between your keyboard and monitor, the I·O U42S features dbx® 60V high-voltage ultra-low noise microphone preamps on every channel to provide professional recordings that keep your music sounding its best. The preamps run on a 60V supply to guarantee stability and provide you optimal headroom and extremely low distortion. Ultra high-definition converters ensure pristine 24-bit/96kHz audio to capture every subtle detail of your performance. Bundled with Lexicon’s own Pantheon™ II VST/AU reverb plug-in, Cubase® LE recording software, and Toontrack® EZDrummer™ Lite, XILS3 SE, the I·O 42 provides all the tools you need to create professional quality recordings without sacrificing your desktop.

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Headphone level control knobs USB to your computer

Input gain level control knobs

Stereo monitor selector switch

Input level LEDs

Main Output level control knob

Monitor mix level control knob 2 separate +48V Phantom Power switches

MIDI In/Out

S/PDIF In/Out

Stereo main outputs

4 XLR and ¼” combi-jack balanced mic/line inputs

Section:

08
High output headphone jacks

Hi-Z Instrument Inputs

22

42

82

Pro Tools® 9 & 10 Compatible Combi-jack Analog Inputs Simult. Recording Sources dbx® 60V Mic Preamps Hi-Z Instrument Inputs S/PDIF MIDI I/O Headphone Connections ¼” TRS Analog Outputs

Yes 2 2 2 1 No Yes 1 2

Yes 4 6 4 2 Yes Yes 2 2

Yes 8 10 8 2 Yes Yes 2 2

Page 387

USB 2.0

RECORDING INTERFACES

I•O 82
Say hello to the big brother of the I·O Desktop Series. In addition to all the features found on the I·O 42 we’ve added just a few inches to the sides and doubled your inputs! Now you’ve got eight ¼" TRS or XLR combi-jacks, all equipped with dbx® 60V high-voltage, ultra-low noise mic preamp’s. You still have S/PDIF digital I/O to sync up some of your other high-end gear, plus MIDI capabilities, 2 seperate headphone amps and all the front panel controls to stay on top of your mix. The I·O 82 has all the I/O you need to record drums or your band without sacrificing any more of your desktop. Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

08

I•O 22
With the I·O 22 we’ve made no compromise in quality, it simply takes up less room between your keyboard and monitor, which is typically unused dead space. Equipped with one side panel instrument input and two dbx® 60V high-voltage, ultra-low noise microphone preamps that are accessed via rear panel combi-jacks. The I·O 22 is a great fit for songwriting and home recording so compact you’ll want to take it everywhere you go. If you get a moment of inspiration and want to capture something new, or you’re a producer on the run, then the I·O 22 has all the tools you need for high-quality recording without all the hassle.

Page 388

RECORDING INTERFACESS

USB 2.0

I•O™ 82 Specifications
MICROPHONE INPUTS Connectors (8) Female XLR Pin 2 Hot Impedance 3k Ohms balanced Phantom Power +48 Volts Max Gain +58 dB -125 dB @ 58 dB gain typical EIN (150Ω source) -128 dB @ 58 dB gain typical A-weighted Max Input Level +20 dBu Frequency Response +/−1.0 dB, 20Hz - 20kHz THD+N <0.01%, 20Hz - 20kHz, +4dBu output (mic input to main output) <0.008%, 1kHz, +4 dBu (mic input to main output) LINE INPUTS Connectors

I•O™ 42 Specifications
MICROPHONE INPUTS Connectors (4) Female XLR Pin 2 Hot Impedance 3k Ohms balanced Phantom Power +48 Volts Max Gain +58 dB EIN (150Ω source) -125 dB @ 58 dB gain typical -128 dB @ 58 dB gain typical A-weighted Max Input Level +20 dBu Frequency Response +/−1.0 dB, 20Hz - 20kHz THD+N <0.01%, 20Hz - 20kHz, +4dBu output (mic input to main output) <0.008%, 1kHz, +4 dBu (mic input to main output) LINE INPUTS Connectors

I•O™ 22 Specifications
MICROPHONE INPUTS Connectors (2) Female XLR Pin 2 Hot Impedance 3k Ohms balanced Phantom Power +48 Volts Max Gain +58 dB EIN (150Ω source) -125 dB @ 58 dB gain typical -128 dB @ 58 dB gain typical A-weighted Max Input Level +20 dBu Frequency Response +/−1.0 dB, 20Hz - 20kHz THD+N <0.01%, 20Hz - 20kHz, +4dBu output (mic input to main output) <0.008%, 1kHz, +4 dBu (mic input to main output)

Harman Pro Group | 2013

(8) ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced Impedance 20k Ohms balanced 13k Ohms unbalanced Max Input Level +32 dBu Frequency Response +0/−1.0 dB, 20Hz - 20kHz THD+N <0.015%, 20Hz - 20kHz, +4dBu (line in to main out) <0.005%, 1kHz, +4 dBu

(4) ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced Impedance 20k Ohms balanced 13k Ohms unbalanced Max Input Level +32 dBu Frequency Response +0/−1.0 dB, 20Hz - 20kHz THD+N <0.015%, 20Hz - 20kHz, +4dBu (line in to main out) <0.005%, 1kHz, +4 dBu INSTRUMENT INPUT Connectors Impedance Max Input Level Frequency Response THD+N

LINE INPUTS Connectors

(2) ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced Impedance 20k Ohms balanced 13k Ohms unbalanced Max Input Level +32 dBu Frequency Response +0/−1.0 dB, 20Hz - 20kHz THD+N <0.015%, 20Hz - 20kHz, +4dBu (line in to main out) <0.005%, 1kHz, +4 dBu INSTRUMENT INPUT Connectors Impedance Max Input Level Frequency Response THD+N

INSTRUMENT INPUT Connectors Impedance Max Input Level Frequency Response THD+N

(2) ¼" TS unbalanced 1M Ohms +13 dBu +0/−1.0 dB, 20Hz - 20kHz <0.05%, 20Hz - 20kHz, +4 dBu (instrument in to main out) <0.007%, 1kHz, +4dBu

(2) ¼" TS unbalanced 1M Ohms +13 dBu +0/−1.0 dB, 20Hz - 20kHz <0.05%, 20Hz - 20kHz, +4 dBu (instrument in to main out) <0.007%, 1kHz, +4dBu

(1) ¼" TS unbalanced 1M Ohms +13 dBu +0/−1.0 dB, 20Hz - 20kHz <0.05%, 20Hz - 20kHz, +4 dBu (instrument in to main out) <0.007%, 1kHz, +4dBu

Section:

08

LINE OUTPUTS Connectors Level Impedance Headphone Output

(2) ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced >+18 dBu maximum 32 Ohms bal, 16 Ohms unbal. (2) ¼" stereo jack 350mW per channel @ 50 Ohms

LINE OUTPUTS Connectors Level Impedance Headphone Output

(2) ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced >+18 dBu maximum 32 Ohms bal, 16 Ohms unbal. (2) ¼" stereo jack 350mW per channel @ 50 Ohms

LINE OUTPUTS Connectors Level Impedance Headphone Output

(2) ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced >+18 dBu maximum 32 Ohms bal, 16 Ohms unbal. (1) ¼" stereo jack 350mW per channel @ 50 Ohms

DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT Connectors Dual RCA phono Format S/PDIF 24-bit D/A - A/D Sample Rate 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, or 96kHz determined by DAW DYNAMIC RANGE 20Hz-20kHz A/D (24-Bit) 102 dB typical, A-weighted D/A (24 Bit) 106 dB typical, A-weighted A/D/A (24 Bit) 101 dB typical, A-weighted CONTROL INTERFACE USB Version 2.0, Type B socket; MIDI In/Out 5-pin DIN GENERAL Power Size (W/H/D) Weight

DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT Connectors Dual RCA phono Format S/PDIF 24-bit D/A - A/D Sample Rate 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, or 96kHz determined by DAW DYNAMIC RANGE 20Hz-20kHz A/D (24-Bit) 102 dB typical, A-weighted D/A (24 Bit) 106 dB typical, A-weighted A/D/A (24 Bit) 101 dB typical, A-weighted CONTROL INTERFACE USB Version 2.0, Type B socket; MIDI In/Out 5-pin DIN GENERAL Power Size (W/H/D) Weight

DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT Connectors N/A Format N/A D/A - A/D Sample Rate 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, or 96kHz determined by DAW DYNAMIC RANGE 20Hz-20kHz A/D (24-Bit) 102 dB typical, A-weighted D/A (24 Bit) 106 dB typical, A-weighted A/D/A (24 Bit) 101 dB typical, A-weighted CONTROL INTERFACE USB Version 2.0, Type B socket; MIDI In/Out 5-pin DIN GENERAL Power Size (W/H/D) Weight

Power adaptors available for 100–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 24 Watts 18" W x 4.25" H x 4" D (46cm x 11cm x 10cm) Packaged approx. 6 lbs. Unit alone approx. 4 lbs.

Power adaptors available for 100–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 18 Watts 15” W x 4.25” H x 4” D (38cm x 11cm x 10cm) Packaged approx. 5 lbs. Unit alone approx. 3.1 lbs.

Power adaptors available for 100–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 12 Watts 12” W x 4.25” H x 4” D (31cm x 11cm x 10cm) Packaged approx. 3.5 lbs. Unit alone approx. 2.5 lbs.

All specifications subject to change

Page 389

USB

RECORDING INTERFACES

Alpha
The smallest and simplest of the three, the Alpha Studio™ is perfect for solo artists. The Alpha is USBpowered so you can record anywhere you take your laptop. Alpha also features a ¹⁄8” headphone monitoring jack and two unbalanced RCA line level outputs (in addition to its ¼” balanced/unbalanced outputs). Alpha, Lambda and Omega all come packaged with a software suite that includes Lexicon’s own Pantheon VST reverb

Lambda
With four inputs and two outputs, Lambda is the perfect medium. The Lambda Studio™ can record two tracks at once, and features phantom power for condenser mics, MIDI In/Out, and a ¹⁄8” headphone monitoring jack. Lambda is USB-powered, so it works wherever you and your computer happen to go.

plug-in and Cubase® LE. Harman Pro Group | 2013
Section:

08

Omega
The heavy hitter of the three, the Omega Studio™ features eight inputs and can record up to four tracks at once. Omega is also the only unit in the family that includes S/PDIF digital I/O as well as the standard TRS and XLR. Phantom power is available for condenser mics and Omega is powered with an included AC power adaptor.
Now you can record high quality audio with your iPadTM and the Lexicon Omega.

Page 390

RECORDING INTERFACESS

USB

Omega Studio™ Specifications
MICROPHONE INPUTS Connectors Two female XLR Pin 2 Hot Impedance 600 Ohms balanced Phantom Power +48 Volt DC Gain +50 dB EIN (150Ω source) -120 dB A-weighted @ 50 dB gain Frequency Response +0, –0.2 dB 20 Hz - 20kHz, ref. 1kHz THD+N <.005%, 20Hz - 20kHz INSERT INPUTS Connectors

Lambda Studio™ Specifications Alpha Studio™ Specifications
MICROPHONE INPUTS Connectors Two female XLR Pin 2 Hot Impedance 600 Ohms balanced Phantom Power +48 Volt DC Gain +44 dB EIN (150Ω source) -120 dB A-weighted @ 44 dB gain Frequency Response +0, –0.5 dB 20 Hz - 20kHz, ref. 1kHz THD+N <.005%, 20Hz - 20kHz INSERT INPUTS Connectors MICROPHONE INPUTS Connectors One female XLR Pin 2 Hot Impedance 600 Ohms balanced Phantom Power N/A Gain +44 dB EIN (150Ω source) -115 dB A-weighted @ 50 dB gain Frequency Response +0, –0.5 dB 20 Hz - 20kHz, ref. 1kHz THD+N <.005%, 20Hz - 20kHz INSERT INPUTS Connectors

Two ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced Send Level (tip) +19 dBu maximum Max Rtrn Level (ring) +19 dBu maximum LINE INPUTS Connectors

Two ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced Send Level (tip) +19 dBu maximum Max Rtrn Level (ring) +19 dBu maximum LINE INPUTS Connectors

N/A

Send Level (tip) N/A Max Rtrn Level (ring) N/A LINE INPUTS Connectors

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Four ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced Impedance 20k Ohms balanced 10k Ohms unbalanced Max Input Level +22 dBu Frequency Response +0, –0.2 dB 20 Hz - 20kHz, ref. 1kHz THD+N <.009% A/D, 20Hz - 20kHz INSTRUMENT INPUT Connectors Impedance Max Input Level Frequency Response THD+N Crosstalk

Two ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced Impedance 20k Ohms balanced 10k Ohms unbalanced Max Input Level +13 dBu Frequency Response +0, –0.5 dB 20 Hz - 20kHz, ref. 1kHz THD+N <.009% A/D, 20Hz - 20kHz INSTRUMENT INPUT Connectors Impedance Max Input Level Frequency Response THD+N Crosstalk

Two ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced Impedance 20k Ohms balanced 10k Ohms unbalanced Max Input Level +12 dBu Frequency Response +0, –0.5 dB 20 Hz - 20kHz, ref. 1kHz THD+N <.009% A/D, 20Hz - 20kHz INSTRUMENT INPUT Connectors Impedance Max Input Level Frequency Response THD+N Crosstalk

One ¼" mono jack 1 MΩ unbalanced +19 dBu +0, –0.25 dB 20 Hz - 20kHz, ref. 1kHz <.0125% A/D <–74dB any input or output to any recording channel, 20Hz20kHz <–95dB at 1kHz typical

One ¼" mono jack 1 MΩ unbalanced +8.5 dBu +0, –0.25 dB 20 Hz - 20kHz, ref. 1kHz <.0125% A/D <–74dB any input or output to any recording channel, 20Hz20kHz <–95dB at 1kHz typical

One ¼" mono jack 1 MΩ unbalanced +8.5 dBu +0, –0.25 dB 20 Hz - 20kHz, ref. 1kHz <.0125% A/D <–74dB any input or output to any recording channel, 20Hz20kHz <–95dB at 1kHz typical

Section:

08

LINE OUTPUTS Connectors Level Impedance Headphone Output

Two ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced +19 dBu maximum 110 Ohms One ¼" stereo jack 100mW per channel @ 50 Ohms

LINE OUTPUTS Connectors Level Impedance Headphone Output

Two ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced +16 dBu maximum 1k Ohms bal, 500 Ohms unbal. One 1/8" stereo jack 25mW per channel @ 50 Ohms

LINE OUTPUTS Connectors Level Impedance Headphone Output

Two ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced, Two RCA jacks +16 dBu maximum 1k Ohms bal, 500 Ohms unbal. One 1/8" stereo jack 20mW per channel @ 50 Ohms

DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT Connectors Dual RCA phono Format S/PDIF 24-bit D/A - A/D Sample Rate 44.1kHz or 48kHz, determined by DAW DYNAMIC RANGE 20Hz-20kHz A/D (24 Bit) 104 dB typical, A-weighted D/A (24 Bit) 105 dB typical, A-weighted A/D/A (24 Bit) 103 dB typical, A-weighted Analog Path 118 dB typical, A-weighted CONTROL INTERFACE USB Version 1.1, Type B socket; 1.1 hubs are not supported MIDI In/Out 5-pin DIN GENERAL Power Size (W/H/D) Weight

DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT Connectors N/A Format N/A D/A - A/D Sample Rate 44.1kHz or 48kHz, determined by DAW DYNAMIC RANGE 20Hz-20kHz A/D (24 Bit) 96 dB typical, A-weighted D/A (24 Bit) 100 dB typical, A-weighted A/D/A (24 Bit) 95 dB typical, A-weighted Analog Path 109 dB typical, A-weighted CONTROL INTERFACE USB Version 1.1, Type B socket; 1.1 hubs are not supported MIDI In/Out 5-pin DIN GENERAL Power Size (W/H/D) Weight

DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT Connectors N/A Format N/A D/A - A/D Sample Rate 44.1kHz or 48kHz, determined by DAW DYNAMIC RANGE 20Hz-20kHz A/D (24 Bit) 96 dB typical, A-weighted D/A (24 Bit) 100 dB typical, A-weighted A/D/A (24 Bit) 95 dB typical, A-weighted Analog Path 109 dB typical, A-weighted CONTROL INTERFACE USB Version 1.1, Type B socket; 1.1 hubs are not supported MIDI In/Out 5-pin DIN GENERAL Power Size (W/H/D) Weight

PS0913-B 9VAC adapter requires 18 Watts @ 120V 4.625" W x 7.25" H x 7.75" D (118mm x 184mm x 197mm) 2 .65 lbs. (1.2 kg)

USB Bus-powered 3.4" W x 6.5" H x 6.5" D (86mm x 165mm x 165mm) 1.92 lbs. (0.86 kg)

USB Bus-powered 6.75" W x 1.6" H x 6.5" D (171mm x 40mm x 165mm) 1.1 lbs. (0.49 kg)

All specifications subject to change

Page 391

FIREWIRE

RECORDING INTERFACES

I•O FW810S
With a wealth of features – including dbx® 63V high-voltage, ultra-low noise mic preamp’s, PantheonTM II reverbs, and a powerful hardware mixing console with integrated dbx dynamics (compressor, gate, limiter) – the Lexicon® I·O FW810S is more than just an 8-in, 10-out FireWireTM audio interface. It’s a pro recording studio contained in a single rack unit. With built-in dbx Type IVTM conversion, your digital recordings will preserve their dynamic range even when levels get too high. Select one of nine hardware monitor reverb types to dial in the sound of your sub-mix. You can even save and load up to five monitor mixes – one for the main control mix, and up to four for individual band members. This FW810S does all the processing, so when you’re finished recording you can mix and fine tune your productions in real time with zero latency.

Section:

08
I•O FW810S KEY FEATURES 0 FireWire 400
connection to DAW rates, 24-bit resolution inputs on the rear panel for mic/line inputs

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 392

2 XLR and ¼" combijacks accept mic, line, or instrument inputs

8 gain control knobs with +48V phantom power indicator LEDs dbx® Dynamics indicator LEDs S/PDIF In/Out MIDI In/Out FireWire® 400 ports Stereo main (control room) outputs
8 analog TRS outputs

Channel Input LEDs with integrated dbx® Type IV™ Conversion

High output headphone jack

Front panel level control

Standard IEC line cord

6 XLR and ¼" combi-jack balanced mic/line inputs

0 5 unique stereo

0 44.1 to 96kHz sample 0 6 analog combi-jack

monitor mixes using all 10 analog channels with up to 4 adjustable parameters ultra-low noise mic pre’s on all 8 channels (compressor, limiter, gate) and EQ on all 8 channels

0 9 monitor reverb types

0 dbx 63V high-voltage,

0 2 front panel combiYou also get the benefit of Lexicon’s world-class reverbs with the Pantheon II VST/AU reverb plug-in. Featuring many of the same algorithms that can be found on legendary recorded music and movie soundtracks, Pantheon II delivers mega-studio quality signal processing to your home, with 6 reverb types and 35 factory presets. Each reverb type has 16 editable parameters to let you create your own variations on the legendary “Lexicon Sound.”

jacks accept mic, line, or instrument signals (7.1 surround capable) and stereo main (control room) outs conversion feature emulates tape saturation at high levels

0 dbx dynamics

0 8 analog TRS outputs

0 Software suite includes
Steinberg® Cubase® LE, Toontrack® EZdrummer® Lite, XILS3 SE Software and Lexicon Pantheon II VST/AU reverb plug-in and Mac® platforms

0 dbx® Type IV™

0 Supports Windows® 0 Pro Tools® 9 & 10
Compatible

0 Zero latency hardware
mixer

RECORDING INTERFACESS

FIREWIRE

The powerful hardware mixer lets you easily route signal paths and apply real-time dynamics (compressor, limiter, gate) and EQ adjustments. Create your sub-mixes, choose your monitor reverb type, and start tracking.

I•O™ FW810S Specifications
MICROPHONE INPUTS Connectors Female XLR Pin 2 Hot Impedance 3k Ohms balanced Phantom Power +48 Volt Gain +55 dB EIN (150Ω source) -127 dB @ 55 dB gain typical -130 dB @ 55 dB gain typical A-weighted Max Input Level +8 dBu Frequency Response +/−1.5 dB, 20Hz - 20kHz THD+N <0.02%, 20Hz - 20kHz <0.002%, 1kHz, -6 dBu LINE INPUTS Connectors

Mixer Window

¼” TRS balanced or unbalanced Impedance 20k Ohms balanced 13k Ohms unbalanced Max Input Level +22 dBu Frequency Response +/−1.5 dB, 20Hz - 20kHz THD+N <0.02%, 20Hz - 20kHz <0.002%, 1kHz, +18 dBu INSTRUMENT INPUT Connectors Impedance Max Input Level Frequency Response THD+N LINE OUTPUTS Connectors Level Impedance Headphone Output

Harman Pro Group | 2013

¼” TS unbalanced 500k Ohms +10 dBu +/−2.5 dB, 20Hz - 20kHz <0.08%, 1kHz, +4 dBu

Section:

Dynamics Window

EQ Window

Steinberg®

is a world leader

¼” TRS balanced or unbalanced +20 dBu maximum 32 Ohms balanced 16 Ohms unbalanced ¼” stereo jack, 250mW per channel @ 50 Ohms

08

in computer-based recording. From the first idea to complete compositions, Cubase® is the production suite of choice for musicians and producers looking for a creative way to realize their projects. Steinberg’s intuituve cross-platform Cubase LE features 48 audio and 64 MIDI tracks with full automation, 2 inserts and 4 aux sends per channel, up to 8 VST instruments, and supports VST System Link and ReWire 2. Cubase LE communicates seamlessly with the Lexicon USB I/O mixers through our custom-written ASIO drivers to achieve a completely integrated, easy-to-use recording solution that includes all of the modules that you need to track, edit and mix your masterpiece.

DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT Connectors Dual RCA phono Format S/PDIF 24-bit D/A - A/D Sample Rate 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, or 96kHz determined by DAW DYNAMIC RANGE 20Hz-20kHz A/D (24-Bit) 110 dB typical, A-weighted D/A (24-Bit) 110 dB typical, A-weighted A/D/A (24-Bit) 108 dB typical, A-weighted CONTROL INTERFACE FireWire 2 IEEE 1394 FireWire 400 ports MIDI In/Out 5-pin DIN GENERAL Power Size (W/H/D) Weight

Power adaptors available for 100–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 15 Watts 19” W x 1.7” H x 10.5” D 7.7 lbs.

All specifications subject to change

Page 393

MX

REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS

You Don’t Follow The Crowd. You Play To Them.

Section:

08
MX SERIES PROCESSORS

Harman Pro Group | 2013

The MX series adds world-renowned Lexicon reverbs and effects to your studio recordings and your live performance. Multiple processors let you combine different reverbs and effects to suit your needs. Multiple effects routing options (easily configured on the front panel) and MIDI In and Thru make each MX unit a very versatile addition to any rack. All parameters of every reverb, delay and dynamic effect are available inside any ® VST or AU compatible DAW program ™ via USB. The included MX-Edit Librarian software lets you store and manage your presets from your computer as well.

Page 394

REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS

MX

MX400/MX400XL
Four processors let you add dual stereo or true surround effects to your recordings. The built-in LCD display and front-panel parameter adjustment knobs make selecting and editing presets extremely easy. The MX400 features two ¼" output pairs, two ¼" input pairs, and dual S/PDIF I/O; the MX400XL features two XLR input pairs, two XLR output pairs, and dual S/PDIF I/O. Both models include seven effects routing options and 24-bit 44.1/48kHz digital sample rates.

Input gain level controls Dual stereo Gain LED ladders

Configuration LEDs

Main LCD screen shows routing configurations, program names, effects, parameters, and system settings

Three parameter Effect Bypass Page Select Program indicator Program/Load selects factory or user presets knob for effect adjustment knobs Store User presets and system Tempo button menu selection manually sets Program Bypass delay times ¼" TRS balanced / unbalanced outputs (MX400XL) XLR balanced outputs ¼" TRS balanced / unbalanced inputs (MX400XL) XLR balanced inputs

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Standard IEC line cord

Footswitch jack USB to your computer MIDI In and Thru

Dual S/PDIF digital inputs and outputs

Section:

MX300
The MX300 features two processors, so you can apply two effects simultaneously or combine different effects in one of five routing options. The MX300 also includes stereo XLR inputs and outputs as well as ¼" TRS inputs and outputs for greater versatility. Dedicated parameter knobs and an LCD screen make preset selecting and editing extremely easy, on a dark stage or in the recording studio.

08

Dual stereo gain LEDs Input gain level control

Configuration LEDs

Main LCD screen shows routing configurations, program names, effects, parameters, and system settings

Three parameter Effect Bypass Program indicator Program/Load selects Page Select factory or user presets knob for effect adjustment knobs Store user presets and system Tempo button menu selection manually sets Program Bypass delay times

Standard IEC line cord

Footswitch jack USB to your computer MIDI In and Thru

S/PDIF digital input and output

¼" TRS balanced / unbalanced outputs and XLR balanced outputs

¼" TRS balanced / unbalanced inputs and XLR balanced inputs

Page 395

MX

REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS

MX200
With two processors, the MX200 lets you apply or combine two reverbs or effects to your recording at the same time, in one of four routing options. The front panel Matrix displays which reverbs and effects are active, and all editing functions require only a single button push or turn of a knob. Independent controls for each processor/ effect provide instant access and control over parameters for the selected effect. The Audition button plays one of five digitally recorded audio samples through the selected effects to audition their settings without the need for an external audio source.

Section:

08
REVERBS
Small Hall Large Hall Surround Hall Small Plate Large Plate Room Chamber Gated Reverse Vocal Hall Vocal Plate Drum Hall Drum Plate Ambience Studio Arena Spring 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 396

Input gain level control Reverb Wet/Dry mix knobs

Active Reverb/Effect LED matrix Routing allows you to select one of four routing configurations Effect Select allows you to select from 32 reverbs and effects

Parameter adjustment knobs allow you to refine each of your selected reverbs/effects

Tempo button Effect Bypass manually sets Store User presets delay times Program indicator ¼" TRS balanced / unbalanced outputs

Program/Load selects factory or user presets Audition previews effect

9V AC Power Supply

Footswitch jack MIDI In and Thru USB to your computer

S/PDIF digital input and output

¼" TRS balanced / unbalanced inputs

MX200 MX300 MX400
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

MX processors include dbx Dynamics such as Compressor and De-Esser tools. They also share a suite of modulated effects that includes Chorus, Flanger, Phaser, Tremolo/Pan, Rotary, Vibrato, Pitch Shift, and Detune.
®

DELAYS
Studio Delay Mono Delay Digital Delay Tape Delay Pong Delay Mod Delay Reverse Delay 2-Tap Delay

MX200 MX300 MX400
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS

MX

MX Routing Configurations
*
Reverb Reverb Reverb

*

Reverb

Reverb

Reverb Reverb Reverb Reverb

Reverb

Reverb

*Configurations only available with MX400/MX400XL

MX400/XL Specifications
ANALOG AUDIO INPUTS Connectors Four ¼" TRS or XLR balanced or unbalanced Impedance 50k Ohms bal., 25k Ohms unbal. Input Level +4 dBu nominal, +24 dBu maximum 48kHz or 44.1kHz A/D Conversion 24-bit, 48kHz 128 x oversampling ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUTS Connectors Four ¼" TRS or XLR balanced or unbalanced Impedance 2k Ohms balanced 1k Ohms unbalanced Output Level +4 dBu or –10 dBV nominal (software adjustable), 24 dBu maximum 48kHz or 44.1kHz D/A Conversion 24-bit, 48kHz 128 x oversampling ANALOG AUDIO PERFORMANCE Frequency Response 10 Hz – 20kHz +0 dB/–0.5 dB THD+N <0.0019% 10Hz – 20kHz Dynamic Range >109 dB (A-weighted) A/A Crosstalk typical <–80 dB 20Hz – 20kHz DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT Connectors Dual RCA phono (S/PDIF) Format S/PDIF 24-bit Sample Rate 44.1 or 48kHz Processing Delay 3.7 ms @ 48 kHz Frequency Response 10Hz to 22kHz ±0.5 dB @ 48kHz CONTROL INTERFACE USB USB 1.0 for MX-EDIT™ Editor/Librarian and VST™/Audio Units plug-ins MIDI In/Out 5-pin DIN Foot Pedal ¼" phone jack GENERAL Power Size (W/H/D) Weight

MX300 Specifications
ANALOG AUDIO INPUTS Connectors Two ¼" TRS, Two XLR female Impedance 50k Ohms bal., 25k Ohms unbal. Input Level +4 dBu nominal, +24 dBu maximum 48kHz or 44.1kHz A/D Conversion 24-bit, 48kHz 128 x oversampling ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUTS Connectors Two ¼" TRS bal. or unbal. Two XLR male Impedance 2k Ohms balanced, 1k Ohms unbalanced ¼" only Output Level +4 dBu or –10 dBV nominal (software adjustable), 24 dBu maximum 48kHz or 44.1kHz D/A Conversion 24-bit, 44.1/48kHz 128x oversampling ANALOG AUDIO PERFORMANCE Frequency Response 10 Hz – 20kHz +0 dB/–0.5 dB THD+N <0.0019% 10Hz – 20kHz Dynamic Range >109 dB (A-weighted) A/A Crosstalk typical <–80 dB 20Hz – 20kHz DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT Connectors RCA phono (S/PDIF) Format S/PDIF 24-bit Sample Rate 44.1kHz or 48kHz 3.7 ms @ 48 kHz Processing Delay Frequency Response 10Hz to 22kHz ±0.5 dB @ 48kHz CONTROL INTERFACE USB USB 1.0 for MX-EDIT™ Editor/Librarian and VST™/Audio Units plug-ins MIDI In/Thru 5-pin DIN Footswitch ¼" phone jack GENERAL Power

MX200 Specifications
ANALOG AUDIO INPUTS Connectors Two ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced Impedance 20k Ohms balanced, 10k Ohms unbalanced Input Level +4 dBu nominal, +20 dBu max 48kHz or 44.1kHz A/D Conversion 24-bit, 48kHz 128 x oversampling ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUTS Connectors Two ¼" TRS balanced or unbalanced Impedance 2k Ohms balanced, 1k Ohms unbalanced ¼" only Output Level +4 dBu or –10 dBV nominal (software adjustable), 20 dBu maximum 48kHz or 44.1kHz D/A Conversion 24-bit, 44.1/48kHz 128x oversampling ANALOG AUDIO PERFORMANCE Frequency Response 20 Hz – 20kHz, ref. 1kHz +/–1 dB THD+N <0.007% 20Hz – 20kHz Dynamic Range >107 dB (A-weighted) A/A Crosstalk <-80 dB 20Hz – 20kHz DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT Connectors RCA phono (S/PDIF) Format S/PDIF 24-bit Sample Rate 44.1kHz or 48kHz Processing Delay 3.7 ms @ 48 kHz Frequency Response 10Hz to 22kHz ±0.5 dB @ 48kHz CONTROL INTERFACE USB USB 1.0 for MX-EDIT™ Editor/Librarian and VST™/Audio Units plug-ins MIDI In and Out/Thru 5-pin DIN Footswitch ¼" phone jack GENERAL Power Size (W/H/D) Weight

Section:

08

Harman Pro Group | 2013

117 VAC or 230 VAC, 18 Watts 19" x 1.75" x 7.25" (483 x 44 x 185mm) 5.8 lbs (2.6 kg)

Size (W/H/D) Weight

100–120 VAC 50/60Hz, 18 Watts 220–240 VAC 50/60Hz, 18 Watts 19" x 1.75" x 7.25" (483 x 44 x 185mm) 5.8 lbs (2.63kg)

9 VAC 1.3A 50/60Hz, 18 Watts 19" x 1.75" x 7.25" (483 x 44 x 185mm) 5.8 lbs (2.63kg)

All specifications subject to change

Page 397

PCM

REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS

New and Legendary Reverbs. Seamless Studio Integration.

Section:

08

Harman Pro Group | 2013

PCM SERIES PROCESSORS

The PCM92, PCM96 and the PCM96 Surround provide the professional quality mono, stereo and surround reverbs and effects that are respected and admired by pros and hobbyists alike. The PCM series features hundreds of presets based on the best algorithms in the business. You can also customize them all with pre-selected parameters near the surface, or go deep and modify elements at a microscopic level to realize your sonic vision.

Page 398

REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS

PCM

PCM96
The PCM96 powerhouse boasts a comprehensive selection of legendary Lexicon reverbs and effects, including the return of Lexicon’s prized Concert Hall reverb. Appearing for the first time are new Room and Hall algorithms, plus an assortment of new mono reverbs and effects. And selectable, reversible reflection patterns, multimode filters, and “infinity switches” provide additional new capabilities.

Stereo gain LED ladders

Main OLED screen shows routing configurations, program names, effects and parameters, system settings

Large navigation knob

Three parameter adjustment knobs

Store button Compare button Tap Tempo button

Compact flash preset storage

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Standard IEC line cord

FireWire 400 ports
®

Word clock input MIDI in, thru and out

Load button AES input/output XLR analog balanced inputs/outputs

Ethernet connections

Section:

MULTIPLE EFFECTS ROUTING OPTIONS

The PCM96 can be divided into four virtual machines and includes standard I/O and streaming plug-in configurations, providing arbitrary routing capability.
STANDALONE MODE ROUTING (Analog, Digital)
PCM96 KEY FEATURES

08
9 28 legendary Lexicon reverbs, room models, modulation, delay, and pitch effects
®

9 DAW automation through plug-in format
1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2

9 Quick softrow keys for fast navigation through complex algorithms 9 “Hardware Plug-In” feature with Mac VST® and Audio Units plug-in software 9 MIDI In, Out, and Thru 9 Compact Flash preset storage 9 compatible 9 32-bit floating point processing

Dual Super Mono Dual Super Mono

Super Stereo Super Stereo

Cascade Mono Cascade Mono

Cascade Stereo Cascade Stereo

Mono to Stereo Mono to Stereo

Mono In/ Combined Stereo Out Mono In/ Combined Stereo Out

PLUG-IN MODE ROUTING (FireWire)

1 1

1 1

2 2

1 1

2 2

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

1 1

2 2

3 3

9 Multiple sample rates: 44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96 kHz 9 +4 dBu or –10 dBV selectable input and output levels 9 External BNC Wordclock input

Super Stereo Super Stereo

Dual Stereo Dual Stereo

Super Mono Super Mono

Quad Mono Quad Mono

Mono+Stereo Mono+Stereo

Page 399

PCM

REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS

PCM96 Surround
Building on the success of the PCM96, the new PCM96 Surround offers more presets, more configuration options, and more inputs and outputs. The PCM96 Surround gives you industry standard reverbs and effects, with tremendous flexibility. Use the PCM96 Surround as a plug-in with your DAW, or keep it connected to your mixer. Either way, you have a multitude of configuration options to choose from, without having to move any cables. The PCM96 Surround is available with either 6 channels of XLR/AES inputs and outputs, or 2 DB25 6-channel analog I/O and 1 DB25 6-channel digital I/O. Both versions also feature MIDI, Wordclock, Ethernet, and FireWire®.

Section:

08

PCM96SUR-D

PCM96SUR-A

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 400

Surround gain LED ladders

Main OLED screen shows routing configurations, program names, effects and parameters, system settings

Large navigation knob

Three parameter adjustment knobs

Store button Compare button Tap Tempo button

Compact flash preset storage

Standard IEC line cord

FireWire 400 ports
®

Word clock input MIDI in, thru and out

Load button AES/EBU digital XLR balanced inputs/outputs

Ethernet connections

1 DB25 6-channel Digital AES I/O

2 DB25 6-channel Analog I/O

The PCM96 and PCM96 Surround come equipped with a software plug-in user interface that integrates seamlessly with your DAW, allowing you access to all adjustable parameters at the click of a mouse. All preset changes and corresponding parameter adjustments made in your DAW are instantaneously reflected in your hardware, and vice versa.

STEREO AND SURROUND REVERBS AND EFFECTS

Room Hall Chamber Random Delay Classic (Random Hall) Plate Dual Delay Ambience Resonant Chords Chorus/Flange Concert Hall Signal Generator VSO Pitch Multivoice Pitch

MONO REVERBS AND EFFECTS

Chamber Hall Plate Room Chorus/Flange Dual Delay Random Delay Random Hall Resonant Chords Signal Generator VSO Pitch Multivoice Pitch

REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS

PCM

PCM96 SURROUND KEY FEATURES PCM96 SURROUND KEY FEATURES

9 Seamless automation and control via Ethernet Available 5 6 channels of9XLR/AES in two models: inputs and outputs 9 Over 2200 factory presets, 5 6 channels of XLR/AES inputs and 5 2 DB25 6-channel analog outputs including recognizable classics from Lexicon's immense library I/O and 1 DB25 6-channel 5 2 DB25 6-channel analog of sounds digital I/O I/O and 1 DB25 6-channel 9 Hardware Plug-In capability digital 9 New Parallel Stereo and I/O inside Mac® VST®, Audio Surround configurations 9 New Parallel Stereo and Units, or RTAS software Surround configurations 9 50 legendary Lexicon 9 32-bit floating point processing reverbs, delays, Lexicon’s new Surround Room and 9 9 Sample modulation effects algorithm, used to generate a rates up to 96kHz 9 Available in two models: vast array of room-related effects Wordclock 9 External BNC 9 Lexicon’s new Surround Room for music and algorithm, used to generate a post 9 MIDI in, out, and thru vast array of room-related effects presets, 9 Over 2200 factory 9 1024 user presets for music and post including recognizable classics 9 Compact from 9 New Pitch algorithms Lexicon's immense library Flash for additional storage of sounds

Harman Pro Group | 2013

MULTIPLE EFFECTS ROUTING OPTIONS

In FireWire® mode or standalone mode, the PCM96 Surround can process up to six inputs and six outputs in the following configurations:
PLUG-IN MODE ROUTING (FireWire) STANDALONE MODE ROUTING (Analog, Digital)

Section:

08

1

1

2

1

2

1

2

3

4

1

2

1

3 2

1

21 3

4

11

11

1 1

2

Super Stereo

Dual Stereo

Dual Super Mono

Quad Mono

Dual Mono / Dual Super Single Mono Stereo

Quad Mono Super Stereo Super Stereo Two In/Four Out Four In/Four Out Two In/Five Out Mono In

Dual Stereo Six In/Six OutDual Stereo Five In/Five Out Mono In

1
1 2 1 2 11 2 2 3 4

3 4

1

2 1

3 2

4 3

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1 1

2

1

1

2

3 2

Dual Stereo

Dual Super Mono

Quad Mono Dual Super Mono

Quad Mono Dual Stereo Super Stereo Dual Mono / Super Stereo Two In/Four Out Four In/Four Out Two In/Five Out Mono In Single Stereo

Dual StereoSix In/Six Out Dual Mono / Five In/Five Out Mono In Single Stereo

Cascade Mono

Cascade Stereo

1 1 213243
4

3 4

1

1

2 1 1

1 1

2

3

1

1

1

1 2

1 1

2

1 1

2

3

1

2

2

3

Dual Mono Dual Stereo Super Stereo Six / Two In/Four Out Four In/Four Out Two Dual Stereo Five In/Five Dual Mono In/Six Out Cascade Out In/Five Out perQuad Quad MonoSuper Stereo Mono / Single StereoMono In Mono In Single Stereo Mono

Cascade Stereo

Mono to Stereo

Two In/Four Out Four In/Four Out Two In/Five Out

1 21 1
1

3
1

1

1

2 1 1 1 1 1

The PCM96 Surround can be divided into four virtual machines, each of which can run its own algorithm. This allows the signal from each input to be routed through a variety of algorithm combinations.
1

1 3 2

3 4

1

1

2

1

2

2

Dual Mono / Single Stereo

Cascade Mono

Casca Stere

1

1

2

1

1

1

2

3

Mono to Stereo

Two In/Four Out Four In/Four Out Two In/Five Out

1

1

1

Five In/Five Out

Six In/Six Out

2

1 1

2

3

1

2

4

2

3

al Stereo Dual Stereo Six Two In/Four Out Four In/Four Out Two In/Five Out Five In/Five Out Dual Mono / Cascade In/Six Out Cascade Mono In Single Stereo Mono Stereo

Mono to Stereo

Two In/Four Out Four In/Four Out Two In/Five Out

Five In/Five Out

Six In/Six Out

Page 401

PCM

REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS

PCM92
The PCM92 utilizes the latest DSP technology and the finest collection of classic Lexicon algorithms to offer the ultimate processor for live performances and the recording studio. This powerhouse processor delivers 28 mono and stereo reverbs, delays, and modulation effects; flexible routing configurations; and a comprehensive library of over 1200 finely-crafted presets. The PCM92 also features 24-bit A/D-D/A conversion and 44.1 to 96 kHz sample rates to complement any console.

Section:

08
MULTIPLE EFFECTS ROUTING OPTIONS

Harman Pro Group | 2013
1 2

Stereo gain LED ladders

Main OLED screen shows routing configurations, program names, effects and parameters, system settings

Large navigation knob

Three parameter adjustment knobs

Tap Tempo button Load button

Store button Compare button

Standard IEC line cord

Foot control and foot switch inputs Ethernet connections

Word clock input MIDI thru, in and out AES input/output XLR and ¼” TRS analog balanced outputs XLR and ¼” combi-jack balanced inputs

The PCM92 can be divided into three virtual machines which allow the signal from each input to be routed through a variety of algorithm combinations
ROUTING OPTIONS (Analog, Digital) PCM92 KEY FEATURES

1 1 2 1 2

3 4

1

1

2

1

2

3

9 28 Signature Lexicon reverbs, 2 delays and modulatioin effects 9 Comprehensive library of over 1200 finely-crafted studio presets

Dual Super Mono

Super Stereo

Cascade Mono

Cascade Stereo

Mono to Stereo

9 Full system configuration and control with Mono In/ System Architect Combined Stereo Out 9 44.1 to 96 kHz sample rate 9 Ethernet connectivity 9 MIDI In, Out, and Thru

1

2 1

1

2
3

3

4

1

1

12

1

1 2

1 22

3

4

11

2

2 3

9 Foot controller inputs make 3 it easy to1 2 change presets and adjust parameters during live performances. 9 32-bit floating point processing

1 2

3 4

1

2

de per o

Mono to Quad Mono Super Super Stereo Super Mono In/ StereoStereo Dual Stereo Stereo Combined Stereo Out Mono In

Dual Super MonoStereo Quad Mono

Dual Stereo Mono+Stereo Dual Mono / Cascade Mono In 9 High-resolution OLED display Mono Single Stereo

Cascade Stereo

2

Page 1 2402 3

4

1

2

3

REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS

PCM

PCM92 Specifications
ANALOG AUDIO INPUTS Connectors Two XLR / ¼" TRS combi-jack balanced inputs Impedance 20k Ohms balanced Input Level +4 dBu mode; +20dBu max -10 dBv mode; +8.2dBu max Type IV mode; +26dBu max ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUTS Connectors Two male XLR and two female ¼" TRS Impedance 30 Ohms balanced (elec.) Output Level +20 dBu DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT Connectors One female XLR input and one male XLR output Format AES/EBU balanced Sample Rate 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz Conversion 24-bit A/D; 24-bit D/A AUDIO PERFORMANCE Frequency Response (96kHz) 20Hz - 20kHz ±.25dB 20kHz to 40kHz, +0/-3dB THD <0.003%, 20Hz - 20kHz @ 4dBu Dynamic Range >112 dB unweighted, 115 dB A-weighted Crosstalk (1kHz) <-90dB, 20Hz to 20kHz @+20dBu input Internal Audio DSP 32/64-bit floating point SYNCHRONIZATION TTL Word Clock Input 75 Ohms, BNC CONTROL INTERFACE MIDI In/Thru/Out 5-pin DIN’s Footswitch ¼" TRS connector for independent momentary footswitches Foot Controller ¼" TRS connector for foot pedal 100 Ohms – 10k Ohms (Impedance) GENERAL Power

PCM96 Specifications
ANALOG AUDIO INPUTS Connectors Two XLR balanced Impedance 20k Ohms balanced Input Level +4 dBu mode; 20 dBu max. -10 dBv mode; 8.21 dBu max. Type IV mode; +26 dBu max. ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUTS Connectors Two XLR balanced (elec.) Impedance 30 Ohms balanced Output Level +4 dBu mode; +20 dBu max. -10 dBv mode; 8.21 dBu max. DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT Connectors XLR I/O Format AES/EBU balanced Sample Rate 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz Conversion 24-bit A/D; 24-bit D/A AUDIO PERFORMANCE Frequency Response 20Hz - 20kHz ± .25dB 20Hz - 40kHz +0/-3dB <0.002%, 20Hz - 20kHz @ +4dBu THD Dynamic Range D/A: >112dB typical, 20Hz - 20kHz A/D: >112dB typical, 20Hz - 20kHz A/A: >111dB typical, 20Hz - 40kHz Crosstalk -90dB, 20Hz to 40kHz Internal Audio DSP 32/64-bit floating point CONTROL INTERFACE Memory Cards Compact Flash Type I Format Supports all size memory cards MIDI In/Thru/Out 5-pin DIN’s Footswitch N/A Foot Controller N/A GENERAL Power

PCM96 Surround Specifications
ANALOG AUDIO INPUTS [PCM96SUR-A] Connectors 25-pin Dsub female connector Impedance 20k Ohms balanced Input Level +4 dBu mode; 20 dBu max. -10 dBv mode; 8.21 dBu max. ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUTS [PCM96SUR-A] Connectors 25-pin Dsub female connector Impedance 30 Ohms balanced Output Level +4 dBu mode; +20 dBu max. -10 dBv mode; 8.21 dBu max. DIGITAL INPUT AND OUTPUT Connectors XLR 3/3 I/O [PCM96SUR-D] 25-pin Dsub female connector [PCM96SUR-A] Format AES/EBU balanced Sample Rate 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz Conversion 24-bit A/D; 24-bit D/A AUDIO PERFORMANCE Frequency Response 20Hz - 20kHz ± .15dB 20Hz - 40kHz ± .5dB <0.002%, 20Hz - 20kHz @ +4dBu THD Dynamic Range D/A: >112dB typical, 20Hz - 20kHz A/D: >112dB typical, 20Hz - 20kHz A/A: >111dB typical, 20Hz - 40kHz 112 dB unweighted, 115 dB A-weighted Crosstalk -75dB, with a +20 dBu signal Internal Audio DSP 32/64-bit floating point CONTROL INTERFACE Memory Cards Compact Flash Type I Format Supports all size memory cards MIDI In/Thru/Out 5-pin DIN’s Footswitch N/A Foot Controller N/A GENERAL Power

Section:

08

Harman Pro Group | 2013

Size (W/H/D) 100–240 VAC 50/60Hz, <14 Watts Automatic switching, (3-pin IEC connector) 19" W x 1.75" H x 9.5" D (483 x 45 x 241.3 mm) rack mount standard 8 lbs (3.63 kg) 59° to 95°F (15° to 35°C) 75% relative humidity max.

Size (W/H/D)

Weight Operating Temp. Maximum Humidity

100–240 VAC 50/60Hz, 20 Watts Automatic switching, (3-pin IEC connector) 19" W x 1.75" H x 12.5" D (483 x 45 x 318 mm) rack mount standard 8.65 lbs (3.93 kg) 59° to 95°F (15° to 35°C) 75% relative humidity max.

Size (W/H/D)

Weight Operating Temp. Maximum Humidity

Weight Operating Temp. Maximum Humidity

100–240 VAC 50/60Hz, 26 Watts Automatic switching, (3-pin IEC connector) 19” W x 1.75” H x 16” D (483 x 45 x 406 mm) rack mount standard 14.25 lbs (4.48 kg) 59° to 95°F (15° to 35°C) 75% relative humidity max.

All specifications subject to change

Page 403

N AT I V E P L U G - I N S

REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS

A Generation Redefined. The Legacy Continues.

Section:

08

Harman Pro Group | 2013
Page 404

NATIVE PLUG-IN PROCESSORS

Hearing is believing. Select one of the superb reverb plug-ins and turn off the lights. You’ll hear Lexicon’s proprietary modeling create an unbelievable acoustic environment. Hear for yourself how large and enveloping the sweet spot is, how stable the imaging, and how realistic the sound. You’ll immediately understand how the PCM Total Bundle and the LXP Native Reverb Bundle have set a new standard for the next generation of sound professionals.

REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS

N AT I V E P L U G - I N S

Section:

08

Harman Pro Group | 2013

MPX NATIVE REVERB PLUG-IN
The MPX Native Reverb Plug-In brings the classic Lexicon sound to aspiring producers and engineers that are ready to elevate their mix. For over 40 years Lexicon has been the reverb of choice for the top studios, and now it can be yours. With 7 different reverb types and over 100 studio-quality presets, the MPX Native Reverb Plug-In will undoubtedly take your mix to the next level.

REVERB TYPES
Room Large Plate Small Plate Large Chamber Small Chamber Large Hall Small Hall

Page 405

N AT I V E P L U G - I N S

REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS

Section:

08

Harman Pro Group | 2013

LXP NATIVE REVERB BUNDLE
Refreshingly remarkable. The LXP Native Reverb Bundle brings an inspiring quality to your mixes. These reverbs are not trying to imitate the real thing, they are the real thing. All four plug-ins are based on uniquely complex algorithms, and each comes with an array of presets to suit your needs. You can tailor each plug-in to your preference or let Lexicon’s trained-ear professionals do the work for you. Place just one instance of the LXP Native Reverbs into your mix, and you will soon appreciate what distinguishes Lexicon from all others.

REVERB BUNDLE
Room Plate Chamber Hall

Page 406

REVERB/EFFECTS PROCESSORS

N AT I V E P L U G - I N S

Section:

08

Harman Pro Group | 2013

PCM TOTAL PLUG-IN BUNDLE
For the first time in over 40 years, Lexicon is offering that same distinctive, smooth, rich “Lexicon Sound” as a collection of native plug-ins. The PCM Total Bundle includes everything in both our award winning Native Reverb Bundle as well as all of the newly released Native Effects Bundle. The PCM Total Bundle delivers an artful blend of 14 legendary Lexicon reverb and effects plug-ins with hundreds of the most versatile and finely-crafted studio presets. A powerhouse bundle of heritage and innovation, the PCM Total Bundle is the ultimate studio plug-in package for creating professional, inspirational mixes within popular DAWs such as Pro Tools , Logic , Nuendo or any other RTAS , AudioUnit , or VST compatible host. Designed to bring
® ® ® ® ®

EFFECTS BUNDLE
Pitch Shift MultiVoice Pitch Chorus Resonant Chords Random Delay Dual Delay Stringbox

REVERB BUNDLE
Vintage Plate Plate Hall Room Random Hall Concert Hall Chamber

unsurpassed sonic qual